Skip to main content

Full text of "The American journal of science and arts"

See other formats 


Ce ee A bee Ae eae ad 
PA tae eae RO ri} 
Pa CSC RCC Uh OO RO Ye 

ee er aoe Se ee Se Re 
Peres earn ter a Serie Re eee 
Cranes Oe ee Prairie vriinia ta eM eRe SW a A) 

COTS ROE IE MCE INCE Oe ACR RA AL 
ee ee SCAT Me We wn eR Yee 

4 


Wa 490 oe 
Pe et ee oe 
ran 


Ssgarry wa eye 
ny oh 54 DU 
van 


wey rey ey le ye ee ee 
Vd ee feet 
’ 


Par ee ebro ue 
COORGANISERS I SR a 
Peer Yara ie ir Brie i Se Ue Wee ee 
ele catalase iterated tty Viatetn eb as vie Sete seine Ae 
. Penney prawn ds \ bi ee ehh eae eG EMER 
’ OO Me aR a 
“ 


DOA Aaa 
ee) ter 
Pre ee YT) 


Cer ee 
CC Se 


oat 
v4 tren Phi eee ‘ theres 
whine Ved tay Nite eet w eli Nccte tout Ort etn ap armasuiti weep wma aetep aif 
+ ee Feria Sr a eT Se 

bee se Bog ge Rin Are Gn At Be RDF Wea Sth DDR a 


ee Or eC se Me CR ea 

ree arenes PA ee a ae lath Webeahrit 

VAT RR A TA Tr ethota ee he 

Ae ee mea em ibe be Lee eh meee 

Hes ae is be ett) uaa) 
+ 


ere STOR ry oe eo 
MEARE eR RR vt 
Pergre bathe 


suey yet 
pew ned en 
rane 


Aerie et Ses Ye 
Md gem aey 905 thy 
Pe yr Pode pot ' 
iA Se ty tart ee TN 
ae eee Bee wes 
ye a he Dek PS ae bE eo Pe ell beiera 
JERUSALEM a 
yep be Fee hel anie 
, RNA OnK A SCIENCE AD 
OS ee eee RO oe 
vrevpe ye dee ugn PSTN See AO LA 
’ SA Cn aA i ) emg Nigh og bent sn lg ib 

‘ \ ‘ The Ce OM Mr a 


phe he beep aby 
myry ey Were i ee ey tant 
ie ylergas ab ek i Nee Pa A Al rt an ate 
1 rene t yeyewrvyorha My Wy ta ecibeActe hay Bed are Gaq atid byt 
vy) Aine tone rye eb ae Se PL Meg ait th ait 
—r ere , Veupnate te Vis or ¢ SOU A A gett Foibe mc Ob Sb eTbeN ht a e 
ry sip ets vu tnaea ver ee rs ee A a ee eek oa £8 HAA A Pewee hr 
pyea tree ey ed a EE ee COR TUT be Piha A A dee EB at tee ose 
ara yu ey UP ee aay ee hb kot OP Pw Fy ee Mee NE Vibe ym Nate 
COS Wee ele ee i ee MR De kd 


Sey yey a eae tes Sarah Wer | 
MN ey hea ‘ al DCRIOE 1 ONCAIEUN Sn ee AUN RCL A AL a eC 
Vet ec he ee ee epee ee AD beh DORN MAS Cie 
Cn an a Oe es ; ey be te ON AND WD etek teks eae 

wb 


‘ Vy by yoo ' 
oh CO Cm Ama Oe 
‘ pots ’ n Cee ee ' 
‘ muy ee eae ey pry she PO Me gel 
1 oe vouged FR toh ne DBT Degh ay 
of ‘ ' POET) ET PG a) Us teNalh bedat | 
7 Da ‘ os V8 “ Way bra Mele Ny 
‘ ; A yebty 
eee, ’ ‘ p44 
verge P ‘ 
, Viet oar rd Vi ee sO ea eso) 
4 ' PODS Aa Te, ahh 
' : ae 
‘ ' 
' ' ty 
+ 
wt , 
' ' Lait 
‘ Le at Pa 7 
rows on ) 
rare) ets WANA a) 
27 ria 13 
fl pre tees AN 
F - t q 
bye ut A 
‘ . t 
d I i 
' - iad 
1 . af : 
. 1 ' i { a 
‘ +0 !. 
‘ ‘ im) ,y4 
‘ vid h t 
i 4 1 i555 
bhy fiw 1 
oa ¢ jaeta ‘ 
i i : P 1 
ae rio a ap ys bs 44 sy 4 H a tad J Be sala at Ay 
: bard dd vev : ) } i : : CA Tides Vika LTS \ fink A? 
; : ‘ f } E +} 3 t nese wat fe 
ey ' fai . t iA 
‘ + ye . : Vi + 
oa bee te tt CN Na alt 
fn ; : brad He herb Fab dat i de fh rh. 
PEAS 26 ol oe they Wed aT dtd ag 
i peel Peau ee Cia ts 
‘ “ ' ' HT tissack Vad EES 
oer ~ 4 ae x 7 ‘ DP 
i} fe : - te 
\ ’ et 
' > ipa onda PEE ase deo 00 3 
. oie ey Mo eit see ec 
: ere eee « ' eae jaa kd SRL 
H ced Ver hag deed did eed ig be 
sh owe +> « bid id PUES ral Rare 
on ee ‘ phy $2.44 id dep see 
+} . Pe if ig rm H > BAe db 
vy oe 4 ‘ a af Eas lata te a 
’ ee ‘ aa Avie 
Vie ee rit fay cane 
at > . . ir Lampe fae 
‘ ‘ ‘om 4 bit eh ed Ee ares 
We wl bes bined Etirer rnin 
‘ 4 a a LT da wevabia Pen icoelean year i 
eee aoe ‘ eae | ‘ Nie rine hae a Gk yt ee iadha es aed 
‘ i) ‘ SA eet gfe 
aae Std iweb de ' oie & + 


PT ray Dok Rep dase he ahi 
Bei Wd BAe ed aes x a 
eae Steel At bree alg 
A ve ree) 
Paatia rie DT Se MR OR PIE COOH IPE ES 
vy 5H Oy aasbide ee ert lh ibe g 
PAE, Me Bed bode ee 
LW Pt eG a ae MEET E a Ue ok 
Diase Seva ae Fedde aby de ise wae hast 
‘oir ay we Of thie 
be ee 
Yond gti od ah paride 
Li ds bap he Me beak ade 
We tah Oe Tn day 
y ple ba a hedbdeded Ble acy: 
o wut dee ii ee iy rte ek ue 
ee alate Te be Pareeane 
Fite oo 


esis spss 
we ” hig ans Us 


‘ Pepeaebot ean 
Cartas be d Bad ded 
Pd ede whi fog bh dey 


og i bik 
“ 


’ ‘ 
NICS MPO Te on oe 


. CT ere athe 
a Sau Yak + Ry * 
ak lye 

eh Wage 


” ae 
fib shh vale ie ea br sha ree 


wea 


nu 
ve iF 


eo Ce 
ince 4 Deeb Pe ehh ae Ho es Bie bs 
teat BOE MRK nk RE a arr it 
oe i aie ‘ ead TP era any 


Mig vebea 


hen 
{ fi renee a: an 
Ne ve yaw 4 fodotub Ae en OO CL ical 
ia ‘4 Nae EDT ot } eer} PR Fy i oaaeut ati age ike 
46 4 i r a “ AW) sis Pere Winebed® i 
: 4 ORS CAND th 
rover! 


a eb th 
al aw Poa ree cm ay Ce aantale 
ei new ta ‘ heen i or) PRR Ree ay, igh gad dit 
mre i) ny De Cane ete Pet le ded tte ht naps wie re 

a aeeiee ital Faye gets ei ay 
ob 


he ga Be beh het 
ena : 


Te me 
Weal Vide Ail 4 
Cpt hie HPPA ih SATIN 
Fie te te 


Vib hacker a iu ped 
athe igh i A Bae 
4 wWraa &ieege 


it i 
aes 
. 
wi 
j 
y 
f i * 
N i 
fa 
Winey i As 
k i 
i) 
« 
: we 
A) eal eayey 88 
. ) 
WW 
fl 
‘ 
\ 
‘ 
t le 
i, i 
H it 


SOS, 73 a 


AMERICAN JOURNAL 


OF 


: SCIENCE AND ARTS. 


CONDUCTED BY 


BENJAMIN SILLIMAN, M.D. LL. D. 


Prof. Chem., Min., &c. in Yale Coll.; Cor. Mem. Soc. Arts, Man. and Com.; and 
For. Mem. Geol. Soc,, London; Mem. Roy. Min. Soc., Dresden; Nat. Hist. 
Soc., Halle; Imp. Agric. Soc., Moscow; Hon. Mem. Lin. Soc., Paris; 

Nat. Hist. Soc. Belfast, Ire.; Phil. and Lit. Soc. Bristol, Eng.; 

Mem. of various Lit. and Scien. Soc. in America. 


VOL. XXII.—JEEES, 1832. 


NEW HAVEN: 


Published and Suld by HEZEKIAH HOWE & Co. and A. H. MALTBY. 
Baltimore, E. J. COALE & J. 8. LITTELL.—Philadelphia, E. LITTELL and 


CAREY & HART.—New York, G. & C. & H. CARVILL.—Boston, HIL- 
LIARD, GRAY, LITTLE & WILKINS. 


PRINTED BY HEZEKIAH HOWE & CO. 


cee PRT 
I ee 


An INSTITGSS 
% 


& 
ry SS 


S 
Oe SU 
SE Marionay WE 


hie 


Ca 


Art. I. 


XIL. 


XII. 


XIV. 


XV. 


XVI. 


CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXIf. 


NUMBER I. 


Page. 


Prof. Hrrcncocx’s Report to the Government of Massa- 
chusetts on the Geology of that State, ° - 


. On the Hessian Fly; by Dr. Josern E. Muse, - 


Mathematical Papers; by E1izur Wricur, Esq. - 


. Description of the American Wild Swan, proving it to 


be a new species—Cygnus Americanus; by Joun T. 
Suareress, M. D. - = - u = 2 


. On the analogy which exists between the Marl of New 


Jersey, &c. and the Chalk formation of Europe; by S. 
G. Morrow, M. D., - - - = 3 a 


. Description of an instrument called the Steam Pyrome- 


ter; by Prof. Watrer R. Jounson, - > - 
On pure Chloric Ether; by Samven Gurnriz, - - 


. Steam Boats protected from the Effects of Lightning; by 


ALEXANDER Jones, M. D., - - - - - 


. Abstract of Meteorological Observations for 1831, taken 


at Marietta, Ohio; by Dr. 8. P. Hizwpreru, - - 


. Further Experiments on the Disinfecting Powers of In- 


creased Temperatures; by Witiiam Henry, M. D. 
F.R.S., &c. - = - = = = 2 


. Remarks upon the Natural Resources of the Western 


Country, - - - - - - - - 
On the Artificial Preparation of cold Medicinal Waters ; 
by Wittiam Meant, M.D., - - - - - 
On Central Forces; by Prof. THeonore Strona, - 
Experiments on the Expansion and Contraction of Build- 
ing Stones, by variations of temperature ; communica- 
ted by W. H.C. Bartuerr, - - - - - 
On two new acid compounds of Chlorine, Carbon, and 
Hydrogen; by Avcustus A. Hayes, - - - 
On a disturbance of the Earth’s magnetism, in connexion 
with the appearance of an Aurora Borealis, as observed 
at Albany, April 19, 1831; by Josep Henry, - 


83 


14] 


143 


[7107 


iv CONTENTS. 


MISCELLANIES.—DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN. 


- Page. 
1. Dr. Muse’s Vindication of his paper, page 71 of this No. 155 
2. On belts of evergreens, as skreens, for the garden, the orch- 
ard, vineyard, &c., - - - - - - - 158 
3. Spontaneous combustion, - - - - - - 161 
4. Preparation of chloric ether, - - - - - 163 
5. Bees, - 4 = = = ~ - = - - 164 
6. Trilobites, 4 = a “2 a 2 3 ¥ 165 
7. Diluvial scratches on rocks, - - - - - 166 
8. Mineralogy and Geology of Nova sine - ~ - 167 
9. Conchology, = = a s ns = 2 169 
10. A Manual of the Ornithology of the United States and Canada, 178 
11. Statistics of iron in the United States, - - - - 179 
12. Cabinet of minerals, &c., — - - - mk sik - 180 
13, 14. Historical and Philosophical Society of Ohio—Correc- 
tions in Hassler’s Logarithmic Tables, - - - 181 
15, 16. Notice of the tropical plant Guaco—Magnetism,  - 182 
17, 18. List of officers of the Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Philadelphia for the year 1832—-Amos Doolittle, the ear- 
liest American Enerayer, - - - - - 183 
19. Injury sustained by Dr. Hare from an accidental explosion of 
fulminating silver, - - = es = - = 185 
20. Abstract of a Meteorological Journal for 1831, kept at New 
Bedford, - - = = - - - 188 
21, 22, 23, 24, 25. Dr. Hare’s new process for obtaining silicon 
and boron—Greenstone dyke—Vol. IX of the Encyclope- 
dia Americana—Whirlwind storms—A report of observa- 
tions on the solar eclipse of Feb. 12, 1831. - - 189 
26, 27. Chloro-chromic acid—Effect of elasticity, - - 190 
FOREIGN. 
28. East Indian ferns, - - - - - - - 191 
CHEMICAL PHILOSOPHY. 
i. On the grease of wines, = - - = = Ps 192 
2, 3. Obesity—Premiums for chemical and medical discoveries, 194 
4. Process for hastening acetic fermentation and for preparing on 
a large scale, and in an economical manner, strong vine- 
gar in forty eight hours, - - - - - 195 
5. Nutritious quality of gelatine, —- - - - = 


197 


CONTENTS Vv 


CHEMICAL SCIENCE. 


Page. 
1. Robiquet on a new metallic dye, - - - - - 197 
2. Purple precipitate of silver, gold, &c. - - - 198 
3. On the manufacture of sulphuric ether, - - - 199 


MECHANICAL PHILOSOPHY. 


1. Remarks on the floating ice met with in remarkably low lati- 


tudes in the South Seas, - - - - - - 200 

2. Red beets, - - - - - - - - - 201 

3. Feeding of cattle, - - - - - - - 202 
STATISTICS. 

1. Academy of St. Petersburgh, - - - - - 203 

2. Astronomical memoranda, - - - - ~ - 204 
=—-O-—— 


Art. I. 


XIII. 


NUMBER ITI. 


On the Water Courses, and the Alluvial and Rock Forma- 
tions of the Connecticut River Valley; by Atrrep Smit, 205 


. Memoir of the Life of Tuomas Youne, M. D., F.R.S., &c. 232 
Ill. 


An Essay on the Chemical Nomenclature of Prof. Bren- 
ZELIUS, prefixed to his treatise on Chemistry. Trans- 
lated from the French, with notes, by Prof. A. D. Bacnr, 248 


. On the law of the partial polarization of light by re- 


flexion; by Davin Brewster, LL.D. F.R.S.L.&E., 277 


. Notice of new Medical Preparations; by G. W. Carrenter, 293 
. Meteorological Table; by Gen. Martin Fietp, - 298 
. Observations on the Primitive and other Boulders of 


Ohio; by Darius and Increase A. Larwam, - - 300 


. On the method of tracing oval arches from several cen- 


tres; by Epwarp Mitter, A. M., Civil Engineer, 303 


. On the Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore; 


by C. Kersten, of Freyberg. Translated from the 


German by Cuartes U. Sueparp, - - = 307 
. Description of the Nine Inch Conical Rain ve by S. 
De Wirt, mseeriieg WE Ee AH ater ee - 321 
An account of several descents in a Diving Bell, at Ports- 
mouth, N. H.; by the Rev. Timorny Atpen, - 325 


. On the Artificial Preparation of Cold Medicinal Waters ; 


by Wm. Meape, M. D. - - - - - 330 
On the Malaria of the Campagna di Roma, - 336 


vi CONTENTS. 


Pace. 
XIV. On Central Forces; by Prof. Tuzopore Strone, - 343 
XV. On the elevation required for rails on Rail Roads of a 
given curvature ; by J. Tomson, - - = 346 
MISCELLANIES——FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC. 
CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL SCIENCE. 
1. Ilicine—a remedy in intermittent fevers,  - - - 349 
2, 3. Fertilizing property of Sulphate of Lime—Composition 
of Gum, - - - - - - - - 350 
4. Hydruret of Sulphur, ~ - 351 
5, 6. Chemical Agency of Light—Splendid combuntien of hy- 
drogen gas under strong compression, - - 352 
7. Protoxide of Copper, - - - - - ~ 353 
8, 9. Estimation of the bleaching power of chloride of lime— 
Inflammation of gunpowder under water, * - - 354 
10, 11. Cause of Goitre—Memoir on the transference of pon- 
derable substances by electricity, - - - - 355 
12. Stature of the Human Race, - - - ~ - 357 
13, 14. New Machine—Large achromatic Telescopes of M. 
Cauchoix, - - - - - - - - 358 
15, 16. Preservation of plants during winter by spring water— 
French premiums, - - - - - - 359 
17. Influence of heat on magnetism, - - - - 361 
18. New experiment in Mechanics, - - - - 362 
19, 20. Respiration of Plants—Cultivation of the material used 
in the fabrication of Leghorn hats, - - - 363 
21. Non-vaporization of a liquid falling in small quantity on an 
incandescent metal, - - - - - - - 365 
22, 23, 24. New method of producing perspiration in Cholera 
Morbus—New Compost—New size for the Chain of 
Woven Cloth, - - - - - - - 366 
25, 26. French Ultramarine—Singular case of odoriferous ema- 
nations, - - - - - - Sy ae ie 368 
27. Gelatine of Bones, - - - - - - - 369 
28. New instruments for measuring heat, - - - 370 
29. Advantages of Bored Wells in communicating heat, - 373 
30. Limits of the Audibility of Sound, - - - - 374 
31, 32. On the Sleep of Plants—Shower of Flies. Singular ap- 
pearance of the Moon, - - - - - - 375 
33. Improved Blowpipe, - - - = = = 376 


CONTENTS. 


STATISTICS. 


1. On the law of increase in the human stature, - - 


2, 3. Longevity of trees—Connection between civilization and 


1, 


mental aberration, eS s us s a 


NECROLOGY. 


2. Frederick Philip Wilmsen—Edward Thomas, - - 


MISCELLANEOUS CONTRIBUTIONS; BY CHARLES U. SHEPARD. 


1, 2, 3. To destroy weeds in the alleys of gardens—Preserva- 


tive against flies, employed by the butchers at Geneva— 
Coloring materials suitable for confectioners and distillers, 


4, 5. To protect iron and steel from rust—A new plant which 


furnishes a wholesome and limpid water, - - 


6, 7, 8, 9. New species of plants discovered in Siberia—New 


method of transplanting trees—Imitation of platina—A new 
method of dyeing hats, - = = 2 


10, 11. Blue coloring matter extracted from the stem of the 


buck-wheat—Heating of water, = g 


12. The conversion of magnetism into electricity, - - 
13, 14, 15. New lamp—Pelokonite, a new mineral—Soda Alum 


of Milo, a sulphate of alumine, “ = e s 


16. Datholite and Iolite in Connecticut, < < z as 


benok 


Go 


4. 


OTHER NOTICES. 


. Notice of Eaton’s Geological Text Book, second edition, 
. Rational expressions for sines, tangents and secants, 
. Abstract of Meteorological Observations, made at Middletown, 


Monmouth Co., N. J. - - = 2 a : 
Treatise on Mineralogy ; by Cuarnzes U. Suerarp, - - 


5,6. West Chester County Cabinet of Natural Science—Destruc- 


tion of Birds by starvation, —- = 


APPENDIX. 


On the Production of Currents and Sparks of Electricity from 


Magnetism; by Prof. J. Henry, - = 2 
Notice of Electro-Magnetic Experiments, - 


Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New 


York, to the Legislature, March 1, 1832, - 


Vil 
Page. 


376 


379 


380 


381 


382 


383 


384 
386 


387 
389 


391 
392 


394 
395 


402 


403 
409 


415 


ERRATA. 


Page 74, note, line 1, for was read is ;—p. 224, |. 4 from top, omit superficial ;— 
p. 255, note, 1. 9 from bottom, for experiment read experiments ;—p. 259, note (0), 
for 33 read 34;—p. 274, note, bottom line, for call read calls. 


CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. 


Prof. Henry’s piece on the Aurora, p. 143, is taken from the report of the Re- 
gents of the University of the State of New York, to the Legislature of the same 
in 1832, which will soon be published.—Page 154, line 3 from the bottom, for eve- 
ning read evenings. 


** 


AMERICAN 
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE, &c. 


Arr. I1.—Report* on the Geology of Massachusetts; examined un- 
der the direction of the Government of that State, during the years 
1830 and 1831; by EKnwarp Hircucocx, Prof. of Chemistry 
and Natural History in Amherst College. 


Part I.—The Economical Geology of the State, with a Geological Map. 
To His Excrenuency Levi Lincoun, Esa. Gov. or MASSACHUSETTS, 


Havine in a good measure executed the commission received from 
your Excellency, bearing date June 25, 1830, and directing me to 
make a geological examination of the State; I beg leave to present 
you with the first part of my Report. 

My commission contemplates an exhibition of the different rock 
formations in the State, upon the map of the Commonwealth now in 
progress. But as it must necessarily be a period of considerable 
length before that work can be completed, I have constructed a-small 
map from such materials as already exist, and delineated upon it the 
various kinds of rock that prevail in the State. ‘These are shown by 
different colors and simple markings, easily understood by reference 
to the tablets on the lower part of the sheet. 

To avoid confusion, I have placed on this map only so much of 
topography and geography, as was absolutely necessary. All the 
mountains and smaller rivers, with the boundaries of the towns, have 
been omitted; the center of each town being indicated by a small 
circle. For the same reason, I have employed only six different 
colors to mark the rocks; although more than twenty kinds are rep- 
resented. But these, with a few exceptions, may be grouped togeth- 


*. Published in this Journal by consent of the government of Massachusetts, and 
intended to appear also in a separate form, and to be distributed among the members 
of the Legislature of the same State, about the time of its appearance in this work. 
It is, we believe, the first example in this country, of the geological survey of an 
entire State. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 1 


2 Geology of Massachusetts. 


er, as they are in nature, in a few general divisions; the rocks in 
each division being so intimately related, that in an economical point 
of view, they may be regarded as varieties ; although, in a scientific 
point of view, their differences are very important. All the rocks 
of a group have acommon color on the map; and the different sorts 
are delineated by means of dots, crosses, circles, &c. In short, it 
has been a great object with me, so to simplify the map as to ren- 
der it easily intelligible; while it exhibits all that is important to 
the practical man, as well as to the scientific enquirer. In the first 
part of my Report, I shall explain the different formations on the 
map, only so far as shall be necessary in illustrating our geology with 
reference to the useful arts; reserving the most important scientific 
remarks to a subsequent period. 

It will be seen that I have extended the map a short distance into 
the adjoining states. This was done chiefly with a view to exhibit 
certain beds of ore, or other interesting minerals, which occur just 
beyond our limits. Jn a statistical point of view, these are nearly as 
important as those found within the State; and for this reason I shall 
notice such minerals in my Report. 

In laying down the geology of the eastern part of Rhode Island, 
I have been much assisted by the communications of Col. Joseph G. 
Totten, of Newport. Iam not without an apprehension that the re- 
gion around Providence, particularly in Cumberland, will be found 
exhibited on the map somewhat incorrectly ; as I had not time, when 
passing over it, to unravel entirely to my satisfaction, the peculiar in- 
tricacy of its geology. In laying down the geology of Berkshire, I 
have been greatly aided by the geological map of that county, pub- 
lished a few years since by Professor Dewey. 

It has been my intention to give to each rock, precisely that rela- 
tive extent on the map, which it occupies on the earth’s surface. ‘To 
do this with perfect accuracy, over an extent of more than seven 
thousand square miles, would be an almost endless task: especially 
when we recollect, that over the greater part of the surface, the 
rocks are covered by loose soil; so that in some instances, no rock 
in place shows itself to the traveller, for an extent of thirty or forty 
miles. In such cases, indeed, this stratum of sand, clay, and gravel, 
has been exhibited on the map under the name of diluvium. Sul, 
under the most favorable circumstances for observation, the effort to 
give on a map the exact boundaries of each particular rock, must be 
regarded as only an approximation to the truth. Yet for all practical 
purposes, such approximation answers nearly as well as entire accu- 


Geology of Massachusetts. 3 


racy. IfI have not misunderstood my commission and instructions, 
I was to have principally in view, in my examinations, practical utility ; 
not neglecting, however, interesting geological facts, which have an 
important bearing upon science. Under such impressions I have 
gone over the State as rapidly as seemed to me consistent with the 
accomplishment of these main objects. In attempting to construct 
such a map as is appended, in the time that has been devoted to the 
survey, I am not without fears that I shall be thought to have aimed 
at too much; or that it will be supposed, little dependence can be 
placed upon it. Had I not previously become acquainted with the 
geology of nearly one half the State, from my own observation, or 
the published accounts of Professors Dewey, Webster, and the Da- 
nas, I should not have been able to accomplish this object, with any 
confidence in the correctness of the results. And as it is, ] am aware 
that the map may need several minor alterations ; though I feel quite 
confident of the correctness of its leading features. ‘To obtain such 
corrections before the completion of the contemplated map of the 
State, is one strong inducement, thus early, to present this Report, and 
the accompanying map. For, should the Report in any way be 
made public, I shall hope that gentlemen of intelligence, in different 
parts of the State, will do me the favor to communicate any errors, 
or omissions which they may notice. 

I propose to divide my Report into four parts. The first part will 
embrace the Economicat Grotoey of the State; or an account of 
our rocks, soils, and minerals, that may be applied to useful purposes, 
and thus become sources of pecuniary profit. 

The second part will embrace our TopocrapuicaL GroLoey; or 
an account of the most interesting features of our scenery. 

The third part will consist of our Screntiric Geouoey ; or an 
account of our rocks in their relation to science. 

The fourth part will consist of catalogues “ of the native miner- 
alogical, botanical, and zoological productions of the Commonwealth,” 
so far as they can be obtained; agreeably toa resolve of the Legis- 
lature, approved by your Excellency, February 2, 1831. Several 
gentlemen distinguished for their attainments in natural history, have 
generously offered to furnish these lists in these branches with which 
they are most familiar. 

To illustrate the first and third parts of the Report, 1 have in ac- 
cordance with directions from your Excellency, collected specimens 
of every variety of rock I could find in the Commonwealth; and in 
all cases where a rock is quarried, or might be quarried in several 


4 Geology of Jassachusetts. 


places, I have endeavored to obtain specimens from each locality. 
I have collected likewise, all the ores of importance found in the 
State, as well as the other simple minerals, which could be obtained 
without much difficulty.or delay. I did not suppose that my instrue- 
tions authorized me to be at much expense and trouble in procuring 
every rare mineral that has been described as occurring in the State; 
although this object may still be accomplished, if I have mistaken the 
intentions of the Government. The collection of specimens, which 
I have already made for the use of the Government, contains seven 
hundred and eighty individual pieces: and it is not yet completed ; 
so that I shall not be able to forward it with this part of my Report. 
I do not know to what use the Government intends to devote this col- 
lection. But supposing it would be placed in some public situation, 
in order to exhibit to the citizens the geology and mineralogy of the 
State, I have endeavored to obtain from all the important quarries, 
and beds, whence stones are obtained for the purposes of architect- 
ure, or ornament, specimens which would fairly exhibit the qualities 
and value of each. 

I have also in accordance with my instructions, endeavored to 
collect all the important varieties of rocks and minerals in the State, 
for the use of each of the colleges in the Commonwealth. 

I cannot hope to complete more than the first part of my Report 
the present season: since some further points remain for investiga- 
tion, before the third part can be properly finished. 

In presenting a view of our economical geology, I shall first make 
a few remarks upon the different soils found in the state, as connect- 
ed with the rocks over which they lie. And since it is an acknowl- 
edged fact, that all soils, had their origin in the disintegration, or de- 
composition of rocks, it might seem easy, at first thought, to ascer- 
tain the nature of the soil, if we do but know the integrant and constit- 
uent parts of the rock underneath it. Thus, in a soil lying above 
granite, we might expect that siliceous sand would he the predomi- 
nant ingredient; next, clay with small quantities of potash, lime, 
magnesia and iron; because these are the constituents of granite. 
But several causes so modify soils, as to render all conclusions of this 
kind extremely uncertzin. In the first place, the character of a soil 
depends more, in general, upon the nature and amount of the vege- 
table and animal matters it contains, than upon the nature of its other 
ingredients. And in the second place, the agency of running water, 
not merely of existing streams, but of mightier currents, to which 
the surface has been exposed in early times, has been powerful 


Geology of Massachusetts. 5 


in modifying the loose coverings of the rocks. ‘This aqueous agency 
has often covered one rock with the spoils of another; and some- 
times mixed together the worn off fragments of half a dozen, and 
accumulated them in immense quantities in particular districts. 
These circumstances have rendered the subject under considera- 
tion an extremely difficult one; and very few general principles 
have yet been settled concerning it. Indeed, so far as I know, little 
attention has been given to it in this, or other countries. Still, there 
_is such a thing as peculiarity of soil, occasioned by the peculiarity of 
the rock from which it principally proceeded. Ishall notice any pe- 
culiarities of this kind, that have struck me, in the soils of Massachu- 
setts; but I shall not enjoy the advantage of comparison, not having 
found more than one or two observations of a similar kind, made on 
the eastern continent. I shall begin with the stratum that lies above 
every other :—viz. 


Alluvium. 


In this part of my Report, I shall not enter into a systematic and 
minute description of the various formations represented on the ac- 
companying map. Such description belongs more appropriately to 
the scientific part. I shall here describe the different strata only so 
far as is necessary to the particular purpose I have in vie-v. 

Alluvium is that fine loamy deposit, which is yearly forming from 
the sediment of running waters, chiefly by the inundations of rivers. 
It is made up, of course, of the finest and richest portions of every 
soil over which the waters have passed. Hence alluvial meadows 
have always been celebrated for their fertility. No extensive allu- 
vial tracts occur in Massachusetts; although limited patches of this 
stratum exist not unfrequently along the banks of every stream, and 
with the adjoining elevated ground covered by wood and pasture, con- 
stitute not a few of the most productive farms in the State. Even 
where Deerfield river winds its way among the lofty and precipitous 
spurs of Hoosac mountain, which crowd so close upon the path as 
almost to throw it into the shade at noon-day, the traveller is sometimes 
agreeably surprised to see a luxuriant meadow open before him, re- 
warding the labors of some thrifty farmer. No alluvial tracts, how- 
ever, have been thought of sufficient extent to deserve » place on 
the map, except one or two salt marshes a little northeast of Boston, 
and several meadows along the Connecticut, Deerfield, and Housa- 
tonic. These of Longmeadow, Springfield, Northampton, Hadley, 
Hatfield, Deerfield, and Northfield, have long been celebrated for 


6 Geology of Massachusetts. 


their unrivalled exuberance and beauty. ‘Those in Great Barring- 
ton, and Sheffield are scarcely less inviting. 

There is one variety of alluvial soil in this State, that deserves 
more attention from our agriculturalists. J refer to those numerous 
uncultivated swamps, which have for ages been the reservoirs of rich 
soil, that has been washed thither by rains and brooks. ‘To reclaim 
them, does, indeed, require not a little labor and expense. But 
where the effort has been successful, the great and continued exuber- 
ance of these spots, has astonished and amply repaid the experiment- 
er. Even in those cases where they cannot be reclaimed, which I 
believe to be few, they ought at least to be converted into manure, 
and spread again over those higher regions around, from which, by 
slow aqueous agency, they have been washed away. Very many of 
the most barren regions in the State, might, by this means, be cloth- 
ed with fertility and plenty. 


Diluvium. 


This occupies more of the surface in Massachusetts than any oth- 
er stratum. It is not generally distinguished from alluvium ; but it is 
usually much coarser, being made up commonly of large pebbles, or 
rounded stones, mixed with sand and fragments of every size, which 
are often piled up in rounded hills to a considerable height; and under 
such circumstances, as preclude the probability that it could have 
resulted from existing streams. Indeed, it is spread over the highest 
mountains, wherever it could find a lodgment, and appears to have 
resulted from some powerful current of water, which, in early times, 
swept over the globe. 

In a scientific point of view, this is one of the most interesting for- 
mations in the State; and in the proper place, I shall exhibit several 
facts respecting its relations and mode of occurrence. But in an 
agricultural point of view, it is the least interesting of all our strata ; 
for of all the soils, it is the most unfriendly to rich vegetation. And 
as it is spread in a good measure over every kind of rock, it often 
prevents the formation of a good soil, from the decomposition of the 
rock. It is in general easily recognized in the most sterile places, 
in the form of low-rounded hills, composed almost entirely of coarse 
pebbles, ox-cobble stones, and sometimes larger rounded masses of 
rock, called bowlders, mixed with coarse sand, and covered with a 
stinted vegetation. It was evidently deposited by currents rushing vio- 
lently over the surface ; since only the coarser materials, which were 
driven along, were left; while the finer particles were kept suspen- 


Geology of Massachusetts. 7 


ded by the agitation of the waters. Some varieties of this diluvium 
may, indeed, be converted into a soil of tolerable richness by manur- 
ing it abundantly, and clearing away the stones. And generally too, 
the rains that have fallen on it for thousands of years, have conveyed 
its finer particles to the bottom of the vallies and cavities, with which 
this formation abounds, and these being mixed with much vegetable 
decayed matter, a soil of good quality is formed. So that within the 
limits of this formation, much good land occurs. But these fertile 
spots ought perhaps rather to be denominated alluvion than diluvium. 

Had diluvium been represented on the Map wherever it occurs, 
scarcely any other formation could have been exhibited. I have 
marked the region as diluvial, only where it occurs in such quanti- 
lies, as almost entirely to conceal every other stratum. It is most 
abundant in the south east part of the State; the counties of Plym- 
outh, Barnstable, Dukes, and Nantucket, being almost entirely over- 
spread by it; so that in the three latter counties, I scarcely found 
any rocks that did not appear to have been broken up and moved 
from their original bed. ‘Towards the extremity of Cape Cod, and 
on the island of Nantucket, this stratum is composed almost entirely 
of sand; which often constitutes those hills called downs or dunes, 
that travel inland by the action of winds, and do great mischief, by 
overrunning fertile spots; and on the eastern continent, by burying 
even villages and cities. The most effectual remedy that nature has 
provided against these encroachments, seems to be Beach Grass ;— 
(Arundo arenaria, Lin. Psamma arenaria, Beauv.) which is able, 
not only to fix itself on the most barren ridge of sand, but also in 
time to fix the sand itself. 

Diluvial tracts of considerable extent, exist in the county of Nor- 
folk ; in the Connecticut valley, and along the western base of Hoo- 
sac Mountain. None of them however are noticed on the Map. 
Most of the islands in Boston Harbor, are thus colored; also Plum 
island in Essex county, and a part of Malden and Chelsea. 


Tertiary Formations. 


The only difference between these and diluvium, is, that in diluvi- 
um, the sand, pebbles, and clay, are confusedly mixed together ; but 
in the tertiary formations, these materials are arranged in regular, 
and generally, in horizontal layers, one above another. Hence, 
when the sandy stratum happens to lie uppermost, the soil will be 
too sandy ; but if this be worn away, so that the clay lies at the sur- 


8 Geology of Massachusetts. 


face, the soil will be too argillaceous; or if the gravel stratum be ex- 
posed, the soil cannot be distinguished from diluvium. All these 
varieties of soil thus produced, may be seen in the valley of the Con- 
necticut ; where exists the most extensive tertiary formation in the 
State ; extending nearly to Middletown in Connecticut. Upon the 
whole, there is little to choose in an agricultural point of view, be- 
tween those tertiary formations that occur in Massachusetts, and our 
diluvium, although in England, some of these formations, that em- 
brace beds of loam and marl, are very productive. But it is doubt- 
ful whether our tertiary formations are identical with any in Europe. 
At any rate, ours contain no marl, and very little loam; and where 
the sand is uppermost, much of the soil corresponds to those unim- 
proved and unimprovable tracts, that occur in the immediate vicinity 
of the English metropolis—composed of what is locally denominated, 
bagshot sand. Where the clay predominates, however, cultivation 
and proper manure produce a valuable soil. Of this description are 
the small tertiary patches on the Map in the vicinity of Boston. 
There, in fact, the clay near the surface, appears generally to have 
been disturbed, and to be mixed with loam ; and it is doubtful wheth- 
er they ought not rather to have been colored as diluvium, than as 
tertiary. It ought also to be remarked, that the sandy plains of 
the Connecticut river, are very congenial to the growth of rye, and 
are very easy to cultivate. 


New Red Sandstone. 


This is found along Connecticut river. Although composed of 
numerous varieties of rock, the prevailing color is red; and the 
reddest varieties are most liable to decomposition; viz. a red slate 
and ared sandstone. No rock in the State disintegrates so easily as 
this; nor has any other so impressed its peculiar characters upon the 
soil. In Long Meadow, Wilbraham, Southwick, West Springfield, 
Easthampton, and Greenfield, it is common to see tracts of consider- 
able extent, where the diluvium and tertiary are chiefly swept away, 
exhibiting that reddish aspect, which in England, is so characteristic 
of soils derived from this formation. The Devonshire butchers, it is 
said, are able to distinguish the sheep raised on this soil, by the color 
of their fleece; and many local names in that country, originated 
from the same circumstance ; such as Rougemont Castle, in Exeter; 
Red Hill and Redford, in Be cuccksbiien ; Red Brook, in Glouces- 
tershire ; Red Mire, Rotherham, &c. in Goths nines 


Geology of Massachusetts. 9 


- The new red sandstone is said to be associated with some of the 
most fertile land in England ; especially that variety of the rock de- 
nominated red marle. It is distinguished for the excellence of its 
wheat, barley, beans and cider. The sand resulting from the de- 
composition of the coarser varieties of the rock, produces most of the 
rye grown in England. In that country, however, this formation con- 
tains not a little limestone, either in beds, or impregnating the sand- 
stone. Butin Massachusetts, the lime is almost entirely wanting : and 
hence probably it affords a soil inferior to that produced by the English 
rock. Still, with us its soil is of a superior quality. Its poorer varie- 
ties are excellent for rye. It is also peculiarly well adapted for fruit. 
The grass grown upon it is of a superior quality ; and it affords ex- 
cellent pasture. ‘The establishment of the Shakers in Enfield, Ct., 
exhibits a favorable example of the productiveness of this soil, when 
under a good cultivation. The black, white, and red oaks, with pig- 
nut hickory, chesnut, and soft maple, (cer rubrum,) are the forest 
trees most naturally produced upon this soil. 


Argillaceous and Flinty Slate and Graywacke. 


The -flinty slate is a variety of the argillaceous or roofing slate, 
which has been indurated, and it occurs only in small quantity at Na- 
hant. The argillaceous slate in the vicinity of Boston, is intimately 
connected with the graywacke, and probably ought to be considered 
only as a variety of that rock. It is considerably different from the 
argillaceous slate of Worcester, Franklin and Berkshire counties. 
Every variety, however, furnishes by decomposition, a dark colored 
soil, which, although somewhat apt to be cold, is capable of being 
made very fertile. ‘The central parts of Quincy, exhibit a favora- 
ble example of the soil lying above this rock. The range in Wor- 
cester county, is almost every where overspread with diluvium, and 
m Franklin and Berkshire, this rock is so limited in extent, as not 
very strikingly to develop the peculiarities of its superimcumbent 
soil. Professor Dewey, however, says, that in Berkshire “the argil- 
laceous district is more fertile and productive than any other portion 
of the section, except the alluvial.” 

Numerous varieties of rock, both in color and composition, are as- 
sociated under the term graywacke: from the fine dark colored shale. 
or slate, containing the anthracite coal of Rhode Island, to the coarse 
conglomerate, or plum pudding stone, of Roxbury, Dorchester, Digh- 
ton, Somerset, and Swansey. Most of these varieties, however, appear 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 2D 


10 Geology of Massachusetts. 


to furnish a soil of good quality, and sometimes of superior fertility. 
The island of Rhode Island exhibits the superiority of the soil of this 
formation, to that of several other islands that surround it. As we pro- 
ceed northerly, the great quantities of diluvium spread over the sur- 
face, obliterate, or greatly modify the soil peculiar to the formation. 
But in Dorchester, Roxbury, Brooklyn, Brighton, and Newton, it is 
exhibited to great advantage ; presenting the finest examples of ex- 
uberant farms and gardens in the Commonwealth; although we must 
not forget the very superior cultivation that has been bestowed upon 
that part of the State.. Still, such luxuriance as we there witness— 
such fine fruit especially—could not be produced without a soil nat- 
urally excellent. 


Tron Ore. 


No ore except iron occurs in sufficient quantity in the State to de- 
serve notice in an agricultural point of view. In the west part of 
Worcester County, the soil for a width of several miles across the 
whole State, is so highly impregnated with the oxide of iron, as to 
receive from it a very deep tinge of what is called iron rust. This is 
particularly the case in the low grounds; where are frequently found 
beds of bog ore. I do not know very definitely the effect of this iron 
upon vegetation; but judging from the general excellence of the 
farms in the Brookfields, Sturbridge, Hardwick, New Braintree, 
Barre, Hubbardston, &c., I should presume it to be good. Certain- 
ly it cannot be injurious; for no part of the County exceeds the 
towns just named in the appearance of its farming interest; and 
nearly all the County, as may be seen by the map, is of one forma- 
tion. It would be an interesting problem, which in that county can 
be solved, to determine the precise influence of a soil highly ferru- 
ginous upon vegetation. 


Steatite, Serpentine, Scapolite Rock, Limestone. 


The next rocks, in an ascending order upon the tablets attached to 
the map, are steatite or soapstone, serpentine and scapolite rock. 
But they are of such limited extent as to deserve no notice in this 
connection. ‘The next rock, namely limestone, is found only in Berk- 
shire County, in quantities sufficient to modify the soil over much extent 
of surface. But in that county it occupies most of the vallies; while 
the mountains are chiefly mica slate. And the fertility of these val- 
lies is a striking evidence of the good influence of disintegrated and 


Geology of Massachusetts. 11 


decomposing carbonate of lime upon the soil. Indeed, I believe that 
it is generally thought in Europe, that soils of this description are 
more productive than any other, except rich alluvions. And I ap- 
prehend that one of the greatest deficiencies in the soil of the princi- 
pal part of Massachusetts, is the absence of lime. Probably if our 
farmers could procure this article at a moderate expense, its applica- 
tion as a manure would amply reward them for their trouble. Lime- 
stone that contains much magnesia, is, indeed, said to be injurious 
to vegetation, unless it be upon peaty soil, or soil containing much 
vegetable matter ; and this limestone is common in Berkshire Coun- 
ty. But it occurs there in beds, alternating with the pure carbonate 
of lime, and I apprehend rarely produces any bad effect. 


Quartz Rock. 


It will be seen by the map that one variety of this rock is associ- 
ated with mica slate, and another with gneiss; so intimately, indeed, 
that its agricultural character may be considered the same as that of 
these rocks. When it occurs in the state of pure quartz, it is so lit- 
tle acted upon by the common decomposing agents, such as air, heat 
and moisture, as to exert little or no influence upon the superincum- 
bent soil; except in the town of Cheshire, where it produces a pure 
white sand. 


Chlorite Slate, Talcose Slate, Mica Slate. 


The first of these rocks occupies too little space to deserve any 
notice in respect to the soil resulting from it. The second is in gen- 
eral a mere variety of mica slate, talc taking the place of mica, or 
being superadded to it. Where the talcose slate, however, is most 
pure, so as in fact to be little else but slaty talc, with more or less 
quartz, the soil which its decomposition produces, is decidedly infe- 
rior to that resulting from mica slate ; and probably this is owing to 
the large quantity of magnesia which tale contains. 

Mica slate produces a soil of a medium quality. Some varieties 
of it underlie tracts of superior quality. Butthe most extensive tract 
of mica slate in Massachusetts, consists of the high and mountainous 
region west of Connecticut river : so that it is difficult to compare the 
soil lying over it, with that of formations at a lower level. The deep 
ravines, however, so common in the mica slate, furnish many very 
fertile, though limited patches of ground ; while the mountain sides 
are very superior for grazing. 


12 Geology of Massachusetts. 
Hornblende Slate, Geiss. 


Gneiss, which differs from granite only in having a slaty structure, 
occupies more of the surface of the State than any other rock. It 
sometimes takes into its composition the black mineral called horn- 
blende ; even losing its common ingredients; and then it.is denomi- 
nated Hornblende Slate. Sometimes the quartz so greatly predom- 
inates over the other ingredients, that itis properly called quartz rock. 

The soil resulting from the decomposition of gneiss is so well mark- 
ed, as not to be easily mistaken by an experienced eye. Its pre- 
dominant ingredient is a rather fine whitish sand; and sometimes 
beds of extremely pure sand are found in it; as in Pelham and 
Shutesbury. Indeed, the appearance of the soil from gneiss, indi- 
cates uncommon poverty and sterility. But facts do not correspond 
to this anticipation ; for in no part of the State do we find finer look- 
ing farms, or the appearance of more thrift and independence among 
their occupants, than in the region where gneiss prevails: I refer 
chiefly to Worcester County, most of which is based on this rock. 
The western part of the range, however, embracing the eastern part 
of Franklin, Hampshire and Hampden Counties, is in general char- 
acterized by a rather barren soil. But this region is more elevated 
than the surface farther east. Where it isnot so high, as in Monson 
and Brimfield, we find the same appearance of fertility as in the towns 
farther to the east. It is a question worthy of attention, however, how 
far the soil from our gneiss-rock may owe its agricultural character 
to the iron that so generally accompanies this rock. Certainly the 
jron gives it an appearance of sterility which does not belong to it. 


Greenstone. 


This is one of the varieties of rock embraced under the general 
term trap rock. 'The variety most common in Europe is basalt: 
and the soil produced by its decomposition is said to be of a supe- 
rior quality. The greenstone of Massachusetts, however, except 
some of its rarer varieties, is but little acted upon by ordinary decom- 
posing and disintegrating agents; and is proverbially one of our 
hardest and most indestructible rocks. Hence the soil that covers 
itis generally quite scanty. Itis, however, very peculiar; and we 
find upon our greenstone ridges, quite a number of plants, shrubs, and 
trees, that are not found, except rarely, upon the other formations. 
The eastern part of the County of Essex is in a great measure com- 
posed of greenstone ; and its superior agricultural character, in gene- 


Geology of Massachusetis. 13 


ral, produces a favorable opinion as to the influence of this rock upon 
the soil, though very much must be imputed to good management. 
This formation in the Connecticut valley furnishes but little arable 
land, and that of rather a sterile character. 


Porphyry and Compact Feldspar. 


‘These rocks differ but little in an agricultural point of view. They 
are of quite limited extent and are decidedly the hardest and most un- 
yielding of all our rocks. ‘They occupy the greater part of the sur- 
face, and the scanty soil that has formed a lodgment in their ine- 
qualities, is not of the first rate character. 


Sientte and Granite.. 


Sienite is intermediate in its characters between greenstone and 
granite, although most commonly it is only a variety of granite. Both 
rocks are little liable to decomposition, and occupy a large porportion 
of the surface with their naked and rugged projections. Still, the soil 
found among them, particularly on the granite, is generally of a superior 
character, probably from the fact that most of it must have been de- 
rived from decomposed vegetable and animal matter. Hence it is 
usually of a dark color and fine texture, and not coarse and sandy 
like the soil above the granites of Europe, that more easily suffer 
decomposition. 

Should the preceding cursory remarks be the means of exciting 
the attention of intelligent agriculturists, to the connexion between 
rocks and soils, an important object willbe attamed. I have said 
enough to show that almost all known varieties of soil exist in Mas- 
sachusetts. But much improvement remains to be made in our 
agricultural concerns, before the excellencies of our soil are fully 
developed. It is but a moderate estimate to say, that the general 
adoption of an enlightened system of cultivation, would, in a few years, 
double the produce and the value of our improvable lands. ‘That is 
to say, such would be the speedy result, if all our farmers were to 
manage their lands as a few now do. 


USEFUL ROCKS AND MINERALS IN THE STATE. 
I shall next proceed to give an account of those rocks and min- 


eral subtances found in the State, which have been, or may be 
useful in the arts, and are consequently objects of pecuniary impor- 


14 Geology of Massachusetts. 


tance. ‘Those that are employed for architectural or ornamental 
purposes, first claim attention; because the state is peculiarly rich 
in treasures of this kind. It will be easy to see, by a reference to 
the Map, how extensive are the formations from which they are de- 
rived ; although it must not be concluded that every part of a forma- 
tion will furnish materials of equal value for economical purposes. 


Granite and Sienite. 


Much confusion has arisen in the application of these terms. 
They were originally applied to designate rocks very different, if not 
in composition, yet in their geological relations. But most of the rock 
that is generally described as sienite, is a variety of granite. ‘This is 
certainly the case in Massachusetts. Wherever the granite admits 
hornblende into its composition, I have considered it as sienite; and 
not unfrequently the hornblende constitutes the principal ingredient ; 
taking the place, more or less, of the quartz and mica, so as to form 
a compound of hornblende and feldspar. ‘This compound forms 
some of the most beautiful varieties of sienite, though extremely 
hard to work for architectural purposes. But not a little granite that 
contains no hornblende goes by the name of sienite. ‘Thus, much 
of the Quincy granite is wanting in hornblende; but being almost 
destitute of mica, and having the close aspect of sienite, it is called 
indifferently by either name. 

The variety in the composition, color and hardness of these rocks 
in Massachusetts, is almost endless. ‘The quartz and feldspar are 
commonly white, yellowish and gray; the latter not unfrequently 
flesh colored: the mica is very often black, but sometimes of a 
silver. color. When the quartz prevails, the rock is easily broken, 
but hornblende renders it tough. ‘The predominance of feldspar 
generally gives the rock a more lively white color and renders it 
rather easier to work. But I shall not attempt to describe particu- 
larly all the varieties of these rocks that occur in the State. An in- 
spection of the specimens which I have collected, will at once give 
an idea of the kinds obtained at the principal quarries, and of nu- 
merous other varieties which I have met with in different localities. 

The very coarse varieties of granite, which are found in some parts 
of the State, do by no means furnish a good building stone: indeed, 
some of them hardly serve for common walls. Much of the granite 
in the vicinity of the Connecticut river is of this description; as also 
a considerable portion of the range which extends from Southboro’ 


Geology of Massachusetts. 15 


to Andover ; particularly along its northwestern limits. But most of 
the granite in the eastern part of the State, is of so fine a texture, as to 
answer admirably for architecture and other economical purposes. 
Along with sienite, it extends around Boston, running in a curvilinear 
direction at the distance of fifteen or twenty miles. From Cohasset 
to Quincy, at the southern extremity of the curve, and from the end of 
Cape Ann to Salem, on the north, the formation is most fully devel- 
oped, and is there quarried extensively. ‘The Quincy quarries are 
probably the best and most generally known; and few citizens of the 
State are unacquainted with the rock thence obtained, now so exten- 
sively used in Boston and elsewhere. ‘The quantities which those 
quarries (or rather mountains) will furnish, are incalculably great. 
One railroad, as is well known, has been used for several years to 
convey the granite from the quarry to Neponset river, a distance of 
three miles. It is thought, however, that the granite has not reached 
its minimum price. Yet even now, Boston is almost as much dis- 
tinguished for its granite structures, as the metropolis of the Russian 
Himpire. 

Some of the granite obtained on the north of Boston, cannot be 
distinguished from that of Quincy. I observed the resemblance most 
strongly in Danvers and Lynnfield. At the former place it is quar- 
ried, and fine blocks are obtained. Extensive quarries are also open- 
ed in the north side of Cape Ann, in Gloucester. The rock here 
resembles that of Quincy ; but it is generally harder and of a lighter 
color. At these quarries no railroad (except one of a few rods in 

-length) is necessary to transport the rock to the sea-side; since ves- 
sels can approach very near the spot. And, since the demand for 
this rock must increase, in our country, for many years to come, and 
Cape Ann is little else than a vast block of it, it seems to me that it must 
be regarded as a substantial treasure to that part of the State,—far 
more valuable than a mine of the precious metals. At Squam, in 
Gloucester, I was informed that blocks of granite had sometimes been 
split out sixty feet in length; indeed, I saw the face of a ledge from 
which they had been detached. 

At Fall river, in Troy, which lies upon Taunton river, are other 
extensive and interesting granite quarries. ‘This granite, as the Map 
will show, is connected with the Quincy range above described. 
Yet the greater part of the granite in Plymouth and Bristol is coarser 
than that of Quincy and Gloucester, and more liable to decomposition. 
But no rock can be finer for architectural purposes than the granite 


16 Geology of Massachusetts. 


of Troy: and immense quantities have been obtained from this lo- 
cality. The large manufactories at Fall river are built of it, as is also 
Fort Adams at Newport, Rhode Island. The feldspar of this rock is 
a mixture of the flesh red and light, green varieties; the former pre- 
dominating: the quartz is light gray, and the mica, usually black. 
It works easily, and has a lighter and more lively appearanee than 
Quincy granite. Blocks of this granite have been split out from 
fifty to sixty feet long, as the sign-post at one of the public houses at 
Fall River, will attest: it consists of a single block. The contiguity 
of this granite to water transportation, will always render it peculiar- 
ly valuable. ' 

The granite range extending from Cohasset and Quincy, through 
Randolph, Stoughton, Foxborough, &c. into Rhode Island, affords. 
much valuable stone for architectural purposes; and it is wrought 
more or less in every town through which it passes. About two and 
a half miles to the west of Providence, (R. I.) it is quarried; and 
thence were obtained the beautiful and magnificent pillars in front of 
the Arcade in that place. 

That part of this extensive deposit of granite, which is fully devel- 
oped a little south west of Dedham, furnishes some beautiful varieties 
of stone. No better example can be referred to, than the elegant pil- 
lars of the Court House in Dedham. ‘This granite is very fine grain- 
ed, and so white, that at a short distance it cannot be distinguished 
from white marble. The pillars just named were obtained from some 
large bowlders near the dividing line between Dover and Medfeld. 

The stone used in Boston, under the name of Chelmsford granite, 
is found in a range of this rock, not connected with the deposit that 
has been described above. Nor does it come from Chelmsford ; but 
from Westford and Tyngsborough. In the latter place, it is obtained 
chiefly from bowlder stones; but ledges are quarried in Westford. E 
do not know why it has been called Chelmsford granite, unless from 
the fact that large quantities are carried to Lowell, (formerly a part. 
of Chelmsford,) to be wrought. ‘This rock is pure granite, with no: 
hornblende ; and being homogeneous and compact in its texture, it 
furnishes an elegant stone. Good examples of it may be seen in the 
pillars of the United States Bank, and in the Market House in Bos- 
ton. These were from Westford. 

Four miles north of Lowell, a quarry of this granite has been open- 
ed, in Pelham, (N. H.) Blocks may be obtained from this place of 
any length under thirty feet. It is a very fine variety, is much used, 
and appears superior to the Chelmsford granite. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 17 


‘The Westford and Pelham granite is connected with an imperfect 
kind of mica slate, in which it seems to form beds, or large protru- 
ding masses. In the same mica slate at Fitchburg, a little south of 
the village, is a large hill of the same kind of granite. This is quar- 
ried, though not extensively, on account of the little demand for the 
stone. ‘This single hill, 300 feet high, and nearly a mile in circum- 
ference at its base, might furnish enough to supply the whole State 
for centuries. Some of it, however, is too coarse for architecture. 

The manner in which the granite is usually split out of the quarries 

is this. A number of holes, of a quadrangular form, a little more than 
an inch wide, and two or three inches deep, are drilled into the rock, at 
intervals of a few inches, in the direction in which it is wished to separate 
the mass. Iron wedges, having cases of sheet iron, are then driven at 
the same time, and with equal force, into those cavities ; and so prodi- 
gious is the power thus exerted, that masses of ten, twenty, thirty, 
and even fifty and sixty feet long, and sometimes half as many wide, 
are separated. ‘These may be subdivided in any direction desir- 
ed ; and it is common to see masses thus split, till their sides are less 
than a foot wide, and*their length from ten to twenty feet. In this 
state they are often employed as posts for fences. — 
_ Respecting the price of the granite from the quarries that have 
been described, I have not been able to obtain much informa- 
tion. At Fitchburg, I was told that it was sold at the quarries, well 
dressed, at forty cents the superficial foot; and at Squam, at forty- 
five cents. 

The cost of hammering and fine dressing granite in Boston, in the 
style of the Tremont House, I have been credibly informed, is about 
thirty cents the superficial foot. Ordinary work, however, is from 
twenty-five to thirty cents; and not unfrequently, even as low as 
twenty cents. 

Concord and Hallowell granite cost about fifty cents per foot in 
Boston ; but are now little used. 

Posts for store-fronts, cost about thirty-four cents per foot in Bos- 
ton. ‘The columns of the Hospital were obtained for about one dollar 
per foot. 

To show how rapidly the price of granite has fallen, I would state 
on the authority of a respectable architect in Boston, that the cost 
of the blocks of the Quincy granite for the Bunker Hill monument, 
delivered at Charlestown in a rough state, was thirteen cents, three 
mills, per foot ; and the cost of the unhewn stone for the church built 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 3 


18 Geology of Massachusetts. 


last year in Bowdoin street, Boston, was fifteen cents: but six years 
before, the rough Quincy granite, for the United States’ Branch 
Bank, cost two dollars per foot. 

I have now given an account of the most extensive and important 
quarries of granite and sienite, in the eastern part of the State. Gran- 
ite is wrought more or less, however, not merely in all the towns 
through which its ranges pass, but also in other places, in their vicin- 
ity ; large blocks of it having been removed thither by diluvial ac- 
tion in former times. 

Although the granite in general, in the vicinity of the Connecticut 
river, is too coarse for architectural uses ; yet in Hampshire county 
are several beds of a superior quality. Perhaps the best is found in 
Williamsburgh, a few miles from Northampton. This rock, (some 
of which may be seen in the front of a few buildings in North- 
ampton,) very much resembles the granite found in the vicinity of 
Dedham, and yields in beauty and value to none in the State. It 
exists in abundance in Northampton, Whately and Williamsburgh ; 
but has yet been quarried only on a very limited scale. 

On the east side of the Connecticut, a very beautiful sienitic gra- 
nite exists in Belchertown ; in which the mica, when the hornblende 
is wanting, is very black. It is not surpassed in elegance by any 
rock in the State: but it has not as yet, to my knowledge, been 
quarried at all. Indeed, very little real granite is employed in the 
middle or western parts of the State. 

This sketch of the granite of Massachusetts, although brief, is sufi- 
cient to show that we have a great number of varieties, “and an exhaust- 
less quantity, of the most valuable material for durable and elegant 
architecture. Numerous varieties not mentioned above, which have 
fallen under my observation, either in ledges or loose blocks, will be 
found in the collection of specimens ; and some of these are pecul- 
iarly beautiful. Numerous other varieties have doubtless escaped 
my observation. Indeed, we may safely assert, that no part of the 
world is better furnished with this useful and indestructible rock. 


Geiss. 


This rock is commonly known under the name of granite ; and, 
indeed, it is composed of the same materials ; but in the gneiss, the 
structure of the rock is slaty, and it splits in one direction better than 
in others ; yet this slaty structure is often hardly perceptible, even in 
wrought specimens; and hence for all architectural and economical 


Geology of Massachusetts. 19 


purposes, the distinction of granite and gneiss is of small importance ; 
though of much consequence in respect to the science of Geology. 

The quarries of gneiss in Massachusetts are perhaps even more 
numerous than those of granite, though not in general so exten- 
sively wrought. It forms an admirable building stone ; and is in no 
respect, that I know of, inferior to granite; while the facility with 
which it cleaves in one direction, renders it easier to get out and 
dress ; so that it can be afforded at a less price. Accordingly we 
find that a large proportion of the better class of buildings, in the ex- 
tensive portion of the central part of the State, where this rock pre- 
vails, are underpinned by wrought blocks of it. Its fissile character 
also renders it an excellent material for common stone walls and 
flagging stones. ‘The same property enables the quarry-man to split 
out layers of it of almost any size, and only a few inches in thick- 
nesss: and their surface is generally so even, as to require but little 
dressing. Hence it is very common to see such large stones of this 
description in front of very many of our churches and other public 
buildings. 

_ It is a curious fact, that in Europe gneiss seems to have been ap- 
plied to no useful purpose. One of the latest geological writers in 
Great Britain says, that “ this schistose (slaty) body serves no particular 
purpose in the arts of life.”* This rock appears to be more perfect- 
ly developed in our country thanin Europe. ‘There it seems chiefly 
to consist of that variety, not uncommon here, in which the layers are 
so contorted and irregular as to prevent its splitting into parallel 
planes. 

The western part of Worcester County, and the eastern part of 
Hampden, Hampshire, and Franklin Counties, afford the best quar- 
ries of gneiss. ‘That branch of the Worcester range extending into 
Middlesex County, and the range in Berkshire County, do. not fur- 
nish so good specimens for architecture, though by no means devoid 
of interest in this respect. 

The quarries of gneiss that are most extensively wrought, and fur- 
nish the best stone, are situated in the following towns : Wilbraham, 
Pelham, Monson, Montague, Dudley, Millbury, Westborough, Boyls- 
ton and Uxbridge. Much of the stone at these quarries can hardly 
be distinguished from granite, even by the geologist. The Millbury 


* Ure’s Geology, p. 100. 


20 Geology of Massachusetts. 


gneiss, for instance, is very much used in Worcester, and does not 
there present any appearance of stratification, and very little of a 
slaty structure: while the granite, that is quarried in the east part of 
Worcester, is distinctly stratified; and would probably be called 
gneiss, by most persons, rather shat the Millbury rock. The Worces- 
ter granite, however, affords almost the only example of stratification 
in that rock in this State. 

At these gneiss quarries it is easy to obtain blocks from ten to 
twenty feet long, which are only a few inches thick. At Dudley, I 
was told that narrow slabs of this rock, such as would answer for 
posts, or side walks, could be split out, and delivered in the center of 
the town, for four cents per foot. 


Greenstone. 


This is one of the most enduring of all rocks; but it is usually so 
much divided by irregular seams, into small and shapeless blocks, 
that it is but little cuiploved! either in the construction of houses, or 
walls. Its dark color, also, renders it less acceptable than granite or 
limestone. Still it is beginning to be used for building houses, in its 
unaltered state. The irregular blocks may be so laid with white mor- 
tar, especially in the Gothic style of building, as to form a picturesque 
and pleasing structure. ‘The Episcopal Church, in the city of New 
Haven, (Conn.) presents a good example of this kind of architecture. 


Hornblende Slate. 


I do not recollect to have seen this rock employed in Massachu- 
setts for any useful purpose, except for the construction of common 
stone walls. But I have noticed some very fine samples of it in the 
flagging of the side walks of New Haven, obtained, I presume, in 
Connecticut, from the same range that passes through Monson, Ware, 
&c. in Massachusetts. 


Porphyry. 


This term, as it is employed in the arts, embraces several varie- 
ties of rock not designated by its strict geological sense. Although 
upon the Map, I have included in the term, only the porphyry of ge- 
ologists, yet in this place, I shall describe all those compaunds oc- 
curring among us, which have been denominated porphyry in the arts. 

The first and most extensive of these, is the genuine feldspar por- 
phyry, represented on the Map in large quantities in the towns of 


Geology of Massachusetts. 21 


Medford, Malden, Chelsea and Lynn, on the north of Boston ; and 
in Needham, Milton and Braintree, on the south. This is the oldest 
and most enduring of the porphyries, and, indeed, the hardest of the 
rocks. Its basis is generally compact feldspar, reduced to a homo- 
geneous paste, and of various colors; as light purple, red of various 
shades, brownish black, and greenish gray. ‘The imbedded crystals 
are either feldspar, or quartz, alone, or existing together in the same 
rock : and their colors are very various, though more usually white 
or gray. By these mixtures porphyries are produced, rivalling in 
beauty the best antique porphyry. ‘This rock is polished with so 
great difficulty, that it is rarely used in our country, either for orna- 
mental or useful purposes. But it would be strange if an increase of 
wealth and refinement should not create some demand for so elegant 
and enduring a rock. Whenever this shall happen, the vicinity of 
Boston will furnish every variety that can be desired, and in blocks 
large enough for any purpose. 

The porphyry range on the north of Boston, is most perfect in its 
characters, and in the greatest abundance at any one place; although 
the southern range spreads over a greater extent of surface. In 
Lynn, and some other towns, I have observed blocks of porphyry 
that were brecciated—that is, they were composed of angular frag- 
ments of porphyry reunited. ‘This furnishes a beautiful variety for 
polishing. , 

Sienrtic Porphyry. 


When sienite contains crystals of feldspar imbedded in the mass, it 
is said to be porphyritic; and some varieties of this rock in the eastern 
part of the State are very elegant. Essex County produces some of 
the finest specimens, particularly Cape Aun. Sometimes the imbed- 
ded crystals of feldspar are white, sometimes flesh-colored, and in 
Gloucester, I found a rock in which they were of a very rich bronze 
color. ‘These sienitic porphyries are extremely elegant when polish- 
ed; but lam not aware that they are employed at all for ornamental 
purposes, in this country. 


Porphyritic Greenstone. 


The ingredients of greenstone are often not easily distinguished 
from each other by the naked eye; and when, in such a case, the 
rock contains disseminated crystals of feldspar, it becomes porphy- 
ritic. If these crystals are greenish white, and the base blackish 


22 Geology of Massachusetts. 


green, the rock is the green porphyry of the ancients. In Dorches- 
ter, Brookline, and Roxbury, according to the Messrs. Danas, it oc- 
curs in rounded masses; and in small quantity, in veins, at Marble- 
head. ButI have found it in large veins traversing sienite, at Sandy 
Bay, on the north-east side of Cape Ann. Large blocks might be 
thence obtained ; and if polished, it would constitute a truly splendid 
ornament for the interior of a church, or a private dwelling. 

If the feldspar crystals be black, or greyish black, the rock is the 
superb black porphyry of the ancients. ‘This occurs in small beds and 
rolled masses in Charlestown, and in veins of greenstone at Marble- 
head. I found it, also, in a rolled mass, in the west part of Ipswich ; 
the feldspar being of a jet black, and of a high lustre. Polished spe- 
cimens would vie in elegance, to say the least, with the green por- 
phyry. 

The hornblende slate in various parts of the State, but particular- 
ly in the region of the Connecticut river, is frequently porphynitic ; 
and exceedingly resembles porphyritic greenstone ; being, in fact, 
composed of the same ingredients; and differing only in its slaty 
structure, and in the more distinctly crystalline character of the horn- 
blende. The disseminated crystals of feldspar are usually white. In 
Canton and Easton, they are sometimes the compact variety, yet re- 
taining their form perfectly. 

The magnetic iron ore in Cumberland, (R. I.) is profusely sprink- 
led with crystals of feldspar ; and would doubtless form no mean sub- 
stitute for green or black porphyry. 


Quartz Rock. 


When this rock occurs pure, it can hardly be employed in archi- 
tecture of any kind, on account of its breaking into fragments so ex- 
tremely irregular. But when it takes a small proportion of mica into 
its composition, it is often divided, with mathematical precision, into 
layers of convenient thickness for building. ‘The best quarry of this 
kind that I know of, is in the west part of Washington, Berkshire 
County, about three miles south-east of Pittsfield village. ‘The lay- 
ers vary in thickness from one or two inches, to one or two feet 5 
thus affording materials for fine flagging stone, as also for walls and 
underpinning. The quantity of this rock at the quarry is very great. 

Although quartz rock is usually, of all others, most easily affected 
by heat, yet that variety from the quarry in Washington, is remarka- 
ble for its power of resisting heat; and it is here employed for the 


Geology of Massachusetts. 23 


hearths and walls of furnaces. Prof. Dewey says that he has ‘seen 
this stone after it has sustained the highest heat of the furnace for 
months, and found its surface merely glazed by the high tempera- 
ture.” It was transported to the iron works in: Bennington, Vt. until 
a similar rock was discovered in that town. It occurs also in Wil- 
liamstown. What peculiarity this rock possesses, that renders it able 
to resist a high temperature, I do not know. 

Another valuable variety of quartz rock is found near the quarry 
above mentioned. But its use, as well as that of another variety in 
Cheshire, will be noticed subsequently. 


Mica Slate. 


This rock is generally more uneven or tortuous in the structure of its 
layers, than any rock in the State. But, like gneiss, its layers are 
sometimes remarkable for their regularity. It then forms an admi- 
rable stone for flagging, for hearths, and for situations where there is 
an exposure to a moderate degree of heat. ‘The variety that occurs 
in Goshen and Chesterfield, Hampshire county, is perhaps the best 
in the State for these purposes; and in these places, particularly in 
Goshen, it is quarried to a considerable extent. In some cases this 
rock approaches so near to argillaceous, or roofslate, that it is employ- 
ed for common gravestones. In Halifax, Vt., there is a quarry of this 
character; and, I believe, also in Chesterfield, Mass. Sometimes it 
forms excellent whetstones; and from the quarries in Enfield and 
Norwich, large quantities are obtained and extensively used. 


Talcose Slate. 


The principle value of this rock, in an economical point of view, 
is derived from its power of resisting high degrees of heat. ‘The 
greater the proportion of talc in its composition, the more valuable is 
it in this respect. A very fine stone of this description, for the lining 
of furnaces, is quarried in Stafford, Ct., and it is employed to some 
extent in the furnaces in Massachusetts. I do not know of any quar- 
ry of this kind in our own state; but undoubtedly such might be 
opened ; since almost every variety of talcose slate exists here. In- 
deed, I am informed by the Rev. Mr. Colton, of Amherst Acad- 
emy, that talcose slate, equal to that in Stafford, may be dug in 
Monson. 

In Plainfield and Hawley a variety of talcose slate occurs, in which 
are disseminated numerous crystals of black hornblende. The tale 


24 Geology of Massachusetts. 


is green and the quartz white, and the rock admits of a polish. 
Sometime the talc almost disappears; and then we have a white base 
with black crystals imbedded. In short, I feel satisfied that this rock 
would form a beautiful ornamental stone, if wrought into tables, urns, 
chimney pieces, &c. &c. But of this others can judge from the 
specimens which | shall place in the collection already referred to. 
Large blocks of it may be obtained, which would be very firm 
throughout. ; 


Tamestone. 


Next to our granite and gneiss, this is the most valuable rock in. 
the State. Little advantage is derived from it, however, by any part 
of the State except Berkshire. Small beds of it do, indeed, exist 
in the eastern part of the State; but they rarely furnish blocks suf- 
ficiently large and sound, to be wrought into marble. And on ac- 
count of the high price of wood in the vicinity of Boston, it cannot 
be burnt into quick lime, so as to be afforded at a less price than 
the lime brought from Maine. In many places, however, it continues 
still to be burnt. Judging from the appearance of the quarries, I 
should suppose that Bolton furnishes a greater quantity of lime at 
present, than any other locality. The stone here is mostly crystal- 
line, and white, although it is apt to be much mixed, as it is at every 
other locality in the eastern part of the State, with a variety of minerals, 
that much injure it for lime. - Beds of this limestone occur at New- 
bury, Bolton, Boxborough, Acton, Littleton, Carlisle, Chelmsford, and 
Stoneham. That in Stoneham is peculiarly fine; and could large 
blocks of it be obtained, free from fissures and foreign minerals, it 
would undoubtedly answer well for statuary. When there shall be 
a greater demand for a stone of this description, perhaps a farther 
exploration will bring to light, at this quarry, many larger and sound- 
er pieces. 

On the south of Boston, at Walpole, is a bed of limestone of a 
gray color and probably somewhat impure. It would, however, 
make good lime; and, indeed, it was burnt in considerable quantity 
some years ago. But until the lime from Maine and Rhode Island, 
shall sell at a higher price, this cannot be profitably prepared. It 
must be gratifying, however, to the inhabitants of the eastern section 
of the State, to know that such abundant sources of this valuable 
rock are within their reach, should their present means of supply be 
cut off. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 25 


The limestone quarries in Smithfield, Rhode Island, are so situa- 
ted as to be of great importance to Massachusetts, being accessible 
to a large portion of the southeastern part of our State, and lying 
close to the Blackstone canal. -The limestone here is white and gran- 
ular ; very much resembling that in the towns northwest of Boston,— 
especially that in Stoneham. It occurs in two principal beds, about 
two miles apart. I was told by an agent of one of the companies, 
which own this limestone, that not far from twenty thousand casks of 
lime, containing from thirty eight to forty gallons each, and worth 
nearly two dollars each, were annually prepared in the whole town. 

Several beds of limestone may be seen on the Map in the eastern 
part of the range of mica slate in Franklin county, west side of the 
Connecticut, in the towns of Whately, Conway, Ashfield, Colerain, 
&c. But this limestone is quite impure, and is not generally distin- 

guished, by the inhabitants of those towns, from the mica slate. It 

becomes an interesting inquiry, to those residing in the valley of the 
Connecticut, where quick lime is more expensive than in any other 
part of the State, whether this stone can be profitably converted into 
mortar. Very few attempts have yet been made to burn it, and 
those obviously quite unsatisfactory. ‘Those who made these attempts 
probably thought that the stone, after burning, would slack with as 
much energy and readiness as pure quick lime; and because the 
process went on slowly and feebly, they have inferred that the lime 
would be of no value. At least, I know this to have been the con- 
clusion in one instance, in which I had procured the burning of a 
considerable quantity of this limestone, in a regular lime kiln. But 
the mason, not seeing it slack briskly, did not think it necessary to 
apprise me of what he was doing, and mixed it with other lime, and 
defeated the whole experiment. I have, however, burnt a few 
pounds of this stone in a common chemical furnace, and found it 
to form a very excellent mortar; although requiring less sand than 
pure lime. Bricks cemented with it two or three years since, still 
remain as firmly united as ever. 

This limestone contains a large proportion of silex, which, on 
burning, becomes a harsh sand. Wishing to know how much of pure 
carbonate of lime was contained in it, I powdered and dissolved por- 
tions of it, from different localities, in muriatic acid; and the results 
were as follows : 

1. Purest variety from Whately ; 100 parts contain carbonate of 
lime 78; residuum (chiefly sand) 22 parts 

Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 4 


26 Geology of Massachusetis. 


2. Compact variety from Conway; carbonate of lime 58 parts ; 
siliceous residuum 42 parts. ; 

3. Poorest from Whately ; carbonate of lime 67 parts: siliceous 
residuum 33. 

I tried some specimens of our best limestones in the same manner, 
with the following results : . 

1. Gray limestone from New Marlborough ; carbonate of lime, 
98 parts: residuum (chiefly mica) 2 parts. 

2. Gray limestone from Walpole; carbonate of lime 92 parts: 
residuum 8. 

3. White crystalline, from Boxborough; carbonate of lime, 99 
parts: residuum 1 part. 

It is my decided opinion that the limestone along the Connecticut, 
described above, may be usefully employed either for mortar, or for 
spreading upon the soil. The beds of it are quite numerous in all 
the towns where they are occasionally marked. 1 think, however, 
that the best variety occurs in Whately, where, should it ever come 
into use, on the north line of the town, is a hill large enough to sup- 
ply the whole valley of the Connecticut for centuries. ‘This local- 
ity is favorably situated for working, so as to furnish that valley; be- 
ing not more than two or three miles from the Connecticut, and the 
whole distance nearly level. I cannot but hope that the attention of 
some enterprising gentleman may be directed to this subject; and 
should he succeed in preparing even tolerable lime from this rock, 
he would confer a great favor upon the inhabitants of that section of 
the State. 

A large portion of the limestone in Berkshire is exceilent for burn- 
ing into quick lime: and even in several towns where none of the 
rock occurs in ledges, so abundant are the loose masses, transported 
thither by a current of water in early times, that it is burnt in consid- 
erable quantities. This is the case in Windsor, Peru, &c., from 
whence lime is transported in wagons to the valley of the Connecticut. 

Probably, however, a still larger proportion of the lime used in 
that valley, particularly in its northern part, is brought from Whiting- 
ham, Vt., a town lying directly north of Rowe in Franklin county. 
This limestone is white and crystalline,, and it exists in large quanti- 
ties. It approaches within a few rods of the Massachusetts line, and 
may even pass over it in some places. 

An interesting bed of limestone of a peculiar character, has been 
discovered, within a few years, in the valley of the Connecticut at 


Geology of Massachusetts. Q7 
West Springfield, a few miles south of Mount Tom. It is the bitu- 


minous limestone, and is quite impure. But it answers well, and 
that too on account of its impurity, for water proof cement, or mor- 
tar that will harden under water. It was used on the Farmington 
canal, particularly in the construction of the aqueduct across West- 
field river. ‘The same rock occurs at Southingtoa and Middletown, 
Ct., and I doubt not may be found in many other places, along the 
river, associated with the new red sand stone. Iam not aware that 
the bituminous limestone has ever before been used as a water proof 
cement. In Europe, and I believe in New York, the blue argilla- 
ceous limestone is employed. Pure lime, however, will answer the 
purpose, if it be mixed with puzzolana or tarras. The former of 
these substances is decomposing lava, and the latter decomposing 
Basalt. 1 doubt not but that decomposing greenstone will answer as 
well; and if so, it can be found in abundance on the north of Boston, 
and along the Connecticut river. Lava, basalt, and greenstone, are 
so much alike, that I think the laiter well worth a trial. Indeed, if 
I recollect aright, the experiment has already been successfully tried 
in New Haven, Ct. 

As the Springfield limestone is abundant, it would be very desirable 
to have it tried upon some land in the vicinity : for, if it answers well in 
agriculture, (and I see no reason why it may not,) it might prove an 
invaluable acquisition to the farming interest of the Connecticut valley. 


Postscript.— Discovery of good Limestone in the Valley of the Con- 


necticut. 


After the preceding remarks upon the limestones of Massachusetts 
were written, I received specimens, through the kindness of Mr. Hen- 
ry W. Cushman, of crystalline carbonate of lime, found in Bernards- 
ton, near the center of the town, and a short distance from the stage 
road from Greenfield to Brattleborough, Vt. _I immediately visited 
the spot, and found, indeed, a large bed of limestone, in the argilla- 
ceous slate, not less than fifty rods long, and three or four rods thick, 
appearing at the summit of a hill, and dipping nearly south east at a 
small angle. In the limestone is a large bed of iron ore, which was 
dug forty or fifty years since, and with the limestone sent to Winches- 
ter, N. H. to be smelted. Neither the limestone, nor the iron have 
been thought worthy of attention since. But a kiln of the former has 
recently been burnt, and found to produce a very strong lime, al- 
though of a rather darker color than the white limestones generally 
produce. This results from a quantity of the oxide of iron, which 


28 Geology of Massachusetts. 


penetrates the seams of the rock: but this does not injure the stone 
for mortar, and probably even makes it more valuable. ‘The bed is 
only three or four miles from the Connecticut, and on the bank of 
Fall River, a small stream that empties into the Connecticut. By go- 
ing to Cheapside, in Deerfield, (eight miles,) over a level and excel- 
“lent road, water communication with the whole valley of the Con- 
necticut, will be reached. I have iittle doubt, that if this limestone 
should be extensively burnt, it will reduce the value of quick lime in 
that valley, from twenty five to fifty per cent.: a benefit superior to 
any that could be conferred by the discovery of a gold or silver mine. 

I dissolved some of this lime, in diluted nitric acid, to see if it con- 
tained magnesia. ‘The solution was not milky, and therefore no 
magnesia was present. I also dissolved 100 grains in muriatic acid, 
and the siliceous residuum was only a single grain: the 99 grains are 
probably chiefly carbonate of lime; although whatever amount of ox- 
ide of iron was present, would also be dissolved. 


Marble. 


The limestone of Berkshire is best known for the fine marble 
which it produces. It is all of that variety denominated primitive 
marble. It is always more or less crystalline, sometimes very coarse- 
ly so. The prevailing color is white ; and this is the variety most 
extensively wrought. Some varieties are snow white, and admit of 
avery fine polish. From this pure white, the color changes by im- 
perceptible gradations to gray, and dove color. ‘These varieties form 
delicate marbles. But probably most persons would say that the 
clouded variety, where the white and the gray are fantastically mix- 
ed, is most elegant. 

More or less marble is quarried in almost every town of Berkshire 
county, except a few on its eastern side. But the towns where it is 
most extensively wrought are West Stockbridge, Lanesborough, New 
Ashford, Sheffield, New Marlborough and Adams. A few years 
since, Prof. Dewey stated the amount of marble annually furnished 
by West Stockbridge, to be sixteen thousand square feet, valued at 
$25,000 to $30,000: the amount at Lanesborough, seven thousand 
feet; value $10,000: and in Sheffield, to the value of $8,000. In 
all the county, the annual value of marble was estimated to be more 
than $40,000. Still more recently there were in operation in West 
Stockbridge for sawing marble, nine mills, movéd by water power ; 
and two hundred hands were employed. From twelve to fifteen 
quarries had been opened, and in 1827, about two thousand seven 


Geology of Massachusetts. 29 


hundred tons of marble were exported from this town. The marble 
used in building the city hall in New York city was chiefly from this 
town. A part of the marblein the state house in Boston, was from 
the same place. In 1828, a charge of two hundred and four pounds 
of powder, was put into the rock in one of the West Stockbridge 
quarries, and a block from fifty to sixty feet square and eight feet 
thick, was raised ; and as much more loosened. 

The Lanesborough marble is of a superior quality, and a good 
sample of it may be seen in the capitol at Albany. The New Ash- 
ford quarries furnish a marble of the same kind; and several quar- 
ries are opened. Only one mill is there erected for sawing it into 
slabs. A mill of the same kind is in operation in Lenox, and an- 
other at New Marlborough. In Sheffield, three quarries are opened. 
In Alford, two. In Egremont, a bed of marble limestone extends 
nearly through the town. 

There can be ne doubt that greater facilities for the transportation 
of the Berkshire marble—such as a rail road to the Hudson—would 
greatly increase the demand for it, by reducing its price. Such fa- 
cilities will undoubtedly be provided at some future time. For asa. 
country grows older, and increases in wealth and refinement, its val- 
uable and ornamental minerals and rocks will be more sought after and 
used. The inhabitants of Berkshire cannot, therefore, but regard 
their inexhaustible deposits of marble and common limestone, as a rich 
treasure to themselves, and an invaluable legacy to their posterity. . 

The limestone of Smithfield, R. I. and of Stoneham in this state, 
bears a close resemblance to that which produces the celebrated Ca- 
rara marble of Italy. But as yet, few blocks have been obtained at 
either of these localities, large enough and free enough from fissures, 
to be used for statuary. 


Serpentine. 


Tn richness and variety of colors, this rock exceeds all others; and 
is, therefore, eminently suited for ornamental sculpture and architec- 
ture. The prevailing color is green, of different shades, spotted or 
clouded, or veined with other colors; and hence its name, from its 
spotted and striped appearance, bearing a resemblance to the skins of 
some serpents. In hardness, it varies very much; being in some in- 
stances very hard, and in others as easily wrought as marble. 

This rock exists in Massachusetts in great abundance, particularly 
in the Alpine part of the state, or in the Hoosac mountain range. 


30 : Geology of Massachusetts. 


The most extensive bed occurs in Middlefield, in the southern part 
of the town. This bed cannot be less than a quarter of a mile in 
breadth and two miles long. The colors of the rock are various, and 
its hardness unequal. If wrought, it might supply the whole world. 
It yields both the precious and common varieties. ‘There is another 
bed in the same town, associated with steatite or soapstone. Jn the 
west part of Westfield is found another extensive bed of this rock, ex-. 
tending into Russell, of a much darker color, and containing green 
talc. This has been used in a few instances for ornamental archi- 
tecture, and has a rich appearance when wrought. ‘Two beds of a 
similar serpentine are found in Blanford, and another in Pelham, 
in the south west part of the town. ‘The color of this last is quite 
dark, and the quantity of the tale is considerably large. A large bed 
occurs in connection with soapstone, on the north side of Deerfield 
river, in Zoar, near the turnpike from Greenfield to Williamstown. 
Specimens from this place resemble those from the celebrated local- — 
ities of this rock at Zoblitz, in Saxony. Serpentine also exists at 
Windsor in two beds; and there is an immense bed of it in Marlbo- 
rough, in the lower part of Vermont, as also in several other towns 
in that vicinity. 

The only locality of this rock in the eastern part of the state, that 
I know of, is in Newbury, two and a half miles south of Newbury- 
port, near the Boston turnpike, at an abandoned lime quarry. The 
precious, or noble serpentine is found here very beautiful, and very 
much resembling that of Cornwall, in England. No serpentine in 
the state will compare in beauty with this ; but perhaps if the other 
beds were explored by blasting, they would put on a different aspect. 
Serpentine also exists at Newport, R.I., but I have not seen it in 
the bed. 

Serpentine and limestone, irregularly mixed, form the noted Verd 
Antique marble. Such a mixture occurs at Becket, according to 
Prof. Dewey, in a bed of gneiss. ‘The limestone is also sometimes 
mingled with the serpentine at Newbury and at Westfield. I cannot 
see why these varieties are not Verd Antique, though I would not 
decide very confidently. At New Haven and Milford, Ct. exten- 
sive quarries of Verd Antique marble have been opened. 

Considering the extent and variety of serpentine in Massachusetts, 
it seems not a little surprising that no efforts, or next to none, have 
been made to use it for ornamental or architectural purposes. In 
Europe, it is employed for trinkets, vases, boxes, chimney pieces, 


Geology of Massachusetts, 31 


and even columns of large size. In Spain, it is said that churches 
and palaces abound with columns of this description. If ever the 
serpentine of Massachusetts shall be extensively wrought, I doubt not 
that specimens will be obtained, rivalling the finest varieties of Europe. 
It is not at present easy to obtain hand specimens, that shall give a 
fair representation of this rock, because it is injured to a considerable 
depth, from the surface exposure. 


Steatite or Soapstone. 


This is the softest of all the rocks employed in architecture. This 
property, rendering it easy to be sawed or cut without injuring 
an edge tool, and its greasy or soapy feel, are such striking charac- 
teristics of this rock, that most people are acquainted with it. It is 
sometimes called potstone, and sometimes, in this country, freestone. 

Next to the ease with which it may be wrought, its great power in 
resisting heat, is the most valuable property of this rock. Hence it 
is extensively employed for fire places and furnaces. 

It is also turned into crucibles and small furnaces for culinary use. 
Inkstands are made of it in great numbers, and various other articles. 
As it hardens in the fire, it is used m Europe for imitating engraved 
gems. It has been employed in various countries as a substitute 
for soap and fuller’s earth. Spanish and French chalk are varieties 
of steatite. Savage nations are said to mitigate hunger by eating this 
soft mmeral; as however it contains nothing alimentary, it can act 
only as a palliative of hunger.* ‘Those varieties that are most infu- 
sible, are employed in England extensively in the manufacture of 
porcelain. 

Steatite, like serpentine, usually occurs in beds of no great extent. 
They are numerous in Massachusetts, and very commonly they are 
associated with serpentine, or in the vicinity of it. This is the ease 
in the northwest part of Middlefield, where one of the finest beds of 
it, in our State, is found; although it contains small masses of bitter 
spar, which renders it less easy to work. But this quarry has been ° 
explored more extensively than any other in the state; and the blocks 
transported to Northampton, and even to Boston. In Windsor are 
not less than three beds of this rock, from which the New Lebanon 
shakers obtain it, for converting into inkstands. I was told that a bed 
of it exists, in Cheshire. Another occurs in Savoy; one in Hins- 


* See Erongniart’s Mineralegy. 


32 Geology of Massachusetts. 


dale; one also in Blanford, which is wrought and produces an ex- 
cellent stone. ‘Two beds occur in Granville, which I have not visi- 
ted. Another is opened in Zoar, where are two distinct varieties, 
one nearly white, another of a deep green. In Rowe is another 
quarry, where these two varieties are equally distinct. At the two 
last named localities, however, the rock is distinctly green and white 
tale ; and indeed, the two minerals (tale and steatite) are probably in 
every case identical. 

On the east side of the Connecticut river are several beds of this 
rock, more or less quarried in every instance ; but in general not ex- 
plored deep enough to develop the rock in its unaltered character : 
for the air and moisture generally affect it for several feet deep. In 
the south part of Shutesbury is one bed: in the southwest part of 
Wendell another : and two miles east of the centre of New Salem, 
a third. The quality of the rock at these places, is not as good as 
that west of the river; though it has scarcely been explored at all, 
at the localities above mentioned. 

In Groton is a bed of soapstone on which considerable labor has 
been expended. Its width appears to be 10 or 12 feet, and it de- 
scends into the earth towards the southeast; dipping about 30°, and 
lying between layers of mica slate. It is not of the best quality, being 
somewhat too hard: yet its proximity to Boston, Newburyport, and 
Salem, will probably render it an object of importance. 

In the states adjoining Massachusetts, and not many miles from 
its limits, several extensive and valuable quarries of soapstone have 
been opened. In Vermont, they occur at Marlborough, Windham, 
and Grafton.. In New Hampshire, very fine steatite is found at Fran- 
cestown. In Connecticut, a bed is wrought in Somers. ‘The Grafton 
steatite is employed extensively and successfully for aqueducts: the 
joints being connected by sheet lead. A bed of this rock exists in 
Smithfield, R. I.; although it is not wrought; there are beds also 
in several other places in that state. 

From the preceding statements it seems, that in this state, and 
contigtious to it, immense quantities, and every variety of steatite 
exists. As yet, however, the working of it has hardly commenced ; 
although almost every man is aware of the value of this rock; and 
there are few who do not sometimes stand in the need of it for eco- 
nomical purposes. As the facilities for transportation are multiplied, 
and particularly in the mountainous part of the state, its use will un- 
doubtedly be greatly extended. At present I believe, the shops in 
Boston are supplied from Vermont and New Hampshire. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 33 


Graywacke. 


For the most part, this rock furnishes a coarse stone only fitted for a 
common wall; but sometimes its stratification is so regular, and its 
grains are so fine, that it answers well for underpinning, step stones, 
&c. Itis quarried I believe in Brighton, and some other towns in the 
vicinity of Boston. At Pawtucket, on the R. I. side of the river, is 
an extensive quarry of a fine grained and slaty variety, which I should 
judge would form a good flagging stone; and immense quantities have 
been taken away for this object and for other purposes. On Canon- 
icut island in that state, is also a valuable quarry of this rock. 

Graywacke is sometimes beautifully amygdaloidal: that is, it con- 
tains numerous rounded or almond shaped nodules of some.other 
mineral. In these instance, however, the base of the rock is rather 
Wacke, than graywacke. This wacke (which resembles indurated 
clay,) often forms the cement of graywacke. In Brighton it is of a red- 
dish color, while the imbedded nodules are sometimes white, and 
sometimes white feldspar with epidote, which is of a lively green 
color; and these substances are not only in rounded masses, but in 
veins of irregular shape. ‘The rock is hard and may be even pol- 
ished. It then resembles porphyry and is very elegant. A fine 
example of this may be seen at the residence of H. A. S. Dearborn, 
Esq. in Roxbury, forming a pedestal for the bust of his father. It is 
only slightly polished, but would generally be mistaken for porphyry. 

A similar amygdaloid occurs in Brookline, Newton, and Need- 
ham. A variety still more beautiful is found at Hingham. The col- 
or of the base is chocolate red; and the nodules are red, green and 
white. I do not know whether large blocks can be got out. 

I think upon the whole, however, that the finest amygdaloid oc- 
curs in Saugus, on the hill a few rods east of the meeting house. 
The base is a pleasant green, and the nodules white, compact feldspar, 
generally spherical, and thickly interspersed. If polished, it must be 
exceedingly fine; and I have little doubt that large blocks ean be 
obtained at this locality. 


Argillaceous Slate. 


A more common name for this rock, atleast for the most useful vari- 
ety of it, is roofslate: because it is used for forming the roofs of houses. 
I have been inclined sometimes to regard the ranges in Quincy, Wa- 
tertown, Charlestown, and Chelsea, as a fined grained variety of 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 5 


34 Geology of Massachusetts. 


graywacke; but this question may be more properly considered in 
the scientific part of my report. At any rate, this rock, in the towns 
above mentioned, does not split into layers sufficiently thin for roofing. 
But it is valuable for grave-stones, the covering of drains, flagging 
stones, &c ; and for these purposes it is extensively wrought in Quin- 
cy, Charlestown, &c. 

Novaculite. 


This is a variety of argillaceous slate which is known in the arts 
under the name of hone, oil stone, turkey stone, and whet stone. It 
is in beds of argillaceous slate in Charlestown, Malden, and Quincy. 
It is not however of a very good quality; and I am not aware of its 
being used for hones, or even for whet stones; although it might 
answer the purpose, if better materials could not be found elsewhere. 


Roof Slate in Worcester County. 


The range of slate exhibited on the Map in the towns of Boyls- 
ton, Lancaster, Harvard, Shirley and Pepperell, is associated with 
the peculiar mica-slate that contains the Worcester coal. It answers 
for roofing in some parts of the bed and has been quarried for this pur- 
pose in Lancaster. It has been wrought considerably in Harvard 
and Pepperell for grave stones; and is transported a considerable 
distance for this purpose. The stratum is narrower near the north 
line of the state: but I have found no time to ascertain how far it 
extends into New Hampshire. 

Connecticut River Slate. 

Although a large part of Bernardston is represented as composed 
of this slate, yet its characters are not perfectly developed, till we pass 
into Vermont. In Guilford, Brattleborough, Dummerston, and even 50 
or 60 miles northward, it produces an excellent material for roofs, wri- 
ting slates, &c.; and extensive quarries are opened in it in those towns. 
The best slate used in Massachusetts probably comes from this range. 
In Bernardston it is quarried to some extent for grave stones. 


Berkshire Slate. 


The mica slate of the western section of the State, passes gradual- 
ly into roof slate, and in most instances the characters of the lat- 
ter are not very perfectly exhibited, until we have entered New 
York. There, however, in Hoosac, and other towns, it is quarried 
extensively for roofing: and the western part of Massachusetts is 
always sure of a supply of this valuable material from that quarter ; if 
not within its own limits. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 35 
Graphic Slate. 


This occurs in small quantities, along with the argillaceous slate, in 
Lanesborough and Williamstown; also abundantly in Bennington, 
(Vt.) Prof. Dewey, from whose account I derive this fact, does not 
state whether it is pure enough to be employed by artificers for draw- 
ing lines, and for crayons; uses to which this mineral has been appli- 
ed in other countries. 


New Red Sandstone. 


This rock occurs in Massachusetts, only in the vicinity of Connect- 
icut river ; along which, on both sides, ranges extend from Middle- 
town, (Ct.) to Vermont. It affords large quantities of good stone 
for building and other purposes. Some of the numerous varieties of 
this rock are slaty; and either of a red, gray, or black color. These 
varieties furnish good flagging stones; and the side walks of all the- 
principal places along the river, are chiefly covered by them. In the 
more common varieties, the strata are from six inches to two feet or 
more in thickness ; and for the’ most part, the color is red, though 
sometimes gray. From hence is obtained most of the rock of this 
formation used in architecture. ‘The most delicate variety occurs in 
Long Meadow and Wilbraham. It consists simply of an almost blood 
red sand, cemented probably by iron. It is remarkably uniform in 
its color and composition ; and forms a beautiful and most valuable 
building stone ; though liable to be easily injured and sometimes dis- 
integrating by exposure. ‘The quantity of this rock is inexhausti- 
ble, and it occurs only from three to five miles from Connecticut riv- 
er ; the intervening region being nearly level. A great number of 
quarries are now explored ; but I have no means of determining how 
great is the demand for the stone. ‘The celebrated Chatham quar- 
ries, on the banks of Connecticut river, in Connecticut, are opened 
in the same kind of rock, although of a coarser variety. 

Another variety of the new red sandstone, quarried in many places 
in Massachusetts and Connecticut, is coarser than the Long Meadow 
stone ; but being harder, it is more enduring, though less elegant. A 
gray and rather coarse variety is used in some places, e. g. in Gran- 
by, (Mass.) This, indeed, with the other varieties mentioned above, 
forms excellent underpinning, door and window caps, and foundations, 
and door steps; and, like the Berkshire marble, they are sometimes 
wrought into sinks and other similar articles. ‘The ease with which 
the rocks of this formation are wrought, forms a great recommenda- 


36 Geology of Massachusetts. 


tion: and were they as enduring as gneiss and granite, these latter 
rocks would soon be neglected. 


Tertiary Formations. 


I suspect there are only two varieties of these formations in Mas- 
sachusetts: one developed most perfectly in the west part of Mar- 
tha’s Vineyard, and the other, and the most extensive, along the Con- 
necticut river, although common in limited patches all over the State. 
Neither of these formations furnishes stones sufficiently firm for arch- 
itectural purposes, although in a few instances, I have observed lim- 
ited beds of the clay, sand and pebbles, that compose these forma- 
tions, to be ina state of consolidation. Nearly all our clays, howev- 
er, are in the tertiary formations, and these are so important in an 
economical point of view, as to demand a particular description. 


Porcelain Clay. 


This is the purest of all the clays, and i8 the only one employed in 
the manufacture of porcelain, or China ware. It results from the de- 
composition of granite; and hence we might expect to find it in 
Massachusetts ; since we abound so muchin granite. As, however, 
the manufacture of this ware has but recently been introduced into 
this country, little effort has been made to discover this clay. It 
has been announced, as existing in several towns in the State, al- 
though the bed in Savoy, described by Prof. Dewey, in his account 
of the geology of Berkshire, is probably the only one known that 
merits a notice in this report. It is said to constitute a layer three 
feet thick, and of unknown extent, several feet below the surface. It 
contains coarse particles of quartz, which can, however, be separated 
by sifting. It resembles the porcelain clay of Monkton, (Vt.) which 
is regarded as of a good quality. It forms a very cohesive white 
paste, and crucibles made from it, and burned in a common fire, 
were sonorous when struck. A similar clay is said to occur in large 
quantity, in Canaan, (Ct.) According to Dr. Porter, it is found 
likewise somewhat abundantly in Plainfield. 

A part of the extensive clay beds on Martha’s Vineyard, appears 
to be porcelain clay ; especially in Chilmark : though a large propor- 
tion of mica is mixed with it. 


Potter’s Clay. 


This is the clay so extensively employed for common pottery, 
pipes, tiles, and bricks. And fortunately it is found on almost every 


Geology of Massachusetts. 37 


square mile in the State. We have two quite distinct varieties. The 
purest, sometimes called pipe clay, is found almost exclusively on 
Martha’s Vineyard. This is white, and contains usually so little iron, 
that when burnt, it becomes still whiter, and will resist a high degree 
of heat. Hence it is employed for making what are called fire 
bricks, which are used for lining furnaces. White pottery is also 
made from it. But the more common clay turns red on burning, in 
consequence of the oxide of iron in it; and this renders it much ea- 
sier to be melted by the heat, and consequently diminishes its value. 
It is of immense value, however, to the State ; because good bricks 
may be made from it ; and because it exists so abundantly in almost 
every town. ‘The same tertiary formation that supplies clay so plen- 
tifully, yields an abundance of sand for the mortar by which they 
must be cemented. This sand, however, is generally rather fine ; 
and Lam inclined to believe, from all that I can learn, that our mor- 
tar is generally prepared from sand that is too fine. 


Substitute for Fuller’s Earth. 


The common clay along the Connecticut river, has recently been 
employed in Northampton, in the place of fuller’s earth, in cleansing 
cloth. A considerable quantity of it has also been sent down the 
river, for use in other places. This clay is fine grained, and when 
dry, adheres strongly to the tongue. It is said to answer exceeding- 
ly well in the place of fuller’s earth; on this point however, I have 
my information at second hand. A clay of precisely the same char- 
acter has recently been put into my hands from Leominster, where 
it occurs in alternating layers with sand. Some of the sand of this 
tertiary formation, especially in the gneiss region, is of a delicate 
white color, and quite pure. In some cases, when its finest particles 
are mixed with clay, it will answer very well for giving a polish to 
brass and other metals. 


Clay used in the manufacture of Alum. 


The white clay of Martha’s Vineyard, is employed extensively in 
the manufacture of alum, in Salem ; by the process of Chaptal, I sup- 
pose; although the details are, I believe, kept secret. By his meth- 
od, sulphur and nitre are burnt in a chamber with the clay, which, 
after a considerable time, is lixiviated, and the ley evaporated. 
There is indeed, a variety of Clay which contains sulphur, that will 
produce alum without the addition of other materials; but I cannot 


38 Geology of Massachusetts. 


believe that from the Vineyard to be of this description. At any rate 
the alum which the Salem company produce, is of a good quality, and 
is made in large quantities. They formerly obtained their clay from 
Gay Head; but they now procure it of a better quality from the west 
side of the island, in Chilmark. 


Clay as a Manure. 


Writers on agriculture, speak of clay as next in value to marl, for 
manuring light and sandy lands; and I cannot but think that our far- 
mers have yet something to learn on this subject. Marl, they cannot 
procure, but at a great expense ; but clay is usually at hand—and we 
have very much of the land which it will help. Yet I am not aware 
that in any instance the experiment has been thoroughly made. 


Marl. 


Marl for our farmers, scarcely exists in the State, except in a few 
places in Berkshire county, where it is of little use, because the 
soil already contains so much calcareous matter. It is said to have 
been found in Lancaster, but whether in large or small quantities, is 
not stated. Judging from the nature of the surrounding country, I - 
venture to predict that it will not be found there in abundance. In 
Duxbury also, it occurs in considerable quantity. In Pittsfield, is 
abed of earthy marl, but not extensive. It is found more abundant- 
ly, it is said, in Lenox; and it exists also in Williamstown. 


Peat. 


This useful substance must be regarded as alluvial in its character, 
since the process of its formation is now going on. It results chiefly 
from mosses and other plants, more or less decayed. In the eastern 
part of the State, it is found in great quantities. West of Worcester, 
it has scarcely been sought after, on account of the comparative abun- 
dance of wood. It will probably, however, never be found so abun- 
dantly in the western part of the State, asin the eastern. I have 
ascertained the existence of peat in the following towns, and do not 
doubt that it occurs in many others. ‘There are two varieties; the 
fibrous and the compact. In the former, the moss, turf, and roots 
out of which peat is formed, have not lost their fibrous structure : 
but in the latter, they are converted into a compact and nearly ho- 
mogeneous mass. 

The fibrous and compact varieties, probably exist at nearly every 
locality. Iam sure of their occurrence in Cambridge, Newton, and 


Geology of Massachusetts. 39 


Lexington; and in large quantities. Peat is abundant in Seekonk, 
Uxbridge, Cohasset, Duxbury, Hingham, Medfield, Walpole, Wren- 
tham, Dover, Framingham, Sudbury, Topsfield, Ipswich, and Nan- 
tucket. 

It exists and has been dug in greater or less quantities in Pittsfield, 
Leverett, Shrewsbury, Lancaster, Southborough, Hopkinton, Med- 
way, Halifax, Stoughton, Boylston, Reading, Milton, Needham, Con- 
cord, Billerica, Bedford, Waltham, Watertown, Acton, Wilmington, 
Danvers, Chelmsford, Hamilton, and in nearly all the towns in Barn- 
stable county; certainly in Yarmouth, Brewster, Orleans, Eastham, 
Wellfleet, and Truro. I have marked on the Map, only the most 
important localities. 

The value of peat for fuel, is generally known; but J apprehend that 
it is not generally known that a still more important use may be made 
of it in agriculture. Peat swamps in Massachusetts are commonly 
surrounded by light and poor land. While the swamp itself contains 
too much vegetable matter, imperfectly decomposed, the land around 
it contains too little. All that is needed, therefore, is to employ the 
excess of the one, to supply the deficiency of the other. Hence, 
as an English writer remarks, ‘“ peat or vegetable matter, should be 
carried from the peat moss to the poor soil, and the surface mould 
from the poor soil to the peat moss.” ‘The peat ought indeed to be 
converted into manure, by lying awhile in a barn yard, or by mixing 
lime, or other substance with it; and there are particular directions 
to be observed as to the whole process, which this is not the proper 
place to explain. But they can be learned in works on agriculture ; 
and whoever undertakes thus to make use of peat, without learning 
the results of enlightened experience on the subject, will probably 
fail in his object. But since great benefit has been derived from 
the use of peat as a manure, in England and Ireland, no reason can 
be assigned why it may not thus be ee in this country with equal 
success. 

I cannot but regard the existence of so large quantities of peat, 
on Cape Cod and Nantucket, as a great blessing to the inhabitants. 
Yet from the little of it, which I observed to be dug there, I am ap- 
prehensive they do not realize its value. Most of the soil in those 
counties is precisely of that kind, which needs the admixture of much 
vegetable matter. If the peat swamps could be drained, and after 
the removal of a portion of the peat, be covered with lighter and 
warmer soil, but few years would elapse before they would become 


40 Geology of Massachusetis. 


fine grass plats; while the sandy and more elevated land, enriched 
by the peat, would produce large crops of Indian corn, rye, and 
other vegetables. ‘That this is not mere hypothesis, has been de- 
monstrated on a small scale, at least, upon one farm, that of the 
Hon. John Reed, of Yarmouth. Since the inhabitants of Cape 
Cod are beginning to turn their attention more and more to the cul- 
tivation of the soil, may we not expect that such a transformation will 
ere long be common. 

A few other mineral. substances, interesting in an economical point 
of view, may perhaps be appropriately noticed in this place. 


1. Granular Quartz and Sand for the Manufacture of Glass. 


From some unknown cause, the granular quartz in Cheshire, 
Berkshire County, is so much disintegrated, that it easily crumbles 
into a beautiful white sand. This forms a good material for glass, 
and has been employed for this purpose a number of years; formerly 
in Cheshire and Warwick, Mass., and in Utica, N. Y.; and at present 
in Keene, N. H. It answers well for crown and cylinder glass. 
The quantity is inexhaustible. It is sold at the road, one mile from 
the bed, at 61 cents per bushel. This sandis employed extensively 
in Berkshire in the process of sawing marble. 

I am inclined to believe that some of the sand associated with 
the tertiary and diluvial formations in the state, particularly in 
the gneiss region, is pure enough to be employed in the manu- 
facture of coarse kinds of glass: such for instance as is found in 
Pelham and Leominster. The purest and coarsest variety, how- 
ever, that I have met with, forms the shores of Lock’s Pond, in the N. 
West part of Shutesbury. Similar sand, I believe is used for glass 
making in the eastern part of Connecticut. 

When examining the milk white quartz, that exists im mountain 
masses in the east part of Cumberland, R. I: the enquiry forced it- 
self upon my attention, whether it might not be employed in the man- 
ufacture of glass? Those particularly acquainted with that manufac- 
ture, can, however, judge better of this matter than myself. 


2. Buhrstone. 


In the same hill that furnishes the fine stratified quartz rock for 
architectural purposes, in Washington, three miles from Pittsfield, a 
porous quartz is found, which greatly resembles, and is used instead 
of bubrstone, for millstones. Whether geologists would allow it to be 


Geology of Massachusetts. 41 


real buhrstone, may admit of doubt; since it is unquestionably a rock 
of primitive formation ; whereas the real Paris buhrstone, is a mem- 
ber of thetertiary formation. But in an economical point of view, 
this question is of little importance, since the rock seems to answer 
nearly all the purposes of buhrstone so well that it is employed 
somewhat extensively for millstones. ‘These are manufactured near 
the ledge, and sold for seventy or eighty dollars each. I am told 
that they answer well, especially for the coarser kinds of grain. I 
should presume that the only difficulty would lie in their being less 
tough than the genuine buhrstone. ‘The quantity at the ledge is 
inexhaustible. 

Sometimes our citizens employ the finer and more compact va- 
rieties of granite for millstones. I have seen even a coarse conglom- 
erate, or puddingstone, used for this purpose. And while upon 
this subject, I cannot but express my surprise that no attempt has 
been made to employ our greenstone, and other hornblend rocks, for 
millstones. In Great Britain, basalt has been, within a few years, 
used for this purpose, and found even superior to the French buhr- 
stone; and our greenstone is only a variety of the same rock: in- 
deed, some of our greenstone cannot be distinguished, by the eye, 
from the European basalt. It is generally extremely compact and 
tough; and although its preparation might require a little more labor 
than the buhrstone, yet it would doubtless last enough longer, amply 
to pay for the additional labor. In the vicinity of Boston and along 
the Connecticut river, as may be seen on the Map, greenstone ex- 
ists in great quantities. It also occurs in small beds throughout the 
whole extent of the gneiss region ; and of a kind, which I should 
suppose from its appearance, would answer the purpose even better 
than that of the extensive ranges above mentioned. 


Coal. 


Of this mineral, the object of so much interest in every civilized 
country, there are found three distinct species; all of which are 
sometimes employed as fuel. The most common in Europe, which 
is there considered the best, is the bituminous coal, or that contain- 
ing bitumen. This burns readily with a yellow or white fame. A 
second species is the anthracite, or stone coal; which is generally 
described as burning without flame, because destitute of bitumen. . 
The anthracites of this country, however, burn with the flame that 
results from the combustion of hydrogen; this gas existing in a state 


Vou. XXU.—No 1. 6 


42 Geology of Massachusetts. 


of combination, either with the carbon, or in the water which the an- 
thracite contains; and itis liberated by the heat. The great difficulty 
in the use of anthracite, consists in igniting it: a difficulty whieh has 
almost disappeared before the ingenuity of our countrymen. In 
Europe, anthracite has been described as of little value: with the 
exception, perhaps, of Killkenny coal. But our anthracite is either 
of a quality superior to the European, or we have learned better 
methods of employing it. All the coal obtaimed from the inexhaust- 
ible beds of that mineral along the Susquehannah, Lehigh, and 
Schuylkill, in Pennsylvania, is anthracite; and wherever it is skill- 
fully used, I believe it is decidedly preferred to the best bituminous 
coals of England, or the United States. ‘The coal fram Rhode 
Island, (chiefly from Portsmouth, at the north end of the island,) is 
also anthracite. ‘The Worcester coal belongs to the same species: 
indeed, every enlightened man in this country now regards our an- 
thracite as a great national blessing. But in Great Britain, their 
geological writers speak of the anthracites found in Ireland and on 
the European continent, as ‘‘ carbonaceous matters, that can never be 
profitably worked, so as to become objects of statistical interest.”— 
(Ure.) And Mr. Conybeare, in his admirable view of the English 
coal formations, speaks of the deposit of bituminous coal, as ‘‘ the only 
one capable of being applied to purposes of extensive utility, which 
appears to exist in the whole geological series.” Is not this an ex- 
ample of that hasty generalization, to which geologists are so prone? 

A third sort of coal is commonly enumerated, called lignite, con- 
sisting of wood partially carbonized, and still retaining its form, more 
or less distinctly. All the kinds of coal, that have been mentioned, 
are found in Massachusetts; the lignite on Martha’s Vineyard; the 
bituminous coal on the Connecticut river, particularly at South Had- 
ley ; and the anthracite at Worcester, and in small quantities, in the 
north part of Middleborough, in Bridgewater, and West Bridgewa- 
ter, and near the line of the State in Cumberland, Rhode Island.* 
But do they occur in sufficient quantity and of such quality, as to 
render them of any statistical value? 


* Also in the sandstone at the Southampton level. Within a few weeks it has 
likewise been stated, that good coal, of some sort and in great abundance, exists in 
Braintree. Through the kindness of a scientific friend, residing in the vicinity, I 
learn that a company are about boring the rocks near the Rev. Mr. Perkins’ Meet- 
ing House in search of coal; aud he was told that in digging several wells, in the 
neighborhood, a substance was found resembling coal, which ‘burnt with a bril- 
jiant flame and a strong sulphurous smell,” although he could not obtain a specimen. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 43 


‘The lignite exists only in small quantities in the clay of the Vine- 
yard: and even if it formed extensive. beds, it would not be of 
much importance; although it is used as fuel in some parts of 
Kurope. 

Genuine bituminous coal, in sufficient quantity to be worked to 
advantage, has never been found, except in connection with a par- 
ticular series of rock, called the Coal Fcrmation. Such a formation 
has long been supposed to exist along the Connecticut: extending 
across the whole of Massachusetts and Connecticut; and the strata 
have been bored in South Hadley, at least, in two instances, and 
once by a gentleman familiar with the real European coal formations. 
Several years ago, I myself delineated a coal formation, on a geolog- 
ical map of the Connecticut, published in the American Journal of 
Science. But further examination has brought me, unwillingly, to the 
conclusion, that no such formation exists along the Connecticut, and 
that the one which I then regarded as real coal measures, is in fact 
the new red sandstone, or its equivalent. In another part of this re- 
port, I shall give my reasons for this conclusion. But I would re- 
mark, that I do not feel so much confidence in this opinion, that I 
would urge the entire abandonment of all efforts to find coal: for the 
facts stated in respect to anthracite, will justify the opinion, that even 
if the recks under consideration, are new red sandstone, bituminous 
<oal may exist in it, in sufficient quantities to be worth exploring ; 
although in Europe it occurs in such rocks only in thin seams. Cer- 
tainly the coal found at South Hadley was of a superior quality. 

If, as I suppose, the rock under consideration be the new red 
sandstone, there is another fact that ought to be recollected, viz. that 
this rock, in other parts of the world, is associated with rock salt, 
salt springs, and gypsum. No trace of rock salt has been found 
along the Connecticut; and as yet only a small quantity of gypsum 
has been discovered. Professor Silliman found a little of this min- 
eral in the greenstone, associated with the sandstone in Deerfield, and 
Mr. Davis, Principal of the academy in Westfield, found the same 
in thin scales, between the layers of the shale, connected with the 
sandstone, on the banks of Westfield river in West Springfield. 
These facts, especially the latter, are sufficient encouragement for 
the research after gypsum. And when we recollect that on account 
of the softness of this mineral, it is liable to be deeply worn away at 
the surface, we should by no means despair of its existence in the 
valley of the Connecticut. J have compared a collection of speci- 
mens from the new red sandstone, that contains the gypsum of Nova 


44 Geology of Massachusetts. 


Scotia, with the rocks of the Connecticut valley, and they can hardly 
be distinguished from each other. 

As to anthracite coal, it seems to occupy a wider range among 
the rocks, than genuine bituminous coal. Generally, however, the 
former occurs lower down in the rocks—that is in older rocks—than 
the latter. Sometimes it is found in what are called transition rocks ; 
and sometimes in the primitive. In this country it is found in both 
these classes of rocks. We have inthe United States, at least three 
extensive deposits of anthracite: the largest isin Pennsylvania; the 
next largest in Rhode Island; and the smallest in Worcester. I have 
examined them all, and have come to the conclusion, that all the 
rocks containing this coal, are at least, as low down in the series as" 
the transition class: and I am rather of the opinion, that they all lie 
below the Independent coal formation of Europe; I mean on the 
scale of rocks. I suspect that the Pennsylvania anthracite occurs 
in the higher beds of the graywacke, perhaps even in the millstone 
grit, and the Rhode Island anthracite, in the lower beds of the gray- 
wacke. ‘There is no geological connection between the Rhode Is- 
land and the Worcester coal, as Dr. Meade and others have suppo- 
sed. By inspecting the Map, the two localities will be seen to be 
separated by granite and gneiss, from twenty to thirty miles across. 
The Worcester coal occurs in an imperfect kind of mica slate. It is 
what Humboldt calls transition mica slate: for a few miles north, it 
passes into distinct argillaceous slate. Following the range south 
from Worcester, it becomes more decidedly micaceous, and proba- 
bly there forms a bed in gneiss. Indeed, in Dudley, I saw the same 
rock surrounded by gneiss, and highly impregnated with anthracite. 

The bed of anthracite in Worcester, is about seven feet thick, 
and has a moderate dip to the northeast. It has been explored only 
a few feet, and the operations are now suspended. ‘To continue them 
advantageously, it will be necessary to go down the hill, and remove 
the soil so as to find the lateral outcrop of the bed, in order to avoid 
an accumulation of water. ‘This work has been already commenced. 

The Rhode Island beds of this coal were opened several years 
ago, before the value of it was justly appreciated by the community. 
The sales not being brisk, the works were abandoned, and have 
never since been resumed; so that on account of the rubbish, I 
was unable to ascertain the width of the beds. I have always under- 
stood, however, that there was abundance of coal. The beds are 
less favorably situated for working, than that at Worcester. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 45 


_ The extensive, and rapidly increasing demand for the Penn- 
sylvania coal, is a conclusive testimony to its first rate excellence. 
The experiments of Mr. Bull of Philadelphia, as well as those 
of Professor Silliman, recorded in the eleventh volume of the 
American Journal of Science, show that the best Rhode Island 
coal is not greatly inferior. ‘The Worcester coal, burns with more 
difficulty : but gentlemen who have fairly tried it, and on whose 
testimony I can depend, assure me, that it may be employed suc- 
cessfully, and comfortably for fuel. There can be no doubt, that 
its quality is inferior to the coal of Pennsylvania, and also to that of 
Rhode Island.* But it may be very much inferior, and yet for many 
purposes, be exceedingly valuable. ‘The fact is, anthracite has to 
struggle with prejudices wherever it is first introduced, arising chiefly 
from the comparative difficulty with which it is ignited; and it hap- 
pens in regard to this substance, as with most things new and untried, 
that the community generally feel, as if their business was to find as 
many objections to it as possible ; and the man who would bring any 
new substance into general use, needs no small share of patience, and 
perseverance. Dr. Meade states, that an experiment, made several 
years ago at Smithfield, upon the burning of limestone, with the 
Rhode Island coal, and another upon the burning of brick, in the vi- 
cinity of Boston, were thought to be complete failures, because the 
heat was so intense, that the surface of the lime and of the bricks was 
vitrified ; whereas the fact ought to havet aught the experimenters, that 
a more careful regulation of the heat would ensure success. Indeed, 
I predict, that ere long, in nearly every case where a strong and steady 
heat is required, anthracite will be found superior to all other kinds of 
fuel; and that the anthracite of Rhode Island, and even that of 
Worcester, will be considered by posterity, if not by the present 
generation, as a treasure of great value. ‘The Pennsylvania coal may 
indeed, for a great many years, command the market: but I appre- 
hend, that the time will come, when the expense of its transporta- 
tion to the Eastern States, and the increasing demand for it, will lead to 
the re-opening of the pits, that are now abandoned in New England. 
In coming to the conclusion, that the anthracite of Worcester, and 
even that of Rhode Island, are inferior to the Pennsylvania anthra- 


* According to the experiments of Mr. Bull, a pound of the best Pennsylvania 
anthracite maintained ten degrees of heat in a room, 13 hours and 40 minutes; a 
pound of the Rhode Island coal maintained the same heat in the same room, 9 hours 
and 30 minutes; and a pound of the Worcester coal, kept up the same heat only 7 
hours and 50 minutes. It is a curious fact that the specific gravity of the Worces- 
ter coal, is one third greater than that of the coal from the two former localities. 


46 Geology of Massachusetis. 


cite, geological considerations confirm the results of experiments. 
Baron Humboldt, who has probably seen more of the rocks of 
the globe, than any man living, remarks, that ‘‘ anthracite is a 
more ancient formation than coal, and a more recent formation than 
graphite, or carburetted iron. Carbon becomes more hydrogenated, 
in proportion as it approaches the secondary rocks.” ‘This last sen- 
tence, divested of its technical obscurity, means, if I understand it, 
that the newer the rock in which the carbon is found, the greater will 
be the quantity of hydrogen combined with it: and we know that an 
increase of hydrogen, will render coal more combustible. Now if 
I am correct in the opinion, that the Worcester anthracite is contain- 
ed in older rocks than that in Rhode Island, and the anthracite of 
Pennsylvania, in rocks still newer than those of Rhode Island, 
we might expect, that the newer would prove the best for fuel, 
and the older the poorest, because containing the least hydro- 
gen. ‘The quantity of carbon, however, in the Worcester coal, 
is believed to be nearly as great, as in that from Rhode Island 
and Pennsylvania; although no analysis has been made of the for- 
mer. But carbon is less combustible than hydrogen. Yet1 can 
hardly believe, that a coal, which contains probably not less than 
90 per centum of carbon, should not be employed, in some way or 
other, as valuable fuel. 

The formation which I have denominated gray wacke, and which 
contains the anthracite in Rhode Island, extends northerly in interrup- 
ted patches, nearly across the whole of Massachusetts; as may be 
seen on the Map. ‘The most southern patch, embraces nearly the 
whole of Bristol and part of Plymouth county: the second ex- 
tends from Wrentham to Dedham: the third includes several towns 
in the vicinity of Boston; and the fourth is in Rowley and Newbury 
in Essex county. 1 know of no reason, why one part of this forma- 
tion should contain anthracite rather than another: and hence we 
may reasonably look for it in any part of the graywacke formation, 
exhibited onthe Map. ‘The transition mica slate, containing the Wor- 
cester anthracite, occupies, as the Map will show, a large portion of 
the northeastern part of the state ; and it would not be strange, if oth- 
er beds of that mineral] should be found in it. 


Graphite, Plumbago, or Black Lead. 


This substance has the color of lead, leaves a trace like that metal 
upon paper, and bears the common name, black lead; butit contains no 
lead. Itis composed of above 90 per centum of carbon, and the rest is 


Geology of Massachusetts. 47 


iron and earthy matter. Hence it differs but little from some varieties 
of anthracite. It seems indeed to be the form in which carbon occurs 
in the oldest of the rocks. In Massachusetts it exists in gneiss, at 
the most important locality, which is in Sturbridge. It there occurs 
in a bed, varying in width from an inch to about two feet, and trace- 
able along the surface, nearly one hundred rods. A number of years 
ago this bed was opened; and several tons of the graphite obtained. 
It was then abandoned ; but within a few years the exploration has 
been recommenced, and already more than a hundred tons have been 
obtained. In some places the excavation is six or seven feet deep. 
The quality of the graphite is excellent; and would not suffer by com- 
parison, with almost any in the world. ‘l’o what extent it may be ob- 
tained, it is not possible at present to determine. The fact, that the 
bed descends, almost perpendicularly, into the earth, is rather unfavor- 
able to the miner. Yet, as itis found upon elevated ground, the 
mine can be conveniently drained by lateral cuts or adits to a consid- 
erable depth; and probably the exploration may be_ profitably con- 
tinued for a long time with little machinery. 

Graphite is employed for pencils, crucibles, lubricating machinery, 
&c. It occurs at several other localities in Massachusetts, besides that 
in Sturbridge, but not in large quantities, exeept perhaps in Hinsdale. 
It is said that a good bed of it has been opened in New Hampshire. 


A substitute for Emery. 


No real emery has yet been found in Massachusetts; but a rock 
composed of garnet and anthophyllite or augite, occurs in North 
Brookfield, which is employed as a substitute for that mineral, and 
it is said to answer well. ‘The powder of the garnet, although much 
inferior in hardness to real emery, is indeed sometimes called in com- 
merce, red emery. ‘The rock in Brookfield is abundant, and may 
prove valuable. 

Mineral Waters. 


No mineral springs of much notoriety are found in the state, al- 
though chalybeate springs are very common, and are useful in 
cutaneous and some other complaints. Nearly all these springs 
rise in low ground. containing bog ore. The Hopkinton spring is 
of this description, and is probably more resorted to than any 
other in the state. This contains, among other ingredients, car- 
bonic acid and carbonate of lime and iron. The spring in Brook- 
field is similarly situated, and contains some magnesia and soda, as 


. 


48 Geology of Massachusetts. 


well as iron. It is a place of some regort. .A mineral spring exists 
in Shutesbury, abounding in muriate of lime, and it is somewhat visi- 
ted. Chalybeate springs exist in South Hadley, Deerfield, and in- 
deed, in almost every town in the state. In Mendon I was shown a 
mineral well, in the waters of which, chemical tests indicate muriate of 
lime and carbonic acid in a free state. No use was made of the 
water, except as a substitute for yeast. . 

In Williamstown is a tepid spring very much secerialiay that in 
New Lebanon, N. Y. Bubbles of gas are constantly escaping, 
which, according to Prof. Dewey, are atmospheric air, and not sim- 
ply nitrogen, which is common in such springs. This spring furnishes 
a convenient place for a bathing establishment; and though the saline 
ingredients are in small quantity, the water is useful in several cuta- 
neous disorders. In Adams, Pittsfield, and Great Barrington, are 
springs useful for the same complaints. In Hinsdale is a spring from 
which issues sulphuretted hydrogen; and from the decomposition of 
this gas, a deposit of sulphur is made upon the earth around. 


Other non-metallic Minerals ; either useful or ornamental. 


It may be well in this place, perhaps, to notice briefly a few other 
mineral substances in the state, such as are employed in Europe for 
useful or ornamental purposes. In this country the demand for them 
is yet comparatively small, and we have few artists devoted to their 
preparation ; so that no demand exists for these minerals, as is the 
case also with our porphyries. 

In Hatfield, is an immense quantity of the sulphate of barytes, of a 
superior quality. Within a few years, a patent has been taken out in 
England, for the use of this substance, as a paint, to be employed in 
those situations where lead paint is liable to be acted upon by moist- 
ure, acids and other chemical agents. In such cases, this barytic 
paint is excellent. I have been in the habit, for several years, of hav- 
ing various articles in the laboratory, such as the pneumatic cistern, 
gazometer, &c. covered with it; and it answers a good purpose, al- 
though I have prepared it, not according to the patent, but simply. by 
grinding it in a plaster mill and mixing it with oil. ‘The greatest de- 
fect in this paint, seems to be, that it has less body than lead, although 
I doubt not that a remedy may be found for this difficulty. When 
the barytes is thoroughly pulverized, and mixed with boiled linseed 
oil and Jampblack, it is superior to any thing I have ever seen, for 
labeling glass bottles, &c. in a laboratory, and indeed for any situa- 
tion exposed to active chemical agents. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 49 


The new alkali, lithia, is found chiefly in two minerals, called peta- 
lite and spodumene, which, in Europe, are very rare. But in Mas- 
sachusetts they occur in very great quantities; particularly the latter. 

. The former is found in Bolton and Westfield, and the latter in Goshen, 
Chesterfield, Norwich and Sterling. The lithia can now be obtain- 
ed, by a chemical process, from the minerals of these localities, in any 
quantity ; and should it prove to be a useful substance, as every alkali 
is likely to be, these minerals may become an object of importance. 

Among the minerals in the State, that may be employed by the 
lapidaries, for ornamental purposes, may be mentioned chalcedony. 
Almost all its varieties occur in the greenstone ranges, in the valley 
of the Connecticut, and some of the agates which it forms are quite 
large, and need only polishing to be elegant. It occurs also in vari- 
ous other parts of the state, and in masses considerably large; but 
perhaps at none of the localities in such quantity, and of such quality, 
as to render it worthy the attention of the lapidary. 

Agates, both banded and brecciated, are found in the State, made 
up of quartz, hornstone, chalcedony, &c. of various colors. The 
largest and most perfect specimen of quartzose agate breccia, which 
I have found, was shown me at Rochester Centre; and I was told it 
was broken from a much larger mass, in the same town. 

In Saugus, near the center, is a fine locality of red jasper. It is 
not unfrequently striped, and if needed for ornaments, would un- 
doubtedly admit a fine polish. ‘The bed or vein has not been ex- 
plored at all, except that a few fragments have been broken off by 
the passing mineralogist. 

We have beryls, somewhat numerous, and sometimes very large ; 
but probably they are not delicate enough, and are too much divided 
by seams, to be employed for elegant ornaments. 

A garnet or cinnamon stone was found by Professor Webster in 
Carlisle, which, in its natural state, isa splendid gem. Good speci- 
mens, however, cannot now be obtained, without farther exploration 
of the soil or the rock. . 

The quartz crystals, that occur at several localities, are very per- 
fect, and might be used for watch seals, ring stones, spectacles, &c.; 
those, for instance, found at Pelham, Southampton and Williams- 
burgh. ‘The smoky quartz occurs at a few localities, and is fine for 
ornaments. At Southampton, Pelham and Middlefield, is found the 
yellow quartz, which, in some instances, can scarcely be distinguish- 
ed from genuine topaz. ‘The rose red quartz occurs at several places, 


Vou. XXIL.—No. 1. 7 


50 Geology of Massachusetts. 


as at Chelmsford, Chesterfield, Chester, Williamsburgh and Blan- 
ford; and sometimes, I am inclined to believe, of a good quality to 
be wrought into ornamental articles; particularly, at one or two lo- 
calities recently discovered. The amethyst, which occurs in green-. 
stone, along Connecticut river, is of a delicate color, and, if it can 
be obtained in sufficient quantity, may be spose ed in the ornamen- 
tal arts. 

Some of the adularia that is common in the gneiss of Brimfield, 
Southbridge, &c. I presume, would answer well for watch seals, 
rings and trinkets; particularly, a greenish variety, occurring near 
the center of the latter place. Ihave seen an elegant watch seal, 
cut from the adularia of this locality. - 

It ought not to be forgotten, that amber has been found in Marthe’ S 
Vineyard, at Gay Head, and on Nantucket. ‘ At the latter place, one 
or two masses were und weighing a pound or more. ‘The tertiary 
formation of these islands is pr ecisely the place where we might ex- 
pect to find this mineral, especially in connexion with the lignite. 


METALS AND THEIR ORES. 


It remains only, in giving the economical geology of Massachusetts, 
to describe the metals and metallic ores which have been found in 
the state, and are applicable to useful purposes. I shall begin with 
the metal most abundant and most useful: viz 


Tron. 


The bog iron ore is most common, but I shall give an account of 
the different species in regular order. 


Mine of Arsenical Iron and Carbonate of Iron, in Worcester. 


In the town of Worcester, in mica slate, is a’ bed of these ores, 
which was explored to some depth, a number of years ago, in search 
of the precious metals. A little galena or lead ore is found also, in 
the same mine. As the excavations are now nearly filled up, it is 
impossible to judge-of the extent of this bed.. 

Arsenical iron is seldom explored for the purpose of getting malle- 
able iron from it; although it is sometimes employed for the arsenic 
it contains, and for the preparation of sulphuret of arsenic. The 
carbonate of iron is an excellent ore; and has received the name of 
steel ore, because it may be readily converted into steel. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 51 


Mine of Carbonate of Fron and Zine, in Sterling. 


This is a bed, in mica slate, just like that at Worcester; and was 
extensively explored forty or fifty years ago, for the same purpose 
which led to the opening of that bed, viz. the discovery of gold and 
silver. ‘The carbonate is the most abundant ore, and lies scattered 
about the excavation, in considerable quantities; although the sulphu- 
ret is common, which is sometimes arsenical. A reddish, foliated sul- 
phuret of zinc also occurs here, in considerable quantity, and some 
sulphuret of lead. Whether this mine will be found worth exploring, 
it is difficult, in its present state, to determine. If it afford the car- 
bonate of iron in large quantities, it will certainly repay the effort. It 
lies about a mile and a half south east of the center of the town. 


Chromate of Iron. 


It ought to be recollected, that a small rounded mass of this ore, 
so valuable in the preparation of the paint called chrome yellow, was 
found, a few years since, in Cummington, by Dr. Porter. 


j Phosphate of Iron. 


The earthy variety of this ore has been found, in considerable 
quantity, at the mineral spring in Hopkinton. It forms a bed, one 
or two feet below the surface, and has been employed as a pigment. 
It is said to exist also near Plymouth. 


_ Sulphuret of fron or Iron Pyrites. 


This is the yellow ore, so frequently mistaken for gold. It occurs 
more or less in almost every rock; but is of no use, unless it exists 
in large quantities, and is of that variety which easily decomposes. In 
such a case, it may be converted into the sulphate of iron; that is, into 
copperas. ‘The ore is broken up, and exposed to the action of air and 
moisture, when the change takes place, and the lixivium is evapora- 
ted to obtain the copperas. In Massachusetts, one can hardly avoid 
meeting with iron pyrites, and in the western part of Worcester coun- 
ty, the traveller cannot but notice, that nearly all the rocks are coated 
over with iron rust. ‘This is the result of the decomposition I have 
spoken of. In Hubbardston, the sulphate is so abundant, that a manu- ~ 
factory of copperas has been established, and I believe success has 
thus far attended the enterprise. I should presume, that copperas 
might be manufactured in several other towns south of Hubbards- 


52 Geology of Massachusetts. 


ton; as in North Brookfield and Southbridge, although the rocks 
do not appear as highly impregnated with pyrites in any place as in 
Hubbardston. 

The decomposition of pyrites, in large quantities, often produces 
a considerable degree of heat; and sometimes pieces of rocks are 
driven off with explosion. This is one of the sources of those numer- 
ous stories which one hears in the country, concerning noises heard, 
and lights with smoke, seen in the mountains. Such occurrences 
excite the belief of the existence of valuable mines in the vicini- 
ty ; but they evince the existence of nothing more than iron pyrites. 


Magnetic oxide of Iron. 


This is a valuable ore, affording from 50 to 90 per cent, of iron. 
It exists in several places in Massachusetts, and on the borders of 
the state. 


Hawley Iron Mine. 


The principal ore here, is the magnetic oxide, which is very good, 
and the bed is favorably situated for exploration. ‘The ore does not 
seem to be abundant, the bed being rarely more than one or two feet 
wide. It has been wrought to some extent; but the operations are 
at present suspended. It belongs to Hon. Samuel C. Allen. Mica- 
ceous oxide of iron occurs at the same bed. 

The same bed of ore makes its appearance a mile or two south 
of the excavation; and, also as I have been told, two or three miles 
north, in Charlemont. 


In Bernardston. 


As already remarked in the postscript to limestone, this forms a 
bed several feet thick in limestone, dipping at a moderate angle to the 
south east. When the ore was formerly worked, some complaint was 
made, as if it did not produce the best of iron. But probably the 
trials then made were very imperfect. The ore is doubtless very 
abundant, and I should think well worthy the attention of the iron 
manufacturer. 


In Somerset, Vt. 


This bed is similarly situated to that in Hawley, and in the same 
range of talcose slate, although twenty miles north of the north line 
of Massachusetts. The ore, yielding 78 per cent of iron, is of the 


Geology of Massachusetts. 58 


first quality; and this spot is peculiarly interesting on another ac- 
count, to which I shall refer in the sequel. 


In Winchester, N. H. 


This bed is only two or three miles north of the line of Massachu- 
setts, and the ore is said to be abundant, though for some reason, the 
working of it has ceased. The ore very much resembles that from 
Franconia in New Hampshire. 


In Cumberland, R. I. 


Dr. Robinson says that he has obtained magnetic oxide of iron, 
from “most of the thirteen mine holes” which he visited in that 
town. But the principal -bed of ore, lies about two miles north east 
of the meeting house, and constitutes a large hill. It is obtained with 
great facility by blasting. It contains however several foreign min- 
erals, so that as it is now worked, it yields only about 30 per cent. 
of iron. This is probably far less than it contains ; for it has a high 
specific gravity. The ore is smelted principally in Massachusetts. 
Itis owned by General Leach of Easton, and will furnish an inex- 
haustible supply. 

Magnestic oxide of iron is found at other places in Massachusetts ; 
as at Woburn, in a vein of greenstone, associated with sulphuret of 
Copper ; but at none of the localities, in quantity sufficient to make 
it an object for the miner.., 


Micaceous oxide of fron. 


This ore, which is found abundantly at Hawley with the magnetic 
oxide, furnishes perhaps the most elegant specimens in the world ; 
and I know not why it should not produce good iron. Indeed, I be- 
lieve it has been smelted within a few years, along with the magnetic 
oxide. 


Vein of micaceous oxide in Montague. 


Near the mouth of Miller’s river is a hill of considerable extent, 
which appears to be traversed by numerous veins of this ore. The 
largest which comes in sight, is in the south east part of the hill, 
at the top of a ledge of mica slate and granite, and is several feet in 
width. It is favorably situated for exploration, and unless the ore is 
injured by an occasional mixture of Sulphuret of iron, I do not see 
why it might not be profitably wrought. Wood is very abundant in 
the vicinity, and it is not far from Connecticut river. Good mica- 
ceous oxide of iron, yields about 70 per cent. of excellent iron. 


54 Geology of Massachusetts. 


According to Professor Webster, thin veins of micaceous iron ore, 
exists in the porphyry of Malden, which were formerly wrought to 
some extent. It occurs also in graywacke, at Brighton, and in green- 
stone at Charlestown, according to the Messrs. Danas. ° 


Beds of Brown Oxide cf Iron. 


This species of ore is of an excellent quality, and it occurs in the 
loose soil above the rocks, so as to be easily obtained. Hence it is 
used to a greater extent, perhaps, in our country, than any other 
species. A very extensive series of beds of this ore, accompanies 
the limestone that is so abundant along the western margin of 
Connecticut, Massachusetts and Vermont; although, as the beds 
lie upon the clay that is deposited above all the solid rocks, they 
have no necessary connexion with the limestone. 


Beds in Lenox. 


These have been explored to some extent in the village, anda 
mile or two farther west. ‘The ore is good, I believe, but at present 
it is not used. 


Beds in Richmond. 


These appear to be numerous and extensive. ‘They are wrought 
to some extent. 


Bed in West Stockbridge. 


This furnishes good ore, and is explored more extensively than 
any other I saw in the county. The farmer who owns it réceives 
thirty seven cents and a half per ton, for the privilege of digging it. 


In Salisbury, Ct. 


The beds here are very large, and have been extensively ex- 
plored. The Salisbury iron is known far and wide. 


In Bennington, Vt. 


Here also the same ore is dug to some extent; and these beds 
seem to deserve a notice, because they lie, like those in Salisbury, 
upon the borders of Massachusetts. 

In all the beds of brown oxide of iron mentioned above, we find 
the brown hematite in all its forms, the compact variety, and the ochrey 
brown oxide, or yellow ochre. Manganese also is found in them all, 
and at Bennington, in large quantities; although I have been told, that 
this locality is nearly exhausted. It was of a superior quality. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 55 


The red oxide of tron is found, in comparatively small quantities, 
at the localities above mentioned. It exists, also, in other places 
in the State; although it is not, as yet, found in large quantities. 
Argillaceous oxide of iron is likewise found at most of the hema- 
tite beds above described. 


In Cranston, R. 1. 


From this place General Leach procures, as he told me, very ex- 
cellent brown oxide of iron, for the supply of some of his furnaces 
in Massachusetts; and he represents the bed as inexhaustible. 


Argillaceous Oxide of Iron. 


This is the most common species of iron ore in Massachusetts. 
There are several varieties found here. On Nantucket and Mar- 
tha’s Vineyard, particularly at Gay Head, we find the slaty and 
nodular varieties; and at the latter place, according to F’. A. Green, 
Esq., is found the columnar variety. On the Vineyard these varie- 
ties are abundant enough to be an object for the manufacturer; and 
during the last war, I was told, they were employed in the furnaces 
on the continent. Ina pond, in Sharon, has been found the lenticu- 
lar variety of this ore. 


Bog Ore. m 


This variety of the argillaceous oxide, is far more abundant than 
any other, and has been used extensively in the manufacture of cast 
iron; for which it is chiefly adapted. In the following towns it is 
found in large quantities: viz. Groton, North, West, and South 
Brookfield, Carver, Hopkinton, Hardwick, New Braintree, Oak- 
ham, Berlin, Sturbridge, Southbridge, Freetown, Dartmouth, Ro- 
chester, Troy, Easton and Sharon; and in the following, it exists in 
greater or less quantities; in Middleborough, Malden, Seekonk, 
Sheffield, Templeton, Warwick, Williamstown, Greenfield, North- 
ampton, Springfield, Williamsburgh, Dalton, Holland, Wales, Nor- 
ton, Mansfield, Bridgewater, Stoughton, Spencer, Gloucester, and 
on Martha’s Vineyard ; indeed I can hardly doubt that more or less 
of this ore may be found in nearly every town in the State. It was 
so common that, at length, I ceased to inquire for it, and the locali- 
ties are so numerous that I have not attempted to exhibit them all 
upon the Map. 

it ought to be recollected, that the process by which bog ore is de- 
posited, is in many places tow going on, particularly at the bottom 


56— Geology of Massachusetts. 


of ponds. The interval between one dredging and another, was so 
variously stated to me, that I suspect it differs greatly in different 
places. I presume, however, that it ought never to be less than twen- 
ty years. But the fact, that there will be a renewal of the deposit 
after a certain time is interesting; because it shows that this mineral 
can never be entirely exhausted. 

Gen. Shepard Leach, of Easton, is the most extensively engaged 
in the iron manufactory of any man in the Commonwealth. He 
owns one blast and three air furnaces in Easton; one blast furnace 
in Foxborough, and another in Walpole; and one blast furnace and 
four air furnaces, in Chelmsford. In these he employs not far from 
five hundred men. He generally mixes the different sorts of ore, 
or at least, two or three of them together for smelting. Extensive 


iron works are also carried on in Wareham. Several furnaces exist 
in Berkshire, and a few in Worcester county. 

The preceding view of our deposits of iron, demonstrates that we 
abound in this useful metal, and that the demand, for centuries to 
come, cannot exhaust it. 


Ochres, &¢c. used as paints. 


There are two kinds of ochre, the red and the yellow, which 
are merely pulverulent varieties of the red and brown oxide of iron. 
The yellow ochre is abundant with our hematite and argillaceous 
ores, and is frequently employed asa pigment. According to Mr. 
C. T. Jackson, red ochre occurs in Boylston in a bed four or five 
inches thick, mixed with clay. It has already been mentioned, that 
the earthy phosphate of iron in Hopkinton, is employed as a blue 
paint. Prof. Dewey mentions that a yellow earth is found in Williams- 
town, from which great quantities of yellow ochre are obtamed by 
washing. Dr. J. Porter states, that yellow earth occurs in Monroe, 
which, when purified, affords a “pale red paint.” The process of 
preparing it he says is now suspended for want of a demand. 


Lead. 


Several ores of this metal.are enumerated by mineralogists, as oc- 
curring in Massachusetts; but none is found in sufficient quantity to 
render it of any statistical interest, except the sulphuret, commonly 
called galena; and all the important veins of this species are con- 
fined to the vicinity of Connecticut river. No fewer than thirteen of 
these occur in that region of sufficient importance to deserve notice. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 57 


All these are in mica slate or granite; or they pass from the one 
rock into the other. 


In Southampton. 


The vein in the northern part of this town has attracted more at- 
tention than any other in the region, and has been several times de- 
scribed. It is six or eight feet wide, where it is has been explored, 
and traverses granite and mica slate, the matrix or gangue contain- 
ing the ore, being a mixture of quartz and sulphate of barytes. It 
has been opened forty or fifty feet deep, in several places, and masses 
of ore were dug out from half an inch to a foot in diameter. As the 
vein descends almost perpendicularly into the rock, water soon ac- 
cumulated in such quantities, as induced the proprietors to attempt 
reaching the vein by a horizontal drift or adit, from the bottom of 
the hill to the east. ‘This was a prodigious undertaking, as the open- 
ing must be carried nearly a quarter of a mile into the solid rock. 
Tt was persevered in however, at a great expense, for a distance of 
nine hundred feet, when one of the principal miners having died, and 
the price of lead having fallen two or three hundred per cent, all op- 
erations were suspended, and I believe the proprietors wish to dis- 
pose of the mine. Had they continued this drift a few feet farther, 
there is every probability that the principal vein would have been 
struck, from one hundred and fifty to two hundred feet below the 
surface. Perhaps, however, the work cannot be successfully and 
profitably resumed, until the market shall cease to be glutted with 
lead from Missouri; but as there can be little doubt, that immense 
quantities of ore may be obtained at this spot, it may then probably be 
explored with advantage. I do not doubt, however, that those who 
first examined this mine were mistaken in the opinion, that this vein 
extends from Montgomery to Hatfield, a distance of twenty miles. 
Lead may indeed _ be found at intervals along a line connecting those 
places. But I have every reason to suppose, that it proceeds from 
several distinct and independent veins. 

The principal ore above described is the sulphuret; but there have 
been found here also, the carbonate, sulphate, molybdate, muriate 
and phosphate of lead, along with the sulphuret of zinc, pyritous cop- 
per, and fluor spar. Mineralogists will greatly regret, that mining 
operations have been suspended here, because they were anticipa- 
ting the development of rich specimens of these and other minerals. 


Vol. XXII.—No. 1. 8 


58 Geology of Massachusetts. 


Another vein of galena exists in the south part of Southampton, 
near the line of Montgomery. It appears for several rods on the 
surface, but is only a foot or twoin breadth. A few years ago, efforts 
were made to open this vein by a horizontal adit, but the proprietors 
have become discouraged and abandoned the undertaking. 


In Northampton. 


This vein is only a short distance north of the principal vein im 
Southampton, above described. The gangueis radiated quartz, and 
the walls are mica slate. Yellow blende or sulphuret of zine abounds 
here; and the vein was formerly explored to a considerable depth. 
It is several feet wide. 


In Williamsburgh. 


The first galena vein to be noticed in this town, lies near the south- 
ern part; extending indeed into Northampton. Its width cannot be 
ascertained, being covered partially with soil. ‘The gangue is quartz ; 
but the galena is not abundant near the surface, and no exploration 
has been made. Other minerals occur here which render the place 
interesting to mineralogists. 

The second vein is near the north-eastern part of the town, and 
probably extends into Whately. It is two or three feet wide, and 
the gangue, as in nearly every other vein of lead in this region, is 
quartz. Manganese is found in the same gangue. 

A third vein of quartz with galena, occurs in this town, a mile 
or two north east of the one last mentioned. The quartz, how- 
ever, appears only in loose masses on the surface, but to such an ex- 
tent, as can be explained only on the supposition, that a vein exists 
in the rock beneath the soil. Pyritous copper is found in connexion 
with the galena at this place. 


In Goshen. 


According to the statements of Mr. Alanson Nash, who has given 
a map and description of the Jead veins and mines of Hampshire 
county, in the twelfth volume of the American Journal of Science, 
the same indications of a galena vein appear a little west of the 
centre of Goshen, as those mentioned in respect to the third vein in 
Williamsburgh just noticed, viz. the occurrence of masses of quartz 
containing galena. The rock in the region is mica slate and quartz. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 59 
In Whately. 


In this town are three distinct veins, containing lead. One is about 
half a mile east of the second vein described in Williamsburgh. It 
extends a short distance into Williamsburgh, and more than a mile 
into Whately. In its whole course, but particularly at its southern 
part, it contains oxide of manganese along with galena. 

A second vein, three or four feet wide, exists in a high ridge of 
granite towards the south west part of the town. It may be traced 
along this ridge about three quarters of a mile. 

The third vein is in the north-west part of the town, extending 
some distance into Conway. Galena, in quartz, is the only ore that 
appears on the surface. The width of the vein is six or seven 
feet, and it traverses both granite and mica slate. It runs along the 
western margin of a high hill, so that if it should ever be explored, 
a lateral drift would be easily made. 


In Hatfield. 


About two miles west of the village in this town, we find a vein of 
sulphate of barytes, from one to four feet wide at the surface, run- 
ning in a north-westerly direction and containing galena. A shaft 

has been sunk in two places, from fifteen to twenty feet deep; and 

the vein was found rapidly to widen in descending. ‘The immense 
quantity of barytes found here, gives the locality a peculiar interest 
to the mineralogist. 


In Leverett. 


Although this town lies on the eastern side of Connecticut river, 
yet the granite and mica slate, occurring there, exactly resemble the 
same rocks found on the west side of the river; and there can be no 
doubt that both belong to the same general formation. Two veins, 
the ore being chiefly galena, are found of precisely the same charac- 
ter as those on the opposite side of the river. That in the south east 
part of the town is in granite, not more than a foot or two wide at 
the surface, and the gangue is sulphate of barytes. The other is a 
mile and a half to the north of the first; the gangue is quartz, and 
there is almost an equal quantity of galena and pyritous copper ; 
blende also occurs in small quantities. This vein is several feet 
wide, and runs through granite and mica slate. Both this and the 
one first mentioned, have been explored to the depth of a few feet. 

It is impossible to form any confident opinion as to the probable 
-quantity of lead, which is contained in the several veins which have 


60 Geology of Massachusetis. 


been described, except, perhaps, in regard to that in Southampton, 
which has been explored to a considerable extent. In many in- 
stances appearances at the surface are quite favorable; but whether 
the veins become wider, like that in Hatfield, or narrower, as they 
descend, can be determined only by actual exploration. Of one 
thing, however, I think, we may be assured, from the facts that 
have been stated; viz. that the central parts of Hampshire coun- 
ty contain extensive deposits of lead, which may be of great value 
to posterity, if not to the present generation. Probably many more 
veins will hereafter be discovered, since little examination has been 
made with a view to bring them to light. 
Copper. 

This valuable metal occurs in numerous places near the junction 
of the greenstone and sandstone, in the valley of the Connecticut, be- 
tween New Haven and Vermont. Several veins of copper ore are 
found in Connecticut; and the only one in that state, that has been 
explored to any considerable extent, lies on the borders of Massachu- 
setts, viz. in Granby. It has long been known under the name of 
Simsbury mines, although it is within the limits of Granby. Many 
years ago, before the war of the revolution, I believe, this vein was 
explored to a considerable extent. Afterwards the Government of 
Connecticut made use of the abandoned shafts and galleries for a 
State prison. Since the removal of this prison to Wethersfield, the 
exploration has been resumed, by a new company, I believe, and, I 
am told, with success. So far as I could ascertain from specimens, 
which I found there several years ago, and from some recently ob-— 
tained, the principal part of the ore is the gray oxide, associated, 
however, with the green carbonate.* 


In Greenfield. 

In the north eastern part of this town, on the banks of Con- 
necticut river, are two veins of copper, about a mile apart; the most 
northern one being about one hundred rods below the mouth of a 
small stream, called Fall river, and the same distance in a direct line 
from the cataract in Connecticut river, sometimes called Miller’s 
Falls; but lately and more appropriately, Turner’s Falls. These 
veins are several feet in width, and they pass into a hill of greenstone 


* They now find the compact red oxide, as is said, in great abundance. 


Geology of Massachusetts. 61 


7 


on one hand, and under the river, on the other hand, into sandstone. 
The gangue is sulphate of barytes and toadstone, and the ores are 
the green carbonate and pyritous copper. Actual exploration alone 
can determine whether these veins might be profitably worked. 

On the most southern of the small islands, in the middle of Tur- 
ner’s Falls, has been found pyritous copper, of a rich quality, 
and in considerable quantity. Indeed, several varieties of the sand- 
stone rocks in the vicinity, appear to be considerably impregnated 
with copper. 

Pyritous copper is associated with iron, in a vein, in greenstone, 
at Woburn; but not, probably, in a sufficient quantity to be worth 
mining. At several places in Cumberland, R. I., where excavations 
were formerly made, are found gray oxide of copper, and pyritous 
copper with the green and blue carbonates. 


Zine. 


The sulphuret of this mineral occurs, as has already been noti- 
ced, in several of the lead veins in Hampshire County, and in some 
of them in sufficient quantity, no doubt, to be wrought with advantage, 
should these veins be ever opened. Those in Southampton, Hatfield 
and Leverett, abound most in this ore. It is useful in the manufac- 
ture of brass and white vitriol. 


Manganese. 


In a metallic state this mmeral is of no use; and indeed, it is reduced 
to that state with great difficulty. But in the state of oxide, it is 
extensively employed, both to remove color from glass and to im- 
part colors; also in painting porcelain and glazing pottery, and 
still more extensively within.a few years, in the manufacture of the 
chloride of lime, now so generlly used in bleaching and for disin- 
fection. 

At least two ores of manganese abound in the western part of 
Massachusetts and on the borders of New Hampshire. It has been 
already remarked, that more or less of the gray oxide exists in the 
iron beds of Berkshire and Bennington, Vt. In the vicinity of Con- 
necticut River, however, or rather on the eastern slope of Hoosac 
mountain, distinct veins and beds of manganese are found. 


In Plainfield. 


Beds of the oxide of manganese occur in two places in this town— 
one a mile west of the center, and the other near the south-west cor- 


62 Geology of Massachusetts. 


ner of the town; and both in talcose slate. Two ores are associ- 
ated at both these places, viz. the common gray or black oxide and 
the silicious oxide; the former investing the latter as a black crust, 
and most probably proceeding from its decomposition ; while the 
latter, when newly broken, is of a delicate rose red. I suspect the 
silicious oxide predominates at these places; and from these beds, 
probably came by diluvial action, those numerous rounded masses 
of silicious oxide in the vicinity of Cummington meeting-house ; al- 
though a deep valley intervenes and the distance is three or four 
miles. An -attempt was made, some years ago, to explore one of 
these beds, under the impression that the ore was iron. But how 
extensive either of them is, it is difficult to determine, as each seems 
to consist of a number of small beds—or rather the ore is inter- 
laminated with the slate. The occurrence of so much silicious ox- 
ide at these localities, is very interesting to the mineralogist, because 
this ore is so rare in Europe. 


In Conway. 


A distinct vein of the black oxide of manganese several feet wide 
occurs in the southeast part of this town, the gangue being quartz. 
It has not been explored at all; nor is the manganese ore very 
abundant at the surface. I do not doubt however, that this ore may 
be found here in large quantities. 


In Hinsdale, N. H. 


An extensive bed or vein of the black, and silicious oxides 
of manganese have been found in this town. It appears near the 
top. of a hill and the adjacent rocks are not visible. The ore strong- 
ly resembles that from Plainfield. 


In Winchester, N. H. 


Between one and two miles east of the center village in this town, 
may be seen large quantities of the black and red oxides of this me- 
tal of the same character asin Hinsdale. ‘These localities have, 
as yet, attracted no attention except from a few mineralogists. 
My information and specimens were furnished me by Mr. John L. 
Alexander of Winchester. 


Tin. 


I am able to say with perfect confidence that this interesting me- 
tal exists in Massachusetts; but can add little more. I found 


Geology of Massachusetts. 63 


only a single crystal of its oxide, weighing 50 grains. But this I 
dug myself from a block of granite in the north-east part of Goshen, 
and on reducing it to metallic tin, it corresponds exactly in every res- 
pect with that metal from England. I have never been able to find 
any more specimens, but it ought be to borne in mind that in England, 
according to a geological writer of that country, ‘it is generally in the 
vicinity of a vein of tin ore, that disseminated grains of tinstone are 
found in the rock.” 


Silver. 


The only place in the state where this metal has been discovered, 
is atthe Southampton lead mines; it there exists in a small proportion 
—only 124 ounces to the ton, in the galena. ‘This isa little greater 
than the average proportion in the English lead mines: but it is 
hardly worth the labor of separating it. It is not improbable that when 
several other ores in the state, such as arsenical iron, sulphuret of iron, 
and zinc, shall be accurately analyzed, they will be found, as in other 
countries, to contain a larger proportion of silver. I would however, 
rather repress than encourage, farther researches for this metal ; for 
as I shall soon have occasion to state more fully, greater expense has 
been incurred, and more weakness and folly exhibited in such re- 
searches, than the community is generally aware of. 


Gold. 


It may perhaps excite a smile, to see gold occupying a place in a 
description of the minerals of Massachusetts. It has not indeed been 
found in this state; but Iam able in this place, to announce the exis- 
tence of a deposit of this metal, in the southern part of Vermont; 
and I feel no small degree of confidence, that it will be found in 
Massachusetts. A statement of the grounds of this belief, may save 
me from the charge of extravagant expectations. 

I have already described an iron mine, as occurring in Somerset, 
Vermont. It is owned by S. V. S. Wilder, Esq. of Brooklyn, New 
York, who has erected a bloomery forge near the spot. Sometime ago, 
one of the workmen engaged in these iron works, saw in the American 
Journal of Science, a suggestion of Professor Eaton of ‘Troy, that 
since the gold of the Southern States, and of Mexico, is in talcose 
slate, we might expect to find it in the same rock in New England ; 
especially about the head branches of Deerfield river. He commen- 
ced an examination in a brook near the mine, and was soon rewarded 


64 Geology of Massachusetts. 


by the discovery of a spherical mass of gold, of the value of more 
than a dollar; afterwards he found other small pieces. At the request 
of Mr. Wilder, I visited this spot a few weeks ago, and found that 
an individual conversant with the gold mines in the Southern States, 
and acquainted with the process of washing, the metal from the soil, 
had just been examining the region now spoken of. ‘The result 
was a conviction, that over several hundred acres at least, gold was 
common in the soil. In a bushel of dirt collected in various places, 
he found about three pennyweights of very pure gold. Mr. Wilder 
proceeded himself to exhibit to me an ocular demonstration of the ex- 
istence of gold in the soil, by washing for it. From about six quarts 
of dirt, taken a foot below the surface, we obtained (although not 
very skilful in manipulations of this sort) twenty or thirty small pieces, 
weighing about seven grains. Indeed, by the aid of my knife, I picked 
two or three pieces from the dirt. 

The iron ore is in beds in distinct talcose slate ; and a considerable 
part of the ore is the brown oxide, and contained im a porous quartz. 
In this quartz, were found several spherical pieces of gold, scarcely 
larger than a pigeon shot. Whether it exists, asin the Southern States, 
in finer particles in the yellowish iron ore, has not been ascertamed. 
But specimens of the quartz and iron at this place, cannot be distin- 
guished from what is called gold ore, at the gold mines in Virginia, and 
North Carolina. Indeed, a suite of specimens from the Somerset 
iron mine, could not be distinguished, except by labels, from a simi- 
lar suite from the south. 

In every case in which gold has been found at this place, in the 
soil, it was accompanied by more or less of iron sand, and some dis- 
tance north of the mine, neither could be found; but how far to the 
South and East it occurs, has not been ascertained. I am inclined 
however to believe, that the gold at this locality, will be found to be 
always associated with the iron. 

We were told at Somerset, that several years ago, a mass of gold 
was found in the bed of Deerfield river, three or four miles to the 
-south of the mine, which was sold for sixty eight dollars, and we had 
no reason to doubt the statement. Certain it is, that a few years since, 
a piece was discovered by Gen. Field, weighing eight and a half 
ounces, in New Fane, a town twelve or fifteen miles east of Somerset. 

Upon the whole, it appears to me that the facts above stated justify 
the conclusion, that there exists a gold region in the lower part of 
Vermont, of considerable extent and richness. It may be found to be 


Geology of Massachusetts. 65 


very extensive, and probably it is not confined exclusively to the tal- 
cose slate formation; for New Fane, I believe, contains but little of 
this rock. -The region west of Somerset is little known: the iron 
mine there, lies at the foot of the Green Mountains, and it is chiefly a 
mountain wilderness for sixteen or seventeen miles west of this spot. 

The talcose slate formation, containing the iron and gold in Som- 
erset, extends southerly, nearly across the state of Massachusetts ; 
passing through the towns of Rowe, Charlemont, the settlement called 
Zoar, Florida, Savoy, Hawley, Plainfield, Cummington, Worthington, 
Middlefield, &c. Indeed, I know of no place, where the formation 
is so perfectly developed in its characters, as in Hawley and Plain- 
field. ‘There is then, surely, as much ground for presuming that 
gold will be found in Massachusetts, as there was for predicting its 
discovery in Vermont. If an iron mine and porous quartz, with ox- 
ide of iron, be necessary, we have these in Hawley, in the talcose 
slate. And it ought to be recollected, that the Vermont gold was 
found at the source of Deerfield river, and that this stream runs di- 
rectly south into Massachusetts; and it would be rather strange, if 
so violent a torrent did not carry some of the diluvium, containing 
gold, at least as far as the limits of this state. The place where I sup- 
pose gold might be found, in Massachusetts, would be in the vicinity of 
the Hawley iron mine, or the Plainfield beds of manganese, or along 
the banks of Deerfield river, in Monroe, Florida, Zoar and Charle- 
mont: nor should the region around the limestone and iron ore, in 
Bernardston, be forgotten, in an examination for this metal, although 
the rock there is not talcose slate. ‘Talcose slate occurs also in 
many other places in the state; particularly in Berkshire county, on 
the Taconnic range of mountains, Saddle mountain, and other emin- 
ences; and here also are porous quartz and oxide of iron. I have 
found time to make only a slight examination for gold, in one or two 
of the places above mentioned.. The surest method of determining 
the point, would be to obtain some one, who is conversant with the 
gold regions at the South, and with the mode of washing it, to exam- 
ine the places I have mentioned. It may indeed be doubtful, whether 
the discovery of gold would be a public benefit; since, as your Ex- 
cellency has well observed, it might lead to “the greedy pursuit of 
this uncertain gain, and to the sure sacrifice of habits of industry and 
economy, and virtuous self-denial, which the ordinary pursuits and 
- requirements of business induce. We may doubt even, whether the 
grass-covered hills of our own New England, are not a better source 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 9 


66 Geology of Massachusetts. 


of wealth and contentment, than-the precious metals which the earth 
embosoms.” But, however political economy might decide these 
questions, I suppose there are few individuals who would willingly 
shut their eyes upon gold mines; and therefore 1 have made these 
suggestions on the subject, to prevent expenditure upon useless and 
ill-planned projects, in search of this precious metal. 


Idle search after Gold and Silver. 


Were the history of the wild and ill-directed efforts that have been 
made, even in Massachusetts, in search of the precious metals, to be 
written, it would furnish many striking illustrations of the importance 
of your Excellency’s suggestions. Permit me here to state a few 
facts on the subject. 

The large quantities of the precious metals carried to Europe from 
South America, soon after its discovery, naturally produced some 
expectation of finding similar treasures here. But I cannot learn 
that our forefathers expended large sums in making excavations, 
where there was no reasonable prospect of finding any thing valua- 
ble. It was reserved for their descendants to exhibit a credulity 
and superstitious ignorance on the subject, that are both lamentable 
and ridiculous. 

Perhaps, at the present day, a belief in the mysterious virtues af. the 
mineral rod, is the most common of these delusions. Probably many 
of our intelligent citizens can hardly credit the statement, that there 
are men in various parts of the state, who profess not a little skill in 
this enchantment, and are not unfrequently sent for, one or two days 
journey, to decide whether there be ore or springs of water in a par- 
ticular place. In general, but not always, these professors of divina- 
tion belong to the most ignorant classes in society; for not long since, a 
venerable and respectable man of good education, sincérely thought it 
his duty occasionally to peregrinate with his divining rod, because it 
would work in his hands; and not a few very intelligent men have a 
secret belief, that the branches of a witch hazel are attracted down- 
ward towards mineral substances, when in the hands of a certain in- 
dividual. | ee 

The following train of circumstances often takes place. A man, 
ignorant of mineralogy, finds upon his farm, a specimen of iron py- 
rites, or yellow mica, or galena, which he mistakes for gold or silver. 
Even if he shows it toa mineralogist and is told that he is mistaken, 
he suspects that his informant is deceiving him, in the hope of getting 


Geology of Massachusetts. 67 


possession of the prize himself. He resolves to begin an excavation. 
And he sees enough, in the shining particles of mica and feldspar 
that are thrown out, to buoy up his hopes, until his purse is well nigh 
drained. 

It was probably in some such way, that the excavations were made 
in Worcester and Sterling, at the mines of arsenical iron and carbon- 
ate of iron; although, in these cases, there would be sufficient ground 
for obtaining some of these ores, since they do sometimes contain 
silver. But I cannot conceive why such extensive excavations were 
made, when a chemist might have easily settled the question as to 
their nature, by analyzing 100 grains of the ore, unless it was on the 
erroneous supposition, which I find to be common, that metallic veins 
generally become much richer and larger, and even change their con- 
tents, as they descend into the earth. 

The decomposition of iron pyrites, producing heat and sometimes 
explosion, is supposed by some to be a strong indication of mineral 
riches in the earth beneath. ‘The man of the witch hazel rod is 
called, and if he confirms the suspicion, as he usually will, the ex- 
cavation is commenced ; nor is it suspended until a heavy draft has 
been made upon the man’s pecuniary resources. An extensive ex- 
cavation was made, many years ago, I am told, in Hubbardston, and 
from the character of the rock there, I suspect that iron pyrites gave 
the first impulse to the undertaking. In Pepperell, an individual has 
been engaged for several years, in pushing a drift into the rocks, 
which he has penetrated eight or ten rods; although individuals who 
have visited the spot, (I have not,) can discover nothing but iron 
pyrites. 

In the year 1815, an individual succeeded in getting a company 
formed and incorporated, with a capital of eighty thousand dollars, 
called the Easton lead and silver minmg Company. The fruits of 
their labor may be seen in an excavation, in red granite, nearly one 
hundred feet deep, at present nearly filled with water. I could not 
find a particle of ore, of any kind, in the fragments blasted out. A 
final stop was put to the work, by the killing of two men in blasting. 

Forty years since, a shaft was sunk in Mendon, in search of the 
precious metals. A little specular oxide of iron occurs at the place. 

Not many months since, an individual called upon me, with speci- 
mens of black blende or sulphuret of zinc, found in a neighboring 
town, and which he strongly suspected to be silver. I informed 
him of its true nature, and seeing that the vision had got strong hold 


68 _ Geology of Massachusetts. 


upon his mind, I did all in my power to persuade him not to engage 
in searching for the ore. But the only effect was to stimulate him 
to commence an exploration with more ardor. The zine was found 
in a loose piece of rock, lying in the field. ‘The man’s impression 
was, that even if that ore was of no use, it indicated something valu- 
able beneath. Accordingly, he commenced digging. Ere long his 
faith was strengthened, by some one’s discovering a light, during the 
darkness, near the spot; and the last time I heard from the man, he 
had penetrated the soil about seventy feet. 

The following case has been stated to me on such authority, that 
I do not doubt its correctness. 

Some forty or fifty years ago, a farmer residing not far from the 
center of Massachusetts, knocked off from a rock upon his farm, a 
piece of ore, which he sold in Boston for a considerable sum, as a 
rich ore of silver. From that time till the day of his death, he 
searched in vain for the rock from which it was broken. The in- 
ference, which he drew from his ill success, was that Satan, (who is 
thought, by multitudes, to have unlimited power over the mineral 
treasures of the earth,) had concealed or removed the precious vein. 
Conceiving, however, that some of his posterity might have more 
interest with that personage than himself, he reserved to them the. 
right of digging the ore, in the instrument which conveyed away his 
title to the land. His posterity were not forgetful of the reservation ; 
but they were convinced that it would be of no use to them, unless 
they could meet with some individual, who had entered into a league, 
(as the phrase is with the class of people I am describing,) with his 
Satanic majesty. Last year they heard of such a man, a German, 
in Pennsylvania, who had obtained possession of a wonderful glass, 
through which he could discover whatever lies hid beneath the soil. 
The German was persuaded to visit the spot, and when I passed 
through the place, a little more than a year ago, an excavation was 
about to be commenced under his direction. But I have not learned 
how the enterprise succeeded. 

Still more ridiculous than the opinions and practices above men- 
tioned, are some still existing in a few places in the State, relative 
to deposits of money, said to have been made by one Kid, a cele- 
brated buccaneer of early times. ‘The statement is, that he frequent- 
ly ascended our streams a considerable distance, and buried in their 
banks, large sums of money. ‘These are supposed to be guarded 
with sleepless vigilance by the personage mentioned before. But by 


Geology of Massachusetts. 69 


the use of certain incantations, while digging for the treasure, it may 
be wrested out of his hands; for instance, perfect silence must reign 
during the operation, unless it be broken by the reading of-the Bible, 
and all must be done in the night. The last instance of the practice 
of this mummery, which I have heard of, occurred a few years since 
on one of the branches of Westfield river. A hundred days’ works 
were expended upon the enterprise before it was abandoned. At 
one time those employed in this work were greatly discouraged, by 
the intrusion of my informant, who, in spite of all they could do by 
gestures, broke silence, and thus dissolved the charm. At another 
time, courage was revived by finding an iron pot, containing some 
bits of copper, deposited there, the day previous, by some boys who 
had learned what was going forward. 

I have given these rather mortifying details, partly because I doubt 
whether nine tenths of our population are aware of the existence of 
such opinions and practices among us; and _ partly in the hope that 
the exposition may be instrumental in entirely eradicating them from 
the minds of those who have been thus deluded. For, like night 
fogs, they need only to be brought into the light of day to be dissipated. 


Concluding Remarks. 


In concluding this summary of the economical geology of Massa- 
chusetts, [ cannot but allude to the very imperfect development which 
has hitherto been made of our mineral resources. Judging from 
what we know at present, our granites, marbles, and other rocks, use- 
ful in architecture, are undoubtedly the richest of these resources. 
Yet it is only a few years, since these rocks (with the exception of 
some quarries of marble,) have been employed at all for building ; 
and even now, only a few beds, and these very possibly not the best, 
have been opened. In the vicinity of Connecticut river, the inhabi- 
tants are just beginning to learn that they have beautiful granite in 
their own hills and mountains. ‘The Berkshire marbles are wrought 
on a stinted scale, compared with what they might be, were a rail- 
road to furnish the means of an easy transportation to the Hudson. 
And as to our porphyries and serpentines, various and abundant as they 
are, it is rare to meet with a single polished specimen. Our mineral 
veins and beds, with the exception of a few mines of iron, and one 
of lead, lie as yet almost untouched, and probably many of them 
undiscovered. 


70 . Geology of Massachusetts. 


These facts ought to be kept in mind in forming an estimate of our 
mineral resources. Yet imperfect as is our acquaintance with these, 
I think we need not fear a comparison, in this respect, with any other 
part of the country. Other States possess particular minerals which 
are more valuable and interesting, and calculated to awaken public 
attention more than ours; yet where is the territory abounding in a 
greater number of rocks and minerals, of real and permanent utility, 
whose quality is excellent and whose quantity is inexhaustible? They 
are, indeed, of such a character, that they will increase in value for 
several generations to come. ‘That is, we may calculate that the de- 
mand for them will increase during that period, and this demand will 
lead 1o the discovery of varieties really more valuable. 

Thus far we have regarded our geology only in an economical 
point of view. I hope to show in the subsequent parts of my Report, 
that it is not less interesting to the man of taste and science. 

Respectfully submitted, 


Epwarp Hircucockx. 
Amherst College, Jan. Ist, 1832. 


P. S.—Since the above account was in type, I learn, that in Le- 
ominster, in Worcester county, there isa rich alum rock. It ap- 
pears to» be a decomposed mica slate, and contains abundance of 
beautiful plumose, or feather-form alum, like that of Milo, one of 
the Grecian isles, mixed with the green crystals of copperas, or sul- 
phate of iron. There can be little doubt, that it proceeds from the 
decomposition of iron pyrites in the rock; the acid, formed from the 
sulphur, then unites with both the iron and the alumina, and thus 
forms the two salts. If these salts, and especially the alum, or the 
materials, which by proper treatment, may easily produce it, should 
prove to be abundant, the discovery may become practically impor- 
tant. J have not seen the specimens, but derive my information from 
Prof. Silliman, who has examined them; and who remarks, that it is 
common in this country, to find alum, formed in mica slate; a fact 
which appears to have been scarcely observed in Europe, where a 
variety of clay slate, or shale is the common alum rock. 

The Rev. Mr. Boutelle, of Leominster, can give more particular 
information as to the local facts. a 


On the Hessian Fly. 71 


Art. I].—On the Hessian Fly ; by Dr. Josepu E. Muse. 


Cambridge, E. 8. Md. Dec. 27, 1831. 
TO PROFESSOR. SILLIMAN. 


Dear Sir—There is perhaps, no branch of natural science so 
much neglected, as that of entomology; and none, that more impe- 
riously calls for our attention: this is most emphatically true, in re- 
gard to those families of insects, that are most destructively multi- 
plying, and preying upon the staple crops of our country, and ren- 
dering fruitless, the best energies of our population, in that depart- 
ment of human industry, which, from the creation to the present time, 
has been recognized as the basis of individual comfort, and nation- 


al wealth. 
Though sceptics in political economy, may in the abstract, entertain 


doubts of the latter; yet, this proposition in all its parts, will receive 
the common consent of mankind; and affords a striking instance of 
negligence, in matters of high importance, when many objects of 
idle curiosity are earnestly pursued. 

My attention has been drawn into this course of thought, by the 
rapid increase of the ‘‘ Hessian Fly”’ and its most disastrous ravages 
on our wheat crops; it may be safely affirmed, that in the last season, 
two thirds of the best hopes of the grower of this grain, were disap- 
pointed, by this little enemy, whose blasting influence was felt in dif- 
ferent degrees, throughout the whole extent of the wheat growing 
section of our country. 

It is said that this insect, notwithstanding its vulgar name, (Hes- 
sian) is not known in Europe; nor is it in South America; it is pe- 
culiar to those portions of the United States, and Canada, which pro- 
duce wheat; and its first advent is dated about fifty years ago: beyond. 
which period, there appears to be no notice of such an insect, extant. 

To defeat this vandal foe, it is essential to become acquainted with 
its habitudes, and character ; and without further apology, I design 
to offer my small contribution to this end, by the following history of 
facts, recently acquired, which I believe to be the more necessary, 
as the insect in question, from the diminutive size, in its parent state, 
has wholly eluded the perception of all, with whom I have conversed ; 
and of myself, heretofore, although frequently in quest of it. 

In my stack yard, I had observed much scattered wheat, which 
had vegetated and grown luxuriantly, to be withered, and declining, 


72 On the Hessian Fly. 


about the 1st of September, and on examination, I discovered, that it 
was uniformly throughout the yard, loaded with the chrysalids of the 
* Hessian Fly”: I dug up a small sod of the wheat, without regard 
to selection, and saber it in a flower pot, under an inverted glass jar, 
on the mantle piece of my sitting room, where it might have a warm 
temperature, adapted to its early development; in a few weeks, the 
insects began to exhibit themselves in their parental robes: and I have 
frequently and diligently, with the aid of a good microscope, exam- 
ined them, in their various stages of progression; and obtained the 
following results. : 

The ilecsian Fly” belongs to the order “ Feminense genus, 
*‘ Aphis”: and [ take the liberty to characterize it, by the specific 
name “ Aphis Tritici,” in place of the vulgar one, which is founded 
in the erroneous opinion of its origin. 

The fully matured insect is about the size of the “ flea” (*pu- 
lex”) its head is armed with an inflected rostrum, about one half 
the length of the antenne, which are long: the thorax, and a trian- 
gular eS are black, and separated by a slight but distinct 
spinous ridge: tergum, light yellow; posterior segment of the abdo-_ 
men, has a bright yellow band from which issue two small horns, 
which latter, indeed, are found in all the varieties of aphides as or- 
gans of excretion, for the honey dew; wings short and deflex; ex- 
terior portion of the superior, rich black, with yellowish macule ; 
breast, belly and legs, very black. 

Some specimens which came under my observation, (I presume 
the most fully matured, by frequent castings,) were the most splendid 
insects, | ever beheld; excelling in the disposition, and brilliancy of 
colors, the much extolled “ Buprestis,” or, the beautiful ‘* Cicindela.” 

These insects frequently cast off their exuvie ; perhaps indefinitely 
under circumstances : the wings are not unfolded to view, until the ex- 
uvie are cast; in this respect, agreeing with another family of the same 
order, the ‘ Gryllus,” (grasshopper ;) and like this, too, obviously 
at no period, is it capable of along flight: every casting which I 
observed, gave a more intense hue to the colors of this insect; the 
three a I could identify, were performed in eight or ten days: 
in its infant stage of maturity, if I may use the apparent solecism : 
or, when it has first emerged from: its chrysalis, it is wholly of a. 
whitish color, having the appearance of some aurelias; except, that 
its legs are developed ; its inchoate wings are distinctly indicated, but 
tied down, as with a fine web. 


On the Hessian Fly. 73 


Whether the insects are viviparous or oviparous, I could not satis- 
fy myself; and it is not essential to any useful purpose, as the larve 
in a few hours from their deposit, make their escape from the pel- 
icle in which they were gluéd down to the leaf, or stalk; and 
crawl down immediately to the nearest joint, where they fix their 
proboscis in the plant; suck, and grow rapidly in a warm tempera- 
ture, and remain in the same position, assuming the chrysalis in 
a few weeks: from which state, the early deposits, in a warm sea- 
son are speedily released ; but the chrysalids, from a latter deposit, 
continue in their shells, through the winter, and are not developed 
until the spring, when the approaching heat soon brings them into 
parent existence, to make their new deposits, which latter by the 
10th or 15th of May, make a woful demonstration of their rapid 
growth and progress, by the decline of the wheat plant, upon which 
they had been operating ; having then passed through the larva into 
the chrysalis, the shell of which is hard, and pressing upon the tender 
shoot interrupts the ascent of the sap, they thus mechanically affect 
the health and life of the plant, more than by the quantity they had 
consumed by absorption. 

The number of these insects obtained from my small sod, of a 
few inches only, of wheat, is incalculable and incredible, and fur- 
nishes grounds to affirm, that the stack yard, from which it was taken, 
containing several square perches of this nidus, and nutriment for 
them, had I not soon after the discovery scraped off and burnt the 
offal, was sufficient to have produced myriads of swarms, to the inev- 
itable destruction of my own, and my neighbors’ crops. 

This fact, then, should teach the agriculturist, the necessity of pre- - 
serving their stack yards, and other places, clean, and free from veg- 
etating scattered wheat; and clearly establishes one great source of 
this evil, or rather of the perpetuation and increase of the insect, 
which has excited universal astonishment and dismay, throughout our 
wheat growing district. 

Another source may be found, in the practice, also otherwise rep- 
rehensible, of fallowing for a second successive crop, upon wheat 
stubble; much scattered wheat thus prematurely vegetated, affords 
sustenance and security to these insects, which might have conside- 
rably perished, at the crisis when this operation is generally per- 
formed, from the absence of a continuous medium of perpetuation, 

The peculiar and, I believe, exclusive prey of this insect is the 
green leaf and stalk of wheat; analogy, independent of my experi- 


Vou. XXIT.—No. 1. 10 


74 Wright’s Mathematical Papers. 


ment, will teach us that this diminutive insect, like the’rest of the 
aphides, although they propagate millions, are mere ephemera, in 
point of existence, in the parent state; were the casual vegetation of 
this plant, carefully avoided between the harvesting of the old crop, 
and the seeding of the new, a period, in our climate, of about three 
months; and the latter operation deferred till the commencement of 
frost, the parent swarms would most probably perish. An interval 
fatal to their increase, would, indeed, be the necessary and gratify- 
ing consequence ; and, as no parent insect survives the winter, the 
practice, if universally adopted, might secure the final extinction of 
this variety of the family in our country. Net so with those various 
species which inhabit perennials, whose sustenance cannot be with- 
drawn or suspended; but with the “ Aphis Tritici’” it is unques- 
tionably practicable, if the course be seriously undertaken, and dili- 
gently pursued for a few years, which should be considered a duty, 
that every grower of wheat owes to his neighbor as well as to himself.* 


Arr. I11.—Mathematical Papers; by Exizur Wricut, Esq. 
No. I.—An improvement suggested in field Surveying. 


In the common method of computing the area of a field, a meri- 
dian line is supposed to be drawn at some assumed distance from 
the commencing corner, and the number expressing this distance is 
placed at the head of the column of Meridian Distances. But, if 
this meridian line is made to bisect the first side, the number which 
constitutes the first factor becomes 0, and consequently the first product 
vanishes. Should the lots to be surveyed be allowed at a medium to 
consist of five sides, nearly one sixth part of the labor of computation 
will besaved. This will probably appear to Surveyors who are not 
prepossessed in favor of a previous method, to be an acquisition not to 
be neglected, especially, if in other respects it is equally eligible. The 
improvement is comprehended in the following directions. 

In the field-book make two columns, in the first of which insert 
the points of compass, and the sides of the field as they are sur- 
veyed, together with a description of the boundaries. From a tra- 


* While Dr. Muse’s paper was passing through the press, we are assured that the 
Hessian Fly has heretofore been referred, by writers on Natural History, to the or- 
der Diptera, genus Tipula; and that Blumenbach (Man. of Nat. Hist. by Gore, p. 
224,) calls it Tipula destructor, and refers to the Phil. Jour. of Nat. Sci. 1817, tab. 3. 
We are informed also that Dr. Akerly, of New York, some years since, published 
an able paper on this insect, but the Journal containing it is not at hand.—£d. 


Wrights Mathematical Papers. 75 


verse table find the northings and southings, and the eastings and 
westings; placing the northings and southings in the first column, 
and the eastings and westings in the second column. When 
the northings are considered as affirmative quantities, the south- 
ings will be negative; and when eastings are affirmative, westings 
will be negative ; but when the southings are considered as affirm- 
ative quantities, the northings are negative, and when westings are 
affirmative, eastings will be negative. | 

In the second column put 0.00 for the factor corresponding to 
the first side. Suppose westings to be negative. When the depar- 
tures of the first and second sides are both eastings, or both westings, 
take their sum, placing the negative sign before it, when the depar- 
iures are westings ; but when one is an easting, and the other a west- 
ing, take their difference, placing the negative sign before it, when 
the greater number isa westing. ‘The number obtained by this ope- 
ration will be the factor to be multiplied into the northing or south- 
ing belonging to the second side. Following the same directions, 
take, again, the sum or difference, as the case may be, of this factor 
and the departure of the second side. 

‘When the number last found and the departure of the third side 
are both eastings or both westings, take their sum, placing the neg- 
ative sign before it, when they are westings; but if one is an easting 
and the other a westing, take their difference, placing the negative 
sign before it when the greater number is a westing. ‘The number 
thus obtained will be a factor to be multiplied into the northing or 
southing belonging to the third side. Observing the foregoing di- 
rections, take again, the sum or difference, as the case may be, of 
this last factor and the departure of the third side. In like manner 
proceed with all the remaining sides. Here it is obvious that accord- 
ing to the rule of adding affirmative and negative quantities in algebra, 
each departure is twice added, once before and once after multipli- 
cation. ‘This circumstance may assist in remembering the rule. 

At the bottom of the first column put the letters NE, SW, and 
at the bottom of the second column NW, SE. These letters de- 
note that the products, whose factors are northings and eastings, or 
southings and westings, are to be placed in the first column; while 
those whose factors are northings and westings, or southings and 
eastings are to be placed in the second column. Add the products 
in the first column together; and also those in the second ; take the 


difference of these sums, half of which will be the required area 
of the field. 


76 Wright’s Mathematical Papers. 


C.S.N.S. E.W. C.S.N.S. E. W. 
S. 84° W. 26 —95.86 ||S.84° W. AC | —Az—kC 
00.00 OG 
2.72 — 25.86 ik. | —Ai—kC 
N. 59° E. 25 21.43 || N.59°9 E.CF | Ck--mF 
4,43 —lk 
12.88 17.00 km QnK 
S. 34° W. 8 —4.47 ||S.349°W.FG| —Fn 
12.53 2nF — Fn 
6.63 8.06 nG | 2rG 
N. 59° E.18 15.43 || N.59° E.GH| ~~ oH 
93.49 2rG+oH 
9.27 38.92 Go 2gH 
S. 27° W. 14.37 —6.53 || S.27°W. HA! —H 
32.39 2gH —Hp 
12.80 25.86 pA Ai+kC 
_ NE. SW. NW.SE. NE. SW. NW. SE. 
217.7523 57.0584 2GHg@r 2DEAl . 
83.0739 2EGrm 
414.5920 2H Arg 
554.7243 
217.7523 
336.9720 
168.4860 


Geometrical illustration. 


Take a plot ACFGH of the field. Draw the meridian line gf, 
bisecting the first side AC. Also the departures AczkC, CkmF, Fn, 
oH, Hp; the northings, km, Go, and the southings, ik, nG, pA. 
Draw Di parallel with Em, making the triangle CD/, equal to EF'm. 


Wrights Mathematical Papers. 77 


From the sum of the products in the column N W, SE, subtract 
the product in the column NE, SW, and divide the remainder by 
2 according to the rule, and we obtain, 

DEAl+ HAig — GHar-+FGrm=ACFGH. 
Demonstration. 


lk x km=2DEAI. 
(2m¥ — Fn)nG=2FGrm. 
(2rG-+-0H)Go=2GH¢r. 
(2gH —Hp)pA=2H Aig. 
Hence, subtracting 2GH qr, and dividing by 2, we have, 
DEAl+ HAiqg—GHgr+FGrm=EDIAIAHGF mn. 
For EF m substitute its equal CD/, and for BC& substitute its equal 
ABz, and we have, DEAI4+-HAzg — GHgr-+- FGrm=ACFGH. 


No. Ii.—The propositions contained in this paper are obvious, 
and may, pernaps, be found in many treatises on surveying. I have 
chosen, notwithstanding, to send it for insertion in the Journal of - 
Science, for the purpose of bringing the methods contained in the 
first and third papers, side by side, that their connexion and relation 
may readily be seen. 


A method of finding the contained angles of a field, having the 


courses and sides given. 


The courses of the two sides, that form the angle, when compared 
together, admit of the four following variations. viz. 


Var. 1. Unlike, like; when letters are a or a and a or 7 


The contained angle is the sum of the points of compass. 


Var. 2. Unlike, unlike; when they are a or Re and Bi or Me 


The contained angle is the difference of the points of 


compass. 
| Dip 


Var. 3. Like, unlike; when they are a or Si and yr OF 7 
The angle is their sum subtracted from 180°. 
Var. 4. Like, like; when they are Ms or =r and i or be 


The angle is their difference subtracted from 180°. 
The following rule may be of use to the surveyor, in ascertaining 
the accuracy with which the courses have been taken. 


78 Wrights Mathematical Papers. 


Find by the foregoing directions all the including angles of a field, 
taking the remainder, after subtracting an outward angle from 360°, 
for an including angle; add them together; then to this sum add 
360, and divide the result by 90; if the courses have been correctly 
taken, the quotient will be exactly double the number of angles in 
the survey without a remainder. 


Ex. S. 84° W: thence N. 59° E: thence S. 34° W: thence 
N. 59° E: thence S. 27° W. 


BAGS BOE clo Baa 5D aa 25 
59 «884 BOs 27 84 25 
Bee Pp ey ee 835 
25.1128 25 2h 22 57 32 
360 180 123 
— = 360 
335 128 tues 
; 90)900(10 


No. III.— general method of finding the area of an irregular 
Polygon, having the sides and contained angles given. 


Suppose the several sides of the polygon AB, BC, CD, DE, EA, 
to be hypothenuses of right angled triangles, of which the perpendicu- 
lars Bf, Cg, Dh, Ez, are parallel with the first side AB, with which 
the calculation commences. 

Let the contained angles ABC, BCD, CDE, DEA, be exchang- 
ed for the angles fBC, gCD, ADE,:EA. These latter may be 
termed angles of commutation, and are obtained in the way here- 
after described. 

The positions of the bases and perpendic- 
ulars, are next to be discovered and desig- 
nated. ‘The perpendiculars Bf, Cg on one 
side of the bases may be considered affirm- 
ative, denoted by A, and the perpendiculars 
Dh, Ei on the opposite side, negative, deno- 
ted by N, placed before the angle of com- 
mutation ; likewise the bases fC, gD, on one 
side of the perpendiculars, may be consid- 
ered affirmative, denoted by A, and the bases AE, 7A, on the opposite 
side, negative, denoted by N, placed after the angle of commutation. 

When a side happens to be at right angles with the first side, the 
perpendicular vanishes; and when a side is parallel with the first 
side, the base and angle of commutation vanish: yet, for the pur- 
pose of discovering the positions of the subsequent bases and per- 


Wrights Mathematical Papers. 79 


pendiculars, these evanescent quantities must be brought into the 
calculation, and expressed by 0 

When one number is either added to another, or subtracted from 
it, the result is called a factum. 

Place A before, and after, the evanescent angle of commutation 
belonging to the first side. ‘Then, the several angles of commuta- 
tion may be found by the following rule, which contains two cases. 

Case I. When the letters, placed before, and after, the angle of 

commutation last found, are the same. 

Take the sum of the angle of commutation last found and the given 
angle, if it be inward; but if it be outward, take their difference. 

Case Il. When the letters, placed before, and after, the angle of 

commutation last found, are different. 

Take the difference of the angle of commutation last found and 
the given angle, if the given angle be inward ; but if it be outward, 
take their sum. : 

Tn both cases, when the factum exceeds 90°, subtract it from 180°; 
but when it exceeds 180°, subtract 180° from it, and the remainder 
will be the required angle of commutation. 

The position of the perpendiculars and bases may be discovered 
by inspection ; thus, 

Case I. When the factum, last obtained, is less than 90°. 

Prop. 1. If the angle of commutation be subtracted from the given 
angle, the letters placed before the two angles of commutation last 
found will be unlike, and the letters placed after, like. 

Prop. 2. If the angle of commutation is not subtracted from the 
given angle, the letters, placed before and after, will be unlike. 

Case I. When the factum, last obtained, is greater than 90°. 

Prop. 1. If the sum of the angle of commutation and given angle 
be subtracted from 180°; the letters placed before will be like, and 
the letters placed after, unlike. 

Prop. 2. If the sum of the angle of commutation and given angle - 
is not subtracted from 180°; the letters, before and after, will be like. 

When the factum is 90°, it may be considered as belonging either 
to Case I. or Case II.; and when the factum is 180°, it may be con- 
sidered as belonging either to Prop. 1 or Prop. 2, Case II, each sup- 
position leading to a true result. 

From a traverse table, find the bases and perpendiculars of the 
several sides. Put the bases underneath the sides in the second 
column, and the perpendiculars in the third column. Prefix N, or 
the negative sign, to those perpendiculars whose positions are desig- 


80 Wright’s Mathematical Papers. 


nated by N, placed before the corresponding angle of commutation ; 
and likewise place, or suppose to be placed, N, or the negative sign, 
before the bases, whose positions are denoted by N, after the corres- 
ponding angle of commutation. 

Make the factor in the third column, corresponding to the second 
side, equal to 0, and let the perpendicular belonging to the second 
be considered as the first factum resulting from the perpendiculars. 
Then perform the following operation, for each of the remaining 
sides. When its perpendicular and the next preceding factum have 
values of the same kind, take their sum, prefixing the negative sign 


' when they are negative; but when they have values of different — 


kinds, take their difference, placing the negative sign before it, when 
the greater number is negative. Then the factum thus obtained, 
and the base belonging to the side, will be factors, to be multiplied 
together. Again, observing the foregoing directions, take the sum, 
or difference, as the case may be, of the perpendicular and factum 
last obtained. Bring the several products, whose factors are AA or 
NN, into one sum, and the several products, whose factors are AN 
or NA, into another sum. Take the difference of these sums, half 
of which will be the required area of the polygon. 


Example 1. The same as in No. Il. 


Ang. LoS. B: Pee 
250 95. - 2500 
a or rs 
A.OA. 0.00 7.25 
25° 8 Bea Bes 
0.00 
N. 25 N. 43/88 wi Oe 
~ 25°27 18 18.00 
10.75 
A.ON. 0.00 28.75 
320 14.37 ees oie 
16.56 
N. 32 N. pall il 45 Ay 
123° 26 —23.56 
155 -4/ 9, 10 
N. 25 A. 10.99 —42.75 

AA. NN. AN. NA 

126.022 

210.898 

336.920 

168.460 


Wright’s Mathematical Papers. 


Example 2. 


FAB= 68° 36’, AB= 8. 
ABC=120°, BC= 6. 
BCD =120°7, CD= 7. 
CDE= 90°, DE=10. 
DEF= 902, BPS 12. 
EFA =111° 24’, FA=16.34 


Ang. S. B, P 


EROBS:-36/ 8.00 8.00 


0.00 |—11.00 

A.OA. = 2-00 
120 6.00 3.00 
120 —5.20 0.00 
A.60N. 3.00 
1202 7.00 7.00 
180 0.00! 10.00 
A.OA. 17.00 
90 10.00 0.00 
ES 0L00:), * 17.00 

N.9ON. 17.00 
90 12.00 |—12.00 
180. 0.00 5.00 
N.ON. eh OO) 
erga 01 16.384 |) 6.00 


111 24 15.20 |—13.00 
N.68 36A. —19.00 


~ |AA.NN.|AN-NAJ 


170.00 
197.60 
367.60 
183.80 


St 
E 
E 
A 
Beginning at EF we have, 
90° 12.00} 12.00 
0.00 |\—18.00 
A.OA. — 6.00 


lit 94 |" 16'34 6.00 


A.68 36N. 6.00 
68 36 8.00 |— 8.00} 

0 00 0.00!|— 2.00 
N.ON. =1'0.00 
120 6.00 |— 3.00| 
120 5.20 |—13.00 
N.60A.— —16.00 
19OF = spo 0057.00 
180 0.00 |—23.00 
N.ON. == 20.00 
96n i LO. 00 0.00 
10.00 |—30.00 

A.90A. 1-2-3000 
~~ |AA.NNJAN.NA. 

67.60 

300.00 

367.60 

183.80 


111 24 |—15.20 0.00 


VoL. XX .——Nos ft. 


82 


Example 3. 
Ang. 
90 
A.OA 
1207 
120 
A.60A 
150Z 
KAB= 90°. AB= "5: 
ABC =120°2Z, BC= 4. N.90A 
BCD=150°z, CD= 3. 90Z 
CDE 909.2, DE=.6: 180 
DEF= 90°, EF= 2.5. N.OA 
EFG= 90°, FG=12. ae 
PGH—* 90°, ‘GH=1s: A.90A 
GHI = 90°, HI= 7. 90 
HIJ =120°, WJ = 6. 180 
JK = 60°27, JK= 6. A.ON 
JKA= 30°, KA= 9.036. 90 


Wright’s Mathematical Papers. 


—_— 


S. B. P. 
5.00 5.00 
0.00 I~ 7.00 

2 

4.00 2.00 
3.464| 0.00 
2.00 

3.00 0.00 
3.00 2.00 
2.00 

6.00 |— 6.00 
0.00 |— 4.00 
—10.00 

2.50 0.00 
2.50 |—10.00 
10:00 

12.00 12.00 

0.00 2.00 
14.00 
18.00 0.00 
13.00 14.00 
14.00 
700 (|= "7300 
0.00 7.00 
0.00 
6.00 “|— 3.00 
5.196|— 3.00 
6400) 
6.00 |= "3.00 
5. 1061 0,00 
—12.00 
9.036! 0.00 
9.036 |—12.00 
—12.00 
AA. NN JAN. NA. 
| 25.000 
252.000 
6.000] 15.588 


46.764| 108.432 
52.764] 401.020 


52.764 


348.256 
174.128 


American Wild Swan. 83 


Arr. I1V.—Description of the American Wild Swan, proving it to 


be a new species. 


CYGNUS AMERICANUS. 
By Joun T. Suarpuess, M. D. of Philadelphia. 
Read before the Acad. Nat. Scien. of Philad. Feb. 7th, 1832. 


Anas cygnus ferus, Linn.—Cyenus ferus, Briss.—Le cygne 
sauvage, Burr.—Elk or Hooper Swan, Rayv— Whistling Swan, 
Laru., Pennant—Cvyenvs musicus, Becust, Bonararre—Swan, 
Wixson’s list—Wapa Seu, Inpians Hun. Bay. 


In the 8th No. Vol. Ist. of the Cabinet of Nat. History, by the 
Messrs. Doughty, published 1831 in this city, in describing the his- 
tory and habits of the American Swan, I intimated my belief, that this 
bird was a distinct species from either of the European (HooPer or 
Bewicx, Yarrell) Wild Swans. This opinion I have since confirm- 
ed, having during the past season had an opportunity of closely ex- 
amining a number of recent specimens, of six of which the bones 
and other parts necessary to found the specific characters, are 
now in my possession. ‘These added to six I had before, include 
with one exception, every preparation of the internal structure now 
in this city. Finding in every case, the same marked difference from 

every description of all other swans, I have considered it would be a 
sufficient warrant to separate this bird from those already indicated, 
and give it the title of Americanus. 

Every writer on this bird, has heretofore considered the American 
swan, as identical with the European, and even Mr. Charles L. Bo- 
naparte, a naturalist certainly of a very eminent order, in his synop- 
sis of the birds of the United States, gives it as the Anas cygnus, Linn., 
Lartu., etc. and the Cyanus musicus, Becust. His generic descrip- 
tion need not be repeated, and his specific characters are so general, 
that they would include our own as well as the two European wild 
swans which are now acknowledged to be distinct. I will here give 
it. C. musicus, Becust. White,—top of the head yellowish—hill 
black without protuberance—bare space round the eye, yellow. 

Neither Wilson nor any other American naturalist has particularly 
described our swan, the reason of which I am ignorant. I will now 


refer to the Essay of Mr. Wm. Yarrell,* Linn. Trans. Lond. Vol. xvi. 


* This gentleman has been long known to the scientific world, for his curious and 
interesting observations on the organs of voice in birds, and other branches of Nat- 
ural Science. 


84 American Wild Swan. 


pt. II. in which he divides the English wild swan into two species, and 
describes them both minutely, giving us an opportunity before want- 
ed, of instituting a comparison between them, and our own. 

The Hooper (Cyenus ferus) is five feet from the point of the bill 
to the end of the tail—seven feet ten inches between the tips of the 
wings, and weighs twenty four pounds. From the point of the beak 
to the edge of the forehead, four inches and three eighths, and from 
the same point to the occiput, seven inches and one fourth—the sides 
of the bill parallel—the bright yellow color at the base of the up- 
per mandible extends along each outside edge even beyond the line 
of the nostrils—tail twenty feathers. It is the internal structure 
that marks so particularly the character of the Hooper. This pecu- 
liar arrangement has been long known to exist, but has never before 
been so carefully described as to enable naturalists to found species 
on its variations. The trachea or windpipe which is of equal diame- 
ter throughout, enters a cavity in the keel of the sternum or breast- 
bone, formed by a separation of its plates; and passing back nearly 
to the posterior extremity of the keel, folds upon itself, always retain- 
ing the vertical position in its doubling, and returns out at the same 
orifice it entered the keel, and winding round the merry-thought 
(os furcatorium) takes the regular route to the lungs. 

In the oldest Hooper, this cavity never extended in the slightest 
degree farther back than'the keel, and the fold of the windpipe 
never left the vertical position at any age. ‘The bone of divarication 
or larynx is compressed, and the membrane between it and the bron- 
chial tubes is unprovided with an arrangement to protect it, as it is in 
his other species. ‘The bronchial tubes are very long. The differ- 
ence in the admeasurements between the Hooper and his second spe- 
cies C. Bewickn, will be given, when I mention our own swan. I 
will now point out the distinguishing marks of the Bewick. 

The beak is black at the point, and orange-yellow at the base; 
this last color appears first on the sides of the upper mandible, and 
afterwards covers the upper surface in front of the forehead to the 
extent of three fourths of an inch, receding from thence by a con- 
vex line to the lower edge of the mandible at the gape—the irides 
orange-yellow—the beak narrow at the middle, and dilated towards 
the point. 

“The trachea enters a cavity in the keel of the sternum as in 
the Hooper, and having traversed the whole length of the keel, the 
tube then gradually incliniag upwards and outwards, passes mto a 
cavity in the body of the sternum posterior to the keel, produced by 


American Wild Swan. 85 


the separation of the parallel horizontal plates of bone forming the 
broad, flattened, posterior portion of the breast-bone, and producing a 
convex protuberance on the inner surface. 

“The tube also changing its position from vertical to horizontal, and 
reaching within half an inch of the posterior edge, is reflected back 
after making a considerable curve, till it once more reaches the keel, 
after traversing which, in a line immediately over the first portion of 
the tube, it passes out and reaches the lungs asin the Hooper. This 
was the state of developement in the most perfect bird. 

“The degree next in order, differs in having the horizontal loop of 
the trachea confined to one side only of the cavity in the body of the 
sternum, both sides of which cavity, are at this time formed, but the 
loop of the tube is not yet sufficiently elongated to occupy the whole 
space. 

“The third in order, being that of a still younger bird, possesses 
only the vertical insertion of the fold of the trachea, yet, even in 
this specimen, the cavity in the posterior portion of the sternum 
already exists toa considerable extent. The bronchie are very 
short, and the flexible, delicate membrane that intervenes between the 
bone of divarication and the bronchial rings, is quite elongated, and de- 
fended on each side by a distinct membrane attached to the whole 
edge of the bone of divarication, and posteriorly, to a slender semicir- 
cular bone on each side, by which it is supported. The muscles of 
voice pass down as in the Hooper, one on each side of the trachea, till 
the tube is about to enter the keel, they then quit that part of the tube 
and pass to the ascending portion that has just issued from the keel, 
which they follow, ultimately branching off a little short of the bone of 
divarication to be inserted on each side of the sternum. 

“The stomach, a true gizzard, is one third less than that of the 
Hooper—the intestinal canal is uniform in calibre and coiled up in 
seven oblong folds with two ceca. 

«As in the Hooper, the plumage is first grey, afterwards white 
tinged with rust color over the head and on the under surface of the 
belly, and ultimately pure white. The tail has but eighteen feathers.” 

I will now describe a mature specimen of the American swan, 
and afterwards give such variations as youth may produce. 

From its size, and the toughness of the joints and flesh, and the 
perfect absence of every mark of juvenility, I have no doubt this 
bird possessed every perfection of developement. _ It will be observ- 
ed, that the dimensions and characters of the specimen, preserve, 
in a great degree, a middle course between the English species. 


86 American Wild Swan. 


Hooper. Bewick. American. 
Weight, 24 lbs. - 13%]lbs.- 2! lbs. 
Ft. In. Ft. In. Ft. In. 
Point of the beak tothe end ofthetail, 5 O - 3 9 - 4 6 
Be ec edge of forehead, 43 - 34 - . Ad 
cs ee eye, 5t - 4% - 5 
ay cs occiput, 74 - 64 - 74 
Width of the beak at the widest en) i e 14 
near the point, 
ec a middle, - - 13 
«with wings extended, 4 10. = 6... be eee 
Carpus to end of primaries, ots 1 Be a 
Length of middle toe, 64 - 5d - 6 
We intestines, 121° 05 6°10 2. = Or 
a4 ceca, Eis = 107 7= 103 
a: breast-bone, 84 - 62 - 74 
Depth of insertion of the trachea, 3 _ 5R - 64 
Length of bronchial tubes, 33 - 13 - 14 
Tail feathers in number, 20 18 20 


The youngest and smallest specimen I have met with, and the 
bones of which I now possess, had a very soft, reddish-white bill, with 
a brown point, and measured three inches from the point of the beak 
to the forehead,—six inches and one eighth to the occiput, and the 
usual position of the colored spot was covered to one inch and three 
eighths in front of the eye, with small yellow-orange feathers, which 
extended down to the gape. ‘The plumage, to the end of the tail and 
primaries, was of a deep leaden tint, and the feet and legs were of a 
light grey color. ‘This specimen measured six feet and eight inch- 
es between the points of the extended wings—four feet two inches 
from the point of the beak to the tail, and weighed eleven pounds. 
In the specimen above, whose dimensions I have compared immedi- 
ately with those of Mr. Yarrell, the yellow spot on the bill was five 
eighths of an inch in length, starting at the front corner of the eye and 
running towards the nostrils, and one fourth of an inch in breadth. 
In twenty specimens I have now examined of the American swan, I 
have never seen this spot more than one inch in length, and half an 
inch in breadth, and in many of them, an oblong mark of the size 
and shape of a little finger nail was alone found. In one instance, 
which weighed sixteen pounds, this spot was but one fourth of an 
inch square, and did not quite reach the eye. As the color and ex- 
tent of this spot, is assumed by Mr. Yarrell, as one of the principal 


American Wild Swan. 87 


external specific differences between his two English swans, I have 
taken particular care to ascertain, beyond a doubt, the tint in the 
American bird, and find it ranges from a pure gamboge yellow to a 
bright red-orange, and without any regard to sex or age, except in the 
yearling, as above mentioned, when it is covered by small feathers. 
This mark is always in the same position. ‘The feathers continue, 
except at the anterior fourth where the yellow spot reaches them, to 
the very edges of the eyelids, which are yellow. In every case, the 
bill has been one eighth of an inch narrower at the middle than near 
the point, and in all young birds, where the plumage had become 
white, a dirty yellow tinge around the head and back of the neck, 
marked its immaturity. 

In several instances, a well defined yellow or orange line ran from 
the point of the feathers, between the legs of the lower bill, forward, 
to their junction at the point, and sometimes ended in a large patch of 
the same color. In every case, the tail had twenty feathers, although 
in the younger ones, there were several of them still in the sheath. 

The other external characters are common to the genus. 

The internal arrangements are those, in a great degree, of the Be- 
wick swan. The wind-pipe is unifcerm in calibre, and entering the 
keel, takes the circuit of the horizontal pouch in the posterior flatten- 
ed portion of the bone, and returning out of the keel at the same ori- 
fice it entered, winds round the merry-thought and goes to the lungs. 
Plate II, fig. 1. 

In the specimen whose admeasurement is given in detail, the loop 
of the trachea occupied a posterior cavity of two inches in transverse 
diameter, leaving in the hollow of the loop, one inch of vacant space, 
and projecting one third of an inch above the inner surface of the ster- 
num, but showing norise externally. In another preparation I possess, 
(Plate I, fig. 1.) from a bird of equal age, the sternum is seven inch- 
es and a half in a straight line drawn across the concavity of the in- 
ner surface, and the posterior chamber extends to the extreme back 
edge of the bone, the trachea penetrating the whole distance. In 
this case, the horizontal chamber is three inches and one fourth in 
transverse diameter, and spreads, on one side, three fourths of an’ 
inch beyond the edge of the breast-bone, and covering and resting on 
the ribs to that distance. ‘The vacuity in the loop is two inches in 
diameter. A third instance gives a bone seven inches and a half 
long, with the trachea extending to the very posterior edge, and the 
chamber in the bone two inches and three fourths across, and cover- 
ing the whole breadth of the sternum. 


88 American Wild Swan. 


Another preparation (Plate I, fig. 2.) six inches and one half long, 
of a younger swan than either of the preceding, developed a rising 
on the internal surface of one inch in diameter, with the trachea en- 
tering but four inches and three fourths, and just assuming the horizon- 
tal position,—and the very young bird already mentioned, and which 
was no doubt a yearling cygnet, produced a sternum six inches and 
one half in length, with the trachea entering three inches and one half, 
‘and preserving a vertical fold, and showing merely a gentle swelling 
in the bone at the posterior termination of a cavity four inches deep. - 
(Plate I, fig. 3.) In every instance, the trachea, upon approaching 
this horizontal apartment, takes to the right to sweep round the cavi- 
ty. The two portions of the tube, although in contact in the keel, 
are separated anterior to it by a strong ligament, which stretches in a 
right line across from one limb of the merry-thought to the other, 
and extends from the outlet from the keel, to near the union of the os 
furecatorium with the clavico-scapular bones. Lateral ligaments also 
pass from the limbs of the merry-thought to these bones, and form a 
chamber for the pulmonic portion of the trachea to lie in. (Plate I, 
fig. 2.) ‘The muscles of voice pass from one portion of the tube to 
the other, and are united to the sternum as in the English species. 

The bone of -divarication is placed perpendicular to the sternum, 
and is one inch and an eighth from top to bottom, and the sides are 
so compressed that they are nearly parallel. ‘The space between 
this bone and the bronchial rings is half an inch, and is occupied 
by a membranous tube, outside of which, extends another membrane 
from the edge of this bone to a delicate semi-circular bone on each 
side, which protects the structure within. (Plate II, fig. 1.) This 
arrangement is nearly the same as in the Bewick. 

Linneus gives the wild swan as having but eleven ribs, and the 
tame, twelve,—while the article Swan in “ Delineations of Zoologi- 
cal Gardens, London,” states the wild to have twelve, and the tame 
swan but eleven ribs. Mr. Ord (than whom there cannot be better 
authority in ornithology,) assisted me in ascertaining the number of 
ribs in the dried specimens I possess, and we were unable to discover 
more than ten, the first of which did not reach the sternum, but was 
united to the second by a membranous connection.—A particular ex- 
amination of these bones was unaccountably neglected whilst the birds 
were recent, and there may possibly be an error in the number of 
ribs. There were twenty six true vertebra. 

The gizzard of the specimen particularly described above, weighed 
five and a half ounces—and the intestines were in every case coiled 


Fiy, Oe 


oy 


HMEDBrown del! 


ea) 
Ss 


fe 


his LiU#N 


ied 


Fa ance 


t 
5 
& 
S 
= 
§ 
= 
Q 
x 


i 


nia 


“GO Td 


GAH MINT SY 


ings pry 


” 


American Wild Swan. 89 


in seven oblong folds and had two ceca, which were often of differ- 
ent lengths. 

I have not discovered any variety either in external appearance, 
or internal peculiarity to depend upon sex. 

Mr. Yarrell gives the following, as the specific characters of both 
the English wild Swans. 

C. ferus. Beak black and semi-cylindrical—vase and sides even 
beyond the nostrils yellow—body white—tail with twenty feathers— 
feet black. 

C. Bewickit. Beak black and semi-cylindrical—base orange— 
body white—tail eighteen feathers—feet black. 

The following is the specific character of the American Swan. 

C. Americanus. Beak black and semi-cylindrical—sides of the 
base, with a small orange or yellow spot—body white—tail twenty 
feathers—feet black. . 

Note.—After the above had been written, I received a communi- 
cation from Mr. Yarrell, London, containing a proof sheet of Dr. 
-Richardson’s “ Northern Zoology,” a work not yet published. It 
contains the following description of an American Swan which he 
met with in his expedition with Franklin, and which he considers the 
regular Trumpeter Swan. It is decidedly different from the Ameri- 
canus in the entire absence of colored mark on the bill, and in the num- 
ber of tail feathers. It is probably the species mentioned by Lewis 
and Clark. 

Cyenus buccinator (Richardson) Trumpeter Swan. 

Color white—Head glossed above with chesnut—Bull, cere, and 
legs entirely black.—Tail twenty four feathers. The fold of the wind- 
pipe enters a protuberance on the interior aspect of the sternum at its 
upper part which is wanting in the C. ferus and Bewicku ; in other 
respects the wind-pipe is distributed through the sternum nearly as 
in the latter of these species. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


The specimens from which the figures were drawn, resemble so 
much those pictured by Mr. Yarrell, and the delineation of that writer 
being so admirably adapted to display the structure, that his positions 
and general outlining have been chosen by the engraver, the detail be- 
ing changed to suit the peculiarities of my specimens. - 

Plate I.—Fig 1. Internal surface of the breast-bone of an adult 
Swan, the cavity in the sternum extending to the posterior extremity 


Vol. XXII.—No. 1. © 12 


90 Marl of New Jersey. 


of the bone, and lying on one side even over the ribs. Part of the 
bones are removed to show the trachea. 

Fig. 2. Showing less developement, being from a younger bird. 

Fig. 3. Sternum of a cygnet of the first year, giving a mere 
swelling on the internal surface of the bone. 

Plate I].—Fig. 1. Side view of the sternum and trachea of the 
Swan. A. The keel. B. Flat posterior part of the bone. C. C. Tra- 
chea. D.D. Muscles of voice. E. Bone of divarication or larynx. 
F. The delicate semicircular bone with the outer membrane attached, 
to protect the inner tube leading to the bronchie. G. Bronchie. 
H. H. Os fureatorium. I. Posterior horizontal chamber. 

Fig, 2. Front view of the same part, the anterior portion of the tra- 
chea turned aside to show the inner ascending part of it—the muscles 
of voice, and the tendinous membrane by which both are supported. 


Art. V.—On the analogy which exists between the Marl of New 
Jersey, &c. and the Chalk formation of Europe. | 


Letter from §. G. Morton, M.D. to the Editor, dated Philadelphia, Feb. 14, 1832. 


PROFESSOR SILLIMAN. 


Dear Sir—Constant engagements, chiefly of a professional na- 
ture, have, for nearly two years past, prevented my taking an active 
part in geological inquiries; at the same time I can assure you, that 
my interest in the subject has in no degree diminished, which must be 
my apology if this communication should appear too long or too minute. 

Since.the publication, in your valuable Journal, of my “ Synopsis 
of the Organic Remains of the Ferruginous Sand Formation of the 
U. S.”*—I have waited with patience for the judgment of European 
geologists upon the opinions therein advanced ; and have at length the 
gratification to observe, that those opinions have received the support 
and corroboration which I had little doubt would be awarded to them. 

In a letter recently addressed to me by Prof. Alex. Brongniart,: 
are contained the following observations ; to which I shall subjoin an 
extract from the report alluded to by this eminent geologist. 

“T have been struck with the analogy,” says M. Brongniart, “ which 
exists between the American beds, referred by you to the chalk se- 
ries, and certain European deposits belonging to the same Pelagic . 
group. I have communicated this curious fact to the Royal Acade- 
my of Sciences, in a Report lately submitted to that body in relation 


* Volumes XVII and XVIII. 


Marl of New Jersey. 91 


to a similar group observed in the south of France, by M. Dufresnoy, 
Mining Engineer. This Report has been published in the XXII 
volume of the Annales des Sciences Naturelles ; and I have therein 
mentioned your important observations, at the same time availing my- 
self of them, to support the principles I some time since advanced 
in my work on the Importance of Zoological characters in Geology. 

** You will perceive that I have not hesitated to admit, with M. 
Dufresnoy, that the formations he has described, belong to the Cre- 
taceous group, although they contain some organic remains, character- 
istic of tertiary beds: (terrains thalassiques.) In like manner, while 
the deposits which you have referred to the chalk series, contain 
some fossils which occur also in other formations, we cannot for this 
reason refer them to any other than the chalk, because the charac- 
teristic reliquie of the latter predominate so much, as at once to de- 
termine the epoch to which they belong: for, excepting a few tere- 
bratule, &c., I can only recognize these fossils in secondary beds, 
and more specifically in those which 1 have designated by the name 
of Pelagic. 

“The fossils you describe are not only characteristic of the creta- 
ceous group, but are found neither abundantly nor constantly in any 
other: they belong to the entire extent of the series; nor am I cer- 
tain that they are more indicative of the lower chalk (la glauconie 
crayeuse et la craie tufau) than of the upper or white chalk. 

*¢ With respect to amber (succinite, Br.) and lignite, they are rare- 
ly observed in the chalk mass, but are mostly found above it in the 
plastic clay, or below it in the marls of the green or ferruginous sand: 
but these substances are of too little importance’ to affect a position 
established by other characters.” 

M. Brongniart further explains his views of the chalk formation, 
in the Report on M. Dufresnoy’s memoir, above alluded to, from 
which I shall beg leave to offer two or three extracts; merely pre- 
mising that the Report is signed by Messrs. Beudant and Brongniart, 
but is from the pen of the last named gentleman. 


Extracts from the Report on the Memoir of M. Dufresnoy, &c.— 
Read before the Fr ench Institute, April 25, 1831. 


‘‘ Every one thinks he knows what chalk is: the inhabitants of Paris, 
and of the north of France, who are surrounded by chalk hills, who 
see this mineral employed for numerous domestic purposes, and in 
the arts, always figure to themselves a soft stone remarkable for its 


92 Marl of New Jersey. 


whiteness. Those who have seen it in the quarries, or noticed its 
vast masses not-distinctly stratified, and separated by beds of black 
flint, suppose these features essential to its external characters.” 

s * % % * 

‘¢ This idea, although tolerably correct, is not complete: for a long 
time its external and mineralogical characters were alone considered ; 
while its geological features, or those which belong to the formations 
(terrains) it embraces have been almost entirely overlooked, as well 
by geologists as by naturalists in gener al. 

_* The difficulty does not consist in recognizing beds of sie chalk 
containing black flint, but in detecting those deposits which want these 
external characters, and yet belong to the same age and formation. 
Now we determine a formation (that is to say, any combination of 
mineral substances which have been deposited at the same time,) by 
the position it occupies, relatively to the series which forms the crust 
of the globe; or in other words, by the kind of rocks or deposits 
which are constantly found above and below it: this is the geological 
character, or that of superposition, the most important of all when 
clearly ascertained. 

*¢ But in order to assign its proper place to any Brith: it must 
be so well characterized as to be known even when entirely insulated. 
The nature of the rock and the accompanying minerals may avail 
us in this inquiry, whence they are termed mineralogical characters: 
they are the most obvious, but at the same time the least essential 
characters, and most likely to deceive; and they, in fact, prevented 
our recognizing the chalk, (or rather the eretaceous formation,) in 
those places so familiar to us long before the time of M. Dufresnoy. 

“‘ A third series of distinctive characters is derived from. organic 
remains; these are called the — or organic characters of a 
formation. 

“Tt will now be understood what we mean by a chalk formation, 
or rather by a cretaceous formation: we must not picture to ourselves 
deposits wholly composed of white chalk ; but include in the desig- 
nation all those beds which occupy, among earthy strata, the same 
position as the chalk, enclosing the same characteristic fossils, and 
sometimes also presenting the same assemblage of mineralogical char- 
acters. We shall find cretaceous formations both black and yellow, 
en masse or stratified, with or without silex : we shall even see that 
these deposits are sometimes composed entirely of sand, and of sand- 
stone, without a particle of chalk, mineralogically speaking, or even 
of carbonate of lime.” 


: 


Mari of New Jersey. 93 


# % * * * 

* Among the formations recently admitted into the cretaceous 
group, one of the most remarkable occurs in America, and at so 
great a distance, that we might suppose it would be deficient in those 
specific characters, by which it could be referred-to any one of the 
geological divisions: we allude to a formation described by Dr. Mor- 
ton as occurring in New Jersey and Maryland.* . Dr. M. has given 
an exact description of these beds, with figures of the fossils they 
contain. These descriptions and illustrations present a complete ap- 
plication of the principles we have endeavored to establish. The 
animals are those of the cretaceous deposits, viz. the genera baculites, 
belemnites, scaphites, ammonites, terebratula, gryphea, plagiostoma, 
ananchytes, mosasaurus, plesiosaurus, with many others belonging 
to the testacea and to the family of crocodiles. All these genera are 
characteristic of the chalk, although the species are not precisely the 
same; the differences, sometimes very slight, show in the ancient 
world, what we notice in the existing state of things in places very 
remote from each other. ‘Thus, North America possesses many of 
the same genera of animals as are found in Europe, and yet very few 
adentical species. ‘The American formations moreover embrace, like 


the chalk of the south of France, many littoral shells, [or shore-shells, 


to distinguish them from Pelagic, or such as inhabit deep water, ] 
among which are natice, scalarie, cypree, patelle, &c. 

“These characters convinced Dr. Morton, and they should satisfy 
all geologists, that the deposits of New Jersey and Maryland must 
be referred to the cretaceous series: but they moreover present many 
mineralogical characters of the chalk, such as-glauconie, ferruginous 
sand, and silex. Finally, as if to render the inference still more 
precise, we find on examining its relative position, that this formation 
is in many places overlaid by true tertiary deposits, composed of clay, 
of sand, and of calcaire grossier, and containing fossil shells so simi- 
lar to those of our Paris formations, that a very cautious examination 
is requisite to distinguish them.” 

* * % * * 

Such are the sentiments of M. Brongniart.—A letter just receiv- 
ed from Mr. Mantell, enables me to record the opinion of a gentle- 
man, whose many contributions to this department of geological sci- 
ence, place him among the most distinguished of its cultivators. I 


* It is now recognised in nearly all the States from New Jersey to Alabama.— 
Vide Jour. Acad. Nat. Sc. Vol. VI, and Am. Jour. of Science, loco citato.—S.G. M. 


94 * Marl of New Jersey. 


sent Mr. M. a small series of the organic remains of the marl dis- 
trict, &c. upon which he makes an interesting commentary, and then 
adds— I have read your papers on the green sand of America, 
(in the Journal of Science) with great pleasure and interest; and I 
entirely agree in the opinion you express, that the strata in question, 
bear a decided analogy to the inferior division of the chalk formation 
of Europe. Your limestone above green sand, reminds me very 
much of the Maestricht beds. The latter appear to form, as it were, 
a connecting link between the chalk and the tertiary ; for although in 
England, France and elsewhere, there is a marked separation be- 
tween the so ealled secondary and tertiary formations, I believe it 
will ultimately be found, that this is not the natural order, but the ex- 
ception ; and that the transition from one to the other was gradual. 
In the Maestricht beds we have the ammonites, baculites, echini, &c. 
so characteristic of the chalk, associated with volutes, turritelle, and 
other tertiary genera. So also I believe we shall find that even the 
tertiary formations rur insensibly into the modern deposits.” 

I had some years ago, and indeed in my first* paper on this sub- 
ject, mentioned some resemblances which appeared to me to exist 
between the Maestricht beds and the green sand of New Jersey ; but 
Mr. Mantell’s suggestion that such analogy obtains between the lime- 
stone superimposed on our marls, and the Maestricht deposits, is new 
to me, and seems to be founded in fact. The limestone in question,- 
is apparently more recent than the green sand, and has hitherto afford- 
ed fewer pelagic, and more littoral fossils. It has been examined 
as you know, in numerous quarries between Salem and Vincentown, 
in New Jersey; (a distance of about forty miles) but has not yielded 
any multilocular univalve, unless the equivocal fossil which I have 
named Belemnites ambiguus, be of this character. Its characteris- 
tic relics, as I have elsewhere mentioned, are scalariz, varieties of 
Gryphea convexa, and G. vomer, with numerous Linnean madrepores 
and echini. Is this a connecting link between our secondary and 
tertiary beds? My friend Mr. Nuttall has recently detected the 
green sand near Cahawba, in Alabama; establishing the known ex- 
tent of this formation to a distance of about a thousand miles; for at 
Cahawba, the Exogyra costata, Ostrea falcata, and other species of 
shells, are specifically identical with those from New Jersey; nor 
indeed is there the shadow of a difference between them. Dr. Wm. 
Blanding has communicated some very interesting facts respecting 


* Jour. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Vol. vi. p. 97. 


Marl of New Jersey. 95 


the existence of this formation near Camden, South Carolina,* where 
it is chiefly recognized by exogyre, &c. vast numbers of Belemnites 
(B. americanus, which, by the way, Mr. Mantell agrees with me in 
considering specifically different from .B. mucronatus, of Europe.) 

Much time, and the united labor of many geologists, will be re- 
quisite to make a complete exposition of this vast formation, which 
promises to the explorer a series of facts perhaps no less interesting 
than has been afforded by its equivalent in Europe. 

Before concluding this letter, I have much pleasure in mentioning 
that our Atlantic tertiary deposits are in a fair way to be brought to 
light. Under the patronage of the Academy of Natural Sciences, 
those of Maryland and Virginia, have been repeatedly visited of late, 
by my friend Mr.'T. A. Conrad; a young geologist whose discrimi- 
nating judgment, and untiring industry, have already attracted the 
favorable notice of the scientific public. A work which this gentle- 
man has now in hand, will make us acquainted with nearly two hun- 
dred species of fossil shells from the upper+ marine deposits of the 
state above named ; nor are these remains inferior in beauty and pres- 
ervation to those of the tertiary beds of Europe. It is to be borne 
in mind that this multitudinous series of organic relics, has been ob- 
tained in a comparatively circumscribed space; and that the vast 
tract from the north eastern section of Virginia, coastwise to the Mis-~ 
sissippi, remains almost entirely unexplored. How greatly inquiries 
of this nature might be facilitated, if persons resident in places where 
the fossils occur, would collect and transmit them to our public in- 
stitutions! The Academy of Natural Sciences is now in posses- 
sion of all the species hitherto described; they are classed and label- 
led, and displayed in manner so conspicuous as to be consulted to 
the utmost advantage. Our European series, so important for com- 
parison, is increasing rapidly; a part of it, designated as the Weth- 
erill collection of British fossils, embraces about a thousand specimens 
from all the formations. The continental series is much less com- 
plete. The entire Geological series contains about five thousand 
specimens, of which more than two thirds are fossil organic remains 
of animals and plants—a good nucleus for an institution which has 
been but twenty years in existence. 


* I formerly mentioned Cockspur Island, Georgia, as a locality of green sand, but 
find that I was misinformed; this island is now known to be destitute of fossil 
remains. 

t Jour. Acad. Vol. VI, p. 116, &c., in which I have proved the deposits in ques- 
tion to belong te the upper marine formation. 


96 Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 


Art. VI.— Description of an instrument called the Steam Pyrome- 
ter; by Waurer R. Jounson, Professor of Mechanics and Nat- 
ural Philosophy, in the Franklin Institute, Philadelphia. 


A careful attention to guard the containing vessel in which we 
produce steam from boiling water by means of metal, or other solid 
or liquid bodies capable of being heated in open vessels above 
212° Fah. will enable us to measure with great accuracy, the quanti- 
ty of heat which such solid or liquid body expends in cooling, from 
the temperature at which it is first put in, down to the boiling point 
of water. 

The mode of calculating the temperature when the speeific heat 
is known, has already been given.* ‘The only pointsof much diffi- 
culty in rendering the formula heretofore stated, directly useful in 
pyrometry are, 1, the necessity of defending the vessel in which the 
steam is produced, from the effects of radiation and conduction dur- 
ing the operation; 2, the obviating of loss in transferrmg the hot 
body to the liquid through the air; 3, the means of obtaining and 
marking the true boiling point, and 4, the means of speedily and ac- 
curately weighing the liquid, and showing how much has been evapo- 
rated during an experiment. 

To these causes of inconvenience, may be added, that which results 
from the low specific heats of some of the substances, to be employ- 
ed as standards.—Such are several of the metals as platina, gold, — 
&c. It is obvious that the method of plunging the body of which we 
would know the temperature directly into boiling water, can be 
adopted only with regard to solids, which remain unchanged after 
being quenched in water, and-which are not capable of imbibing the 
fluid, on account of porousness, or such physical characters as would 
render them liable to combine chemically with the water. 

When we have to deal with liquids of which the temperatures extend 
beyond that of boiling mercury, that is, of mercury boiling in vacuo, 
(which must necessarily limit our use of the mercurial thermometer,) 
we must either pour such liquid into the boiling water, if a melted metal 
which will not undergo change in that method of cooling, or must en- 
close it in a suitable vessel extremely thin and of materials to sustaim the 
action of water upon it, or must immerse in the hot liquid or the melted 
metal, a mass of some other matter capable of preserving its form 
under a heat greater than that of the liquid. The latter method is 


* See American Journal, Vol. XX. p. 316, July 1831. 


STEAM PYROMETER wy WR 


oWMMMS Oo 


Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 97 


on several accounts to be preferred. First we may always use the 
same amount of hot matter to produce the vapor, and consequently 
compare the actual heats of two melted masses without calculation. 
Second, the hot body may be directly applied to the water without 
the intervention of any enclosing vessel. Third, the pouring of the 
hot metal or liquid into water might not always be convenient or safe, 
as for example when the latter is of greater specific gravity than the 
former. When, for example, oil is laid at a very high temperature, 
on the surface of water, the sudden ebullition of the water, would 
be in danger of causing an explosion that would project the oil up- 
wards with great force. 

When we plunge a solid into a melting mass of metal, and allow it 
to remain for some time, it will acquire the temperature of the mass 
of melted matter, but the solid must have certain peculiar properties 
to fit it for this purpose. 

First, it must not melt at a lower point than that of the fluid which 
it is intended to test. 

Second, it must allow of being quenched in boiling water from the 
highest temperatures employed, without cracking, scaling, oxidizing, 
or undergoing any augmentation of weight by absorbing the liquid. 

Third, it must have as high a specific heat as practicable. 

Fourth, it should be capable of being easily wrought into the pe- 
culiar form required for the instrument with which it is to be used. 

Among the substances best adapted for the purpose are the follow- 
ing, against each of which the specific heat is marked together with 
the name of the author, whose determination has been followed. 

Spe. Heat. Authorities, 


Crown glass, .2000 Irvine, 

White glass, .1870 Wilcke. (.1770, Pet. and Dul.) 
White clay, burnt, .1850 Gadolin. 

Black lead or plumbago, .1830 Do. 

White cast iron, .1320 Do. 

Soft bar iron, sp. gr. 7.724, .1190 Do. 

Platinum, .0314 Petit and Dulong. 


The chief parts of this instrument are a boiler, A; (Fig. 1.)—a 
stand, S ;—a balance beam, D, for weighing the boiler and its con- 
tents ;—a lamp, L, to heat the water and to maintain ebullition be- 
tween experiments ;—a receiver, R, (Figs. 2 and 3.) and a cylinder 
of metal, I, to be employed as a standard. 

The boiler is formed of two concentric cylinders of copper. The 
inner cylinder is two and a half inches in diameter, the exterior one 


. Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 13 


98 Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 


is four inches, leaving a space of three fourths of an inch to be filled 
with finely powdered charcoal or lampblack, seen at O, in the sec- 
tion (Fig. 2.) 

The interior cylinder rises half an inch above the exterior, which 
is twelve inches high. The former*is then expanded into a funnel- 
shaped mouth, F, five inches in diameter at top, and two inches per- 
pendicular height, intended to receive and return any portions of 
water which might be thrown up by ebullition, but not converted into 
steam. From the lower part of the apparatus a third concentric 
cylinder, K, rises about three inches and one fourth, where it termi- 
nates in a conical head furnished with a pipe, P, passing obliquely up- 
wards through the two cylinders before mentioned, and firmly solder- 
ed to both. The purpose of this third cylinder is to receive the 
lamp L, and to expose a large surface to the action of its ame. eis 
a stopper intended to close the pipe, P, when the lamp is withdrawn 
and the experiment in progress. E is an index attached to the sup- 
port m, in such a manner that the point E, may be elevated or de- 
pressed a few degrees, to correspond to the position of the beam D, 
and save the adjustment by weights before an experiment. ‘The cyl- 
inder of lead C, is movable along the rod by means of a screw thread, 
cut the whole Jength of that arm. This mode of adjustment admits 
of the greatest accuracy, and is liable to less delay than the sliding 
weight. By means of the tightening screw ¢, the support mm, may 
be placed at any convenient height on the rod 7, and by means of s, 
the lamp L, may be loosened and caused to revolve [horizontally 
when the metal is about to be immersed; in which case the boiler 
will be for the time depressed, and will rest on the cushion B, which 
is composed of hare’s fur, covered with soft flannel to defend the 
bottom from the access of air; the stopper e, is a further safeguard 
against the same source of loss. A thermometer g, bent at mght 
angles, passes through the two concentric cylinders, having the bulb — 
directly exposed to the water within, but defended from injury by a 
projection of its tube 0, a short distance beyond the inner cylinder. 

The receiver R, is about four inches in height, and one and a quar- 
ter in interior diameter, furnished above with a tube /, and a stop cock 
k, to convey away the steam, and to carry it, when required, into a ves- 
sel of cold water. The only direct access of the water «, to the hot 
body I, when in place, is through the bottom of the receiver. If the 
stop cock be closed the steam will soon fill all the surrounding space 
and keep the water down quite to the lower edge, but if the cock be 
opened, the steam finding an outlet will rise, and the water will fol- 
low and again produce a large quantity of vapor. It will generally 


Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 99 


be found expedient to allow a moderate discharge only at the mouth 
of the pipe, and to cause the greater part of the action to take place 
through the metal of the receiver R. The only uses indeed of this 
part of the apparatus are Ist, to receive, without loss of heat, the 
standard piece I, and deposit it in the water without coming in con- 
tact with the exterior air, and 2d, to prevent the dispersion of the 
water by the extreme rapidity of its action, particularly towards the 
close of the operation. The pipe of R, is wrapped with flannel. 

The manner of transferring the standard-piece is seen in Fig. 3, 
where G is a cyMndrical or slightly conical recipient either entirely 
closed, or having a few orifices h, h, h, at the bottom. This recip- 
ient is to be formed either of iron, copper, silver, platina, plumbago, 
wedgewood ware, or crucible clay, according to the heat to which it 
is to be exposed, or the materials into which it is to be plunged. It 
will often be found expedient to protect the cylinder I, from the di- 
rect action of the fused metal, of which we would ascertain the tem- 
perature, otherwise there might be an adhesion of some portions of 
the melted mass which would vitiate the experiment. When the 
body I, has been heated to the requisite degree, and is to be trans- 
ferred to the receiver R, the container G, is laid, by means of the 
handle, g, w, on some convenient support; R is then inserted at the 
mouth so that the hook p, shall be on the same side with the handle ; 
G and R are then inclined so that I may slide from the bottom of G 
into R, the latter is then rolled over upon the side p, when the concave 
base of J, will be received upon the hook, and the cylinder will take the 
position indicated by the dotted figure, the moment R is raised to. a 
vertical position. 

It may then be plunged in an instant into the boiling water, as seen 
in Fig. 2. The quantity of vapor produced, is shown by the weights 
W, w, which it may be necessary to add to A in order to restore the 
position of the beam, so that the index EH, shall again point to an en- 
graved line on the side of the bar. 

The receiver R, may be kept in the water wlien not required for 
immediate use, and be weighed with the liquid both before and after 
the experiment. By this means its temperature will be the same as 
that of the water, and no calculation necessary. 

The lamp L, instead of being removed by revolving to allow the 
generator A, to rest on the cushion B, may rise through the center of 
that cushion, which may, in turn, be supported by the rod attached 
ats. ‘This arrangement is seen at B, Fig. 2, where the rod Q, sus- 
tains a small circular platform and cushion, as well as the lamp L. 


100 Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 


The advantage of this arrangement is the saving of time, and the 
only inconvenience, that the lamp must be relighted after each ex- 
periment, as it will be extinguished by closing P and preventing the 
access of air from below to K. It must obviously not be kept burn- 
ing under the generator during the experiment. 

Instead of employing weights as at W, w, to reproduce the counter- 
poise, or show the equivalent weight of steam produced, I have gradu- 
ated one end or base of the counterpoise C, by radiant lines, and caus- 
ed to be removed a segment of about 60° along the screw D, through 
its whole length, so as to present a vertical plane Surface, on which 
to form a scale; the graduations of this scale are, of course, regula- 
ted by the distance apart of the threads of the screw; the weight 
of the counterpoise is such that one revolution on the thread produces 
a difference of one hundredth of a pound at the boiler end of the 
beam. ‘The periphery of C is then graduated into one hundred equal 
divisions, (indicated by the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, &c.) so that, as a com- 
plete revolution of the counterpoise, towards the end of the rod, 
marks an increase of one hundredth of a pound in the weight of 
water put into A, so a corresponding movement in the reverse direc- 
tion, compensates for the same amount of loss by evaporation; and 
a movement through one of the centigrade divisions only, or one 
hundredth of a revolution, as marked on the end of the cylinder, of 
course indicates one hundredth of the above amount, namely one 
ten thousandth of a pound. If greater exactness were required, it 
might be obtained either by making the threads at a less distance 
apart, or by diminishing the counterpoise C, and substituting for a 
part of its weight a fixed weight M. 

I have found the apparatus sensible to the fourteen thousandth of a 
pound or half of a grain, when fully charged for use, that is, when the 
boiler contained at least sixteen ounces of water. 

The arrangement above indicated may be varied to suit the differ- 
ent purposes to which the instrument may be applied, and the stand- 
ards will be different according to the temperatures to which they 
must be exposed. Ifthe substance, of which the temperature is to 
be ascertained, can with safety be plunged beneath the surface of — 
boiling water, without causing either chemical change or variation of 
specific gravity, this direct action of the substance is doubtless to be 
preferred to the intervention of any second substance as a standard. 
The quantity, or number of therms* of heat present, in a given weight 
of the substance in question, will then be known, and if we know or 


* See Ch. Dupin. Méchanique, tome 3. p. 353, et seqq. 


Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 101 


ean determine the specific heat, we may calculate the temperature 
as already indicated. I have, in this manner, proved the quantity of 
heat present in melted iron. Practical men may, possibly, from oc- 
casionally experiencing the tremendous effect of generating a quan- 
tity of steam from the moisture of their moulds, imagine that the ex- 
periment of pouring melted iron into a vessel of boiling water will 
be attended with danger. But I can assure them, from repeated 
trials, that it is perfectly safe. Plunge into a bucket of water, a 
common small iron kettle, supported on feet: pour into this, when 
completely immersed, any convenient quantity of melted iron; the 
ebullition from the surface of the melted mass will be at first very 
slow or scarcely perceptible, while from the outside of the kettle it 
will be very vigorous. The whole will subsequently exhibit the 
same effects as are perceived when a piece of cast iron is immersed 
at a bright red heat. 

The following experiment was made in August, 1831. Twelve 
ounces of melted iron were poured into about six pounds of water, 
at 212°: the result was eight ounces of steam produced. In 
order to calculate this case, and obtain the actual power present in 
the state of heat at the time of the immersion, we have to multiply 
the weight of steam by its latent heat, say 990°, which gives 7920° ; 
this divided by the weight of metal, (twelve ounces,) gives 660 for 
the number of ounces of water, which one ounce of the metal would 
have heated one degree, in cooling itself down to 212°. But as the 
temperature of the metal is the thing required, we must divide the 


above by the specific heat of cast iron, say 3.95 0 1212, which ~ 


gives 660—.1212=5445°. But it will be recollected, that a por- 
tion of this must be regarded as the latent heat of melted iron. 

In order to show what the latent heat of cast iron 7s, we may adopt 
the plan of taking from a mass of melting iron, a lump not actually 
liquefied, quench it, and observe the weight of steam produced. 
Again, pour from the same mass a portion of the liquefied metal, 
and ascertain how much more steam, for the same weight, is given 
by the latter than by the former. The same proceeding may be 
adopted for all other metals and their alloys. 

The following experiments and calculations will show the mode of 
applying the steam pyrometer. 

1. A cylinder of cast iron, weighing 5668 grs., was heated to red- 
ness. It was then placed within the receiver and instantly plunged 
into boiling water, previously accurately weighed; after the entire 
cessation of ebullition, it was withdrawn and the deficiency supplied 


102 Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 


by weights. ‘The heat had been a moderately red heat ;—now, as 
cast iron has a specific heat of about .1212, this multiplied by 5668 
will give the equivalent weight of water =687, which heated to the 
same degree might produce the same effect. In the case just sta- 
ted, the quantity of water found to have been evaporated was 674. 
Hence 674 multiplied by the latent heat in steam, (=990° Fahr.) 
gives 667260° = the grains of water which would be heated one 
degree by condensing the steam now generated. But as the iron 
was equivalent to only 687 grains of water, it must have been heated 
as many degrees above 212°, as 687 is contained times in 6672609, 
which is 971.2 times; hence this number added to 212° will give 
the temperature of the iron, expressed in degrees of Fahrenheit’s 
scale, equal to 1183.2. 

2. Another experiment, conducted in the same manner, and with 
the same cylinder, but at a cherry red heat, gave 945 grains of steam. 
By applying to this case the principle of the formula, as before, we 
have, as above, 5668 X.1212=687, for the equivalent of the iron 
in weight of water; and 945 x990=935550 = the grains of water 
which would be heated one degree by the condensation of the steam 
produced. Then 935550~687=1362 = the number of degrees 
which the iron must have lost in producing this effect, while it came 
down from its initial temperature of redness to 212°. To this again 
we add 212°, and obtain 1574° for the actual temperature. 

3. A ball of cast iron, weighing 1665 grs., was heated to a bright 
red, and gave 230.2 grains of steam. Here 1665 X.1212=201.8 
= the equivalent weight of water, which, if heated to the same tem- 
perature, would have produced the same effect, viz. 230.2 x 990= 
227898. Now this divided by 201.8 gives 1128= the degrees 
above boiling point, at which the temperature was at first, or 1128-+- 
212 is equal to the actual temperature abore the zero of F’., viz.1340°. 

4. With the same ball, a second experiment gave 139 grains of 
steam. Hence 990X 139=137610, and this divided by 201.8=681.8, 
and to this add 212 and we have 893.8 for the temperature at first. 

5. The next experiment was with a cylinder of wrought iron, 
weighing 6110 grains, having a specific heat of .1100, and conse- 
quently being equivalent to 6110 X.11=672 grains of water. ‘The 
observed heat was a moderate red, and the loss in weight of water 
780 erains, whence the temperature must have been (780 X 990) 
-672 =1149+212=1361° Fah. 

6. The same cylinder was again employed, and raised to a bright 
red, so as to “scale” on exposure to the air. It then gave 989.6 


Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 103 


989.6 x 990 
672° 
=1462° above the boiling point, or 1674° of Fahrenheit’s scale. 
The process of calculation may be much simplified, when the spe- 
cific heat of the standard piece has been accurately ascertained and 
its equivalent of water found; for we have then only to multiply the 
weight of steam produced by its latent heat, or heat of elasticity, 
and divide by that equivalent. ‘This is the same as multiplying the 
weight of steam by a known constant fraction. In the fifth experi- 
ment above cited, the equivalent of the metal is 672 grains of water, 
so that the constant fraction by which to multiply the weight of steam 
actually generated, in any given experiment with that cylinder of iron, 
in order to obtain the temperature above 212°, is 222=188, or (in 
decimals) 1.4732. This number, multiplied by 780, gives the de- 
grees 1149, as before. ‘The process may be farther abridged, by 
performing the multiplication by logarithms, in which case we should 
have the logarithm of 1.4732 constant, and hence it would only be 
necessary to find in the table the logarithm of the grains of steam, 
add it to said constant quantity, and find the number standing against 
their sum, for the temperature above 212°. 
Thus, the logarithm of 1.4732 is .168259 
To which add the logarithm of 780 = 2.892095 


And we obtain the logarithm of 1149° = 3.060354 

It will be no less easy to solve the same problem by means of a 
Gunter’s scale and a pair-of compasses. The distance from 1 to the 
constant fraction, (1.4732 in the above case,) on the line of numbers, 
will reach from the number of grains of steam to the temperature, 
in degrees Fahr., above 212°. 

We might, instead of determining the specific heat of the stand- 
ard mass, by the ordinary methods, first heat it to a known tempera- 
ture in boiling mercury, in oil, spirits of turpentine, melting zinc, lead, 
bismuth, tin, or any convenient alloy* of these metals, and then ob- 


grains of vapor; consequently its heat must have been 


* The alloys of tin and lead are very convenient for this purpose. Their mel- 
ting points as determined by M. Kupffer, (See Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. XL. 
302; and Thomson on Heat and Electricity, p. 174.) are as follows: 


Alloy of 


Tin Lead Point of fusion. 
1 atom + 1 atom - - - 466° 
y_) + Ee Saye be 385 
3 «c + 1 cc 2 Pe us 367 
ie 7 RR as Bi “00s 372 
5 are Gp ha ate eh eee ae 


The alloy eaten employed by tin plate workers is I believe composed of 1 tin, 
-++2 lead. The meanof several trials with that alloy have convinced me that its 
melting point is 385°. 


104 Description of the Steam Pyrometer. 


serve the quantity of steam it produces in cooling down to 212°. 
The actual temperature of the liquid being known by observation, 
and the quantity of steam by weight, every other quantity of vapor 
given by different temperatures of the same standard mass, will be 
produced by a proportionate quantity of heat. It will be seen that 
this method of proceeding takes no account of differences in specific 
heat at different temperatures. It comes at once to a simple expres~ 
sion of the heating power of a body measured by a single effect of 
the heating principle, that of conferring the elastic form on water, 
already raised to the boiling pomt. 

It will readily be conceived that the question of specific heats, of 
expansion, and contraction, and of course the variable rates of ex- 
pansion at different temperatures might be wholly disregarded, if we 
had an invariable standard by which to measure the portions of heat, 
that may at any time be present in a given portion of matter. ‘The 
latent heat of vapor supplies this standard. The following are some 
of the different results which have been obtained by those who have 
made experiments on this subject. 


Latent heat in vapor. Determined by 
950° =e . Watt. 
945 - - Southern. 
1000 - - - Lavoisier and Laplace. 
1040.8 - - Rumford. 
955.8 - - - Despretz. 
above 1000 - - Thomson. 
1000 - - - Ure, (corrected result.) 
mean 954 


I have in the preceding calculations assumed the latent heat, at 
990°. Should the results of Dr. Ure, which appear to have been 
made in a manner as unexceptionable as any yet published, be con- 
firmed and established by other philosophers, the facility of making 
calculations such as I have above presented, will be increased and the 
usefulness of the principle in pyrometry more fully established. 


Nore.—The experiment on melted iron, on page 101, is offered 
chiefly as an illustration. 'The apparatus then at hand did not ad- 
mit of all the exactness which the case allows ;—still the result is 
believed to be nearly correct. 


Uhloric Ether. 105 


Art. VII.—On pure Chloric Ether; by Samus, Guturie ;—in « 
letter to the Editor, dated Sacket’s Harbor, Feb. 15, 1832. 


Dear Sir—In some one of my letters to you, I think I advanced 
the opinion that chloric ether, like some other ethers, decreases in 
specific gravity as it increases in strength ;—that opinion was errone- 
ous, and my object in my last was to correct it. 

I am now able to answer the query at the end of the last number 
of the American Journal of Science and Arts, and I do it in the af- 
firmative.* 

Chloric ether may be entirely, or very nearly so, separated from 
alcohol by repeated rectification, from muriate of lime; it may thus 
be brought to the specific gravity of 1.44, but I have found -no agent 
for that purpose comparable with strong sulphuric acid. Chloric 
ether, distilled off sulphuric acid, has a specific gravity of 1.486, or 
a little greater, and may then be regarded as free from alcohol ; and 
if a little sulphuric acid, which sometimes contaminates it, be remo- 
ved by washing it with a strong solution of carbonate of potassa, it 
may then be regarded as absolutely pure. In this state it boils at 
166°, has a specific gravity of 1.486, at 60° is extremely volatile, 
diffuses upon the tongue and fauces, a powerful ethereal odor, 
and excites, to an intense degree, its peculiar scent and aromatic 
taste. Admitting its composition to be 1 proportion of chlorine =36 
+1 proportion olefiant gas =14, it contains nearly 346 times its 
own bulk of chlorine. 

Sulphuric acid affords a fine test of the presence or absence of al- 
cohol ; if alcohol be present, so soon as the chloric ether is all over, 
the acid acts upon the alcohol which it has detained, and generates 
sulphuric ether, which is instantly indicated by its peculiar flavor :— 
if no alcohol be present, no sulphuric ether will be produced. Again, 
if there be alcohol present, the acid unites with it, is diffused through, 
and blackens the whole mass; but if otherwise, the ether lies clear 
and transparent upon the surface of the acid, until it is entirely dis- 
tilled off. 


* «¢Can-any method he devised by which the alcohol can be detached from the 
chloric ether, and the latter obtained concentrated and in quantity ?’—Am. Jour. 
Vol. XX, p. 408. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 14 


106 = Steam Boats protected from the Effects of Lightning. 


Caustic potash in strong solution, even at boiling point, has no 
action upon pure chloric ether; but if the ether be considerably 
diluted with alcohol, it decomposes it, and forms a profusion of mu- 
riate of potassa. 

In my apparatus for preparing chloric ether, I have taken advan- 
tage of the different temperatures at which alcohol and ether boil. 
The vapor which arises during the distillation, and which contains 
both alcohol and ether, is made to traverse a worm immersed in wa- 
ter heated to 170°. At the point where the worm issues from the 
hot water, a branch worm, with a modification of Welter’s tube, is at- 
tached to its under side, when both worms are conducted into and 
through a vessel of cold water, issuing from it at a distance from 
each other convenient for placing under them proper receivers. As 
alcohol boils at 176°, of course it must condense at 170°, and will 
be condensed in the main worm above the branch, and be discharged 
at its outlet, whilst the ether, which boils at 166°, cannot be con- 
densed at 170°, and therefore passes around from the insertion of 
the branch, to be condensed in the cold water, the whole affording 
me, whilst the ether lasts, two separate streams, one of ether and the 
other of alcohol. ‘This little addition to the cominon distilling appa- 
ratus, diminishes very greatly the trouble of making chloric ether. 

As chloric ether is said to havea specific gravity of only 1.22 at 
45°, a boiling point at 152°, and to be decomposed by sulphuric 
acid, evolving chlorine, you may have good reason to doubt the purity 
of my product, or the accuracy of my estimate, but you can very rea- 
dily verify the first, and I shall be found to be very near the truth 
with the latter. I regret my inability to forward to you immediately 
a beautiful sample of pure chloric ether which I have prepared for 
that purpose, and which I shall send as early as possible. 


Art. VIII.—Steam Boats protected from the Effects of Lightning ; 

by Auexanper Jones, M. D. 

i PROFESSOR SILLIMAN. “ 

Athens, Geo. January 5, 1882. 
Sir—Havine seen it stated, that there had been uo instance 

known of a steam boat’s being struck with lightning, while under way, 
since their use in the United States, I was led to reflect on the cause 
of their exemption, if such was the fact. It was likewise hinted in 
the above statement, that there might be something about a steam 
boat that acted as a non-conductor. 


Steam Boats protected from the Effects of Lightning. 107 


In order to ascertain how far the evolution of steam influenced the 
free passage of electricity, I constructed a small steam boiler, with 
two stop cocks placed at the distance of two or three inches apart 
on the top of the boiler. Just above, and on one side of one of the 
stop cocks, I placed a small brass ball, supported in its position by a 
stiff wire attached to the boiler. On filling the boiler half full of 
water, and placing it in a hot furnace, steam pretty highly condensed 
was made to escape through the cock, near the mouth of which was 
placed the brass ball. On charging a large Leyden jar until it emitted 
a spark of electricity, the size of a broom straw, and connecting the 
top of the jar by a small brass chain, which was fastened at its oppo- 
site end to another brass ball; this ball being held by the point of a 
rod, screwed into it, having a glass handle, and which was made to 
approach the one fixed to the boiler till they nearly touched, having 
a small stream of steam issuing between them; I found no electric 
spark whatever could be made to pass from one ball to the other 
however near they were approached, while steam continued to issue 
between them. Yet if the jar was discharged in any other direction 
than by the balls and through the steam, the spark, or shock would 
be almost sufficiently large to kill small animals, or to produce 
severe effects ona man. I found, on repeating the experiment, 
that it utterly failed to give a spark through steam in any direc- 
tion. That it could not be made to strike at any distance within 
the influence of steam. Neither could itbe made to strike the hot 
boiler. Nor could it be made to strike a red hot ball of iron; but 
as the ball cooled some, it would receive small sparks. A smooth 
polished metallic surface would also conduct it off without much 
noise. From the above experiments it may be concluded that steam 
is a powerful and ready conductor of electricity, so much so, that a 
small stream of it can instantly discharge a large Leyden jar, which 
is heavily charged, and that without the least apparent spark or noise. 

It is therefore pretty well proved, that the steam generated in a 
steam boat completely protects it from the effects of lightning. 'The 
electricity of the clouds, that would otherwise in many instances 
strike steam boats loaded with so much iron; on coming in contact 
with the moist and heated column of steam, which ascends above 
the boats, immediately diffuses itself through the volume of steam, 
and passes to the water without communicating any shock. Or in 
other words, the ascending ‘steam performs the office of a Franklin 
rod. ‘The steam being in such acase a much better conductor, than 


108 Steam Boats protected from the Effects of Lightning. 


the iron of the boat, the electricity will always take the steam in 
preference to striking any part of the boat; and this it will do in so 
diffused a manner, as never to be perceived or felt. If a boat is 
ever struck, we presume it will occur while she is lying cool at the 
wharf, and beyond the influence of higher objects; but in no in- 
stance probably will it ever happen while she is discharging steam. 
Houses could be protected in a similar manner, provided a steam 
tube should be made to pass from a boiler at the ground, to the top 
of the chimney; but as Franklin rods are equally good protectors, 
and much cheaper, they are to be preferred. 


Remarks.—It will be remembered that, some years since, proba- 
bly as many as ten, (for I have no document at hand to refer to, for 
particulars) the boiler of a steam boat, I believe in motion, explo- 
ded in the harbor of Charleston, South Carolina, in consequence of 
a stroke of lightning. The boat was under the general superintend- 
ance of the late Mr. Samuel Howard,* of Savannah, who was on 
board ; and in a conversation with me on the subject, he attributed 
the roe to the sudden expansion of the steam by the lightning. 

Perhaps this fact does not militate against the views of Dr. Jones, 
for there may be discharges of atmospherical electricity too powerful 
to be quietly disposed of by any artificial conductor; that is, the 
amount of the electric fluid may be greater in a given case, than 
steam or metal can transmit without accumulation of heat, and with- 
out violence. ‘The heat produced by electric discharges, although 
transient, is often very great, and if in the case above referred to, the 
mere expansion of the steam by the lightning, should not be sup- 
posed sufficient to account for the effect, is it not. possible that there 
might have been a great addition to the quantity of steam, by the elec- 
tric heat transmitted through the metal of the boiler to the water, 
and through the water ieee which is an imperfect conductor ? 

There can be no doubt that a steam boat is less liable to be torn 
by lightning, than a vessel of the common construction ; for, not to 


mention the steam, her iron chimney and working pistgn, and in short 
all the masses of iron present a large conducting surface for the 


lightning, and the connexion is finished by actual contact of the metal 
with the great flood of waters beneath. A steam boat is somewhat 
in the condition that a ship would be, whose masts were all of iron, 


* A man ofan acute and philosophical mind. 


Meteorological Observations. 109 


and reached down to the water. We should think that such a ship 
was nearly secure from being torn by lightning. It is obvious that 
the popular apprehension as to the peculiar danger which, on account 
of their large amount of metallic matter, steam boats are supposed to 
incur in thunder storms, is groundless, and excepting the very extra- 
ordinary case of the boat in Charleston harbor,* we do not know 
another fact that countenances the common impression.—Eb. 


Art. IX.— Abstract of Meteorological Observations, taken at Mari- 
etta, Ohio; by S. P. Hitrpetu, in the year 1831.—Latitude 
39° 25’ North. Longitude 4° 28’ West of Washington. 


Time of observation, at sun-rise, and at 2 and 9 o’clock, P. M. 


Thermometer. Rain 

® ma wi eo ; 

Spieal ysl lar ote) of a ls 
NEMS (23 15 5 a | 2) S|] CU] .VS] erevarzine winps. 

See SS Yo Oey en eel eatin | 

Sashes Sle Pei pete On Sh Soe 

© j@ |8/18/ 5/3 |-s] esis 
, a |S ele |S |e] ole 
January, |26° |62°) 00°/62°} 4 113,27! 12) 29} 4/04 N.N.W and w. 
February, |31 {75 | -2 |77 j28 6- | 21) 7] 2150 W.N.wW. and s.w. 
March, 46 |76 | 17 [59/1 /17 21} 10) 2/92 W.S.W. and E.S.E. 
April, 54 (86 | 24 |62 118 |12 | 22) 8 2185) w.s.w. and n.x. and gE. 
May, 61 |89 | 30 \59 |31~ |10 | 17, 14) 4/25) w.s.w. and n.n.w. 
June, 71 (91 | 51 |40] 1 6 20) 10} 7\00) s.s.w. and wn. and s.=. 
July, 74 85 | 48 [37 119,27/11 17) 14/12)12) s.s.w. and w. and £.s.£. 
August, |70 (86 | 51 /35 {18  /29 12} 19) 7/58} s.s.w..and N. and s.E. 
September,|62.50/82 | 41 |41 | 7,10/30 | 13! 17] 3/58 s.W. Ww. and N.w. 
October, |54 |82 | 26 |56 [23 [29 20) 11] 3170} s.w.w. and n. and s.£. 
November,|40 (70 | 12 58] 8 _ /29 15} 15] 1/25) Ww s.w. and N.w. 
December, |21 42 a 5212 18 15| 16} 1/75 W.N.W. and s.w. 


For the y’r.|50.87| | ~_ }205/160}53|54 

Mean temperature for the year 50.87, being four degrees less 
than in 1830. 

Total amount of rain and melted snow 53.54 inches, or nearly 
four and a half feet. 

205 fair and 160 cloudy days, being fifty-seven days, or nearly 
two months more cloudy weather than in the year 1830. 

The mean temperature for the winter months is 26°. 

Do. do. for the spring months is 53.66°. 


* The editor would be obliged by an exact account of that disaster, from some 
person acquainted with the facts. 


110 Meteorological Observations. 


The mean temperature for the summer months is '71.60°. 

Do. do. for the autumnal months is 52.16°. 
Difference in the mean temperature of the winter months in the 
year 1830 and the year 1831, is 7.66°, that of 1830 being 33.66°. 

Depth of snow in 1831, forty-eight inches; the greatest fall at 
any one time being fifteen inches. Depth of snow in 1830, ‘being 
thirteen inches. Depth of rain in 1830, being 37.26 inches. Dif- 
ference in favor of the year 1831, 16.28 inches. 

The past year has been marked with many singular features, and 
the extremes in moisture and temperature have been very great: 
the winter months attended with a degree of cold only found in the 
arctic regions, and the summer months with floods of rain peculiar to 
tropical climates. ‘There seems to have been a belt of clouds encir- 
cling the western States for the last six months, opening at distant 
periods, and for such short spaces of time, to the rays of the sun, 
that solar heat, since the great eclipse in February last, has done but 
little in warming the surface of the earth. ‘The spring months were 
cold, and fruit trees nearly twenty days later in blossoming than in 
the year 1830. Heavy rains commenced falling the last of June, 
and continued through the summer months, filling the rivers and creeks 
to overflowing, and deluging the low grounds with water. Crops of 
small grain and hay suffered greatly, being in many places on the bor- 
ders of the streams entirely swept away, and in others beaten down 
and destroyed. Much of the wheat on the uplands, after it was reap- 
ed, vegetated in the shocks, and some while standing im the fields 
before it was cut. Hay suffered in the same way, and the produce 
of whole meadows was lost, or so much damaged as to be worthless 
and unfit for food, being altogether deprived of its saccharine and mu- 
cilaginous properties. Corn crops suffered less, and were very good 
where planted on lands not inundated with rain. Potatoes were bet- 
tep and more abundant than usual; which may be attributed to the 
coolness of the season, this climate being generally too hot in summer 
for their healthy growth. Apples, where they escaped the late 
spring frosts, were abundant and fine. Peaches were poor, being de- 
prived of their aroma and sugar by the excessive rains; many of 
them rotting on the trees long before the season of ripening. Pears, 
being better suited to cold and wet, succeeded very well, and afford- 
ed fine crops. The productions of the garden were generally as 
good as they usually are in any season. Autumn wasmild and tole- 
rably pleasant, but afforded us only eight or ten days of “ Indian 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 111 


summer,” in place of the three or four weeks with which we are 
commonly favored. The last of November, winter commenced with 
the rigor of the northern regions, and quite as unexpectedly to our 
farmers and boatmen, as the winter of 1812 to the armies of Napo- 
leon ; nearly half the potatoe and corn crops being yet ungathered. 
By the fourth of December the rivers were full of ice, and steam- 
boats ceased running. By the tenth of the month the Ohio river was 
frozen over, and for the rest of the month could be crossed and trav- 
eled on by the heaviest teams, the ice being from twelve to eighteen 
inches in thickness. On the eighth of January, 1832, after a heavy 
rain and thaw, the river rose ten or fifteen feet, and the ice gave way, 
destroying a great many steam-boats, which lay along the shores in 
exposed situations, and hundreds of ‘“‘ Orleans ” or flat boats. Some 
idea of the intensity of the cold may be formed, when it is known 
that the Mississippi river was frozen over one hundred and thirty 
miles below the mouth of the Ohio, a circumstance before unknown 
since the settlement of the western States. ‘The river was loaded 
with floating ice below Natches, and the boys in New Orleans were 
surprised and delighted with the sight of water sufficiently frozen to 
afford them skaiting. ‘The winter thus far has been one of great se- 
verity : the snow has not been more than six or eight inches deep, 
but the thermometer has been on several mornings from 5° to 10° 
below zero, and for whole days only a few degrees above. 
February 3d, 1832. - 


Art. X.—Further Experiments on the Disinfecting Powers of In- 
creased Temperatures; by Witt1am Henry, M.D. F.R.S. &c. 


From the Philosophical Magazine and Annals for Jan. 1832. 


In the Phil. Mag. and Annals, for November, I described a se- 
ries of experiments, which established the following conclusions :— 

I. That raw cotton, and various kinds of piece-goods, manufac- 
tured for clothing from that or other materials, sustain no injury 
whatsoever, either of color or texture, by exposure for several 
hours to a dry temperature of nearly 212° Fahrenheit.* 


* The temperature, I have since found, may in most cases be safely raised forty 
or fifty degrees higher. 


112 Disinfecting Powers of Incredsed iemperatures. 


Il. That the infectious matter of eow-pock is rendered inert, by 
a temperature not below 140° Fahrenheit ; from whence it was in- 
ferred that more active contagions are probably destructible, at tem- 
peratures not exceeding 212°. ‘This proposition it was obviously 
within the reach of the experiment to determine. But I had intend- 
ed to have resigned the inquiry, to those who are engaged in the 
practice of medicine, as more within their province than my own ; 
when the appearance of malignant cholera at Sunderland determined 
me immediately to extend the investigation. If that disease be com- 
municable from one person to another, there appeared ground for 
hope that any new facts or principles, respecting contagion generally, 
might be brought to bear upon this particular emergency. If chol- 
era should be proved not to be so communicable, there still would 
remain many infectious maladies, to which any newly acquired 
knowledge of the laws of contagion might admit of beneficial appli- 
cation. 

Of diseases generally allowed to be contagious, I could obtain ac- 
cess to two only, typhus and scarlatina. ‘The former malady does 
not, however, answer to all those conditions which are required to 
render it a fit subject of experiment. It is less distinctly marked, 
than many other diseases, by characteristic appearances ; and it is 
judged to exist, from a collection of symptoms, each of which is oc- 
casionally wanting, and each of which, when present, admits of 
such an infinite variety of shades, as to render its discrimination ex- 
tremely difficult and uncertain. But a still stronger objection to ty- 
phus, as a source of evidence on this subject, is, that by no inconsid- 
erable number of writers it is denied to be contagious at all. On 
this topic a controversy has been carried on, into which I decline to 
enter. My own conviction, founded on very extensive observation 
of the disease during more than twenty years of. private practice, 
and still more as physician to the Manchester Infirmary, Dispens- 
ary, and Fever-wards, is that, under certain circumstances, typhus is 
decidedly contagious ; although by strict attention to cleanliness and 
to free ventilation, the effluvia issuing from the sick may be so dilu- 
ted and carried off, as to be rendered almost harmless. 

My determination to reject the contagion of typhus as a subject of 
experiment was, however, changed, by learning from Mr. Johnson, 
ihe resident clerk of the Fever-wards in this town, that there was at 
that time in the house a singularly well-marked case of the disease. 
The physician also, to whose charge the patient (a female, et. 19) 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 113 


had devolved, assured me that he had not, during the last two or 
three years, met with a case which he could more confidently pro- 
nounce to be contagious typhus. Its severity was proved by its ter- 
minating fatally, notwithstanding the most assiduous attentions, on 
the fourteenth day of the disease. During the night, between the 
tenth and eleventh days of the malady, a flannel] jacket, made with- 
out sleeves, was placed in contact with the body of the patient. On 
the following day, it was replaced by another ; and that, on the day 
after, by a third ; each of which was worn by her tor several hours. 
The first waistcoat, after being submitted to a temperature of 204° 
or 205° Fahr., for an hour and three quarters, was kept beneath, 
and within twelve inches from, the nostrils of a person engaged in 
writing during two hours. The second, after being heated in a sim- 
ilar manner, was worn next the body of the same individual for two 
hours. The third, after exposure to heat, was kept in an air-tight 
tin canister for twenty-six days, with the view of giving activity to 
any contagious matter, which might possibly have escaped decompo- 
sition. It was then placed within twelve inches of the face of the 
same person for four hours; a gentle current of air being contrived 
to blow upon him, from the flannel during the whole time. No in- 
jurious effects were experienced. 

The negative results thus obtained are only, I am well aware, en- 
titled to that proportional share of weight, which would have been 
due to them, if they had formed a part of a numerous series of ex- 
periments. For the reception of contagion, even by a person sit- 
uated within its sphere, depends so much on predisposition, and on 
other circumstances, that a much larger induction of facts would be 
necessary, to establish the absence of femites in any case like the 
foregoing. I do not, therefore lay much stress on so limited a num- 
ber of facts. It may be proper however, to mention, that, during 
the first trial, the person subjected to it was much fatigued by pre- 
vious exercise ; and that at the close of it he had observed an un- 
broken fast of eight hours,—a state of the animal system extremely 
_ favorable to the efficacy of contagion, if any had been present. 


In Scarlatina, however, (including both scarl. sumplex. and scarl. 
anginosa), we have a disease admirably adapted for furnishing the 
necessary evidence. No one doubts of its being infectious. Per- 
haps, indeed, of all the diseases with which nosologists have arranged it 
(the exanthemata,) it gives birth to the most active and durable con- 


Vou. XXII.—WNo. 1. 15 


114 Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 


tagion. ‘The interval, between exposure to infection and the com- 
mencement of the disease, is unusually short, and may be stated at 
from two or three, to six days. When the infection has been receiv- 
ed, the malady produced by it, begins to be contagious before the 
scarlet efflorescence appears ; and it continues so even after the sub- 
sequent desquamation of the cuticle. Every medical practitioner of 
much experience must have been baffled in his attempts to dislodge 
it from families, in which it had gained a footing. In such cases, 
its revivals at distant intervals of time has been sometimes traced to 
clothes or bedding which had been carelessly laid by, without being 
sufficiently purified. In the state of fomites, this species of infec- 
tion has lain dormant many months. Dr. Hildebrand, for example, 
relates that he carried the infection in a coat, which had not been 
worn since his attendance on a scarlatina patient a year and a half 
before, from Vienna into Podolia, where the disease had till then 
been almost unknown.* Generally speaking, too, scarlatina is a 
distinct and well characterized disease; and whenever it is otherwise, 
the doubts may commonly be removed, by comparing it with the 
prevailing epidemic. 

These considerations rendered me extremely desirous to try the 
disinfecting powers of elevated temperatures over the contagion of 
scarlatina. It fortunately happened that in one of the wards of the 
House of Recovery, a patient (a female, aged nineteen, of the name 
of Gerrard) was suffering under that form of the disease, which has 
been termed scarlatina anginosa. The symptoms in the judgment 
of the attendant physician, as well as in my own (taken in conjunc- 
tion, too, with the previous history of the case), left no doubt of its 
nature. ‘T’o make the most of this excellent example of the malady, 
a succesion of flannel waistcoats were worn, each for several hours, 
in contact with the body of the patient, and were then put into dry 
bottles, which were well corked, tied over with bladder, and laid by 
for use. Other opportunities of obtaining waistcoats, similarly infec- 
ted soon occured, in the case of Sarah Gerrard, a younger sister of 
the first patient; of William Johnston, et. eleven; and of Robert 
Green, et. fifteen. In Johnston, not only were the appearances 
quite unequivocal, but he was the last of four children, (not all of 
one family,) who had been infected, in regular sequence, by com- 
munication with each other. 


* Dict. de Med. xix. p. 156. 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 115 


1. A waistcoat, which had been worn all night by the elder Ger- 
rard, a day or two after the appearance of the scarlet eruption, was 
heated four hours and a half at 204° Fahrenheit, and on the 8th of 
November, was applied to the body of a boy, et. six years. No 
symptom having shown itself on the 15th, a second waistcoat was 
then applied to him, which had been worn more than twelve hours 
by Johnston on the second day of the scarlet efflorescence, and then 
heated at temperatures varying from 200° to 204° Fahrenheit, du- 
ring two hours and three quarters. After an interval of twenty-two 
days the boy, who still continued to wear the same waistcoat, remain- 
ed perfectly well. . 

2. A waistcoat, which had been worn twenty-two hours by the 
elder Gerrard on the fourth and fith days after the appearance of the 
eruption, was on the 19th of November heated three hours at 204°. 
It was, after this, worn by a girl, aged twelve years, ull the 30th, 
without effect. Another waistcoat, which had been worn by Sarah 
Gerrard, was then substituted but without any effect ensuing. | 

3. A waistcoat, put on by Sarah Gerrard on the second day of 
the efflorescence and worn by her for three days, was applied, Nov. 
19th, after it had been heated two hours at 200°, to the body of a 
boy aged ten years. On the 30th a second waistcoat, which had 
been worn by Robert Green during the first and second days of the 
eruption, and which had been kept in the disinfecting apparatus at 
204° during one hour only, was substituted; but no symptoms of 
infection have appeared. 

4. A waistcoat, which had been worn by the elder Gerrard sev- 
enteen hours on the 7th and 8th of November, (the second and third 
days of the eruption, ) was kept closely corked up in a bottle till the 
25th, then heated four hours anda half, at temperatures varying 
from 200° to 206°, and applied to a girl aged thirteen years. On 
the 30th of November, no effect having been produced, another 
waistcoat was substituted, which had been worn eleven hours by 
Johnston on the third day of the efflorescence, and then disinfected 
by a temperature of 204° applied during two hours. No symptoms 
of scarlatina have shown themselves in this case. 

In all the foregoing intances, it was ascertained by the most care- 
ful inquiries that the children, to whom the disinfected waistcoats 
were applied, had never been affected with the scarlatina, and there- 


116 Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 


fore liable to that disease. The children were attentively examined 
every day, in order that no slight symptom might pass unobserved.* 

The experiments, which have been related, appear to me suffi- 
ciently numerous to prove, that by exposure to a temperature not below 
200° Fahr. during at least one hour, the contagious matter of scarla- 
tina is either dissipated or destroyed. 'To me it seems more probable 
that it is decomposed, than that it is merely volatilized ; because cow- 
pock matter, though completely deprived of its volatile portion at 
120°. is not rendered inert by temperatures much below 140°. I 
did not, however, consider it as either necessary to the proof, or 
justifiable, to determine, with respect to the contagion of scarlatina, 
either the lowest temperature, or the shortest time, adequate to the 
disinfecting agency ; for these points, which are of no practical im- 
portance, could not have been decided without the actual communi- 
cation of the malady. Still less necessary, and less justifiable, 
should Ihave thonght it, to have proved, by exciting the disease, 
that, the waistcoats, as taken from the patients, were Wh ha Sri 
with the contagion of scarlatina. 

It may, I am aware, be urged that the induction would have 
been more satisfactory, if founda on a greater number of instances. 
But experiments, of the kind which have been related, are attend- 
ed with so many difficulties, as to forbid their multiplication beyond 
what is absolutely necessary. Not to mention other obstacles, it is 
far from easy to find young persons in every respect unexceptionable 
for the purpose ;—to insulate them, as was done in these instances, 
from all casual sources of infection ;—and to keep them under the 
watchful care of observers, qualified to mark even indistinct symp- 
toms that might arise, and to apply the proper remedies. It must be 
acknowledged also, that the inference from the destructible nature’ 
of the fomztes of scarlatina, to that of other contagions, remains ana- 
logical; and that experiments are still wanting to extend the proof 
to other known species. ‘The argument, however, in its nature cu- 
mulative, has acquired a great increase of probability by the step 
which has been made, in showing that the power of heat is not 
merely exerted over cow-pock infection, but extends to the active 
and virulent contagion of scarlatina. 


* Jt is due to Mr. Edward Johnson, resident clerk of the Manchester House of 
Recovery, that I should acknowledge his valuable assistance, especially in the 
caré with which he superintended the disinfecting processes. 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 117 


The circumstances under which the experiments were conducted, 
render it, L think, demonstrable that the disinfecting agency belongs 
to heat alone; for the receptacle, in which the infected waistcoats 
were placed, having in every instance been closed, change of air 
could have had no share in the effect. The phenomena, then are 
reduced to their simplest form and the results put us in posses- 
sion, of a disinfecting agent, the most searching that nature af- 
fords ;—one that penetrates into the inmost recesses of matter in all 
its various states. As a disinfectant of ardcles which are capable of 
imbibing and retaining contagion, heat is greatly superior to the va- 
pours or gases used for the same purpose ; inasmuch as the trans- 
mission of the latter may be stopped by a few folds of compressed 
materials; while heat, if time enough be allowed, finds its way in 
spite of all obstacles. ‘To avoid being misunderstood, I must how- 
ever repeat, that it is to the destruction, by heat, of contagion exis- 
ting in substances technically called “susceptible,” that I limit the 
proposal ;—for instance, to infected clothing of every description ; 
to infected bedding and bed-furniture of every kind that would be 
spoiled by washing ; to trunks and other packages brought by travel- 
lers from infected places; and to merchandize, whenever it can be 
shown, or rendered highly probable, that such merchandize has 
been in the way of imbibing contagious matter.* 

This is not the fit occasion for obviating anticipated difficulties, 
arising out of the consideration of practical details. A few of these 
have been candidly stated to me, and have led to actual trials, chiefly 
as respects time and labor, the results of which have been satisfac- 
tory to the objectors themselves. ‘The remaining element of calcu- 
lation, the expense of apparatus and fuel, 1 am unable to supply ; 
but much observation of the use of steam, on a large scale, induces 
me to believe that the cost of producing and of applying it to this 
purpose would be far more than compensated, by the great and mani- 


* Afier taking great pains te obtain information, I have not been able to satisfy 
myself whether any, and what amount of danger exists from the presence of con- 
tagion in merchandize. There is one article, however, which is more likely than 
any other to be a vehicle of infection, viz. old rags, of which large cargoes are 
constanly imported into this country. 

Letters, which are often rendered almost illegible by fumigation, might be disin- 
fected in this way, if closed not with sealing-wax, but with wafers. Writing-paper 
I find by experiment, begins to turn brown a little under 300°; but it still retains 
its texture, and the ink is not materially changed. 


118 Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 


fest advantages of abridging the duration of quarantine,—perhaps 
of supplanting it altogether. I do not, however, consider steam as 
an essential vehicle of heat for disinfecting purposes. ‘Temperature, 
in whatever manner it may be raised, will doubtless be found ade- 
quate to the effect. It is probable that a current of air, heated with- 
ina safe point, on the plan invented by the late ingenious Mr. Strutt, 
of Derby, and now applied to so many useful purposes in manufac- 
tures and domestic economy, might accomplish the end at much ex- 
pense of time and money.* _ All that I attempt is to furnish the 
principle; its application I leave to experienced engineers in this and 
other countries. After the most attentive consideration, | can my- 
self discover no objection to the execution of the plan, that may not 
be surmounted by a reasonable share of zeal and perseverance; and 
without the exertion of those qualities, no important improvement 
was ever carried through all its stages,—from its first suggestion to 
its final and complete establishment. 

That the quarantine laws of every civilized country require to be 
carefully revised, and to be entirely re-modelled by mutual agree- 
ment between different nations, does not admit of a doubt. In their 
present state, they are both oppressive and inadequate. ‘They de- 
mand observances that are of no use, and overlook others that would 
be really efficacious. ‘They impose grievous and needless restraints 
on personal freedom ; they fetter commerce and navigation ; they 
abridge the demand for produce and manufactures; and, thus, by 
making scant the means of life over wide and populous districts, they 
nourish discontent, increase all the sufferings attendant on poverty, 
and give rise to inborn diseases, far more spreading, and scarcely 
less severe, than those against which they are intended to act as 
barriers. 

The basis, however, of a wise and beneficial system of quaran- 
tine laws,—of such a system as, while it affords all needful security 
against the introduction of contagious diseases, shall trespass no 
more than is absolutely unavoidable on the vital interests of trade 
and commerce,—can only be found in a collection of well ascer- 
tained facts respecting contagion. Of these it is not beyond the 


* See “the Philosophy of Domestic Economy,” by Charles Sylvester, which 
contains a full account of Mr. Strutt’s plans, as carried into effect at the Derby- 
shire General Infirmary, 1 vol. thin 4to. Published by Longman and Co., Lon- 
don, 1819. 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 119 


truth to assert, that there is a lamentable deficiency. It has unfor- 
tunately happened, that the phenomena of contagion have generally 
been investigated, at times when the quarantine laws have been un- 
der the deliberation of Parliament; and this with a view to supply 
evidence, which, however, honest and sincere, has been collected 
from observers, on both sides, who were under the influence of pre- 
conceived opinions. But it is not at such seasons, or in such a spirit, 
that so difficult and momentous an inquiry should be instituted. It 
must be begun, and pursued, in that dispassionate temper, which 
leaves the mind at liberty to examine phenomena with patience 
and accuracy; and to reason upon them with no other purpose, than 
that of deducing incontrovertible conclusions :—conclusions upon 
which, and upon which alone, rules of practice, of the greatest bene- 
fit to mankind, may be founded, as the final issue and reward of the 
investigation. 


DESCRIPTION OF THE APPARATUS. 


The apparatus employed in the process of disinfection is so sim- 
ple, that a representation of it can only be required by those who are 
not conversant with the application of steam as a source of heat. The 
object, in this instance, is to place articles of clothing, &c. which 
are intended to be disinfected, in a steady temperature, above 200° 
Fahrenheit, for any required length of time, without, however, allow- 
ing the steam to come in contact with the substances so exposed. 
This is effected by two vessels of copper, or of tinned iron, on the 
innermost of which the letter B stands in the sketch. The latter 
vessel is set within a larger one of similar shape, upon the edge of 
which it rests by a rim, which is united to the larger vessel by solder. 
There is, therefore, a cavity between the two vessels, shown by the 
letters DD, for containing the steam. The bottom of the outer ves- 
sel is a little dished or sloped downwards, and to the central part is 
soldered a short pipe for admitting steam and returning water; the 
space, on the centre of which the letter B is placed, is the recepta- 
cle for the articles, which are to be heated. To avoid the waste of 
heat through the sides of the outer vessel, it is packed all round, as 
shown at CC, with any non-conducting substance, such as hemp, 
bands of straw, or rolls of flannel. ‘To prevent these from being 
displaced, they may be surrounded by barrel staves secured by hoops 
of wood or metal. Over the top of the apparatus a wooden cover 
is applied, which being rabbeted along the middle, as shown by the 


120 Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 


sketch, admits either of one half or the whole of the cover being re- 
moved at pleasure. From this cover, towards the right, a pipe A 
proceeds, the only object of which is to carry into the flue of the 
chimney any infectious effluvia that may possibly escape undecompo- 
sed. The thermometer is introduced occasionally through a slit in 
the other half. The small air cock A, which is removable at pleas- 
ure, passes through an aperture in the same half of the cover; and 
when open establishes a communication between the space DD and 
the atmosphere. ‘The whole vessel rests ona table EE (the legs of 
which are represented as if broken off,) hollowed out to receive it. 
To this table the vessel is fastened by four small bolts, the extremi- 
ties of two of which are shown by the sketch. ‘To give a hold to 
the heads of these bolts, a flanche is soldered near the bottom of thé 
outer vessel, which has also a corresponding flanche at the top, for the 
purpose of keeping the packing in its place. 


A. 


Lnchies 


The small boiler G has a movable lid, from the center of which 
issues a pipe FF, five or six’ feet long, or any other convenient 
length, which slips over the pipe that descends from the steam-ves- 
sel. To bring the drawings into less space, this pipe is represented 
with a part broken off. The dimensions of every part of the appa- 
ratus are given by the scale, annexed to the sketch. 

The vessel G is to be filled about two-thirds with water, which to 
save time, may be nearly boiling at the outset. Being set over a 
fire, and the joints that require it having been made good by flour- 


Disinfecting Powers of Increased Temperatures. 121 


paste spread on paper, the opening g is to be shut by a cork or plug, 
and the small air-cock opened, to allow the escape of the air confined 
in the space DD. Both halves of the cover being then put into 
their places, the thermometer is to be introduced through the slit. 
When it indicates upwards of 200°, that half of the cover from 
which the pipe A proceeds* is to be removed ; the infected articles 
are to be placed in the receptacle, and the half-cover replaced. 
The fire under the boiler is to be regulated, by the rate at which 
the excess of steam issues from the small air-cock. This excess, if 
found inconvenient .by its escape into the room, may be conveyed 
to the outside by a pipe of the necessary length, screwed upon the 
tapped end of the air-cock. Hot water will require to be occasion- 
ally supplied through the aperture g ; but unless the steam be unne- 
cessarily wasted by too large a fire, this need not be done often; 
as what is condensed in the cavity DD is constantly trickling back 
into the boiler through the pipe FF. , 

The dimensions and shape of the apparatus, and the material of 
which it is made, may be varied according to the extent of the ope- 
rations for which it is intended. For domestic purposes, a common 
tea-kettle, by stopping the spout with a plug, and making the neces- 
sary additions to the lid, will answer perfectly well; and a cheap 
and simple disinfecting vessel resembling B may easily be contrived. 
For large operations, a boiler of sheet-iron, resembling that of a 
steam-engine, will be necessary. If thought expedient, a higher 
temperature than 212° Fahrenheit may easily be obtained in the re- 
ceptacle, by subjecting the steam to a greater pressure than that 
of the atmosphere ; the apparatus being in that case provided with a 
proper safety valve. 

If heated air should be found adequate to the effect, it might be 
employed for ordinary articles, reserving the more costly vehicle, 
steam, for articles which are of great value, and which are easily in- 
jured. 


* The pipe A will be found much more convenient if made in two parts, the part 
attached to the cover being not more than a foot long; its open end being made to 
slip into the longer part, as a few drops of moisture always escape. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 16 


122 Na.ural Resources of the Western Country. 


Arr. XI.—Remarks* upon the Natural Resources of the Western 
Country. 


In the perusal of our Scientific Journals, as well as of those books 
which contain the localities of different minerals, we are surprised 
to find the little mention that is made of the Western Country. 
Why is this the case? Is it because the west is deficient in natural 
productions? Certainly not. The testimony of the few scientific men, 
who have travelled through those parts, is amply sufficient to con- 
vince any one, (who might suspect the partiality of nature,) of the 
great abundance of her productions in the western mountains. 
The true explanation of this neglect, if I may so call it, arises partly 
from the fact, that very few scientific men have travelled through and 
explored those regions ; but principally, from the pursuits of the in- 
habitants themselves ; who, having to prepare their lands for culti- 
vation, had at first, but little time to spend in searching for the 
treasures of the earth, further than immediate necessities required. 

But as this period of preparation is almost past, and the people 
are becoming settled in life, they only want an impulse, to engage 
in scientific pursuits themselves. ‘This impulse can be given by 
their more scientific countrymen of the East. Here then is a wide 
field for the talents, industry, and patriotism of our mineralogists, 
geologists, and other students of nature. By an examination of these 
regions, they will not only confer an important benefit upon science, 
but they will do an essential service to the western states. 

I think I may say with safety, that the Cumberland, and the 
southern part of the Allegany mountains, contain many and large 
beds of ores, of the value of which the people are entirely ignorant. It 
is not necessary that each of these beds should be pointed out to 
them. When they have once conceived a proper idea of their im- 
portance; when they have found that these mines contain wealth, 
they will search for themselves. A scientific spirit must be infused 
into the minds of the people. ‘The Spaniards found more gold in 
South America than the Indians ever would have done: and why ? 
Because they knew the importance of this metal. But supposing the 


* Desirous to aid every effort to excite inquiry into the resources and natural 
productions and antiquities of our vast and prolific western regions, we insert this 
communication, although the writer appears not fully to appreciate what has al- 
ready been done on this subject.—Ep. 


Natural Resources of the Western Country. 123 


people to be acquainted with the value of a metal, or of a partic- 
ular mineral; still they must receive an impulse, before they will 
search for it. The gold mines of the south might have still lain in 
the bosom of the earth, had not the accidental discovery of gold in 
one of the states, informed the people of its existence ; and en- 
gaged their interest inits search. And by this investigation which 
is not yet completed, a formation of gold has been found, running 
nearly parallel to the Allegany mountains, and extending through 
Georgia, part of Tennessee, the Carolinas, and Virginia. The 
rich iron mines of the Cumberland mountains, were not worked, 
until the scientific investigation of one of them in Western Virginia, 
proved the profit of the reduction of these ores. Since that time, 
mines have been opened along the whole chain, extending from Vir- 
ginia through Tennessee into Alabama. ‘These mines it may be ob- 
served, afford enough iron for a large extent of country: and should 
a communication be opened between them and the sea, a much lar- 
ger quantity will be extracted for the purpose of exportation. With 
the Galena mines, we are well acquainted. ‘They have reduced 
to one fourth of its former value, a metal of universal and almost in- 
dispensable use. ‘There have been a few other mines discovered in 
the western country. I say a few; not because there are but few, 
but because, for the two reasons I have given, that the people do not 
properly estimate their worth, and that science has not yet engaged 
them in the search.* It is with a view to the removal of the last of 
these reasons, (upon which the former depends,) that I have writ- 
ten these remarks; hoping that some of your scientific readers 
would be induced by proper encouragement, to volunteer in the 
cause of natural science and improvement. 

But besides the great variety of minerals in the West, there are 
other subjects worthy of a scientific investigation. I mean, the re- 
mains of human beings, of their labor, and of animals of each of 
these there is a great abundance. 

1. The remains of human beings. ‘These are to be found, some- 
times buried, but generally in caverns. ‘They exist in the greatest 


* The following story will perhaps not be believed by some of your readers, 
although itis true. A small bed of ore was discovered a few years since in one of 
the- Western States, and a dispute immediately arose between the owner and his 
neighbors, about the kind of ore it contained. The former thought that it was ga- 
lena, and the latter, that it wasironore. And because of this uncertainty the mine 
was not worked.—The ore was perhaps a compact oxide of manganese. 


124 Natural Resources of the Western Country. 


abundance, in the caves of ‘Tennessee, and the southern parts of 
Kentucky. In 1828, two mummies were discovered in a complete 
state of preservation, ina cave in West Tennessee; and from the 
facts which have been disclosed by an examination of their forms 
and complexions, as well as of the manner in which they were en- 
tombed, we may infer that they belonged to another race, and one 
anterior to the present race of Indians. I believe that a part of one 
of these remains has been lodged in the New York museum. 

In one of.the caverns of East Tennessee, which I visited in 1824, 
I found a very large number of human bones; and, indeed, in pass- 
ing through the cavern, they formed my only pavement for almost an 
hundred yards. Some of the bones were very large, and indicated 
(by measurement) that their former owners were but little under seven 
feet m height. ‘The skeletons were not laid in any particular order, 
but appeared to have been thrown in, indiscriminately. ‘The bones 
of animals were also mixed among them. I suppose it is generally 
known that the greater part of these caves contain nitre (salt-petre 
earth.) The one I visited, however, contained but little. On my 
egress from the cave, I saw some fine specimens of fluor attached, 
in crystals, to the sides of the mouth, which thus appeared highly 
ornamented. 

A very curious graveyard was discovered, some years ago, in Mid- 
dle Tennessee. ‘The persons that had been buried were very small, 
perhaps not more than three or four feet in height. The graves, 
which were made to correspond in size, were very shallow. A stone 
laid in the bottom, one on each side, and one on the top formed the 

simple domicil of these little beings. A small earthen vessel was 
placed in each grave: the use for which we are as much at a loss to 
understand, as we are to account for the existence of the graves 
themselves. 

2. The labors of a past race of human beings are every where 
visible in the Western Country. And this is particularly to be ob- 
served in the mounds of earth, which are very numerous in Ohio, 
Kentucky, and Tennessee. ‘The mounds and remains of an ancient 
fortification, upon which the city of Cincinnati is built, have often 
been described. ‘The implements of war and husbandry, which have 
been found with these remains, are very curious and offer to the mind 
of the Antiquarian much that is interesting and instructive. I am in- 
formed, by a respectable gentleman, that some miles above Cincin- 
nati there is a large annular mound, (on which the town of Circle- 


Natural Resources of the Western Country. 125 


ville is built,) which is surrounded by four smaller ones, situated on 
the outside of the former, and on the prolongations of two rectangu- 
lar diameters. Would it not be a matter worthy of investigation to 
determine what could have been the use of these works? 

3. The remains of animals in the West, though less numerous than 
the two former kinds, are still very interesting; and some of them are 
quite peculiar. The gigantic animal. bones found in Kentucky, are 
perhaps different from any known species or genera. Of this, how- 
ever, we shall be better informed when they shall have been exam- 
ined by scientific men;* and I understand that they are now under- 
going that examination in Europe. Other remains of animals have 
been found on the banks of the Mississippi, and in the State of Geor- 
gia; but for the want of persons capable of investigating them, but 
little is known of their peculiarities. 

Mr. Flint of Kentucky, has done much for the natural history of 
the Western States; and it is to be hoped that he will yet do much 
more. 

An Antiquarian Society has been established in the State of Indi- 
ana, for the sole purpose, I believe, of investigating the history, &c. 
of the Aboriginals of that country. I have not yet seen any of their 
proceedings, but to judge from the characters and talents of the 
members and the materials they have at hand, I should say they 
would effect much for the cause in which they are engaged. ‘The 
Legislature of Tennessee, with a truly enlightened patriotism, has 
lately passed a law creating a professorship of Geology and Mineral- 
ogy for the State; and it is much to be desired that other States 
should follow the example. 

The above remarks contain a notice of only a very small num- 
ber of the objects worthy of a scientific investigation in the Western 
Country. K. 

West Point, February 10, 1852. 


* Our correspondent does not appear to have read the very exact account of these 
bones, given by Dr. De Kay and Mr. Cooper, of New York.—See this Journal, 
Vol. XX, p. 370. , 


126 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


Arr. XII.—On the Artificial Preparation of cold Medicinal Waters, 
by Wittiam Meape, M.D. 


Tue late illustrious Bergman, having devoted much of his time 
and applied his great talents to the investigation of the nature and prop- 
erties of mineral waters, appears to have been the first person who 
suggested and proved, that an artificial preparation of them, found- 
ed upon an exact knowledge of their contents, may produce the 
same medicinal effect, and be equally beneficial to health, as the 
natural waters. He states, that he was induced to this attempt by 
the difficulty of obtaining in Sweden, where he resided, some of the 
most celebrated mineral waters, such as those of Seltzer and Pyr- 
mont. Besides the great expense and inconvenience, their valuable 
qualities were much injured, by conveying them to such a distance 
from the spring and keeping them in bottles, at a season of the year 
when they are considered indispensable to the removal of those dis- 
eases which originate from the severity of the climate, during a long 
winter. 

Bergman then proceeds to observe, that however useful may be 
the discovery of imitating perfectly these mineral waters, it cannot 
possibly be universally pleasing ; many who are incapable of judging 
of the truth, will distrust it, and many contend that to imitate nature 
is impossible, without considering that when the component parts of 
a substance are known, the success of the process cannot depend 
upon the hand which combines them; some who prescribe, and oth- 
ers who sell the foreign water, condemn the artificial, for obvious 
reasons; besides, the negligence or ignorance of an inexperienced 
person may easily defeat the whole operation. All these obstacles, 
however, did not discourage Bergman from the artificial preparation 
of cold medicinal waters, at Upsal, and the use of such waters be- 
came general, although at first proposed only in cases of necessity, 
when the natural waters could not be obtained, and he further ob- 
serves, that they produce the same good effect as the natural waters, 
and in some instances seem to excel them. 

The knowledge of Bergman’s success, in introducing so advanta- 
geous a substitute for the natural medical waters, soon extending 
itself into various parts of Europe, was fully appreciated, and the 
practice came into such general use, that in England the waters of 
Pyrmont, Spa and Seltzer, were prepared artificially, and sub- 


Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 127 


stituted for the natural waters, which had been previously import- 
ed in large quantity from their respective springs. ‘The artificial wa- 
ters were even preferred there, not without sufficient reason, as it is 
well known to all who are acquainted with the subject, that the sub- 
stances which az 2 most es<eatiai in these mineral waters, are carbonic 
acid gas, with a small proportion of a neutral salt, an alkali and a little 
iron and magnesia, all of which can be combined with pure water, 
and in greater quantity than in the natural spring. 

From the time of Bergman’s attempt, in the year 1771, to intro- 
duce the artificial mineral waters mto general use, where access 
could not be easily had to the natural spring, other chemists of great 
celebrity turned their attention to the subject, sanctioning the attempt 
and pointing out how other medicinal waters besides those already 
mentioned may be imitated artificially. About twenty years after 
the publication of Bergman’s essays, Kirwan produced his celebrated 
treatise on the analysis of mineral waters; induced to this attempt, 
as he observes, by “the advantages which mankind have derived 
from their medicinal effects, and from the necessity of a knowledge 
of their contents, in order to prescribe them in cases of disease where 
they are applicable, as well as to imitate such as are found beneficial, 
in countries where they have not been discovered or where they can- 
not be procured in a state of purity.” 

The ancients were not unacquainted with the medicinal qualities 
of certain mineral waters, but were entirely ignorant of the nature of 
their contents, and of the qualities that result from their combination. 
Pliny, with his usual sagacity, at so early a period as the year 79, 
when writing on the subject of natural history, observes, “Tales sunt 
aque qualis terra per quam fluunt,” thus showing that he was aware, 
even at that time, in what manner waters received their impregnation. 
He proceeded, however, no farther, nor was it until several centuries 
after his time, that a knowledge of chemistry taught us how to dis- 
cover, with some accuracy, what are the ingredients of mineral 
waters, and whether they possess medicinal qualities or not. 

Many persons are persuaded that there is something mysterious in 
the natural production of mineral waters, which could never be either 
explained or imitated ; we now know, however, that the mineral wa- 
ter is only a compound of the water itself and of those substances 
which it holds in solution. It can therefore be of little consequence, 
whether by passing through the bowels of the earth it extracts dif- 


128 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


ferent materials from. certain strata over which it flows, or whether 
these substances, in the proper quantities, be artificially added to the 
water; the hand that supplies these materials, as Bergman so justly 
observes, can make no difference in the result. 

In order to illustrate this subject by a familiar example, I shall now 
endeavor to explain how one of the least complicated medicinal waters 
may be effectually imitated, leaving no doubt in the mind of any un- 
prejudiced individual, that the artificial preparation is precisely simi- 
lar to the natural water at the spring. 

For this purpose, I shall select the water at Epsom, in England. 
The taste of this water was so peculiarly saline, that at a very early 
period of time it was used medicinally and found to possess valuable 
qualities as a cathartic, but the nature of its contents was then un- 
known, and it was not until the discoveries of Black, Bergman, and 
other chemists, that the real properties of sulphate of magnesia were 
investigated, when it was soon ascertained that the Epsom water de- 
rived all its qualities from this neutral salt; therefore, from having 
been extracted from it in large quantities by evaporation, it has since 
been denominated Epsom salts, and, as is well known, it is used 
medicinally when dissolved in common water; thus, even at so 
early a period, forming an artificial preparation which had precisely 
the same taste and possessed the same medicinal qualities. When 
further investigating the properties of magnesia, it was found that 
the salt which was supposed to be peculiar to Epsom water could be 
easily prepared artificially, in a direct way, by the union of sulphuric 
acid and magnesia; all mystery disappeared, and it was apparent that 
this spring possessed no quality which any other water impregnated 
with sulphate of magnesia may not be easily made to possess. 

There is another mineral water, of a- rather more complicated na- 
ture, to which I shall now allude; it is the celebrated Cheltenham 
spring, in England, which is perhaps as much frequented as any in 
Europe ; it is however stripped of all its mystery, when it is known 
that its medicinal qualities are derived, chiefly, from an impregnation 
of neutral salts, such as sulphate of soda and sulphate of magnesia, 
in the following proportions; eighty grains of sulphate of soda and 
forty grains of sulphate of magnesia, with about seven grains of mu- 
riate of magnesia and lime, with scarcely an appreciable quantity of 
iron, and only seven cubic inches of carbonic acid in one quart of 
this water. 


Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 129 


In order to obtain those substances on which the medicinal quali- 
ties of the Cheltenham water principally depend, the salts are pro- 
cured on the spot by evaporation and crystallization, and sold ata 
high price, under the name of Cheltenham salts; but as these can 
be nothing more than a mixture of sulphate of soda and sulphate of 
magnesia, in the above proportions, it is evident that salts possessing 
the same qualities, when dissolved in common water, can be artifi- 
cially prepared, and sold for the same purpose, at a comparatively 
trifling expense. Thus are the ignorant imposed upon, from not 
knowing that neutral salts, of the same species, possess the same 
qualities, from whatever water they are produced. Although these 
salts are the chief ingredients in Cheltenham water, they cannot be 
said to be the only ones, and in order to imitate exactly the natural 
water, recourse must be had to the usual method of impregnating 
water with carbonic acid gas, and supplying a small quantity of iron, 
in addition to the salts—ingredients much relied on at Cheltenham, 
but which in fact, as I have ascertained myself on the spot, are found 
in it in such small quantities as to be scarcely noticed or to add much 
to the medicinal qualities of the water. 

_ The practice of substituting artificial crystallized salts for those ob- 
tained from the natural springs at Cheltenham, was so successful, that 
a similar attempt was made to impose on the ignorant, by collecting 
the residuum obtained by evaporation from the waters of Harrowgate, 
and even to imitate this residuum, and recommend it, when dis- 
solved in water, as a substitute for the water at the spring; this, howev- 
er, did not, nor could it, indeed, continue long to impose on the public. 
When the real causes of the properties of Harrowgate waters were dis- 
covered, it was ascertained that they resided in other substances than 
the mere neutral salts, and that these substances could not be obtained 
by evaporation, but on the contrary were dissipated by the process. 
These substances were carbonic acid gas and sulphuretted hydrogen 
gas, imparting peculiar properties to the water and assisting in the 
solution of others. When the water was evaporated, the residuum 
of course, possessed none of its most valuable properties, but when 
dissolved in common water, became a most nauseous, and somewhat 
inert draught, possessing no longer any medicinal effect, except 
what it derived from the neutral salt which was deposited by close 
evaporation. ‘The same mistaken view of this matter subsisted for 
a length of time in this country, and is still carried into practice at 
Saratoga, by evaporating the water of the Congress spring, and they 

Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 17 


130 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


collect the residuum to be dissolved in common water, and to be used 
medicinally ; but whatever foundation there may be for such a prac- 
tice in the case of the simple saline spring at Epsom, and others, 
nothing can be more improper than pursuing it with the Congress 
water, the residuum of which, after evaporation, consists of various 
substances, some of which are perfectly inert after the carbonic acid 
has been expelled ; thus composing a mixture partly insoluble, and 
not only nauseous to a degree, but actually not free from qualities 
which are injurious to the system when taken in any quantity. 

Since the properties of carbonic acid gas have been investigated 
by Black, Priestley, and other chemists, much light has been thrown 
upon the most important phenomena in nature, but on none more than 
in explaining the nature and properties of mineral waters. It has been 
shown to be the principal agent in their production as well as in pro- 
moting the solution of several substances which are otherwise insolu- 
ble in pure water. It is this gas which holds the iron and earths in 
solution; it is this which gives the agreeable pungent taste to the water, 
and it is also this gas which produces that exhiliration of spirits which 
almost all persons feel after drinking such waters. As soon as it was 
ascertained that water could be impregnated with this gas, and that 
it then resembled, in every respect, the waters of Spa, Seltzer, and 
Pyrmont, it was immediately proposed to make use of it to imitate 
the taste and medicinal qualities of those natural springs. Bergman 
accordingly took advantage of this discovery, and although at that 
time the process of impregnating water with carbonic gas was not as 
well understood as it is at present, yet he succeeded in imitating ef- 
fectually all those mineral waters with which he was at that me ac- 
quainted, and thus rendered to his countrymen a most important ser- 
vice. ‘The apparatus for conducting the process of impregnating 
water with gas has been, since that period, so improved, that by an 
instrument adapted to the purpose, carbonic acid gas has been forced 
into water, to the quantity of three times its bulk, much more than 
any water can take up by the common process of nature. 

The experience of many years has not lessened the confidence of | 
the public in the use of these artificial mineral waters, it having been 
found that their medicinal qualities are equal to those of the natural 
spring, and that in many instances they may be rendered superior, 
by adding, if necessary, a larger quantity of the most useful sub- 


stances or by omitting others which are either unnecessary or injuri- 
ous to health. © er 


Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 131 


It would be superfluous to attempt to describe here the present meth- 
od of impregnating water with carbonic acid gas; the principle upon 
which it is practiced, is the basis upon which depends the artificial 
production or imitation of cold medicinal waters: water saturated 
with this gas alone has, for a long time, become a favorite, and even a 
salutary beverage in the summer months, but when sub-carbonate of 
soda is added to the water, it imparts to it peculiar medicinal quali- 
ties, and is the article which is now familiarly known as soda water, 
prepared for general use in all the large cities. No general method 
for preparing an artificial mineral water is superior to this ; it is only 
necessary to add, in proper proportions, these substances which pecu- 
liarly characterize any particular mineral spring, and by impregnating 
the water with carbonic acid, the imitation is complete. On the same 
principle may sulphureous waters, such as the Harrowgate, be pre- 
pared by adding to common water the necessary quantity of those 
which are found in it, and then saturating it with sulphuretted hydro- 
gen gas. 

Having now shown the facility with which artificial medicinal 
waters may be prepared, resembling the natural waters not only in 
taste but in medicinal qualities ; it must still be acknowledged, that 
many of the same objections which have been stated with respect to 
the natural waters, exist with respect to the use of the artificial at any 
distance from the place where they are prepared; such is the diffi- 
culty of preserving them in bottles for any length of time without 
materially injuring their medicinal qualities by the escape of the gas 
which imparts one of their essential properties; there is a serious risk 
and difficulty in transporting these bottles to foreign countries, and 
more particularly to warm climates, where they are often peculiarly 
valuable, and where they cannot be procured without great incon- 
venience and expense. ‘To substitute another method of making an 
artificial preparation which would not be liable to those objections 
became a great desideratum. 


(To be continued.) 


132 Central Forces. 


Arr. XUI.—On Central Forces; by Prof. Toeopore Strone. 


(Continued from p. 342, Vol. X XI.) 


Ir is evident by the equation eae, that the angle v® beeen 


the apsides is always possible and finite when m is any positive num- 
ber >0; but if n is any negative number v° is always impossible ; 


A 
also if n=0 or F=—;, the angle between the apsides is infinite ; 


Prin. sec. 9, B. I, prop. 45, cor. 1, 


Aen, lel = = A ); c=const. then v9 =180° wie 
180° Lent or by expounding r (or R,) by unity, 0 =180° 
i Aerd ; 


<7 = ; Prin. cor. 2, to the prop. cited above. Finally, the 
— 4c 


curves denoted by (19) can be constructed by an ellipse whose focus 
is at the centre of force, R’/= its semi-parameter, and R/(1—e)= 

= its perihelion distance. For let the perihelion distance make 
the angle v — mv with the line R drawn from the centre of force to 
the place of the particle at the origin of the motion ; also let 7’ de- 
note the value of r between the centre of force and perimeter of the 
ellipse. Now since 7’ makes the angle v with R, and as the perihe- 
lion distance makes the angle v—mv with R, .". r’ makes the angle 
y—(v—mv)=mv with the perihelion distance; hence by the prop- 

R’ 

1-Le cos. mv 
quantities of the order e?; but by (19) r=R/(1—e cos. mv) .” 
7’=r and the particle is at the extremity of 7” (in the ellipse,) which 
makes the angle » with R. Hence by supposing the ellipse to re- 
volve around the focus, so that r’=r always makes the angle v with 
the fixed line R, the particle will always be in the perimeter of the el- 
lipse, and the angular motion of the perihelion distance will be »—mv; 
.". we may suppose the curves denoted by (19) to be generated by 
the motion of the particle in a moveable ellipse ; whose plane revolves 
around the focus so that the angular motion of the particle is v, and 
that of the perihelion »—mv, or so that the angular motion of the 
particle is to that of the perihelion as 1 ; 1—m 


erty of the ellipse 7’= =R’(1—e cos. mv), neglecting 


Central Forces. 133 


It is also evident that the particle in the moveable ellipse will be 
at an apsis of the curves, represented by (19) when it is at the 


perihelion or aphelion of the ellipse. Agaim, supposing (as above,) 


Ar” 


or ean A 
that [=p then m=V n; if ...n=1, or re v—mv=v—v=0, 


and the particle revolves in a quiescent ellipse; but if “n is <1 
and >0, then v—mv is positive, and the ellipse revolves in the same 
direction as the particle, or in consequentia; but if Wn is >1, 
v—mv is negative and the ellipse revolves in a contrary direction to 
the motion of the particle, or in antecedentia; in the former case the 
apsides are said to go forwards, or in consequentia, but in the latter 
backwards, or in antecedentia. Universally, whatever may be the 
law of force, provided that m is a positive number <1 and >0, the 
apsides progress; but if mis positive and >1, they regress; because 
the apsides of the moveable ellipse progress or regress with respect to 
the motion of the particle in these cases. See Prin. prop. 43, sec. 
9, B. I, also cor. 7. prop. 66, sec. 11. 


_ I will now suppose that a particle of matter is describing a curve 
around a given centre of force, and is at the same time attracied 
towards another centre of force, situated in the plane of the descri- 
bed curve; to determine the equations of its motion. 

It is evident that the attraction towards the second centre of force 
will alter or disturb the motion of the particle around the first centre ; 
I shall therefore call it (according to usage,) the disturbing force. I 
shall (as heretofore,) denote the distance of the particle from the first 
center of force at any time (¢) by 7, and shall suppose that » denotes 
the angle described by r around the centre in any time, v being reck- 
oned from some fixed line in the plane of the motion. 


EZ 
Let g denote the area described by r around the first centre of 


force in a unit of time; then by (G), (Vol. XVI, p. 286,) c’?= 
4dyp2 2 dy2 : 
— ore =F x mel) 

If there was no disturbing force, c’ would be constant; but it evi- 
dently becomes variable by its action. Let the disturbing force. be 
resolved into two; one in the direction of r, the other perpendicular 
to r, which let be denoted by T; it is evident (by what was shown 
in Vols. XVI and XVII,) that the first of these cannot affect c’, but 
T will render it variable. 


134 Central Forces. 


To find the effect of T, I take the differential of (1), considering 
dv) 


d(r sue 
ce’ and rdv as alone variable; hence e/dce’=r?dv X = » but it is 


, d(rd 
evident (supposing that T tends to increase rdv,) that ade) 


*. de’ =Tr*dv, and by integration ce’? =h? +2f'Tr*dy, (2), f be-: 
ing the sign of integration, and A? the arbitrary constant which equals 
c’? when there is no disturbing force; also by substituting c’? in (1) 


2 (3). a = then (2) and (3) 


vas ee 


denote the resultant of the force towards the first ee and of the 
resolved part of the disturbing force, which acts in the direction of 7; 


dr 
then I have by Vol. XVI, p. 286, <j 5-4 7) =F, (6), which by 
2dr 
is ¢c/2 12 2 
substituting —7a_ us for dt? becomes — 5—a(S55 =F, (7). 


” Odr 


= 
there results aa ae ae 


become c/?=h? ofan (4), dt= 


(5). Let F 


1 
By putting r=» and making dv constant, (7) is easily changed to 


cde'du F 
d?u dv? ~ u? a RNY eter Ia 
qr tut Te =0, or since ¢ de =Tr?du=Ta 2 it becomes 
au 
Ee by substituti lue. of e!2 
ape + Tdo\’ (8), by substituting the value of c’?. 
corer 


The equations (5) and (8) are sudicient to find the place of the par- 
ticle at any given time. 

Again, if the disturbing force is not in the plane of the curve de- 
scribed by the particle around the first centre, then imagine a fixed 
plane drawn at pleasure through the first centre, and let 6= the vari- 
able inclination of 7 to the fixed plane; put 7’=rcos. 4, P=F= the 
resultant in the direction of r’ in the fixed plane. 

Then change r into 7’, F into P, and the preceding results will be 
true in this case ; as is evident by supposing the moving particle and 
the forces which act on it to be orthographically projected upon the 


Central Forces. 135 


fixed plane. In this case, a resolved part of the force towards the 
first centre and of the disturbing force act at right angles to the fixed 
plane; let S denote their resultant, which I shall suppose acts towards 
the plane. Let s=tan.4, put z=the perpendicular from the parti- 
cle to the fixed plane ; ee ne the theory of ob welaelaie forces (or 


by (a) Vol. XVI, p. 284,) Gos ge :0, or ae )+8= O, or substi- 


dz 
usc’? dz2 


for dt?, it becomes dae +S=0; but 
Qdz 


r'4dv2— dv? 


tuting ya Tyree C2 


s uds—sdu 
z=rs=> pn aa and u°dz—=uds — sdu; hence 


(—“S c’? (uds — sdu)* 455 


do™ —, =0, which, by maton dv constant and sub- 


uds —sdu 


ait 
dv 


dy? c/2 43 


mee 
stituting for c’de’ its equal [3° EINES. saiiy is 


d?s $ (a3 )+ 


d? 
—,- =0, which by substituting the value of = and that of c/? 
d 
T+S8—Ps 


d2 

becomes ve. a ——,2 (9). Hence I have di= 
dv? Tdv 
w(ie+2f5) 


—7 PG» (C)3 which are sufficient to determine the 
wlitt of) 

place of the 1 ah at any given time. The equations (A), (B), 
(C) are the same that Woodhouse has found in a very different man- 
ner at p. 95 of his Physical Astronomy; they can easily be obtained 
from the equations (A), (B), (C) given in the Journal, Vol. XVI, 
pp- 284, 285; but I have preferred the above method, as being in 
some respects more simple. 


136 Expansion and Contraction of Building Stones. 


Art. XIV.—Exzperiments on the Expansion and Contraction of 
Building Stones, by variations of temperature ; communicated by 
Wituiam H. C. Barruert, Lieut. U.S. Engineers. 


Fort Adams, Newport Harbor, March 12, 1832. 


TO PROFESSOR SILLIMAN. 


Str—In the progress of this work, we have had occasion to use 
considerable quantities of Coping Stones, taken from different locali- 
ties, with all of which it has been found impossible to obtain tight 
joints. The walls, on which these stones were placed, have not un- 
dergone the slightest change; and, notwithstanding they were laid 
with the greatest possible care, and their joints were filled with the 
best cements that could be devised, yet, at the expiration of a few 
weeks, these joints were broken up by fissures which extended from 
the top to the bottom of the Coping. These fissures were supposed 
to have arisen from a change of dimensions in the Coping stones, 
in consequence of the ordinary variations of atmospheric tempera- 
ture; and, with the view to ascertain if the total amount of crack- 
ing could be attributed to this cause alone, a series of experiments 
was instituted by order of Col. Totten, and continued from August 
18th, 1830, to June 2nd, 1831. The circumstances connected with 
these experiments, as well as their results, you will find subjoined. 
Col. Totten requests me to communicate them to you, supposing 
that you may find them of sufficient practical importance to deserve 
a place in your Journal. 

These experiments were made, nearly at the same time, upon 
granite, limestone, and sandstone, the kinds of stone used for the 
Coping; and for this purpose a piece of each was selected in such 
a manner that the three pieces were of nearly equal lengths. ‘The 
granite has a fine grain, is of a compact texture, and was taken from 
a boulder at the head of Buzzard’s Bay: the limestone is white, 
has a fine grained crystalline structure, and accompanies primitive 
rocks; it was taken from the quarries of the Sing-sing State Prison, 
New York: the sandstone is from the quarries in Chatham, Conn. 
and belongs to the old red sandstone formation, according to the Rev. 
Edward Hitchcock ;* it has a granular structure rather coarse, and its 
cement is argillo-ferruginous. 


* He now refers all the sandstone of the Connecticut valley to the new; see the 
first article in the present No. 


Expansion and Contraction of Building Stone. 137 


To ascertain the exact lengths of these pieces at the different tem- 
peratures produced by exposure to the weather—these alone being 
important for our immediate object, and for the purposes of con- 
struction generally, the measurements were made by means of a 
white-pine rod, with copper elbows at the ends embracing the stones 
when applied to them, as represented in the sketch. 


AA is an elevation, or vertical section lengthwise, of the stone to 
be measured; BB the measuring rod, with elbows D and C of thin 
hammered copper, firmly secured to it. The end D was always 
adjusted to the same part of the stone, by sliding through a groove in 
the copper guide F' cemented to the stone; the elbow C was adjust- 
ed in like manner by sliding through a groove in the piece E also at- 
tached to the stone. ‘The elbow C has itself a groove through which 
the wedge W may slide horizontally, under the guide E, between 
the elbow C and the stone: this wedge being graduated as a diago- 
nal scale showed, by the distance which it entered, the difference 
between the length of the measuring rod and that of the stone. The 
expansion of the measuring rod being known, the length of the stone 
could be calculated in decimals of a constant unit, viz. the English 
standard inch. : 

A groove was cut in the stone in which a Thermometer was pla- 
ced, at each measurement, and being covered, was suffered to lie 
some time, in order to ascertain the temperature of the stone. The 
temperature of the measuring rod was assumed to be that of the 
open air to which it had been exposed. 

By Lardner and Kater’s Mechanics, we have as a mean between 
the results of Capt. Kater and Doct. Struve for the linear expansion 
of deal wood in terms of its length for one degree of Fahr. the de- 
cimal .00000255 ; and by the Edinburgh Encyclopedia, art. Expan- 
sion, we find the decimal .00000944 to express the same for ham- 
mered copper. From these data the actual length of the measuring 
rod was calculated for each experiment; knowing its length at 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1.. 18 


138 Expansion and Contraction of Building Stone. 


sixty degrees Fahr. But to abridge the calculation, the difference 
in length between the stone and measuring rod, as shown by the 
wedge W, was subtracted from the length of the rod before making 
the reduction for the temperature of the latter. The length of the 
copper part, and that of the wooden part, were calculated separate- . 
ly on account of their different expansibilities. The result of this 
calculation is the following table. 


MARBLE. GRANITE. SANDSTONE. 
No. of | Degrees| Length in | Degrees| Length in | Degrees} Length in 
Experi. | Fahr. Inches. Fahr. Inches. Fahr. “Inches. 
1 6° | 93.4155 6° | 94.025] 6° | 94.0180 
2 7 93.4277 8 | 94.0330 8 | 94.0153 
3 9 93.4201 9 94.0260 9 | 94.0052 
4 10 93.4207 10 94.0265 10 94.0088 
5) 11 93.4131 11 94.0230 At 94.0124 
6 12 93.4186 12 94.0282 13 94.0211 
7 14 93.4174 14 94.0271 14 94.0206. 
8 14 93.4294 14 94.0347 14 94.0220 
9 14 | 93.4308 14 | 94.0361 | 15 94.0235 
10 16 93.4302,} 16 94.0285 15 94.0238 
11 16 93.4291 16 94.0345 17 94.0214 
12 17 93.4305 17 94.0358 18 94.0181 
13 19 93.4327 19 94.0416 | 20 94.0239 
14 20 93.4310 | 20 94.0364 | 22 94.0258 
15 21 93.4316 | 21 94.0440 | 22 *| 94.0263 
16 ol 93.4265 32 94.0324 32 94.0371 
17 32 93.4352 | 32 94.0406 34 | 94.0466 
18 34 93.4422 36 94.0330 38 94.0554 
19 36 93.4360 | 36 94.0150 39 94.0436 
20 36 93.4357 | 37 94.0483 39 94.0592 
24 Were oie) 93.4436 41 94.0344 43 94.0486 
22 82 | 93.4323 52 94.0348 53 | 94.0560 
23 58 93.4450 62 94.0541 64 | 94.0718 
24 83 93.4655 86 94.0720 3 94.0879 
25 86 93.4649 88 94.0737 93 | 94.0829 
26 90 | 93.4709 88 94.0688 95 94.0897 
27 59 93.4677 89 94.0731 99 94.0941 
28 : Sa as 90 94.0693 | 100 94.0906 
29 : Bh a 91 94.0693 | 101 94.0944 
30 5 otis 94 94.0628 | 104 94.0841 
3l ; feb 102 94.0721 | 109 | 94.0792 


It is probable that many of the discrepancies here noticed were 
owing to the hygrometric state of the stone; and perhaps, in part, 
to imperfections in the measuring apparatus; but as the hygrome- 


Expansion and Contraction of Building Stone. 139 


tric state of the stone was not recorded, we can take no account of 
it in our deductions. ‘These discrepancies, however, will have but 
little effect upon the general result ; for it will be observed, that there 
is always an increase in the length of stone for an increase of tem- 
perature, when any two experiments are considered which are re- 
moved from each other by several degrees. 

From the facts ascertained concerning the expansion of other sub- 
stances, we may assume that the expansion of stone is uniform, and 
that, within the range of our experiments, each of the stones increas- 
ed in length by a common difference for each degree of the ther- 
mometer. ‘To find an approximate value for this common differ- 
ence, say for the granite, we subtract the first observed length from 
the last, and, if these experiments were accurate, the difference 
-0470, would be ninety six times the common difference ; ninety six 
being the difference in degrees between the extreme temperatures : 
the same operation being performed with the second experiment, 
and that next the last; the difference .0298, (the difference in 
lengths,) should be eighty six times the common difference. By 
thus comparing the extreme experiments of those which remain, we 
obiain the following table. 


Experiments. aseeen Diff. in lengths. 
1 and 31 96 + .0470 
g 2and 30 86 -+ .0298 


3 and 29 82 |° +.0433 
4 and 28 80 + .0428 
5 and 27 78 +.0501 
6 and 26 76 +.0406 
Tand 25 74. + .0466 


8 and 24 72 ++ .0373 
9 and 23 48 -+ .0180 
10 and 22 36 + .0063 
bl and: 3 25 — .0001 
12 and 20 | 20 +..0125 
13 and 19 16 + .00354 
14 and 18 16 — .0034 
15 and 17 11 — .0034 

Lota Care .3708 


We have neglected the sixteenth experiment, because we cannot 
employ it without using some other experiment twice, thus giving 
the latter an undue influence; and because the middle term should 
have the least weight in determining the common difference. 


5S 


140 Expansion and Contraction of Building Stone. 


By the above table, we find, as the combined result of all the ex- 
periments, that ,3708 should be eight hundred and seventeen times the 
common difference ; and hence the common difference for one de- 
gree of Fahr. is .0004538 inch. Now, assuming 94.05 inches, as 
the mean length of the granite, which is sufficiently near, we find 
the linear expansion for one inch of stone for each degree of Fahr. 

.0004538 
to be 9795 
sion would be .0000579 of an inch. By proceeding in the same 
way with the experiments on the other stones, we obtain the follow- 
ing results. 


= .000004825 inch, and for one foot, this expan- 


Common difference in inch-([Common difference in inch- 


MISE ey Maa es for the whole length] es, for one inch for each 


in inches. 


of stone for 1° of Fahr. degree of Fahr. 
Granite, 94.05 .0004538 .000004825 
Marble, 93.44 .0005297 .000005668 
Sandstone, 94.05 -0008965 .000009532 
White pine, - e Sk .00000255 
Hammered copper, - - - -00000944 


To apply these results to the case in question, let us suppose two 
coping stones of five running feet each, to be laid in mid-summer, 
when they have a temperature of ninety six degrees Fahr. ; in win- 
ter their temperature may safely be assumed at zero, so that the to- 
tal variation of temperature will be ninety six degrees; and if we 
suppose these stones to contract towards their centers, which would 
be the most favorable supposition as regards the tightness of the 
joints where a number of these stones are used, the whole length of 
stone put inmotion by a change of temperature would be five feet. 
If the coping be of granite, the distance by which the ends of the 
stones would be separated, in consequence of one degree’s varia- 
tion would be sixty inches multiplied into .000004825 =.0002895 
and for a variation of ninety six degrees, this distance becomes: 
.0002895 x 96 =.027792 inch, giving a crack a little wider than the 
thickness of common pasteboard. For marble this crack would 
have a width of .03264, nearly twice the thickness of common paste- 
board; and for sandstone .054914, nearly three times the thickness 
of pasteboard. ‘These cracks are not only distinctly visible, but they 
allow water to pass freely into the heart of the wall. The mischief 
does not stop here: by this constant, motion back and forth in the 
coping, the cement, of whatever kind the joints might be made, 
would be crushed to powder, and in a short time be totally washed 
by the rains from its place, leaving the whole joint open. 


Two new Acid Compounds. 141 


Arr. XV.—On two new acid compounds of Chiorine, Carbon, and 
Hydrogen; by Aueustus A. Hayzs. 


Amone the compounds which result from the action of chlorine on 
alcohol, there are two, whose relations to bases are such as to entitle 
them to be classed with those acid combinations, in which hydro- 
carbon neutralizes, in part, the properties of the other proximate ele- 
ment. When pure alcohol at 32° F. is exposed to a current of 
chlorine, which has passed through a refrigerated tube in part filled 
with fragments of dry lime, there is an absorption of the gas, and 
unless suitable baths are used, an elevation of temperature is occa- 
sioned ; the rapidity of the current being diminished, a small quantity 
of alcohol will continue to absorb it for several hours. The liquid 
becomes of a greenish yellow color and, unless the agitation has 
been considerable, consists of two portions of different densities, the 
lighter, containing more alcohol and Jess acid than the denser: both 
are lighter than water. If the operation is continued, globules of 
chloric ether mixed with other compounds, will separate and occupy 
a lower place. On diluting the mixture with water, a separation of 
more chloric ether takes place, other globules appear and are vola- 
tilized, with the odor of muriatic ether, as the temperature rises ; 
much muriatic acid and alcohol are also present. After decanting 
the fluid from the chloric ether and mixing it with hydrate of lime, 
it loses-its acid suffocating odor and diffuses the grateful odor of 
chloric ether. Distilled into a cooled receiver, some chloric ether 
dissolved in alcohol is obtained. ‘The remainder consists principally 
of muriate of lime, but contains two salts which are simultaneously 
formed, and which may be obtained by evaporation, and separated 
by crystallization. Results differing from these are under other cir- 
cumstances obtained, and will be hereafter described. When we 
substitute for the gas, a chloride of an alkaline oxide, less compli- 
cated changes occur. We may use with advantage, the mixture of 
hydrate and chloride of lime constituting bleaching powder. The 
best bleaching powder, in the market, contains °°, of condensed 
chlorine. If we add to such powder, contained in a flask, its weight 
of ordinary alcohol, on mixing, the mass emits very acrid penetrating 
vapors, consisting of chloric ether mixed with one of the new acids 
compounds: the temperature gradually rises, and if more than 
ten or twelve ounces of the powder are used, violent ebullition suc- 


142 Two new Acid Compounds. 


ceeds and the products are varied: if by cooling the vessel, or using 
several small vessels, a slight elevation of temperature only is pro- 
duced, the alcohol is absorbed and after twenty four or thirty hours, 
a consistent mass, having some chloric ether and alcohol mixed with 
it remains. ‘This mass treated with its bulk of warm water, affords 
a solution of the saline part, and the washings of the lime being mix- 
ed with it and evaporated, till a saline pellicle forms, the salts crys- 
tallize on cooling. ‘The crystals separated from the fluid by a thin 
cotton filter and pressed, will readily dissolve in a small quantity of 
distilled water, a few grains of carbonate of lead being added and 
the fluid boiled, excess of lime is removed, the clear solution by 
evaporation, will afford saline pellicles, which may be removed as 
they form, and when dense, the solution will give much salt in acicu- 
lar, prismatic crystals on cooling. By repeating the operations of 
crystallization, the two salts can be separated with considerable accu- 
racy : the minute quantity of the more soluble salt, may be entirely ~ 
detached from the other, by washing it in two bulks of alcohol. 
These salts are neutral and consist of distinct acids united to lime. 
The acid which exists in the less soluble salt, I have named chloro- 
vinic, its characters being the most diverse from the hydro-chloric, 
and to the other have applied the appellative chlorovinous. 
Chlorovinate of lime, when obtained from solutions containing 
traces of alcohol, is in the form of rectangular tabular crystals, much 
disposed to group and form radiated masses; it possesses a pearly 
lustre, is translucent and of a light yellow color, the crystals have the 
tenacity so apparent in ferro-prussiate of potash. At 212° F. ex- 
posed to dry air, it loses no water, nor is the interior arrangement of the 
crystals altered; they are, therefore, anhydrous. When heated in a 
tube at 300° to 400° F-., it becomes brown, a fluid forms, which gives 
to the mass the appearance of fusion: the vapor is dense and color- 
less, readily condenses in water, and is nearly pure chlorovinous acid : 
a dark gray, dry residue of chloride of calcium and carbon, remains. 
In water it dissolves and affords a dense, colorless solution, which, at 
the point of ebullition, dissolves but little more salt; it dissolves slowly 
in alcohol, and its hot saturated solution does not deposit crystals on 
cooling. Its aqueous solution gives with pro-nitrate of mercury, a 
salt of moderate solubility, but does not occasion any precipitate, or 
-cloudiness, in solutions of nitrate of silver, nitrate of lead and nitrate 


of copper. Orxalic acid, precipitates a white oxalate of lime and 
detaches the acid. 


. 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 143 


Chlorovinite of lime is in the form of hexagonal prisms, generally 
truncated, but sometimes pyramidically terminated: colorless and 
transparent, brittle, cross fracture even, permanent in the atmosphere 
and unaltered by light. In dry air the crystals become opake and 
finally fall to powder; warmed, they give off pure water; heated, they 
swell, emit gas, char and at near the temperature of melting glass, a 
gray fused mass, composed of chloride of calcium, carbonate of lime 
and carbon remains. In pure alcohol, they lose water and slowly dis- 
solve; a hot saturated solution, deposits crystals on cooling. In water 
it is very soluble; its solution dissolves much salt when heated and de- 
posits crystals on cooling. Its solution when added to a solution of 
nitrate of silver, causes the precipitation of dense curdy white flocks; 
in nitrate of lead, no precipitate, or cloudiness appears, even if the 
solutions are concentrated, or heated; with pro-nitrate of mercury, 
there is a white precipitate which becomes crystalline, and is partially 
soluble in water. With solutions of copper, chlorides of sodium, ba- 
rium and potassium, the resulting salts are soluble. Oxalic acid 
eliminates the acid and forms a white oxalate of lime. 

(To be continued.) 


Art. XVI.—On a disturbance of the Earth's magnetism, in con- 
nexion with the appearance of an Aurora Borealis, as observed at 
Albany, April 19th, 1881; by JosrpH Henry, of the Albany 
Academy. 


[Communicated to the Albany Institute,* January 26, 1832.] 


Tuar the aurora has some connexion with the magnetism of the 
earth, was asserted as early as the middle of the last century ; and 
since that time, many observations have been recorded, tending to 
confirm this position. 1. It has been observed, that when the au- 
rora appears near the northern horizon in the form of an arch, the 
middle of this is not in the direction of the true north, but in that 
of the magnetic needle at the place of observation; and that when 
the arch rises towards the zenith, it constantly crosses the heavens 
at right angles, not to the true, but to the magnetic meridian. ‘This 
fact is most obvious where the variation of the needle is great. 


* And forwarded for insertion in this Journal. 


144 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


2. When the beams of the aurora shoot up so as to pass the zenith, 
which is sometimes the case, the point of their convergence is in the 
direction of the prolongation of the dipping needle at the place of 
observation. 3. It has also been observed, that during the appear- 
ance of an active and brilliant aurora, the magnetic needle often 
becomes restless, varies sometimes several degrees, and does not 
resume its former position until after several hours. 

From the above facts, it has been generally inferred that the auro- 
ra is In some way connected with the magnetism of the earth; and 
that the simultaneous appearance of the meteor, and the disturbance 
of the needle, are either related as cause and effect, or as the com- 
mon result of some more general and unknown cause. 

The subject is, however, involved in much obscurity ; and there 
are some facts which tend to throw doubt on the connexion of the 
two phenomena. The. accurate and valuable observations of Col. 
Beaufoy in England, continued for several years, add nothing to- 
wards establishing the fact of the magnetic influence of the aurora ; 
and in the scientific expeditions under Capt. Parry, to the north, 
in the peculiar regions, as it would appear, of this meteor, no un- 
usual disturbance of the needle was observed to accompany the 
aurora, although the apparatus was visited every hour in the day, 
and sometimes oftener, when any thing rendered it desirable. In- 
deed, so far from producing a disturbing effect, Dr. Brewster con- 
cludes, from a comparison of the observations, that the aurora, in 
the arctic regions, seems rather to exercise a sedative influence.* 

On the other hand, Dr. Richardson states, from his own observa- 
tions, made at Bear Lake, during six successive months of the 
years, 1825-6, and again in 1826-7, that the aurora does influence 
the magnetic needle. ‘A careful review of the daily register,” 
says he, “has led me to form the following conclusion: That bril- 
liant and active coruscations cause a deflection of the needle almost 
invariably, if they appear through a foggy atmosphere, and if pris- 
matic colors are exhibited ; on the contrary, when the atmosphere is 
clear, and the aurora presents a dense steady light of a yellow color, 
and without motion, the needle is often unaffected.”+ 

In this state of knowledge, every additional fact becomes of some 
importance. The following communication, it is therefore hoped, 


* Edinburgh Philosophical Journal of Science, vol. 8. 
+ Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, vol. 5. 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 145 


may be useful, either in directing the attention of observers in this 
country to the subject, or in corroborating similar observations made 
in other quarters of the globe. 

In September, 1830, I commenced a series of observations, for 
Professor Renwick, of Columbia College, to determine the mag- 
netic intensity at Albany. In the course of these, I unexpectedly 
witnessed a disturbance of the magnetism of the earth, in connexion 
with an appearance of an aurora, which on some accounts appears 
interesting. 

The needles used in these observations, were those mentioned in 
Capt. Sabine’s letter to Prof. Renwick, published in the 17th vol- 
ume of the American Journal of Science. One of these, it will 
be recollected, formerly belonged to Prof. Hansteen of Norway, 
and the other to Capt. Sabine. They were suspended, according 
to the method of Hansteen, in a small mahogany box, by a single 
fibre of raw silk. The box was furnished with a glass cover, and 
had a graduated are of ivory on the bottom, to mark the amplitude 
of the vibrations. It had also two small circular windows, diamet- 
rically opposite to each other, through which the oscillations of the 
needle could be seen. 

In using this apparatus, the time of three hundred vibrations was 
noted by a quarter second watch, well regulated to mean time; a 
register being made at the end of every tenth vibration, and a mean 
deduced from the whole, taken as the true time of the three hundred 
vibrations. Experiments carefully made with this apparatus, were 
found susceptible of considerable accuracy; as the individual ob- 
servations, after a small correction for temperature, give a result, ex- 
cept in a few instances, differing from the mean of a number made 
under similar circumstances, by a quantity not greater than one part 
in nearly a thousand. 

The observations were repeated daily, when the weather would 
permit, from the latter part of September to the last of November, 
either at the hours of 12 at noon, or between 5 and 6p.m.* [ 
was always assisted in making them by the same person, my rela- 
tive, Mr. Stephen Alexander, to whose skill and experience I am 
much indebted for any accuracy they may possess. 


» These times were chosen only on account of being most convenient. 


Vou.—XXil. No 1. 19 


146 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


In April, 1831, a new series was commenced, to determine if the 
needles still indicated the same degree of magnetic intensity. No 
material difference was observed, except in the following instance, 
when a remarkable anomaly was exhibited. 

On the 19th of April, at 12 o’clock at noon, an observation was 
made with the Hansteen needle, the result of which differed only 
the fractional part of a second from the usual mean rate of this 
needle. At6 o’clock p. m. the same day, another observation was 
made with the same needle, and apparently under the same circum- 
stances; but a remarkable change was now observed in the time of 
its making three hundred vibrations, indicating a great increase in the 
magnetic intensity of the earth. It was at first supposed that the 
needle had accidentally been placed contiguous to some ferruginous 
substance ; but on a most careful investigation, nothing could be dis- 
covered which would tend in the least degree to explain the cause 
of the phenomenon. ‘The experiment was made at the usual place, 
with the box containing the needle resting on a post permanently 
fixed for the purpose, in the Academy Park, at a sufficient distance 
from every disturbing object, and with the usual precaution of di- 
vesting the person of all articles of iron, such as keys, knives, &c. 

At about 9 o’clock in the evening, or three hours after the above 
observation, an unusual appearance was noticed ia the southern 
part of the heavens, which was shortly afterwards recognized as an 
arch of the aurora. It was about nine degrees in breadth, with the 
vertex of the arch twenty degrees above the horizon. At this time 
the northern part of the sky was covered with light fleecy clouds. 
At forty five minutes past nine, the clouds partially disappeared, and 
disclosed the whole northern hemisphere entirely occupied with co- 
ruscations of the aurora, shooting up past the zenith, and apparent- 
ly all converging to the same point. The actual formation of a co- 
rona might probably have been observed, but for a dark cloud which 
remained stationary a little south of the zenith. The idea for the 
first time now occurred to me, that this uncommonly brilliant appear- 
ance of the aurora might possibly be connected with the magnetic 
disturbance observed at 6 o’clock ; and in order to test this, the ap- 
paratus was again placed on the post in the Academy Park, and an 
observation made during the most active appearance of the meteor. 

The result of the observation was, however, entirely different 
from that anticipated; for instead of still indicating, as at 6 o'clock, 


an uncommonly high degree of magnetic intensity, it now showed an 
intensity considerable lower than usual. 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 147 


Observations were also made on the 20th and 2Ist, but no distur- 
bance was again noticed ; the intensity had resumed its former state. 
The following table exhibits the observed times of three hundred 
vibrations, with the mean temperature and aspect of the weather 
during each observation : 


Time of 300| Mean tem- ANvoath on 
vibrations. | perature. ‘ 


April 19th, 12 h. noon. | 980/.75 663° |Cloudy, rain a. mM. 
Pe both. 26. bh. p. im.) 9687 65 61° Clear. 
Sot LOrbe pai... 9821.20 ale Broken clouds. 
= 20th, 6 bh. p.m: | 978.638 | - 514° -..\Clear. 


-DAY. 


The above observations may be reduced approximately to the 

uniform temperature of 60°, by the formula, 
T=T" [110.000165(¢’tt) |, * 

(T being time, ¢ temperature in degrees of Fahrenheit,) which 
was deduced from experiments on a similar needle. The relative 
intensities may also be readily calculated, since they are reciprocal- 
ly as the squares of the times of the vibrations. In this way, by 
assuming as unity the time observed on the 20th, we have the fol- 
lowing results: 


Time of 300 vibrations 


DAY. at temperature of 60: Relative intensities. 
April 19th, 12h. noon. | 9797.94 1.00022 
Oth... 6..H. p- m. 968”.49 1.02401 
« 19th, 10h. p. m. 983.50 0.99299 
OPO, to kt p- m. 980.05 — 1.00000 


From the mean of several observations made with this needle in 
April, I consider its time of three hundred vibrations for this month, 
and in an undisturbed state of terrestrial magnetic intensity, to be 
nine hundred and seventy nine seconds. ‘The accidental errors in the 
above observations do not probably exceed, in any case one second. 

At the time of registering the above observations, I had not seen 
the following remark of Prof. Hansteen, which was subsequently 
met with in the 12th volume of the Edinburgh Philosophical Jour- 
nal:—‘ A short time before the aurora borealis appears,” says 
Prof. Hansteen, “the intensity of the magnetism of the earth is 
apt to rise to an uncommon height; but so soon as the aurora be- 
gins, in proportion as its force increases, the intensity of the mag- 


* This formula was obtained by Hansteen. 


148 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


netism of the earth decreases, recovering its former strength by de- 
grees, often not till the end of twenty-four hours.”* ‘This state- 
ment, founded on observations made in Norway, is a precise de- 
scription of the phenomenon observed in Albany; and should it be 
found a general, or even a frequent occurrence, that a great increase 
of intensity precedes the appearance of the aurora, it would perhaps 
reconcile many apparent discrepancies in the different accounts of 
magnetic influence of the meteor. 

Prof. Hansteen also remarks, in the same paper, that “the polar 
lights seem to be the effect of an. uncommonly high magnetic in- 
tensity, which lets itself off, as it were, by the aurora, and thus sinks 
under its common strength.” Nothing, however, can with certainty 
be deduced from these observations, in reference to this supposition ; 
since the magnetic intensity at any place, as exhibited by the vibra- 
tions of the horizontal needle, may change while the absolute force 
or intensity of the whole earth remains the same. If we present by 
F the whole force in the direction of the dipping needle, by 6 the 
dip in degrees, and by H the horizontal force, we shall have, by 
a well known law, 

H 
~ cosin d 
In this formula it is evident that F may remain constant, although H ~ 
is caused to vary by a change in the value of cosin 0. The fact, 
therefore, of a variation in the absolute intensity, can only be deter- 
mined by combining the observations of the vibrations of the hori- 
zontal needle with simultanecus observations on the dipping needle. 

If we suppose F' constant during the change of horizontal inten- 
sity as observed at Albany, we may, by means of the above formula, 
calculate the change in declination or dip required to produce the 
observed difference in the horizontal intensity. Assuming 6 = 75°, 
(the dip at Albany nearly,) and H = to the horizontal intensity ob- 
served at 6 o’clock, we can readily find the value of F'; and since 


? 
this value is supposed constant, by substituting it in the expression 


H’ 
cosin 6 = Fe 


* [ find the same observation has ualsobeen made by Humboldt; and also a similar 
one by Van Swinden, who remarks, that the variation of the needle increases when 
the aurora borealis is approaching. Journal Royal Institution. Young’s Natural 
Philosophy, vol. 2, p. 442. 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 149 


in which H’ represented the intensity observed at 10 o’clock, we 
shall have the value of 3 (the dip) corresponding to the latter in- 
tensity. In this way, the change observed in the horizontal intensity 
at the time of the aurora, gives 28’ 48” as the deviation of the 
needle in the plane of the dip. 

The aurora which appeared in connexion with this magnetic dis- 
turbance, was probably one of the most interesting ever observed in 
this country, particularly from the circumstance of the actual forma- 
tion of a corona, which was seen in several parts of this State. My 
friend Prof. Joslin, of Union College, who happened to be in New 
York at the time, has furnished me with the following account : 

“The aurora borealis of 19th April, as it appeared in the city of 
New York at 9 Pp. m., was peculiarly interesting, on account of the 
meeting of the luminous columns in the magnetic meridian, at the 
point in the direction of the dipping needle towards which they usu- 
ally tend. ‘The luminous matter occupied the whole northern half 
of the visible celestial hemisphere, and was very much condensed 
near the point of convergence. Some of the eastern coruscations 
were at times transiently curved, as though their middle parts (as was 
probably the case) were driven eastward by the impulse of the west- 
erly breeze which was blowing at the time. A luminous band was 
at one time extended across the heavens, at right angles to the me- 
ridian, and 30° south of the zenith. This had attimes an oscillatory 
motion ina north and south direction. It passed near the moon, 
around which was one of the large halos. ‘The sky had been previ- 
ously clear. The converging rays appeared to meet at. the star 6 
Leonis.” 

By computing the position of 6 Leonis for 9 o’clock on the eve- 
ning of the 19th, its altitude was found to be 70° 25’, and it azimuth 
11° 27 east. A small error in time, however, would make a great 
difference in the azimuth. ‘The dip of the needle at New York is 
73°, and the variation probably between 4° and 5°, as it is 62° at 
Albany. a 

The aurora was also seen by Dr. William Campbell, at Cherry 
Valley. He describes it as very brilliant, and assuming a variety of 
forms ; at one time appearing as a stupendous arch, crossing the 
heavens from east to west; at another, radiating from a point south 
of the zenith. The Rev. Mr. Thummel, of the Hartwick Seminary, 
at his residence in Otsego county, likewise observed the same aurora. 
He describes it as radiating in every direction from a nucleus near 


150 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


the zenith, which appeared clear and compact for some time, when it 
began to move, and darted forth rays in every direction like crystals. 


March 6, 1832. 


Since the foregoing was communicated to the Institute, several 
particulars have been learned in reference to the subject, which, on 
some accounts, are deemed interesting. ‘The Annual Meteorological 
Reports of the different Academies in the State of New York, to the 
Regents of the University, have been received; and from them it 
appears that the aurora of the 19th of April was visible over the 
whole extent of the State, and probably considerably west of it. It 
is described as being very brilliant at Lewiston on the Niagara river, 
extending high, and farther to the south than any before observed. 
In the eastern part of the State, it was seen at most of the Acade- 
mies along the Hudson, and at Erasmus Hall on Long Island. It 
also appeared brilliant at Potsdam in St. Lawrence county, the most 
northern Academy in the State. It was probably not seen very ex- 
tensively in the States east of New York, as I am informed the weath- 
er in the eastern part of New England was cloudy at the time, ac- 
companied with rain. The aurora is described as shooting up to the- 
zenith at North Salem; and at Middlebury as consisting of corusca- 
tions in almost every part of the visible heavens. At Fairfield, it 
illuminated nearly the whole heavens; a number of bows, commen- 
cing in the northwest, passed south of the zenith, and terminated in 
the northeast. An interesting account is given of its appearance at 
Utica, where it is described as rising at one time in streams of light, 
of purple, yellow, green and other colors, and exhibiting a rapid hori- 
zontal motion, passing and repassing like a company of dancers. ‘The 
actual intersection of the beams so as to form the appearance called 
the corona, is mentioned as having been. seen in the city of New 
York, at Hartwick, Cherry Valley, Hudson, and Prattsburgh in Steu- 
ben county. 

The only plausible explanation of the formation of the corona, is 
that which supposes the beams of the aurora to consist of cylindrical 
portions of some kind of matter, which becomes luminous as it passes 
into the higher regions of the atmosphere; and that the cylindrical 
beams shoot up from many points of the earth’s surface, nearly par- 
allel to each other, and in the direction of the dipping needle. Being 
at different distances from the observer, they appear of different ele- 
vations ; and sometimes, . when seeming to overlap each other, they 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 151 


form continued streaks of light in every part of the visible heavens. 
The corona, according to this hypothesis, is the perspective projec- 
tion on the sky, of the beams which are shooting up at the same in- 
stant on all sides of the observer, and which, being all parallel to the 
dipping needle, appear to converge as it were to a vanishing point, 
situated, in the State of New York, about 15° south of the zenith. 
If this hypothesis be correct, and it seems a strict geometrical deduc- 
tion from actual appearances, it would follow, that on the evening of 
the 19th of April, beams of auroral matter, were shooting up from 
every part of the surface of the State of New York. 

But the most interesting circumstance in reference to this aurora, 
is that which I have learned from the December number of the Jour- 
nal of the Royal Institution of Great Britain, viz. the fact of a dis- 
turbance of terrestrial magnetism being observed by Mr. Christie in 
England, on the same evening, and at nearly the same time the dis- 
turbance was witnessed in Albany, and that too in connection with 
the appearance of an aurora. 

Mr. Christie had adjusted a magnetic needle for the express pur- 
pose of observing the effect when an aurora should appear, but was 
not so fortunate as to be able to make any observations with it until 
the evening of the 19th of April. His apparatus consisted of a light 
needle six inches long, suspended within a compass box by a fine 
brass wire ;1, of an inch in diameter, and twenty three inches long. 
The needle was deflected from the magnetic meridian by the repul- 
sive action of two bar magnets placed on opposite sides of it; so that, 
instead of pointing to the magnetic north, it settled in the direction of 
N. 37° W. As the needle assumed this position in consequence of 
the attractive force of the earth, and the repulsive force of the mag- 
nets, a deviation from the north towards the west would indicate a 
diminution of the terrestrial horizontal intensity, and a deviation 
towards the north an increase in that intensity, the intensity of the 
magnets remaining the same. At 10 o’clock p. m. on the evening 
ef the 19th, during the appearance of the aurora, Mr. Christie found 
the needle vibrating between N. 43° 40’ W. and N. 42° 40’ W. 
At 10h. 15m. its direction was N. 34° W. It continued to approach 
the north until 10h. 37m. when it pointed N. 33° 30’ W. It again 
receded from the pole, and at 10h. 40m. vibrated between N. 37° 
W. and N. 36° W. The next morning at 7h. 20m. the needle 
pointed N. 40° W. From this brief abstract of Mr. Christie’s ob- 
servations, it will be seen that the horizontal intensity was less than 


152 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


usual at 10 o’clock; that it increased until 10h. 374m. when it was 
greater than in its undisturbed state ; and that it again decreased, and 
was less than usual the next morning at 7h. 20m. 

By adding five hours to the time of the observations made at Alba- 
ny, we shall have nearly the corresponding time at Mr. Christie’s res- 
idence in Woolwich. 'These times being 6h. and 10h. P. m. will 
therefore correspond with 11h. Pp. m. and 3h. a. m. of time at Wool- 
wich. From this it appears, that the observations at Albany were 
made at a period of absolute time between the last observation of 
Mr. Christie on the evening of the 19th, and the morning of the 20th. 
The only interesting result, however, which apparently can be drawn 
from a comparison of the observations, is, that at both places there 
was a disturbance of terrestrial intensity at the same time; the inten- 
sity rising above and sinking below its usual state at each, although 
these changes did not occur in the same order at both places. 

I am not aware that a simultaneous disturbance of terrestial mag- 
netism, in connexion with an aurora, has ever before been noted at 
two places so distant from each other. Nor do I think the coinci- 
dence in this case in the least degree accidental. On the contrary, 
it appears to me highly probable that the disturbing cause was not 
only common to both places, but was also active at the same time 
in a great portion of the northern part of the globe. A brilliant au- 
rora is by no means a local phenomenon. ‘That of the 28th of Au- 
gust, 1827, was visible over nearly the whole of the northern States, 
in Canada, and also from some part of the Atlantic ocean. But 
what places the extensive and simultaneous appearance of the auro- 
ra in a more striking point of view than any in which it perhaps was 
ever before exhibited, is the comparison of the notices of the aurora 
given under the monthly meteorological reports in the Annals of 
Philosophy for 1830 and 1831, and the Reports of the Regents of 
the University of the state of New York for the same period. By 
inspecting these two publications, it will be seen, that from April 
1830, to April 1831 inclusive, the aurora borealis was remarkably 
frequent and brilliant, both in Europe and in this country; and 
that most of the auroras described in the Annals for this time, partic- 
ularly the brilliant ones, were seen on the same evening in England 
and in the State of New York. 

The particular days on which the aurora appeared in England, 
are not mentioned in the Annals, except when the aurora, is con- 
sidered on some accounts interesting. By comparing those which 


Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 153 


are thus noticed, with the Regents’ Reports, the following results 
are obtained : 

The first aurora mentioned in the Annals for 1830, occurred on 
the 19th of April. A particular description is given of its appear- 
ance in England, and also a notice of its being seen in Scotland. 
In the State of New-York, a brilliant aurora was extensively seen 
on the same evening. Accounts are given of it from Auburn, Cam- 
bridge, Canajoharie, Cayuga, Franklin, Hudson, Lansingburgh, Low- 
ville, Oxford, Pompey, Rochester, Union, Cazenovia, and Utica. 

The second aurora noticed in the Annals, is that of the 20th of 
August. An aurora was also seen in the State of New-York, at 
Lowville, Pompey, Cazenovia, and is particularly described as pre- 
senting an unusual appearance at Utica. 

The next aurora which appeared worthy of a particular notice in 
the Annals, happened on the 7th of September; and the same 
evening an aurora was seen at Lewiston in Niagara county. On 
the 17th of the same month an aurora was also observed in Eng- 
land, and the same time at Pompey, St. Lawrence and Utica. 

Under the report of the meteorology for the month of October, 
in the Annals, two auroras are described as appearing, one on the 
evening of the 5th, and the other on that of the 16th. ‘These were 
both seen in the state of New-York, the first at Utica, and the se- 
cond at Lowville. 

Two auroras are particularly mentioned as appearing in England 
in November ; but no corresponding ones are noticed in the Report 
of the Regents, as having been seen in the State of New-York. 

In the meteorological reports for the month of December, in 
the Annals, there are five auroras mentioned. The most inter- 
esting of these happened on the 11th, and exhibited peculiar ap- 
pearances. At one time, from a segment of the horizon of 70 de- 
grees in extent, there emanated several flame-colored perpendicu- 
lar columns, some of which were 2 degrees wide and 30 in altitude: 
these were succeeded by others, which ultimately exhibited red and 
purple tints. _Many persons. in England saw the aurora, and des- 
cribed it as exhibiting an awful appearance from a mixture of the 
colors. ‘The most brilliant aurora which appeared in the State of 
New York during 1830, happened on the same evening. At Alba- 
ny, it extended nearly 90 degrees around the northern horizon ; and 
at one time, a row of bright columns rose from an arch, and extended 
upwards, some of them nearly to the north star. The columns 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 20 


154 Disturbance of the Earth’s Magnetism. 


from the western limb of the arch were slightly tinged with redness ; 
all the others were white. At Lowville, flashes of light are deseri- 
bed as arising from the north to the zenith, and thence descending 
half-way to the southern horizon. It was brilliant at Auburn, Duteh- 
ess, Erasmus Hall, Lansingburgh, Hartwick, Lewiston, North-Sa- 
lem, Plattsburgh, Rochester, St. Lawrence, Union, and Utica. An 
aurora also appeared on the 12th of the same month, and a bril- 
liant one was likewise seen in the State of New-York, at Auburn, 
Dutchess, Franklin, Fredonia, Ithaca, Lansingburgh, Lewiston, Mid- 
dlebury, North-Salem, Plattsburgh, Pompey, St. Lawrence, Utiza. 
Faint auroras are also mentioned as appearing in England on the 
13th and 14th, and another on the evening of the 25th; but no 
corresponding ones are described in the Regents’ Report. 

In 1831, the first aurora described in the Annals, is that of the 
7th of January,; ‘and of all the aurore boreales,” says the author, 
‘“‘that have been observed here (in England) the last twenty years, 
(some say forty,) this was the most extensive the most beautiful in 
colors, and the most interesting on account of the singular pheno- 
mena which it displayed, in the number of distinct luminous bows 
which were presented in the course of the night.” Several com- 
munications are given on the subject of this aurora, in the Annals of 
Philosophy, andthe Journal of the Royal Institution. It was seen 
at Paris, and at Brussels. A particular description is given of its 
appearance in Utrecht, by Prof. Moll. On inspecting the Reports 
for 1831, I find that an aurora was seen in the State of New-York, 
at places in the extreme east and west part of the State—at North- 
Salem on the east side of the Hudson river, and Fredonia near 
Lake Erie ; and intermediate to these places, at Utica, and Pom- 
pey- The Annals also mention that faint auroras were seen on the 
evening preceding and following, and also an aurora on the 11th. 
An aurora was noticed at several places in New-York on the eve- 
ning of the 6th, but none on that of the Sth or 11th. 

No auroras are mentioned in the Annals under the meteorology 
for February, but three are noticed for March ; the first, an interest- 
ing one, appeared on the 7th; the second on the 8th; and the ~ 
third, a bright one, on the 11th. By referring to the Reports of 
the Regents, it will be seen that auroras were observed on the 
same evening in several places in the State of New-York. 

The next aurora mentioned in the Annals, is that of the 19th of 
April, which has been the principal subject of this paper. An inter- 


JMisceliantes. 155 


esting account’ is given of its appearance in England, which states 
that at one time there was a grand display of about ten long active 
streamers along an arch of the aurora, several of which ascended to 
an altitude of sixty degrees ; and when most active, many passed 
beyond the zenith, exhibiting at the same time several prismatic col- 
ers. At 10 0’clock, the arch of the aurora extended 150 degrees. 
The extensive appearance of this aurora in the State of New-York, 
and the magnetic disturbance accompanying it, have already been 
sufficiently described. 

The above coincidences appear too numerous to admit the suppo- 
sition that they are merely accidental, particularly when it is recol- 
lected that there are many causes to prevent the cotemporaneous ap- 
pearance of an aurora being recorded at two distant places, although 
it exists at both. While it is observed at one place, it may be ob- 
scured by clouds, or may escape the notice of the meteorological ob- 
server, at the other. Besides this, the coincidences occured on the 
evenings when the aurora was most brilliant, and consequently when 
its action might be supposed most extensive. ‘These simultaneous 
appearances of the meteor in Europe and America would therefore 
seem to warrant the conclusion, that the aurora borealis cannot be 
classed among the ordinary local meteorological phenomena, but 
that it must be referred to some cause connected with the general 
physical principles of the globe; and that the more energetic ac- 
tions of this cause, whatever it may be, affects simultaneously a 
great portion of the northern hemisphere. 


MISCELLANIES. 
(DoMESTIC AND FOREIGN.) 


1. Dr. Muse’s Vindication of his paper, page 71 of this No. 


Remark.—In consequence of a communication by the Editor to 
Dr. Muse, of the opinion respecting the Hessian Fly, which is stated 
in a note at the end of his paper, he has transmitted the following 
remarks. 


Fortunately, if" have erred in the identification of the Hessian 
Fly, the error cannot affect the chief object of my communication ; 


156 Miscellanies. 


because the fact of the very numerous chrysalids of the Hessian Fly, 
as stated by me and which I have too long known to mistake, and 
the incidents which gave rise to them and against which it was, in 
my opinion, necessary for the agriculturist to be guarded, formed my 
paramount motive. 

Notwithstanding the authorities cited against me, I must still main- 
tain the identity of the Hessian Fly with the insect which I faithfully 
and correctly described in the paper alluded to. 

First. The sod of wheat, placed under the glass jar, was loaded 
with well known chrysalids of the Hessian Fly. 

Secondly. In due time, swarms of the insect described by me ap- 
peared on the stalks and blades of the wheat within the jar, and 
having first several times cast off their exuvie, made their deposits, 
which finally crawled down and attached themselves firmly, by pierc- 
ing the plant with their probosces; and, throughout half the winter, 
there were many new developments, although I cannot say that 
these were, certainly, from recent deposits; they may have proceed- 
ed from the original chrysalids, of different ages when taken in. 

Shortly after the appearance of this numerous brood, | discovered 
a few other flies, of the Diptera order: three of these were appa- 
rently impoverished, small, house flies; indeed, so distinctly marked 
as the Musca communis, that I had no difficulty on the subject, and 
concluded they were produced from deposits of this fly, made in the 
fall previous, on the rotten portion of the wheat, before I had taken it in. 

About the same time appeared eight or ten others, also belonging 
to the order Diptera, and, as I believe, to the genus Culex ; and but 
for their short, inflected probosces, would have called them muske- 
toes, whose armature is too well known in Maryland to be mistaken: 
upon a closer investigation, they may be referred to the Tipula, whose 
habits and appearance strikingly resemble them, (the Culex.) They 
nidify and feed alike, on stagnant waters, rich damp earth, and mud. 
The origin of these, also, I referred to deposits, in the fall, on the 
rich earth containing my wheat in the jar, and I have still no doubt 
of the fact; and in this manner mistakes may have arisen on this 
subject. 

The larve and chrysalids of the Tipula are uniformly found in 
such places as I have named, and not on living plants; and if the 
Hessian Fly be of this family, it is, I suspect, the only exception. 
The larve and chrysalids of the Hessian Fly, unquestionably known 
in those stages of its existence, are invariably found on living plants, 


JMiscellanies. 157 


and independently of the injury to vegetation, by the hard chrysalids 
interrupting the ascent of the sap, the larve obviously suck the juices 
of the plant for their food. 

It is the habit of the whole genus Aphis, to which I have referred 
the fly in question, to feed in its larva state on tender succulent plants, 
and on such alone they nidify: this not being the habit of the Tipula, 
nor of the house fly, I did not hesitate on the identification; and the 
vast disproportion of numbers, taken in reference to the well known 
chrysalids, as stated by me, (there being only a few of the two latter 
and immense numbers of the Aphis, which was selected by me as 
the true parent,) no doubt was left on my mind, that the well known 
chrysalid of the Hessian Fly, in my sod of wheat, had developed nei- 
ther the Musca, nor the Tipula, but the Aphis, to which I referred it. 

In the truth of this opinion I am much strengthened by an intelli- 
gent and highly respectable neighbor, who frequently saw the flies 
in my jar: he declared the kind which I described in my paper, to 
be the identical kind which he the Jast summer had cut out from the 
flax seed casement of the Hessian Fly in the wheat field, when ma- 
ture and prepared to escape from it; and that the other two kinds, 
the Diptera before named, were so wholly unlike those which he 
thus obtained, that he could not be deceived. 

Upon investigation, I have discovered a great contrariety of opinion 
and testimony on the identity of the Hessian Fly, arising unquestiona- 
bly from such circumstances as may possibly, also, have deceived me. 

Mr. James Vaux, in a communication to a philosophical society, in 
1792, on this subject, says he has frequently seen them [the Hessian 
Fly] in the act of depositing the egg, and that they resemble a “slen- 
der, gaunt, house fly.” 

Judge Buel, in a paper on this subject, in the American Farmer, 
compares them to a musketo, except that they are smaller, and have 
a short bill—certainly, the house fly and musketo have no similarity. 

Some say, from personal observation, that they nidify upon the 
erain exclusively—others, with equal confidence and_as I believe 
with more propriety, say exclusively upon the leaf and stalk; the 
parent fly has necessarily been mistaken. 

Some affirm that they finish their nidification by the 20th of Sep- 
tember: Dr. Chapman is of this opinion. Under my own observa- 
tion, they have continued it, destructively, on wheat sown after the 
middle of November. 


158 Miscellanies. 


It follows, that this interesting subject remains yet in obscurity, 
perhaps in all respects; and its farther prosecution is more imperi- 
ously called for, by the absolute wants of the community, than that 


of any other to which natural science can be directed. 
Cambridge, E. 8. of Maryland, Feb. 26, 1832. 


2. On belts of evergreens, as skreens, for the garden, the orchard, 
vineyard, §c.*—The temperature, in winter, of every living vegeta- 
ble,—that is, of some part of it, in which principally resides its vi- 
tality, during the season of its least activity,—is always higher than 
that of a dead vegetable, of the same kind, as is the case also with 
hybernating animals, in their season of torpidity. The natural tem- 
peratures of living things vary, according to their kinds and habi- 
tudes.’ Trees, of the class of evergreens, in perpetual verdure, con- 
stitutionally adapted to life in colder regions, have a higher tempera- 
ture of vitality, than deciduous trees. ‘The same sunshine, which, 
in winter, falls upon the leaves and the leaf-covered branches of an 
evergreen, and upon the leafless branches of the oak or other deciduous 
tree, produces widely different effects. As if there were a repulsion 
between cold and heat, the ascending blaze of a fire cannot be made 
to come into contact with the bottom of a tea-kettle or boiler, filled 
with cold water; but will do so when heated up to near boiling, com- 
ing nearer and nearer as the temperature of the water is raised. 

My supposition is, that the effect of the sun beams is always 
in proportion to the temperature of the thing on which they fall. 
If, for example, the sun beams, in winter, fall on a living and a 
dead human body, I suppose that the living would imbibe more 
solar heat than the dead. Also, that when the temperature of the 
open air is at zero and that of a hot bed at 60°, for example, its gla- 
zed covering open to the sun—that the rays of the same sun would 
increase the temperature of the hot bed more than that of the open 
air; or, that when the temperature of the open air is at zero, and 
that of a dwelling room, open to the south by a window, is at 60°, 
indicated by accurate thermometers, both in the shade; that on let- 
ting the rays of the sun fall on each, the rise will be greatest in that 


* This paper was written as part of a series entitled the Country Farmer, and 
would have been No. XXIII of a series now in the course of publication in anoth- 
er journal. 


JMiscellanies. 159 


one which indicated the most heat. ‘This, however, in these cases, 
cited to make my meaning clear, is theory only, for I never have 
_tried the experiment, although so perfectly easy of trial.* As to 
the effect on pine leaves ee the tea-kettle, I speak from experi- 
ence and repeated observation. So, also, as to what is assumed of 
the different degrees of temperature of living and dead vegetable 
roots, in my last No., a reference to which will show the bearing of 
these remarks upon the true philosophy of scientific agriculture. 
While the dead branches of the limbs and twigs of the pine tree of 
the same grove, are seen covered with the ice and the snow of win- 
ter, long after its storms, those of the living tree, and its leaves, are 
as free as insummer. They are even giving out their caloric to the 
atmosphere, like deep water attempering its severity of cold; while 
the deciduous trees, from the power of extreme cold, are splitting 
from their centres, with loud reports, like signal guns. 

Where is the farmer, with a grove of evergreens near him, access- 
ible to the “locomotives” of his barn-yard, who has not seen with 
what avidity they retire to its friendly shelter, in winter, and with 
what reluctance they leave it, even after having finished the chewing 
of the cud, while wanting a new supply for their ruminating func- 
tions? And where is the farm, on which this luxury has been pro- 
cured, by human effort? From necessity, our fathers cut down our 
groves, and too long perseverance in the first habit of every new 
country, has made us wasteful in the extreme. For where, also, is 
the farm, of twenty, thirty or fifty years old, on some one or many 
of the fields of which, it would not now be desirable to have the de- 
stroyed groves of wood restored, either as skreens from the wind, for 
use as timber, or for ornament? I know of no one, from cold and 
bleak New England to Georgia, or from the Atlantic to the Ohio. 

The common opinion seems to be, that groves of evergreens are 
in winter, warmer than those of deciduous trees, only by the greater 
obstruction they afford to the currents of the air, in winds and storms. 
Hence so little use has been made of them, either as artificial skreens 
for the live stock of the farm-yard and the barn, or as a protection 
for fruit trees, and the orchard, and the garden. JI once commenc- 
ed an experiment of this sort, upon a new farm, by a circular belt of 


* re 
* The author’s views require to be verified by careful experiments, made under 
circumstances exeluding the influence of extraneous causes. 


160 Miscellames. 


evergreens, on the north of a farm-house, barn, garden, vineyard and 
orchards, extending around from the north east to the south west 5 
but it failed, by defect of title to the land. Late in the December _ 
of life, I reluctantly abandon the hope of such an experiment, but 
after stating my reasons for the hope of success, I thus invite public 
attention to a due examination of the whole matter. Fruit trees and 
vines, I know by experience, may thus be skreened from the peltings 
of the merciless storm and cold, and enjoy a climate, (if I may so say, 
a local climate,) strangely foreign to the place in which itis produced, 
and not less strangely congenial to the life and habits of the culti- 
vated products. The live stock of the farm, and the wild game of 
the forests, choose their haunts with unerring wisdom, according to 
the seasons, and the heat, and the cold; of the knowledge of which 
the experienced huntsman, not disdaining to learn from untalking 
animals, avails himself, now searching the groves of evergreens, or 
the open woods, or the hill, or dale, as experience shall have taught 
him. But the hunter is half a savage! Man, civilized, learned, 
social and communicative, seems less inclined to take lessons from 
things, than from words, and thus goes on in blind habit; the pro- 
gress of nations in philosophy seems to be the more tardy, as their 
advance in literature is more rapid. 

Gentlemen of science and fortune, by entering spiritedly into im- 
provements themselves, may do much towards giving new and right- 
ful impulses to the public mind, in every thing connected with agri- 
culture, and the arts and sciences. Some indications of this sort are 
occasionally to be met with, in various parts of our widely extended 
country, affording auspicious hopes, yet by far too circumscribed in 
the sphere of their influence. One reason of this is, that we are, as 
a people, not yet sufficiently aware of the power, in such matters, 
of a well conducted medium of communication, by the agency of the 
press, of which we are too parsimonious in our patronage. In Eng- 
land, the matter-of-fact discussions of the public press, in relation to 
steam navigation, canals and rail roads, bringing philosophy and sci- 
ence into the actual every-day business of life, have done more, in 
a few years, towards enlightening the public mind, than many ages 
of folio and quarto book making. 

The county of Saratoga, New York, has been most profusely de- 
nuded, as Dr. Johnson would say, of its wood. In passing along its 
roads last summer, within a few miles of its celebrated mineral 


a Miscellanies. — 161 


springs, there the extreme want of groves of wood, and evidence of 
the facility with which they might, with a little care, be supplied, were 
almost every where observable. Little copses, say of the white pine, 
along the road side, on farms almost naked every where else, had 
their branches and leaves almost lying on the ground, forming a 
thicket through which a bird could hardly fly, and a green wall of 
foliage from twenty to fifty or more feet in height. With such models 
before their eyes, supremely beautiful, a perfectly natural growth, 
I know not how it can have escaped these people, to provide such 
belts of evergreens, as skreens for their orchards, gardens, barn and 
farm-yards! They would be singularly beautiful and ornamental, 
besides being of much use, as well to each farm, as by providing 
stopping places for the winds, thus beautifying and benefiting the 
whole country, by an amelioration of its climate. In its primitive 
state, this sandy region whose surface is elegantly diversified, was 
covered with pines of gigantic stature. With plantations of the oak, 
chesnut, &c. which would grow rapidly, and some belts of ever- 
greens, as above proposed, both of which are much wanted, these 
sandy plains and knolls would become again delightful. ‘They have 
now an aspect of dreariness, which could soon be remedied by cor- 
rect taste and spirited effort. ‘There are many farms which would 
be beautiful except for these very features of unbeautiful nakedness; 
some of the proprietors are spirited improvers, on whom I hope these 
suggestions will not be thrown away. 


Horatio Gatrs SparrorD. 
Dec. 31, 1831. 


3. Spontaneous Combustion. 


To rae Eviror.—Six—A very novel case of spontaneous com- 
bustion, (novel at least to me,) which has recently occurred under my 
own observation, seems to merit a passing notice, by way of precau- 
tion to others; and it is the more alarming, and therefore the more 
entitled to attention, by reason of the increasing use of cotton in car- 
peting and floor cloths. The facts are submitted to your own discre- 
tion, as a Journalist in science and the arts. 

We have, in our family-room, adjoining the kitchen, a Philadel- 
phia cooking stove, in which, when the weather is cold and the price 
of fuel is high, some little culinary processes are at times carried on. 


Vor. XXI.—No. 1. 21 


162 Miscellanies. - 


For this winter, the floor has been covered with some cheap domes- 
tic carpeting. The stove stands on the carpet, which being tacked 
down, and covered in places with oil cloths, has not been taken up 
during the winter. Of course, some grease spots had appeared con- 
tiguous to a side door of the stove, but they had been’ scoured off so 
as hardly to be discernible on the upper surface. 

Some weeks ago, about noon, I was writing in this apartment, and 
having in charge two little children, the oldest one called my atten- 
tion to the smoke which then filled the room. My first impression 
was that the house was on fire, probaly in the kitchen; but on open- 
ing the door, first of that room and then of the parlor, no smoke was 
perceived in either, and I closed those doors, and began to search 
more narrowly. On looking at the carpet, I could see the smoke 
rising through it every where. I then looked into the cellar, found no 
smoke there, and closed the door, to prevent too free an ingress of 
air, and the bursting into flame. The carpet was then carefully ex- 
amined by the eye and the hand, and one spot was found, and only 

one, where there was heat enough to make smoke. ‘That spot was 
on one side of the stove, more than two feet distant from it, and the 
carpet was whole, though warmed but not hot, for I could bear my 
hand.on it. I applied some snow to it, and found a browned spot of * 
about two inches in diameter, which soon became a hole of that size, 
corresponding with one in the white pine floor-plank, underneath, 
which was browned and charred, not burned, less than half way 
through the plank. This occurred in a seam of the floor, where the 
planks were joined and in what had been one of the spots of grease: 
whether in contact with a nail, | have not yet ascertained. ‘This 
is clearly an alarming case of inceptive spontaneous combustion. 
The carpet, the materials of which had, till now, escaped observation 
was found to be made of cotton, and flax tow, with streaks of woolen 
yarn filling, none of which, however, came within the charred hole 
above described. In the hope to guard others against similar dan- 
gers, these facts are communicated. 
Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
Horatio Gares SPAFFORD. 
Lansingburgh, N..Y., February 27, 1832.—76. 


Remarks.—The above statement of facts deserves particular atten- 
tion, because the case is evidently of the same class with others that 


MMiscellanies. 163 


have been often reported. We refer, particularly, to the spontaneous 
combustion of fibrous vegetable stuffs, flax or linen, hemp and cotton, 
when imbued with oils, grease or tallow, and more especially with the 
drying oils; they become gradually heated, and, if in contact with 
the atmosphere, they are sometimes inflamed. ‘The danger is sup- 
posed to be augmented when the drying oils are mixed with the me- 
tallic oxides, which are used as paints; the oxygen in them may aid 
in producing the combustion. The caution which ought to be oh- 
served is obvious: the fibres of the cotton, in the present instance 
having been more or less charged with grease or animal oil, were 
brought to a burning state by the gradual heat of the stove, which, 
at the distance of two feet and upon the floor, was probably not 
intense. ' 

If, as we have been told, cotton is sometimes used as the basis ae 
oil cloths, the latter ought not to be exposed to much heat, and it 
might be well not to lay them in great heaps in the ware houses, as 
even the heat of summer, or in winter of air warmed by stoves, might 
possibly cause a combustion.—Ed. 


4. Preparation of chloric ether: A. A. Hayes.—In reply to the 
question respecting the preparation of chloric ether, in the last num- 
ber of this Journal, I will describe the method which was sometime 
since adopted, for furnishing the preparation in considerable quantity. 
From marketable bleaching powder, such was selected as was least 
bulky, and the quantity of chlorine, per cent., ascertained by analy- 
sis. A weighed quantity was placed in a retort, and alcohol of sp. 
gr. .850, equal to the weight of the chlorine contained in the powder, 
was added. By agitating the mass and allowing it to remain a few 
minutes, a mixture tolerably uniform was obtained. ‘The receiver, 
containing a quantity of water, was then loosely connected with the 
retort, in such a manner as to allow the beak of the retort to dip two 
or three inches into the water, and was refrigerated by a bath of snow 
and water. Heat was applied to the retort by means of a water bath, 
and when a part of the mixture had become heated to 150° F. dis- 
tillation commenced; the water bath was then removed, the action of 
the materials being sufficiently energetic to maintain the temperature 
for some time: the water bath being subsequently applied, the opera- 
tion was discontinued when ether ceased to be condensed. ‘The fluids 
in the receiver consisted of a quantity of ether equal to one twelfth 
part of the weight of the alcohol used,a diluted spiritous solution of the 


164 Miscellanies. 


ether, and an acid compound of chlorine, carbon and hydrogen. The 
fluids were drawn from the ether,—which, by subsequent washing in 
cold water, was rendered perfectly pure,—neutralized by hydrate of 
lime and subjected to distillation, a portion of an alcoholic solution of 
ether was condensed in the receiver, and the remaining liquor, by 
evaporation, afforded a small quantity of a salt in prismatic crystals. 

When the bleaching powder contains more than one quarter of its 
weight of chlorine, it is proper to diminish the relative proportion, by 
adding sufficient water and in condensing the ether, which is rapidly 
formed, ample refrigerating baths should be used., 


5. Bees.—A notice by E. Burgess, assistant in the Amherst 
Academy.—Our bees were put into the ground, near the first days 
of November. A hole was dug on a dry spot of ground, large 
enough to take in one half or two thirds of the hive. Straw was 
then put around it as tight and close as possible; it was then 
covered with dirt, to prevent either the water or frost from pen- 
etrating to it. The hive was taken out during the first days of 
April, and the. very moment the hive was reached, the bees seem- 
ed to be as lively and active as if they had been exposed to the 
warmth of a sunny day, although it seemed impossible, that the ex- 
ternal heat could have penetrated as deep as they were buried, so 
as materially to alter the temperature. They went immediately to 
work with seemingly more animation, than those which had remain- 
ed above the ground during the winter. ‘The precise quantity of 
honey consumed is not known; but it could not have been more than 
half of the quantity consumed by swarms wintered the usual way. 

Mr. P. anear neighbor put two swarms into the ground—but 
one of them lived. ‘This hive contained only four pounds of honey 
—which is not more than one sixth or one fifth of the quantity re- 
quired to winter a swarm the usual way. ‘The swarm which died, 
was put into a potatoe hole—the potatoes became moist—from 
hence the bees became so and died. From this we infer that they 
should. be buried so as to be kept perfectly dry, but whether it is 
absolutely necessary that they should be placed beyond the reach 
of frost, we have yet to learn from experiment. Mr. P. of New 
York buried the last winter six or seven swarms, and nearly all 
came out well—although being taken out quite early, one or two of 
them died before they were able to obtain any support from the 
field. None of them had nearly enough honey to have wintered in 


3 Miscellanies. 165 


the common way, and it has been asserted that a swarm was win- 
tered in that neighborhood, in which the diminution of the stock of 
honey could hardly be perceptible ; and from the experiments that 
can be depended on, it seems fairly inferable, that it requires but a 
very small quantity to sustain swarms during the winter. 

It is not known certainly what first led to this discovery—al- 
though it is reported that a man having a small swarm of bees with 
but very little honey, threw them into a potatee hole and covered 
them up with the potatoes and with scarcely any design whatever, 
but in the spring was surprised to find his bees alive. On taking 
them out, they immediately went to work, and did better through 
the season than his other bees.— Communicated by Prof. Hitchcock. 


6. Trilobites.—These curious relics, which Linneus called Ento- 
molitht paradoxi, were not understood before Brongniart had pre- 
sented his views under the “ Natural History of Crustaceous Fossils.” 
Since that time, considerable attention has been devoted to them. 
Dr. De Kay, Dr. Bigsby, and some others, have examined them in 
this country with success. I shall not attempt any thing more in this 
fragment, than to call the attention of our naturalists to one mark of 
distinction, which seems to form an important dividing characteristic 
among them. I have even attempted a distinct genus to be founded 
upon it; and thus name and define it. 

Bronenrartia.—F ore abdomen always, and post abdomen in 
most cases, longitudinally divided into three lobes by regular series of 
undulations, traversing the joints, without grooves: articulations of 
the side lobes being manifest continuations of those of the middle 
lobe, and consequently, agreeing in number. 

Dr. De Kay supposes that his Isotelus, and Dr. Bigsby’s T. platy- 
cephalus, may form the type of a new genus. ‘This he infers from 
general habit. I have received from Dr. Smith, of Lockport, two 
very fine specimens of Dr. Bigsby’s species. ‘The series of undu- 
lations and absence of grooves characterize both. M. Brongniart 
uses this expression as applicable to all the trilobites known to him— 
par deux sillons profonds, (by two deep furrows.)* 

Taking these iwo species as the type, I have added a third, which 
is found in great numbers on the south side of the Mohawk river, east 
of Little Falls, on the Erie canal. This I published under the name 


* See Nat. Hist. Tri. page 3. 


166 Miscellanies. 


Cancer triloboides in this Journal, Vol. XXI, p. 137. That name 
is strictly appropriate ; but, it being referable to the same genus with 
the two species just named, I prefer labelling it, in my own collection, 
Brongniartia carcinodea.* J sent specimens of this species to M. 
Brongniart about eighteen months since. He remarked to the bearer, 
that this species seemed to form the connecting link between the fos- 
sil trilobite and living crab. 

I have now before me a specimen of what appears to be a living 
trilobite, collected on the beach at Cape Horn, by Dr. James Eights, 
of Albany. It certainly appears to be of the same genus and very 
closely resembling in most specific differences, the fossil specimens 
from the Mohawk. Dr. E. has, what I believe to be another spe- 
cies of trilobite, which he found at New Zealand. Both of these 
he will soon publish with figures, when it will be seen, that the lon- 
gitudinal divisions consists of series of undulations, without grooves, 
like the species which I have referred to the proposed genus Brong- 


niartia. A. Eaton. 
Rensselaer School, March 6, 1832. : 


7. Diluvial scratches on Rocks. 
Extract of a letter written by John Ball, Esq., of Lansingburgh, N. Y. 


“While on a mountain in Hebron, New Hampshire, I was sur- 
prised to find scratches on the rocks, as though made by some heavy 
body dragged over them. ‘They were uniformly in the same direc- 
tion, and, judging by the eye, about S. 60° E., N. 60° W. The 
scratches appeared on all parts of the mountain, and very distinctly 
when the soil had been lately removed. ‘The mountain is principally 
gneiss, and the strata inclining a little to the west from a vertical po- . 
sition. I afterwards found that most of the mountain rocks, in that 
vicinity, show similar scratches. At the time, I was not aware that 
any thing of the kind had been noticed by others. But on looking 
into the American Journal of Science, a few days after, [ found my- 
self not the first observer of what I deemed a very striking phe- 
nomenon.” f 


* Kapxivog, crab, 00g, appearance. 
t See Vol. XX, p. 124. 


JMiscellanies. 167 


8. Mineralogy and Geology of Nova Scotia, by C. T’. Jackson 
and F. Alger. Memoir—from an unpublished Vol. of the Trans. 
of the Am. Acad. Boston; pp. 116 with a map and views. 

The original of this excellent memoir, appeared in this Journal in 
1828—9. Since that period, the authors have revisited and reexam- 
ined the country in question, and by a careful revision, and enlarge- 
ment of their memoir, giving it a highly improved form, they have 
made it well worthy of republication, in the Transactions of the 
American Academy. ‘This memoir may well be proposed, as a 
model to future explorers of districts yet undescribed, especially on 
the North American Continent. It is exact and scientific, both in its 
generalizations and in its details, and it gives due prominence to the 
very important deposits of useful minerals, with which Nova Scotia 
and the vicinal parts of New Brunswick abound. Its geological, 
speculations are reasonable and philosophical; the style is perspicu- 
ous and correct, and the getting up is in every view worthy of, the 
memoir, which might well find a place in the Geological Transactions 
of London. Nova Scotia is evidently based upon granite, although 
that rock is almost every where covered by more recent formations, 
or appears only in loose boulders on the surface. 

A transition slate, with marine organic remains, and containing beds 
of limestone, and very rich beds of iron ore covers the greater por- 
tion of the country; the iron ore, an oxide, sometimes a peroxide, 
is itself often beautifully impressed with organized bodies, and some- 
times a shell is half moulded in the slate, and the other half adherent 
to the iron ore, thus evincing their contemporaneous formation. 

The sandstone formation is next in extent after the slate, and it is 
the most important to the interests of the country. It corresponds, 
geologically, with the new red sandstone or red marl of England. 
It contains great beds of gypsum, and it is from this deposit that 
the gypsum imported into the Atlantic American States is derived ; 
grind stones, which also form an important article of commerce between 
the two countries, are obtained from the same formation; beds of coal 
are moreover explored in it, and this valuable mineral is now finding its 
way into the Eastern States, both from the peninsula of Nova Scotia, 
and (if we are not misinformed) from the island of cape Breton, 
which is separated, only by a very narrow strait, from the north eas- 
tern main land. As there is no bituminous coal, in any quantity, 
hitherto discovered in New-England (nor from the geological char- 
acter of the country, is it probable that there ever will be;) as the 


168 Miscellanies. 


Nova Scotia grind stones, having already a great market, in the At- 
lantic States, will continue to maintain it on account of their excel- 
lence and of their being so easily transported by water, notwithstanding 
the successful introduction of our fine grained mica slate and arena- 
ceous quartz rock, for the same purpose; and asthe gypsum of Nova 
Scotia can be always brought to the Atlantic ports cheaper than from 
the interior of New York, and of the Western States ; itis therefore 
probable that these important interests will long contribute to a friend- 
ly intercourse between the countries; not to mention that the rich 
beds of iron ore may hereafter, either in the crude or wrought state, 
contribute to a similar result. 
The trap formation of Nova Scotia is most remarkable. Although 
no where over three miles in width, and often not over one mile, it 
tretches one hundred and thirty miles, in continuity, along the south 
eastern shore of the bay of Fundy ; it rises in stupendous precipices, 
and basaltic columns of three or four hundred feet in elevation, and thus 
fixes an impassable barrier to the restless tides; those raging waters 
which, twice in twenty four hours swell to the height of sixty feet, and 
whether fluent or refluent, rush, with frightful fury, along this rock- 
bound coast,.and into the Bay of Mines, and Chignecto Bay, and 
their ramifications, undermining and tearing away immense masses of 
rocks, and piling them in accumulating spoils, along the shores. It 
is obvious from the fine colored geological map and section, and from 
the beautiful scenic views, by which our authors have so fully illustrated 
and adorned their description, that there are few regions in North 
America, so well worthy of being visited, on account of their wild 
and picturesque scenery ; it is also obvious that no small courage 
and prudence are requisite in coasting, in boats, along these, other- 
wise inaccessible cliff, lest the sweeping deluge which scarcely stops 
longer than to reverse its course, before it again rushes along with irre- 
sistible violence, should engulf the adventurers, or dash them upon the 
cliffs, which afford scarcely a landing place ora shelter. Our authors 
themselves, once escaped, with great difficulty, by suddenly clamber- 
ing vertical cliffs of three hundred feet. ‘The minerals imbedded in 
the trap, and mixed with its fallen ruins afford a rich treat to the miner- 
alogist, and for beauty, variety and abundance combined, are, we be- 
lieve, without a parallel in the explored parts of North America. 
By the liberality of the gentlemen to whom we are indebted for these 
interesting observations, we have been allowed to receive, and have 
seen in the hands of others, crystals or masses of quartz, amethyst, 


MMiscellanies. 169 


chabasie, calcareous spar, analcime, laumonite, mesotype, stilbite, 
smoky quartz, chalcedony, agate, beryl, specular iron, &c. &c. which 
both for size and finish, may well be placed among the beauties of our 
cabinets. 

We have not space or time, to give an analysis of this able memoir, 
and it is rendered unnecessary by the account of the principal facts al- 
ready given in a preceding volume of this Journal. It is our object 
in this notice to direct the attention both of scientific and of practical 
men, not only to the memoir but to the country which it describes. 
With the increasing facilities of communication, (which however can- 
not quite conquer time, space and the elements) a voyage from Bos- 
ton to Nova Scotia may become a favorite and improving excursion, 
for a few of the weeks of summer. 


9. ConcnoLocy.—Mnr. Lea on the NaiaveEs, in the Transactions 
of the American Philosophical Societyn—The mollusca of our sea~ 
board have hitherto attracted little attention, except for purposes of 
food. We never see their dwellings employed as articles of fancy or 
decoration, with the exception of the common Scallop, whose unpol- 
ished exterior must first be concealed by a coating of varnish and a 
border of gilding, before it is thought fit to enter into the construction 
of acard-rack. Even the conchologist is forced to summon both his 
philosophy and patriotism, ere he can admit the pale Purpura, the 
homely Venus, and the uncolored Pecten to take their respective 
places in his cabinet by the side of their gaudy congeners from for- 
eign seas. But if our marine shells are limited to a comparatively 
small number of species, and are, for the greater part, uninteresting in 
their forms and colors, it is far otherwise with the shelly inhabitants of 
our inland seas, and fresh water rivers, where the family of the Nai- 
ades revel in a profusion and beauty unsurpassed in the known world. 
So remarkable are these shells for the variety of their tints, and the 
delicacy of their markings as well as for their dimensions, that they 
attract the curiosity of the uneducated in the regions where they oc- 
cur, and may often be found among the ornaments of the rude cabin 
upon the banks of the Ohio, as well as upon the mantel-pieces of the 
rich in the larger towns and villages of the west; while, what is more 
important, they have in numerous instances been the occasion of 
awakening a taste for conchology, and have become the basis of sci- 
entific collections in natural history. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. G2. 


= 


170 MMiscellanies. 


The first persons who occupied themselves with the scientific ex- 
amination of this family, were Messrs. Barnes and Say ; the results 
of whose labors, especially those of the former, are contained in the 
pages of this Journal. Mr. Say still continues to devote his attention 
to the Uniones, as appears from the numbers of the American Con- 
chology, published at New Harmony. Dr. Hildreth, of Marietta, 
has also contributed his share towards the elucidation of the Naiades. 
But the papers of Mr. Isaac Lea, in the Transactions of the Ameri- 
can Philosophical Society, stand pre-eminent among all the labors of 
this kind, both for extent and nicety of discrimination. ‘This gentle- 
man has explored, in person, their localities, and has had the good 
fortune to receive, from time to time, the most abundant supplies of 
them from his friends, resident at the west; so that his cabinet, as 
all can testify who have examined it, illustrates the different species 
in a high degree of completeness,—containing individuals of all ages, 
and from distant localities, and those which exhibit, also, the various 
aceidents under which they are liable to occur. Nor have his ex- 
aminations been confined to the mere shells and dead animals: he has 
preserved the same individuals alive under his eye for months, and the 
observations he records concerning their habits and anatomy, are ex- 
tremely interesting and original. 

The number of species put forth by Mr. Lea, as new, is so great, 
as at first to excite the suspicion, that many of them must eventually 
prove mere varieties of one another, or of older species; but who- 
ever will carefully peruse his memoirs, and much more, examine his 
cabinet, will be satisfied that the grounds of his distinctions are at 
least as stable as those of the most distinguished writers upon these, 

conlessedly, most difficult genera in which, says Lamarck, “les 
espeéces se nuancent et se is ae les unes dans les autres, dans le 
cours de leurs variations.’ 

We shall now glance at the most important contents of Mr. Lea’s 
several papers; commencing with his view of the genus Unio, so far 
as our own country is concerned. ‘The first column exhibits the no- 
menclature of the species as proposed by him for general adoption, the 
second the species described by other writers which are ether the 
same or varieties, and consequentiy Tees 


: radiata, Lam. 
1. U. radiatus, Gmelin. : virginiana, Lam. 


3. radiatus, Barnes. 


MI Ao 
Sec: 


q 


a 


heel. ot selec ee 


Miscellanies. 


complanatus, Soland. MSS. 


ovatus, Say. 


cariosus, Say. 


nasutus, Say. 
cylindricus, Say. 


subtentus, Say. 


. undulatus, Barnes. 


plicatus, Le Sueur. 


rectus, Lam. 


torsus, Rafinesque. 
mytiloides, Rafin. 


- metanever, Rafin. 


. scalenius, Rafin. 
. cornutus, Barnes. 


verrucosus, Barnes. 


tuberculatus, Barnes. 


gibbosus, Barnes. 
cuneatus, Barnes. 


purpureus, Say. 
rarisulcata, Lam. 
coarctata, Lam. 
purpurascens, Lam. 


rhombula, Lam. var. 


georgina, Lam. 
sulcidens, Lam. 
caroliniana, Bosc. 
fluviatilis, Green. 
ovata, Lam. 

ovata, Valenciennes. 
luteola, Lam. 
cariosa, Lam. 


crassus, (old) Say. 


171 


carinatus,(rayed) Barnes. 
ellipticus,(young) Barnes. 


rostrata, Valen. 


naviformis, Lam. 
naviformis, Valen. 


! 
| 
: 


peruvianus, Lam. 
rariplicata, Lam. 
crassus, Barnes. 
undulata, Valen. 
| dombeyana, Valen. 


crassidens? Lam. 
I 


J prelongus, Barnes. 


nasuta, Lam. 
) purpurata,? Lam. 
{ recta, Valen. 


undatus, Barnes. 
; nodosus, Barnes. 


rugosus (flat), Barnes. 


verrucosa, Valen. 
tuberculosa, Valen. 


mucronatus, Barnes. 


172 Miscellanies. 


20. U. ventricosus, Barnes. 

21. U. siliquoideus, Barnes. inflatus, Barnes. 

22. U. triangularis, Barnes. 

The following are the American species added by Mr. Lea: viz. 
23. U. parvus, 24. U. esopus, 25. U. calceolus, 26. U. lanceo- 
latus, 27. U. donaciformis, 28. U. ellipsis, 29. U. irroratus, 30. la- 
crymosus, 31. U. ater, 32. U. rubiginosus, 33. U. heterodon, 34. 
U. sulcatus, 35. U. planulatus, 36. U. circulus, 37. U. multiradia- 
tus, 38. U. occidens, 39. U. securis, 40. U. iris, 41. U. zig-zag, 
42. U. patulus, 43. U. trapezoides, 44. U. multiplicatus, 45. U. as- 
perrimus, 46. U. congareus, 47. U. oriens, 48. U. brevidens, 49. 
U. pustulosus, 50. U. stapes, 51. U. pustulatus, 52. U. lens, 53. U. 
anodontoides, 54. U. glans, 55. U. elegans, 56. U. ebenus, 57. U. 
asper, 58. U. fabalis, 59. U. soleniformis, 60. U. acutissimus, 61. 
U. varicosus, 62. U. castaneus, 63. U. multistriatus, 64. U. decisus, 
65. U. obesus, 66. U. pyramidatus, 67. U. trigonus, 68. U. formo- 
sus, 69. U. perplexus, 70. U. angustatus, 71. U. arceformis, 72. 
U. subrotundus, 73. U. subovaius, 74. U. pileus. 

Mr. Lea’s new genus Symphynota, we anhounced in Vol. XVI, 
p- 378 of this work: here follows the nomenclature of that genus so 
far as it is contained in his published papers. 


1. S. levissima. 
2. S. bitalata, Local. Canton. 
5. S. cleey: i Unio alatus, Say and Barnes. 
alata, Lam. and Swainson. 
4. S. complanata, Alasmodonta complanata, Barnes. 
5. S. compressa. 
Unio gracilis, Barnes. 
6. S. gracilis, fragilis, Swainson. 
planus, Barnes. 
7. S. tenuissima. 
8. S. ochracea, Unio ochraceus, Say. 
Mytilus cygneus, Lin. Local. 
oe ; Assan Canes, Lam. ; Eorope. 
10. S. bi-lineata, Local. Hindostan. 
11. S. inflata. | 


Mr. Lea has figured all his species of American Uniones, together 
with two foreign species of the same genus, (the one from India and 
the other probably from Africa,) which he proposes as new, under 
the names of incurvus and olivarius; also, his six newly described 


Miscellanies. 173 


species of Symphynota; and his last memoir contains descriptions 
and figures of four new species of Melania: viz. elongata, subularis, 
tuberculata and acuta; of one species of Helix, which he calls Caro- 
liniensis ; of two species of Carocolla: viz. helicovdes and spinosa, and 
of one species of Valvata, named by him, arenifera. He proposes 
also, the Fusus fluvialis of Say as anew genus; for the reason that 
the Canalifera are universally pelagian shells, while this is a fluviatile 
species, and therefore falls within the Melaniana. He calls it the Lo 
fusiformis,—accompanying his description of it with figures. 

With respect to Mr. Lea’s distribution of the Naiades into the two 
genera Unio and Symphynota,—the distinctive character for the 
former being valves free, and for the latter, valves connate,—it appears 
to us a real improvement, and one for which he deserves the thanks 
of all conchologists; since it banishes several genera, and provides 
in a natural and convenient manner for the disposition of the whole 
family. Certain it is, that the diagnosis of the old genera Anodonta, 
Iridina, Alasmodonta, Hyria and Dipsas was too difficult, if not in 
many instances wholly impracticable. We shall quote Mr. Lea’s 
observations upon the insufficiency of the teeth to furnish among the 
‘Naiades the grounds of division into genera. 


“The hinges in the species of the different genera glide or shade 
away so completely into each other, that I have no hesitation in say- 
ing itis entirely impossible for any naturalist to mark outa line of 
unvarying character to most of them.” 

“If we examine the Anodonta cygnea, (Lam.) we find the margin 
under the beak and ligament to be an uninterrupted line. In the Iri- 
dina nilotica, (Sowerby) this line is slightly interrupted under the 
point of the beak. In the Anodon areolatus, (Swainson) we have 
this interruption more distinctly marked, the elevations being larger 
and more curved, evidently forming an incipient tooth, which ap- 
proaches very closely to the Alasmodonta marginata, (Say,) and forms 
with it a natural link. The next in the chain appears to be the Alas- 
modonta rugosa, (Barnes,) which has an incipient lateral tooth; and 
that* which follows very closely is the Unio calceolus, (Nob.) which 
has the lateral tooth very slightly more defined than the preceding. 
In the Symphynota compressa, (Nob.) we have the tooth more perfect 
and extended, forming a moderately well characterized lateral tooth 
of the genus Unio. ‘The well known Unio pictorum (Mya pictorum, 
Lin.) presents us with cardinal and lateral teeth completely formed. 
In this genus, the Unio, we have an infinite variety in the forms of the 
teeth. In the ee ee alata, (Nob.) the cardinal and lateral teeth 


174 JMiscellanies. 


are compressed in most specimens; and the next change we find, is 
in the Hyria avicularis, (Lam.) in which the cardinal tooth is some- 
what lamellar and forms nearly a line with the lateral tooth. The 
next ‘nuance’ is in the Symphynota levissima, (Nob.) which pos- 
sesses lamelliform cardinal and lateral teeth forming nearly a com- 
plete arc. Then follows the Symphynota bi-alata, (Nob.) the uninter- 
rupted curved tooth of which is little more than an elevated line under 
the ligament and beaks. As far as one may be able to judge from a 
bad description and very bad drawing, the Dipsas plicatus, (Leach,) 
may be with propriety placed at the end of this suite.” 


Mr. Lea’s critical examination of Lamarck’s species of the genus 
Unio constitutes a valuable part of the introduction to his paper, read 
before the Philosophical Society, March 6th, 1829; and we extract 
the substance of it for the satisfaction of those persons who may 
ever have exercised themselves with the determination of Uniones by 


the aid of Lamarck. 

Alasmodonta margaritifera. Say. 
Mya margaritifera. Lin. 

There can scarcely be a doubt but 
that it is a young shell of No. 1. 
Consists of the ponderous varieties 
of several species. . 
Embraces the plicata of Le Sueur, 
the crassus and undulatus, of Barnes, 
the rariplicata and crassidens of 
Lam. and the undulata and dombey- 
ana of Valenciennes. Le Sueur’s 
name must take the precedence. 
Its habitat is probably the U. one 
and not Peru. 


1. U. sinuata, Lam. 


3. U. crassidens, Lam. 


2. U. elongata, Lam. i 


4. U. peruviana, Lam. 


5. U. aoa Lam. A variety of No. 4. 

' pea in every respect to the 
6. U. purpurata, Lam. yeae but in habitat. 

: . Descriptions too imperfect to ad-— 
E is im —_ J ii of their being identified with 
0 i relent See any of our individuals; although 
piliekaa sara yee are all from this country. 

10. U. rarisulcata, Lam. 


11. U. coarctata, Lam. Mere varieties of the complanatus. 
12. U. purpurascens, Lam. 


13. 


14. 


15. 
16. 
17. 


18. 


19. 


20. 


21. 


22. 


23. 
24, 
25. 


26. 
27. 


28. 


29. 
30. 


31. 
32. 


33. 


MWiscellanies. 175 


synonyms to this species. But, 


Lamarck gives the Mya radiata of 
Gmelin and U. ochraceus of Say as 
. these are perfectly distinct. The 

bite ens strait Ee fe: after Lam. is 
distinct from Say’s ochraceus, and 
there is no doubt but that the M. 
radiata, G. differs from both. 
Resembles the circulus of Ohio, but 

U. brevialis, Lam. i. larger, less round and radiated. 

(It is, no doubt, a distinct species. 

U. rhombula, Lam. 

U. carinifera, Lam. Varieties of the complanatus. 

U. georgina, Lam. 

lr clavas Lani: ane be identified with any of 
our shells. 
The same as Barnes’s prelongus. 

U. recta, Lam. Be recta being described first, 
should be retained. 
U. cylindricus of Say, and previ- 

U. naviformis, Lam. el described: the naviformis, 
therefore, cannot stand. 

(is Sab ae i lees of the cartosus most prob- 

oa lies the recta of Lam. or the 

. nasuta, Lam. 2 

gibbosus of Barnes. 

U. ovata, Lam. The ovatus of Say. 

U. rotundata, Lam. The circulus of Lea. 

U. littoralis, described by Draparnaud, who says it resembles 

the margaritifera, but is much smaller. 

U. semirugata, Lam. Cannot be identified. 

U. nana, Lam. Habitat is Franche Comté. 

Wig ela, Tam, aoe Say and Symphynota 
alata, of Lea. 

U. delodonta, Lam. Description too short. 

U. sulcidens, Lam. A variety of complanatus. 
The specimens sent Mr. Lea from 

U. rostrata, Lam. } Eno are only varieties of the 
prctorum. 

U. pictorum, Lam. Mya pictorum, Lin. 

U. batava, Lam. 


Europe, appear to be only varie- 


The specimens sent Mr. Lea from 
ties of the pictorum. 


176 JMiscellanies. 


34. U. corrugata, Lam. Undoubtedly distinct. 

ae aoduleca, Tarh. Possibly the young Alasmodonta 
undulata of Say. 

36. U. varicosa, Lam. Resembles the 4. undulata, Say. 

37. U. granosa, Lam. A distinct species. 

38. U. depressa, Lam. af Do. 

39. U. virginiana, Lam. radiatus of Barnes. 

40. U. luteola, Lam. ~ A variety of Say’s cariosus. 

41. U. marginalis, Lam. Distinct. 

42. U. angusta, Lam. A variety of pictorum. 

2s wine een! It may be a distinct species, but re- 
sembles a variety of pictorum. 

44. U. cariosa, Lam. The cariosus of Say. 

Ae, Sopesarse me cies: be identified with any of 

Ao. cs uielie Lain: Cannot be identified with any Amer- 
ican shell. 


Agi) Wapmadan (ica dlcnee. fee the Anodonta undulata 
of Say 
48. U. suborbiculata, Lam. Cannot be identified. 

Mr. Lea concludes hisreview of Lamarck’s genus with the fol- 
lowing candid remarks respecting the reputation of that conchol- 
ogist. 

‘“‘In passing criticisms upon the species of the genus Unio, of this 
creat naturalist, Ido not in the Jeast wish to detract from his great 
and merited fame. My object is expressly to endeavor to facilitate 
the study of this interesting genus, and to remove as far as I have it 
in my power, the confusion which has creptinto it. My observations, 
I wish to pass only for what they may prove to be worth.” 


With respect to Mr. Lea’s observations on the structure and habits 
of the animals which construct these shells, we find his remarks upon 
the anatomy of the Unio irroratus (Lea,) the most deserving of at- 
tention. He has been the first observer of any anatomical differ- 
ence among the Naiades. ‘The peculiarity relates to the form and 
position of the oviducts; and is one which is obviously indispensable 
to suit the construction of the shell. It is an adaptation of the ut- 
most felicity ; and would seem to be the result only, of a most in- 
tricate geometrical calculation. 

In relation to the food of the Naiades he remarks in his last paper 
as follows : 


JMiscellanies. yi 


**T have in vain attempted to satisfy myself as to the nature of their 
food. Dissatisfied with the results of the observations mentioned in 
volume third, I procured, among other species, a fine Unio cariosus, - 
the valves of which were much more gaping than usual. Selected 
specimens of various species were placed in a glass vase, in the bot- 
tom of which was placed clean white sand, so that their natural beds 
might be somewhat imitated. In this vessel they assumed their natu- 
ral position by pushing the sand behind them with the protruded foot, 
thus forming a pit into which the base of the shell gradually fell, the 
ligament taking the most elevated situation. In this position, they 
soon began to travel round the vessel, and this locomotion continued 
for some days, when it ceased entirely. 

“Their extreme timidity or apprehension on the approach of dan- 
ger was very evident. At first, the slightest agitation, or movement 
of the vessel caused them to close their valves instantly. Being 
almost daily disturbed, this alarm after a time ceased, particularly with 
my fine cariosus, which now suffered even the agitation of the water 
without closing the valves, stretching out its fine dark and beautiful 
tentacula from the borders of its mantle, and forming by the contact 
of its edges, two openings, one below the other. 

‘“‘From the superior of these openings, the constant stream ejected 
could be plainly perceived for two inches, elevating the water at its 
surface. Being very anxious to ascertain through what part the water 
necessary to supply this stream was carried into the shell, I discover- 
ed it, after many experiments, to pass in by the inferior opening; that 
it passed out by the superior one had always been evident. This op- 
eration was unremitted while the water was fresh; when left un- 
changed for some days, this current invariably ceased. Doubting the 
correctness of my former idea, as to the probability of their feeding 
on animalcula, from the circumstance of finding the passage of the 
water to exist only while fresh, and never when animalcula were visi- 
ble even with a microscope of great power, I instituted some experi- 
ments by passing pieces of bread, very small pieces of worms, &c. 
between the tentacula. Several of them would sometimes remain for 
some minutes within the mantle, and so far within as to be invisible, 
but they were in every case in a very short time thrown out witha 
rapid and sudden jet of water to the opposite side of the vessel. 

“These experiments were frequently repeated during the course of 
a year upon the same specimen, and the result was uniformly the same. 
No food introduced into the shell could be ascertained to have remain- 
ed; it may therefore be pretty safely concluded, that neither animal- 
cula, nor food in a more solid state are necessary to the nourishment 
of the Naiades. What then are we to conclude it to be? would the 


Vou. XXII.—No. 1. 23 


178 MMiscellanies. 


decomposition of water serve the purpose of nourishment as well as 
breathing? Certain it is, that during the many years I have been in 
the habit of almost constantly having them alive for examination, dis- 
section, &c. I have never in any instance given them food, unless it 
was conveyed invisibly to them in the pure water with which our city 
is supplied, through our works from the river, and which was given 
them every few days.”—Vol. IV, p. 75. 


We have not yet remarked upon the descriptions of the species, _ 
and the manner in which they are figured. Here, if we are not 
much deceived, Mr. Lea will be acknowledged to have succeeded 
in the happiest manner. His language enables the conchologist to 
form a definite idea of what he would include within his species 
and the remarks which are appended to the general descriptions are 
well adapted to enlighten the student in the determination of difficult 
individuals ;_ while his figures may be said to be executed @ mer- 
veilles. ‘They certainly surpass every thing of the kind yet done in 
the United States, and fairly rival similar works of foreign production. 
And we have only to say in conclusion, we know not which, the so- 
ciety whose transactions they adorn, have most reason to congratulate 
themselves upon,—the science, or the taste of Mr. Lea’s contributions. 


10. 4A Manual of the Ornithology of the United States and 
Canada. By Thomas Nuttall, A. M. F. 1.8. Cambridge. Hil- 
liard & Brown. pp. 682.—‘ After so many excellent works have 
appeared,” says the author, “on the birds of the United States, it 

_may almost appear presumptuous, at present, to attempt any addi- 
tion to the list. A compendious and scientific treatise on the sub- 
ject, ata price so reasonable as to permit it to find a place in the 
hands of general readers, seemed, however, still a desideratum; and 
to supply this defect, has been a ae object with the aiviliae of 
the present publication.” 

We rejoice once more to hear from the accomplished naturalist 
whose name appears in connexion with the above mentioned work. 
Mr. Nuttall is well known to have been an ardent admirer of the 
feathered tribes for these twenty years; the greater part of which pe- 
riod he may be said, literally, to have passed in their society. His 
habits of observation, as well as powers of description, were well 
suited to the task he has performed, as all will readily acknowledge 
who peruse the work. And appearing as it has, before the arrival 
of our native birds from their winter retreats, we venture to predict 


Miscellanies. 179 


for them a heartier welcome the present season than they have ever 
experienced before among the hills and vales of New England. 

His introductory chapter, which consists of thirty closely printed 
pages, describes the anatomy of birds—their food, and the modes of 
obtaining it—their senses and instincts—vocal powers, and skill in 
imitating sounds—their conjugal affection—nidification and geo- 
graphical limits ; and is rich with instruction and interest to the gen- 
eral reader. We cannot refrain from quoting the opening remarks 
of this essay. 


“Of all the classes of animals by which we are surrounded in the 
ample field of nature, there are none more remarkable in their ap- 
pearance and habits than the feathered inhabitants of the air. They 
play around us like fairy spirits, elude approach in an element which 
defies our pursuit, soar out of sight in the yielding sky, journey over 
our heads in marshalled ranks, dart like meteors in the sunshine of 
summer, or seeking the solitary recesses of the forest and the waters, 
they glide before us like beings of fancy. They diversify the still 
landscape with the most lively motion and beautiful association; they 
come and go with the change of the season, and as their actions are 
directed by an uncontrollable instinct of provident nature, they may 
be considered as concomitant with the beauty of the surrounding 
scene. With what grateful sensations do we involuntarily hail the 
arrival of these faithful messengers of spring and summer, after the 
lapse of the dreary winter, which compelled them to forsake us for 
more favored climes. Their songs now heard from the leafy groves and 
shadowy forests, inspire delight, or recollections of the pleasing past, 
in every breast. How volatile, how playfully capricious, how musi- 
eal and happy, are these roving sylphs of nature, to whom the air, the 
earth, and the waters, are almost alike habitable. Their lives are 
spent in boundless action; and nature, with an omniscient benevo- 
lence, has assisted and formed them for this wonderful display of per- 
petual life and vigor, in an element almost their own.” 


The descriptions of the birds are replete with interesting informa- 
tion, conveyed in the most animating and naive manner; and the 
work is illustrated by a large number of very beautiful wood cuts. 
We think that it will prove to be a favorite treatise, since we are sat- 
isfied that it possesses strong claims to public approbation. 


11. Statistics of Iron in the United States—The author of the 
article Iron in the Encyclopedia Americana, desires to correct his 
statement therein made, respecting the annual produce of bar iron 


180 /Miscellanies. 


in this country. At the time the estimate was made, now above a 
year ago, he found it impossible to obtain any information worthy of 
confidence relating to the subject, out of the Iron districts of New 
England and New York; accordingly, he was left to bare conjec- 
ture concerning those parts of the United States which recent inves- 
tigation shows to be by far the most productive in this article of any 
portion of the country. The following statements are derived from 
the Report on the product and manufacture of Iron and Steel, made 
at the direction of the General Convention of the Friends of Do- 
mestic Industry, assembled at New York, Oct. 26, 1831 ;—B. B. 
Howell, secretary. Of which report it is not too much to say, that 
it bears the marks of an indefatigable and honest examination of the 
whole subject. Nor can there be a doubt, that the annual produce is 
yet to be increased by returns from remote sections of the country, 
which have not hitherto reached the committee. 

The number of furnaces in operation during the year 1830, was 
239, and the quantity of iron yielded by them, was 191,536 tons; 
of which 112,566 tons were converted into bar iron. ‘The value of 
all which, according to the mode of estimation adopted by the com- 
mittee and explained in their report, was $13,329,760. 


12. Cabinet of Minerals, §c.—Dr. Lewis Feuchtwanger, No. 
377, Broadway New York, as we are informed, offers his cabinet of 
minerals and other object in Natural History for sale, either entire, 
or insingle specimens. We understand that they have been collect- 
ed with much labor and expense, and that many of the specimens 
both rare and beautiful, have been exhibited in some of the public es- 
tablishments in that city. Among them are, a large wax yellow Am- 
ber, of nearly 2lbs. weight, and 60 cubic inches magnitude, from the 
Baltic. 

An American Beryl, of 70 lbs. weight, and 620 cubic inches. 

A. full six sided Prism, of 27 circumference. 

Three collections of precious stones, containing all possible varie- 
ties, from the diamond to the flint. 

Three small private collections of 160, 350, and 940 specimens, 
besides several other natural curiosities, such as the teeth of the 
mammoth, preserved reptiles, and fish impressions, &c. 

The auro-plumbiferous Tellurium, the graphic Tellurium, Bour- 
nonite, Mellite, Silver, Strontian from Sicily, Idocrase, Zeolite family, 
Opal family, Humboldite, Vivianite, Hydrophane, Hypersthene, 
Allophane, splendid Apatite in crystals, &c. &c. &c. 


Miscellanies. 18] 


13. Historical and Philosophical Society of Ohio.—A society 
with the above designation, has been chartered in Ohio, by its Legis- 
lature. ‘The names of its founders give good promise that it will 
not slumber, like too many of the societies in the older states; and 
as the character of the West is eminently, to be up and doing, we 
look for fair fruits of knowledge and of positive utility from this new 
and hopeful institution. 


14. Corrections in Hassler’s Logarithmic Tables.* 
Newport, February 17, 1832. 
To Proressor Situiman.—Dear Sir—I take the liberty of pre- 
senting to your notice a few errors discovered in Hassler’s logarith- 
mic tables, as follows: 


In the tables of Numbers. 
The natural number 2940 is misprinted 3140 


4c 6s ce 3010 66 66 3910 
ee €¢ ce 3960 (73 6c 5960 
66 (73 73 8640 ce 66 7640 


In the table of Natural Sines. 


Sine of 16° 42’ 30”, for 002874998, read 0,2874998. Cosine 
of 9° 30’ 00”, and throughout the whole column to 9° 60’; for 
0,936, &c.; 0,935, &c.; 0,934, &c.—read 0,986, &c.; 0,985, &c.; 
0,984, &c. 

These errors are all evident on a slight examination of the tables, 
and are therefore easily detected, but they serve to awaken a distrust 
of the accuracy of other parts of the work, in which errors would 
be less apparent and therefore more mischievous. 

These tables of Mr. Hassler are so admirable for their general 
form and arrangement, for their small volume, and their exceeding 
usefulness even for the higher computations of mathematics, that the 
publication of them in our country may be considered as no small 
subject of gratification to our national pride. 

Mr. Hassler professes, in the title page, to have presented to the 
world a set of logarithmic tables, ‘‘in which the errors of former 
tables are corrected.” But his reader of procfs has obviously left 
many of his own, to be corrected, it is earnestly hoped, in some future 
edition.—J. R. V. 


* From Mr. Hassler’s known candor, we doubt not he will be obliged by any 
communication tending to render his valuable tables more free from typographical 
errors.—Ep. 


182 JMiscellanies. 


15. Notice of the tropical plant Guaco. 
Guaco, Huaco,—Mikania Guaco, Humb. & Bonpl. 


The stem and all other characters of this plant correspond very 
much with the those of the whole genus Mikania; this species has a 
strong odor, and grows on the borders of rivers and streams in warm 
and humid places of the northern coast of Colombia, in Mexico, 
Yucatan, and also in some islands of the West Indies. 

This plant, from the great and unrivalled medicinal qualities which 
are attributed to it by the natives of those climates where it is found, 
being used by them as an infallible antidote for the bite of venomous 
reptiles, and as a remedy in many other diseases, and from the close 
affinity which it bears to our boneset, (Eupatorium perfoliatum,) one 
of our most valuable medicinal plants, assuredly merits a thorough 
examination; a knowledge of its properties might lead to important 
consequences, at least it would enable us to determine, how far it 
differs from boneset, and with what safety or advantage it met be 
employed as a substitute. 

The guaco is used as a medicine both internally and externally ; 
internally by taking a juice extracted from its leaves, externally by 
inserting the leaves themselves, in punctures made in the flesh of the 
patient ; itis not only valuable as a preservative against the bite of 
snakes, but is also found to be effectual in preventing all dangerous 
consequences in case a wound should be received, and the external 
- application or inoculation is therefore repeated semi-annually by the 
Indians and other inhabitants. 

I am of opinion, that this valuable plant might be introduced with 
advantage into this climate, where it would be as likely to flourish as 
many others which are common with us and appear to bear to ita 
close affinity. 

I have now in my possession a supply of a concentrated tincture 


of the Guaco and its seeds. 
Dr. Lewis FEucHTWANGER. 
New York, March 6, 1832. 


16. Magnetism.—The researches of Mr. Hansteen of Christian- 
na, on the northern magnetic poles, and the discovery of the great 
increase of power by the application of galvanism to the magnet, af- 
ford a hope, that ere long some further light will be thrown on this 
mysterious agent of nature. 


Miscellanies. . 183 


The connexion between heat and cold, and the magnetic phenom- 
ena, is shown by numerous facts, and could any plausible solution be 
offered for the phenomena of magnetism by the different states of 
temperature of the earth, and of the probable composition of terres- 
trial bodies, it would be more accordant with what we observe in na- 
ture, than in supposing four revolving magnets in the interior of the 
earth. 

There are facts which seem to favor the. following positions. 

1. That the coldest points in the northern hemisphere are the mag- 
netic poles, and that these in all probability lie under the arctic circles. 

2. That the poles of the magnet in passing from the northern to 
the southern or from the southern to the northern hemisphere are re- 
versed, by the magnetism of one end of the needle passing to the other. 

I would be glad to learn how far you think these suppositions prob- 
able, or whether their fallacy can be shown from any thing yet known. 

Very respectfully your obedient servant, 
J. Hamitton. 


To Prof. Silliman. 
Carlisle, Penn. February 27th, 1832. 


It is not m our power to add any thing precise in answer to the 
inquiries of Mr. Hamilton, and we therefore invite the observations 
of others.—Ed. 


17. “ Lust of officers of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil- 
adelphia for the year 1832.”—President, William Maclure. Vice 
Presidents, George Ord, William Hembel. Corresponding Secre- 
tary, Samuel George Morton, M.D. Recording Secretary, Thom- 
as M’Euen, M. D. Librarian, Charles Pickering, M. D. Trreas- 
urer, George W. Carpenter. Curators, J. P. Wetherill, S. G. Mor- 
ton, M. D., Thos. M’Euen, M. D., and Charles A. Poulson. 


Philadelphia, Feb. 16, 1832. 
7 


18. Amos DooxitTLE the earliest American Engraver.—Be- 
tween the present and the preceding No. of this Journal our vene- 
rable old engraver, Mr. Doolittle, has descended to the tomb, nor are 
we willing that his name should float away on the tide of time, with- 
out a passing notice. He has often assured me that he was the 
first person who engraved on copper in this country and this assu- 
rance he repeated a short time before his death. 


184 MMiscellanies. 


He was born at Cheshire, near New-Haven, and died of the pre- 
vailing epidemic Jan. 31st, 1832, at the age of 78, with his faculties 
and even his eye-sight unimpaired. With only one serviceable eye, 
he engraved the finest lines without glasses. 

Self-taught, he at the age of 21, first commenced the business of 
an engraver, having previously served a regular apprenticeship with 
a silver-smith. For more than half a century, he industriously ap- 
plied himself to this art, and it is believed that he accomplished more 
personal labor in it than any other individual living. When the news 
of the Battle of Lexington arrived in New-Haven, Mr. Doolittle, 
with forty other members of the Governor’s Guard, immediately 
went on to Cambridge as volunteers under Captain Benedict Arnold, 
(afterwards General Arnold,*) who then commanded the company. 
While they were at Cambridge, Mr. D. visited the battle ground at 
Lexington, and upon his return to New-Haven, he made an engra- 
ving ¢ of the action, which was his first attempt in this art. In this 
print, the British troops under Maj. Pitcairn are represented as 
firing on the Americans, a number of whom have fallen, with the 
blood streaming from their wounds. The representation though 
somewhat rude, had at that time a great effect in exciting and sus- 
taining the patriotism of the country. This print is believed to be 
the first regular Historical Engraving ever executed in America, and 
it is somewhat remarkable, that about three weeks previous to Mr. 
D’s death, the last day on which he was able to perform any engra- 
ving, he was engaged on a copy of this print, which after a lapse of 
fifty-seven years is republished in Mr. Barber’s useful little work, 
the History and Antiquities of New-Haven. 

There were three other historical prints executed by Mr. Doolittle 
in relation to the expedition to Lexington and Concord, -and it is 
not uninteresting to trace in this country, the progress of the fine 
arts of painting and engraving during half a century, from this hum- 
ble beginning, to the historical pictures of Col. Trumbull, four of 
which adorn the Capitol at Washington; the eight originals will 
soon be deposited in his native State. The art of engraving re- 
mained ina humble state in this country many years after Mr. Doo- 
little’s youthful essays, and he was becoming an old man at the 


* General Arnold was then a citizen of New-Haven and a large house which he 
erected there, is still in perfect order, 
t The drawing was by Earl. 


Miscellanies. 185 


time when the art began to attain high excellence among us. Still 
his work was very respectable, considering the circumstances of his 
self managed training; and-his maps and machinery, particularly, 
have done him credit. But it is superfluous to comment upon what 
may be seen in every volume of this Journal; a work which was not 
sufficiently patronized to afford, in every instance, the luxury of the 
most finished engraving; Mr. Doolittle was the American patriarch of 
the art; an amiable and worthy man-and a neighbor of the editor, who 
felt some satisfaction in cheering his old age, by even so small a mark 
of confidence, respect and kindness: for, the way of the world, too 
often, is, to desert an old and faithful servant, in the day when he most 
needs and merits protection. It is worthy of remark, that Mr. Doo- 
little’s last work for this Journal (as if it were ominous) was the tomb 
of Whitney, which he had not quite finished when he was called to 
Jay down his graver.* The rotascope of Prof. Johnson was execu- 
ted a few weeks before, and the map of Orange Co. was finished 
after he was arrested by the influenza which terminated his life. Mr. 
Doolittle was cheerful in his temper, and assured me, on his death 
bed, that he had long ago made up his views on the great subjects of 
a future world and felt his mind in peace in the prospect of death. 


19. Injury sustained by Dr. Hare from an accidental explosion 
of fulminating silver; with remarks on the dangers attending the 
use of that substance.—Many persons have sustained injuries, more 
or less severe, from fulminating silver, and much anxiety was felt for 
the safety of Dr. Hare, who met with a dangerous accident, of this 
kind, early in February. 

We learn from him that the quantity which exploded was such, 
as in its light feathery state, nearly filled an ounce bottle. It had 
been dried on a filter but, in three trials, failed to explode by 
percussion. By a subsequent exposure in the evaporating oven, it 
was rendered unusually explosive. Hence as Dr. Hare was in the 
act of pouring out a small portion, upon the face of a hammer, the 
whole exploded, without any obvious cause, unless as he suggests, 
it was a slight pressure, which might possibly have been created up- 
on a particle of the powder, between the neck of the bottle and the 
hammer. By the explosion, the bones of all the fingers of the right 
hand, except the little finger, were more or less broken; part of the 


* The last hand was put to Whitney’s tomb by Mr. J. W. Barber. 
Vol. XI.—No. I. 24 


186 MMiscellanies. 


flesh of the terminating joint of the thumb was torn off together with 
the nail, and the latter was found upon the laboratory floor; the cor- 
responding finger was much injured, and the palm bruised and lacer- 
ated. fie 

His faithful and experienced assistant, George Workman, was hold- 
ing the hammer at the moment of the explosion, and was conse- 
quently wounded in the face and eyes; into one of the latter, a spic- 
ula of glass was driven, which was not removed without skillful sur- 
gical aid; he recovered however, ina fortnight. A pupil was wounded 
slightly in the face, and Dr. Hare himself had a small fragment of 
glass removed from one of his eyes. Among his late and present 
colleagues, are some of the most skillful of surgeons, who, with his 
pupils, were immediately present to afford every necessary aid. It 
appears, that he had been accustomed, for six years, to pour from 
the same vial, such portions of fulminating silver as he needed for his 
experiments, and had never met with any accident. He had, in the 
present instance, prepared an unusual quantity with reference to 
some analytical experiments which he had proposed to perform by 
igniting the powder in a receiver of known capacity, by means of a 
wire galvanized in vacuo ; the quantity of gaseous matter was to be 
ascertained by a gage, and the kinds by accurate eudiometrical 
analysis. 

Happily, no tetanic symptoms followed, and although the patient 
suffered intensely, he has been mercifully spared to his family and 
friends and the world. Excepting some rigidity and tenderness in 
the renovated muscles, he is now recovered. 

x % % x “ % % 

I cannot dismiss this subject without suggesting some cautions to 
young experimenters: the most memorable part of my own expe- 
rience was purehased in July, 1811, at the price of much suffering, 
and imminent danger of the loss of both eyes. 'The particulars of 
the accident were detailed at the request of Prof. Griscom, and 
published by Dr. Bruce in his Mineralogical Journal: I have also 
mentioned them more briefly in a note to my Elements of Chemistry, 
Vol. I..p. 348. It may there be observed, that the fulminating sil- 
’ yer, in the act of forming, exploded by a slight pressure, whale stall 
beneath the acid and alcohol, and therefore wet, and less liable to ex- 
plode, as one would suppose, than in Dr. Hare’s case. I will on this 
occasion, cite some remarks from the work named above. 


JMiscellanies. 187 


**M. Descotils, the discoverer of this variety of fulminating silver, 
_ says (Ann. de Chim. Vol. LXII, p. 198, and Nicholson’s Journal, 
Vol. XVIII, p. 141,) that ‘a blow or long continued friction causes it 
to inflame, with a brisk detonation. Pressure alone, if it be not very 
powerful, has no effect upon it.’ I can account for this erroneous 
statement, so dangerous to young operators, and which has been ever 
since copied into some of the most respectable treatises, only by sup- 
posing that the powder might have contained a mixture of the nitrate, 
precipitated by the alcohol in consequence of its seizing the water of 
the solution, (which sometimes happens also in preparing, the fulmina- 
ting mercury,) or that the precipitate was not dry; .2t is quate certain, 
that the fulminating silver, when properly prepared and dry, will 
bear neither pressure nor friction, and very little even when wet.” 
“Tt is well known that careful drying greatly increases the sen- 
sibility of the fulminating powders, and their violence when exploded. 

My own practice has long been, never to keep either the fulmina- 
ting mercury or silver in a vial,* whose explosion, especially when 
held in the hand, must of course occasion injury. It is perfectly 
safe, to place the powder in small quantities, in little paste board ca- 
ses covered by a loose card; when moved, they should never be laid 
in the palm of the hand, but always taken up, by applying the thumb 
and finger to the edge of the card box; a few grains at a time may 
then be jarred out, upon a card for use, and in this manner no acci- 
dent will ever occur. But in pouring from a vial, the mere impetus 
of falling, may, by the weight alone, cause fulminating silver to ex- 
plode. I have always found, that when this powder is perfectly dry, 
it will rarely bear the weight of a common sized hammer, cau- 
tiously allowed to press upon it-by degrees, and without any blow; 
and, if sand be previously mixed with the powder, on the anvil, the 
hammer can scarcely touch the mixture ever so gently, without caus- 
ing a detonation. 

Too much caution cannot be used in the management of fulmina- 
ting silver, and no considerable quantity of it should be kept on 
hand, unless in small divided parcels, and in paper boxes as above 
described.— Ed. 


* IT was present in Dr. Woodhouse’s laboratory in Philadelphia, thirty years ago, « 
when a vial of fulminating mercury exploded, spontaneously, while standing on the 
table, and from no obvious cause unless it was the jarring, produced by the assem- 
bling of the class for the lecture. 


JMiscellanies. 


188 


SI\GS\EL|STE] 0G | 9S | GET! OZ1I98" 98°8z!89°08|_— | 66 | GETS | 68662) 16°62) 666%) 086'62| L6'St|6o OF |PL GE |eh'Ss [LI FF “vad ou 
LIT |6 |fFl }% | € |G TZ }92 62/9 0S| I—| SF | GOS | OF6'G6S| 12667] S68°6C| 62662] ZO'Iz| Z6L| 612) 9°96) FLT “99 
Olr lg 12 1 L | P | 2 | St [9s‘szigog'og| ce | 09 | LOE | SF8 6%) GZS Ge) 86L'6C| 9Z8'6E| LE'OF)| GSE) T2r| F'9G| 69s “AON 
O'o |g 'z1 19 |G | 11] 6 Iz9'6zlsr0s| 28 | FL | LES | €90'0E) 090°0E] 6F0' OE] FL0'0E| 26 TE] Sze] 9°GG | T'19}| ZO} ‘19qG0)90 
0/9 |9 ISL 149 |9 | GL| F 9G 6Z\sc 0s) &F | C8] Tag £90°06| G0'0§| 870 O&) SS0°0E] GL'E9] S19 S'F9 | GOL| 18S dag 
0l¢ |9 (02 19 | | OT | & {48'6zLE'0s| 19 | 06 | GOS | IST OS) GFI'OE| SELOE! OST'OS) GL'ZL| G69] ZL) SEL] TL9 qsnony 
Oj |G 6 2 | Iz 4h |69'6zlor'0g! 2G | SS} Sk9 | 6S0°0E| 6F0'0E| FSO 0S; 690'0S] G6'0L] 89] SIL] 682) g°¢9 ‘ANE 
0/9 \9 ISL |} | 9 | 91 | & Jes 6e\1r 0s] FE | C6] ETS | TOL OE) F600E a60r08| FOE 0&| 8°69} $99] L'69| SLL) S79 ‘aune 
O|z lo G1 }% | Lh | SL |S {te 6zier 6s) SE | 98} 96S | 9662) SE6'62; GIG'62, GE6'Gd Gs8'zg) TG; FSG] €99! OTE ‘ALTA 
|g jo FL |S | 2 | IL | F |tzé6zlzzos| Te [F19| 9°99 | FS88'9e ZL8'62! T98'6¢| 7L8'6Z) G8 OF LTP | OSE! SES!) VIF “(dy 
zlolz or le |z | et! s lereziosogi?ez | 09 | 99% | 6¥6'6z| Z26'6z| 916'6z| SS6'6z| cs'6e] e'ze| Gorl worl Ste} ‘q8IRK 
0 lg |g 22 1% | | G | ST joeszisoog| 8 | SF] FI'S | OL0 OE) £2662] 0F6'6S) L96'6z] 09'Gz| 9°SZ| 8°9Z| OTE] O'1Z ‘qo.F 
FIT |9 (08_ 9 | & | ¥%_| 8ST |60'6z\zE 08) @—| $9 ]_ F9'9_ | 9F8'6e) 128'6C) L6L°6C! LeS'GE Oe 'Fe|_F'ee | Gos |_8'8e |_9°0e ‘Arenue p 
aA = O]'S Paw} a ‘s|aa‘s| aN] cure | xia} uyur| xed] -soyouy |-12 OT) 98 “S] TP % “yo g |tasti-g uvaw|ypo QLl yas ‘S| yIo zlasit's sy uony 
g a a = [RAB “8/29 ABN] -rojouoieg| “way, “1OjUM ‘JayaMOuRg paepurys MOUIIYT SULIIJSIOAI-JI9SS.XIS| “TEST 
Eli | ‘sAvp ul pojou jeanssoad onaydsouyy ei Tats “payeys 

‘atoydsowyy] spur Surpreaarg x ‘dui9} Jo soma.yxq pua wey SINOY IY} JL SYJUOU [e.ADAVS JY} 10} sUOTVeAIOSqQ Jo ULow [RONeWYWYV 


Miscellanies. 189 


21. Dr. Hare’s new process for obtaining silicon and boron.—A 
new and highly eligible process, for the evolution of silicon, was em- 
ployed by Dr. Hare and exhibited to his class last winter. Potassium 
was included in a bell glass filled with fluosilicic acid gas. ‘The po- 
tassium was then ignited by galvanism, and an active combustion en-— 
sued. This was rendered peculiar by a deep red light, and copious 
brown fumes which were condensed or aggregated into chocolate 
colored flocks resembling snow in consistency, and which fell in like 
manner and coated the interior surface of the bell. 

Dr. Hare intended to subject fluoboric acid gas to the same ordeal, 
but was soon after disabled, for a time, by an injury affecting his right 
hand; see p. 185 of this No. 

Dr. Hare also succeeded in decomposing boracic acid by a new 
method of heating it with potassium. In our next number we hope 
to give an engraving of Dr. Hare’s apparatus with an explanation, 
and a detail of his experiments. ~ 


22. Greenstone Dyke.—Dr. A. Clapp, of New Albany, Indiana, 
while travelling last spring, discovered, in the town of Montgomery, 
in Vermont, a greenstone trap dyke of three feet in width, rising 
through talcose slate. It was in the falls of a stream called South 
Brook, where’ it descends from the hills. 


23. Vol. IX of the Encyctopmp1a Americana.—This volume 
contains in natural history and physics, the articles Ornithology, Or- 
ganic Remains, Optics, Nitrogen, Oxygen and Geology of North 
America, all of which appear to correspond, in the faithful manner in 
which they are prepared, with the related subjects in former volumes. 


24. Whirlwind storms.—Capt. James Riley, a veteran navigator, 
well known by his travels in Africa, has addressed an interesting let- 
ter to Mr. William C. Redfield, of New York, dated on the Atlantic, 
March, 1832; in which he fully confirms, from his own experience, 
the view presented by Mr. Redfield of the nature of violent wind 
storms. (See Vol. XX, p. 17 of this Journal.) Capt. Riley deduces 
from his experience certain important rules for the management of 
ships during those violent gales. See New York Journal of Com- 
merce for March 31, 1832. 


25. A report of observations on the.Solar Eclipse of Feb. 12, 
1831.—A report on this subject by Messrs. A. D. Bache, Jos. Rob- 


190 Miscellanies. 


erts, Jr. and Isaiah Lukens will appear in Vol. IV of the Philosoph- 
ical Transactions of Philadelphia. The report will contain 
1. Observations made by Jos. Roberts, Jr. at the Friends’ observ- 
atory in Philadelphia. 


2. «6 fe Sears C. Walker, at a place 1433 feet 
west of the above named observatory. 
33 as es John Gummere, Burlington, N. J. 
4. ce “Prof. Renwick, Columbia College, N. 
Morley) 
5. Ae i Robert Treat Paine, Cape Malabar light 


house, Lat. 41° 32/ 58.3” N., Long. 
70° 01 20 W. 
6. af 4 F. R. Hassler, city of Washington. 
Ts 2 es Prof. R. M. Patterson, Univ. Virginia. 
8. Meteorological observations by Prof. A. D. Bache, Univ. Penn. 
We forbear to quote, from a report which is as yet unpublished. 


26. Chloro-chromic acid.—Dr. Torrey has repeatedly prepared 
this compound, called by Dumas, per-chloride of chromium. Dr. 
Thomson in his original memoir on chromium, states that the acid 
will not inflame phosphorus, while Dumas asserts the contrary. In 
Dr. Torrey’s experiments explosion generally followed the contact 
of the two substances. ‘This information being communicated to 
Dr. Thomson, it induced him to repeat his experiments with this en- 
ergetic compound. It appears (see his New System, Vol. I, p. 339,) 
that the phosphorus is not affected when it is made perfectly dry, and 
that it may even be fused under the liquid acid in this state. Mr. 
George Chilton and his son, assisted by Dr. Ellet of New York, as 
well as Dr. Torrey, have verified all Dr. Thomson’s assertions. ‘The 
best way which they found of getting perfectly dry phosphorus, was 
to shave off the outside of a stick, so as to remove the whole of the 
white crust which usually forms on this substance in water. The 
salt employed in making the acid should pe fused so as to render it. 
perfectly anhydrous. 


27. Effect of Elasticity.—Having had occasion to illustrate, by the 
annexed figure, an old but very curious experiment, I have thought 
it might not be uninteresting to such of the younger readers of this 
Journal, as have not been made acquainted with it, and I have there- 
fore inserted the following notice. 

Place a wine glass upon the edge of a table and another wine glass 
upon the edge of another table, at the distance of three or four feet; 


JMiseellanies. 191 


a pine stick, of one half or three fourths of an inch square, being 
then laid across the two glasses, so that its two ends may rest upon 
the two contiguous edges of the glasses, thus; 


Aa: 


ine 
it 
ils 
htt 


strike the stick at right angles, in the middle, with a heavy cane and 
it will break in two, without breaking the glasses. The two pieces 
of the broken stick fly up to the ceiling, while the glasses remain, 
not only uninjured, but are not even moved from their places. I 
have often, successfully, repeated this curious experiment; when, 
however, the glasses are thin and the stick is too strong, they will 
break, and they will break in any event, if the stick does not; for it 
is obvious that their safety depends upon their being strong enough 
to resist the first impulse of the blow, and that the pressure upon 
them is relieved, the moment the stick begins to yield in the middle, 
and that it is entirely removed, when it breaks and the ends fly up- 
wards. 


FOREIGN. 


28. East Indian Ferns.—Descriptions and figures of a select 
number of new or imperfectly known East Indian ferns, compiled 
chiefly from the collections of the honorable the East India Compa- 
ny, made by Dr. Wallich in various parts of the Company’s posses- 
sions, and by Dr. Wight in the peninsula of India, (with the assist- 
ance of the MSS. of these botanists ;) by William Jackson Hooker, 
LL.D. F.R. A. & L.S., and Regius Professor of Botany in the 
University of Glasgow, and R. K. Greville, LL. D., F.R. & 
A.S.E., & F.L.8. Only a limited number of copies will be pub- 
lished. It will be in two large folio volumes, each containing one 
hundred colored plates, with dissections, and Latin descriptions, and 
remarks in English. 

To appear in eight parts,—price two guineas for each part, con- 
taining twenty five plates with the appropriate letter press. 

John Hunneman, Esq., No. 9 Queen street, London, receives the 
names of foreiga subscribers. 


192 Miscellanies. 


Notices Translated and Extracted by Prof. Griscom. 
CHEMICAL PHILOSOPHY. 


1. On the grease of Wines.—White wine is subject to an altera- 
tion which is designated in Switzerland and other countries, by the 
terms greasy, and ropy, ‘(tourner au gras, graisser, filer,) a change 
which takes place after the vinous fermentation has apparently ceas- 
ed, and the wine has been bottled or closely confined in casks. ‘The 
wines of Champagne, of Switzerland, and most thin and light wines 
are very subject to it, especially when the vintage has been wet. 
The cause of this malady resides ina mucilaginous principle which 
is developed in light wines; it pervades the whole mass, and puts 
on a reticulated appearance; a similar change is observable in beer, 
and in syrups made of sugar of an inferior quality. 

Various methods have been pursued for remedying this defect. 
Common salt is added to the wine, a practice which was adopted, it 
is said, by the Romans, in consequence of an accidental discovery 
of an amateur in wines. Having opened an amphora of wine, and 
being struck with its excellence, he demanded of his slave what he 
had put into it. ‘The latter, mistaking his master’s meaning, fell on 
his knees, and confessed that he had drank a little of the = and 
had filled up the vessel with sea water. 

After two or three months, it is impossible for the most delicate 
palate to distinguish the taste of salt, and it is admitted that such an 
addition improves the taste of the wine; but that it prevents the 
grease, is a point much more doubtful. 

Another remedy is the addition of Brandy or Alcohol. But the 
most efficacious means of all is a frequent racking off, or decantation. 
Wine must never be allowed to whiten, that is, to admit the rising of 
a milky substance which destroys its transparency. When this dis- 
ease has been contracted, it may often be removed by clarification 
with fish glue, but this remedy has two inconveniences,—it does not 
always succeed, and when it does it diminishes the strength of the 
wine. ‘This deterioration arises, either from the glue, or perhaps 
from the disease itself, which has occasioned the operation. 

Another method of clarifying wines and removing the grease, con- 
sists in filtering them through shavings of hazel. For small quanti- 
ties this method is very good. 


Miscellanies. 193 


When the sale of wine is not pressing, and care is taken to keep 
the vases which contain them full, and they are allowed to undergo 
a slow and insensible fermentation and are exposed to the change 
of temperature which the season brings round, this disease spontane- 
ously disappears. It is rare that greased wines thus treated, are not 
cured in passing through the cold of one winter. 

The attention of chemists has been much engaged with the na- 
ture of this quality in wine. M. Frangois, of Chalons sur Marne as- 
cribes it to a substance which is found also in the gluten of wheat 
flour, and which M. 'Taddei an Italian chemist, discovered and na- 
med Gliadine. It is the portion which is soluble in aleohol,—the 
insoluble portion he called Zimome. If an alcoholic solution of 
gliadine be added to clear wine, it becomes milky and assumes, ac- 
cording to M. Francois, the aspect of greased wine. Berzelius, how- 
ever, does not believe in the Gliadine of Taddei. He considers it 
to be gelatine and the zimome to be albumen, both of which have 
been long known to existingluten. ‘The same chemist has proved 
that vegetable and animal gelatine are identical in the properties of 
uniting with tannin and forming an insoluble precipitate. However 
this may be, Mr. F. has been induced to regard tannin as a remedy 
for the grease of wine. 

He accordingly makes an observation which seems to have esca- 
ped all those who had previously examined the subject, that red wines 
are never subject to the grease. Now the difference between red and 
white wines is that the red always ferments in presence of the husk 
and seeds of the grape, substances which contain tannin in abun- 
dance, while white wine remains in contact with the husk but a very 
short time. 

It is also a fact that light wines made of grapes deprived of their 
seeds are more subject to this disease than others. Hence it is prob- 
able that the presence of tannin may by precipitating the gelatine, 
prevent the phenomena of the grease. 

The following are M. Francois’s directions. By adding tannin 
to wine a month or six weeks prior to bottling, it may be preserv- 
ed from the grease; and this substance being one of those which 
exists in wine, it may be added without fear, for it communicates no 
unnatural odor or taste. ‘Twenty grains of tannin to a bottle of wine, 
or three and a half ounces to a hundred bottles previously well de- 
canted from all sediment, is the proper dose, although im frequent 


Vou.— XXII. No 1. a5 


194 — Miscellanies. 


cases this dose must be repeated. If any sediment remain in the 
wine, a much larger dose of tannin becomes necessary. 

Mr. F. affirms that this malady in wine, when once destroyed, 
never returns. ; 

As the tannin of chemists is an expensive article, obtained from 
the gall nut by sulphuric acid, or by potash, it is probable that a substi- 
tute may be found, in some of the astringent barks or even in - 
seeds of the grape. 


2. Obesityn—The celebrated fat liver pies of Strasbiirgh, are 
made of the livers of geese fattened with great attention. ‘The ani- 
mal is shut up in a cage, but little larger than its body, and is taken 
out but twice a day, and then to be fed with about a quart of erude 
peas. They are introduced with a finger into the pharynx of the an- 
imal, which is thus made to swallow this enormous quantity of nour- 
ishment, and is then immediately shut up in its cage. — 

The immediate result of this kind of life isa remarkable obesity, 
and an enormous developement of the liver, which without any no- 
table change of structure acquired a triple or quadruple enlarge- 
ment of volume. ' 

Bibulous paper brought into close contact with this fat liver im- 
mediately absorbs an oily matter much like melted fat. These liv- 
ers sometimes weigh eight or ten ounces, and sell from three to five 
francs. ‘The fattening of geese in this manner is a good speculation, 
for every part of the animal possesses an intrinsic value ;—the fat on 
many occasions is a substitute for butter, and the flesh is served at 
table, and although somewhat tough is not the less nutritious; the 
feathers are much sought after, the quills serve for writing, and even 
the excrements sell at a high price, as one of the richest of ma- 
nures. 


3. Premiums for chemical and medical discoveries—The French 
Academy of Sciences on the 13th of June last, decided that the 
medical and surgical prizes founded by M. de Montyon, should, for the 
present term, be thus distributed; six thousand francs to M. Courtois 
for the discovery of iodine; four thousand francs to M. Coindet, 
for having applied this substance to the cure of goitre and indicated 
its use in scrofula; six thousand francs to M. Lugol for having dem- 
onstrated the proper methods to be pursued in the employment of it, 
and for having obtained the most happy results; two thousand francs 


MMiscellanies. 195 


to M. Sertiirner for having ascertained the alkaline nature of mor- 
phine, andthus opened the way to important medical discoveries.— 
Annales de Chim. Aout, 1831. 


4. Process for hastening acetic fermentation and for preparing on 
a large scale, and in an economical manner, strong vinegar in forty 
eight hours, by M. Dingler. 

The method recommended by this author consists 

1. In providing suitable rooms or buildings which can be easily 
kept at the requisite temperature by stoves, hot air flues or other 
modes of heating, and by which, during the process of rectification 
they should be maintained at the temperature of about 100° F. 
Two or more thermometers should be suspended in the room by 
which the heat can be regulated. 

2. In placing in each of these rooms a convenient number of casks, 
containing about one hundred and thirty gallons each. ‘These casks 
must stand erect on blocks of wood which will raise them from one 
and a half totwo feet from the floor. ‘The casks may be constructed 
with open tops, but a cover must be made of inch plank which will 
fit accurately into the top and rest upon a hoop or ledge nailed on 
the inside for a support. ‘This cover is for the purpose of prevent- 
ing evaporation. A hole of about three eighths of an inch wide must 
be made in the bung of the cask for the admission of the air which 
is to oxygenize the materials of the vinegar. 

3. In procuring a quantity of wood shavings sufficient to fill the 
casks when pressed pretty closely together, without bemg trodden 
however into a very compact mass. The wood of the red beech 
is found to furnish shavings of the best quality for this purpose. To 
prepare the shavings, the wood should be cut into logs two feet in 
length, split into suitable pieces, and boiled during two hours in 
water in which it should be allowed to remain twenty four hours. 
Thus soaked, the wood is, when dry, more easily planed into shavings, 
which should be about the twentieth of an inch in thickness. If it 
would be more convenient, the operation of boiling may be performed 
on the shavings themselves in lieu of the wood. 

4. In preparing the liquor, of whatever kind, which is to be con- 
verted into vinegar, in the usual manner, for the process of acidifica- 
tion, viz. by mixing it with a proper ferment, if needful, and placing 
it in a condition favorable to the commencement of the acetic fer- 
mentation. 


196 JMiscellanies. 


5. In acidifying the shavings, after they are pressed into the casks, 
by sprinkling upon them, in each cask, about three gallons of good 
vinegar. At the end of twelve hours, the temperature of the room 
having been properly kept up, this liquid may be drawn off from the 
bottom through an opening previously closed by a cork, and again 
sprinkled upon the shavings. ‘This should be repeated four times in 
forty eight hours, when the shavings will have absorbed nearly all 
the vinegar. If this vinegar was not sufficiently strong, a liquid will 
remain at the bottom which has very little taste, in which case the 
process should be repeated with fresh vinegar. As the shavings ab- 
sorb a great deal of vinegar, it is probable that the first operations 
will not produce a strong acid, but this inconvenience will not long 
be felt. 

The prepared shavings may serve without alteration during three 
years without being removed from the casks, provided the liquids 
which are poured upon them are clear and pure; but if they contain 
foreign matters, which become deposited upon the shavings, the latter 
must be taken out from time to time, put into a tub with water and 
well washed by agitation with a broom. 

6 and lastly. In hastening the acidification of the fermenting 
liquid, by pouring it from a watering pot upon the shavings, in quan- 
tities of four or five gallons at a time (into each cask) the tempera- 
ture of the room being upwards of 100° F. and that of the liquid 
about 75° and thus exposing it over a very extensive surface to the 
oxygenizing power of the air. As soon as the fluid is sprinkled on 
the shavings the cover must be carefully replaced. About twelve 
hours afterward the liquid should be drawn off from the bottom, and 
again sprinkled over the shavings. At the commencement of the 
third twelve hours, the shavings may receive a fresh portion of about 
three quarts of liquid, and then the fluid at the bottom may be again 
drawn off and sprinkled upon them. ‘This process may be once more 
repeated at the end of the same time, when being again drawn off, 
namely, after forty eight hours, it will in general be found to have 
been converted into good vinegar. 

In preparing vinegar from grain, the author recommends the fol- 
lowing mode. After the usual vinous fermentation, the greater por- 
tion of the clear fluid should be drawn off, and the remainder with 
the sediment, subjected to distillation. Four or five gallons of the 
first liquor must be sprinkled on the shavings and then one and a half 
gallons of the second. 'The process to be renewed every twelve 


Miscellanies. 197 


hours, when in the course of two days the vinegar will be formed, and 
similar to that from wine. 

Clarification.—When vinegar is prepared from alcoholic liquors, 
it is sufficiently clear to be sent immediately to market, but when 
liquids are employed that are not free from foreign matters, the vine- 
gar must be clarified. 

For this purpose it is put into casks placed on blocks in a cellar, 
or other suitable part of the premises, which casks must be filled 
with shavings but without being pressed, and no opening is to be left 
inthe bung. ‘The casks being then filled with the vinegar, it will de- 
posit its impurities on the shavings, and will even by this process ac- 
quire strength. When the shavings have become too foul to answer 
the desired purpose, they must be taken out and washed. The vin- 
egar is also thus deprived of its color. If this is deemed of any 
consequence, color can easily be communicated by a little burnt su- 
gar or a few myrtle berries.— Bull. d’encouragement, Aout, 1831. 


5. Nutritious quality of Gelatine.—In a letter written by M. 
Roulin, and read to the French Academy on the 11th of July, the 
following fact is stated ; in an excursion made by the Author in 1825, 
into the forests which clothe the western declivity of Quindiu (Col- 
umbia,) the journey which ordinarily occupied but two days, but 
which was prolonged to fourteen, completely exhausted the proven- 
der of the company, and after a fruitless search for some alimentary 
substance, one of the guides took it into his head to try to eat his san- 
dals which were made of untanned leather, and very soft from the 
wetness of the woods. He roasted one of them and began to gnaw 
it. M. Roulin and three persons who accompanied him followed 
his example. Having each eaten one third of a sole, which cost 
them not less than two hours mastication, they felt themselves sur- 
prisingly restored and resumed their route. ‘They did not however 
abandon the heart of the palm tree which they had before used, but 
they found this food recruited their strength far less than a bit of 
roast leather. ‘They arrived on the fourteenth day, after having eaten 
five pair of sandals, and a buck skin apron.—Rev. Ency. Jul. 1831. 


CHEMICAL SCIENCE. 


1. Robiquet ona new metallic Dye.—(Jour. de Pharm.)—A stuff 
dyed of a clear bluish grey color was taken to M. Robiquet as able to 
stand the action of every agent without change of tint, a character which 


198 Miscellantes. 


M. Robiquet ascertained it to deserve. Concluding that it was metallic, 
it was also concluded that it must be chloride of silver, from its color 
and characters; on boiling the cloth in ammonia however no silver or 
chloride of silver was dissolved—the color indeed, became bright- 
er. On incinerating the substance, and digesting the ashes in am- 
monia, and then in nitric acid, both solvents dissolved silver, the 
firsthaving taken up muriate of silver, and the latter having dissolved 
the metal. As if it was not likely that any chloride would be de- 
composed and brought into the metallic state by incineration, it was 
supposed that the silver had been applied at first as a nitrate, and 
then converted into a chloride; the parts which had penetrated 
deepest having escaped the converting action. Imitations of the dye 
were therefore made by dipping the cloth first into a solution of ni- 
trate of silver, then drying it, immersing it in a solution of a muriate 
or chloride of lime and immediately upon withdrawing it, exposing 
it to light: the color was at once developed, and the success was 
perfect. By using different strengths of solution of silver, different 
tints were obtained. 

Upon trying the application in a large way, a curious cause of 
failure occurred. Unless the whole. be exposed to the light at once, 
the color is not uniform; the parts exposed at different times are 
dissimilar, and hence cloudiness is produced. This may be obvi- 
ated in some situations, but not in others where space is limited. 
In printed goods it is supposed that some good application of the 
idea may be made.—Jour. of Roy. Inst. No. 3. 


2. Purple Precipitate of Silver, Gold, §-c.—(Poggendorf’s Annals.) 
—Fischer has shewn that proto-salt of tin yields, with solutions of 
silver, platina, palladium, and tellurium, precipitates similar to those 
produced with solution of gold. Frick has shewn that silver precip- 
itate may be prepared of great purity, by using a very pure proto- 
nitrate of tin, and after adding it to the solution of silver, adding also 
dilute sulphuric acid. ‘The addition is supposed to prevent the fur- 
ther oxidation of the tin by the free nitric acid, and so also the pre- 
cipitate. ‘The proto-nitrate of tin is to be prepared by decomposing 
the proto-muriate by nitrate of lead. In the purple precipitate of 
silver, the combustion is as strong as in Cassius’s purple ; the sub- 
stance is not decomposed either by muriatic acid or ammonia. In 
preparing the purple precipitate of Cassius, Fischer who first pomted 
out the superiority of the proto-nitrate of tin in the above experi- 


JWMiscellanies. 199 


ment to the other salts of that metal, also uses the same solution. 
It very much surpasses the proto-muriate, and is always successful, 
whether used in a weak or concentrated state. When proto-nitrate 
of mercury is poured into a solution of gold, according to Fischer, 
a blue grey precipitate is obtained quite in analogy with the purple 
of Cassius. It is composed of deutoxide of mercury and of the sub- 
oxide of gold, and is not decomposed by muriatic acid; that sub- 
stance only dissolves a little mercury, and makes the color of the 
remaining precipitate pass to a clear grey-white.—Idem. 


3. On the Manufacture of Sulphuric Ether.—(C. Wittstock.) 
The remark of MM. Fourcroy and Vauquelin that the sulphuric. 
acid employed in the fabrication of ether undergoes very little 
change, led to the conclusion that ether would be formed as long as 
there was a fresh supply of alcohol to the acid. This supposition 
was confirmed by the experiments of M. Gay Lussac ; and since 
then, the fabrication of ether has been considerably improved by 
MM. Boullay, Geiser and others. I have for some time employed the 
following method; and as I am disposed to consider it more simple 
and less expensive than any other, a short description of it may 
perhaps be acceptable to the reader. 

A mixture of nine parts of sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84—1.85) and_ 
five parts of alcohol (sp. gr. 0.835) are put into a green glass retort 
of one foot in diameter, with a glass tube inserted at its upper part. 
This tube is 4 lines in diameter, and bent at a right angle; the 
shorter arm, which, at its extremity, is only one line in diameter, is 
plunged one inch deep in the mixture; the longer arm, of about 
three or four feet of length, with a cock near its further end, leads 
into a bottle with alcohol. ‘The receiver consists of a refrigerator, 
viz: a wooden tube, filled with water, by which the distilled ether 
is kept cool, and two copper vessels, the one within the other, so that 
there is a distance of about 2 inches between their sides. ‘The neck 
of the retort leads into the intermediate space between the two cop- 
per vessels, which is thus filled with the distilled liquid, and from 
which the liquid may flow off by any other tube. The apparatus is 
used in the following manner :—When the mixture is boiling, the 
cock of the glass tube is opened and the supply thus kept up so 
that the quantity of liquid in the retort remains always the same ; 
this is continued until eight times the original quantity of alcohol has 
been used, which will be the case in about 20 hours, if the original 


200 Miscellantes. 


mixture consists of 25lbs. of sulphuric acid and 14lbs. of alcohol. 
The first rectification of ether thus obtained yields about its third of 
ether of .725 sp. gr. which may of course be considerably increased 
by repeated rectifications, besides about 20 to 25 per cent of alcohol 
are regained, which may be subsequently used again, particularly 
for the supply of alcohol to the mixture. Of 124lbs. of alcohol of 
0.835 sp. gr. 22lbs. were regained ; the quantity of pure ether of 
0.720 sp. gr. at 14°R. amounted to 59|bs., and of sulphuric acid 25lbs. 
were used. The expenses of fuel, apparatus, attendance, &c. doesnot 
raise the price of the ether to more than twice that of its weight of 
alcohol.—Jdem. 


MECHANICAL PHILOSOPHY. 


1. Remarks on the floating ice met with in remarkably low lati- 
tudes in the South Seas; by Capt. James Horsburgh, F.R.S., Hy- 
drographer to the East India Company.—The author remarks that it 
is rare to meet with floating ice near the Cape of Good Hope and the 
coast of Africa. ‘The journals of the East India ships make no men- 
tion of ice during the last century, although many of these vessels 
pursue a course which carries them to the Lat. of 40°, 41°, and 42° S. 

The author then recites the following instances of the occurrence 
of southern ice. 

1828, April 7. LZ’ Harmonica, a French ship, in Lat. 35° 50’ S. 
Long. 18° 5’ E. of Greenwich, encountered various masses of floating 
ice, some of which appeared a hundred feet high. ‘The Spanish ship 
Constancia, on the route from Manilla to Cadiz, on the same day, 
met with several floating islands of ice in Lat. 35° 56’ S., Long. 16° 
59’ E. of Greenwich. 

1828, April 28. The brig Eliza, of Antwerp, in returning from 
Batavia, in Lat. 35° 31’ S., Long. 189 17’ E. Saw ice which had 
the appearance of steeples two hundred and fifty or three hundred 
feet high, and passed within three fourths of a mile of it. The sea 
broke with such fury against it, that they would have supposed it 
lodged against a hidden reef, had not the line proved the absence of 
soundings. 

The East India ship Farquharson, April 20, 1829, met with a 
great mountain of ice in Lat. 39° 13’ S., Long. 48° 40’ E. The 
dimensions of this floating mass were about two miles in circumference 
and one hundred and fifty feet above the level of the sea. 


Miscellanies. 201 


Anterior to these instances in 1828 and 1829, it does not appear 
that ice was ever seen north of 42° or 43° of Lat. in the Southern 
Ocean. In 1789, the transport ship Guardian, was near striking 
against a mountain of ice in 44° 10’ S. Lon. 44° 35/ E. 

In the southern hemisphere, the ice most distant from the pole, has 
been met wiih in the month of April. It might then be supposed 
that in the corresponding month of October, in the northern hemis- 
phere, ice would be found at the greatest distance from the Arctic 
pole. It appears, however, that it is in the same month of April, or 
in May that ice is more frequently met with in low latitudes in the 
northern seas. Several instances of this are mentioned by the au- 
thor, and the fact appears to be well established. 

The existence of a great extent of land near the antarctic circle 
would seem to be necessary to account for the agglomeration of large 
masses of southern ice. But as we know of no land in a situation 
to produce ice, which, by wind and waves setting towards the N. and 
N. E., could drive masses of ice into the positions in which those of 
1828 and 1829 were found, their occurrence must be attributed to 
some unknown cause, such as an earthquake, or a volcanic eruption 
the effect of which might be to displace large masses near the south- 
ern pole, and thus to produce a phenomenon before unobserved. 
But even in such a case, the anomaly of its occurence in the month of 
April, at the same time that the northern ice reaches the lowest lati- 
tude, north, would indicate the existence of simultaneous currents, 
setting from each pole towards the equator, instead of their happen- 
ing at periods corresponding to the seasons in each hemisphere,— 
Bib. Univ. Juin, 1831. 


2. Red Beets—(Betterave Champetre,) furnish froma given sur- 
face of ground, a greater quantity of nutriment for horses and cattle, 
than any other kind of forage. Wherever its cultivation is under- 
stood, it has the preference over all other roots. It succeeds in al- 
most all soils, is but little affected by the vicissitude of seasons, does 
not much fear drought; and prepares the ground very well for a 
succeeding crop. 

Throughout Belgium and Germany, the leaves are from time to 
time stripped off and given to cattle, which eat them with avidity, and 
easily fatten upon them. Fowls also are fed upon them; they are 
first hashed up and mixed with bran. Pigs eat them with a good 
relish. Milch cows when fed upon them, fatten at the expense of 

Vou. XXH.—No. 1. 26 


202 Miscellanies. 


their milk. The leaves are equally valuable in the fattening of cat- 
tle and of sheep. ‘ 

Beets should be gathered when the weather is dry, and put away 
in a dry state, and when prepared for cattle, they must be cut up fine 
with some suitable instrument, and may be given either alone or 
mixed with cut straw or hay. 

They are equally fit for horses, with the precaution of adding a 
variety of cut straw and hay well mixed together. This food will 
preserve them strong and vigorous, as is well ascertained in Germa- 
ny, where beets are much cultivated for this purpose. 

For the fattening of a Bullock forty or fifty lbs. of beets per day, 
mixed with five or six lbs. of dry fodder will accomplish the object 
in the space of four months. Care must be taken to give it in three 
separations, since by feeding often and in small quantities at a time, 
the same amount of nutriment goes farther. 

Finally, by facilitating the means of stable fattening, throughout 
the year, beets furnish a very important addition to this means s of 
augmenting the mass of valuable manure. 

They may serve also, on occasion, for the food of men ;—they 
are less subject to the vicissitudes of seasons than turnips, and their 
leaves supply, for several months, an excellent food for cattle. The 
root may be easily preserved during eight months of the year, 
they give to milk an excellent taste and quality, cattle eat them with 
avidity, and are never tired of them. 'Theculture of no forage root 
can compare with that of the beet in the number of advantages which 
the industrious cultivator may derive from them. We cannot too 
strongly recommend the introduction of them into places where they 
are not already in vogue.—Idem. 


3. Feeding of cattle.—It is stated by M. Dubuc, President of the 
Agricultural Society of Rouen, that three measures of oats, pounded 
or broken up (concassées) and moistened, are equivalent, as aliment, 
to four measures given in the grain. 

It is observed, also, that four parts of different kinds of forage, 
coarsely chopped, and deprived of dust, will go as far as five parts 
of the same forage given entire and separately. 

There existsin Paris an establishment where mixtures of food are ~ 
prepared, on this principle, for horses; it is that of M. Payen. 
The kinds most generally mixed are clover, and lucerne. They 
are then cut up, so that the horses are obliged to chew and masti- 
cate them in the most perfect manner. 


Miscellanies. 203 


The mixture of vegetables which is considered as the most suita- 
ble for draught horses, is composed of equal parts of cut straw, clo- 
ver, and common hay. Barley and oats coarsely ground (concas- 
sées) and mixed, answer a better purpose than when eaten sepa- 
rately. . 

M. Dubuc visited this establishment, and found that the horses 
which worked the machinery, are fed in this manner, and that they 
look well and are vigorous, though kept at work ten or twelve hours 
aday. He cites also the teams of M. Sévin, mail contractor at Or- 
leans, whose horses were fed on cut straw, mixed with one-fifth of 
clover and lucerne, and sometimes a little hay. They were fat, 
strong, and substantial. ‘They give them also, Barley or oats crush- 
ed (concassées) and moistened. Care must be taken to place this 
food in deep mangers, so that it may not be wasted. Oats are fre- 
quently mixed with the last portions given them, prior to their being 
harnessed. — 

M. Dubuc was assured by both these proprietors, that there was a 
saving of one fifth at least, by this method, and that besides the hor- 
ses were in better condition, and endured more labor than those fed 
on common unprepared materials. 

The Omnibus establishments of Paris, which employ five or six 
hundred horses, have just adopted this-improved food.—Idem. 


STATISTICS. 


1. Academy of St. Petersburgh.—The sixth series of the me- 
moirs of this Academy commences at the centenary celebration of 
this learned body held in 1826. Up to this date, the complete col- 
lection of its volumes comprehends five series, each of which is 
marked by a change of title. From the foundation of the Academy 
in 1726 to 1803, the Latin language was the medium of communi- 
cation. ‘The first series, called Commentaries (commentarii) extend- 
ed from 1726 to 1747, that is, from the inauguration of the Acade- 
my by the empress Catharine I, until the empress Elizabeth effected 
some new regulations. This series is in fourteen volumes. From 
1747 to 1776 there are twenty one volumes of Vovz Commentarit. 
The celebration of the semi-secular jubilee established a new epoch, 
from which the publications are called Acta. ‘Twelve volumes of 
these bring the labors of the academy to the year 1783, a memora- 
ble year, in which the academy was placed under the direction of the 
princess Daschkoff, for in Russia there is no salic law even in the 


204 Miscellanies. 


government of letters and science. Under the new directeur (such 

was the title given to this lady by the Imperial Ukase which invested 

her with the direction of the academy) fifteen volumes of Nova Acta 

terminate the publications in Latin. ‘The year 1803 was an impor- 

tant period to the Academy; the emperor Alexander gave it new 

laws, and the French language was substituted for the Latin. But 
the period was unfavorable to academic labors, so that from 1803 to 

1826 but eleven volumes appeared, forming the fifth series, under 

the title of Memoires. Lastly, a mode of publication much more. 
useful than that of entire volumes, viz. that of parts or livraisons, 

has been adopted, and which it is to be hoped will be followed by all 
learned bodies. —Rev. Encyc. Mout, 1831. 


2. Astronomical memoranda.—The new observatory of Geneva 
has just been finished, and the mstruments are soon to be placed in 
it. The transit instrument and the equatorial of Mr. Gambay are 
immediately expected, the pillars being ready for their reception. 
A detailed account of this new establishment is to be published in 
the Bibliotheque Universelle. 


MM. Troughton and Simms are now engaged in constructing a 
grand equatorial, with an achromatic telescope of eleven inches aper- 
ture and eighteen feet focal distance, which Sir James South has 
obtained of M. Cauchoix.. The axis of this instrument presents no 
inconsiderable difficulty on account of the deflection which may be 
apprehended from such dimensions. Mr. South has erected in his 
observatory at Kensington, a turret for the accommodation of this 
instrument under the direction of Mr. Brunel, the younger. ‘The 
cupola is made of thin cedar boards, covered with copper; and not- 
withstanding its great dimensions, a weight of sixteen pounds will 
put it in motion, and a weight of twelve pounds will keep it moving. 


M. Respold, fils, has just finished at Hamburgh a large transit in- 
strument for the observatory of Edinburgh. It has been mounted 
and verified in the observatory at Hamburgh by Mr. Rumker, who 
is now the director of that observatory, having renounced the inten- 
tion of returning to New South Wales. Mr. Dunlop has been ap- 
pointed director of the observatory of Paramatta. 


The celebrated astronomer Bessel was obliged to leave his obser- 
vatory at Kénigsberg in the month of August last on account of 
the cholera morbus ;—a hospital having been established on one side 
of the observatory and a cemetery for the victims of the disease on 
the other.— Bib. Univ. Oct. 1831. 


Acknowledgments to Friends and Correspondents, 
DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN. 


Received.—Proceedings of the first annual meeting of the New 
York State Lyceum, held at Utica, August, 1831. 

Rev. President DeLancey’s address before the University of 
Penn. at the opening of the session of 1830—31. 

Scientific tracts for schools, lyceums, and families, by Josiah Hol- 
brook and others, 1829—30. 

Col. R. Somer’s Appeal on the subject of the Chenango Ca- 
nal, 1830. 

Academic Pioneer, Vol. I. No. 1, Cincinnati, 1831. 

Report of Wm. M. Cushman, Engineer, upon a rail road between 
Albany and Schenectady, August, 1831. 

Memorial of S. W. Pomeroy to Congress, on a revision of the 
Patent Laws—Gallipolis, 1832. 

H. G. Spafford’s Pocket Guide, along the line of the canals, 1825. 

Wm. A. Alcoti’s Essay on the construction of school houses. 

Dr. Felix Pascalis’s Eulogy on the late Dr. S. M. Mitchill, 1831. 

Major Henry Whiting’s Discourse on the anniversary of the His- 
torical Society of Michigan, 1831. 

Dr. McAllister’s Dissertation on Tobacco, 1832. 

Dr. S. P. Yandell’s Introductory Lecture on Chemistry, 1831. 

Report of the managers to the Lehigh Coal and N seeatien Com- 
pany, 1832. 

The Albany Literary Gazette, and Repository of Literature and 
the Arts, Dec. 1831. 

Peter A. Browne, Esq. on the Geology of the site e of Philadelphia. 

Review of the project for a great Western Railway, by E. F. John- 
son, Engineer. 

Journal of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Vols! i 
and ILI. 

Prof. C. S. Rafinesque’s Monograph of the fluviatile bivalve shells 
of the river Ohio, translated by C. A. Poulson, Philadelphia, 1832. 

T. H. Taylor’s address before the Charleston Infant School So- 
ciety, 1831. 

President Lindsley’s Baccalaureate address, 1831, Univ. Nasli- 
ville, and Address on Washington’s birth day. 

1 


Z Acknowledgments, &c. 


Two lectures on Political Economy, delivered at Clinton Hall, 
New York, Dec. 1831, by Wm. B. Lawrence, Esq. 
Address of the Friends of Domestic Industry, N. York, Oct. 1831. 
Remarks on the total abolition of Slavery, by a citizen of N. Y. 
Questions and notes on Genesis by George Bush. 
American Colonization Society, and the Colony at Liberia, Bos- 
ton, 1831. 
The Atlantic Journal and Friend to Knowledge, first number for 
the Spring of 1832, by Prof. C. S. Rafinesque. 
Dr. Torrey’s Catalogue of North American Genera of Plants, 
with Dr. Gates’s collection of dried plants from Louisiana, &c. 
Young Mechanic, Boston, 1832, No. 1. 
The Ladies’ Magazine, Jan. 1832. 
Dr. L. C. Beck’s Manual of Chemistry, 183}. 
Dr. J. L. Comstock’s Elements of Chemistry, 1531. 
«6 System of Natural Philosophy, 1830. 
J. W. Barber’s History and Antiquities of New Haven, 1831. 
Chancellor Kent’s Commentaries on American Law, 4 vols. 8vo. 
1826—1830. 
Thomson and Cowper’s poetical works, &c. republished by J. Grigg, 
Philadelphia, 1831. é 
Fifteenth Annual Report of the American Colonization Society, 
Washington, 1832. 
Annual Report of Prison Discipline Society, 183t. 
es ~ American Education Society, 1831. 
Tenth Annual Report of the Board of Canal Commissioners, 
in Ohio, 1831. 
First Annual Report of the N. York Young Men’s Society, 1831. 
Fifteenth Report of the Directors of the American Asylum for 
the Deaf and Dumb at Hartford, May, 1831. 
Mrs. Somerville’s preliminary dissertation on the Mechanism of 
the Heavens, republished by Carey & Lea, Philadelphia. 
De La Beche’s Geological Manual, 1832. Carey & Lea. 
Sir H. Davy’s Salmonia, 12mo. 1832. Carey & Lea. 
Dr. Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Vol. 14,—Silk Manufacture, 
1832. Carey & Lea. 
Dr. James Johnson’s Change of air, or Philosophy of travelling, 
republished by S. Wood & Sons, New York, 1831. 
* Report of the Royal French Academy of Medicine, to the Gov- 
ernment, on Cholera, translated by Dr. J. D. Sterling, and repub- 
lished in New York by S. Wood & Sons, 1831. 


Acknowledgments, &c. 3 
Three lectures on the rate of wages, by N. W. Senior, of Mag- 

dalen College, late Professor of political Economy, 1830. 

A statement of circumstances, connected with the late election for 

the presidency of the Royal Society of London, 1831. 

On the alleged decline of Science in bees by a foreigner, 

London, 1831. 

Observations on the state of Historical Literaiote &c. by N. H. 

Nicholas, Esq., London, 1830. 

Refutation of Mr. Palgrave’s Remarks in reply to observations 

on the state of Literature, &c. by N. H. Nicholas, Esq., 1831. 
Short and plain rules for the prevention and cure of cholera 

morbus, intended for unprofessional readers, by Gideon Mantel}, 

F. R.S. 1831. 

Prof. Babbage’s Logarithmic Tables, London, 1831. 

Report of the Hiccetines of the Portsmouth and Portsea Litera- 
ry and Philosophical Society, 1830—31. 

History of Lewes, England, 2 vols. 4to. by G. Mantell, Esq. and 

Rev. T. W. Horsfield, 1824—-27, Lewes. 

_ Narrative of the visit of King William IV and Queen Adelaide, 

to Lewes in Oct., 1830, 1 vol. 4to., London. 
Dr. Wm. Henry’s estimate of the Philcsophical character of Dr. 

Priestley, 1831. 

List of the members, and minutes of the doings of the London 

Geological Society during 1829—30. _ 

Des Machines de leur influence, &c. Paris, 1831. 

_ Annales de L’Institute Royal Horticole de Fromont, 1831. 
Mining Review of London, 1831. 
Recueil industriel, manufacturier et des beaux arts, pour l’anne 

1831. 

Bulletin de la Soc. Francaise de Statistique Universelle, 1830-31. 
Annales de L’Industrie, Paris, 1830—31. 
Montague’s Ornithological Dictionary, by James Rennie, M. D. &c. 

London, 1831. 

Experimental Inquiry on light and colors, and the source of color 

in the prism, by Walter Crum, Esq. of Glasgow, 1830. 

M. Alexander Brongniart, ‘Tableau des terrains du globe ou Es- 

sai sur la structure, &c. 1829. 

M. Alexander Brongniart, Classification, &c. des roches, 1827. 
eg Re Des» Voleans et des Terrains Vol- 

caniques, 1829 


4 Acknowledgments, &c. 


Jern-Kontorets Annaler, Stockholm :—a periedical Scientific work, 
12 vols., from 1821 to 1829. 

Kongl. Vetenskaps-Academiens Handlingar, for 1829 och 1830. 
Stockholm. 

Arsberattelser om Vetenskapernas Framsteg, afgifne af Kongl. _ 
Vetenskaps-Academiens Embetsman, for 1829 och 1830. Stock- 
holm. 

Supplement to the Encyclopedia Britannica, 6 vols. 4to. from John 
Dunlap, Esq. of Edinburgh, for Yale College Library, 1824. 

With a few exceptions, we have omitted to mention Journals, 
whether foreign or domestic, received in exchange ; and among nu- 
merous foreign Journals of Science and Literature, which arrive 
more or less regularly, we have named only those which have re- 
cently begun to come, or which have been revived, after a discon- 
tinuance. 

For want of time and space, we must omit any remarks which we 
might, otherwise, be disposed to make on some of the publications 
named above, and for the present can only make our acknowledg- 
ments (in some cases too long delayed) to authors, editors, publish- 
ers, and others, who have been so kind as to forward them to us.—Ed. 


AMERICAN : 
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE, &c. 


Art. 1.—On the Water Courses, and the Alluvial and Rock For- 
mations of the Connecticut River Valley ; by Aurrep Suitu.* 


1. Connecticut River. 


Sources and course.—Connecticut River rises on the southern slope 
of the Highlands which divide the United States from Lower Can- 
ada, where its head waters form a lake, three miles in length, 
which in recent-times has received the name of Connecticut. The 
surface of Lake Connecticut, is about one thousand six hundred 
feet higher than the level of Long Island Sound. The ample 
mill stream which dashes over the rocky outlet of this lake runs 
towards the southwest, falling about six hundred feet in the first 
twenty five miles of its course. The river then turns to a more 
southerly direction. Winding its way through frequent meadows, it 
passes by Lancaster, N. H. to the head of the Fifteen mile falls, 
which consist of a succession of rapids witha descent of three hun- 
dred and fifty feet in twenty miles. The base of the White Moun- 


* Mr. Smith, the author of the annexed article, has, within a few years, carefully 
investigated the topography of the great valley of the Connecticut. This investiga- 
tion, was undertaken on behalf of the inhabitants of the valley, with a view to the 
improvement of the navigation of the river; it was continued during several suc- 
cessive seasons, and led to an extensive and precise knowledge of the physical fea- 
tures of this great and important region, 

Mr. Smith, having been requested to embody his observations on the geology and 
topography of the valley, has written the annexed account, which, with the aid of 
drawings on a large scale, (those now published are greatly reduced copies,) has been 
recently read in the city of Hartford, as a part of a course of popular lectures 
which is sustained there, during the present season, by gentlemen of that place, 
who contribute their personal efforts to this laudable purpose. 

It has not been thought necessary to alter this essay from the form which it re- 
ceived, as a popular lecture.— Ed. 


Vol. XXII.—No. 2. Dy 


206 ~ Connecticut River Valley. 


tains extends to the river, along the Fifteen mile falls, now one hundred ~ 
yards broad, and pushes its channel twenty miles towards the west. 
Thence the river proceeds in a more southerly direction two hundred 
miles, where it is met by tide water at the foot of Enfield falls, twelve 
miles above Hartford, and is three hundred yards in width. From 
the head of tide water the river continues, thirty miles, to Middle- 
town, where suddenly changing to the southeast, it pursues its new 
course thirty miles farther to Long Island Sound. 

Falls and rapids.—The other principal falls and rapids are the 
White River Falls, at Hanover, N. H. with thirty six feet of descent; 
Bellows Falls, near Walpole, fifty feet; Miller’s and Montague Falls, 
seventy feet; Hadley Falls, at South Hadley, Ms. fifty feet; and 
Enfield Falls, thirty feet. ‘These added to intervening smaller rap- 
ids, make a total descent of nearly four hundred and fifty feet be- 
tween the foot of the fifteen mile falls and tide water. 

Length.—The length of Connecticut River, measuring all its 
windings, is four hundred miles. The length of its valley, avoiding 
the smaller curvings of the stream, is over three hundred miles. 

Navigation.—Coasting vessels ascend the river, fifty miles, to 
Hartford. Boat navigation, by the aid of locks at Enfield Falls, 
Hadley Falls, Miller’s and Montague Falls, Bellows Falls; a smalk 
rapid called Quechy Falls; and White River Falls, extends two 
hundred miles above tide water. 


Il. Vanuey or Connecticut River. 


Width.—The valley of the Connecticut, embracing within that 
term all the tract of country from whose surface rains and streams. 
flow into Connecticut river, has a very irregular boundary and unequal 
breadth. The courses of the bounding summits are easily traced 
upon the map. ‘The breadth of the valley, from the eastern to the 
western summit, measured on parallels of latitude, is, at Lake Con- 
necticut, twenty miles; at the Fifteen mile Falls, fifty miles; at Hav- 
erhill, N. H. twenty five miles; at Orford, N. H. and across the 
sources of the tributary White river, fifty miles, ten miles of which 4 
lie east, and forty miles west of the Connecticut. Irom the north to 
near the south line of Massachusetts is the widest part of the valley, 
averaging fifty five miles. At Hartford the breadth is thirty two miles, 
at Middletown about twenty miles, and thence the valley narrows 
to the mouth of the river. ‘The widths stated, being measured in | 
straight lines, upon the map, are much less than the length of the 


Connecticut River Valley. 207 


tributary streams which flow from corresponding portions of the 
valley. 

Water courses.—On one side of the bounding summits of the val- 
ley, rains and springs and rivers flow into the Connecticut. From the 
opposite sides of the same summits, they flow away through other 
channels. - Beginning at the north, the St. Francois river rises by 
the sources of the Connecticut, and empties into the St. Lawrence. 

At the east, very near the sources of both the Connecticut and St. 
Francois, heads the Margalloway river, which lower down, takes the 
name of Androscoggin, and passes through Maine, to the Atlantic. 
The Connecticut river valley increases rapidly in width, below the 
parent lake, and on the east side forms the upper and lower Ammon- 
oosuck, and between these, Israel’s river. The White Mountain 
range then stretches towards the west, making room, on its southern 
slope, for the sources of the Merrimack river, whose tributaries carve 
deeply towards the Connecticut, from a tract of country extending 
down one hundred miles, nearly to the north line of Massachusetts. 
There the valley of the Connecticut again opens, and forms, first 
Miller’s river, forty miles in length; and below, the Chickopee, the 

largest tributary of Connecticut river. In the southern border of 
Massachusetts the valley again becomes narrow, and so continues 
into Connecticut, leaving place for streams, which flowing to the east 
and south, are discharged through the Thames river at New London. 

Returning to the head waters of the Connecticut, on the west rise 
the Clyde and Black rivers, which passing through Lake Memphra- 
magog, unite with the St. Francois. ‘The valley of the Connecticut, 

- south of the heads of the Black river and the Clyde, opens broadly 
on the west side, and collects the waters of Pasumpsic river, a large 
tributary, which passing south, meets the Connecticut at the foot 
of the Fifteen mile falls. Next on the exterior slope, the sources 
of the La Moile and Onion rivers rise within ten miles of the Con- 
necticut, and flow towards Lake Champlain. Below, White river 
drains a broad tract of country into the Connecticut, supplying more 
water than any tributary, except the Chickopee. Farther south, on 
the exterior slope, rises the Otter Creek, and runs northwardly, to 
Lake Champlain. Below, within the valley of the Connecticut is 
formed West river, which runs to Brattleborough, and proceeding 
south, Deerfield, Agawam, and Farmington rivers, complete the num- 
ber of large tributaries, and respectively unite with the Connecticut, 
at Deerfield, West Springfield, and Windsor. Below the heads of 


208 Connecticut River Valley. 


Otter Creek, on the west side of the dividing summit, rise the sour- 
ces of the Battenkill and Hoosack, emptying into the Hudson, and 
lower down, the heads of Housatonick river, which runs south into 
Long Island Sound. 

Boundaries. —The west side of the Connecticut river valley, is bake 
ly bounded by the summits of the green woods, in Connecticut and Mas- 
sachusetts, being the same range of Highlands, which, under the name 
of Green Mountains, forms the boundary in Vermont. About the forty 
fourth degree of north latitude, the Green Mountains divide and pro- 
ceed northerly in two ranges. ‘The eastern and less elevated range, 
which at the wide spread sources of White river is forty miles from 
the Connecticut, curves around the heads of that tributary, to within 
nine miles, at Newbury. Its continuity being unbroken, the eastern 
range forms the dividing summit of the waters flowing into Connec- 
ticut river on one side, and lake Champlain and the St. Lawrence on 
the other. ‘The western and more elevated division of the Green 
mountains, with peaks and ridges four thousand feet high, alternately 
descends and rises, first to afford a passage to the Onion river; then 
for the La Moile; and again for the Misisque. ‘The principal moun- 
- tains in the dividing summit on the east side of the Connecticut, are 
the White Mountains, and the grand Monadnok, both in New Hamp- 
shire. 

Mount Washington, in the former range, is six thousand two hundred 
and fifty feet above the level of the sea, and is the highest land be- 
iween the Atlantic Ocean and the Rocky Mountains. The most ele- 
vated ground, lying wholly within the valley, is Ascutney mountain, at 
Windsor, Vt. which is three thousand feet high. Above the north 
line of Connecticut, the best and least elevated thoroughfares across 
the dividing summits, both east and west, rise from eight hundred 
to one thousand feet above the level of the sea. 

Face of the country.—To the eye of the traveller passing along 
the banks of Connecticut river, plains and meadows appear to occu- 
py a large proportion of the valley. The nearest range of hills, es- 
pecially north of Greenfield, Ms. conceals the more distant ranges. 
But plains and meadows possess, comparatively a small part of the 
region which is drained through Connecticut river. Whether pro- 
ceeding to the east or west, hill is found rising above hill, and valley 
formed beyond valley, each contributing to supply and enlarge the. 
waters of the Connecticut, 


Connecticut River Vi alley. 209 


Descent of the tributartes.—The abrupt and mountainous charac- 
ter of so large a part of the valley, causes floods to be sudden and cur- 
rents rapid, in the tributary streams. In many tributaries, the descent 
averages, thirty, forty, sixty, and in some more than one hundred 
feet ina mile. On the White Mountains is seen a small, clear, icy 
looking lake, five thousand feet above the level of the sea. It isthe 
highest source of the lower Ammonoosuck: the stream which issues 
from this lake falls four thousand feet in about two miles. It is but 
just perceptible, except during or after violent rains, when it is seen 
bounding from rock to rock in its downward course, sparkling and 
white, as ifa snow drift had been dashed against the dark side of 
the mountain, from its summit to its base. 

Lakes.—About two hundred small lakes, from less than one mile 
to two and three miles long, lie scattered over the mountainous sur- 
face of the Connecticut river valley, placed, almost without exception, 
at or very near the sources of tributary streams. ‘The Mascomy 
lake in Lebanon, N. H., is seven miles long, and the Sunapee, the 
largest in the valley, is about twelve miles. ‘The latter hes so near 
the centre of the dividing ridge, that a channel, excavated to no ex- 
cessive depth, would change the course of its stream and turn it 
away from Connecticut river into the Merrimack. As the extent of 
country drained near the sources of streams is small, the quantity of 
earth collected in such positions is also small, and has not yet filled 
the rocky basins, where lakes remain. But following the courses of 
the tributaries farther down, small meadows appear, many of which, 
doubtless, occupy the places of former lakes, whose basins have been 
filled by depositions of earth, collected and washed down in the now 
longer courses and multiplied branches of the stream. Augmented 
currents may, also, have worn deeper the channels at the outlets, and 
drained the lower lakes, leaving their beds uncovered which soon 
become clothed with vegetation. 


JlJ. Eartruy Formations. 


Depth of earth.—Along the Connecticut, and often near its tribu- 
taries are plains and meadows so level that the eye can hardly dis- 
cover the smallest declination in their surface. But by far the great- 
er part of the valley, probably nine tenths, presents a surface perpetu- 
ally changing, rising and falling with every variety of steepness, from 
the most gentle undulations, to abrupt mountains and perpendicular 
cliffs. These inequalities and changes of form are not to be ascribed 


210 Connecticut River Valley. 


to the loose earth, the gravel, sand, clay and loam which overspread 
_ the surface. In seven eighths of the valley an excavation to the 
depth of a common well, would penetrate the solid rock. The 
thickness of superficial earth and soil, compared with the known 
height and depth of rock beneath, is as the thickness of a sheet of 
- paper on the roof, to the height of the loftiest edifice. At the top, 
and sides, and bases of. the highest mountains, the rocky strata are 
frequently exposed to view; and in ravines, the beds of rivers, and 
artificial excavations. At Montpelier,* the rocky strata by the Onion 
river have lately been perforated to a depth of eight hundred feet in 
search of salt water, and in mines and quarries of other countries, to 
a much greater depth. ‘The Alps and Andes, and all the high moun- 
tains of the earth shew their rocky frame work on their summits, and 
at numerous intermediate points from thence to their bases. 

Ingredients of earth and rocks similar.—Is the thin covering of 
soil and earth which overspreads the rocky strata, an original pro- 
duction of creating power, or only fragments and ruins, which con- 
vulsions, and time, and the elements have severed and decomposed 
from an originally rocky surface? At the top is found a slight covering 
of soil, manifestly a product of vegetable decomposition. Beneath 
the soil are sand, clay, loam, fragments of rock, in a state of confu- 
sed mixture, on hills and mountains; and in plains and meadows, 
arranged with order and exactness. Now the common sand is but 
pulverized and water worn siliceous stone, the quartz of granite and 
other rocks of the solid strata. ‘The materials of clay abound in the 
feldspar of granite rocks, and in numerous slaty ledges. The isin- 
glass, whose glittering in the sand attracts the eyes of children, is the 
mica of granite and other related rocks, on one form of which we 
daily walk over the mica slate paving stones brought from Bolton. 
The solid strata also contain every variety of materials, combination, 
and arrangement found in pebbles and fragments. 

Marks of fracture in rocks.—Not only do the rocky strata con- 
tain all the ingredients which exist in sand, clay, gravel, loam, and 
all the combinations of materials found in pebbles and fragments, 
but countless numbers of large fragments scattered over many thou- 
sands of square miles, above and beneath the surface of the ground, 
retain the plain marks and forms of forcible disruption. When the 


* There is no reason fo expect to find salt in any country whose geological char- 
acter is like that at Montpelier.—Ep. 


Connecticut River Valley. Q11 


trunk of a tree has been cleft in twain, no eye is so unpractised as 
not to distinguish between the surface of the cleft, and the natural 
surface of the bark or the wood under the bark. When a limb 
has fallen from a forest tree, every one knows, at a glance, that it 
has been rent and fractured, whether the severed limb remains or 
has been removed. ‘The structure and natural surfaces of rock lie 
less open to common observation than the growth and cleaving of 
trees. Yet who that inspects the unhewn blocks collected for chis- 
selling by the stone cutter, does not perceive in their rough, ir- 
regular and angular surfaces, that they have been broken by force 
from some larger mass? So in the quarry, every one judges that the 
blocks before him have been rent and severed by violent means. 
Indeed in all situations, rocks recently broken present, to the most 
common observation, ample proof of such fracture. Of fragments 
which have long been broken up, some fall into water courses, where 
they are smoothed and rounded into pebbles. Some remain upon the 
surface of the ground, and according as they are softer or harder, 
lose more or less of the sharper edges and the freshness of recent 
fracture. ‘Their surfaces may have crumbled and become covered 
with lichens or moss; yet in many, especially such as have long been 
protected from decay by a covering of earth, may still be seen the 
peculiarities of form, the rising, sinking, angular, ever varying sur- 
face, which, in a large proportion of rocks, characterize forcible sep- 
aration and fracture. 

The vicinity of Hartford, from the extent of the alluvial formation, 
does not abound with fragments such as have been mentioned. But 
the surface of the country, for many miles around the White Moun- 
iains, 1s covered with countless masses of dislocated rocks. In as- 
cending Mount Washington, the visiter steps upon them, he sees them 
on all sides; and finds at the summit many acres of huge fragments, 
broken, piled, and lodged against each other, without tree, or shrub, 
or herbage to obstruct his view. He walks between and beneath 
them, among interstices unfilled with earth or soil. Lichens have 
fastened upon the surfaces, and mosses grow in the deep recesses of 
the rocky fragments. The rocks are granite of exceeding hardness. 
Time, even in the cold temperature of those elevated summits, has 
indented and grooved some less enduring portions of the rock. But 
the marks and features peculiar to broken rocks, the rising, sinking, 
angular, ever varying forms, remain as manifest on the surface of the 
huge fragments of these mountaintops, as in the quarry, or the un- 
hewn blocks collected for the stone cutter. 


212 Connecticut River Valley. 


Earth was once rock.—lIt is not, however, on the White Mountains 
only, but over a large part of the mountainous and _ hilly portion of 
the valley, that proofs of a violent and extensive disruption of the 
rocky strata are visible. This is particularly the case in the upper ~ 
half of the valley, as well as near the dividing summits of the lower 
half. Rapid currents and consequent attrition, having worn and 
rounded vast numbers of fragments into pebbles, some of them now 
form the beds of rivers; others have been left on elevated dry ground, 
by the changed courses and deepened channels of the streams in 
which they were smoothed and polished. But in crossing the valley 
from east to west, and in ascending towards the sources of Connec- 
ticut river, innumerable rocky fragments may be seen retaining clear 
marks of forcible disruption, not only on the surface of the ground, 
but more plainly where roads and excavations disclose loose rocks 
which have been long protected from decay by a covering of earth. 
It is believed that after careful and extensive observation, few persons 
could doubt that the rocky fragments which lie scattered above and 
below the surface of the ground, were once combined in larger 
masses, probably united in solid unbroken strata, similar to those 
which are often seen uncovered on the sides of hills and mountains. 
When it is farther considered that the component parts of primitive 
rock, although not commonly transparent, are crystalline in their struc- 
ture; that the quartz, the feldspar, and mica of granite and other 
rocks are as truly crystals, as those produced before our eyes by 
evaporating a solution of salt, copperas, or alum; that the materials of 
sand, gravel, and clay, are the same as the component parts of crys- 
talline rocks ; it is highly probable, that the now remaining solid rock, 
and the fragments, pebbles, sand, clay, and loam, were all once united 
in unbroken strata, the product of general laws of crystallization and 
union, established by Providence to accomplish the work of creation. 
The crystalline rock, also, in order and evidence of design, is as su- 
perior to the confused aggregation of loose earth upon the surface, 
as are the finished: productions of the artist, to the chips and filings 
which have been removed in the progress of his works; or as the 
living tree, with its roots, and trunk, and branches, and foliage, and 
system of vessels, and circulating sap, is superior to the dead and 
decayed substance of the same tree, after it has been converted 
into soil. ‘To prepare a world composed of rock for human habita- 
tion, it was necessary that its crust should be broken up, to produce 
more speedily the requisite covering of earth; just as it was neces- 


Connecticut River Vi alley. 213 


sary that the beauty of plants and trees should perish and decay, to 
fertilize, by a vegetable soil, the otherwise sterile ground. 

It would be fruitless to inquire by what means the superficial solid 
“strata were broken into fragments. Whether the familiar laws of 
expansion by heat, and contraction by cold, were agents in breaking 
up the rocky surface, or whether this effect was produced by other 
means, will probably never be ascertained. 

Soil and vegetation.—The process by which rocks in fragments, 
and to some extent in the unbroken strata, become decomposed and 
acquire fertility, is sufficiently obvious. ‘Those fragments which re- 
main upon the surface, belong to the harder kinds of rock. Heat 
and cold, and moisture, gradually abrade their surfaces. First, the 
feebly vegetative lichen, of inferior organization, takes root, spreads, 
and dies; and falling off carries with it a small portion of disinte- 
grated rock. In process of time the interstices of accumulated 
fragments become filled, and the fragments themselves are wholly 
decomposed, or buried in earth formed from their own ruins. Ferns 
and grass and trees succeed to lichens, in due order, propagating and 
increasing according to laws established by the great Architect, until 
full forests and verdant fields perfect the work, and complete the 
beauty of the vegetable world. Volcanoes may burst forth, and 
pour over the surface the melted substance of interior rocks: floods 
may deluge the world, disarranging and bearing away the accumula- 
ted earth and soil of ages; but the silent processes of decaying rocks 
and advancing vegetation recommence; the ravages of fire and flood 
are obliterated or obscured; verdure, and flowers, and fruits reap- 
pear; and whilst heat and cold, and moisture, and rocks remain, this 
progression will continue. 

Such, it may be believed, have been, substantially, the progress and 
changes which have contributed to bring the valley of the Connecti- 
cut to its present state. ‘The more fragile rocks decayed rapidly, 
until protected by a covering of earth formed over them. The 
harder rocks decomposed slowly, and when elevated to a tempera- 
ture almost freezing in summer, many centuries would elapse with- 
out producing any considerable changes. Hence, on the summits of 
the White Mountains, the marks of fracture on the rocks are so little 
defaced; and ages must yet elapse before those piles of moss-covered 
fragments will crumble away, or be even perceptibly diminished. 


Vou. XXIT.—No. 2. 28 


214 Connecticut River Valley. 


IV. Atiuviat Formations. 


Plains and meadows.—The surface of the shallow covering of earth 
upon hills and mountains, presents the form and pressure of the rock 
beneath. The earth lies mingled without apparent order or uniformity 
of arrangement. But in the valleys of the tributary streams, and on 
a larger scale in the central valley of the Connecticut, long continued 
accumulations have formed extensive plains and meadows, the pro- 
duct of alluvial deposition and subsidence. Such plains and mea- 
dows are found at Lancaster, N. H. Along the Fifteen mile falls, 
hills press more closely upon the river, alternately diminishmg and 
excluding alluvial formation. Below the Fifteen mile falls the hills 
recede, and admit the broad meadows of the great and little ox-bow, 
and the plains of Haverhill and Newbury. At White river falls, 
thirty miles lower, and at several intermediate points, rocky spurs 
close upon the river, which proceeds to its mouth through alternate 
meadows, plains, and hills. 

In common language, the higher alluvial is called plain; the low- 
er, meadow, particularly when within the reach of inundations from 
the river. The similarity of their external appearance and internal 
arrangement indicate that they have been formed by similar causes, 
throughout the whole length of the valley. 

Arranged in terraces. —The plains and meadows are generally.so ley- 
el, that their declination is not perceived by the eye.. ‘Three distinct 
terraces of plain and meadow, in some portions of the valley four, rise 
to various heights, from fifteen or twenty to two hundred feet, above 
the surface of the Connecticut. ‘The upper terrace of plains extends 
to the hills whether near or distant, and rests against their sides. ‘The 
faces of plains towards the river are generally formed into sweeping 
curves, and slope with a regular descent, to the level next below. 
Some of the plains may be traced from one great fall in the river to 
another, twenty or thirty miles, disappearing where projecting spurs 
or other local eauses prevented their formation, or the subsequent 
action of the river undermined and removed them. A spectator 
standing on the upper plain, and Jooking across the river, may com- 
monly see portions of a similar plain, of corresponding height, ter- 
minating against the opposite hill sides. ‘The angle at the brow of 
ithe plains, and the steep and regular descent down their faces, 
though not the same in all, are perfectly distinguishable from the 
angles and curving slopes of hills and mountains. The lower plains 


Connecticut River Valley. 215 


and the meadows, are seen in like manner, in corresponding levels, 
on both sides of the river. 

On alternate sides of the river.—In some places the river divides 
the meadow, leaving a part on either side. Next, the meadow lies 
wholly upon one side, whilst, on the other, the river washes the foot 
of the lower plain, which farther on disappears, in turn, and the river 
there flows at the foot of the higher plain, as at Cooper’s rocks 
below Brattleborough, the hour-glass at Windsor, above Water 
Quechy falls, and at many other places, where the sands roll from 
the brow of the plain into the water, from heights of one hundred 
and one hundred and fifty feet. Soon the river is seen winding to- 
wards the opposite hills, the lower plain reappears, then the meadow, 
which at last is found wholly upon that shore where there was no 
meadow, half a mile or a mile above. 

By subsidence.—The interior composition and arrangement of the 
numerous plains is very similar, especially in their frequent beds of clay, 
which are twenty, thirty and forty feet in height. ‘They are com- 
posed of successive layers, commonly from a third to half an inch in 
thickness, and lying in nearly a horizontal position, wherever they 
have not been undermined and bent by lecal causes. The layers of 
clay beds are in fact composed of clay and quick-sand. ‘The or- 
der in which the materials of each layer are arranged is invariable, 
and may be most distinctly seen wherever the clay is highly colored. 
At the bottom of the layer is the coarsest, heaviest, and least colored 
portion of the sand. In the center is the finer sand, with an inter- 
mixture of clay and deeper color. The top of the layer consists of 
the finest clay, and is the most highly colored. Beds of clay, con- 
sisting of fifty, a hundred, and even more such layers, are found in 
plains, and sometimes passing under the river, in extensive portions 
of the valley. This uniform arrangement of materials in the lay- 
ers may be reproduced by dissolving and blending them, and suf- 
fering them to subside by their own gravity in water. During the 
last summer, similar layers, though of greater thickness, were found 
to have been formed in the canal at Enfield falls, out of materials 
washed by rains from contiguous clay hills, within the last two years. 
No method is known, except that of subsidence in water, which 
will produce the same distribution and arrangement of materials 
that exists in the layers composing clay-beds. ‘The more sandy 
portions of the plains and meadows, also exhibit proofs of successive 
depositions, in changes from coarser to finer, and occasional stripes 


216 Connecticut River Valley. 


of color, indicating that they, like the clay-beds, have been formed 
by diffusion and subsidence of their materials, in water. Other and 
generally sterile plains have doubtless been formed by a more sud- 
den process, and more violent action of water. 

In ancient lakes —The facts which have been stated must lead the 
way in accounting for the formation of the plains arranged in layers, 
situated so far above the highest inundations of the river. No one, 
who considers the power of currents and falling water, will maintain 
that Connecticut river has not lowered its bed, during a lapse of 
several thousand years. At some former period, a chain of lakes 
must have possessed the centre of the valley, connected by streams 
falling, as now at the rapids of the river, or more abruptly, from the 
level of higher lakes, to the level of others below. ‘The elevation 
of the lakes was at least as great, in different divisions of the valley, 
as that of the existing plains in the same divisions. ‘The hills which 
press upon the water’s edge, on either side of the Connecticut, at 
White river falls, were probably, at some former period, united by. 
an unbroken ledge of rocks, which lying across the present channel, 
formed the lower brim of a long basin, and sustained the waters of a 
lake reaching to the Fifteen mile falls, of varying width, correspond- 
ing with the distance of the hills which formed the boundary on op- 
posite sides. At Bellows falls was, probably, another rocky barrier, 
sustaining a lake thirty five miles long, extending to White river falls. 
Similar barriers existed below, probably one near Brattleborough, 
and others in succession, as far down as Middletown, below which the 
higher plains disappear from the course of the river. 

To raise a lake above the existing plains, the supposed barrier at 
White river falls, must have been more than two hundred feet higher 
than the present surface of the water at the same place. Such a 
barrier would have elevated the water above and beyond M’Indoo’s 
and Dodge’s falls, and half way up the Fifteen mile falls, giving to 
the lake alength of thirty five or forty miles, and an average breadth 
of about two miles. The well known ox-bow meadows, and the 
plains of Haverhill and Newbury, occupy nearly a central position 
in the basin of the lake described. North of this center, the Con- 
necticut river valley is one hundred miles in length, and from twen- 
ty to fifty miles broad, embracing a superficial extent of more than 
three thousand square miles. Over this surface fragments and rocky 
strata have been decaying thousands of years, and the finer earth 
produced by such decay, has been carried down by rains and floods, 


Connecticut River Valley. 217 


and diffused in the first large lake of the Connecticut. Some part of 
the materials thus accumulated then subsided, and compose the pres- 
ent plains and meadows of that basin. Other portions were borne 
through the lake, and over its rocky barrier, contributing to the plains 
of lower basins, or passing onward to Long Island Sound; as is seen 
at the present day, in the turbid waters of our annual floods. A 
proof as well as consequence of such a mode of accumulation, ex- 
ists in the general fineness of the earth, of which plains and meadows 
are composed. Loose rocks and fragments are no more frequent 
than may be accounted for, by tributary streams thrusting forward the 
coarser contents of their beds, or outbreaking in new channels—the 
falling of insulated peaks, such as are seen cutting through and ri- 
sing above the plains—and occasional transportation of rocky frag- 
ments, by ice floating from the hill sides. 

The lakes become a river.—It may be inferred, from the level sur- 
face of the plains, that the lakes in which they were formed were 
filled with earth before, perhaps long before, the barriers gave way— 
that the lakes disappeared, and a river flowed through the full plains, 
wearing away on one side, and casting up the earth in eddies on the 
other, as at this day among the meadows—that what is now the 
plain was once meadow. Hence the sweeping curves and regular 
slopes of the faces of the plains. Whena barrier gave way, the 
river would deepen its channel throughout the whole extent of such 
a plain. ‘There is no such thing in nature as a rapid stream, running 
upon a bed of clay or sand. Currents seize the finer earth with 
which they come in contact, bearing it along, until thrown aside into 
some eddy, or meeting with other tranquil waters, it is again deposi- 
ted. Hence when, by the breach of a barrier, the river took pos- 
sesion of a deeper bed at the outlet of the basin, its channel through 
the whole extent of alluvial plain, would be deepened in like propor- 
tion. ‘Thus the lakes disappeared, leaving Connecticut river in their 
stead. 

Action of the river.—During the formation of its deeper channel, 
the river acquires new power of undermining and wearing away its 
banks, as yet unprotected by turf or trees. At Northampton and 
Wethersfield, the Connecticut within the memory of man, has re- 
moved its bed eighty rods, by wearing down the banks on one side, 
and throwing them up in eddies on the other. Similar laws of ac- 
tion operated in ancient times, and on the levels of the plains. In 
this manner were probably caused, not only the sweeping curves 


218 Connecticut River Valley. 


and regular slopes, but the various distance, and occasional disap- 
pearance of the higher plains, on opposite sides of the river. 

Summary.—Thus rocks have been converted into sand and clay— 
currents have swept along the prepared materials and deposited 
them in layers—successive breaches of the barriers lowered the bed 
of the river to corresponding depths,—the river in its new channels 
rearranged the sand and clay into lower plains, and finally m mea- 
dows. ‘The remains of these progressive and various changes, con- 
stitute the alluvial formations of the Connecticut river valley. 


V. Primitive Rock. 


It must be perfectly understood, that the whole superficial cover- 
ing of earth on hills and mountains, as likewise the alluvial formations, 
rest upon a sub-stratum of solid rock. Diversity in the substance, 
arrangement and coherence of the component parts of rock, have 
led to their division into classes. ‘The primitive class is distinguished 
by being purely mineral, and semi-crystalline. In general it contains 
no fragments of rock, and no remains of vegetable, animal, or ma- 
rine productions. From the sources of Connecticut river, to the 
north line of Massachusetts, all the rocky strata belong to the primi- 
tive class, and generally, the sides and summits of the valley to Long 
Island Sound. 


VI. Seconpary Formation. 


Locality.—In Northfield, near the northern boundary of Massa- 
chusetts, rocky strata appear, diverse in several particulars from rocks 
of the primitive class. ‘They are composed of fragments, pebbles, 
gravel, sand, clay, lime and other ingredients of primitive rock, re- 
united in strata by an invisible cement. ‘They are not purely mineral, 
like the primitive, but contain remains of plants, fishes, and animals. 
The color of the strata is commonly red or brown. From the man- 
ner and materials of their composition, rocks of this class are denomi- 
nated a secondary formation, sometimes a sandstone formation. Be- 
ginning at Northfield, the border of the secondary formation may be 
traced, east of the river, in Montague, Sunderland, Amherst, Granby, 
Ludlow, Springfield, Wilbraham, Mass., and Somers, Ellington, 
Manchester, Glastenbury, and Chatham, where crossing Connecticut 
river, the eastern border proceeds through Middletown, Durham, and 
East Haven, to Long Island Sound. The western margin of the 
sandstone formation passes from Northfield into Bernardston, Green- 


Connecticut River Valley. 219 


field, Deerfield, Whately, Hatfield, Northampton, Southampton, 
Westfield and Southwick, Mass., and in Connecticut, into Granby, 
Simsbury, Farmington, Southington, Cheshire, and thence to the 
Sound, near New Haven. Similar rock is seen in frequent ledges 
and quarries, in the beds of tributary streams, and is excavated from 
wells. It rises in Sugar loaf mountain, in Deerfield, and other heights 
in that town and Sunderland, six hundred and seven hundred feet 
above the level of the sea. Connecticut river enters the secondary 
formation at Northfield, runs over its uncovered strata four miles, at . 
Miller’s and Montague falls; an equal distance at Hadley falls, thirty 
miles below,—and five miles at Enfield falls, still twenty miles lower. 
After running eighty miles in the sandstone basin, the river suddenly 
leaves it at Middletown, and passes thirty miles to the sound in a 
southeastwardly direction, ending, as it began, in the primitive for- 
mation. : 

Extent.—The length of the secondary basin, from Northfield to 
New Haven, exceeds one hundred miles. Its breadth expands to 
sixteen miles, through the northern half of Connecticut, and the 
whole superficial contents are about one thousand square miles. The 
depth of this formation must be chiefly conjectural. It has been per- 
forated, at South Hadley, to depths of eighty and one hundred and 
forty feet, in a fruitless search for coal. It rises six hundred feet 
above the surrounding meadows, in Deerfield and Sunderland. Sup- 
posing the secondary to be formed above, and to repose upon the 
primitive, the latter is probably uneven with hills and valleys. In 
passing transversely towards the summits of the primitive mountains 
of the valley, the rate of ascent is diverse, five hundred or one thou- 
sand feet, and sometimes much more, in a distance of six or eight 
miles. If the primitive rises at similar rates under the secondary 
formation, the latter is in some places five hundred and one thousand 
feet deep, and in some it may be much deeper. ‘That the secondary 
was formed in a basin of the primitive, and rests upon it, is appa- 
rent from its manifestly later formation ; from the primitive rising and 
extending above and beyond the borders of the sandstone ; and also 
penetrating it in isolated peaks or ledges, as may be seen a few miles 
west of Hartford. 

The organic remains of this secondary formation consist of several 
varieties of fish, found at Sunderland, imbedded im the rock and fos- 
sillized. At Enfield, Hadley, and Montague falls, and other places, 
are found limbs of trees and fern like plants, also imbedded in the 


220 Connecticut River Valley. 


solid strata. In excavating a well in East Windsor, animal* bones 
were found twelve feet below the surface of the rock, perfect in color, 
form and substance. It is evident that before the red rock basin was 
formed, the crust of primitive rock had been broken up, and variously 
changed to pebbles, gravel, sand, clay, and all the variety of mineral 
substances and forms found reunited in the secondary. Fishes also 
lived in the waters, and trees, plants, and animals on land. 
Layers.—The secondary rock is formed in layers, one over anoth- 
er, differing in thickness from a few inches to several feet. The di- 
vision into layers may have been caused by occasional deficiencies of 
the cement; or, more generally, by the uncohering nature of the 
substances which were deposited and came in contact, at the surfaces 
of separation. . 
Plates.—In many places the layers are manifestly composed of 
successive thin plates, which often separate with the application of 
moderate force. The place of separation is distinguished by differ- 
ence of color and materials, or by change from coarser to finer. 
The distinction of thin plates in the secondary strata is as manifest, 
and frequently of the same kind, asin the clay beds before described. 
A sandstone layer, a foot thick, will often split into twenty or thirty 
plates, each similar to the others, in materials and arrangement, in- 
dicating that a uniform law controlled the formation of the whole. 
Distribution of the ingredients.—The larger fragments and peb- 
bles are chiefly found around the borders of the secondary formation. 
They have been traced and are abundant on the eastern margin of 
the secondary strata, in every town from Northfield to Chatham. 
In the more central parts of the red rock basin, the rocky strata are 
generally composed of very fine materials. In recent excavations of 
not less than fifteen thousand cubic yards of rock, at Enfield falls, 
at numerous positions along an extent of several miles, the materials 
of the rock were so uniformly fine, that a fragment or pebble as large 
as an acorn, is not known to have been met with. Such is also the 
general fact in the excavation of wells at Hartford, Suffield, and oth- 
er towns situated centrally in the secondary, and in the bed of the 
river at Hadley falls. Some cause of extensive influence must have 
occasioned the existing distribution of coarse materials around the 
borders, and fine in the central portion of the secondary formation. 


* A vertebral animal. 


Connecticut River Valley. 221 


Dip.—The position of the secondary strata is rarely horizontal. 
The dip is more generally 10° or 12° to the east or north east, but 
is not uniform in direction or quantity. At Hatfield, the strata are 
seen dipping to the north west or west, and at Montague falls, they 
stand almost perpendicularly, forming an angle of 75° and 80° with 
the horizon. 

Causes of the secondary formation.—Are natural causes and agents 
adequate to account for the formation of the secondary rocks, inclu- 
ding the accumulation of the materials—their arrangement in parallel 
layers, and of the layers in similar plates—the distribution of coarse 
ingredients around the margin, and of fine near the center of the 
basin—the pervading color—and the cement which has converted an 
aggregation of previously dissevered substances into solid strata? 

Of plates and layers.—Every kind and combination of mineral 
substances, found in the component parts of the secondary formation, 
may also be found in the primitive strata. The disruption of the 
primitive crust, and the process by which pebbles, gravel, sand, clay, 
and every species and mixture of fine earth were probably produced, 
have already been described. The sandstone rock was doubtless the 
first formation which took place, after the disruption of the primitive, 
and the alluvial meadows are the latest. When the primitive strata 
were broken up, a vast amount of fragments and of rocky surface 
was exposed to the power of disintegrating agents, heat, cold, and 
moisture ; and the decomposition, and consequent production of fine. 
earth, were proportionally rapid. At the commencement of the 
secondary formation, the whole surface of the valley would supply 
materials, which would be accumulated in its deeper and more cen- 
tral parts. When the new formation had spread to its ultimate 
limits, the materials of subsequent layers were supplied from the 
uncovered surfaces of the primitive, above, and at the sides of the 
secondary. In the course of time, floods and currents would accu- 
mulate an amount of materials equal to the whole contents of the 
secondary basin. ‘To distribute those materials in their existing po- 
sitions and order—to arrange successive plates into layers, and by 
successive layers to raise the surface to its final elevation—and to 
diffuse the coloring matter and cement, would require the presence 
of a lake or bay, at least coextensive with the secondary formation. 
Such a lake or bay must have extended from New Haven to the north- 
ern boundary of Massachusetts. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 29 


222 Connecticut River Valley. 


Distribution of coarse and fine matertals.—In the lake or bay sup- 
posed, the heavier fragments and pebbles, brought within its limits by 
successive freshets, and by long continued currents, would subside 
near the borders. ‘The finer materials, sand, clay, &c. would be dif- 
fused, by the force of floods and currents, and the agitation of winds 
and waves, and gradually subside, in the order required by the laws of 
gravitation. Successive supplies of similar materials, driven by like 
currents and commotion of the lake into the same positions, subsided 
in similar order, and formed the plates, which, by repetition, complete 
a layer. Whenever a deficiency of cement occurred, or some un- 
cohering substance was diffused and subsided upon any portion of the 
previously formed strata, the subsequent deposit failed to unite with 
that which preceded, and separation into layers was the consequence. 

Of the alternations of sand and clay rock.—In many localities the 
layers are composed principally of sand, which being heavier than 
clay, subsided, and separated from the latter, wherever the currents 
which had borne the materials promiscuously into the lake, became 
sufficiently diminished. Other extensive, and generally central local- 
ities contain layers composed chiefly of clay, which was suspended lon- 
ger and floated farther into the lake than sand, and coarser materials. 
A layer of sandstone is sometimes interposed between layers of clay 
rock. These were, doubtless, products of currents and agitation in 
the water differing in violence, as we see them now in different years 
and seasons. With smaller floods and less powerful currents, the 
suspended sand was deposited nearer to the margin of the common 
reservoir, but was driven farther into the lake whenever violent currents 
prevailed, and subsided where beds of clay had been previously de- 
posited, thus producing alternate strata of sand and clay rock. 

Of color.—The color of the secondary formation, which is light red, 
in the coarser sandstone, and dark red or brown, and to a limited 
extent, deep blue or black in the clay rocks, was doubtless a product 
of iron ores, diffused in a state of minute division, inthe lake. ‘The 
fine materials of future rock, would both remain longer suspended in 
contact with the coloring matter, and present more frequent surfaces, 
to which the latter might adhere. Hence the darker color of the 
finer rocks. 

Cement.—Lime is found crystallized in the seams of many layers, 
and was probably the chief cementing subtance of the secondary for- 
mation. The iron of the coloring matter might contribute to strength- 
en the cement. Long continued and great pressure, by the weight 


Connecticut River Valley. 223 


of water, may also have assisted. Most of the strata in which clay 
largely predominates, though hard in their natural beds, decompose ra- 
pidly and return to clay, when exposed upon the surface of the ground. 

Overlying clay.—The formation of secondary rocks seems to have 
ceased, before the supply and subsidence of materials was discontinu- 
ed. Over the clay rock in Hartford, Windsor, Suffield and many 
other places, is a covering, often from ten to twenty feet thick, con- 
sisting of uncemented clay, exactly resembling in color and fineness, 
the substance of decomposed clay rock. These overlying beds of 
clay preserve no traces of arrangement in plates or layers. They 
also contain large pebbles and fragments of granite, greenstone, and 
other rocks, contrary to the invariably fine composition of the clay 
rock layers beneath. Such beds of clay are penetrated in the ex- 
cavation of wells in Hartford and other towns, and have been ex- 
tensively laid open, along the banks of the river at Enfield falls. 
Besides imbedded pebbles and fragments, the upper strata of the 
clay rock are found dislocated and mingled with the overlying clay. 
The broken masses having been lifted and imbedded, were left incli- 
ned in all directions, but are capable of being restored to their origin- 
al position, by bringing together their dislocated joints, which remain 
as perfect as in layers recently broken. 

Lake of the secondary formation.—Was it a fresh-water lake, or 
a bay from the ocean, which anciently overflowed the bed of the 
secondary formation? ‘The absence of remains of marine productions 
indicate the former, and that the Jake was little, if at all, open to the 
influx of tides. Jt could hardly have been a bay from the same pro- 
lific ocean in which were formed the vast beds of limestone and shells 
that extend from the Hudson river westward. 

Ouilet of the lake.—If it was a lake, the barrier which upheld its 
waters must have been since removed ; and the outlet was probably 
im the direction of New Haven. - If the present opening in the course 
of the river, from Middletown to Long Island Sound, had existed, 
the lake must have flowed into or through it, and it becomes difficult 
to account for the entire absence of secondary rock, in that direction. 

Change of elevation and dip of the secondary.—It has been already 
remarked that the lake or bay must have been at least coextensive 
with the secondary formation. It may be added that, unless great 
changes in the-elevation of the sandstone have taken place since it 
was deposited and formed, the lake must have extended far beyond 
the limits of the remaining secondary rock. A lake high enough to 


224 Connecticut River Valley. 


cover the upper sandstone layers of the Deerfield and Sunderland 
mountains, would, in the present state of the valley, extend to, and high 
up the Fifteen mile falls. Its waters would penetrate far into the 
valleys of the larger tributaries of the Connecticut, and the superfi- 
cial extent of its surface would be about four times as great as the 
superficial extent of the secondary formation. Considering how the 
materials of this formation have been collected from all parts of 
the Connecticut river valley, it is inconceivable that no sandstone 
should have been formed in the upper half of the valley, none in the 
valleys of the tributaries, and none in the present course of Con- 
necticut river below Middletown, if the figure of the superficial rocks 
has not beeen changed, and the lake in fact was high enough to cover 
the Deerfield mountains, at their present elevation. 

Neither could layers have been formed by deposition or subsi- 
dence, in the almost perpendicular position in which some of them 
repose, in place. Sand or clay, whether above water or under water, 
falling upon a surface inclined seventy five or eighty degrees to the 
horizon, could not rest and cohere, preserving the perfect order and 
uniform arrangement which exist in the plates and layers of those al- 
most perpendicular strata. Rocky strata, so greatly inclined, must, 
therefore, have undergone a great change of position, subsequently 
to their formation. 


VII. Greenstone Formation. 


Extent.—F acts remain to be mentioned which will render it not 
merely probable, but almost certain, that changes have taken place in 
the position and elevation of the secondary strata. A variety of rock, 
different and distinct from both the primitive and the secondary, 
known under the names of trap, and greenstone, extends with occa- 
sional interruptions, from near the north line of Massachusetts to 
Long Island Sound. Beginning above Greenfield, it forms a hill 
several miles along the bank of Connecticut river. Again the green- 
stone rises, in the borders of Belchertown, and forms Mount Holyoke, 
one thousand feet high,* which running eight miles towards the west, 
disappears at Rock Ferry, below Northampton. On the opposite 
side of the Connecticut, the trap rock rises again, in Mount Tom, to 
the height of a thousand feet, and so continues about six miles to- 
wards the south, where it sinks to a hill. The same rocky range 


* One thousand feet above the river at this place, and one thousand and one hun- 
dred feet above the sea. 


Connecticut River Valley. 925 


extends into West Springfield, Westfield, and Southwick, Ms. and in 
Connecticut forms the Talcott mountain, Farmington, Meriden, and 
Southington mountains, and having a number of subordinate parts, 
and parallel ranges, terminates at East and West rock in New Haven. 
| Rests upon secondary.—The hills and mountains of trap rock are 
spread over and rest upon the top of the secondary formation, as may 
be seen at several places, and at none more distinctly and extensive- 
ly than at Rocky Hill, three miles south west of Hartford. Similar 
rocks are found in New Jersey, and other places in the United States, 
and their usual position, in relation to rocks formed by subsidence in 
water, is to overlie and rest uponthem. ‘That the trap rock hills and 
mountains were formed, or placed in their present position, after the 
formation of the secondary strata, is as certain as that the latter were 
arranged and deposited in water. By what natural agents and modes 
of action could the trap rocks have been elevated, and placed upon 
the previously formed beds of sandstone, or clay rock? 

Of igneous formation.—It has been extensively maintained by ob- 
servers of the structure of rocks, that trap, or greenstone, is a product 
of fusion. Recent observations render it almost certain that some 
trap ranges have been produced by the melting and hardening of other 
rocks. ‘Ihe appearance of the trap and sandstone, several feet above 
and below their junction, is different from the appearance of the 
same rocks at a greater distance. ‘The color and texture both appear 
to have been changed, as might be anticipated from the placing of 
highly heated or melted rock upon strata which were cold. ‘The ap- 
pearances of both rocks have been described minutely, by Professor 
Silliman, in the American Journal of Science, for Oct. 1829. He 
considers the proofs conclusive, that the greenstone of the Connec- 
ticut river valley, has hardened into its present state, from a previous 
state of fusion. ‘To remove all doubt that trap rock has been pro- 
duced by the fusion of other rocks, it has been observed in volcanic 
regions, that what is lava at the surface gradually changes below, 
until the difference between undoubted lava and trap vanishes. 

Dykes.—Trap rocks are found in many parts of Europe and Amer- 
ica. Besides their more general position, resting upon other rocks, 
they are found penetrating the earth and solid strata, in veins or dykes, 
to an unknown depth. Portions of greenstone dykes, disclosed by ex- 
cavation, have repeatedly been mistaken for artificial walls, and when 
traced to a considerable extent have excited wonder and astonish- 
ment, before the nature of the formation was understood. Such 


226 Connecticut River Valley. 


dykes, and others which are doubtless concealed by superincumbent 
earth and rock, furnish a clew and point toa connection between the 
mineral stores below, and the trap mountains above the surface of 
the earth. 

Volcanic fires.—That fires of vast intensity and extent, melting 
rocks and burning them to ashes, exist within the earth, and have 
existed from ancient times, is universally-known. Herculaneum was 
overwhelmed by the liquid lava of one eruption, and Pompeii buried 
in the ashes of another. During the last year, a volcanic island was 
thrown up in the Mediterranean, where ships were wont to sail. In 
the craters of-some volcanoes the lava is raised to a height of several 
miles. 
Earthquakes.—Earthquakes are but different effects of the same 
subterranean fires which produce volcanic eruptions, and invariably 
attend them. ‘They rend the earth, swallowing men and their habi- 
tations in fearful chasms. They reach from continent to continent, 
proving the vast extent of subterranean fire and communication. ‘The 
earthquake which overthrew Lisbon in 1755, extended to New Eng- 
Jand, and was the severest which has been felt here, since the arrival 
of Europeans. Probably many of my audience. have heard from 
the people of that day,.of the awe produced by the rumbling and 
quaking of the earth, and the shaking of houses and their contents, 
here, at a distance of three thousand miles from the seat of the great- 
est power, and most destructive effects of the earthquake of 1755. 
Imagination can hardly conceive the extent and fluctuations of melt- 
ed rock within, when it sees that the craters of A®tna and Vesuvius, 
of Teneriffe and the Andes, are but vents to relieve occasional ex- 
cesses of the expanding fires below. 

Extinct Volcanoes.—Such being the effects of subterranean fires 
within the time of authentic records, what must they have been in 
more ancient periods? Several hundred extinct volcanoes have been 
discovered by their craters and lava which remain. ‘The extinct 
volcanic mountains, in the middle and southern parts of France, are. 
said to cover several thousand square miles. ‘The ancient crater of 
Teneriffe contains a surface of more than one hundred square miles. 
The whole of the mountainous part of Quito, occupying more than 
six thousand square miles of surface, is considered, by Humboldt, as 
one immense volcano. 

Effects of subterranean fires.—If such are the number and extent 
of ancient extinct volcanoes, their subterranean fires must have been 


Connecticut River Valley. ae | 


proportionally extensive and intense. ‘The earthquakes produced by 
the same fires were in like degree excessive and violent, causing 
greater and more frequent fractures and chasms in the rocky crust of 
the globe. May we not reasonably believe, although no volcanic vent 
remains open in this region, that the vast fires of ancient times ex- 
tended under the sandstone formation of the Connecticut river valley ? 
Admit this fact, and the trap mountains here are accounted for. ‘The 
waves of molten, boiling rock below, might well fracture the brittle 
covering of sandstone layers above, penetrate the new formed open 
chasms, rise to the surface, flow over the upper layers of the secon- 
dary, by slow degrees acquiring the height and spreading to the 
breadth of the existing greenstone mountains. The undulations and 
“expanding force of a vast quantity of melted rock below, might ele- 
vate mountains, like those of Deerfield, and Sunderland, high above 
the original surface of the secondary formation to which they belong. 
The position of the layers would be changed by the heaving of the 
liquid rock, leaving differént portions of the dissevered masses at dif- 
ferent degrees of inclination, and dipping in different directions. ‘The 
operation of these ancient fires may have continued many ages, va- 
rying the height of the superficial rocks, and forming fissures, ravines 
and chasms, to become the channels of future streams and rivers. 
The present channel of the Connecticut, leaving the secondary basin 
at Middletown, may have been thus formed or commenced, in a new 
direction towards the sound. Nor is it incredible that Long Island 
was anciently united to the continent, and that the concavity which 
contains the waters of the Sound, was formed by an extensive sub- 
sidence of the main land. It is not to be supposed that the internal 
fires and molten rocks were cooled suddenly : ages might and prob- 
ably did elapse before all the fractures and the present dip of the super- 
ficial strata, and the final elevation of the greenstone mountains were 
completed. 


VIII. Section. 


The most undeniable and satisfactory proofs of diverse agencies, 
and of the order of successive operations, are presented wherever a 
number of formations are seen in place, lying one above another. 

‘Recent excavations in constructing a canal along Enfield Falls, dis- 
closed a series of such formations, which will be described in ascend- 
ing order. One of the most complete and interesting sections was 
laid open at the bluff, situated mid-way between the head and foot 
of the canal. 


228 Connecticut River*Valley. 


1. Sandstone.—The bed of the river is composed of dark red 
clay and sandstone rock. Layers of the same rock, dipping com- 
monly ten or twelve degrees towards the northeast or east, form the 
immediate bank of the river, rising abruptly from ten to thirty feet 
above the surface of low water, and of unknown depth, probably 
extending to the primitive strata below. This is part of the extensive 
and central formation before described, consisting only of materials 
in a state of minute division, and containing no pebbles or even gravel. 
The dip to the east indicates that the sandstone strata rise gradually, 
from the west bank of the river, and the surface of the ground pre- 
sents a corresponding slope towards the east. Retiring from the river 
various distances, from a quarter to half a mile, the slope of the sur- 
face commonly changes to the west, and after a gradual declination 
in that direction, and to a considerable distance, the surface again 
rises with a dip towards the east. ‘Two and even more ranges of 
similar hills and valleys extend, in places, several miles from the river. 
In general the superincumbent earth conceals the position of the rocky 
strata, but where streams break through, it is seen that the western 
slope is not formed by a change in the dip of the rocky strata, but 
these are broken off and disappear in successive steps, as if the whole 
had been originally consolidated in continuous layers, and subse- 
quently cracked, the strata on one side of the fracture being elevated, 
whilst the other was depressed. 

2. Clay and fragments.—Next over the red rock lies a bed of 
red clay and sand, ranging from three or four to twenty feet in thick- 
ness. Here, as generally in the red rock below, the predominating 
material is clay. But the resemblance of the superincumbent clay, 
in fineness, color, and all apparent qualities, except cement and 
stratification, to the rock beneath, compels belief that it was collec- 
ted suspended and deposited in the same lake, and from the same 
sources as the materials of the rock. In several places thick upper 
strata of No. 1, are found broken, elevated, and imbedded in the un- 
stratified red clay of No. 2, in entire disorder. In like manner numer- 
ous fragments and pebbles of granite and other primitive rocks, and 
of water-worn greenstone, are mingled and often deeply imbedded 
in the same red clay. The explanation seems to be, that after 
the purely fine red clay and sand had been deposited above the 
rocky strata, powerful and unwonted currents swept over the face 
of the valley, bearing with them vast quantities of fragments and 
pebbles, from the distant hills and higher water courses. ‘The 


Connecticut River Valley. 229 


same powerful currents, perhaps aided, possibly produced, by fluc- 
tuations caused by the renewed energy of subterranean fires, dis- 
turbed, softened, and displaced the previously arranged beds of fine 
red clay, dislocated and intermingled the upper sandstone strata, and 
rolled and kneaded into the mass various pebbles and fragments, until 
the whole subsided into their present state of confused mixture. Sim- 
ilar combinations have been noticed in numerous places, over an ex~ 
tent of forty miles, from Hadley falls to Hartford, and below. 

3. Laminated clay-beds.—As soon as the commotion which produ- 
ced the mixture of No. 2. had ceased, it is manifest that an extensive 
surface, consisting chiefly of clay and other fine materials, must have 
been left exposed to the action of water; if in hills above the sur- 
face, to the washing of rains and streams; if below the surface, to 
the agitations of the lake itself. In this manner, chiefly during pe- 
riodical, or at least violent storms, successive portions of fine mate- 
rials would again become suspended and diffused, and finally subside 
in the manner already described, forming clay-beds, of thin layers 
often repeated, provided cement were wanting to unite them into 
rocky strata. Accordingly No. 3 consists of clay-beds, composed 
of layers, generally about half an‘inch thick, with sand at bottom, 
and the finest clay and deepest color at top, and between, a mix- 
ture of sand and clay, proceeding upward by insensible gradation 
from the slightest color, and heaviest materials, to the darkest and 
finest at top. This arrangement is invariable, in every layer. The 
greatest elevation of clay-beds along Enfield falls, is about fifty feet 
above the present surface of the river. They rest upon and termi- 
nate in the sides, and never overspread the tops of the higher red clay 
hills of No. 2. Hence it is probable that during the period of the 
deposition of No. 3. the waters of the lake, or of the river, if it 
were then reduced to a river, were not more than fifty feet higher - 
than its present surface; otherwise the layers of clay would have 
extended farther up the sides of No. 2. The clay-beds which were 
cut through in forming the canal were of various thickness, con- 
taining sometimes twenty, sometimes sixty layers, the latter when 
the formation commenced at a greater depth than the former. . Be- 
tween Enfield falls and Hartford, the clay-beds rarely attain the 
height of fifty feet, above low tide. An instrumental level carried 
twelve miles, from the foot of Enfield falls to Hartford, at a height 
of thirty feet above low water in the river, touched the margin of 
nearly thirty brick yards, scattered along the route. Probably the 

Vou. XXII.-—No. 2. 30 ote 


- 230 Connecticut River Valley. 


clay beds at Springfield, and indeed all between Enfield and Had- 
ley falls, belong to the same period of time, and the same elevation 
of the waters. Unless we suppose that immense quantities of clay 
belonging to this formation have subsequently been removed, the 
period of No. 3. was not of long duration. , Fifty or sixty years, 
perhaps less, would suffice to form the greatest number of overly- 
ing plates of clay which are known in the region about Enfield falls. 
The clay beds of different sections of the Connecticut river valley, as 
they belong to separate lakes, may have been formed at different pe- 
riods, and remote one from another. 

4. Loose Aggregations.—Over the surface of the slopes i hills, 
resting upon the clay beds of No. 3. and where these are wanting, upon 
the confused mixture of No. 2. lies a disarranged covering, compo- 
sed of earth, gravel, pebbles, and large and small fragments, embrac- 
ing fragments of primitive rocks, sandstone, and greenstone. It is 
perfectly manifest that these materials could not have occupied their 
present place, during the subsidence of the subjacent layers of clay. 
It is equally plain that no agencies now operating, either with or with- 
out the presence of a lake, could have collected these heavy materials 
and masses, and spread them over the tops and sides of the hills and 
slopes where they now lie. A vast amount of sand and gravel is 
spread over extensive portions of the lower valley, forming barrens 
or plains remote from the river. These seem to belong to the 
same period as the coarse covering along Enfield falls above des- 
cribed, (No. 4.) and must be distinguished from the terraces of 
plains previously mentioned. But one natural agent is adequate 
and adapted to collect and distribute the materials of No. 4, An 
overwhelming rush of waters, probably the deluge of the Scriptures, 
bore along with equal ease the sand, gravel, pebbles, and even 
larger fragments, which now overspread formations produced in a pre- 
vious state of tranquillity, filling the deeper cavities where are more 
remote plains and barrens, and levelling them like the strike of a 
measure of grain, but leaving a more shallow covering upon the 
hills whose rocky strata were elevated above the general surface. 

5. Soil.—A vegetable soil completes the formations, found in place, 
one above another, at Enfield falls. 


SUMMARY. Fi 


The principal states and changes which have been described, 
and of which incontestable proofs remain in the valley of the Con- 
necticut river, are, 


Connecticut River Valley. : 231 


1. The disruption of the surface of the primitive rocky strata 
into fragments, which by disintegration and attrition, produced grav- 
el, sand, clay, and the different kinds and mixtures of earth. 

2. A lake or bay extended from the ocean to near the present 
north line of Massachusetts, in which the secondary strata of the 
lower valley were formed, by a long continued accumulation, -diffu- 
sion, and subsidence of materials, collected from all parts of the 
valley. 

3. The lake, and the supply, diffusion and subsidence of gravel, 
sand, clay, &c. continued as before, but the materials ceased to hard- 
en into rock. : 

4. The dislocation and dip, and the hills, valleys, and mountains, 
ef the secondary strata, were produced, by the agency of subterra- 
nean fires. 

5. The melted substance of interior rocks rose through chasms 
and fissures of the previous dislocations, spread over the sand-stone 
strata, and formed the present ranges of greenstone. 

6. Great commotion at and near the surface of the secondary 
valley, which broke and displaced the upper layers of sandstone, dis- 

arranged the superincumbent red clay and sand, introduced among 
them various kinds of pebbles and fragments, and left an extensive 
covering of unconsolidated materials, resting upon the secondary rock 
in a state of confused mixture. 

7. A period of tranquillity, in which the clay-beds of the lower 
valley were formed by deposition in water. 

8. Another great commotion at the surface, probably the effects 
of a deluge, which bore along, and left extensive tracts including 
the clay-beds of No. 7. covered with unarranged loam, sand, gra- 
vel, pebbles and rocky fragments. 

9. A chain of. lakes sdbsictiae in the central parts of the valley, 
in which, at uncertain periods, were accumulated and formed the 
highest terraces of plain. ‘The surface of the lakes subsiding by 
successive breaches of their barriers, caused the formation of low- 
er plains, and lastly, of the present meadows. 


232 Memour of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


Art. I].—Memoir of the Life of Tuomas Youne, M.D. F.R.S., 
Foreign Associate of the Royal Institute of France, &c. &c., with 
a Catalogue of his Works and Essays. 


(From the Journal of the Royal Institution of Great Britain.) 


Turs tribute to the memory of one of the most gifted men and 
distinguished philosophers of the age, has been printed solely for 
private distribution. It has almost the interest of an autobiography, 
having been drawn up by a gentleman who had the advantage of a 
long and intimate acquaintance, with him, from some short memoranda 
of Dr. Young’s own writing, in the possession of a near connexion. 
The author modestly states, that ‘having never been engaged in the 
pursuits of accurate science, he feels himself incompetent to give 
more than an imperfect sketch, which he trusts to see filled up here- 
after by an abler hand.’ 

No apology, it is presumed, will be necessary for transferring to 
these pages the substance of this account of Dr. Young, who, from 
his connexion with the Royal Institution, as one of its professors, and 
as the editor of the first series of its Journal, independent of his 
claims as a scholar and philosopher of the first class, especially mer- 
its distinguished notice in this work. 

Thomas Young was born at Milverton, in Somersetshire, on the 
13th of June, 1773. His parents were both of them Quakers, and 
of the strictest of that sect; his mother was a niece of Dr. Richard 
Brocklesby, a physician of eminence, well .known from his connex- 
ion with the distinguished literary and political characters of his time, 
and who numbered among his most intimate friends, Johnson, Burke, 
and Windham. 

To the influence of the early impressions of the Quaker tenets, Dr. 
Young ‘was accustomed to attribute, in some degree, the power he 
so eminently possessed of an imperturbable resolution to effect any 
object on which he was engaged, which he brought to bear on every- 
thing he undertook, and by which he was enabled to work out his 
own education almost from infancy, with little comparative assistance 
or direction from others.’ The earliest years of Dr. Young were 
chiefly passed in the family of his maternal grandfather, Mr. Robert 
Davis, of Minehead, who, in the midst of mercantile avocations, had 
cultivated a taste for classical literature, with which, by earnest en- 
deavor, he seems to have imbued the mind of his grandson, who 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 233 


appears to have been a forward if nota precocious child. It is said 
that he could read with fluency when he was two years old; and soon 
after this, in the intervals of his attendance on a village schoolmis- 
tress, he committed to memory a number of English verses, and even 
was taught to recite some Latin poems, the words of which he re- 
tained without difficulty, although unacquainted with their meaning. 
Before he was six years old, he was sent to a school kept by a dis- 
senting minister at Bristol, where he remained about a year anda 
half, and became essentially his own instructor, and had generally 
studied the last pages of the books used before he had reached the 
middle under the eye of his inefficient master. 

It has been remarked, ‘that the early quickness with which learn= 
ing is imbibed, is not always the indication of permanent ability ; 
facility of acquiring does not in general establish a power of reten- 
tion; whilst what is received with difficulty, is frequently preserved 
and digested in the mind.’ The case of Dr. Young, however, was 
one of those happy exceptions to this remark ; and in none of those 
extraordinary instances recorded by Baillet in his work ‘sur les En- 
fans célebres par leurs Etudes,’ is there a more remarkable instance 
of the promise of youth being realized in the man. 

To one of those accidental circumstances, which, though they do 
not create a peculiar genius, yet very often determine its bent, may 
be attributed that love of science which distinguished Dr. Young, and 
which (says his biographer) ‘had probably no small influence on the 
issues of his future life..—*‘ His father had a neighbor, a man of great 
ingenuity, by profession a land-surveyor; and in his office, during his 
holidays, he was indulged with the use of mathematical and philo- 
sophical instruments, and the perusal of three volumes of a Dictionary 
of Arts and Science. ‘These were to him sources of instruction and 
delight of which he seemed never to be weary.’ 

In his visits to this neighbor, Young had acquired some knowledge 
of the art of land-surveying, and used to amuse himself in his walks 
by measuring heights with a quadrant. In 1782 he was placed at 
the school of Mr. Thompson, at Compton, in Dorsetshire, where he 
went through the ordinary course of Greek and Latin, with the ele- 
ments of mathematics; here also he had access to a moderate mis- 
cellaneous library, and by rising earlier and sitting up later than his 
companions, with the assistance of a school fellow, he acquired some 
knowledge of the French and Italian languages. 


(234 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


Botany having about this time engaged his attention, and desiring 
to possess a microscope for the purpose of examining plants, he 
attempted the construction of one from the descriptions of Benjamin 
Martin. This led him to optics; and having procured a lathe in or- 
der to make his microscope, like most young experimenters, he for- 
got or neglected science, for a time applied himself to the acquire- 
ment of manual dexterity, and every thing gave way to a passion for 
turning, until, falling upon a demonstration in Martin’s Philosophy, 
- which exhibited some fluxional symbols, he was not satisfied until he 
had read and mastered a short introduction to the doctrine of fluxions. 

Before he quitted school, a Hebrew Bible being left in his way, 
he began by enabling himself to read a few chapters; this led him 
to the study of the other principal oriental languages; and on quit- 
ting Mr. Thompson’s, at the age of fourteen, it appears that he was 
more or less versed in Greek, Latin, French, Italian, Hebrew, Per- 
sian, and Arabic; and had laid the foundation of that calligraphic 
skill for which he was afterwards so remarkable, and in which he 
rivalled even the neatness and beauty of the pen of Porson. 

He was about this time attacked by symptoms of what his friends. 
feared to be incipient consumption, but by the attention of his uncle 
Dr. Brocklesby, and Baron Dimsdale, his health was restored ;.his 
indisposition scarcely interrupted his studious labors, and it is said . 
that ‘he merely relieved his attention by what to him stood in the 
place of repose—a course of Greek reading in such authors as 
amused the weariness of his confinement.’ 

In the year 1787, he met, at the house of a relation, a friend of 
Mr. David Barclay, of Youngsbury, in Hertfordshire, who was then 
wishing to form an arrangement for the education of his grandson ; 
and it was at length agreed that the youths should pursue their stu- 
dies together, under a private tutor in Mr. Barclay’s house. ‘The 
tutor, however, did not come, and Young, who was only a year and 
a half older than his companion, took upon himself provisionally the 
office of preceptor. They were afterwards joined by Mr. Hodgkin, 
author of the ‘Calligraphia Greca,’ who was of somewhat maturer 
years, and then seeking to perfect himself in the higher branches of 
classical attainments. But Young did not relinquish the task he had 
undertaken, and continued to be the principal director of the studies 
of the whole party. 

Thus passed the five years from 1787 to 1792, the summers being 
spent in Hertfordshire, the winters in London, and with no other 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 235 


assistance than that of a few occasional masters, when in London, he 
had rendered himself singularly familiar with the great writers of 
antiquity, keeping ample notes of his daily studies. ‘ His reading 
was not,’ says his biographer, ‘for the purpose of merely gaining 
words and phrases, and the minuter distinctions of dialects, but was 
invariably also directed to what was the end and object of the works 
he labored through ;’ he had drawn up an admirable analysis of the 
various conflicting opinions of the ancient philosophers, and it is prob- 
able that the train of thought into which this led him was not without 
its effect in mitigating his attachment to the - peculiar views of the 
Quakers. He had now acquired great facility in writing Latin ; 
composed Greek verses, which were well received by the distin- 
guished scholars of the day, and applied himself assiduously to the 
higher mathematics. ‘To the studies of botany, zoology, and espe- 
cially of entomology, he at the same time paid considerable attention. 

In the winters of 1790 and 1791, he attended the chemical lec- 
tures of Dr. Higgins, and having previously prepared himself by 
reading on this subject, he began to make simple experiments of his 
own. But he is said to have been at no period of his life fond of 
repeating experiments, or even of originating new ones; ‘consider- 
ing that, however necessary to the advancement of science, they 
demanded a great sacrifice of time, and that when the fact was once 
established, that time was better employed in considering the purposes 
to which it might be applied, or the principles which it might tend 
to elucidate.” At Dr. Brocklesby’s recommendation, and under his 
superintendence, he now directed his views to the studies necessary 
for the practice of physic, and made to him a regular report of his 
literary and scientific pursuits. ‘The Doctor lived in intimacy with 
Mr. Burke and Mr. Windham, and having communicated to them 
some of his nephew’s Greek translations, he was introduced to those 
two distinguished persons. Mr. Burke is said to have been so greatly 
struck with the reach of Young’s talents, and the extent of his ac- 
quirements, and more particularly by his great and accurate knowl- 
edge of Greek, that he was in no small degree indebted to the good 
offices of that eminent statesman for the interest which his uncle 
afterwards took in his future settlement in life. 

‘It may probably be considered that it was at this period his char- 
acter received its developement. He was never known to relax in 
any object which he had once undertaken. During the whole term 
of these five years, he never was seen by any one, on any occasion, 


236 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


to be ruffled in temper. Whatever he determined on he did. He 
had little faith in any peculiar aptitude being implanted by nature for 
any given pursuits. His favorite maxim was, that whatever one man 
had done, another might do; that the original difference between 
human intellects was much less than it was generally supposed to be; 
that strenuous and persevering attention would accomplish almost 
any thing ; and at this season, in the confidence of youth and con- 
sciousness of his own powers, he considered nothing which had been 
compassed by others beyond his reach to achieve, nor was there 
any thing which he thought worthy to be attempted which he was not 
resolved to master. 

His biographer thinks, with justice, that ‘ this self conducted edu- 
cation in privacy was not without its disadvantages—that though the 
acquirements he was making were great, he was not gaining that 
which is acquired insensibly in the conflict of equals in the com- 
merce of the world—the facility of communicating knowledge in 
the form that shall be most immediately comprehended by others, 
and the tact in putting it forth that shall render its value immediately 
appreciated.’ 

His first communications to the press were made in 1791, through 
the medium of the ‘ Monthly Review,’ and the ‘Gentleman’s Maga- 
zine ;’ and towards the end of 1792 he established himself in lodg- 
ings in Westminster, where he resided two years, attending the lec- 
tures of Baillie and Cruickshank on anatomy, and was during that 
period, a diligent pupil of St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. 

In 1793, he made a tour in the west of England, principally to 
study the mineralogy of Cornwall; and about this time the Duke of 
Richmond, then Master-General of the Ordnance, who had long been 
a friend of his uncle, offered him the situation of assistant-secretary 
in his house. Mr. Burke and Mr. Windham recommended him 
to proceed to Cambridge and study the law, but his own predilec- 
tions and habits decided him, upon due consideration, to determine 
in favor of the practice of physic, as most congenial to his scientific 
pursuits, and to which the position occupied by his uncle seemed to 
offer a favorable introduction. 

In this year he communicated to the Royal Society his Observa- 
tions on Vision, and his Theory of the Muscularity of the Crystalline 
Lens of the Eye, which became the object of much discussion : 
John Hunter laying claim to having previously made the discovery. 
‘Dr. Young was soon after elected a fellow of the Royal Society, 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 237 


when he had just completed his twenty-first year ; and in the autumn | 
of 1794 he went to Edinburgh, and attended the lectures of Doctors 
Black, Munro, and Gregory. 

He now separated himself from the society of Quakers, and, 
ne the most active pursuit of his medical, scientific, and classical 
labors, still found leisure for cultivating those arts in which his 
early education had left him deficient. The versatility of his genius 
reminds us of what has been recorded of the Admirable Crichton. 
It is said that ‘every thing, be its nature what it might, was with 
him a science; and that whatever he followed, he followed scientifi- 
cally. Of music he was extremely fond, and of the science of music 
he rendered himself a master. He had at all times great personal 
activity, and in youth he delighted in displaying it.—*‘ He diversified 
his graver studies by cultivating skill in bodily exercises; took 
lessons in horsemanship, in which he always had great pleasure; and 
practised, under various masters, all sorts of feats of personal agility, 
in which he excelled to an extraordinary degree.’ Asa characteristic 
anecdote, it is recorded that, in instructing himself in a minuet, he 
made it the subject of a diagram. 

Toward the close of 1795 he went to the University of Gottingen, 
where he took his doctor’s degree, and excited the wonder of that 
laborious school by his extraordinary attainments and almost incred- 
ible industry. Here he composed a treatise ‘De Corporis Humani 
Viribus Conservatricibus,’ leaving few volumes unconsulted which 
had any connexion with the subject he was treating. He had pur- 
posed visiting Italy previously to his return to England, but was 
prevented by the victories of the French; he therefore proceeded to 
Dresden, for the purpose of studying the works of Italian art in the 
galleries there, and of comparing what he saw with that which he 

had learnt of them from the lectures of the professors at ge 
He also made a short visit to Berlin. 

‘ During his residence in Germany he gained a very general and ac- 
curate acquaintance with its language and literature, which he kept up 
throughout his life; he remarked that he fouthd in Germany a love of 
new inventions, singularly, and somewhat pedantically, combined with 
the habit of systematizing old ones, and of giving an importance to 
things in themselves trifling, which in his case rather confirmed an 
original habit of dwelling on minutiz more than his subsequent expe- 
rience led him to think was advantageous. 


Vou. XXII.—WNo. 2. 31 


238 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


On his return to England he entered: himself of Emmanuel Col- 
lege, Cambridge, of which. Dr. Farmer, an intimate friend of ‘his 
uncle, was then'master. He proceeded to take his regular degrees in 
physic in that university, but did not attend any of the public lectures, 
contenting himself with pursuing the various studies in which he was 
engaged, living on terms of intimacy with the most highly-gifted 
members, and discussing subjects of science with the professors, but 
finding no rival in the variety of his knowledge, and few compe- 
titors in most of its branches. 

Dr. Brocklesby died in 1797: part of his fortune, his books, his 
pictures, and his house, he left to Dr. Young, who now found him- 
self in circumstances of independence, surrounded by a circle of 
distinguished and highly valuable friends, which he continued to 
prize and to enjoy through life. When his residence at college was 
completed he settled himself as a physician-in London, in Welbeck 
Street, where he continued to reside during twenty-five years. 

In 1801, Dr. Young was appointed Professor of Natural Philos- 
ophy in the Royal Institution, where he continued for two years to 
lecture alternately with Sir H. Davy. In 1802, he published his 
‘Syllabus, a course of Lectures on Natural and Experimental Phi- 
losophy, with Mathematical Demonstrations of the most important 
Theorems in Mechanics and Optics.’ This syllabus contained the 
first publication of his discovery of the general law of the Inter- 
. ference of Light, being the application of a principle which has since 
been universally appreciated as one of the greatest discoveries since 
the time of Newton, and which has subsequently changed the whole 
face of optical science.* As a lecturer at the Royal Institution, Dr. 
Young was not eminently successful, for though his lectures were 
replete with interesting original matter, he was not happy in convey- 
ing it in a sufficiently intelligible manner to the capacities of a mixed 
audience, consisting in a great degree of persons of fashion and of . 
the world. Dr. Young’s style and manner were quite opposite to 
those of his eminent colleague, Davy; he was compressed and 
laconic, and presumed*his audience better instructed in the arcana 
of science than such an assembly could possibly be: it has even 


* It was not until the year 1827, that the importance of this law could be said 
to be fully admitted in England: it was in that year that the Council of the Royal 
Society adjudged Count Rumford’s medal to M. Fresnel, for having applied it, with 
some modifications, to the intricate phenomena of polarized light. 


Memoir of the Lafe of Dr. Thomas Young. 239 


been said that it would hardly have been possible for men of science 
to have followed him at the moment without considerable difficulty. 

At this period Dr. Young became, jointly with Davy, editor of the 
Journal of the Royal Institution ; the first volume, and part of the 
second, were published under his superintendence. , It was also at 
this time that he gave his two Bakerian Lectures on the subject of 
Light and Colors, to the Royal Society. Developing the law of 
interference, and entering into all the details of the theory to which 
it leads; dwelling upon the difficult points, at the same time, with 
more candor than might have been consistent with his object, had 
he been anxious to, obtain proselytes. 

‘In the summer of 1802, he accompanied the present Duke of 
Richmond, and his brother Lord G. Lennox, in his medical capaci- 
ty, to Rouen, and in an excursion from thence to Paris, was first 
present at the sittings of the National Institute, at that time attended 
by Napoleon; where he made the acquaintance of several leading 
members of that distinguished bedy, into which he himself was even- 
tually elected. On his return, he was constituted Foreign Secretary 
to the Royal Society, an office which he held during life, being long 
their senior officer, and always one of the leading and most efficient 
members of their council.’ 

In 1804, he married Eliza, daughter of J: P. Maxwell, Esq., of 
Cavendish Square,—an union to him productive of uninterrupted hap- 
piness during the remainder of his life. At this time he resigned 
his professorship in the Royal Institution, from an erroneous im- 
pression that it would be likely to interfere with his success as a 
medical practitioner. The remarks of his biographer on this occasion 
must not be withheld. 

‘ His resolution at that juncture was to confine himself for the most 
part to medical pursuits, and to make himself known to the public in no 
other character. But he had resolved on that which to him was im- 
possible. He never slackened either in his literary or philosophical 
researches. He was always aiding, and always willing to be the coun- 
sellor of any one engaged in similar investigations. He was living in 
the first circles of London, amongst all who were the most eminent. 
The nature of his habitual avocations was necessarily well known; 
and, therefore in putting forth his non-medical papers separately and 
anonymously, he was making a fruitless as well as voluntary sacrifice 
of the general celebrity to which he was entitled; and shrinking, as 
it were, from the cumulative reputation which he must otherwise have 


240 Memoir of the Life of “Dr. Thomas Young. 


enjoyed, he waived, in some degree, the advantage which is given by 
a great name towards the pursuit of even professional success.’ 

In 1807, Dr. Young published his ‘ Course of Lectures on Natural 
Philosophy and the Mechanic Arts,’ in two volumes, 4to; a work 
of first-rate merit, which cost him nearly five years’ labor to perfect. 
The mass of references contained in the second volume, to those 
works which the student engaged in minute inquiries in any branch 
may consult with advaniage, affords evidence of the extensive reading 
and industry of this eminent philosopher. Owing to the failure of 
the booksellers engaged in the publication of Dr. Young’s Lectures, 
the immediate sale of the work was so greatly injured that it did not 
repay the expenses of the publication. Indeed, for some years, its 
great merits were not so extensively appreciated in England as on 
the Continent: but at length justice has been done to it in the 
country which gave it birth,—it is a mine to which every one engaged 
in scientific pursuits must have recourse with advantage, and it is no 
less true that ‘it contains the original hints of more things since 
claimed as discoveries, than can perhaps be found in a single pro- 
duction of any known author.’ ‘One of the men most distinguished 
for science in Europe has been known to say, that if his library were 
on fire, and he could save only one book from the conflagration, it 
should be the Lectures‘of Dr. Young.’ 

In 1810, Dr. Young was appointed Physician to St. George’s 
Hospital; but his private practice, though respectable, was never 
extensive. His biographer has, we think, pointed out the true cause 
with great discrimination: ‘In his profession, his published labors 
would prove him to have been of the most learned of scientific phy- 
sicians, and his judgment and acuteness were equally great; but in 
the practice of medicine he was not one of those who were likely to 
win the most extended occupation among the multitude. He was 
averse to some of the ordinary methods by which it is acquired. He 
never affected an assurance which he did not feel, and had, perhaps, 
rather a tendency to fear the injurious effects which might eventually 
result from the application of powerful remedies, than to any over- 
weeéning confidence in their immediate efficacy. His treatises bear 
the same impress. ‘That on consumption is a most striking instance 
of his assiduity in collecting all recorded facts, and his abstinence 
from drawing inferences from isolated cases, or putting forth that 
which he did not feel was established with certainty. Possibly he 
herein was an example, that increase of knowledge does not tend to 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 241 


increase of confidence, and that those whose acquirements are the 
greatest meet in the progress of their investigations with most that 
leads to distrust.’ 

Dr. Young had previously given a course of lectures on the Ele- 
ments of the Medical sciences at the Middlesex Hospital, of which 
a syllabus was published in 1809. These lectures, he himself said, 
were little frequented, ‘ on account of the usual miscalculation of the 
lecturer, who gave his audience more information in a given time 
than it was in their power to follow.’ . 

In 1813, he published his ‘Introduction to Medical Literature, 
including a System of Practical Nosology ;? a work of considerable 
labor and of the highest practical utility. To this work he prefixed 
a preliminary ‘ Essay on the Study of Physic,’ partly founded on 
that of the German Professor Vogel, in which is contained his own 
conception of the qualities requisite to constitute a well educated 
physician, by which it will appear that his notion of the character 
was elevated above the ordinary standard of humanity: ‘he enumer- 
ates nearly every possible quality of which man could wish, but of 
which few could hope, the attainment.’ 

Dr. Young was a frequent contributer to the Quarterly Review, 
having been induced, at the instance of his friend Mr. George Ellis, 
to furnish articles on medical subjects. His communications, how- 
ever, soon branched into other lines, connected with the higher de- 
partments of science, and containing frequently more of original 
research than of immediate criticism. In the catalogue of his wri- 
tings, which accompanies this memoir, will be found a list of his papers 
in that journal. We shall only here mention an admirable philo- 
logical dissertation on the Structure of Language, contained in the 
review of Adelung’s Mithridates, Vol. X, October, 1813. This is 
remarkable, as it was the immediate means of leading him.to the 
investigation of the lost literature of Ancient Egypt. The account 
of his discoveries on this subject is given in the words of his bi- 
ographer, because an unjust attempt has been made to wrest from 
Dr. Young the merit of having first discovered a key to the hiero- 
glyphies. . , 

‘In the year 1814, Sir William Rouse Boughton had brought with 
him from Egypt some fragments of papyri, which he put into the 
hands of Dr. Young; the fragment of the Rosetta Stone having 
about this time been deposited in the British Museum, and a correct 
copy of its three inscriptions having been engraved and circulated 


242 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


by the Society of Antiquaries. Dr. Young first proceeded to exam- 
ine the Enchorial Inscription, and afterwards the sacred characters ; 
and, after a minute comparison of these documents, he was enabled 
to attach some ‘Remarks on Egyptian Papyri, and on the Inscrip- 
tion of Rosetta,” containing an interpretation of the principal parts 
of both the Egyptian inscriptions on the pillar, to a paper of Sir 
William Boughton’s, which was published by the Society of Anti- 
quaries in 1815, in the 18th volume of the Archzologia. 

‘Dr. Young now found that he had discovered a key to the lost 
literature of Ancient Egypt. He had occupied himself, though 
without. deriving from it the assistance he at first expected, in the 
study of the Coptic and Thebaic versions of the Scriptures; but 
having satisfied himself of the nature and origin of the Enchorial 
character, he produced the result to the world anonymously in the 
Museum Criticum of Cambridge, part vi, published in 1815; being 
then determined to prosecute the discovery, but at the same time 
abstaining from claiming it in a more substantive form, from the reso- 
lution he had previously taken to be known only as a medical author. 

‘The labor he bestowed on these investigations, and the minute- 
ness and accuracy with which. he copied the papyri and compared 
the materials which came into his hands, would be nearly incredible 
to those who had not access to him whilst employed on this pursuit. 

‘In 1816, he printed and circulated two additional letters relating 
to his hieroglyphical discoveries and the inscription of Rosetta; the 
first addressed to the Archduke John of Austria, who had recently 
been in this country, the other to M. Akerblad. These letters an- 
nounce the progress of the discovery of the relation between the 
Egyptian characters and hieroglyphics, forming the basis on which 
Dr. Young continued his inquiries, as well as of the system after- 
wards.carried further in its details by M. Champollion, whose atten- 
tion had long been directed to similar studies, and in which he has 
since so greatly distinguished himself. The letters were first pub- 
lished when reprinted in the seventh number of the Museum Criti- 
cum, in 1821; and were, with the former letters in that work, be= 
yond all question or dispute, the earliest announcement of the dis- 
covery of a key to a character which had remained uninterpreted 
for ages.’ Mage 

The whole results of his discoveries on this subject were first 
brought out in a perfect and concentrated form in the article Keypr, 
published in the Supplement to the Encyclopedia Britannica, to 


_ 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 243 


which work Dr. Young furnished sixty three articles, scientific, bio- 
graphical and literary, which are designated by two consecutive let- 
ters of the sentence Fortunam ex aliis. His adoption of this motto 
is deemed ‘to have been caused by the consideration that he had not 
then succeeded to his wish or expectation in his profession, and that 
he had reason to complain that the extent and utility of his labors in 
science, after having been fully appreciated by the philosophers on 
the Continent, had not appeared to have met with the same accept- 
ance among his own countrymen.’ .» 

This feeling was, however, transitory, and was, indeed, hardly well 
founded. The fact is, that Dr. Young, by those best qualified to form 
a judgment, was acknowledged to rank in the highest scale, if not to 
stand at the head, of the men of science and literature of England, 
and his reputation was duly appreciated on the Continent; but the 
studious concealment with which his manifold contributions to the 
stock of human knowledge in science and philology were stolen into 
the world, prevented him from enjoying that wide extended fame 
with his countrymen to which he was justly entitled, and which he 
really did enjoy in an extensive circle of truly eminent friends. 

The philosophical articles of Dr. Young in the Supplement to the 
Encyclopedia Britannica, contain the results of his most elaborate 
investigations. His biographical sketches in the same work are ad- 
mirably given; and the Life of Porson, in particular, has been pointed 
oui as ‘a masterly production, containing a very interesting indication 
of some of Dr. Young’s opinions, both on the value of classical studies 
and on the mechanism of the human mind.’ The article Layeuaces, 
in the same work, contains the fruits of his investigations on the sub- 
ject, into which he had been led when engaged in reviewing Adelung’s 
Mithridates for the Quarterly Review. 

Early in 1817, Dr. Young paid a second visit to Paris, and was 
received with that consideration due to him in the scientific cireles 
there. He was happy in renewing his intercourse with Humboldt, 
Arago, Cuvier and Gay-Lussac ; and such was the pleasure derived 
from his flattering reception, that, having occasion to return to Lon- 
don for a short period, he was induced to make a second visit of a 
few weeks to Paris in the summer of the same year. 

In 1818, he was appointed one of the Commissioners for taking 
into consideration the state of the Weights and Measures employed 
throughout Great Britam. ‘To this Commission he acted as Seere- 
tary, and furnished the scientific calculations and the account of the 


244 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


measures customarily in use, attached to the three reports laid by 
them before Parliament. It appears to have been Dr. Young’s opin- 
ion that, ‘though theoretically it might be desirable that all weights © 
and measures should be reducible to a common standard of scientific 
accuracy, yet that practically the least possible disturbance of that 
to which people had been long habituated was the point to be looked 
to, and on this ground he was extremely averse to unnecessary 
changes.’ 

Towards the end of the same year, Dr. Young was appointed 
Secretary to the Board of Longitude, with the charge of the super- 
vision of the Nautical Almanack, having been before named one of 
the Commissioners without his previous knowledge. This appoint- 
ment was to him a very desirable one, though the labor in which it 
involved him was great. His anxiety to increase his medical prac- 
tice henceforth ceased, and it made that the business of his life which 
had always been congenial to his inclination. 

For the first sixteen years after his marriage, Dr. Young had been 
accustomed to pass his summers at Worthing, with a view to the 
practice of his profession. He now discontinued his visits, and de- 
voted the summer of 1819 to a hasty tour into Italy. In about five 
months he visited the most remarkable places, and examined the 
Egyptian monuments preserved in the museums of that country, re- 
turning to England by Switzerland and the Rhine. 

From the year 1820 to the close of his life, Dr. Young continued 
to furnish a variety of astronomical and nautical collections to Mr. 
Brande’s ‘Journal of Science,’ together with some philological 
papers. : 

‘In 1821 he published anonymously an ‘“ Elementary Illustration 
of the Celestial Mechanics of La Place, with some additions rela- 
ting to the motion of Waves and of Sound, and to the Cohesion of 
Fluids.” This volume, and the article “Tides” in the Supplement 
to the Encyclopedia, Dr. Young considered as containing the most 
fortunate results of his mathematical labors.’ ‘He proceeds (says 
his biographer) in his own course and manner of investigation, and 
uses his own processes, and the great reach of mind displayed in 
these works seems universally acknowledged ; but whether he has 
sufficiently established all the points which he considered himself to 
have proved, remains. matter of dispute among those most qualified 
to judge. ‘They were spoken of in the highest terms of praise by 
Mr. Davies Gilbert from the chair of the Royal Society ; but there 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 245 


are some amongst the most distinguished of surviving English phi- 
losophers, who still think that this theory of the Tides rests too ex- 
clusively on analogies, and that many of the elements of the com- 
putation are too much out of human reach to render the boldness of 
the original thought susceptible of being subjected to the severity of 
mathematical deduction.’ 

‘Dr. Young, as a mathematician, was of an elder school, and was 
possibly somewhat prejudiced against the system now obtaining 
amongst the continental and English philosophers; as he thought 
the powers of intellect exercised by a preceding race of mathemati- 
cians were in no small danger of being lost or weakened by the sub- 
stitution of processes in their nature mechanical.’ 

He again visited Paris in 1823, and in the same year published 
his ‘ Account of some Discoveries in Hieroglyphical Literature and 
Egyptian Antiquities,’ in which he gave his own original alphabet, 
his translations from papyri, and the extensions which his alphabet 
had received from M.Champollion. This was his first acknowledg- 
ed non-professional publication since 1804,—having attained his fif- 
tieth year, as he states in his preface, and determined to throw off 
the shackles by which he had considered himself bound by the eti- 
quette of a medical practitioner. 

He made an excursion to Spa and to Holland in 1821, and in 
this year undertook the medical responsibility and the mathematic- 
al direction of a Society for Life Insurance, and declined all par- 
ticipation in the speculation, but had the disinterested satisfaction of 
Witnessing its prosperity. ‘This connexion led him into researches 
in which he took great interest, and “produced his ‘ Formula for Ex- 
pressing the Decrement of Human Life,’ published in the Philo- 
sophical Transactions for 1826; and a ‘ Practical Application of the 
Doctrine of Chances,’ published i in the Journal of Science for Oc- 
tober in the same year. 

In the previous year he had removed from Welbeck Street to a 
house which he had built in Park Square, in the Regent’s Park, 
where he led the life of a philosopher, and expressed himself as 
having now attained all the main objects he had looked forward to in 
life—of his ‘hopes or his wishes; this end being, to use his own 
words, ‘the pursuit of such fame as he valued, or such acquire- 
ments as he might think to deserve it.’ In 1827, he was elected 
one of the eight foreign members of the Royal Institute of France. 

With the exception of the consumptive tendency by which his 
youth had been visited, his health had hitherto been uninterrupted by 

Vol. XXII.—No. 2. 32 


246 Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 


a day’s serious illness. In the summer of 1828, he went to Geneva 
and appeared to suffer what was to him an unusual degree of fa- 
tigue; on great bodily exertion there was a perceptible diminution 
of strength, and symptoms of age appeared to come upon him, 
which contrasted strongly with the freedom from complaints he had 
hitherto enjoyed. 

The Commitee of Finance having-recommended to the Govern- 

ment the abolition of the Board of Longitude, a bill was passed to 
that effect, permitting the Admiralty to. retain the officer entrusted 
- with the calculations of the Nautical Almanack: this occured du- 
ring the time that Dr. Young was abroad, but he continued to ex- 
ecute these duties. Whether the measure was well or ill founded 
we shall not stay to inquire, but it produced great heart-burnings 
and discontent among those scientific men who considered them- 
selves or their friends treated unhandsomely, as well as illiberally, 
in the manner in which their services had been dispensed with. It 
appears that the occasional assistance of, men of science was found 
to be so necessary to many departments connected with the Admi- 
ralty, that it was found expedient to form anew council of three 
members for the performance of duties which had before devolved 
on the Board of Longitude, and for this purpose Dr. Young, Capt- 
ain Sabine, and Mr. Faraday, were appointed. 

The consequence of this change involved Dr. Young in more la- 
bor than his declining state of health rendered him competent to 
perform without injury, and exacerbated a complaint which must 
have been long, though insensibly, in progress, but. which now was 
bringing him rapidly to a stafe of extreme debility. From the 
month of Febuary 1829, his illness continued with some slight vari- 
ations, but he was gradually sinking into greater and greater weak- 
ness till the morning of the 10th of May, when he expired without 
a struggle, having hardly completed his fifty sixth year. He was 
attended through his illness by his friends Dr. Chambers and Dr. 
Nevinson. The disease proved to be an ossification of the aorta, 
and every appearance indicated an advance of age, not brought on 

_ probably by the natural course of time, nor even by constitutional 
formation, but by unwearied and incessant labor of the mind from 
the earliest days of infancy. His remains were deposited in a vault 
in the church of Farnborough, Kent. 

It has been truly said of this extraordinary man, that as a scholar, 
physician, a linguist, an antiquary, a mathematician, and philosopher, 


Memoir of the Life of Dr. Thomas Young. 247 


he has added to almost every department of human knowledge that 
which will be remembered to after times. In the eloquent eulogy 
pronounced by Mr. Davies Gilbert from the Chair of the Royal 
Society it is observed, that ‘he came into the world with a confi- 
dence in his own talents, growing out of an expeciation of excel- 
lence entertained in common by all his friends, which expectation 
was more than realized in the progress of his future life. ‘The mul- 
tiplied objects which he pursued were carried to such an extent, 
that each might have been supposed to have exclusivly occupied 
the full powers of his mind; knowledge in the abstract, the most 
enlarged generalizations, and the most minute and. intricate details, 
were equally effected by him; but he had most pleasure in that 
which appeared to be most difficult of investigation.’ ‘The example 
(says Mr. Gilbert) is only to be followed by those of equal perseve- 
rance,’ the concentration of research within the limits of some de- 
fined portion of science, is rather to be recommended than the en- 
deavor to embrace the whole. 

Dr. Young’s opinion on this subject is stated by his biographer to 
have been, ‘that it was probably most advantageous to mankind 
that the researches of some inquirers should be concentrated within 
a given compass, but that others should pass more rapidly through a 
wider range—that the faculties of the mind were more exercised, 
and probably rendered stronger, by going beyond the rudiments 
and overcoming the great elementary difficulties of a variety of stu- 
dies, than by employing the same number of hours in any one pur- 
suit—that the doctrine of the division of labor, however applicable 
to material product, was not so to intellect, and that it went to re- 
duce the dignity of man in the scale of rational existence. He 
thought it impossible to foresee the capabilities of improvement in 
any science, so much of accident having led to the most important 
discoveries, that no man could say what might be the comparative 
advantage of any one study rather than that of another ; and though 
he would scarcely have recommended the plan of his own as the 
model of those of others, he still was satisfied in the course which 
he had pursued.’ 

It has been said that the powers of the imagination were the on- 
ly qualities of which Dr. Young’s mind was destitute ; the writer of 
this memoir thinks this want at least doubtful from the highly poet- 
ical cast of some of his early Greek translations, and is of opinion 
that it might with more justice haye been said ‘ that he never culti- 
vated the talent of throwing a brilliancy on objects which he had as- 


248 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


certained did not belong to them,’ and that his entire devotion to 
the simple truth, on all occasions, made him averse to the slightest 
degree of exaggeration, or even of coloring; and that, whether 
gifted or not with imagination, Dr. Young would on principle, have 
abstained from its indulgence. 

In all the relations of private life, Dr. Young was as exemplary 
as his talents were great, and his whole career was one unbending 
course of usefulness and rectitude. 


Art. I.—An Essay on Chemical Nomenclature, prefixed to the 
treatise on Chemistry; by J. J. Berzexius. Translated from 
the French,* with notes, by A. D. Bacur, Prof. of Nat. Philos. 
and-Chem. in the University of Pennsylvania. 


Tue nomenclature explained in this essay, is the language in 
which are recorded the labors of the most experienced chemist of 
our day, the author of a work rich in the philosophy as in the details of 
chemical science. It has also become, to a certain extent, the lan- 
guage of one of the most industrious portions of the chemical com- 
munity, the chemists of Germany. By the French translation, un- 
der the revision of Berzelius, of his Treatise on Chemistry, the 
system will be placed more immediately before the chemists of 
France, and will be introduced to the knowledge of many in Eng- 
land and in this country, who may not heretofore have had access 
to its stores in the original, or in the German translation. 

I have thought that by clothing this essay in an English dress and 
by adding notes explanatory of the views of the author, as develo- 
ped in his work, some of the difficulties may be removed which 

‘must attend the study by those used to a very different nomencla- 
ture ; and that thus an examination of the system may be induced. 
If even such a result should not be attained, the study of the work 
will, it is hoped, be facilitated ; a study which cannot fail to afford an 
adequate reward for any pains which may be taken in its prosecution. 

The notes are chiefly illustrative of the text; they attempt to 
show the views of the author when differing from those to which we 


* The present translation is made, after correcting the errors pointed out by the au- 
thor, in his list of errata for the first volume of the French translation, which volume 
he denounced, as being incorrect; the second volume was translated by another per- 
son, under the direction of Prof. Berzelius, and to this volume the corrections for the 
first were appended. With these emendations, it was virtually adopted by the author. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 249 


are accustomed, and to give such reasons for them as he has record- 
ed in the pages of his work. 


Essay of Berzelius on the Nomenclature of Chemistry. 


This article on the nomenclature of Chemistry by which my Ele- 
ments are prefaced, is addressed to those who have made some pro- 
gress in the science and are therefore more or less accustomed to a 
different system. Beginners will become acquainted with the nom- 
enclature as they advance in their course. 

Every science requires a systematic nomenclature. That this is 
especially the case in relation to Chemistry, has been fully proved 
by the confusion which prevailed before the adoption of the happy 
idea of De Morveau. The nomenclature which has been in use 
since 1780 is the fruit of the labors of De Morveau, directed and 
aided by Lavoisier, Berthollet, and Fourcroy. The great advan- 
tage of this system is to be found in the fact, that as soon as we are 
made acquainted with the composition of a body we can tell its 
name without having had previously any knowledge of it: thus the 
memory is not burthened with names. A systematic nomenclature 
is, moreover, the expression of a theory; so that while theory as- 
signs a name, the name expresses the theory. ‘To this connection 
of nomenclature and theory the objection has been urged that the 
nomenclature must undergo changes whenever theories change, which 
would not be the case if names were arbitrary. Since, however, all 
changes of theory tend towards greater simplicity, such a change of 
nomenclature facilitates, instead of retarding the advance of science. 
In general nothing which tends to render any of the parts of a sci- 
ence stationary can be beneficial to it; all its parts should advance 
as discovery and information multiply. Changes have been made 
from time to time, in the nomenclature of Guyton De Morveau, not 
in accordance with its fundamental principles, and additions have 
been made to it which do not harmonize with the rest of the system. 
Authors have adopted names accidentally given to new substances, 
and as a consequence the nomenclature of Chemistry has by de- 
grees become unwieldy and ill adapted to express many new and 
even some well known compounds. In order, therefore, to convey 
my ideas, it was necessary to devise a nomenclature which should 
be appropriate and at the same time sufficiently analogous to that 
now used in France, to be easily understood by those accustomed to 
that system. ‘This nomenclature I shall explain as briefly as possible. 


250 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


SIMPLE SUBSTANCES. 


I. Meratuors.(1) (Simple non metallic bodies, all electro- 
negative.) 


Oxygen. Sulphur. ” Bromine. . Carbon. 
Hydrogen. Phosphorus. Todine. _» Boron. 
Nitrogen. . Chlorine. Fluorine. Silicium. 


Il. Evectro-Necative Merats. 


Selenium. Molybdenum. Tellurium. 

Arsenic. Tungsten. * ‘Titanium. 

Chromium. Antimony. Tantalum.(2) 

Il. Execrro-Posrrive Merats. 

Gold. Copper. Cobalt. _ Magnesium. 
Platinum. Uranium. ehiront Calcium. 
Iridium. Bismuth. Manganese. Strontium. 
Osmium. Tin. Cerium. Barium. 
Palladium. Lead. Zirconium. Lithium. 
Rhodium. Cadmium. Yttrium. Sodium. 
Silver. Zinc. Glucinium. Potassium. 
Mercury. Nickel. Aluminium. 


NOMENCLATURE OF BINARY COMPOUNDS. 


_ The names of the binary combinations are formed by giving to 
one of the components the termination ade, or uret, forming the sub- 


(1) Metalloid, a non-metallic body. On the subject of this class, Berzelius re- 
marks: “certain simple substances, characterized by peculiar and well marked 
properties, are called metals; ethers do not possess these characters. Hence the 
division into metallic and non-metallic bodies; the latter class I call by the name 
of metalloids. This division has a connexion with the chemical and electro-chem- 
ical relations of bodies, since the metalloids, and their combinations with oxygen, 
always tend to the positive pole, and consequently are electro-negative. Many of 
the metals are likewise electro-negative, and if we undertake to draw the line be- 
tween the two classes, it will be found that the distinctive characters are so gradu- 
ally lost, that certain bodies may, with as much propriety, be ranked with the one 
as the other class.” 

This term, metalloid, from its derivation, (uézaAaov, a metal, and «vdos, likeness,) 
would seem to mean a body like a metal, and in this sense there was an attempt 
made to introduce it into chemical nomenclature, to denote the metallic radical of an 
alkali, &c. The sense in which our author has chosen to employ it is exactly the 
reverse of this, and should be well fixed in the memory before proceeding. Re- 
marks in relation to the order in which the substances in this table are arranged, 
will be found in note third.— Trans. 

(2) Better known to the English and American chemist as Columbium.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 251 


stantive, as oxide, sulphuret, and to the other component the termina- 
tion ous, or ic, forming the adjective, as for example, sulphurous, 
sulphuric. The substantive is formed from the electro-negative 
component, the adjective from the electro-positive. This rule should 
be strictly observed, that there may be nothing arbitrary in the no- 
menclature. When the more electro-positive element in a binary 
combination, belongs to the class of metalloids, or to that of the 
electro-negative metals, the termination ide is generally given to the 
name derived from the more electro-negative component;(3) but 
when the more electro-positive element is an electro-positive metal, 
the termination uret is applied to the electro-negative component. 
Thus, for example, we say, arsenious sulphide, sodic sulphuret. 
The termination ous given to the more electro-positive element, de- 
notes a combination in a lower proportion than that expressed by 1c, 
and qualifies the proportion of the electro-negative element. Pro- 
portions lower than either one of these are expressed by prefixing 
hypo to the name of the compound with which the proportions of 
the element are compared, and higher proportions by prefixing hyper. 
Thus we have sulphuric acid, hyposulphuric acid, sulphurous acid, 
hyposulphurous acid, hypermolybdic sulphide. Sometimes the par- 


(3) In the application of this rule to the case of the combination of two electro- 
negative bodies, we must depend, toa certain extent, upon the author of the sys- 
tem: since it is only generally that the termination ide is to be given to the more 
electro-negative body. Examples of deviation from a rigid adherence to this rule 
are quite frequent. 

The substances, in each of the classes which compose the table of simple bodies, 
being arranged nearly in the order in which the author considers it most convenient 
to treat them, and not with reference to their electrical relations, a table in which 
the substances are arranged according to the electro-negative order is subjoined. 
(See Berzelius, Vol. 1V, p. 570.) 


Oxygen. Carbon. Mercury. Thorium. 
Sulphur. Antimony. Silver. Zirconium. 
Nitrogen. Tellurium. Copper. Aluminium. 
Fluorine. Tantalum. Uranium. Vitti 

_ Chlorine. Titanium. Bismuth. Glucinium. 
Bromine. Silicium. Tin. Magnesium. 
Todine. Hydrogen. Lead. Calcium. 
Selenium. Caimium. Strontium. 
Phosphorus. Gold. Cobalt. Barium. 
Arsenic. Osmium. Nickel. Lithium. 
Chromium. Tridium. Iron. Sodium. 
Molybdenum. Platinum. Zine. Potassium. 
Tungsten. Rhodium. Manganese. Trans. 
Boron. Palladium. Cerium. 


252 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


ticles sub or super, are prefixed to the name derived from the elec- 
tro-negative body, as when we say subowide, superonide. Wemay 
also use terms of this kind, sulphuret of copper, oxide of iron, which 
express the nature of the components of substances, without refer- 
ence to the proportions in which they are combined. _ 

The electro-negative compounds formed by oxygen have always 
been distinguished from the electro-positive, formed by the same ele- 
ment in the nomenclature of de Morveau, although no reference 
was had to such a theoretical distinction. The first class were call- 
ed acids, the second oxides. In these names and their terminations, 
there is a deviation from the rule laid down above, which usage has 
sanctioned.(4) This marked distinction in nomenclature between the 
electro-negative and electro-positive compounds is very convenient, 
and I propose to extend it to all binary compounds.—I shall, there- 
fore, call those combinations of sulphur, selenium, tellurium, chlo- 
rine, bromine, iodine, and fluorine, with bodies less electro-negative 
than themselves, which in their atomic constitution correspond to the 
acids,(5) by the names sulphides, selenides, tellurides, chlorides, bro- 
mides, rodides, and. fluorides: while those combinations of the same 
bodies with the electro-positive metals, which in the atomie rela- 
tions of the components correspond to the bases, I shall term, sul- 
phurets, seleniurets, tellurets, chlorurets, bromurets, todurets, and fluo- 
rurets.(6) The same rule should be followed in those combinations 


(4) In a perfect nomenclature, according to the system of Berzelius, the oxides 
awould have the name orurets, and the acids would be called oxides. Reference is 
made in this paragraph to such a eonsequence of the rule of nomenclature.— Trans. 

(5) The object of a reference to the atomic relations of the components is devel- 
oped in the following paragraph, taken from the author’s general remarks upon the 
compounds of the metals with sulphur. (Vol. II, p. 252.) ‘*The combinations 6f 
sulphur with the electro-positive metals are called swlphwrets or sulphobases. Those 
with the electro-negative metals are called sulphides, either when their composition 
is proportional to that of an acid compound of the metal with oxygen, or when they 
are capable of combining with sulphobases.”— Trans. 

(6) Oxygen, sulphur and tellurium “unite with electro-negative combustibles, 
forming electro-negative compounds, similar in certain particulars to acids, and with 
electro-positive combustibles, forming electro-positive compounds, analogous to the 
bases. These compounds can neutralize each other, just as the oxides neutralize 
the acids, and thus they produce salts.” (Vol. I, p. 220.) ae 

“We have said, in treating of oxygen, that sulphur forms combinations which are 
analogous to acids, and others analogous to buses. The electro-negative compounds © 
are called sulphides, the electro-positive sulphurets or sulphobases.” (Vol. I, p. 253.) 

«The combinations of the electro-positive metals with selenium are called sele- 
niurets or seleni-bases, those of the electro-negative metals are called selenides. 
These latter unite with the former, producing salts.” (Vol. II, p. 420.)—Zrans. 


Chenncal Nomenclature of Berzelius. 253 


of two electro-negative bodies, which have an atomic constitution 
corresponding to that of an oxide of the least electro-negative ele- 
ment ; for example, we should say phosphoric chloruret,(a) carbonic 
chloruret. . 

In the chemical nomenclature used in France, the different de- 
grees of oxidation are denoted by the Greek particles, proto, deuto, 
trito, prefixed to the name derived from the electro-negative ele- 
ment. The highest degree is frequently expressed by the Latin 
particle per. 

Ihave thought it better to depart from this method, because the 
resulting names are not manageable in the nomenclature of the more 
complex combinations. I therefore use the terms, ferrous oxide, 
and ferric oxide for protoxide of iron, and deutoxide of iron. We shall 
see in the sequel the advantages which result from this nomencla- 
ture when applied to the salts in their different degrees of neutrali- 
zation. Iridium and osmium have more than two oxides which 
form salts; I prefix to the regular name of the oxide the particle 
sus,(7) and say susiridious oxide, susiridic oxide, as will be seen in 
the enumeration of the oxides. 

Certain metals have oxides which contain so little oxygen as to 
be unable to combine with other oxidized bodies. I call these, subow- 
ides.(8) Other metallic oxides on the contrary, are too highly oxi- 
dized to combine with other oxidized bodies. I call these superox- 
ades.(9) The Greek particles, hypo and hyper should, properly, be 
used in these cases, since the word oaide is of Greek origin, but 
they are too much alike to be used without confusion. 

The nomenclature of oxidized bodies being given, that of the 
other binary combinations is strictly in accordance with the princi- 


(a) The phosphoric chloruret is proportional to an oxide of phosphorus; the car- 
bonic chloruret to the oxide of carbon. That is, the equivalent of oxygen in each 
case is replaced by an equivalent of chlorine.—Trans. 

(7) Susoxide. The term in the French translation is susoxide. The derivation 
I suppose to be from the Latin sursum, through the French sus. The French par- 
ticle sus is only used as in the following sentences, “ quart-en-sus,” (one fourth 
more.) *€ tiers-en-sus,” (one third more.)—Trans. 

(8) Suboxide. In the French translation sowsoxide.— Trans. 

(9) Superoxide. In the French suroxide.— Trans. 


Vou.— XXII. No 2. 33 


254 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzeluus. 


ples of that system. Thus, we say, phosphorous chloride, phosphoric 
chloride,(10) ferrous chloruret, ferric chloruret.(11) 


COMBINATIONS OF OXYGEN.*(12) . 


Hydric oxide, (water.) Protoxide of hydrogen. 
Hydric superoxide. Deutoxide of hydrogen. 
Hyposulphurous acid. 

Sulphurous acid. 


Hyposulphuric acid. 

Sulphuric acid. 

Nitrous oxide.(13) Protoxide of nitrogen. 
Nitric oxide. Deutoxide of nitrogen. 
Nitrous acid. 

Nitric acid. 

Hypophosphorous acid. 

Phosphorous acid. 

Phosphoric acid. 


(10) Berzelius admits the existence of three compounds of chlorine with phos- 
phorus, which he calls the phosphoric chloride, phosphorous chloride and phospho- 
rie chloruret. The first is analogous to phosphoric acid in the proportions of its ele- 
ments, the second to phosphorous acid, and the third to an oxide of phosphorus. 
These explanatory remarks are made in accordance with the peculiar views of Ber- 
zelius in relation to the composition of the acids of phosphorus.— Trans. 

(11) Several metals, when finely divided and thrown into chlorine, become heated 
to redness in the act of combining with the chlorine. These compounds are called 
chlorides when the body united to the chlorine is electro-negative, and chlorurets 
either when the same body is electro-positive, or when, being electro-negative, the 
proportions in which the bodies combine correspond to an oxide. (Vol. i, pp. 276, 
277.)—Trans. 

* The right hand column contains the names according to the nomenclature in 
common use, when they differ from those which I use. The synonymes are from 
the fifth edition of Thenard’s Chemistry.—Berzelius. 

(12) For the synonymes of the original, those to be found in the fonrth American 
edition of Turner’s Chemistry have been substituted.— Trans. 

(13) The composition of the compounds of nitrogen with oxygen is, according to 
Berzelius—nitrous oxide, two volumes of nitrogen and one of oxygen; nitric oxide, 
two volumes of nitrogen and two of oxygen. His nitrous acid is the hyponitrous 
acid of most of the French and English chemists; the nitrous acid of those chemists 
Berzelius does not regard as a distinct acid, although he admits its composition to be 
two volumes of nitrogen and four of oxygen, which would place it next below ni- 
trie acid. The reason given for this view, is that there is no satisfactory evidence 
that this nitrous acid combines, either directly or indirectly, with bases, to form 


salts; the bases, on the contrary, resolve it into nitrous acid (hyponitrous) and ni- 
tric acid,— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 255 


Chlorous oxide.*(14) Protoxide of chlorine. 
Chlorous acid. Peroxide of chlorine. 
Chloric acid. 

Oxychloric acid.+ Perchloric acid. 


Bromic acid. 
Todic acid.(15) 
Carbonic oxide. 
Carbonic acid. 


Boric acid. Boracic acid. 
Silicic acid. Silica. 
Selenic oxide. Oxide of selenium. 


Selenious acid. 

Selenic acid. 

Arsenious suboxide.(16) 
Arsenious acid. 

Arsenic acid. 


* Itis probable that this gaseous oxide of chlorine is the lowest degree of oxida- 
tion of chlorine, I call it chlorous oxide, because there probably exists a chloric ox- 
ide, composed of equal volumes of chlorine and oxygen, not yet discovered.— Ber- 
zelius. 

(14) The views of Berzelius, in relation to the combinations of chlorine and oxy- 
gen, differ from those of the French and English chemists, except in relation to the 
protoxide and chloric acid. He regards the peroxide of chlorine, of Gay-Lussac and 
Davy, as an acid, (chlorous acid,) and alleges that when exposed in its nascent state 
to bases it combines with them, forming a class of salts. These salts have a peculiar 
acrid taste; and destroy organic colors. He further contends, that when a base is 
added directly to chlorous acid, it is not wholly resolved into chloric acid and chlo- 
rine, as is proved by adding sulphuric acid, which liberates chlorous acid. The per- 
ehlorie (oxychloric) acid, Berzelius makes, after applying a correction to the analy- 
sis.of Stadion, to consist of one volume of chlorine and three of oxygen, but after- 
wards adopts the later analysis of Mitscherlich, which gives one volume of chlorine 
to three and a half of oxygen.— Trans. 

+ The use of the name could not be avoided, since the term, chloric acid, has 
’ been applied to a lower degree of oxidation, and could not be changed without in- 
convenience.— Berzelius. 

(15) Iodous acid is rejected, owing to the doubts thrown upon the experiment of 
Sementini. The number of the Journal of the Royal Institution of Great Britain 
for August, 1831, contains a reply of Sementini to the criticisms of Wohler, and a 
method of preparing iodous acid and the oxide of iodine, by the direct union of iodine 
and oxygen.— Trans. 

(16) Arsenious suboxide: the powder obtained by the exposure of metallic arse- 
nic to the air, and which is not usually regarded as a definite compound. In the 
text this is called arsenic oxide, but the mistake is corrected, in the body of the work, 
by the use of the term which has been substituted in this translation. — Zrans. 


256 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Chromic oxide.* __ Protoxide of chromium. 
Suschromic oxide.(17) 

Chromic acid. 

Molybdous oxide. 

Molybdic oxide. Protoxide of molybdenum. ~ 
Molybdic acid. 

Tungstic oxide. 

Tungstic acid. 

Antimonic oxide (Hypantimonious 


acid.) Protoxide of antimony. 
Antimonious acid. Deutoxide of antimony. 
Antimonic acid. Peroxide of antimony. 
Telluric acid, (Telluric oxide.) Oxide of tellurium. 
Tantalic oxide. Oxide of tantalum or columbium. 
Tantalic acid. | 
Titanic oxide. Protoxide of titanium. 
Titanic acid. Peroxide of titanium. 
Aurous oxide. Protoxide of gold. 
Auric oxide. Peroxide of gold. 
Platinous oxide. Protoxide of platinum. 
Platinic oxide. Peroxide of platinum. 


Tridious oxide.(18) 
Susiridious oxide. 
Tridic oxide. 
Susiridic oxide. 
Osmious oxide.(19) 


* Although the green oxide of chromium is the lowest combination now known 
of chromium with oxygen, I call it chromic oxide, because it contains three atoms of 
oxygen, and is isomorphous with aluminic oxide (alumina), manganic oxide and fer- 
ric oxide.— Berzelius. 

(17) Suschromic oxide. The brown oxide, generally supposed to be a mixture of 
the oxide and acid of chromium. Berzelius does not admit the experiments of Maus 
to be conclusive upon this point.— Zrans. 

(18) These four oxides of iridium are obtained by decomposing the corresponding 
chlorides by an alkali. The quantities of oxygen which they severally contain are 
in the ratio of 1, 14, 2 and 3.— Trans. ’ 

(19) Berzelius considers as proved the existence of four oxides of osmium, and as 
probable of one intermediate between the third and fourth. The volatile oxide or 
osmic acid is the only one of these compounds to be obtained, by directly combining 
osmium with oxygen; the others are obtained from the corresponding chlorides. 
The proportions of oxygen in the osmious, susosmious and osmic oxides, and in os- 
mic acid, are as 1,14, 2 and 4. The proportion of 3 of oxygen, which is wanting, 


is placed in the table as susosmic oxide; this oxide has a corresponding chloride.— 
Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelus. pret 


Susosmnious oxide. 
Gsmic oxide. 
Susosmic oxide. 


Osmic acid, (Biosmic oxide.) Oxide of osmium. 
Palladious oxide.(20) Oxide of palladium. 
Palladic oxide. 

Argentic oxide. Oxide of silver. 
Argentic superoxide.(21) : 
Mercurious oxide. Protoxide of mercury. 
Mercuric oxide. Peroxide of mercury. 
Cuprous oxide.(22) Protoxide of copper. 
Cupric oxide. . Peroxide of copper. 
Cupric superoxide. 

Uranious oxide. Protoxide of uranium. 
Uranic oxide. , Peroxide of uranium. 
Bismuthic oxide. Oxide of bismuth. 
Stannous oxide.(23) Protoxide of tin. 
Stannic oxide. Peroxide of tin. 
Plumbic suboxide. 

Plumbic oxide. Protoxide of lead. 
Plumbous superoxide. Deutoxide of lead. 
Plumbic superoxide. Peroxide of lead. 
Cadmic oxide. Oxide of cadmium. 
Ziucic suboxide. 

Zincic oxide. . Oxide of zinc. 
Zincie superoxide.(24) 

Niccolic oxide. sg Protoxide of nickel. 
Niccolous superoxide. Peroxide of nickel. 


Niccolic superoxide.(25) 


(20) The oxygen in these oxides is as 1 to 2: the first is the well known oxide of 
palladium.— Trans. 

(21) Obtained by Ritter, by the aid of galvanism. The oxide of silver, containing 
less oxygen than the argentic oxide, is not admitted by Berzelius.—7Zyans. 

(22) The first two oxides of copper agree with the statement adopted by Turner: 
the cupric peroxide of Berzelius was obtained by Thenard, by the use of the deut- 
oxide of hydrogen, and was found to contain twice as much oxygen as the cupric 
oxide.— Trans. 

(23) Suboxide, gray oxide of tin, obtained by the exposure of tin to the air: its 
composition is not known.— Trans. 

(24) Omitted in the original table; obtained by Thenard, by the action of the 
deutoxide of hydrogen.— Trans. 

(25) Its existence rendered probable by Thenard ; obtained by the action of the 
deutoxide of hydrogen upon the hydrated oxide.— Trans. 


258 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Cobaltic oxide. Protoxide of cobalt. 
Cobaltic superoxide. Peroxide of cobalt. 
Cobaltic acid.(26) 

Ferrous oxide.(27) Protoxide of iron. 
Ferric oxide. Peroxide of iron. 
Manganous oxide.(28) Protoxide of manganese. 
Manganic oxide. Deutoxide of manganese. 
Manganic superoxide. Peroxide of manganese. 
Manganic acid.(29) Manganeseous acid. 
Oxymanganic acid.(30) Manganesic acid. 
Cerous oxide.(31) _ Protoxide of cerium. 
Ceric oxide. Deutoxide of cerium. - 
Zirconic oxide, (zirconia. ) Oxide of zirconium. 
Thoric oxide, (thorina.)(32) Oxide of thorinium. 
Yttric oxide, (yttria.) Oxide of yttrium. 
Glucinic oxide, (glucina.) Oxide of glucinium. 
Aluminic oxide, (alumina.) Oxide of aluminium. 
Magnesic oxide, (magnesia.) Oxide of magnesium. 
Calcic oxide, (lime.) Protoxide of calcium. 


(26) Cobaltic acid is obtained in combination with ammonia, when that alkali is 
added to the nitrate of cobalt— Trans. 

(27) The black oxide of iron, considered as a combination of the black and red 
oxides, Berzelius calls ferroso-ferric oxide. In thus adopting the Latin termination 
for the first of the two names, he takes a liberty not sanctioned in his own remarks, 
as given by the French translator, but in which he is abundantly borne out by anal- 
ogy. This subject is again referred to, in note 73. 

(28) The red oxide Berzelius calls manganoso-manganic oxide. The names of 
these oxides are derived from that for manganese, stated by the author to be used by 
the German chemists, viz. manganium. This name prevents confusion between 
magnesium and its compounds, and manganesium and its combinations. Its use 
abbreviates the names of the oxides and of the acids of manganese.— Trans. 

(29) The manganic acid, obtained by calcining together the peroxide of manga- 
‘nese and the hydrate or nitrate of potassa, forms salts, which, according to Mitscher- 
lich, are isomorphous with the sulphates and chromates. Hence Berzelius infers 
that it contains three times the quantity of oxygen which exists in manganous ox- 
ide.—Trans. 

(30) Oxymanganic acid remains in solution when a strong acid is added to a dis- 
solved manganate: its salts are isomorphous with the oxychlorates.— Trans. 

(31) There is a combination of these two oxides, termed by Berzelius ceroso-ceric 
oxide.— Trans. 

(32) Not in the original table, having been discovered since the publication of the 
first volume: it is described in Vol. II. This oxide was found by Berzelius, in a min- 
eral from Norway, named thorite, which contains 57 per cent. of the earth.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 259 


Calcic superoxide.(33) » Peroxide of calcium. 

Strontianic oxide,(34)(strontiana.) Protoxide of strontium, (strontia.) 
Strontianic superoxide. Peroxide of strontium. 

Barytic oxide, (baryta.) Protoxide of barium. 

Barytic superoxide. ° Peroxide of barium. 

Lithic oxide, (lithina.)(d) Oxide of lithium, (lithia.) 

Sodic suboxide.(35) 

Sodic oxide, (soda.) ~ Protoxide of sodium. 3 
Sodic superoxide. Peroxide of sodium. 

Potassic suboxide.- 

Potassic oxide, (potassa.) Protoxide of potassium. 

Potassic superoxide. Peroxide of potassium. 


COMBINATIONS OF NITROGEN. 


Ammonia, (trihydric nitruret.) (36) 
Ammonium, (tetrahydric nitruret.) 
Cyanogen, (carbonic nitruret.) (37) 


(83) Obtained as a hydrate, by dropping lime water slowly into a solution of the 
deutoxide of hydrogen.— Trans. 

(84) The French translation has strontiane, and as Berzelius preserves the an in 
its combination, it cannot with propriety be rendered strontia.—Trans. 

(6) The remarks in note 33 apply also to this’ case. 

(85) The compounds of both sodium and potassium, ranked by Berzelius as sub- 
oxides, are supposed by the English chemists to be mixtures of the respective metals 
with their protoxides.— Trans. 

(86) To explain the nomenclature of the compounds of nitrogen with hydrogen, 
we must refer to the peculiar views of Berzelius in relation to the amalgam formed 
by ammonia, when acted upon by galvanism, in contact with mercury. He sup- 
poses that when a solution of ammonia is exposed to galvanic action, in contact with 

mercury, water is decomposed; the oxygen escapes, while the hydrogen converts 
the ammonia into a metal, ammonium. This metal may, therefore, be represented 
by ammonia, with an additional volume of hydrogen. When the amalgam is expo- 
sed to the action of water, out of the galvanic circuit, the ammonia combines with 
the water, liberating hydrogen gas. This view Berzelius supports by a reference 
to the experiment of Gay-Lussac and Thenard, in which the ammoniacal amalgam 
being admitted into a Torricellian vacuum was resolved into ammonia, hydrogen 
and mercury: the hydrogen, however, was less in bulk than is required by the 
theory. 

Ammonia, being composed of one volume of nitrogen and three volumes of hy- 
drogen, receives the name of trihydric nitruret, while the ammonium, represented 
by ammonia with an additional volume of hydrogen, is called tetrahydric nitruret.— 
Trans. 

(37) The English chemists consider cyanogen to be a bicarburet of nitrogen, 
composed of two volumes of the vapor of carbon and one volume of nitrogen, con- 
densed into one volume. This composition is inferred from the fact that one volume 


260 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


COMBINATIONS OF SULPHUR. 


Phosphorous sulphide.(38) 
Phosphoric sulphide. 


Boric sulphide. Sulphuret of boron. 

Carbonic sulphide. Bisulphuret of carbon. 

Silicic sulphide. Sulphuret of silicium. 

Selenious sulphide.(39) Sulphuret of selenium. 

Subsulphuret of arsenic.(40) 

Hyparsenious sulphide. Protosulphuret of arsenic, (real- 

gar.) 

Arsenious sulphide. Sesquisulphuret of arsenic, (orpi- 
: ment.) 

Arsenic sulphide. Persulphuret of arsenic. 


Persulphuret of arsenic. 
Chromic sulphuret. 
Suschromic sulphide. 
Molybdous sulphuret.(41) 


of cyanogen requires for complete combustion two volumes of oxygen, and yields 
two volumes of carbonic acid and one volume of nitrogen. If one volume of car- 
bonic acid be composed of one volume of vapor of carbon and one volume of oxygen, 
then one volume of cyanogen must contain two volumes of the vapor of carbon and 
one volume of nitrogen. Berzelius adopts, for the composition of carbonic acid, 
one volume of the vapor of carbon and two volumes of oxygen, forming two volumes 
of carbonic acid: that is, he considers the hypothetical vapor of carbon to be twice 
as dense as it is made by the English chemists. This view gives in the two volumes 
of carbonic acid referred to above, as the product of the combustion of one volume 
of cyanogen, but one volume of the vapor of carbon, and makes cyanogen a com- 
pound of equal volumes of the vapor of carbon and of nitrogen, that is, a carburet of 
nitrogen, (carbonic nitruret.)— Trans. 

(38) The sulphides, it will be recollected, are electro-negative compounds of sul- 
phur, playing the part of acids; that is, combining with the sulphurets or electro- 
positive compounds, which answer to the bases.— Trans. 

(39) Obtained by passing sulphuretted hydrogen through selenious acid.— Trans. 

(40) Subsulphuret of arsenic. This compound contains only one twelfth part of the 
sulphur found in the hyparsenious sulphide, while the persulphuret of arsenic con- 
tains nine times as much sulphur as the hyparsenious sulphide. Such a case is not 
specially provided for in the new nomenclature, hence the names subsulphuret of 
arsenic and persulphuret of arsenic.—Trans. 

(41) Berzelius describes three compounds of sulphur with molybdenum, the first 
being a base and the two others electro-negative. These latter are the molybdic 
and hypermolybdic sulphides; the first is the molybdic sulphuret. The proportions 
of sulphur in these compounds being as 2, 3 and 4, renders probable the existence 
of a lower compound, the molybdous suJphuret of the table —Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 261 


Molybdic sulphuret. Sulphuret of molybdenum. 
Molybdic sulphide. 

Hypermolybdic sulphide. Se dee 
Tungstic sulphuret.(42) Sulphuret of tungsten. 
Tungstic sulphide. 

Hypantimonious sulphide, (antimo- 


nic sulphuret. ) Protosulphuret of antimony. 
Antimonious sulphide. Sequisulphuret of antimony. — 
Antimonic sulphide. Bisulphuret of antimony. 
Telluric sulphide. Sulphuret of tellurium. 
Tantalic sulphide. Sulphuret of columbium. : 
Titanic sulphide. Sulphuret of titanium. 
Stannous sulphuret.(43) Protosulphuret of tin. 
Susstannous sulphuret. Sesquisulphuret of tin. 
Stannic sulphide. Bisulphuret of tin. = * 
Aurous sulphuret.(44). 
Auric sulphuret. Sulphuret of gold. 
Platinous sulphuret. 
Platinic sulphuret. Sulphuret of platinum. 


The rest of the series is exactly the same as that of the combi- 
nations of oxygen. 

There are, however, differences between the series of compounds 
of sulphur and that of the compounds of oxygen; several metals 
forming more numerous combinations with sulphur than with oxygen. 
Potassium, sedium, and ammonium,(45) the radicals of the alkalies 


(42) The first of these corresponds to the oxide of tungsten, the second to its 
acid.— Trans. 

(43) Although the stannic sulphide alone appears in the table of the original, the 
three compounds introduced into the translation are to be found in the third volume, 
under the head of the compounds of tin and sulphur.—7Trans. 

(44) Aurous sulphuret; obtained by passing a stream of sulphuretted hydrogen 
gas through a solution of the chloride of gold.— Trans. 

(45) ‘“‘ Ammonium combines with sulphur in several proportions; the compounds 
may be obtained by distilling the analogous compounds of sulphur and potassium 
with the ammonic chloride.” ‘In the double decompositions which take place, the 
potassium combines with the chlorine and the ammonium with the sulphur.” “Am- 
moniacal gas is not absorbed by sulphur, because the hydrogen necessary to produce 
the metal (ammonium) is wanting. _If the vapor of sulphur and ammoniacal gas be 
passed together through a red hot tube, one part of the alkali is decomposed, yielding 
its hydrogen to the other part, which is thus converted into. ammonium, and nitrogen 
is liberated. If the products be collected in a receiver, kept at a low temperature, 
fine yellow crystals of sulphuret of ammonium will be produced. The ratio of the 
elements to each other, in these crystals, has not been determined.”—Trans. 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 34 


262 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


each produce four at least, of which one only in each case is a base. 
Cobalt produces three, only one of which isa base. Iron gives 
three, two of which are bases. ‘Those sulphurets which are not 
bases and do not combine with other sulphurets, may without incon- 
venience be named according to their atomic constitution ; for ex- 
ample, bisulphuret,(46) trisulphuret, quadrisulphuret, persulphu- 
ret of potassium, &c : the last degree contains five atoms of sulphur, 
which composition it would be difficult to express in the name of 
the compound. ' The sulphurets of iron,(47) are—the ferrous sul- 
phuret, the ferric sulphuret, and the bisulphuret of iron: those of 
‘cobalt are, the cobaltic sulphuret, the sesquisulphuret, and the bi- 
sulphuret of cobalt: those of potassium, sodium, ammonium, &c. 
are the potassic, sodic, ammonic, &c. sulphurets, the bisulphuret and 
trisulphuret, quadrisulphuret, and persulphuret of potassium, sodi- 
um, ammonium, §c. By putting the name of the metal in the geni- 
tive case when the sulphurets are not bases, they are easily distin- 
guished from those which are. 

All that has been laid down in relation to the nomenclature of 
the compounds of sulphur, applies also to those of selenium and tel- 
lurium. Oxygen, sulphur, selenium, and tellurium constitute a dis- 
tinct class of bodies, which.form electro-negative compounds (aczds, 
sulphides, selenides, tellurides,) capable of combining with the elec- 
tro-positive compounds formed by the same bodies, (odes, sulphu- 
rets, seleniurets, tellurets,) to produce salts. I shall call this class 
of simple bodies, amphigen(48) bodies. The bases may be distin- 
guished as oxybases, sulphobases, selenibases, telluribases. 


COMPOUNDS FORMED BY CHLORINE, BROMINE, IODINE, AND 
FLUORINE. 


The four bodies just named possess these common properties. 
Their combinations with the electro-positive metals are neutral salts 


(46) This supposes the existence of five compounds of sulphur with potassium ; 
the first of these (the potassic sulphuret) is a base; the sulphur in the other four is 
in the ratio of 2, 3, 4 and 5, respectively. Berzelius admits two other sulphurets, 
containing sulphur in the proportions of 33 and 4%, to the quantity contained in the 
potassic sulphuret.— Trans. 

(47) Ferrous sulphuret,—protosulphuret of iron. The bisulphuret wid the 
same name inthe English nomenclature. The sulphur in the three sulphurets is in 
the proportion of 1, 14 and 2. Besides these Berzelius admits two subsulphurets of 
iron, containing one eighth and one fourth, respectively, of the quantity of sulphur 
in the ferrous sulphuret.— Zyans. 

(48) Amphigen; dupe, both, and yevycie, I generate; that is, producing com- 
pounds corresponding to both acids and bases.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 263 


and not bases and their compounds with the metalloids rarely com- 

bine with these neutral salts. I shall call this group halogen(49) 

bodies (or generators of salts.) The nomenclature of their combina- 

tions is analogous to that of the compounds of sulphur. ‘The com- 
_ pound body domuiniactedl cyanogen, belongs to this class. 

Below are some examples of the nomenclature of the compounds 
of the halogen bodies with the metalloids, and with the electro-neg- 
ative metals. 
Sulphurous chloruret. 


* 


Sulphuric chloruret.(50) Chloride of sulphur. 
Phosphoric chloruret. 

Phosphorous chloride.(51) ‘Protochloride of phosphorus. 
Phosphoric chloride. Perchloride of phosphorus. 


Bromic chloruret.(52) 
Chloruret of iodine.(53) 
Chloruret of cyanogen. 
Carbonous chloruret. 


Carbonic chloruret. Protochloride of carbon. 
Carbonous chloride. Perchloride of carbon. 
. Carbonic oxychloride. Chlorocarbonic acid gas. 

Carbosulphurous oxychloride.(54) 
Boric chloride. Chloride of boron. 
Silicic chloride. Chloride of silicium. 


(49) Halogen; Gas, a salt, and yeryae, I generate. Trans. 

(50) The composition of the sulphuric chloruret, corresponds to that of hypo- 
sulphuric acid; (the composition received before the last examination of the acid 
by Dr. Thomson ;) hence, as Berzelius remarks, the proper name for it would be hy- 
posulphurous chloride. He gives preference to the more brief, but, according to 
his system, inaccurate name of sulphuric chloruret. 

The sulphurous chloruret is obtained by causing the sulphuric chloruret to take 
up an additional equivalent of sulphur.— Trans. 

(51) Phosphorous chloride. When water is decomposed by it, hydrochloric and 
phosphorous acids are formed ; this compound, therefore, is proportional to phosphor- 
ous acid. The phosphoric chloride is proportional to phosphoric acid.— Trans. 

(52) This name is given in the body of the work; the looser appellation, chloru- 
ret of bromine, was to be found in the table.— Trans. 

(53) Chloruret of iodine. When this compound acts upon water, Berzelius states 
that it forms hydrochloric acid and an unknown oxide of iodine; hence, it is not 
proportional to either iodous or jodie acids, and its name, chloruret of iodine, is prop- 
erly given.—Tvrans. 

(54) Carbosulphurous devenionde. A compound of chlorine, oxygen, sulphur and 
carbon; obtained by the action of moist chlorine gas upon sulphuret of carbon. It 
consists, according to the proportions in one hundred parts given by Berzelius, of two 
proportionals of chlorine, two of oxygen, one of sulphur and one of carbon.— Trans. 


264 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Arsenious chloride. ~ -* Protochloride of arsenic. 
Arsenic chloride. Deutochloride of arsenic. 
Molybdous chloruret. 

Molybdic chloruret. 


Chromic chloruret. Chloride of chromium. 
Chromic chloride. . 
Antimonic chloruret. Chloride of antimony. 


Antimonious chloride. 
Antimonic chloride. 


Tungstic chloruret. — Protochloride of tungsten. 
Tungstic chloride. Perchloride of tungsten. 
Telluric chloride. —- Chloride of tellurium. 
Tantalic chloride. Chloride of columbium. 

* Titanic chloride... Chloride of titanium. 
Manganic chloride. , Chloride of manganese. 


By substituting the syllables, brom, iod, fluor and cyan for chlor, 
in the above table, we have the nomenclature of the compounds of 
bromine, todine, fluorine and cyanogen respectively. 


COMPOUNDS OF HYDROGEN. 


Hydrogen combines with the halogen and amphigen bodies, form- 
ing acid compounds, called hydracids.. The compounds formed with 
the halogen: bodies (chlorine, bromine, &c.) are strong acids, resem- 
bling the strongest acids which contain oxygen; but the combina- 
tions with the amphigen bodies, (sulphur, selenium, &c.) are weak 
acids. For this reason, I have preferred to retain the term acid, as 
applied to the former of the classes just mentioned, the rather, that 
this term conveys to the mind of a beginner the idea of a compound 
possessing energetic acid properties. 


Ist. Hypracips or THE Hatocen Bopres.(55) 


Hydrochloric acid. _ (Hydric chloride.) 
Hydrobromic acid. (Hydric bromide.) 

Hydriodic acid. (iydric iodide.) 

Hydrofluoric acid. (Hydric fluoride.) 
Hydrofluoboric acid. (Hydric and boric fluoride.) 
Hydrofluosilicic acid. (Hydric and silicic fluoride.) 
Hydrofluotitantic acid. (Hydric and titanic fluoride.) 
Hydrofluotantalic acid. (Hydric and tantalic fluoride.) 


\ 


(55) The termstin both columns of the table below are used by Berzelius.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 265 


Hydrocyanic acid. (Hydric cyanide.) 
Hydrosulphocyanie acid.* (56)(Hydric sulphocyanide; hydric 
sulphocyanate. ) 

Hydrosulphuretted hydrosulpho- (Cyanohydric sulphide, bihydric 

cyanic acid. sulphocyanide. +)(57) 

2d. Hypracips or THE AmpHicEeN Bopigs. 

Hydric sulphide. (Sulphuretted hydrogen.) 
Carbohydric sulphide. (Carburet of sulphur combined 


with sulphuretted hydrogen.) 
Cyanous sulphide.{(58) ° 


* A combination of cyanic sulphide and hydric sulphide.—Berzelius. 

’ (56) Hydrosulphocyanic acid. An acid “having sulphocyanogen for its radical. 
Sulphocyanogen is a compound of one volume of the vapor of sulphur and one vol- 
ume of cyanogen. Berzelius is disposed to admit the views of Liebeg in relation 
to the existence of sulphocyanogen, as obtained in a solid form by transmitting chlo- 
rine through sulphocyanate of potassa.— Trans. 

t The same components asin the preceding compounds, but containing twice 
the quantity of hydric sulphide.—Berzelius. 

(57) Hydrosulphuretted hydrosulphocyanic acid. ‘The hydrocyanic acid has 
the property, in common with sulphuretted hydrogen, of combining with metallic 
sulphurets, forming salts.” ‘* When these combinations are decomposed by an acid, 
the metal of the sulphuret is oxidized at the expense of the water; thus sulphuret- 
ted hydrogen is produced, which, under favorable circumstances, remains in combi- 
nation with the hydrosulphocyanic acid. Thence results a compound of two hy- 
dracids, analogous to the combinations of certain oxacids, as for example the iodic 
and sulphuric.” 

Beside these compounds of hydrogen, sulphur and cyanogen, Berzelius describes 
(Vol. II, p. 223, &c.) hydrohypersulphocyanic acid and hydrosulphuretted cyano- 
gen. When sulphocyanuret of mercury is heated in sulphuretted hydrogen, or in 
muriatic acid gas, a liquid is obtained which deposits small transparent crystals; 
these erystals are gradually decomposed, liberating hydrocyanic acid, and leaving an 
orange matter which Wohler considers a compound of hydrocyanic acid with twice 
as much gulphur as is contained in hydrosulphocyanic acid. This is the first com- 
pound mentioned above. The second, hydrosulphuretted cyanogen, is obtained 
when cyanogen and sulphuretted hydrogen are presented to each other over water 
or alcohol.— Trans. 

t A substance united with sulphobases in the compounds hitherto called sulpho- 
cyanides, but which appear to be true sulphocyanites.—Berzelius. I have taken the 
liberty to alter the name in the original, which was cyanic sulphide.— Trans. 

(58) After explaining the theory which makes of sulphocyanogen (cyanous sul- 
phide) a haloid body, like cyanogen, Berzelius observes, (Vol. II, p. 220,) “I should 
here remark, that the phenomena afforded by sulphocyanogen and its compounds 
may be differently explained. In fact, the sulphocyanurets may be regarded as sul- 
phosalts in which half the sulphur with the metal constitutes a sulphobase. In this 
view of the subject, hydrosulphocyanic acid would be composed of hydric sulphide 


‘combined with cyanous sulphide ; this latter body not having been insulated, as is 


the case with the boric and silicic fluorides, in their compounds with hydrofluoric 


266 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Hydric selenide. ; 
Hydric telluride. (Telluretted hydrogen.) 

With regard to the combinations of hydrogen with nitrogen, phos- 
phorus and carbon, intowhich the hydrogen enters in multiple pro- 
portions, they may be indicated by numbers as; 

Monohydric phosphuret.(59) . ‘ 
Bihydrie phosphuret.. _ Protophosphuretted hydrogen. 
Trihydric phosphuret. Perphosphuretted hydrogen. 
Tetrahydric phosphuret. 

Pentahydric phosphuret. 

Hexahydric phosphuret. 


acid.. But there are circumstances in“opposition to this mode of explanation, and 
which render such an arrangement of the elements improbable. The sulphocyan- 
urets have none of the properties. characteristic of the sulphosalts; they resemble 
rather the haloid salts and oxysalts, combining frequently with the oxide of the metal 
which they contain, forming subsalts. Further, the hydrosulphocyanic acid may 
be obtained from the sulphocyanurets of copper, lead, mercury and silver, by the 
action of hydric sulphide: the metal, in these cases, remains as a sulphobase, which 
would not be the case if it had previously existed as such in these salts.” If the 
French translator has done the author justice in this latter remark, it does not bear 
upon the subject as is supposed; for if the sulphocyanurets be regarded as com- 
pounds of cyanous sulphide and a sulphuret, the hydric sulphide, when added, com- 
bines with the cyanous sulphide, forming hydrosulphocyanic acid, and leaves the 
metal as a sulphobase.— Trans. 

(59) In the names of the following compounds of phosphorus and pees we 
perceive a deviation from the systematic nomenclature. This is rendered necessary 
by the multiple increase of the more electro-positive element. 

Monohydric phosphuret. This compound is hypothetical. It is more particularly 
alluded to in the remarks.upon the next compound. 

Bihydric phosphuret. Davy supposed this gas to contain less phosphorus than the 
spontaneously inflammable phosphuret. The analysis of Rose makes it more rich 
in phosphorus than the latter gas. From a strong solution of hypophosphorous acid, 
he obtained, by heat, a gas varying in composition, but at a mean composeg of three 
volumes of hydrogen and two volumes of the vapor of phosphorus. This gas he 
supposes to be a mixture of two different phosphurets, assumed by Berzelius to be 
the bihydric and a Ene no ane phosphuret; whence the latter named compound 
which heads the list. 

Trihydric phosphuret. The spontaneously inflammable compound of hydrogen 
and phosphorus. The analytical results of Rose are adopted in determining its 
composition and in giving its name. 

Tetrahydric phosphuret. This compound is not formally described, but I infer it 
to be the “ phosphuret of hydrogen,” stated to be formed when the trihydric phos- 
phuret is exposed to light. The precise composition is not known, but simply that 
it contains more hydrogen than the trihydric phosphuret. 


Pentahydric phosphuret. Obtained by Rose, by heating the phosphites of lead 


or tin. 
Hexahydric phosphuret. I have not been able to find any account of this com- 
pound in Berzelius’s work.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 267 


BINARY COMPOUNDS OF THE OTHER METALLOIDS WITH ELECTRO- 
NEGATIVE METALS. 


As the phosphurets, carburets, borurets, siliciurets, arseniurets, and 
antimoniurets, rarely combine with each other, their nomenclature 
may be reduced to a simple expression of the atomic constitution of 
the compounds. Thus we may say, carburet, bicarburet, tricarbu- 
ret of tron; arseniuret, biarsenvuret of nickel. 


COMBINATIONS OF THE ELECTRO-POSITIVE METALS WITH EACH 
OTHER. 


These compounds are called alloys. ‘They seldom require the 
application of a specific nomenclature, there being but few known 
in which the elements are combined in definite proportions. When 
such occur the termination uret is to be given to that part of the 
name of the alloy, which is derived from the more electro-negative 
component; as examples we may take aururet of oe triaururet 
of silver, palladiuret of mercury, &c. 


NOMENCLATURE OF THe SALTS. 


“The changes which we have made in the nomenclature of the 
bases generally, and especially in the class of oxides, render the for- 
mation of a nomenclature for the salts comparatively easy, and per-. 
mit the expression not only,of the elements constituting the salt but 
of the state of neutralization of the constituents. 

I divide the salts into two orders. 1st. Amphide salts, composed 
of a base united to an acid, a sulphide, a selenide, or a telluride. 
They- are classed according to the amphigen body which they con- 
tain, being divided into ee sulphosalts,(60) selenisalis, and tellu- 
risalts. Of these four classes, only the first two have been studied. 

2nd. Haloid salts, composed of a halogen body combined with 
an electro-positive metal; such are the salts of chlorine, bromine, 
iodine, fluorine and eyanogen. 


A. AMPHIDE SALTS. 


In the nomenclature of the amphide salts, a substantive termina- 
ting in ate, is formed from the name of the acid, sulphide, selenide, 
or telluride, if the name of the acid, sulphide, &c. terminate in 2c, or 
in ite, if this latter terminate in ows. For example, we say, sui- 


(69) Dr. Thomson calls these sulphur salts. (History of Chemistry, Vol. II, p. 316. 
System of Chem. 7th ed. Vol. If, p. 900.)—Trans. 


268 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


phate, sulphite. In order to distinguish the different classes of am- 
phide salts from each other, the name of the amphigen body which 
a salt contains is prefixed to the name of the salt, as oxymolybdate, 
sulphomolybdate, selenimolybdate, tellurimolybdate. When the no- 
menclature of the salts was first formed, only one of the classes just al- 
luded to, was known, namely, the oxysalts ; hence the distinction which 
has now been made, was not necessary, and the particle oxy has ney- 
er been placed before the names of salts of this class. ‘They have 
been called simply sulphates, molybdates, &c. 'This is a convenient 
custom to follow,-sinee the oxysalts are the most numerous, and most 
frequently used. ‘The other amphide salts are readily distinguished, 
from each other and from the oxysalts, by prefixing the name of the 
amphigen body which they contain. 


OXYSALTS. 


The different kinds of oxysalts are : 


Sulphates. Oxychlorates. Selenites. Tantalates. 
Hyposulphates. Chlorates. Arseniates. Titanates. 
Sulphites. _Chlorites. Arsenites, Manganates. 
Hyposulphites. Bromates. Chromates. Cobaltates. 
Nitrates. Iodates. Molybdates. Stannates. 

_ Nitrites. Carbonates. Tungstates. Osmiates. 
Phosphates. Borates. Antimoniates. | Hydrates.(z) 
Phosphites. Silicates. Antimonites. 

Hypophosphites. Seleniates. Tellurates. 


The varieties of each kind are the following. ‘The names now 
in use are placed in the right hand column. 


Potassic sulphate. Sulphate of potassa. 
Sodic sulphate. Sulphate of soda. 
Lithic sulphate. . _ Sulphate of lithia. 
Ammonic sulphate. Sulphate of ammonia. 
Barytic sulphate. Sulphate of baryta. 
Strontianic sulphate. Sulphate of strontia. 
Calcic sulphate. Sulphate of lime. 
Magnetic sulphate. Sulphate of magnesia. 
Aluminic sulphate. Sulphate of alumina. 
Glucic sulphate. Sulphate of glucina. 
Yttric sulphate. Sulphate of yttria. 
Zirconic sulphate. Sulphate of zirconia. 


(z) An explanation of the peculiar views expressed in this name will be found in 
-the sequel. (See pages 270, 271.) 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 269 


Cerous sulphate. 
Ceric sulphate. 
Manganous sulphate.(c) 
Manganic sulphate. 
Ferrous sulphate. 
Ferric sulphate. 
Cobaltic sulphate. 
Niccolic sulphate. 
Zincic sulphate. 
Cadmic sulphate. 
Plumbic sulphate. 
Stannous sulphate. 
Stannic sulphate. 
Bismuthic sulphate. 


Protosulphate of cerium. 
Deutosulphate of cerium. 
Protosulphate of manganese. 


Protosulphate of iron. 
Persulphate of iron. 
Sulphate of cobalt. 
Sulphate of nickel. 
Sulphate of zinc. 
Sulphate of cadmium. 
Sulphate of lead. 
Protosulphate of tin. 
Persulphate of tin. 
Sulphate of bismuth. 


Uranious sulphate. 
Uranic sulphate. 
Cuprous sulphate. 
Cupric sulphate. 
Mercurious sulphate. 
Mercuric sulphate. 
Argentic sulphate. 


Protosulphate of uranium. 
Persulphate of uranium. 
Protosulphate of copper. 
Persulphate of copper. 
Protosulphate of mercury. 
Persulphate of mercury. 
Sulphate of silver. 


Palladious sulphate. 
Palladic sulphate. 
Rhodic sulphate. 
Osmious sulphate. 
Susosmious sulphate. 
Osmic sulphate. 
Susosmic sulphate. 
_Indious sulphate. 
Susiridious sulphate. 


Sulphate of rhodium. 


(c) Berzelius considers that both the protoxide (manganous oxide) and the deut- 
oxide of manganese (manganic oxide) form salts. The salts of the deutoxide are not 
mentioned by Turner, nor by Thomson in the late edition of his “‘ System of Chem- 
istry.’ The following account of these salts is given by Berzelius, Vol. IV, p. 168. 

«The manganic salts are but little known, owing to the fact that they readily part 
with oxygen, and are changed into manganous salts, (salts of the protoxide.) Their 
color is violet passing into red, and sometimes black passing into yellow or red. Com- 
bustible bodies, digested in these salts, convert them into manganous salts.” 

We learn (Vol. 1V, p. 178) that the manganic sulphate may be obtained by acting 
upon the deutoxide of manganese, in fine powder, by cold sulphuric acid. This salt 
cannot bear a boiling heat without decomposition, nor can it be crystallized. 


Vol. XXU.—No. 2. 35 


270 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Iridic sulphate. 

Susiridic sulphate. 

Platinous sulphate. ; Protosulphate of platinum. 
Platinic sulphate. Persulphate of platinum. 
Aurous sulphate. 

Auric sulphate.* 


Tantalic sulphate. Sulphate of columbium. 
Titanic sulphate. Sulphate of titanium. 
Telluric sulphate. ; - Sulphate of tellurium. 
Antimonic sulphate. Sulphate of antimony. 


Hyperantimonious sulphate. 
Hyperantimonic sulphate. 


Hypertungstic sulphate. Sulphuric and tungstic acids. 

, Hypermolybdic sulphate. 
Molybdic sulphate. Deutosulphate of molybdenum. 
Molybdous sulphate. Protosulphate of molybdenum. 
Hyperchromic sulphate. 
Chromic sulphate. Sulphate of chromium. 


COMBINATIONS OF WATER. 


Before dismissing the subject of the nomenclature of the oxysalts 
it is proper to say a few words respecting the compounds into which 
water enters. Water has been considered as playing the part of an 
acid in its combinations with bases; which have hence been called 
hydrates. Thus we have potassic hydrate, calcie, ferric, &c. hydrates. 
But water combines also with acids, and in these compounds corres- 
ponds to a base. We should therefore use the terms hydric sul- 
phate, hydric nitrate, hydric phosphate, &c. It would be quite as 
difficult to become habituated to the use of the term hydric sulphate, 
for common sulphuric acid, as to that of hydric oxide or hydric acid, 
for water. Some chemists call the acids which contain water, hy- 
drated acids. Such a denomination is contrary to the principles of 
nomenclature. I shall call an acid, in ‘which water acts as a base, 
an aqueous acid, and one where there is only a mixture of acid and 
water a dilute acid. As acids more frequently contain water than 
the reverse, it will be more convenient to express that the acid con- 


* These two salts, having the oxides of gold as bases, are not known to exist. I 
have enumerated them with the others, in order to complete the series of both am- 
phide and haloid salts.— Berzelius. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 271 


tains no water than that is combined with that liquid. I shall use for 
such a case the term anhydrous; anhydrous sulphuric acid must be 
understood to mean sulphuric acid containing no water, aqueous 
sulphuric acid, to mean a compound in definite proportions of the 
acid with water, and dilute sulphuric acid any mixture of the acid 
with water. 


SULPHOSALTS.(61) 


I shall enumerate only the classes of sulphosalts, since the indi- 
vidual salts have a nomenclature corresponding to the similar salts in 
the series of sulphates, which has just been given. 


Sulphohydrates.(62) Sulphocarbonates.(65) | 
Sulphocyanates.(63) Sulphophosphates. 
Sulphocyanhy drates.(64) Sulphophosphites.(66) 


(63) “Those combinations of sulphur with the electro-positive metals which cor- 
respond in composition to the oxybases (viz. those resulting from the action of the 
oxybases and sulphuretted hydrogen on each other,) play the parts of bases in the 
sulphosalts. The combinations containing greater proportions of sulphur do not pos- 
sess this property, and thus resemble the superoxides: they do not combine with 
other sulphurets, but may yield their excess of sulphur to metals. Those compounds 
of sulphur with the electro-negative metals, which correspond to the metallic acids, 
combine with the electro-positive sulphurets, in such proportions that if the sulphur ~ 
were replaced by the same number of atoms of oxygen, we should obtain one of the 
salts formed by the same radicals when combined with oxygen.” ’ 

‘© As the electro-positive oxides sometimes combine with each other, so also cer- 
tain electro-positive sulphurets occasionally unite. Thus the sulphuret of iron unites 
with the sulphuret of copper. Nature affords us many such combinations, in the 
mineral kingdom, occurring in a crystallized form. The composition of most of these 
bodies is such, that by oxidation they become double sulphates.” (Vol. III, p. 334, 
&c.)— Trans. 

(62) Sulphohydrates, or sulphydrates. Compounds of sulphuretted hydrogen with 
metallic sulphurets. ‘‘Sulphuretted hydrogen converts the alkalies, earths, and 
other metallic oxides, into sulphurets. Eight of these, namely, those produced by 
the alkalies and alkaline earths, combine with sulphuretted hydrogen, (hydric sul- 
phide,) forming salts which are soluble in water, &c.” The hydrosulphates of po- 
tassa, soda, ammonia, &c. of the English and French chemists.— Trans. 

(63) Sulphocyanates. Compounds of sulphobases with sulphocyanogen, (cyanous 
sulphide.) See note of Berzelius to cyanous sulphide. This class is not introduced 
in its place, in the third volume; the view taken, in the second volume, of the com- 
pounds of sulphocyanogen, being the reverse of that contained in the note just re- 
ferred to, viz. that sulphocyanogen is a haloid body. (See note 58.)— Trans. 

(64) Sulphocyanhydrates. Compounds of sulphobases with hydrosulphocyanic 
acid. (See note 56.)— Trans. 

(65) Compounds of sulphobases with the carbonic sulphide.— Trans. 

(66) The first (sulphophosphates) obtained by digesting a persulphuret, as for ex- 
ample of potassium, with phosphorus, in a closed vessel. The second, (sulphophos- 
phites) by treating in the same way the quadrisulphuret of potassium.— Trans. 


272 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


Sulpharseniates. _ Sulphotungstates. 
Sulpharsenites.(67) Sulphantimoniates. 
Hyposulpharsenites. Sulphantimonites.- 
Sulphochromates. Hyposulphantimonites. 
Hypersulphomolybdates.(68) Sulphostannates.(69) 
Sulphomolybdates. Sulphotantalates.(d) 


B. HALOID SALTS. 


As the remarks just made in relation to the sulphosalts apply also 
to this class, I shall, here, give only a few examples, which will show 
how the series of sulphates may be used to ascertain the name of 
each species of the haloid salts. 


Potassic chloruret. Chloride of potassium.(y)’ 
Sodic chloruret. Chloride of sodium. 
Ammonic cbloruret. Hydrochlorate of ammonia. 
Mercurious chloruret. Protochloride of mercury. 
Mercuric chloruret. Perchloride of mercury. 
Sodic ioduret. Iodide of sodium. 

Ferrous ioduret. Todide of iron. 

Ferric ioduret. 

Potassic ioduret. Iodide of potassium. 


Bioduret of potassium. 
Trioduret of potassium. 
Calcic fluoruret. Fluoride of calcium. 


(67) Containing, the first a compound of sulphur and arsenic corresponding to ar- 
senic acid; the second a compound proportional to arsenious acid, the arsenic and 
arsenious sulphides. The hyposulpharsenites (or sulphohyparsenites) contain real- 
gar, (hyparsenious sulphide.)— Trans. 

(68) The sulphomolybdates contain the molybdic sulphide, (note 41,) ani the hy- 
persulphomolybdates the hypermolybdic sulphide; the first mentioned compound is 
proportional to molybdic acid, the second has no,similar compound in the combina- 
tions of molybdenum with oxygen.—Tvans. 

(69) Contain the stannic sulphide, which corresponds to the stannic oxide, (per- 
oxide of tin.) 

(d) Besides the salts enumerated in the table, “‘ there exist sulphoseleniates, but 
only of the more feeble bases.”’ ‘‘There are known also, sulphaurates, sulphiri- 
dates, sulphoplatinates, &c. but in these salts the affinities of the electro-negative 
sulphuret are very feeble.” ‘It is possible, that, in the dry way, sulphoborates, 
sulphosilicates, sulphotitanates, and sulphotantalates may be formed, which water 
converts at once into oxysalts, with the disengagement of sulphuretted hydrogen. 
Experiment has proved this in relation to the sulphotantalates.” (Vol. Ill, p. 372, 
&e )—Trans. 

(y) The names in this column are those of the common nomenclature.— Trans: 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 273 


Sodic fluoruret. Fluoride of sodium. 

- Argentic bromuret. Bromide of silver. 
Magnesic bromuret. Bromide of magnesium. 
Potassic cyanuret. Cyanide of potassium. 
Ammonic cyanuret. Hydrocyanate of ammonia. 
Ferrous cyanuret. Cyanide of iron. 


NOMENCLATURE OF THE ACID AND OF THE BASIC SALTS. 


A. AMPHIDE SALTS. 


The salts which contain an excess of acid, are generally known as 
acid or super salts. By prefixing, to the name of the salt, the par- 
ticle which expresses the number of proportionals of acid contained 
in the salt, the relation of acid to base in the neutral salt being called 
unity, the fact that the salt is acid and the degree of its acidity, are 
expressed at the same time. For example we say, 

Ammoniacal sesquicarbonate. 
Sodic bisulphate. 
Potassic quadroxalate. 
' The amphide salts containing an excess of base, are called basic 
or sub salts. Subphosphate, subsulphate express compounds of phos- 
phoric and of sulphuric acid with a base, in which the latter is in ex- 
cess. To express the degree of this excess, we use the same par- 
ticles, which were applied in the cases of the acid salts. The fol- 
lowing examples will suffice to show the method of applying these 
particles. 
Sesquicalcic(70) subphosphate. 
Bicupric subacetate. 
Trialuminic subsulphate. 
Quadriplumbic subnitrate. 
Sexplumbic subnitrate. 

The nomenclature thus shows whether the proportion of base is a 
multiple by 13 by 2, 3, 4 or 6, of that required to form a neu- 
tral salt. 

It is easily seen that the same method applies to the other am- 
phide salts. 


(70) Since the prepositions sesqui, bi, &c. are prefixed to the base in this case and 
were prefixed to the acid in the acid salts, it seems superfluous to use the term sub 
before the name of the acid; thus trialuminie sulphate expresses three proportions 
of the base to one of the acid, while sodie bisulphate would express two proportions 
of the acid to one of the base.— Trams. 


Q74 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


B. HALOID SALTS. 


Ist. Acid haloid salts.(71) 


An acid haloid salt is composed of a haloid salt, united to. the hy- 
dracid of its halogen radical; its composition will be sufficiently well 
expressed by the rmethad exhibited in the following examples. 


Acid auric chloruret. Chloride of gold and muriatic acid. 
Acid potassic fluoruret. Fluoride of potassium and hydrofluoric 
Acid ferrous cyanuret. acid. 


Acid ferric cyanuret. — 
2nd. Basic haloid salis.(72) 


The haloid salts combine with oxybases and occasionally with sul- 
phobases. ‘These compounds may be called oxybasic and sulphoba- 
sic salts. When these salts combine with oxybases, we may dis- 
pense with expressing the oxygen, and merely call them basic ha- 
loid salts. ‘Thus far we know of no basic salt, in which, to use an 
example, the ferrous chloruret is combined with the ferric oxide, or 
the ferric chloruret with the ferrous oxide, consequently the name of 
the chloruret expresses always the degree of oxidation of the oxy- 
base. But as one atom of a haloid salt may combine with one, two, 
three or more atoms of a metallic oxide of the same radical, the 
peculiar composition is expressed as in the following examples : 
Basic plumbic chloruret. Tribasic plumbic chloruret. 
Bibasic plumbic chloruret. Quadribasic plumbic chloruret. 


NOMENCLATURE OF THE DOUBLE SALTS, THOSE CONTAINING TWO 
BASES OR TWO ACIDS. 


In proportion as the elements of a compound increase in number, 
the difficulties of applying the principles of a systematic nomencla- 


(71) The literal translation would be ‘Ist, those with an excess of acid.” This 
conveys an erroneous idea and leads me to suppose that the French translator, has 
not done the author justice. I have substituted ‘acid haloid salts.” Reference is - 
here made to three divisions of these salts. Ist. Haloid salts, those salts formed by 
a halogen body with a less electro-negative body (chlorides, &c.) 2nd. Acid haloid 
salts, or haloid salts combined with acids. 3d. Basic haloid salts, or haloid salts 
combined with bases. Since these acid haloid salts contain the hydracid of the hal- 
ogen body which forms the salt, Turner proposes to cail them hydro-haloid salts. 
(See 4th Amer. Ed. p. 450). The name of Berzelius strikes me as most expressive.— 
Trans. 

(72) In the French “avec excés de base,” but changed for reasons analogous | to 
those given in the note under the head of the acid haloid salts. 

Turner proposes for these salts, the term oxyhaloid salts, leaving out the basic. 
Berzelius prefers to leave out ory, and call them basic haloid salts.— Trans. 


Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 275 


ture are also increased. ‘This difficulty begins to be felt in the double 
salts. In Latin the namesof the two bases may be combined so as to 
make but one word, as for example, sulphas ammonicoferrosus, cyan- 
etum ferrosoammonicum. ‘This method cannot be applied in transla- 
tion, without adopting throughout the Latin termination for the first of 
the two bases; we are therefore obliged to say, ammomic and ferric sul- 
phate; ferrous and ammonic cyanuret.(73) 

As the composition of these salts varies, several atoms of the one 
salt combining with a single atom of the other, we may express the 
relative number of atoms in the name; as, for example, triferric am- 
monic sulphate, biammonic ferrous cyanuret. 'The following are in- 
stances of a similar kind: 

Trialuminic potassic sulphate. Alum. 


Biplatinic ammonic chloruret. | Muriate of platinum and ammonia. 
Triboric potassic fluoruret. Fluoborate of potassa. 
Bisilicic sodic fluoruret. Fluosilicate of soda. 


The same nomenclature may be applied to the double amphide salts 
having an excess of base, by placing the word sub before the name 
of the acid. Thus we say cupric biammonic subsulphate, (cuprum 
ammoniacum of the Pharmacopeeia) bealuminic, trialuminic, sexalu- 
minic potassic subsulphate. We must observe however, that a no- 
menclature is easily spoiled by attempting to express too much by it, 


the names being thus rendered either too complex, or disagreeable 
to the ear. 


NOMENCLATURE OF THE SALTS OF AMMONIA. 


Before closing this chapter on romenclature, we must call the at- 
tention of the reader to the difference between the meaning of the 
terms salt of ammonium, or ammonic salt, and salt of ammonia or 
ammoniacal salt. When ammonia forms salts with the acids contain- 
ing water, an atom of water enters into the composition of the salt 
which cannot be disengaged, without destroying the salt itself. ‘The 
hydrogen of this water is in the precise proportion necessary to form 
ammonium with the ammonia,(74) and the oxygen is the same in 


(73) The same considerations which induce the adoption of the Latin termination 
in the case of those oxides which are combinations of two definite compounds of 
oxygen with a base, for example, the ferrosoferric oxide, seem to me to bear upon 
this case. Thus we may say ammonico-ferroso sulphate, ferroso-ammonico cyanu- 
ret. The views given in the French, are perhaps those of the translator not of 
the author.— Trans. 

(74) On this subject, see note 36.— Trans. 


276 Chemical Nomenclature of Berzelius. 


quantity as would have been found in any oxybase neutralizing the 
same quantity of acid. ‘The ammonia and water, therefore, taken to- 
gether, represent an oxide of the radical ammonium, composed of 
two atoms(75) of the radical and one of oxygen. ‘This mode of 
representing the compounds of ammonia, makes them conform to the 
general analogies of the oxysalts. In like manner the combination 
of the hydric sulphide with ammonia may be considered as the am- 
monic sulphuret, which may combine further, with two, three, four, 
and five atoms of sulphur. These salts in which ammonia appears 
to form an oxybase or a sulphobase, I call ammonic salts or salts 
of ammonium. 

When on the contrary, ammonia combines with the anhydrous acids, 
as with carbonic or sulphurous acid gas, or with anhydrous chlorides, 
fluorides, &c. compounds result. which contain ammonia, but not the 
oxide of ammonium, and which have very different properties from 
the ammonic salts. 

They are called, for example, carbonate of ammonia, or ammont- 
acal carbonate, sulphite of ammonia, &c. Water converts them into 
salts of ammonium. 

Ammonia combines frequently, as such, and not as an oxide of 
ammonium, with neutral salts. It then produces basic ammoniacal 
salts. Some examples are subjoined : 

Ammoniacal mercuric nitrate. 
Ammoniacal argentic sulphate. 
Ammoniacal calcic chloruret. 
Ammoniacal phosphorous chloride. 


(75) Berzelius considers water as a compound of two atoms of hydrogen and one 
of oxygen.— Trans. 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. QUT 


Arr. IV.—On the law of the partial polarization of light by reflex- 
ton; by Davin Brewster, LL.D. F.R.S. L&E. 


Read before the a Society, February 4, 1830. 


In the year 18151 communicated to the Royal Society a series of 
experiments on the polarization of light by successive reflexions, 
which contain the germ of the investigations, the results of which I 
now propose to explain. 

From these experiments it appeared that a given pencil of light 
could be wholly polarized at any angle of incidence, provided it un- 
derwent a sufficient number of reflexions, either at angles wholly 
above or wholly below the maximum polarizing angle, or at angles 
partly above and partly below that angle; and it was scarcely possi- 
ble to resist the conclusion, that the light not polarized by the first re- 
flexion had suffered a physical change at each action of the reflect- 
ing force which brought it nearer and nearer to the state of com- 
plete polarization. This opinion, however, which I have always re- 
garded as demonstrable, appeared in a different light to others. Gui- 
ded probably by an experimental result, apparently though not really 
hostile to it, Dr. Youne and MM. Biot, Araco, and FResnet, 
have adhered to the original opinion of Matus, that the reflected 
and refracted pencils consist partly of light wholly polarized, and 
partly of light in its natural state ; and more recently Mr. HerscHen 
has given the weight of his opinion to the same view of the sub- 
ject. 

Under these circumstances I have often returned to the investiga- 
tion with renewed zeal; but though the frequent repetition of my 
experiments has more anid more eeayinced me of the truth of the 
conclusions which I drew from them, yet I have not till lately been 
able to place the subject in a satisfactory aspect, and to connect it 
with general laws, which give a mathematical form to this funda- 
mental branch of the science of polarization. 

If we consider a pencil of natural light as divided into two pen- 
cils polarized in rectangular planes by the action of a doubly refract- 
ing crystal, and conceive the light of these two pencils to return back 
through the crystal, it will obviously emerge in the state of natural light. 
When we examine the pencil thus recomposed, or when we exam- 
ine a pencil consisting of two oppositely polarized pencils superpo- 
sed, we shall find that they comport themselves under every analysis 

Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 36 


278 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


exactly like common light ; so that we are entitled to assume such a 
pencil as the representative of natural light, and to consider every 
thing that can be established respecting the one, as true respecting 
the other. 

In applying this principle to the analysis of the phenomena pro- 
duced by reflexion, I placed the planes of polarization of the com- 
pound beam in the plane of reflexion; but though this led to some 
interesting conclusions, it did not develope any general law. I then 
conceived the idea of making the plane of reflexion bisect the right 
angle formed by the planes of polarization ; and in this way I observ- — 
ed a series of symmetrical effects at different angles of incidence, 
which threw a broad light over the whole subject. 

In order to explain these 
results, let AB (Fig. 1) rep- 
resent the two pencils of op- 


positely polarized light as sep- 
arated by double: refraction ; 
let ab, ed be the directions of 
their planes of polarization, 
forming a right angle aec, 
and let the plane of reflex- 
ion MN, of a surface of plate 
glass, bisect the angle aec, 
so that the planes ab, cd 
form angles of + 45° and—45° 
with the plane MN. Let. 
arhomb of calcareous spar 
have its principal section now placed in the plane of reflexion. 
Atan incidence of 90°, reckoned from the perpendicular, the re- 
flected images of A and B suffer no change, the angle aecis stilla 
right angle, and the four pencils formed by the calcareous spar are 
all of equal intensity. As the incidence however diminishes, the angle 
aec diminishes also, and the ordinary and extra ordinary images of 
A and B differ in intensity. At an incidence of 80° for example, 
the angle wec is reduced from 90° to 66°; at 70° it has been reduced 
to 40°, and at 56° 45’, the maximum polarizing angie, it has been 
reduced to 0°; that is, the planes of polarization ab, cd are now 
parallel. Below the polarizing angle, at 50°, the axes are again in- 
clined to each other, and form an angle of 22°. At 40° they form 


2 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 279 


an angle of 50°, and at 0°, or a perpendicular incidence, they are 
again brought back to their primitive inclination of 90°. Taking 
MN to represent the quadrant of incidence from 90° at M, to 0° at 
N, the curves, 90°, 0°, show the progressive change which takes 
place in the planes of polarization, the plane of polarization being a 
tangent to the curve at the incidence which corresponds to any par- 
ticular point of it. 

When we employ a surface of diamond in place of glass, the in- 
clination of the axes ab, cd is reduced to 46° at an incidence of 80°, 
to 8° at an incidence of 70°, and at 67° 43’ the axes become parallel. 

Such being the action of the reflecting forces upon A and B taken 
separately, let us now consider them as superposed and forming natu- 
ral light. At 90° and 0° of incidence, the reflecting force produces 
no change in the inclination of their axes or planes of polarization ; 
but at 56° 45/ in the case of glass, and 67° 43/ in the case of dia- 
mond, the axes of all the particles are brought into a state of paral- 
lelism with the plane of reflexion; and consequently when the image 
which they form is viewed by the rhomb of calcareous spar, they will 
all pass into the ordinary image, and thus prove that they are wholly 
polarized in the plane of reflexion. 

All this is entirely conformable to what has been long lena but. 
we now see that the total polarization of the reflected pencil at an 
angle whose tangent is the index of refraction, is effected by turning 
round the planes of polarization of one half of the light from right to 
left, and of the other half from left to right, each through an angle 
of 45°.. Let us now see what takes place at those angles where. 
the pencil is only partially polarized. At 80° for example, the angle 
of the planes a6, cd is 66°, that is, each plane of polarization has 
been turned round in opposite directions from an inclination of 45° 
to one of 33° with the plane of reflexion. The light has therefore 
suffered a physical change of a very marked kind, constituting now 
neither natural nor polarized light. It is not natural light, because its 
planes of polarization are not rectangular; it is not polarized light, 
because they are not parallel. It is a pencil of light having the 
physical character of one half of its rays being polarized at an angle 
of 66° to the other half. It will now be asked, how a pencil thus 
characterized’ can exhibit the properties of a partially polarized pen- 
cil, that is, of a pencil part of whose light is polarized in the plane 
of reflexion, while the rest retains its condition of natural light. 
This will be understood. by replacing the analysing rhomb with its 


280 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


principal section in the plane of reflexion, and viewing through it 
- the images A and B at 80° of incidence. As the axis of A is in- 
-clined 33° to MN or the section of the rhomb, the ordinary image 
of it will be much brighter than the extraordinary image, the inten- 
sity of each being in the ratio of cos? @ to sin? 9, 9 being the an- 
gle of inclination, or 33° in the present case. In like manner the 
ordinary image of B will be in the same ratio brighter than its ex- 
traordinary image, that is, by considering A and B in’a state of su- 
perposition, the extraordinary image of a pencil of light reflected at 
80° will be fainter than the ordinary image in the ratio of sin? 33° 
to cos? 33°, But this inequality in the intensity of the two pencils 
is precisely what would be produced by a compound pencil, part of 
which is polarized in the plane of reflexion, and part of which is 
common light. When Matus, therefore, and his successors analy- 
sed the pencil reflected at 80°, they could not do otherwise than 
conclude that it was partially polarized, consisting partly of light po- 
larized in the plane of reflexion, and partly of natural light. The 
action of successive reflexions, however, afforded a more precise 
means of analysis, in so far as it proved that the portion of what was 
deemed natural light ‘had in reality suffered a physical change, 
which approximated it to the state of polarized light; and we now 
see that the portion of what was called polarized light, was only what 
may be called apparently polarized ; for though it disappears, like po- 
larized light, from the extraordinary image of the analysing prism, yet 
there is not a single particle of it polarized im the plane of reflexion. 

These results must be admitted to possess considerable interest in 
themselves; but, as we shail proceed to show, they lead to conclu- 
sions of general importance. ‘The quantity of light which disap- 
pears from the extraordinary image, is obviously the quantity of light 
which is really or apparently polarized at the given angle of incidence; 
and if we admit the truth of the law of repartition discovered by Ma- 
Lus, and represented by Poo=Po cos? 9, andPoe=Po sin? g, and if 
we can determine 9 for substances of every refractive power, and 
for all angles of incidence, we may consider as established the 
mathematical law which determines the intensity of the polarized 
pencil, whatever be the nature of the body which reflects it,—what- 
ever be the angle at which it is incident,—whatever be the number of 
reflexions which it suffers, and whether these reflexions are all made 
from one substance, or partly from one substance and partly from 
another. 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 281 


The first step in this investigation is to determine the law accord- 
ing to which a reflecting surface changes the plane of polarization 
of a polarized ray. This subject was first examined by Matus, but 
not with that success which attended most of his labors. Before I 
was acquainted with what had been done by M. Fresyet, or with 
the experiments of M. Arago on glass and water, I had made a 
number of very careful experiments on the same subject, and had 
represented them by formule founded on the law of the tangents. 
These formule, however, I found to be defective; and I am persua- 
ded, from a very extensive series of experiments, that the formule 
of Fresnet are accurate expressions of the phenomena under every 
variation of incidence and refractive power. If is the angle of in- 
cidence, 2’ the angle of refraction, x the primitive inclination of the 
plane of the polarized ray to the plane of reflexion, and 9 the incli- 
nation to which that plane is brought by reflexion then, according 
to Fresneu, we have : 
cos (1-+7’) 
cos (t—12’) 

When 2 is 45°, as in the preceding observations, then tan e=1, 
cos (1-+-2’) 
cos (2 — vy) 

Tn these formule, which are founded on the law of the tangents, 
i+” is the supplement of the angle which the reflected ray forms 
with the refracted ray; while z—7’ is the angle which the incident 
ray forms with the refracted ray, or the deviation produced by 
refraction. 

These formule have been verified by M. Araco at ten angles of 
incidence upon Glass, and four upon Water; but his experiments 
were made only in the case where 2 is 45°, and where tan w disap- 
pears from the formula. As my experiments embrace a wider range 
of substances, and also the general case where z varies from 0° to 
90°, I consider them as a necessary basis for a law of such exten- 
sive application. 

The first series of experiments which I made was upon Plate 
Glass, in which the maximum polarizing angle was nearly 56° : hence 
I assume the index of refraction to be 1.4826. ‘The following were 
the results: : 


Tan 9 = tan x —; 


and we have T'an oo 


282 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


PLATE GLASS. 


Inclination of Plane of Polarization 
Angle of Angle of to Plane of Reflexion. 
Incidence. _ Refraction. Observed. Computed. Difference. 


BBO ae OS. Oe ABO LO! CLARO 10) ee 
BS ie wath: 28. wk ABO Ao GAD AO. ioc ar 
BG ap cake Ai MCs suivoi AO AD cso S Ge. te doe” 
BA uc iA Di WOvieiae te aA VA Ne jg ee oe iY 
S12 Cen ee: 3 ONG MMP 312 am FS RS tae Mea 


GO ce a0 AB ee Ve gO LOW ce a2 Oy MOnee okie 
BO ie 6 OE Our oe OL OF oo OO) heen 
BO ie a OL OB. OQ OO Oa ae 
46 ee 28. 29° 2S NG Baa 2. 16 Si ee 
AO) a 25 42. OF a.) 2S ee 
BOD ay foie 19) ABH el). py 8225. ao. Bd. 195 3 
AO. 2 18 200 BORO) a. AO: 4. as eee 
10s, 6, 44. 44 Oo ao 49. 


These results, obtained in every part of the quadrant, completely 
establish the accuracy of the formula. The differences are all with- 
in the limits of the errors of observation, and amount, at an average, 
to 324’ on each observation. pe 

It is a curious circumstance, which I believe has not before been 
remarked, that at an incidence of 45° the deviation produced by re- 
fraction, or i—7’, is, in every substance, the complement of the an- 
gle of refraction 7 to 45°; and in the action of all substances 
upon polarized light at an incidence of 45°, the rotation of the plane of 
polarization of a pencil polarized + 45°, or — 45°, is equal to the 
the angle of refraction; while the inclination of the plane of polari- 
zation to the plane of reflexion, or 9,, is equal to the deviation 2 —2’. 

In order to establish the accuracy of the formula for different de- 
grees of refractive power, I made the following experiments on Dia- 
mond, in which the index of refraction was 2.440. 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 283 
DIAMOND. 
Inclination of Plane of Polarization 

iiamedes °° Helecuoed ite blane of Reflexion, Dterenee. 
90° 0” 249 [2 ao we oe Oe 0° 0’ 
85 0 24 6 34-30" Sa) BO +0 34 
80 0 23 48 PAs ae psi 2 +0 48 
7s Om 9s 19)’. 14 30 tar'6 ete oo 
00 Io 30) 4 30 3 54 - +0 36 
67 43 ee Ine. 0 O 0 O 0 0 
60 O 30 -A7 12 30 11 41 +0 49 
50 O 18 18 24 0 23 30 +0 30 


within the limits of the errors of observation. 

In all these experiments the value of x was 45°; but in order to 
determine the law of variation for 9, when x varies from 0° to 90°, 
I took a crystal of quartz with a fine natural surface parallel to its 
axis; and I found that at an angle of incidence of 75°, and when « 
was 45°, the inclination of the plane of polarization to the plane of 


reflexion was 26° 20’. 


results : 


Values of x. @ Observed. 

Ge. 0° 0’ 
10 4 54 
p20 <6 1000 
8 ae 15 50 
a5. 20 0 
Ae. 23 30 
Bi 26 20 
50 30 O 
55 35 30 
60 40 0O 
70 53 O 
80 q 70 O 
90 90 0O 


In these experiments the 


degree. 


Inclination of Plane of Polarization. 


® Calculated. 
aes O27 0! 
- ABO at oe 
SA at iO kG é 
op etn Oa G2 
rd hi ital Orpiiee 
at aei eee, es 
eh OIE 
30 40 
a PML ena 
- - 40 45 
- 53 49 
eo -29 
- 90 0 


° 


These differences, ence at an average amount to 464’, are also 


I then varied w, and obtained the following 


Difference. 


0° 0’ 
+0 25 
—0O 16 
—0O 12 
+0 48 
+0 50 
—0O 7 
—0O 40 
+0 7 
—0O 45 
—0O 49 
—0O 29 

0 O 


average error does not exceed half a 
The third column is computed by the formula tan p= 
(tan 26° 27’) tan z. 

From these experiments it appears that the formula expresses 
with great accuracy all the changes in the planes of polarization 


i 
284 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


which are produced by a single reflexion, and we may therefore 
apply it in our future investigations. 

Let us now suppose that a beam of common light, composed of 
two portions A, B, (Fig. 2,) polarized +45° and —45° to the plane 
of reflexion, is incident on a plate of 
glass at such an angle that the reflect-_ 
ed pencil composed of C and D has 
its planes of polarization inclined at an 
angle @ to the plane MN. When a 
rhomb of calcareous spar has its prin- 
cipal section in the plane MN, it will 
divide the image C into an extraordi- 
nary pencil E and an ordinary one F'; 
and the same will take place with D, 
G being its extraordinary and H its ordinary image. If we represent 
the whole of the reflected pencil or C+D by 1, then C=$, D=3, 
E+F=1, andG+H=1. But since the planes of polarization of 
C and D are each inclined 9 degrees to the principal section of the 
rhomb, the intensity of the light of the doubly refracted pencils will 
be as sin?9 : cos’; that is, the intensity of E will be 3 sin?9, and 
that of F, 4.cos?~. Hence it follows that the difference of these 
pencils, or 4 sin? — $ cos?@, will express the quantity of light which 
has passed from the extraordinary image E into the ordinary one F’, 
that is, the quantity of light apparently polarized in the plane of re- 
flexion MN. But as the same is true of the pencil D, we have 
2(4 sin?9¢—4 cos*@) or sin?9—cos?q for the whole of the polarized 
light in a pencil of common light C+D. Hence, since sin?9+ 
cos?9=1 and cos?7=1—sin?9, we have for the whole quantity of 
polarized light 


Q=1—2 sin’. 
cos (t-+7’) 
But Tan p= tan ve 7 
sin?0 : 
2 ya 2 ee 
And as Tan? costa and sin?g-++cos?9=1, 


we have the quotient and the sum of the quantities sin?9 and cos?¢@, 
by which we obtain 


1 i « Ay? 2 

tt atlas 
Sin?o= i cos(t—# ), 
een ( cos(t+2’)\ ? 

(ta ” cos(i—?’) ne ie tane ow} 


. 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 285 


—— 

( a0? cos(t—1) 
cos(2-+2’)\ ? 

1+ (i a?) 

As the quantity of reflected light is here supposed to be 1, we 
may obtain an expression of Q in terms of the incident light by 
adopting the formula of Fresnex for the intensity of a reflected 
.ray... ‘Thus 


. fecal) 


That i “s Q- ———— 


ona aera tare) (1? ep 


As tan 2=1 in common light, it is omitted in the preceding for- 

mula. | ; 
_ This formula may be adapted to partially polarized rays, that is, 
to light reflected at any angle different from the angle of -maximum 
polarization, provided we can obtain an expression for the quantity of 
reflected light. 

M. Fresnev’s general formula has been adapted to this species of 
rays, by considering them as consisting of a quantity a of light com- 
pletely polarized in a plane making the angle x with that of incidence, 
and of another quantity 1—a im the state of natural light. Upon this 
principle it becomes 

sin?(t—2’) 1+acos*x tan?(t—7) 1—acos?x 
San 8: nee Oe he 
* But as we have proved that partially polarized rays are rays whose 
planes of polarization form an angle of 2x with one another, as al- 
ready explained, x being greater or less than 45°, we obtain a sim- 
pler expression for the intensity of the reflected pencil, viz. the very 
same as that for polarized light. 
hie Cie a Si tan?(7—2’) , 
~sin? (i+w) > Sees: Tro ial ee 
Hence we have 
sin? (¢ —7’) tan? (z—2’) 
cis Ges er ian® (ie) z) 


Han Ere 
1+ (tne So) : 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. BY 


286 On Polarization of Light by Replecici: 


This formula is equally applicable to a single pencil of polarized 
light of the same intensity as the pencil of partially polarized light. 
In all these cases it expresses the quantity of light realy or appa- 
rently polarized in the plane of reflexion. 

In order to show the quantity of light polarized at different angles 
of incidence, I have computed the following table for common light, 
and suited to glass in which m=1.525. 


PLATE GLASS. - @ 


Inclination of 


Angle of| Angle of |Plane of Polari-|Quantity of Light|Quantity of Po-|Ratio of Po- 
incidence Refraction| zation to Plane | reflected out of | larized Light | larized to 
a. a. of Reflexion. 1000 Rays. Q. Reflected 
@. Light. 
° ° ° / 
0 0| 0 O| 45 0 43.23 0. eae 
10 O| 6 32 43 51 43.39 1.74 | 0.04000 
20° 0:12’ 58° )°"40 1s 43.41 7.22 |0.16618. 
25 (10/16) 5 37 21 43.64 11.6 0.26388 
30 0/19 84} 33 40 44.78 17.25 |0.3853 _ 
35 0/22 6 29.8 46.33 24.37 | 0.5260 
40 0j 24 56 23 41 49.10 . 33.25 |0.6773 
AbAO1O7 Sia, 17 22% 53.66 “44.09 | 0.82167 
50 030°. 9 10 18 61.36 © 57.36 | 0.9360 
56 45] 33 15 0 -0 19.0 79.5 1.000 
60 O/| 34 36 5 Ad 93.31 91.6 0.9628 
65 0} 36 28 | -12 45 124.86 112.7 0.90258 
70) PONS 4 02. 18 32 162.67 129.80 | 0.79794 
76 0) 39 18 26 52 257.26 152.34 |0.59154 
78 0; 39 54 30 44 329.95 © 157.67 | 0.47786 
79 OV 40 4 31 59 _ 3599.27 157.69 | 0.43892 
80 0} 40 13 33 13 391.7 156.6 0.40000 
82 44/40 35 36 22 499.44 | 145.4 +|0.29112 
84 0); 40 42 38 2 560.32 134.93 | 0.2408 
85 0|40 47 | 39 12 * 616.28 123.75 | 0.2008 
86 0; 40 51 40) 22:7)... 076.26 108.67 | 0.16068 
87 0| 40 54 41 32 744.11 89.83 | 0.12072 
88 0/40 574, 42 42 819.9 65.9 0.0804 
89 0/40 58 43 51 904.81 36.32 | 0.04014 
90 0! 40 58 45 0 1000.0 0 0.0000 


As the preceding formula is deduced from principles which have 
been either established by experiment or confirmed by it, it may be 
expected f6 harmonize with the results of observation. At all the 
limits where the pencil is either wholly polarized or not polarized at 
all, it of course corresponds with experiment: but though i in so > far 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 287 


as I know there have been no absolute measures taken of the quan- 
tity of polarized light at different incidences, yet we are fortunately 
in possession of a set of experiments by M. Araco, who has as- 
certained the angles above and below the polarizing angle at which 
glass and water polarize the same proportion of light. In no case 
has he measured the absolute quantity of the polarized rays; but the 
comparison of the values of Q at those angles at which he found them 
in equal proportions, will afford-a test of the accuracy of the formu- 
‘la. This comparison is shown in the following table, in which col. 1. 
contains the angles at which the reflecting surface polarizes equal 
proportions of light; col. 2. the values of 9 or the inclination of the 
planes of polarization; and col. 3.+he intensities of the polarized 
light computed from the formula. 


Angles of Inclination of Planes of | Proportion of 
Incidence 7. Polarization to M N,or®@. Polarized light or Q. 


B20 art. Wein 970-934 1 naa. e 
PANIGA Aes 3. BTO2 err ve 4) GLOBT 
Ba. MBL Ae 2/4) Seamer e.” 489808 
Gimli As ue SG 6 Ona. 4 # sg 2000 


Glass: No. 1. j 
en DO Mer hE Ol LOS eke oA SG 


QO) ADA NC BS an Ne) a ee OG: 


BG aie es hav A BAP 6 nas mero) 


Water: No. 4.. rif rants (Wicker ly ako iy emia aoe Pes 31 > 


The agreement of the formula with experiments made with as 
great accuracy as the subject will admit must be allowed to be very 
satisfactory. ‘The differences are within the limits of the errors of 
observation, as appears from the following table : 


Deviations from Part of 
Experiment. whole Light. 
Glasses. Now ls O.0065° 225,002. F. a 
Noe 2) 0026" wee Me 
No. 3. 0.0122 in 
Water: No. 4. 0.0156 atm 


M. Araco has concluded, from the experiments above stated, that 
equal proportions of light are polarized at equal angular distances from 
the angle of complete polarization. ‘Thus in Glass No. 1. the mean 
of 82° 48’ and 24° 18’ is 53° 33’, which does not differ widely from 
the maximum polarizing angle, or 55°, which M. Arago considers as 


288 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


the maximum polarizing angle of the glass *. In order to compare 
this principle with the formula, I found that in Water No. 4. the an- 
gle which polarizes almost exactly the same proportion of light as the 
angle of 86° 31’, is 15° 10’, the value of » being 41° 54’ at both 
these angles ; but the mean of these is 50° 50’ in place of 53° 11/; 
so that the rule of M. Araco cannot be regarded as correct, and can- 
not therefore be employed, as he sapresa to determine the angle 7 
complete polarizationt. 

The application of the law of intensity to the phenomena of the po-" 
larization of light by successive reflexions, forms a most interesting sub- 
ject.of research. No person, so far as I know, has made a single 
experiment upon this point, and those which I have recorded in the 
Philosophical Transactions for. 1815, have, I believe, never been re- 
_peated. All my fellow laborers, indeed, have overlooked them as 
insignificant, and have even pronounced the results which flow from 
them to be chimerical and unfounded. Those immutable truths, how- 
ever, which rest on experiment, must ultimately have their triumph ; 
and it is with no slight satisfaction, that, after fifteen years of unre- 
mitted labor, Iam enabled not only to demonstrate the correctness 
of my former experiments, but to present them as the necessary and 
calculable results of a general law. 

When a pencil of common light has been reflected from a trans- 
parent surface, at an angle of 61° 3/ for example, it has experienced 
such a physical change, that its planes of polarization form an angle 
of 6° 45/ each with the plane of reflexion. When it is incident on 
another similar surface at the same angle, it is no longer common 
light in which 2 =45°, but it is partially polarized light in which a= 
6° 45’. In computing therefore the effect of the second reflexion, 

cos (2-2) 

but, 
cos (1 — A) 
as the value of a is always in the same ratio to the value of 9, how- 
ever great be the number of reflexions, we have tan = tan"9 for. 
the inclination 4 to the plane of reflexion produced by any number 
of reflexions n, 9 being the inclination for one reflexion. Hence 
when @ is given by observation, we have tangp={/o0. The formula 


we must take the general formula tan o = tan ie, 


* Hence we have assumed m==1.428, the tangent of 55°, in the preceding 
calculations. 

t It is obvious that the rule can only be true wher m==1.000; so that its error 
increases with the refractive power. 


On Polarization of Light by Reflection. _ 289 


” . ; ayia 
for any number x of reflexions is therefore tan d= (SES ) 
cos(t — 7) 

It is evident that é never can become equal to 0°; that is, that the 
pencil cannot be so completely polarized by any number of reflex- 
ions at angles different from the polarizing angle, as it is by a single 
reflexion at the polarizing angle; but we shall see that the polariza- 
tion is sensibly complete in consequence of the near approximation — 
of 4 to 0°. 

I found, for example, that light was polarized by two reflexions. 
from glass at an angle of 61° 3/, and 60° 28/ io another observation. 


Now in these cases we have 
@ after 6 after Quantity of 
Ist Reflexion. 2nd Reflexion. Unpolarized light. 


Miwo tehexions at.61°. 3’ . 69457... 0° 47’ ,~ 0.00037". , 
GDA 08. Me he Gey s ay. a OOO LS 


The quantity of unpolarized light is here so small as to be quite 
inappreciable with ordinary lights. 
In like manner I found that light was completely polarised by five 
reflexions at 70°. Hence by the formula we have 
| Values of 9. Unpolarized Light. 
Pcenexion ate 1098 sha) BOW OF Jeo 4) He (0.25892 
hh Bei hl inion wah SOc ot, 42% o OMB4S2 
eae i hee HP eh et Sen Pe AS. Bags 26,0/00460 
bie atures die Na); rat Neyg Ly yh tet) 3 oO ONOGD, 
MAS ee ch tote t Sid's ehen Oy Boi. de> .  OO0CRS 


The quantity of unpolarized light is here also unappreciable after 
the fifth reflexion. * 

In another experiment I found that light was wholly polarized by 
the separating surface of glass and water at the following angles: 


Values of 9. | Unpolarized Light. 
By 2 reflexions at 44° 514 . . 0°56’ . . 0.0005 
By 3 cies ere de 2h et se SORE QEEN Is.) OOO RE 


In all these cases the successive reflexions were made at the same 
angle; but the formula is equally applicable to reflexions at differ- 
ent angles,— 

1. When both the angles are greater than the polarizing angle. 

6  Unpolarized Light. 

1 reflexion at 58° 2’, and 1 at 6792’ . 0°34’ . 0.0002 

2. When one of the angles is above and the other below the po- 
larizing angle. 


290 On Polarization of Light by Resflewidi. 


6 Unpolarized Light. 

1 reflexion at 53°, and 1 at 58° 2’. . 0° 12’ . 0.000024 
This experiment requires a very intense light, for I find in my jour- 
nal that the light of a candle is polarized at 53° and 78°. 

In reflexions at different angles, the formula becomes tan 6= 
cos (t-++2/) cos (I+1’) 
cos (t—2’) “cos (I—I’)’ 
like manner if a, 6, c, d, e, &c. are the values of » or 4 for each re- 
flexion, or rather for each angle of incidence, we shall have the final 
angle or tan é=tan a Xtan 6 Xtane x tand, &c. 

It is scarcely necessary to inform the reader that when a pencil of 
light reflected at 58° 2’ is said to be polarized by another reflexion at 
67° 2’, it only means, that this is the angle at which complete polar- 
ization takes place in diminishing the angle gradually from 90° to 67° 
2’, and that even this angle of 67° 2/ will vary with the intensity of the 
original pencil, with the opening of the pupil, and with the sensibility 
of the retina. But when it shall be determined experimentally at what 
value of ; or rather at what value of Q the light entirely disappears 
from the extraordinary image, we shall be able by inverting the for- 
mula to ascertain the exact number of reflexions by which a given 
pencil of light shall be wholly polarized. 

As the value of Q depends on the relation of 2 and 2’, that is on the 
index of refraction, and as this index varies for the different colors 
of the spectrum, it is obvious that Q will have different values for these 
different colors. ‘The consequence of this must be, that in bodies 
of high dispersive powers, the unpolarized light which remains in the 
extraordinary image, and also the light which forms the ordinary im- 
age, must be colored at all incidences; the colors being most dis- 
tinct near the maximum polarizing angle. ‘This necessary result of 
the formula, I found to be experimentally true in oil of cassia, and va- 
rious highly dispersive bodies. In realgar for example 9 is = O at an 
angle of 69° 0’ for blue light, at 68° 37’ for green light, and at 66° 
49’ for red light. Hence there can be no angle of complete polariza- 
tion for white light, which I also found to be the case by experiment; 
and as Q must at different angles of incidence have different values 
- for the different rays, the unpolarized light must be composed of a 
certain portion of each different color which we be easily determi- 
ned by the formula. 

Such are the laws which regulate the polarization of light by re- 
flexion from the first surfaces of bodies that are not metallic. ‘The 


I and ¢ being the angles of incidence. i 


On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 291 


very same laws are applicable tg their second surfaces, provided that 
the incident light has not suffered previous or subsequent refraction 
from the first surface. The sine of the angle at which 9 or Q hasa 
- certain value by reflexion from the second surface, is to the sine of 
the angle at which they have the same value at the first surface, as 
unity is to the index of refraction. Hence 9 and Q may be deter- 
mined by the preceding formule after any number of reflexions, even 
if some of the reflexions are made from the first surface of one body 
and the second surface of another. ; 

When the second surface is that of a plate with parallel or inclined 
faces, its action upon light presents curious phenomena, the law of 
which I have determined. I refer of course to the action of the“sec- 
ond surface at angles less than that which produces total reflexion. 
_ This action has hitherto remained uninvestigated. It has been 
hastily inferred, however, from imperfect data; and the erroneous 
inference forms the basis of some optical laws, which are considered 
to be fully established. , 

Among the various results of the preceding investigation, there is 
one which seems to possess some theoretical importance. If we con- 
sider polarized rays as those whose planes of polarization are paral- 
lel, then it follows that light cannot be brought into such a state by 
any number of reflexions, or at any angle of incidence, excepting at 
the angle of complete polarization. At all other angles the light which 
seems to be polarized, by disappearing from the extraordinary image 
of the analysing rhomb, is distinguished from really polarized light, 
by the property of its planes of polarization forming an angle with 
each other and with the plane of reflexion. At the polarizing angle, 
for example, of 56° 45’ in glass, the light reflected is 79.5 rays, and 
it is completely polarized, because the planes of polarization of all the 
rays are parallel; but at an angle of incidence of 80°, where 392 
rays are reflected, no fewer than 157 appear to be polarized, though 
their planes of polarization are inclined 66° 26/ to each other, or 33/ 
13/ to the plane of reflexion. This appearance of polarization, when ~ 
the rays have only suffered a displacement in their planes of polariza- 
tion from an angle of 90°, which approximates them to the state. of 
polarized light, arises from the law which regulates the repartition of 
polarized light between the ordinary and extraordinary images produ- 
ced by double refraction, and shows that the analysing crystal is not 
sufficient to distinguish light completely polarized from light in a state 
of approach to polarization. The difference, however, between these 


292 On Polarization of Light by Reflexion. 


two kinds of light.is marked by most distinctive characters, and will 
be found to show itself in some of the more complex phanenene of 
interference. 

In my paper of 1815, already referred to, I was led by a distant 
view of the phenomena which I have now developed, to consider com- 
mon light as composed of rays in every state of positive and negative 
polarization* ; and upon this principle the whole of the phenomena 
described in this paper may be calculated with the same exactness 
as upon the supposition of two oppositely polarized pencils. Nothing 
indeed can be simpler than such a principle. The particles of light 
have planes, which are acted upon by the attractive and repulsive 
forces residing in solid bodies; and as these planes must have every 
possible inclination to a plane passing through the direction of their 
motion, one half of them will be inclined — to this plane, and the 
other half +. When light in such a state falls upon a reflecting 
surface, the — and the + particles have each their planes of polar- 
ization brought more or less into a state of parallelism with the plane 
of reflexion, in consequence of the action of the repulsive foree upon 
one side or pole of the particle through which the plane passes; while 
in the particles which suffer refraction, the same sides or poles are by 
the action of the attractive force drawn downwards, so.as to increase 
the inclination of their planes relative to the plane of incidence, and 
bring them more or less into a state of parallelion with a plane perpen- 
dicular to that of refraction. 

The formule already given, and those for refracted light which are 
contained in another paper, represent the laws according to which the 
repulsive and attractive forces change the position of the planes of 
polarization ; and as we have proved that the polarization is the ne- 
cessary consequence of these planes being brought into certain posi- 
tions, we may regard all the various phenomena of the polarization of 
light by reflexion and refraction, as brought under the dominion of 
laws as well determined as those which regulate the motions of the 
planets. 

Allerly, December 25, 1829. 


*M. Biot has followed me in this opinion. See Traité de Physique, tom. iv. p. 304. 


ie 


Notice of new Medical Preparations. 293 


Art. V.—.Votice of new Medical Preparations; by G. hia Car- 


PENTER—communicated by him. 


1. Precipitated Extract of Bark. 


This extract contains quinine, cinchonine and the new organic al- 
kali chinioidine’; it possesses all the febrifuge properties of the quin- 
ine and can be afforded at about one third of the price. 

In consequence of a scarcity of Peruvian bark in our market for 
some time past, quinine has likewise become scarce and its price near- 
ly doubled. It is therefore highly important to the community, to ob- 
tain, at a less expense, a preparation of equal efficacy. ‘The above 
extract will fully effect this object, and being the product of the 
same cinchona and containing, in addition to the quinine, other alka- 
lies of the same bark, of at least equal efficacy to that of the quinine, 
it may be expected that after being fully tried by the faculty it will 
be adopted by them. Chemists and pharmaceutists have long thought 
that cinchona contains other active alkaline principles in addition to 
those already discovered in the bark, and the conclusive facts in re- 
lation to the use of quinine, of the entire bark and of the residuary 
extract, sustain this opinion; for many intermittents, which resisted 
numerous doses of six or eight grains of quinine, have yielded to the 
bark in substance. The late Dr. Emlen first used the residuary ex- 
tract of bark, after the extraction of the quinine, and found that in 
doses of two grains it was quite equal to the sulphate of quinine: 
and Drs. Parrish and Wood, distinguished physicians of this city, 
have fully confirmed Dr. Emlen’s experience.* 

Dr. Sertiirner, chemist, cf Hamelin, likewise confirmed what has 
been observed by others, that, as a tonic, quinine cannot be substi- 
tuted for cinchona, and made analytical researches on the bark to 
discover the cause of the difference. The precipitate obtained by 
treating the acidulous extract of cinchona by alkalies comprises, be- 
sides quinine and cinchonine, certain additional organic alkalies. 
These new organic alkalies, especially the principal one, which Dr. 
S. calls chinioidine, are intimately united with a sub-acid, resinous 

substance. The new alkali exists in the cinchona bark, associated 
with quinine and cinchonine, and they are all precipitated together 
in the above extract. The chinioidine resembles the other alkalies 


* See Journal of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Vol. I, p. 44. 
Vou. XXII.—No. a 38 


294 Notice of new Medical Preparations. 


of cinchona in its solubility, color and taste; but 4t is distinguished 
from them by its activity, its greater eabaelly of saturation, its alka- 
line reaction, and its intimate combination with an extractive matter. 
Dr. Sertiirner further states, that, as a medicine, chinioidine is one 
of the most precious agents of the materia medica. It is not only 
a better febrifuge than quinine, and even than the bark in substance, 
but it possesses many other therapeutic properties, which, admitting 
that they exist in the bark itself, are not to be found in quinine. It 
was prescribed by Dr. S. in the dose of two grains, three times a 
day. In all the cases, treated by the new remedy, the fever was 
cut short without relapse, and in every instance the concomitant 
symptoms, such as paleness of the face, loss of appetite, cedema of 
the legs, &c. disappeared in a shorter time than is usually the case. 
The medicine failed only in a single instance. The quantity neces- 
sary for a cure was generally from twelve to twenty four grains.* 

The above extract is kept of two degrees of consistence ; the soft 
can be made into pills with the addition of liquorice powder or starch, 
and the hard can be pulverized and made up with conserve of roses 
orsyrup. It can be made into a solution in either state, with water, by 
the addition of one drop of sulphuric acid to each grain of the extract. 

The following formula is an elegant mode of exhibition which pro- 
duces a beautiful transparent solution. . 


R Precipitated extract of bark, - - 48 grains. 
Acid sulphuric, = - - - - - 40 drops. 
Alcohol, - = ee Vie - Sy sel 2 drachms. 
Aqua cinnamon, - - - - - 4-ounces. -* 

M. j 


Drop the sulphuric acid in the alcohol with-about two drachms of 
water, which should be used to triturate and dissolve the extract, 
after which the remaining water should be gradually added. If al- 
cohol is inconvenient it can be made without it, and common water 
can be substituted for the cinnamon. 

MM. Henry and Delondre of Paris differ in their wet with 
Sertiirner, and consider what he denominates chinioidine to be a 
compound of quinine and cinchonine, associated with a peculiar yel- 
lowish substance of very difficult separation. I think the opinion of 
Sertiirner to be correct, as it is supported by numerous pharma- 
ceutical facts and characteristic properties of the substance. The 
peculiar yellowish substance of very difficult separation, described 


* See Journal des Progres for 1829, Vol. III. 


Notice of new Medical Preparations. 295 


by Henry and Delondre, is no doubt also an active component of this 
extract, and we find in a number of vegetable crystalline products, 
that they frequently owe their activity to certain principles associated 
by their crystallization; and if rendered entirely pure, they are fee- 
ble or inert. Thus, piperine owes its activity to the resinous oil 
which is associated, more or less, with it; and in proportion as it con- 
tains this or is deprived of it, is its activity increased or diminished. 
It has been fully ascertained, that one drop of the oil is equal to 
three grains of piperine. Thus also it is with narcotine, which is 
more or less associated with a viscid substance, resembling caout- 
cheuc, an acid and extractive matter in combination ; and in propor- 
tion as the crystals are deprived of this combination, and are ren- 
dered pure and white, is its activity diminished. In the process of 
denarcotizing opium, this product is obtained with the narcotine, but 
it is not to narcotine that opium owes its stimulating and unpleasant 
properties, but to this compound. Magendie states that one grain of 
narcotine, dissolved in oil, has a powerful effect on the animal system, 
resulting in death. « My experiment with narcotine differs exceeding- 
ly from the above, having given several grains without any sensible 
effect whatever, and a physician of this city, who has made a num- 
ber of experiments on this salt, in a pure state, informs me that it 
possesses little or none of the narcotic or stimulating powers; that he 
took ten grains of it at once, and that it produced no other effect than 
a slight nausea, but associated as it is in its first extraction from opium 
with the peculiar substances before named, it possesses very active 
and deleterious properties.* 

Quinine, when it was first made, contained a portion of extractive 
matter associated with it, and it is a fact well known to every physi- 
cian who has employed this salt extensively, that it is not as active as 
it formerly was, and that it requires a larger dose for patients unac- 
customed to the use of quinine. 

We also know that the common manna is more active than the 
flake, and it could be so purified that it would not be more active 


* Dr. Tully, in a highly interesting paper on Narcotine, published in the xxr vol. 
of this Journal, although differing with me as to the degree of activity of this sub- 
stance, states that it is less active on the human system, than opium itself. That 
from 2 to 5 grains constitute a medium full dose, where a single dose is to be taken. 
That it is entirely destitute of all stimulating powers, whether it is given in full or in 
moderate and uniform doses at regular and short intervals, but that it possesses sopo- 
rific effects greater in proportion to its powers, than the sulphate of morphia. 

He concludes by stating that he does not esteem it by any means, impossible that 
the bitter principle, or extractive (as vaguely called,) or perhaps some other part of 
this complex drug may yet be found to contribute something to its medicinal effects. 


296 Notice of new Medical Preparations. 


than white sugar. The seeds of the Palma Christi contain no doubt 
two oils, one bland and the other acrid, and in proportion as they 
are united by the difference in the process of manufacture, is this 
oil increased or diminished in activity; thus the cold expressed 
is more bland and less active than the hot pressed. The acrid 
oil resides in the skin of the beans and is obtained in greater 
proportion in the latter. If the oil were obtained from the skins 
alone, it would no doubt be as active as the croton, for if we swallow 
one or two of the beans, with the skins, the action is very powerful. 
I would by no means infer that in all cases of the combination of 
vegetable proximate principles such effects’ would result; we know, 
indeéd, some instances to the contrary ; but in the cases above re- 
ferred to, there will probably be no diversity of opinion. 

In relation to the precipitated extract of bark, I must further state, 
that I have endeavored to have it tried as extensively as possible, and 
the result has been most satisfactory ; by many physicians it is pre- 
ferred to the quinine, and they will probably use the latter rarely, 
when they can obtain this extract at so low a price. 

1 would wish At to be particularly understood, that this is not the same 
as that formerly sold under the name of extract of quinine, as it con- 
tains all the essential properties of the bark and is destitute of no princi- 
ple except gummy matter, gluten and the woody fibre, which are inert. 


2. Oleo-Resinous Extract of Mustard or Oil of Sinapine. 


The seeds of the Sinapis nigra have been found, by long experi- 
ence, to be one of the most useful of all the rubefacients. It is usu- 
ally applied, as is well known, in the form of a paste, made with the 
farina of the seeds and vinegar, which is to be applied in the manner 
of apoultice. This is frequently attended with considerable difficul- 
ties and inconveniences; and mustard differs so essentially in quality, 
that little dependence can be placed upon the certainty of its effect. 
It is, almost always, more or less adulterated, and the flour which is 
sold from the stores is frequently composed of more than half for- 
eign or inert matter. At the suggestion of our distinguished profes- 
sor, Dr. Physick, I have made a series of successful experiments on 
the mustard, with a view of ascertaining the active constituent prin- 
ciple, and separating it, ina form best adapted for its application as a 
rubefacient. I have obtained, separately, the active principle of the 
mustard, which is combined with a volatile acrid oil.* 


* A full description of which will be given in the second edition of my Essays on 
the Materia Medica, shortly to be published. 


Notice of new Medical Preparations. 297 


- This peculiar principle, in conformity to the usual nomenclature 
of vegetable proximate principles, I have denominated Sinapine. It 
bears the same relation to mustard that piperine does to pepper, and 
like it is united with an acrid oil, and is otherwise analogous to piper- 
ine in its chemical properties, in not forming salts with acids, &c. 
This differs essentially from the volatile oil obtained by distillation, 
being in every respect superior, and will entirely answer all the pur- 
poses of the mustard plaster, as a rubefacient. It is simply to be 
applied to the skin, and in a few hours all the effects of the mus- 
tard plaster will be experienced, and vesication may be produced by 
a second application of the oil. ‘To the country practitioner this oil 
is very valuable: it is inconvenient to carry the mustard about the 
country ; its activity is soon diminished, and even destroyed, so that, 
if not kept in a close bottle, it becomes inert. As country practi- 
tioners seldom carry this article with them, they are thus frequently 
deprived of the use of sinapisms, so important in some cases as to 
be essential to the life of the patient. 

This oil is so concentrated a preparation that a small vial, which 
can be conveniently carried with the medicine usually taken by the 
physician, will be sufficient for several applications. As its action 
will always be uniform and it will not be liable to deteriorate in any. 
length of time, it will -be found, as a rubefacient, to be a valuable 
substitute for the crude mustard, and I hope will prove a valuable 
addition to the materia medica.* Philadelphia, Feb. 22, 1832.+ 


Postscript—Philad.WMay 25, 1832.—I have just observed a paper in the Lon- 
don Medical Gazette for Dec. 1831, in which Mr. R. Battley gives a detailed anal- 
ysis of the cinchona. He finds it to consist of thirteen distinct principles, from qui- 
nine to the woody fibre. They all possess active properties, except three. The sul- 

‘phate of quinine, in consequence of the absence of all the other properties ahove al- 
luded to, can therefore be but partially efficient asa medicine. Thus the research- 
es of Mr. Battley, have corroborated my statements in relation to the extractive matter 
of Peruvian Bark. This gentleman has suggested the propriety of using the liquor 
cinchona, as a medicine and maintained its decided superiority, since it contains all 
the principles of the bark above described, except the three objectional ones, viz. 
gummy matter, gluten and the woody fibre. This liquor Mr. Battley observes, is 
admitted by many competent judges, to be superior to the quinine ; and as it is pre- 
pared by the same process as the quinine, which excludes these three principles, 
and contains all'the rest, it would on evaporation, make precisely the same extract, 
as I have described under the name of the precipitated extract of bark. 


* Physicians can be supplied with the precipitated extract of Bark and Oil of Sina- 
pine, at Geo. W. Carpenter’s Chemical Warehouse, 301 Market St., Philadelphia. 
+ Intended for the April No. but did not arrive until it was finished. 


Meteorological Observations. 


298 


ySoMO] 9YI—' FH SEAL pue—jsn3ny jo IGT oy! Uo sem Jeod oY) UII oInjerodura} soysiy ayy, *AInjuD jyeY Ise] OM 
uiyia ‘yjuow ayo Lue ue Jepjoo A[qeqoid sem pue £ EZBT “q2,q JO Yuow pjoo owa.nxe oY} Jo IVY) Mojaq og Ajesioasd 
SBM OI ‘oG"g SBAL ‘Daqq JO YUOU ay} Jo ainjeseduia} uk YT, ‘ohG PAOQE ASI II pIp ‘ULE JO YQ SY} O} “AON Jo IIQz 
ay} WO’, SUN Jato OU ye ING ‘o1g 0} aso1 AINoJOW OY} “99q] JO ISTE OY} Jo Suiuaas ay1 UG apne] sit) UI [ensn ueyY 
ajeaiZ Yonu st yoIyM ‘oG°ZG eoUaJayIp—pH|G°G] JOJUIM oy} JO JeYJ—po8g SEM sTUOW JaWIWUNS at} Jo oINjetodwial ayy, 
“OP'Sp sem ised sqjuow aAfaai) ay} Jo aimjesodmie} uevow oy yey) ‘savodde q afqei Suloses0y oy} WoIy—'sysowary 


el | 4a; ‘Ot 9'8¢ 1'8Z_, 46% |GOT/99|LE9G 81,2 \FHISTISE/z9[6ET Lee “worningidnra ay Fer |UsPis ts g'9g Wersy 
—|1 | 6 oP et |uz |g lz le \t lz \t |9 lz Ie |G Ot loz | 04, OL | * Gi6y 08| ° sl9ztse\r9¢iosr s6z| Indy 
tT |=] “6 8's ‘z |g (6 |g le lo It clr Ile le 16 |oz | col 9-| ° 9% | 99] * S{Leie'sa jenz|e-98 coz | our 
Se a TS %9 et | ot tr lr le le It llr |r {6 |e [St |r | 29] Oe] * 4S2] Gh} * als [eT] 6L| ‘9%| ‘PL| “G9q 
fab el ale LG zp |@t foro ie le lt le I] jz ie IIL loz | G9] Oc-| * zlse] gh] ° lét] et|rst|o'ee cei) ‘uer 
alae | eT +4 tt 19 {erie Ie It |—l—ls |t fo [ler lor | 6r| 21-| ° site| Te} * 6lraes | -¢ frstigr | ‘20q 
ae ade y Té ‘Z |rt-i¢ |g le |—|—I¢ | 1 |e [OT loz | 69] 9 * log} Go| * @it log lzreloer ig'ze| “AON 
Ms | ee pi ze ise |9 Ig |¢ lo lt lig le [io [OL |tz | co] FZ} OOGZ] OL) * Ble [SbF \LLF\9'8G| “eF| 220 
| Gee | ae L'8 sr |oe | lz lp is le l—l—i2 [clo |r let | 2m) 88} * 9/08} Gs} ° ZIIT|L'sgigec|e29 \o1g| 3deg 
| Cece ey gz |g {ttle lo le It |\t iF lo |r ILL loz | 99] S¢ | * 9/62] 6) ° sioile's9|r99| ‘os i9sg| “Sny 
LiL | St peq re ‘+ |#r le le le ig |t lg iz le It \tleL lat | OF] GF | ° OPIST] «88| ~* «Fir I9'S9] ‘99| “Gz \s'09) Aine 
eo LY pat ‘ele le lz |n le le |x |—irtlet lot | 2s] 88 | ° Fire) 06] ~° Zlotlez9\ts9lesz\e6s| oun 
6. 3/,Ga.| 22. Seu), 98S. z_ | ge |e |x |e |e |e |r 2 (LIU |9 Jou lot fold/oge | '¥ $01} oF 8/1 "a Eiazia'es o'r) ‘F9| “sr| APN 
welesl £ | e& | esblra: gzlolelz| | & |s| | F |Sga\e=) ee 
23|° > 5 03 st 2 tee rae 3|2| =| = loa (8 2 2 Spe S| § S|} Slo 8lo8 S 
~s\78| 8 | gg | ESSiee Sia) |u Sie po ear Sal ea |S | |+ o| esl 
Sas] wo | Se | SESssst lage ({tel7fe | | [Slhe = B8/2e/Fe12-S) poe 
Bae Pe i ge | oSelsaels ial) 1) (8) Ie =o ? SS gels | S| esl 
Beles § cae we R/S ge ete | oaks = ee ees =! eae er 
eayas 4 EB ror Hf for ‘uoneea pip! S | -ainjyeaadura, | -oanzearodma) |S else} 2 
‘ 5 a 2 uw. Slaen 4 Sole Slee 

ae & com prs =o sy josXepjo'on| =} yo unuory | jounurxep 15] | aol 8 


“SNOAUNV TTAOSIWN “SGNIM “AGHLVaM “AL LAWNOWAAHL 


“HOJSUIYSe MM WOIS “A 0% oF UO] pue “Ni /8G oh Ie] UE 
“gear ‘Aeqy jo Atp 181 oy) 0} ‘Tegy ‘[udy jo Aep yyog oy) wos (3A) ‘olfseneAey ye opeu ‘suoHeAIosqgQ Jo [eUINOL [RoISoOjO1OA}eT{ & UIOIy SpORINXT 


“GIGI T NILUVY ‘Uaxy Ag £a79Q,7, yvaSopo10aaFy~—]A “LAY 


Meteorological Observations. _ 299 


was 20° below zero, and was the same on the 28th of January and 
on the 25th of February—range of thermometer 114°. The mer- 
cury fell below 0 fifteen nights in December—seven in January— 
six in February—and one in March, being twenty nine nights 
during the winter. The quantity of water, which fell, in rain, hail 
and snow during the year was 58.6 inches, and very near the same 
which fell the year preceding. The quantity of snow and hail was 
116 inches (9ft. 8in.) which was four feet more than fell in the winter 
preceding, and much more than I can find recorded in my journal 
of any former year. We had good sleighing from the 26th of Nov. 
to the last week in March, and there is yet much snow in drifts and 
shaded places on the high lands.« The aurora borealis was seen on 
fifteen nights only, during the year, which was forty one less, than 


in the twelve months preceding. Nothing unusual in the appearance 


of the aurora was observed, during the year, except on the morning 
of the third of July. I first discovered it, at about one o’clock, at 
which time the northern part of the heavens was brilliantly illumi- 
nated. Pencils of rays shot up towards the zenith, some of which 
were accumulating and others were dissolving, as they moved rapid- 
ly from east to west. But that which rendered the scene peculiarly 
interesting was the color of the rays. Each pencil, for a consider- 
able distance from its termination, exhibited a beautiful crimson col- 
or ; while the lower part of these pencils, and the broad arch, which 
appeared to sustain them, at about 25° above the horizon, were of 
a yellowish white light. ‘The rapid succession of different colored 
rays, and the great extent in the heavens which this aurora covered, 
rendered the exhibition beautiful and sublime beyond description. 
The thermometer at the time stood at 68°—light breezes from the 
south—the sky was a little hazy and the atmosphere thick and hu- 
mid. ‘The days before and after this northern aurora were showery 
and attended with lightning and thunder. The twelve months past 
have been peculiar for sudden changes of the atmosphere, and ex- 


* tremes of heat and cold. ‘The temperature of the summer months 


was about 3° above that which is usual in this latitude, yet we had 
frosts in every month; (viz) on the 24th and 25th of June, on the 
12th of July and on the 29th of August; but not so severe as to be 
injurious to vegetation. 

We had fourteen cloudy and rainy days in June, and the same 
number of cloudy and eleven rainy days in July, the consequence of 


‘ which was the most luxuriant growth of grass. But the hay crop be- 


300 Observations on the Primitive Boulders of Ohio. 


ing generally washed, and not sufficiently dried, was less valuable than 
usual, in proportion to the quantity obtained. ‘The Indian corn crop 
was abundant, and on the low lands it ripened in the month of Au- 
gust. The season was too warm and humid for potatoes, and the 
crop came in light—rye, oats, &c. suffered extremely by blight. In 
the vallies fruit trees of every kind were tolerably productive, but on 


high lands very little fruit was obtained. 
Fayetteville, Vt. May 1, 1832. 


Arr. VII.—Observations on the Primitive and other Boulders of 
Ohio; by Darius and Increase A. Lapuam. 

Ir is well known, that large rounded masses of primitive, and. 
other foreign rocks, lie scattered over the secondary regions of the 
West. This subject has of late years, received much attention from 
geologists; and many very ingenious theories have been, at various 
times invented and proposed to account for their origin and to show 
the means by which these “lost stones” have been removed to so 
great a distance from their original beds. We will not stop here 
to enumerate all the various theories (many of which are now laid 
aside) but will proceed to state such facts as have come under 
our observation and the conclusion to which they have “ irresistibly ” 
brought us. 

The bed and banks of the Ohio river are composed in part of 
gravel or water worn fragments of rock. The kinds of rock called 
granite and greenstone (one a primitive and the other a superincum- 
bent rock) which are not found in the neighboring hills, nor indeed 
any where within the great basin of the river, forming the greater 
proportion of this gravel. The first inquiry which presents itself in 
reflecting on this subject is, whence came all this granite and green- 
stone? Our curiosity is excited and we examine the subject fur- 
ther. This same kind of gravel is discovered mixed with clay and ° 
sand forming banks and -even hills of moderate elevation that are 
entirely beyond the influence of the Ohio or any other existing cur- 
rentof water. It is evident therefore that we must seek some other 
and mightier cause for the wearing down and removal of these pebbles. 
But these banks appear to be the kind which geologists call dilwvial ; 
they consist of layers more or less distinct which are always curved 
or bent and variously distorted. ‘The gravel is generally cemented 


Observations on the Primitive Boulders of Ohio. 301 


by a stiff blue clay and is then called hard pan, but occasionally by 
carbonate of lime into a kind of pudding-stone. This is then di- 
luvial* earth and agreeably to the opinion of most geologists has its 
origin in some flood or deluge. 

If we travel hence, in a northern direction, this kind of earth 
becomes more and more common, till on the Sandusky plains it 
is the subsoil of the whole country. It sometimes covers the under- 
lying rocks to the depth of eighty or a hundred feet, as may be 
seen at the Bluffs near Circleville. At this place the Ohio canal 
is constructed along the base of a steep diluvial bank in such a man- 
ner that the strata are beautifully exposed for a distance of two 
miles. The clay found in this bluff is of two kinds—one a deep 
blue containing many fragments of a dark colored argillite with 
other kinds of gravel. It has probably resulted from the destruc- 
tion of this kind of rock. ‘The other is a yellowish kind of clay 
which covers the strata below in a non-conformable position. It 
contains fragments of the common limestone and sandstone of Ohio 
which are not much worn. mt 

The attentive observer will discover also, in travelling to the north 
that the gravel forms a larger proportion in the composition of the dilu- 
vion and that the fragments are larger. - In general when they exceed 
the size of one’s head they are called boulders by geologists ; but there 
is no distinct mark by which they are separated—they gradually 
pass into each other, and it is not always easy to determine wheth- ~ 
er a particular stone should be called a boulder or a gravel stone. 
Proceeding still further north the boulders become more numerous ; 
they are of larger dimensions and generally less rounded by attri- 
tion. 

From all these facts it is evident that we must look beyond the 
Great Lakes for the origin of our primitive fragments, and it only 
remains, to point out the precise locality from which they have been 
removed and the question would be settled. We should then know 
every thing concerning them. But as our observations have not 
been extended into that region and as we have no books describing 
the rocks there, we must leave this to future observers. 

The surface of this immense deposit of diluvion every where 
presents a wave-like undulated appearance. These swells are gen- 


* Or perhaps tertiary as well as diluvial —Ed. 
Vou. XXII.—No 2. 39 


302 Observations on the Primitive Boulders of Ohio. 


erally more abrupt about Circleville than north of it. One eleva- 
tion near that place has been mistaken for an ancient artificial mound. 
“In many places the soil is not very inviting to the agriculturist: only 
a stinted growth of oaks and hickories is to be met with. Oceasion- 
ally a low place is too wet even for these and only a few sub-aquatic 
weeds and grasses are found. ‘These last places become larger as 
we go northward and there assume the name of prairies. ‘The di- 
luvion extends to the lakes and probably some distance into Canada. 

The boulders occur most frequently in the beds of ravines and 
of rivers and the tops of hills. ‘They seldom occur on the surface 
of the diluvion where it remains entire; but upon descending into 
the bed of some stream or rising a hill they may be seen in abun- 
dance. It would appear that the earth in these situations has been 
washed away leaving the more ponderous boulders exposed to view. 

At the Circleville bluffs the boulders were not allowed to form a 
part of the bank and were therefore collected in large piles by the 
workmen. Here then is an excellent opportunity for examining and 
comparing them. They also have the advantage of having been ta- 
ken fresh from the bank, and are therefore free from the effects of 
the weather. We are not sufficiently familiar with the characters 
of primitive and transition rocks and the minerals which they contain, 
to undertake a description of each kind found here. This we have 
often regretted, as it would be quite interesting and highly useful in 
determining the precise localities from which they came. It is ho- 
ped that some more experienced geologist will ere long visit this lo- 
cality. Granite, gneiss, horblende rock, greenstone, argillite, &c. are 
mixed profusely with secondary rocks containing petrifactions of 
shells and madrepores. ‘The largest boulder which we have seen 
was on the summit of a hill near Lancaster and was about six feet 
in length—we have heard of others much larger. 

Of the cause of this great flood which has at some very remote 
period swept down from the north and undated the whole coun- 
iry it would be in vain to speak. We are convinced that sucha flood 
has existed and that it has been the cause of the removal of our 
primitive fraginents from their original beds.. All the facts connect- 
ed with the subject may be satisfactorily accounted for in this way. 

In an interesting paper by the Hon. Judge Tappan inserted in the 
14th Vol. of this Journal, it is stated that a variety of trap or 
greenstone is the only rock which is found ‘rounded and smoothed 
by attrition,” and that these rarely ocgur, except “in the valleys of 


Method of tracing Oval Arches. 303 


rivers.” We would add that granite and many other rocks are al- 

ways found rounded as well as greenstone ; but they are not at pre- 

sent always smooth. This is owing to their surface having been dis-_ 
integrated and left rough by the action of the weather, while green- 
stone, which is firmer in its texture, has not been operated upon by 

this cause. It is true that they occur most abundantly in water 

courses, but they are also to be found in great numbers on the hills 

as has already been explained. No one can suppose that the boul- 

ders and gravel which now line the beds and banks of. the rivers in 

Ohio could have been rounded and smoothed by the action’ of the 

currents of those rivers. 

In a letter accompanying the above notice it is observed that the 
expression primitive boulders commonly employed does not accu- 
rately describe the fact, since some of these boulders are secondary. 

There is an interesting connexion between the boulders, and the 
diluvion which has sometimes been overlooked. For example, at 
the bluffs, a few miles below Circleville, in the various and very cu- 
rious windings and turnings of the different layers of clay, sand and 
gravel, large quantities of boulders have been found by digging, 
and the gravel is nothing more than boulders on a smaller scale. 
Is not this conclusive as to the origin of the boulders? 


Art. VIII.—On the method of tracing oval arches from several cen- 
tres; by Epwarp Miuuer, A. M. Civil Engineer. 


Tue difficulty of describing an Elliptical arch of great span, 
makes it important to find a curve, which, resembling the Ellipse in 
its graceful and convenient form, may be constructed with great- 
er ease and accuracy. Oval arches are frequently formed by three 
ares of circles; the radii of two being equal, and their centres situa- 
ted in the transverse axis; while the middle arc has a longer radius, 
and the centre in the line of the conjugate. 

Several methods of tracing ovals from three centres are given in 
the elementary works on Carpentry, &c. But when the difference 
between the rise and half-span is considerable, the change of curva- 
ture becomes very perceptible and unpleasant to the eye, and it is 
advisable to employ a greater number. This has been done by the 
French in the construction of some of their finest bridges. A beau- 
tiful example is Neuilly, built by Perronet, and traced from eleven. 


304. | Method of tracing Oval Arches. 


The following conditions are (fig. 1.) laid down by the French Engi- 
neers, in order to avoid the indetermination of the problem. 

1st. The number of centres shall be uneven. 

2nd. The sum of the arcs shall be 180°. The two ares of 
smallest radius shall have their centres on the transverse diameters, 
and the arc of greatest radius shall have its centre in the line of the 
conjugate. 

3rd. pe, the distance from the centre of the oval to the centre of 
the middle arc, shalk be three times pa, the distance from the centre 
of the oval to the centre of the arc of smallest radius. 

Ath. pa, the distance above mentioned, shall be divided by the ra- 
dii of the other arcs into parts which are to each other in the ratio of 
the natural numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, &c. In all cases deduct one from 
the number of centres to be employed, and half the remainder will 
give the parts into which ap must be divided. 

5th. The distances between the prolongations of the radii meas- 
ured on the conjugate axis produced, shall be equal. 

The following method of determining the point a, was discovered 
by my friend Benjamin Aycrigg, Civil Engineer, and is I believe the 
best and most simple. 

He supposed the concentric curve ao, (fig. 2.) to be drawn commen- 
cing at the point a, with the radiustza. ‘Then it will be perceived on an 
examination of the figure that we have sufficient data to calculate all 
the angles contained within the curve a 0, and all the radii and lines 
in terms of ap. Suppose this done and the line op to be found. 
Then because the curve ao is concentric to the curve 6d, the lines 
ab, ah, rg,od, &c. are allequal. Let each of them=za, and in or- 
der to construct an arch .of any given rise and span, we have this 
proportion, (op+x) : (pa+«)* ‘rise : semi-span; whencethe value 
of x=ab=od, is easily found in terms of ap, so as-'to give pd, and 
ob, in the required proportion. Having this we can of course find 
the value of the radii and other required lines in terms of the rise 
and span. 

In these ovals it will be observed that the value of all the lines and 
angles within the curved line ao, are general, and when once calcu- 
lated will serve for allarches. I shall now proceed to give these gene- 
ral calculations for curves of 5, 7, 9, and 11 centres. That of 
7 was computed by Mr. Ayerigg, the others by myself. ‘Their ac- 
curacy has been abundantly tested in various constructions. ‘The 
Alleghany Portage Rail road, on which I am at present engaged, has 


JMethod of tracing Oval Arches. | 305 


twelve oval arches; four of which are, of forty feet span, one of 
twenty five, one of twenty, &c. In fact the great facilities afforded 
for tracing the curves, and cutting the joints of the voussoirs normal 
to them, must cause their adoption wherever they are known. 


Five Centres. (Fig. 3.) Seven Centres. (Fig. 4.) 
-ab=1. AB= 6. 
bA=2. AD=18. 
AB=4.50 oo 1, 
AC=9.00 . bc=. 2. 

ca=2.704 2 CA cake 
cb =2.305 ‘De=18.252 
bd=0.399 ec= 8.111 
Ce=9.619 eb= 8.667 
Ae=0.619 db= 1.857 
Cb=9.220 da= 2.425 
dea=21° 9’ 40” bf= 0.567 
eCd=12° 31/ 44” eg= 1.124 
AaB=56° 18’ 36” Ab—1.a10 


ADc=9° 27/ 45” 

ACb=22° 37/19” 

ABa=45° 
ceb=13° 9/ B7” 
bda—22°, 22,484 


Nine Centres. (Fig. 5.) 


Aa=10 C—O Od cs 
AB= 7.5 bh= 0.683 
AE=30 : ct= 1.507 
ab= 1 dk= 2.155 
bc= 2 Am= 2.423 
cd= 3 AEd= 7° 35/ 41” 
dA= 4 dgc= 9 41 12 
Ed=30.268 cfb=13 40 57 
gd=17.025 bea=22 9 58 
g£ce=17.673 AaB=36 52 12 
fe= 7.250 AbC=59 2 10 
fb= 8.074 AcD=72 43 7 


eb= 1.590 AdE=82 24 19 


306 


atk 


AB= 9 nm= 
AF=45 ul= 0.762 
Am=15 tk= 1.798 
mu= 1 six 2.778 
ut= 2 rh= 3.488 
iso Ag= 3.765 
sr= 4 AFr= 6°30 237 
7rA= 5 rgs= 7 41 45 
Fr=45.277 spt= 9 55 36 
gr=28.98 tou=13 54 44 
gs=29.69 unm=21 9 40 
ps=15.90 ArF=83 39 35 
pt=16.88 AsE=75 57 50 
ot= 6.568 AtD=66 2 14 
ou= 7.604 AuC=52 7 30 


nu= 1.425 AmB=30 57 50 


* * x * % 

In a letter from Mr. Miller accompanying the above communica- — 
tion, and dated April 7th, 1832, it is suggested by him that it would 
be very important to the country if practical men would make known 
through a Journal of Science, “such things, as in the course of 
their experience they judge may be especially useful to their profes- 
sional brethren,” while every thing that is erroneous or useless 
should be of course rejected. Mr. Miller goes on to remark: ‘ Civ- 
il Engineering is now becoming, from the numerous public works in 
the United States, a distinct and important profession. It is one in 
which a large amount both of science and experience is required 
and in which the members are able to assist each other greatly, by 
making known the results of their labors. In England this object 
is attamed by an “ Institution of Civil Engineers,” which however 
desirable, is hardly to be expected in a country like our own where 
they are so widely scattered. 

I have taken the liberty of asking your attention to this igen as 
I believe that a public call would bring out a large portion of the tal- 
ent and experience of our profession. 

The enclosed paper on Oval Arches was drawn up by myself for 
my own convenience and is copied nearly verbatim from my common 
place book. I know of no work which gives a satisfactory view of 
the subject ; and am sure that the ‘general calculations have never 
before been published. ‘They were made some years ago with 
much care and their accuracy has, been repeatedly tested by experi- 


~~ 


: 
| 
| 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 307 


ment. I think they will be found very useful to Engineers and Ar- 
chitects.” ; 

We coincide fully with Mr. Miller as to the importance of elici- 
ting this species of knowledge, in our country, and the Editor will 
feel much obliged by communications on this subject from all able 
Engineers who may. deem this Journal a suitable vehicle for their 
observations. 


Art. IX.—*On the Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore ; 
by C. Kersten, of Freyberg. Translated from the German of 
the Neues Jahrbuch der Chemie und Physik, Band II. Heft 1. 
by Cuarztes U. SHeparp. 


In the following brief memoir, I am permitted to give, in succes- 
sion according as they were obtained, the results of a chemical 
analysis of the principal varieties of the Brown Lead Ore from va- 
rious localities——commencing with a short historical notice of that 
variety which from its interesting chemical composition led to these 
inquiries. 

Several months ago, there was found in the Sonnenwirbel mine 
at Freiberg a mineral, which in its external appearance resembled 
the so called, botryoidal Brown Lead Ore, but which presents an es- 
sential difference in its inferior specific gravity. Prof. Breithaupt 
subjected it to a mineralogical examination, and communicated a de- 
scription of its external characters in the third number of this Jour- 
nal for 1830, from which the following account is borrowed. This 
mineral occurs in distinct balls and globular masses, whose interior 
exhibits a fine concentric texture; in consequence of which, Prof. 
Breithaupt was led to denominate it Polyspharite. It belongs, ac- 
cording to him, to the order of Spar, but to the order Baryte in the 
system of Mohs. It possesses a greasy lustre, and a brown color 
which runs from a clove-brown into Isabella-yellow. It occurs only 
in balls and globular masses, upon whose exterior are seen small, but 
undeterminable crystals. ‘These masses rarely unite to give rise to 
kidney-shaped pieces. It presents a moderate degree of lustre, and 
an asteriated or radiating fracture, which sometimes becomes nearly 
invisible, and from thence passes to the compact conchoidal fracture. 
Its hardness =4, according to the scale of Breithaupt, or 3 by the 
standard of Mohs. Its specific gravity, when perfectly free from 
foreign substances =6.092. 


308 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


For our earliest notice of this mineral, we are indebted to Mr. 
Freiesleben, Counsellor of mines, who in his Geological Researches 
(Bd. VI. S. 148—150) separates it from the true Brown Lead Ore, 
treating it as an appendix of that ore, and giving a complete minera- 
logical account of its properties: The collection of minerals for- 
merly belonging to Mr. Freiesleben, and now in the possession of 
the University of Moscow, contains four specimens of this mineral. 
These specimens are alluded to by Mr. Fischer, Counsellor of state,* 
under the name of reniform Brown Lead Ore. From whom we learn 
also, that it had been found, before its discovery at Freyberg, at 
Johanngeorgenstadt and at Mies in Bohemia. 

As the specific gravity of this mineral—5.836 to 6.092—is nota- 
bly lower than that of the so called, Green and Brown Lead Ore, 
which according to Mohs, in a yellowish green ‘specimen from Jo- 
hanngeorgenstadt amounted to 7.208, in a green one from Zschopau, 
7.098, and in the variety examined by Wohler from the same locali- 
ty, as ascertained by Rose, equalled 7.054, it appeared very proba- 
ble that there would be found to exist a difference in chemical con- 
stitution between these two minerals. And the conjecture seemed 
very probable, that the Polyspharite might present a different satu- 
_ rating proportion of its constituents from the Green and Brown Lead 
Ore, or that the base of the latter might be replaced in part in the 
former, by another base specifically lighter. With a view to settle 
this point, I have subjected the Polyspharite to an accurate analy- 
sis; having for this purpose obtained of Mr. Von Weissenbach, Sur- 
veyor of mines, specimens of the most perfect purity. 


Preliminary Trials. 


Alone before the blowpipe, this mineral melts at first only upon its 
outer edges; it then swells up, and at last, with a strong blast of the 
instrument, it melts into a white enamel-like mass. During the ex- 
periment, the flame of the candle is tinged green upon its edges. 
If small fragments of the mass are placed upon a bead of salt of 
phosphorus, and this salt is heated again, there arises a lively effer- 
vescence, and we perceive the smell of muriatic acid. Fused with 
soda, it afforded metallic lead and a brown, semi-fused slag. No 
odor of arsenic was perceived during these trials. 


* Musée Whistoire naturelle de Vuniversité Imp. de Moscow, par Fischer de 
Waldheim. Tome II, p. 297. 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 309 


Phosphate of iron and metallic lead were obtained, with boracic 
acid and iron. The mineral was completely dissolved at an ordinary 
temperature in nitric acid, unattended with effervescence and without 
leaving,any residue behind. The solution formed a colorless liquid, 
from which, in the cold, were deposited after the nitrate of lead, the 
chloride of lead in long needle-like crystals. The decanted solution 
exhibited the following properties. 

Nitrate of silver gave a dense precipitate of chloride of silver. 
A stream of sulphurettéd hydrogen produced a dense brown pre- 
cipitate, which farther enquiry showed to consist wholly of sulphuret 
of lead. By continuing the passage of this gas for a longer time, a 
slightly yellowish precipitate of sulphur made its appearance. 

Hydro-sulphuret of ammonia threw down from the solution, which 
had been completely freed from lead by sulphuretted hydrogen, a 
white precipitate, which I at first took for alumine, as indications of 
this base had been noticed in experiments with the blowpipe. A 
closer examination, however, proved that this precipitate consisted 
of a phosphate of lime with excess of base. In order fully to de- 
termine the presence or absence of alumine, I fused together, after 
the method of. Berzelius, two parts of the mineral with six of car- 
bonate of soda and one and a half of silica, and dissolved the result- 
ing mass in water. ‘The insoluble portion being treated with muri- 
_ atic acid, the silica separated as usual, and the filtered liquid tested 
for alumine, no trace of this base was afforded; but on the contrary, 
it was found to contain dime. From the solution of the mineral 
wholly freed from lead by sulphuretted hydrogen, sulphuric acid 
threw down a voluminous precipitate, which was partly dissolved in 
a large excess of water; which solution was much troubled by the 
addition of oxalate of potash. ‘The solution, after the precipitation 
of the lime, being mingled with alcohol for the complete separation 
of the sulphate of lime, was found to contain no additional bases. 
Nitrate of silver produced in it a yellow precipitate, soluble in caustic - 
ammonia and nitric acid. 

For the purpose of ascertaiming whether fluoric acid was an ingre- 
dient in this mineral, one gramme of it was heated with sulphuric 
acid ina platina capsule. A glass plate held over it, manifested 
after the experiment, a distinct corrosion. This striking appearance 
induced me to repeat the experiment for a number of times, which 
was always attended with the same result; and the presence of fluoric 


Vou. XXII. —No. Ds 40 


310 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


acid was thus proved to a certainty. The following, therefore, are 
the constituents of this mineral; viz. lead, lime, phosphoric acid, 
chlorine and fluorine. 


Analysis. . 

The determination of the quantitive composition of the Polyspha- 
rite was effected by means of three analyses, made with the utmost 
possible care, in which the method of proceeding was as follows? 

(a.) One gramme of the finely powdered mineral was dissolved 
in the cold, in order to prevent the escape of any muriatic acid ; 
and the solution, diluted with water, was precipitated by nitrate of 
silver. According to the mean of three trials, the quantity of chlo- 
ride of silver obtained was 0.106, which corresponds to 0,0200 of 
muriatic acid,* or to 0.01765 of chlorine. 

(b.) After the precipitation of the chloride, and the removal of the 
excess of nitrate of silver from the liquid by means of muriatic acid— 
the precipitate thus obtained being carefully washed with distilled wa- 
ter—a stream of sulphuretted hydrogen was passed through the fluid, 
and the sulphuret of lead obtained was estimated. In two experi- 
ments the sulphuret of lead was converted into sulphate of lead, by 
means of concentrated nitric acid. These precipitates corresponded 
to 0.7217 of oxide of lead, or to 0.670 of metallic lead. 

(c.) The lime was thrown down, by means of sulphuric acid, from 
the liquid remaining after the precipitation of the lead, after that I 
had warmed, filtered and mingled it with alcohol. The voluminous 
precipitate obtained was separated by the filter: the liquid was some~- 
what concentrated, and the sulphate of lime thus obtained added to 
the first precipitate; and the whole dried and ignited. Its weight 
amounted to 0.1558, which corresponds to 0.0697 of lime. As the 
proportions of chlorine, lead and lime in this mineral were ascertain- 
ed by three analyses, so also, the proportions of phosphoric and flu- 
oric acids were found, through the loss of weight in these processes. 


* As these researches sustain a peculiar relation to those of Mr. Wéhler upon the 
composition of the Green Lead Ore, and to those of Mr. G. Rose upon the chemical 
constitution of the Apatite, I have, for the sake of favoring a comparison, employed 
in this memoir the same determinations, for the most part, as were made use of by 
those chemists. 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 311 


These analyses yielded, in 100 parts: - 


Oxide of lead, - — - ~ ay RQ IG 
Lime, - - - - 6.47 
Muriatic acid, - - - - 2.00 
Phosphoric and fluoric acids, with loss, 19.36 

100.00 


If we observe the results of the foregoing analyses, we cannot fail 
of discovering a great resemblance between them and those obtained 
in the examination of the Phosphates and Arseniates of Lead by Mr. 
Wohler ;* while on the other hand, a remarkable difference will also be 
perceived. The Brown Lead Ore just examined, besides the custom- 
ary constituents, contains also fluoric acid and lime, neither of which 
have before been found as constituents in. the Phosphate of Lead, and 
forms therefore, a constant and fixed compound of substances, whose 
union together in minerals was before unknown. We may neverthe- 
less form a correct idea of the manner in which chlorine, fluorine, 
phosphoric acid, calcium and lead are united in this mineral, when we 
take into consideration the results of the researches of Mr. Wohler 
upon the Phosphates and Arseniates of Lead, and those of Mr. G. 
Rose upon the Apatite, which afforded us our first knowledge of the 
interchanging relations of these minerals. From the former of these, 
it follows, that the Green Lead Ores are compounds of 1 atom chlo- 
ride of lead and 32 atoms phosphate or arseniate of lead; and that 
the phosphoric and arsenic acids are so mixed in variable propor- 
tions in the compound, that they may completely replace each other, 
without giving rise to any modification in crystalline form, or to the 
relative proportion of the lead in the basic salts to that in the chlo- 
ride of lead. ‘The investigations of Mr. G. Rose concerning the 
chemical constitution of the Apatites, prove that these are isomorphous 
with the Phosphates and the Arseniates of Lead; and that one and the 
same chemical formula expresses the composition of both species, viz. 

€! P 
R +3R°< -- 
Ee As 

In this formula R stands for radical, and the Apatites differ from 
the Green Lead Ores in their chemical relations only in this respect,—. 
that chlorine and fluorine replace each other in the first, and phos- 


* Poggendorff’s Ann. d. Ph.u. Ch. Bd. IV. S. 161. 


312 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


phoric and fluoric acids, in the last. Calcium is the radical in the Ap- 
atites, and lead in the Green Lead Ores. If we compare the results 
of the researches alluded to with those of the present analysis, we at 
once perceive in what-a near relation the former stand to the latter ; 
and that the Polyspharite appears to be only a Green Lead Ore, in 
which a part of the lead is replaced by lime, and a part of the chlo- 
rine by fluorine, or in which chlorine and fluorine, lead and lime are 
isomorphous with each other. Although we may in this manner ar- 
rive at a probable conclusion respecting the mode of composition in 
this mineral, and comprehend the relation of the chlorine and fluorine 
compounds to the basic salts, yet the kind of combination in the 
union of the chlorine and fluorme with calcium or with lead, remains 
to be explained. We may assume, for instance, that in the mineral 
under consideration, chlorine and fluorine are in common united with 
lead; in which case the formula of the mineral will be, 


fa Wide Sa ne WA 
Pb eo P 
33 Bo Ca? 


or even, that the chlorine is united with the lead to form chloride of 
lead, and the fluorine with the calcium to form fluoride of calcium ; 
in which case the chemical composition of this mineral would be 
represented by the following formula : 
Pb-€1 Pb?) :- 
ey E 
Caz Ca? 

Additional circumstances, of which I shall make mention in the 
conclusion of this memoir, particularly the circumstance that in all 
the inquiries respecting the varieties of the Brown Lead Ores, every 
one examined by me that was found to contain fluoric acid contained 
lime also, and on the other hand, those which were deficient in lime, 
were in like manner wanting in fluoric acid, serve to render the 
latter supposition concerning the way in which the constituents of 
this mineral are united as the most probable one. If we adopt this 
formula, we can easily ascertain, by means of Berzelius’s new table 
of equivalents, the quantity of fluorine, or of phosphoric and fluoric 
acids, which the Polyspharite contains, and which were not deter- 
mined in the analysis. By means of a simple proportion, founded 
upon the quantities of oxide of lead and chlorine, found in the analy- 
sis, we derive the proportions of fluoride of calcium and basic phos- 
phate of lime; from whence 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 313 


The chemical composition of the Polyspharite reckoned after the 
last mentioned formula is as follows : 


Chloride of lead, 10.838 containing 8.073 lead. 
Fluoride of calcium, 1.094 sé 0.567 calcium. 
Basic phosphate of lead, 77.015 es 58.918 oxide of lead. 
lime, 11.053 & 6.025 lime. 
100.000 


_ The result thus obtained, not only confirms in the highest degree the 

supposition which we have made respecting the mode of combination. 
among the constituents, but shows at the same time the correctness 
of the chemical analysis; since the quantity of lime as ascertained 
from calculation corresponds very well with that found by analysis, 
when we take into consideration, that the determination of the base 
could not, in the present instance, be so accurately ascertained as that 
of the chlorine and of the oxide of lead. 

But if we adopt the view, that the fluorine in this mineral, instead of 
the chlorine is united to the lead, which, however, I have already 
remarked is the less probable state of the case, and if we enter into 
a similar computation as above, founding the estimate upon the quan- 
tities of chlorine and oxide of lead ascertained from the analysis, we 
have the following as the chemical constitution of the Polyspharite : 


Chloride of lead, 10.838 containing 8.073 lead. 
Fluoride of “ 3.398 os RST ie 1 66.991. 
Basic phosphate of lead, 73.255 ee 56.047 “ 
—__—_—_—_—_—— lime, 12.509 és 6.815 lime. 
100.000 


As the preceding chemical examination of the variety of Brown 
Lead Ore, called Polyspharite shows, that in it, a part of the chlorine 
is replaced by fluorine without occasioning a disturbance in the con- 
stituents, or a variation of the formula which expresses the compo- 
sition of the Green Lead Ore, it appeared highly probable, that cal- 
cium and fluorine might enter into the constitution of more varieties 
of Green and Brown Lead Ore. 

This induced me, in the first place, to analyze more Brown Lead 
Ores from different localities; and I especially directed my attention 
to such as were possessed of a diminished specific gravity. 

As I have pursued the same method of investigation as has been - 
detailed above, I shall refrain from mentioning the individual steps 
taken in the following analyses. 


314. Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


2. Botryoidal Brown Lead Ore of Mies.—It occurs at Mies, in Bo- 
hemia, in a gangue of clay slate with argentiferous Galena, Quartz and 
Brown Lead Ore of other varieties as respects form and color. The 
specimen employed in this examination forms botryoidal and globu- 
lar masses of the size of a pea. The globules were attached to Ga- 
lena, and exhibted within a liver-brown color, which passes into yel- 
low. ‘They were rough and sometimes crystalline upon their exte- 
rior,—always possessing a conchoidal fracture. The specific gravity 
of this variety was 6.444. Powdered crystals of it, heated with sul- 
phuric acid in a platina capsule, occasioned a very strong corrosion 
upon a glass plate held over the vessel. 

Heated before the blowpipe in platina forceps, the mineral melted, 
and crystallized on cooling. ‘The flame of the blowpipe was very 
perceptibly tinged green at its extremity. Fused with soda on 
charcoal, it afforded metallic lead and a brown slag. During this 
trial, 1 could perceive no odor of arsenic. ‘The solution of the 
mineral in nitric acid, from which the lead had been removed by 
means of sulphuretted hydrogen, afforded a dense cloud on the ad- 
dition of sulphuric acid mingled with alcohol, or of oxalate of potash ; 
whilst by repeating the passage of sulphuretted hydrogen through 
the same liquid, only a slightly yellowish precipitate made its appear- 
ance, which consisted of sulphur. Hence the entire absence of ar- 
senic acid was apparent. According to the mean of two analyses 
which were performed with three grammes of the mineral, I find its 
constituents to be, 


Oxide of lead, - - - - 75.830 
Muriatic acid, - - - = Qate 
Lime, - - -" - - 3-711) 
Phosphoric and fluoric acids, trace of iron and loss, 18.349 
100.000 
which gives the following composition : 
Chloride of lead, - - - 10.642 
Fluoride of calcium, ~ - - 0.248 
Basic phosphate of lead, - - 81.651 
saa lime, - - - 7.457 
99.998 


3. Crystallized Brown Lead Ore of Mies.—The specimen employ- 
ed in the following chemical examination, formed distinct prisms of 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 315 


about one third of an inch in Jength and two lines in diameter, and 
of a clove-brown color. ‘They were feebly translucent, and exhibi- 
ted upon their sides perpendicular to the axis (R—© ), a drusy sur- 
face. The true specific gravity of this mineral was 6.983. Pulver- 
ized and heated with sulphuric acid in a platina capsule, it occasion- 
ed a strong corrosion on a glass plate. Its behavior before the blow- 
pipe was similar to that of the preceding variety. One hundred 
parts of the mineral contained, 


Oxide of lead, - - - - 81.330 
Muriatic acid, - - - 1.909 
ae ee E is - 0.430 
Phosphoric and fluoric acids, with loss, 16.331 

- 100.000 


. If we estimate these numbers agreeably to the formula employed 
above, taking as the basis of calculation the quantities of chlorine and 
oxide of lead found in the mineral, the crystallized Brown Lead Ore 
of Mies will consist of, 


Chloride of lead, - - - 9.664 
Fluoride of calcium, - = REE, 0.219 
Basic phosphate of lead, - - 89.263 
lime, - - 0.848 

99.999. 


4. Crystallized Brown Lead Ore of Bleistadt.—This constitutes, 
as is well known, the most beautiful of the crystallized Brown Lead 
Ores, and occurs in perfectly transparent prisms of a clove-brown color. 
Prof. Breithaupt had the kindness to furnish me with very beautiful 
erystals for this examination. The specific gravity of this variety is 
7.009. Before the blowpipe it decrepitates at first, but afterwards 
melts. The globule crystallizes during congelation. Melted with 
carbonate of soda it affords metallic lead, but offers no indications of 
arsenic. Heated with sulphuric acid, it corrodes glass. The solu- 
tion of the mineral freed from lead by means of sulphuretted hydro- 
gen, affords a precipitate on the addition of oxalate of potash, or of 
sulphuric acid diluted with alcohol. By a long continued stream of 
sulphuretted hydrogen, only a slight precipitate of sulphur appeared. 
One hundred parts of the mineral were-composed: of, 


316 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


Oxide of lead, - - - - - 81.460 
Muriatic acid, - = ~ - 1.956 
Lime, YO EMI AT orbs 0- 1, 0.320 
Phosphoric and fluoric acids, and loss, - 16.264 

100.000 


The constitution of this Brown Lead Ore, estimated by the prece- 
ding formula, and based upon the ascertained proportions oh chlorine 
and oxide of lead, is as follows : 


Chloride of lead, - - - - 9.918 
Fluoride of calcium, - - - 0.137 
eae phorphate of lead, - - - 89.174 
ligiessa tenant une 0.771 

: 100.000 


5. Crystallized Brown Lead Ore from England.—This Brown 
Lead Ore forms upon Galena, delicate needle-shaped crystals of a liver- 
brown color, which are perfectly transparent, and of an adamantine 
luster. Iam not exactly informed of the precise locality of this va- 
riety : I purchased my specimens, furnished with the above ticket in 
German, last year at Lyons of a mineral-dealer, named Lafont. Be- 
fore the blowpipe, it exhibits the same reactions as the varieties be- 
fore enumerated. When treated with soda, no smell of arsenic was 
afforded ; neither did its solution tested in several ways afford any 
signs of the presence of this metal. Examined with sulphuric acid, 
I easily obtained though only in a feeble manner, signs of the pres- 
ence of fluoric acid: in like manner also a very small proportion of 
lime was rendered obvious, by adding, after the separation of the 
lead, to the concentrated solution, sulphuric acid mingled with alco- 
hol. The analysis of this ore could only be performed upon 0.9 
grammes, which gave for the one hundred parts, 


Oxide of lead, - - - - - 82.083 
Muriatic acid, - - - - 1.990 
Lime, - - - - - 0.320 
Phosphoric and fluoric acids with loss, 15.607 

100.000 


These results, estimated agreeably to the formula adopted above, 
and calculated upon the basis of the quantities of oxide of lead and 
muriatic acid ascertained in the analysis, give, . 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 317 


Chloride of lead, - - - - 10.074 


Fluoride of calcium, - - - 0.130 
Basic phosphate of lead, -" = - 89.110 
ge G lime, - - - 0.682 
99.996 


6. Amorphous Brown Lead Ore from the Niclas mine, Freiberg .— 
This variety of Brown Lead Ore, I owe to the politeness of Mr. Frei- 
esleben, Counsellor of mines; it is described in his Geological Re- 
searches (Bd. 6. S. 147.) Its behavior before the blowpipe is simi- 
lar to that of the varieties already described, and it exhibits no trace 
of arsenic. Heated with sulphuric acid in a platina capsule, it at- 
tacks with energy a glass plate held over the mixture. In a solution 
of it, in nitric acid from which the lead had been removed in the 
manner before described, sulphuric acid as well as oxalate of pot- 
ash, produced a white precipitate. Nitrate of silver, added with 
suitable caution, occasioned a yellow precipitate. ‘Therefore this 
Brown Lead Ore is constituted like those before examined, and con- 
tains lime and fluoric acid. ‘The small quantity of the mineral at my 
command prevented me from undertaking its quantitive analysis. 

7. Crystallized Brown Lead Ore of Poullaouen (dep. Finesterre.) 
—This variety of Brown Lead Ore which is the best known and char- 
acterized of the species, occurs in long, distinct prisms, often many 
lines in length, which are generally very irregular, and in which the 
regular terminations are not often distinguishable. ‘This is more com- 
mon than it is to observe a face perpendicular to the axis of the prism. 
The single erystals are for the most part furnished with an opaque, 
brown covering, which I have found to be composed of a mixture of 
phosphate of iron and phosphate of lead. 

The specific gravity when pure, and in crystals freed from the 
coating alluded to, is according to Prof. Breithaupt, 7.0485. 

Alone before the blowpipe, it melts into a polyhedral mass and 
at the same time feebly tinges the flame with a green color. Ifa 
fragment of it is treated with salt of phosphorus, a brisk effervescence 
takes place. With soda upon charcoal, metallic lead was obtained, 
but no,evidence of the presence of arsenic. 

Heated with sulphuric acid ina platina capsule, no extrication of 
fluoric acid fumes, nor any corrosion of a glass plate held over the 
capsule, was perceptible. No change was occasioned in the solu- 


tion of the mineral freed from lead, although it was concentrated, 
Vol. XXII.—No. 2. 41 


318 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


either by the addition of sulphuric acid, or of oxalate of potash. 
Nor was any precipitate of sulphuret of arsenic produced by a 
stream of sulphuretted hydrogen passed through the solution. From 
these experiments, the entire absence of fluoric acid, arsenic acid 
and lime in this lead ore was clear; while it contains, as is sufficiently 
proved, only chlorine, lead and phosphoric acid. : 
‘According to two trials, in each of which four grammes of crys- 
tallized pieces were employed, previously freed from their ferruginous 
coatings, the Brown Lead Ore of Poullaouen contains in one hun- 
dred parts: Alte 


Oxide of lead, - ~ - - - 82.301." 
Muriatic acid, - - - ~ 1.989 
Phosphoric acid with traces of iron and loss, 15.710 
100.000 

or 

1 atom chloride of lead = - - - 10.09 
3% atoms phosphate of lead = —~  - - 89.91 
100.00 


8. Amorphous Brown Lead Ore of Poullaouen.—tIn order to ar- 
- rive at complete certainty respecting the absence of fluorine and eal- 
cium in the Brown Lead Ores of Poullaouen, and to establish upon 
as many data as possible a correct opinion of the chemical composi- 
tions of this mineral species, I have subjected still another variety 
from this celebrated locality, to analysis. ‘The specimens examined, 
consisted of a compact, but superficially drusy mass, which in some 
spots exhibited a yellowish grey, in others, a hair-brown, color. Its 
specific gravity, I found to be 7.050. Before the blowpipe, it con- 
ducts exactly like the crystallized variety ; also, it affords no odor 
of arsenic, when melted along with carbonate of soda. “ Heat- 
ed in the state of powder with sulphuric acid in a platina capsule, 
it occasioned no corrosion to a glass plate held over its surface. 
Repeated researches, conducted in various ways upon its solution, 
afforded me no evidence of the presence of lime: by means of 
caustic ammonia only a slight precipitate of oxide of iron was thrown 
down. 


Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 319 


One hundred parts of this mineral consist of: 


Oxide of lead, = - ~ - - 82.290 
Muriatic acid, ~ - - - - 1.989 
Phosphoric acid with a trace of oxide of iron and loss, 15.721 
ee OE 100.000 

1 atom chloride of lead = - - - 10.069 
38 atoms phosphate of lead = - - 89.931 
100.000 


The following table is arranged to facilitate a review of the re- 
sults concerning the chemical composition of the varieties of Brown 
Lead Ore herein examined. 


i = % 2 ei = 2 =r S 
Brown lead ore of e 23 23 BE BS = g s 
s |e |2°| 2° | s= |e"| * 
Sonnenwirbel 
mine. (Po- > |6.092/10.838)1.094)11.053/77.015) — |100.000 
lyspharite.) 
Mies. (amorph.) |6.444/10.642}0.248) 7.457/81.651|trace| 99.998 
| Mies: (crystal.) |5.983) 9.664/0.219| 0.848/89.268| — | 99.999 
Bleistadt. do. |7.009} 9.918/0.137| 0.771|89.174) — |100.000 
England. do. — |10.074)0.130| 0.682/89.110) — | 99.996 
Poullaouen. do. |7.048)10.090) — | — |89.910\trace|100.000 
(do. amorph.) |7.050)10.069! — | — _ /89.931\|trace|100.000 


From the researches of Mr. Wohler relating to four Phosphates 
and Arseniates of Lead it follows, as I have before remarked, that in 
the mineral Phosphates and Arseniates, a mixture in indefinite propor- 
tions, or a complete replacement of principles may happen, without 
giving rise to any variation in the crystalline form, or to the relative 
proportion of the lead in the basic salt, or to that in the chloride of 
lead. From the results of the analyses of the seven varieties of 
Brown Lead Ore, I think we can deduce the following conclusions. 

1. The Brown Lead Ores are partly combinations of one atom chlo- 
ride of lead and fluoride of calcium with three atoms and two thirds 
of phosphate of lead, and two thirds of phosphate" of lime,—partly of 
one atom chloride of lead with three atoms and two thirds phosphate 
of lead, and correspond in the first case, to the formula, 


Pb-€1 Pb?) |: 
ae P 
Caz Ca? 

PbhE1+3Pb? BP . 


in the second, to, 


320 Chemical Composition of the Brown Lead Ore. 


2. In most of the Brown Lead Ores, a part of the lead is replaced 
by lime, and a part of the chlorine by fluorine. Hence the supposi- 
tion made by Mr. G. Rose in his investigation of the Apatite, that it 
was not improbable that Green Lead Ores would be found, which 
should contain lime, is in reality confirmed. 

3. The Brown Lead Ores are like the Green Lead Ores, isomor- 
phous with Apatite, and constitute, if we may so speak, the connecting 
link between both species; which is not only true as respects their 
chemical composition, but as respects their specific gravity also, 
which is intermediate between the two. 

4. The specific gravity is, in the six examined varieties, notably 
less than that of the Green Lead Ore; and sustains an inverse relation 
to the fluorine and calcium which they contain. The greater the 
quantity of fluorme and calcium in Brown Lead Ore, so o much the 
less is the specific gravity, and the reverse. 

5. It is obvious, that the existence of fluoric acid determines the 
presence of lime, or that the reverse takes place ; since all the Brown 
Lead Ores examined by me, in which fluoric acid was found, contained 
also lime, and on the contrary, those which contained lime contained in 
like manner fluoric acid. ‘This led me to regard the fluorine as uni- 
ted to the calcium, and conformably to this idea to conduct the cal- 
culation of the Brown Lead Ore,—considering that quantity of the 
calcium which remained after the saturation of the fluorine, as united 
with phosphoric acid. . 

6. None of the Brown Lead Ores analyzed, contain arsenic acid ; 
and in them, 

7. Chlorine is isomorphous with fluorine, and oxide of lead with 
lime. 

The results of these researches may possess some interest in a 
chemical point of view, as well as affording a new example of the 
isomorphism of lime and oxide of lead; since, except the instance 
in which lime and lead are isomorphous in Arragonite and White 
Lead Ore, from whence Mr. Mitscherlich derived the fact, and which 
stood a long time as a solitary case, there were only three other ex- 
amples known to me corroborative of the same thing; viz. the iso- 
morphism of the sub-sulphate of lead and the sub-sulphate of lime, 
ascertained by Mr. Heeren; that of the Green Lead Ores and the 
Apatites proved by Mr. G. Rose; and that of the tungstate of lead 
and tungstate of lime observed by Mr. Levy. ‘The present research- 
es afford us a fourth example that lime and lead are isomorphous. 


_ Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage. 321 
Art. X.—Description of the ‘Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage; by . 
S. DeWirr. 


Read before the Albany Institute, May 3, 1882. 


DeWitt’s Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage, with the Scale represented in it. 


|; |. AER ue 


| 


Test /F 


Ss 


eee bo oe elseweiere 
. . 


Above 8 tenths of an inch, the scale is graduated to half tenths. The intermedi- 
ate fractions may be measured with sufficient accuracy by the eye. 


Tue contents of a cone nine inches high are equal to the contents of 
a cylinder three inches high, having its diameter equal to that of the base 


322 Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage. 


_ ofthecone. Three inches fall of rain will then fillsuch a cone. Since 
the contents of similar cones are as the cube roots of their heights, 
in order to-make a scale for measuring the rain fallen into such a cone, 
obtain the cube roots of 30 numbers, proceeding arithmetically from 
one, for the tenths of the three inches severally, and multiply each . 
cube root by such a number as, being multiplied into the cube root 
of 30, shall give 9. That number is found to be 2.9. This will 
give 4.18, for three tenths of an inch; If then the 30 cube roots be 
multiplied by such a number as, when multiplied into the cube root 
of 30, will give 4.18, they will give the divisions of the scale for hun- 
dredths of the three first tenths of an inch. This multiplier is found 
' to be 1.345, very nearly. 

According to these rules the following table is constructed. 


I. Il. 1. EVE Ll. Il. Vil. VV. 
Sa aye! 2.90 | 1.345 16 | 2.521 | 7.30 | 3.39 
2 | 1.260 | 3.65 | 1.69 17 | 2.571 | 7.45 | 3.46 
Zs 49 WANS OF 18 | 2.621 | 7.60 | 3.53 
441 °1.5687-| 460+) 2943 19 | 2.668 | 7.74 | 3.59 
5 | 1.710 | 4.96 | 2.30 20 | 2.714 | 7.87 | 3.65 
64 LBL) 5.37 .2.44 21 | 2.759 | 8. ou 
We 1.913'| 5.55 | 2.5%, 22 | 2.802 | 8.12 | 3.77 
8 | 2. 5.80 | 2.69 23 | 2.844 | 8.24 | 3.83 
9 | 2.080 | 6.03 | 2.80 24 | 2.885 | 8.36 | 3.88 
10 | 2.154 | 6.25 | -2.90 25 | 2.924 | 8.48 | 3.93 
11 | 2.224 | 6.45 | 3. 26 | 2.962 | 8.59 | 3.98 
12 | 2.290 | 6.64 | 3.08 27 | 3. 8.70 | 4.03 


1312-252 al O.82) | ead 28 | 3.036 | 8.80 | 4.08 | ~ 

14 | 2.410 | 6.99 | 3.24 29°} 3.072 | 8.90 | 4.13 

15 | 2.467 | 7.15 | 3.32 30 Aid. LOT: Ge 4.18 
ee ee 


The first column contains the 30 numbers. ‘The second, the cube 
roots of them. The third, their products multiplied by 2.9, for 
tenths of inches; and the fourth, their products multiplied by 1.345, 
for hundredths. 

To measure the fall of rain in such a hollow cone, fixed with its 
base uppermost and horizontal, put down to its apex a stick of wood 
sharpened at its lower end, and mark the water-line on it; then the 
distance from that to the point of the stick, applied to a scale thus 
graduated, will show at once, in inches and decimals, the quantity of 
rain fallen; or the distance may be applied to a common scale of in- 
ches and decimals, and by comparing the length thus found, with the 
numbers in the third and fourth columns of the table, the same re- 
sult will be shown. 


Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage. 323 


A rain gage of this kind may be made of tin ware, painted and 
varnished, for less than half a dollar; and if observations made with 
it be repeated before the water rises high in it, they will be as accu- 
rate as those which are made with the rain gages commonly used, and 
costing twenty times as much. 

The dimensions of the base of the cone may be taken at pleasure ¢ : 
five or six inches for its diameter may be considered advisable ; but 
it is essential to the accuracy of the instrument that its height, meas- 
ured perpendicularly from its inside apex to its base be exactly nine 
inches. : , 

The conical rain gage, of which I gave a description to the Insti- 
tute* sometime since, admits indefinitely of a scale of large divis- 
ions ; but the cost of its construction is considerable. The scale of 
the one I have now described is limited in its graduation; but it is 
such as will serve, in a satisfactory manner and with as much ac- 
curacy as can be expected, the purpose of ascertaining the quantity 
of rain that may fall in the course of a year; and I hope that its 
cheapness, and easy acquisition, will induce many to possess them- 
selves of it, and by its means, contribute to the observations institu- 
ted in our State on this important branch of Meteorology. 

To persons whose minds have a turn to rational pursuits, observa- 
tions of this kind would afford much gratification, even should curiosi- 
ty alone be the prompter, but it would be heightened by the conscious- 
ness that thereby they might coéperate with others, intent on the pro- 
motion of useful science ; besides, as a mere matter of amusement, 
this may be ranked among the rational and refined, which gentlemen 
of leisure might cultivate much to their pleasurable enjoyments, and, 
I may add, to their reputation as useful members of society. 

To facilitate the making of a rain gage of this kind, I furnished a 
tinman with a pattern, which was a sector of 96° 22’ of a circle of 
9.34 inches radius. ‘The chord of this sector is 13.92 inches. This 
pattern, made of paper, having its side edges brought together, would 
form a cone exactly nine inches high, with a base of five inches diam- 
eter. In cutting out his sheet-tin by this pattern, he was directed to 
add just so much to the sides as was necessary for lapping, in soldering 
them to each other, and to add so much to the archas was necessary 
for doubling, in order to stiffen the rim. By these directions he was 
enabled to make the cone as required, with accuracy, and ata trifling 


er cansh SE RAT Onn] DecaD DUEL oven TTT Tne LTSNCTINTT IT RDST cai nee einen rt er ea aaa an aaseteeesee ee eee 


~ 
* Vol. I. No. 6. p. 60 of the Transactions. 


324 Nine Inch Conical Rain Gage. 


expense. If the base of the cone be six inches in diameter the pattern 
will be a sector of 113° 50’, of a circle of 9.49 inches radius. The 
chord of this sector is 15.9 inches. ‘The scale for this gage may be 
made by any person who understands the use of the common scale di- 
vided into inches and their decimals, by graduating a wooden rule, 
with a face of paper pasted on it, according to the numbers given in the 
table. The face ought to be varnished to protect it from the effects 
of the water adhering to the measuring stick. 

The maximum of this gage is three inches, which exceeds the fall 
of rain from the heaviest shower. It.must be a considerable rain that 
will produce one inch. The oftener the observations are made the 
more correct will be the account. 

The following is a specimen of observations made with this gage. 


- Inches. 

1832, April 17 “ 5 0.46 
18 cee 2 - 0.90 

19 = a 0.22 

° 20 Mee = { Oates 
28 A. M. = 0.47 — 
«P.M. = =) Quod 

30 = ~ 0.50 

May 1 = - - 0.06 

5 - = 0.37 

UN - “= ip O2e 

15 - = 0.44 

19.608 2 -) 0352) eae 
25) As Mi 2 = 0.47 


“« P.M. 2 = 1OQOe P 


Descents in a Diving Bell. ; 325 


Arr. XI.—An account of several descents in a Diving Bell, at 
Portsmouth, N. H.; by the Rev. Timoruy Aupen. 


Communicated by Dr. Mease, with observations. 


Tue curiosity and anxiety of people in Portsmouth, New Hamp- 
shire, were considerably excited, during the autumn of 1805, by an 
adventure, many times repeated, which, in that part of the United 
States, was the first of the kind ever attempted. 

About two years, previously, a gondola, containing nearly twenty 
tons of bar iron, was accidentally sunk in the Piscataqua river, at the 
distance of thirty yards from Simes’s wharf, where, at low water, there 
is a depth of sixty two feet. 

Ebenezer Clifford, Esq. of Exeter, and Captain Richard Tripe, 
of Dover, formed a determination to attempt its recovery, and accord- 
ingly prepared a diving bell, five feet nine inches high, whose di- 
ameter, at the bottom, was five feet, and,* at the top, three, in the 
clear. With the aid of this, it was their intention to get such hold of 
the gondola, as to suspend and bring it ashore. Seats were fixed for 
the accommodation of two men, and the shank of an old anchor, 
across the base of the diving bell, served as a resting place for their 
feet. A competent number of iron weights each 56 lbs. being prop- 
erly secured on the rim of the base, so as to make the whole appara- 
tus amount to nearly two tons, Clifford and Tripe descended to the 
bottom of the Piscataqua, the former six, and the latter ten or twelve 
times. Several others occasionally followed their example and the 
confidence of safety was, at length, so great, that some of the men, 
who assisted the adventurers, preferred going down in the diving bell 
to working at the windlass, by which it was lowered and _ hoisted. 
Two persons usually went together and they were, from sixty to sev- 
enty minutes, under water, twenty of which, at least, were taken up 
in the act of descending and returning. 

The adventurers, several times, brought up a single bar ofiron. In 
sweeping the bottom of the river, they also found a small anchor, of 
which they availed themselves. | 

Twice, with much difficulty, after a number of unsuccessful attempts, 
they made fast to the stem and stern of the gondola, and were on the 
point, as they had reason to suppose, of accomplishing the object of 
their submersion ; but, twice were they frustrated by an unforeseen 
accident. Having made fast to the prize, it was, each time, expedient 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. ae 


326. Descents in a Diving Bell. 


to defer weighing it till the succeeding day. Some kind of craft pass- 
ing the place, by night, unfortunately, ran against the float, upon 
which was fixed their apparatus for managing the diving bell, and 
with which the hawsers, made fast to the sunken gondola, were con- 
nected, and thus blasted their hopes. By these disasters the gon- 
dola was so shattered, as to render it extremely difficult to get suffi- 
cient hold, a third time, to raise such a vast weight, and the enter- 
prize was abandoned. 

In descending, a painful sensation was induced on the tympanum, 
attended with a noise, as Mr. Clifford informed me, not unlike that of 
a fly entangled in a spider’s web, till the adventurers were at the depth 
of about twelve feet, when, experiencing a sudden shock, they were 
- completely relieved. This painful sensation, the shock, and subse- 
quent relief, were regularly repeated, as nearly as could be judged, 
every twelve feet. After a few descents, it was perceived that, by 
being raised a foot or two, every eight or ten feet, the shock was 
avoided and the men were freed from that painful sensation, which 
had resulted from the uniformly increasing density of their atmos- 
phere. 

The adventurers once made their submarine descent, at the time of 
high water, when they were seventy two feet below the surface. Two 
thirds of the cavity of their vessel, as was imagined, without making 
any admeasurement, was then filled with water. 

In a clear day and with an unruffled sea, they had light sufficient 
for reading a coarse print, at the greatest depth. As they moved the 
pebbles, with their gaff, at the bottom of the river, fish in abundance 
came to the place, like a flock of chickens, and as devoid of fear, as if 
it was a region, where they never had been molested by beings from 
the extra-aquatic world. From the description of the adventurers, no 
scenery in nature can be more beautiful, than that: exhibited to them, 
in a sunshiny day, at the bottom of the deep Piscataqua. 

It does not appear that the health of either of the men was in 1 the 
least impaired, by their submarine excursions. ‘Their pulsations, were 
quick, and their perspiration was very profuse, while under water; 
and, upon coming out of it, they felt themselves in a fit condition for a 
comfortable sleep. - ‘ 

One of my principal motives, for giving this account, is, to suggest 
a fact, which perhaps, is not unworthy of special notice. I offer it re- 
spectfully, without comment, hoping it will one day prove a hint to pro- 
duce some experiments, which may be of importance.in the healing art. 


Descents in a Diving Bell. 327 


Mr. Clifford: had, for many years, been afflicted with rheumatic 
pains. During the several weeks he was- engaged in this enterprise, 
he was remarkably free from this complaint. 'The first time he de- 
scended in the diving bell, he happened to be considerably affected 
with his disorder ; but, on coming out of it, he was entirely relieved 
‘from pain, insomuch that he walked, directly after, six miles, without 
inconvenience. This was an exertion, which he had not thought 
himself able to make, for several years before. 

Could a series of experiments, be instituted, on proper subjects, 
who will venture to say, that the result would not be such, as to ren- 
der a submarine descent, in a SS ‘diving bell, a frequent 
and favorite adventure? 


Observations by Dr. Mease. 


S 


The painful sensation in the ear mentioned in the preceding paper, 
is invariably experienced by those who descend in diving bells; ow- 
ing to the compression of the condensed air on the membrana tympa- 
ni, but the means of preventing it, which were discovered by Messrs. 
Clifford and Tripe, are not mentionedin any of the accounts of diving 
which I have read, nor do the writers of them notice the “ shock” 
felt by the Portsmouth divers which immediately preceded their re- 
lief from the pain. Dr. Hamel of St. Petersburgh states, that he 
was relieved of the pain by making exertions to admit air through the 
Eustachian tube into the ears, but, succeeded in accomplishing this 
at first, only on one side, when the air rushed into the cavity of the 
right ear, and the pain ceased instantly ; when in the diving bell, he 
was not aware of the simple way in which it is effected. Dr. 
Wollaston informed him, that nothing is wanted but to swallow the 
saliva, as may be seen from the following simple experiment. Close 
your nostrils with the fingers, and suck, with the mouth shut: air will 
come through the Eustachian tube from the ear, and you feel pres- 
sure on the membrana tympani, which prevents you from hearing dis- 
tinctly. As the end of the tube nearest to the mouth, acts like a 
valve, this sensation will often remain even after you have ceased 
sucking. ‘To remove it, nothing is wanted but to swallow saliva, 
whereby the action of the muscles seems to open the end of the tube, 
and then the air rushes in to re-establish the equilibrium : during the 
descent of the bell Dr. Hamel says that the pain returned, but as he 
repeated his exertions to open the Eustachian tube, the air at inter- 


328 Descents in a Diving Bell. 


vals found a passage through it, and he obtained relief.. Through the 
left Eustachian tube no air had yet passed and the pain in the left ear 
was gradually increasing, when about fourteen feet under water, the 
sensation was as if a stick was forced into the ear from without: at last, 
during one of the exertions to open the mouth of the tube on that 
side, the air forced its way in with considerable violence through it, 
and he was relieved from the pain also on that side. I presume the 
“‘shock” experienced by the Portsmouth divers, arose from the rush- 
ing of the air into and through the tubes, as it took place immediately 
preceding their obtaining relief from the pain in their ears. It may 
be useful to state, that this pain will be much diminished, if the bell 
be allowed to descend slowly, so as to admit the air gradually into 
the ear. In ascending, Dr. Hamel says the pain returned, resulting 
from the air in the inner cavity of the ear expanding, as the external 
pressure was diminished ; but it was more easily relieved, the air 
gushing occasionally from the ear through the Eustachian tubes into 
the mouth. 

Dr. H. suggests the probability of the diving bell being used with 
success for the cure of deafness in those cases where it depends on 
an obstruction of the Eustachian tube. ‘The patient would have to go 
down in a diving bell, and make exertions to open the mouths of the 
Eustachian tubes, and then by the pressure of the condensed air, it 
would be forced through the extent of the tube, and thus clear the 
passage. He thinks that the fact of such slight obstructions having 
been frequently removed, by forcing air or tobacco smoke from the 
mouth into the ear, gives weight to the idea: but it is questionable 
whether the deaf person would be able to bear the great pain which 
it is reasonable to suppose he must endure from the condensation of the 
air on the tympanum, until the removal of the obstruction: and his 
sufferings might be so great as to deprive him temporarily of his pre- 
sence of mind, and even of his senses. ‘The experiment ought not 
therefore to be made, unless another person enjoying his hearing ac- 
companied the patient. I have more well grounded confidence in 
syringing the ears with warm milk and water, to remove hardened 
wax. The relief experienced by Mr. Clifford from the rheumatism, 
after his diving, is well worth consideration by the faculty. 

Dr. H. descended at Howth near Dublin, to make himself acquain- 
ted with the manner in which the diving bell for constructing the ma- 
son work under water is used; and says, that the bell was six feet long by 
four wide, and six feet high, with twelve patent glass-lights such as are 


Descents in a Diving Bell. 329 


used ona ship’s deck, on the top. He was half an hour under water 
more than-twenty feet deep, and had light enough to read and write. 
A constant supply of fresh air was given by means of a forcing pump, 
and the respiration was not in the least affected. A diving bell of the 
above dimensions may hold four persons. JI mention these facts for the 
benefit of those who may have mason work to do under water. 
The writer of the article.‘ diving bell” in the Edinburgh Encyclope- 
dia of Dr. Brewster, republished in Philadelphia, by Joseph Parker, 
says, ‘the diving bell appears at first sight to be capable of very ex- 
tensive use to engineers, in constructing the foundation of bridges, 
piers, sluices, and other works of hydraulic architecture. It would 
obviate the necessity of coffer-dams to inclose the area of the foun- 
dation, and of the engines for drawing out the water, preparations 
which are generally the occasion of greater labor and expense than 
the masonry or other work to be performed ; and surveyors might 
have the means of examining the state of their work under water, or 
of making trifling repairs, which from the great difficulty at present 
of gaining access to the parts, are neglected and deferred, until they 
become of serious extent.” He refers to the diving bell having been 
used on two important occasions by the eminent Smeaton: one was 
to repair some of the piers of the bridge over the Tyne, at Hexham, 
in Northumberland ; and by it, he was enabled to fill the cavities be- 
neath them with large rough stones. Another was for the purpose of 
getting up a quantity of large stones which some years before 
had been thrown into the sea at Ramsgate harbor, many of which 
were a ton in weight: one hundred tons were got up in the course of 
two months. Had a diving bell been, used to examine the cause of 
the immense leakage of the western coffer-dam, when the first perma- 
ment bridge on the Schuylkill, at the west end of High-street, was in 
progress of erection in the year 1801, much time, labor and expense 
would have been saved. ‘The cause of this is worth inserting. 
When the British were in possession of Philadelphia in 1777, 
they constructed a-bridge composed of pontoons, over the river, and - 
two of the piles of the coffer-dam were obstructed by-.a part of one of 
those boats which had been accidentally sunk, twenty-eight feet be- 
low common low water. It occupied part of the area of the dam, 
with one end projecting under two of the piles of the inner row, and 
had nearly rendered the erection abortive, admitting the water which 
could not, for a long time, be overcome by all the pumps employed, 


330 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


until one was constructed by the ingenious George Clymer*® of Phila- 
delphia, which threw out 400 gallons per minute. The extra cost 
resulting from this unknown obstruction was $4000, and the labor 
required was performed in 7 one days and nights, in the midst 
of an inclement winter.+ 


Art. XII.—On the Artificial Preparation of Cold Medicinal 
Waters; by Wm. Meapr, M. D. ° 


Continued from Page 131. 


Tue observations already made on the early methods of prepar- 
ing cold medicinal waters render it unnecessary to go any farther 
into the subject; it has long been familiar to the scientific chemist, nor 
has its importance ever been doubted by those who know how nearly 
many of the common operations of nature, may be imitated by art. 

A solution of any neutral salt in common water is not sufficient to 
constitute a true mineral or medicinal water; there is scarcely one 
of any value that is not impregnated more or less with carbonic acid 
gas, derived from some natural source. From the investigations of 
Dr. Black, we first learned that in their mild state, the alkalies con- 
tain a gas, by him called fixed air; which gas possesses acid proper- 
ties; that it can be expelled from the mild alkalies, either by heat 
or by the stronger acids, and can then be combined with cald water 
to which it imparts peculiar properties. 

The first attempt to apply this knowledge to medical purposes, 
seems to have been suggested some time after, by Dr. Hulme, who, 
without much chemical experience, proposed to saturate a solution 
of subcarbonate of potash with the gas already named. Being evolv- 
ed by means of dilute sulphuric acid, the water acquired a lively 
pungent and sub-acid taste, and was then found to possess peculiar 
medicinal properties. ‘This preparation which went by this name, 
came into general use for some time in cases of urinary calculi and 
other diseases of the bladder. 

Some time after, lemon juice was substituted for the sulphuric acid, 
and this constitutes what is now called the saline effervescing draught, 


* Inventor of the powerful Columbian printing-press, the first iron press ever 
erected in the United States. 

t See the interesting account by Judge Peters, of the erection of the bridge, attach- 
ed to the first vol. of the Memoirs by the Philadelphia Soc. for promoting agriculture, 
for sale by McCarty and Davis, Philatie!phia. 


Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 331 


much used as a gentle refrigerant, aperient and diaphoretic. The na- 
ture of the acid of limes as well as of the other vegetable acids, was 
however at that period little known ; it is from the celebrated Scheele 
that we have derived all our knowledge on this subject, as he first 
obtained the citric and tartaric acid in a crystallized state; as the 
crystallized citric acid possessed all the properties of lemon juice, 
it was soon substituted for it; it is recommended also by being cheap, 
imperishable and every where and always attainable. Scheele show- 
ed, moreover, that crystallized tartaric acid may be substituted for the 
citric, and it is still cheaper and more easily obtained. 

Soon after this period, a preparation was made consisting of tarta- 
ric acid and super or bi-carbonate of soda; they are exhibited in 
separate powders in equivalent proportions ; each is separately dis- 
solved in water, and when the two solutions are mixed, rapid effer- 
vescence ensues, and the liberated carbonic acid gas imparts to the 
water the same pungent sub-acid taste, and stimulant properties, 
which the Seltzer and Piermont water is known to possess; while the 
alkali and acid form a neutral aperient and of course medicinal salt. 
This preparation under the name of soda powders is much used and 
not without reason, for it affords a most agreeable and salutary bev- 
erage. Besides being perfectly innocent, it is in the warm season 
much superior to most other liquids in allaying thirst, and being ape- 
rient and diaphoretic, it is usefully employed in slight febrile affections. 

Soon after the introduction of these soda powders, another prepa- 
ration was offered to the public, manufactured upon the same princi- 
ple, under the name of Sedlitz powders, which when dissolved in 
water in a similar manner was described to constitute a perfect imita- 
tion of the mineral water of Sedlitz in Bohemia; but whatever me- 
dicinal effect these powders nfay produce, still the name is quite in- 
appropriate, for the mineral waters of Sedlitz, do not contain a sin- 
gle substance in common with these powders. The Sedlitz water 
according to Bergman, and Hoffman, contains no carbonic acid gas, 
is neither brisk or acidulous, but is simply a saline mineral water, 
holding in solution no neutral salt except sulphate of magnesia, which 
gives it considerable cathartic qualities. The Sedlitz powders of 
commerce constitute an effervescent mixture which is highly pungent 
and acidulous and contain no other salt but the tartrate of soda, and 
of potassa, or what is denominated Rochelle salt, a peculiar neutral 
salt, with two bases, which has never been discovered in the Sedlitz, 
or any other mineral water whatever. 


332 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


I would not imply that the Sedlitz powders are not medicinal; on 
the contrary, they are powerfully cathartic, and this mode of exhib- 
iting the Rochelle salt is highly eligible. I object only to the substi- 
tution of this preparation for the mineral water of Sedlitz to which 
it has no resemblance, while at the same time, I quote it as an exam- 
ple of one of those methods by which an artificial preparation of a 
simple saline mineral water may be effectually imitated. 

From this sketch of the different attempts which have been pro- 
posed to make an artificial preparation of cold medicinal waters, it 
will be seen that it was considered an object of importance from an 
early period, nor was it ever doubted either by the chemist or the — 
physician, that water, when artificially prepared upon true scientific 
principles, possessed all the essential qualities of the natural spring, 
and the experience of the most eminent of the faculty has fully sat- 
isfied them of this fact. 

The two different methods which have been proposed, possess 
their advantages as well as their disadvantages. ‘That which was first 
adopted by Bergman, and which has been since improved as the 
knowledge of chemistry has advanced, is so correct in its principles, 
that it affords a perfect imitation of the natural water as proved by 
analysis; it may be said ina sense to bring the spring to every man’s 
door, but the necessary apparatus is too expensive, and the process Is 
too troublesome to admit of its being made in small quantities for do- 
mestic use. Nothing can be better adapted for large cities, but when 
it is bottled and sent to distant countries and different climates, it is 
obviously subjected to the same disadvantages as the natural waters. 
The heat of a warm climate will render the water perfectly vapid by 
the extrication of the gas, and the consequent precipitation of all those 
substances which it holds in solution ;*excessive cold will be equally 
effectual in injuring it; besides, not being a very portable article, the 
expense and inconvenience of carriage to any great distance renders 
it too expensive for most persons to purchase it. Under these cir- 
cumstances, the discoveries of modern chemists into the nature and 
properties of the alkalies and their combination with carbonic acid 
gas, suggested to them the attempt of making an artificial prepara- 
tion of the most celebrated mineral waters. By the superior affini- 
ty of other acids for the bases of the alkaline carbonates, the carbon- 
ic acid was expelled and combined with the water, while the strong- 
er acid, with the alkali, formed a neutral salt, which enters into solu- 
.tion, and can only add to the medicinal qualities of the water. 


rtificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 333 


This is the principle upon which is founded the extemporaneous 
method of impregnating cold water, at all seasons, with carbonic acid 
gas. As has been already stated, it imparts to the water the same 
sub-aeid and pungent taste which it derives from the gas of the natural 
spring, and the neutral salt causes it to acquire mild medicinal prop- 
erties. 

It must now be perfectly obvious how every medicinal water may 
be effectually imitated as soon as the nature, properties, and propor- 
tions of those substances, and their mode of combination are ascer- 
tained by a previous chemical analysis. With the acid and alkaline 
powders prepared as above, an aqueous solution can be instantly pro- 
duced so precisely similar in taste and in Medicinal qualities to the 
water intended to be imitated that no difference can be perceived 5 
thus proving at the same time, by synthesis, the correctness of the 
previous analysis. 

The advantages of these preparations are peculiarly great in this 
country. Mineral springs are distributed through every part of this 
vast continent, and its inhabitants are thus furnished with these im- 
portant means of health in equal abundance as with the necessaries 
of life. Wherever these mineral waters are found, they are freely 
and advantageously used. As however the most valuable of these 
springs are not situated in those places where they are most required, 
many persons find great difficulty in having recourse to them at so 
great a distance from the fountain. I need only refer to the waters 
of Ballston and Saratoga, and especially to the Congress spring which 
is unrivalled and unequalled in medicinal qualities; but as these are 
more peculiarly adapted to a southern climate, frequent periodical 
journeys to these fountains, from such great distances, become not 
only inconvenient and expensive but for an invalid often impracticable. 

Impressed therefore with the same view of the subject that has 
been expressed by Bergman and other chemists, it early occurred 
to me on visiting the springs for the purpose of making a chemical 
analysis of them, that an artificial preparation of the Congress spring 
may be effectually attempted, so as not only to produce the same 
taste, but, by combining all the substances which I had discovered in 
the Congress water, that a substitute for the natural water might be 
artificially prepared so as to render it equally beneficial to health, as 
the water of the spring, at seasons when it cannot be procured with 


convenience, and frequently not t without the loss of a large portion 
of its useful properties. 


Vou. XXIL—No. 2. 43 


334 Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 


Feeling, as many persons do on leaving the springs, a strong incli- 
nation to partake of the water, especially of the Congress spring, in 
a situation where I could not obtain it, I had recourse to the knowl- 
edge I had acquired of its contents from my previous analysis and 
after performing some experiments on the subject, I succeeded in 
making such an imitation of it, as satisfied me that the preparation 
which I had made possessed all the essential qualities of the spring 
itself, that its taste was even more pungent and agreeable, and that 
when access could not be had to the spring, it may be used, medici- 
nally, with nearly the same advantage. J continued not only to use 
it myself, when necessary, for several seasons, but distributed it to 
many of my acquaintance who were so well satisfied with its perfect 
imitation and the beneficial effects of it, that I was induced to offer it 
to the public in the year 1827. The method which I first pursued 
was to prepare two different powders containing those substances 
with which the mineral water at the spring was impregnated, in the 
proper proportions to make one tumbler of water, constituting an 
effervescing draught, upon the same principles as I have already de- 
scribed. The advantages of this method of making an imitation of 
the waters of any spring extemporaneously when the natural water 
could not be had ina state of purity, will appear obvious; these 
powders are portable and easily prepared, they could be taken in 
any country or climate, and made use of on a journey whenever they 
were required; not feeling, however, inclined at the time to com- 
mence the business of preparing them myself, I committed the prep- 
aration of these powders to other persons, from whom I received the 
most flattering accounts of their success; subsequently, however, I 
was informed that complaints had been made, that in many instances 
they were liable to deliquescence when kept for any time, and of 
course that their medicinal qualities were impaired, and the efferves- 
cence caused by a union of the different substances which constituted 
the powder was impaired. ‘ 

Still, not willing to abandon my intention of imitating the Congress 
water effectually, and without the risk attending a deliquescence of 
the materials, I turned my attention again to the subject, and after 
repeated experiments, I succeeded not only in effectually coun- 
teracting any tendency to deliquescence in any climate, but also dis- 
covered a method of uniting the whole constituents of the spring 
in one powder, a spoonfull of which was sufficient at any time to 
make one glass of water so perfectly similar in all its properties to the 


Artificial Preparation of Medicinal Waters. 335 


water of the natural spring, that no difference could be observed be- 
tween them. 

This mode of making the artificial preparation which has never 
been adopted before, possesses the greatest advantage over every 
other by being kept in small bottles containing a sufficient quantity of 
the powder to make two dozen glasses of the artificial water; it thus 
becomes a cheap and portable article, capable of being taken to any 
distance without any inconvenience or injury, and without impairing any 
of its qualities. It is not my intention to enter further into the merits 
of this substitute for the water of the Congress mineral spring. Those 
of the Medical Faculty who have examined it, have expressed their 
unqualified approbation of this imitation of the natural water. To 
mention the names of those who have allowed me to doso, would be 
sufficient to stamp a value upon this preparation in this or any other 
country. 

The public have now an opportunity of judging for themselves; that 
the effort will encounter prejudice from those who are either inerest- 
ed or unacquainted with the nature of such a substitute must naturally 
be expected; many articles of the highest importance have encoun- 
tered at first the most decided opposition before they have made their 
way against ignorance and prejudice: to me whatever may be thought 
of it, it is of litthe consequence whether this artificial preparation is 
received in the favorable light I intended it should be, but before I 
conclude, I beg that it may be perfectly understood that in offering 
this substitute for the natural water, and in pointing out its advantages, 
I have not the smallest view of representing it as possessing the same 
medicinal qualities as may be derived from the natural water, when 
drunk at the spring. In fact there are so many advantages connected . 
with the use of it on the spot, where change of air, change of scenes, 
and agreeable society co-operate so much to the restoration of health, 
that few, who have it in their power, can hesitate in their choice. But 
on this subject I have expressed myself more fully in a separate trea- 
tise on the chemical analysis and medicinal qualities, of the Sarato- 
ga- and Ballston waters; in this work I have fully expressed my 
agreement, in opinion with the most experienced physicians, who 
uniformly state, that in order to obtain the full benefit of any: min- 
eral water, it should be taken at the fountain. 


336 Italian Malaria. 


Art. XIII.—On the Malaria of the Campagna di Roma. 
Translated and communicated by Prof. Griscom. 


At a period when so much is written, and felt of the prevalence of 
epidemic diseases, and while in the United States, there are many 
districts which are subject to the periodical visitation of epidemic 
fevers, and our own country as well as others, is liable throughout 
its whole extent to the formidable march of pestilence, and while 
philosophy is still so much baffled in its attempts to trace the intimate 
connection between meteoric and terrestrial influences, and the physi- 
ological changes of the human system, it is the part of wisdom to 
pursue the investigation, by a careful and industrious collection of 
facts. ‘To the want of a sufficient acquaintance with the various 
phenomena attendant upon atmospheric changes, taken in connec- 
tion with topographical peculiarities, and habits of life, must be at- 
tributed the darkness which still invests the various departments of 
pathological science. Knowledge, solid, practical and useful, makes 
but slow progress; but that it does make a progress, no one who 
compares the present state of chemistry, mechanics and astronomy, 
and the arts dependent upon them with their condition in the time 
of Lord Bacon, can hesitate for amoment to admit. The discovery 
of the circulation of the blood, of the constituent principles of at- 
mospheric air, and of the nature of some of the changes which take 
place in respiration, together with the light which has been shed upon 
some other of the vital functions, must be regarded as important steps 
in inductive philosophy. ‘These advances, together with the very 
extended knowledge of the composition and properties of matter 
which has been attained within the last half century, through the 
labors of Franklin, Black, Scheele, Priestley, Lavoisier, Davy and 
others, and the activity which at present prevails among men of sci- 
ence, encourage the belief that discoveries may yet be made which 
‘ will lead to the detection of the real nature of the causes of Malaria, 
and elevate the dignity of medical philosophy by the application of 
remedies to this subtle and pervading poison. If the following essay 
SUR LE MALARIA DE LE CAMPAGNE DE RoME, taken from the Biblio- 
theque Universelle, of Geneva and constituting a portion of Fragmens 
dun voyage en Italie (Morgenblatt, 1831) is deemed appropriate to 
the American Journal, its insertion is respectfully submitted.—G. 

“‘ Every body has heard of the bad air which exerts its pernicious 
affluence in the latter part of summer, and which depopulates Rome 


Italian Malaria. 337 


and its environs.. Among the writers who have turned their atten- 
tion to this subject, the greater number are of opinion that Rome 
as not always been so unhealthy as it is at present, and they attri- 
bute the change to the superior cultivation of the soil which was 
practiced by the ancients. This opinion is not destitute of founda- 
tion; but it is valid, as may easily be conceived, only in relation to 
the time when Rome and the Campagna were in a very populous 
and flourishing condition. If we recede into times more remote 
and consider what the country must have been when first settled by 
_ those ancient inhabitants, we shall be obliged to admit that it must 
have contained extensive marshes and low grounds; we know that 
long after the foundation of Rome, there were considerable marsh- 
es between the different hills within its enclosure, especially between 
mounts Aventine and Palatine, and between the latter and the Capito- 
line. Dionysius of Halicarnassus informs us that they were very deep, 
and according to Propertius, they were crossed in sail boats. Livy 
compares the country of Rome at the time when the city was built, to’ 
a vast desert, and Ovid says that it was covered with frightful forests. 

Experience teaches us that in all marshy and uncultivated coun- 
tries, the air is unwholesome, and as we know how rapidly the pop- 
ulation of Rome increased and to what a prodigious extent it ar- 
rived notwithstanding these unfavorable circumstances ; how many 
towns of consequence such as Gabi and others, rose up in the vicin- 
ity of those pestilential lakes ;—that Ostia even, founded by Ancus 
Martius, in a place where now,-in the unhealthy season there is only 
a tavern supplying wine and bread to the herdsmen, formerly flour- 
ished, as well as Ardea, which at’present contains only sixty inhab- 
itants, and that Lavinium, is reduced to the miserable Chateau 
of Prattica, we are compelled to inquire how the ancients sheltered 
themselves from the pernicious influence of their unhealthy atmosphere. 

Opinions on this subject are very various. Many learned men 
believe that the Champaigne of Latium was formerly less warm than 
at present: because according to Horace, the Soracte was covered 
with snow, and according to Livy the Tiber was sometimes frozen ; 
whence they conclude that marshy exhalations were less active and 
pernicious. Others attribute the absence of disease in the midst of 
unwholesome air, to the more robust constitutions of the ancients, and ~ 
say with Juveual, 


Nam genus hoc vivo jam decrescebat Homero ; 
Terra malos homines nunc educat atque pusillos. 


338 Italian Malaria. 


Others again pretend that the air was purified by the great quanti- 
ty of wood which existed within and without the city, because it is 
admitted that plants absorb carbonic acid, decompose it, and exhale 
oxygen gas. Although it may be true that plants exert such an influ- 
ence, this theory cannot apply to the Campagna di Roma, for it would 
lead us to a result contrary to that which it is intended to establish. If 
the woods contributed in this manner to the purification of the air in 
the plain of Latium, they ought still to produce the same effect, since 
vegetation remains as vigorous as ever. On the contrary we find that 
the woody districts, such as the environs of Ardea, of Prattica, of Net- 
tuno are the most unhealthy of all, and were so in the time of ‘Taci- 
tus. On this principle, the Villa Borghese, the Villa Medici and oth- 
ers, which are not deficient in trees, ought to be more healthy than 
places which are deprived of them, which is not the case; in fact, the 
Vatican, like the Janicula, which are to a great extent covered with 
gardens and groves, are infected with the most unhealthy air. It re- 
sults from all these facts that woods, in countries where from the 
physical constitution of the soil, malaria prevails, as in the Campag- 
na di Roma, are injurious, because they check the winds which 
sweep away pestilential exhalations and renew the air. 

Brocchi is of opinion, (and we think his views are correct,) 

that the chief protection of the ancient Romans consisted in their 
- woolen garments, which kept their bodies:in a state of constant 
transpiration. This opinion is justified by the observation that since 
the period at which the use of woolen clothing came again into vogue, 
intermittent fevérs have very sensibly diminished at Rome. At pres- 
ent, even in the warmest weather, the shepherds clothe themselves 
in sheep skins, and it is surely for the purpose of protecting themselves 
against the bad air. The Toga of the Ancients, whose texture and 
shape were so well adapted to the body, has disappeared, and has 
been replaced, as Brocchi expresses it, by those garments of patch 
work, so flimsy, so ridiculous, and so unfit to guard those who wear 
them from the hurtful effects of an unhealthy atmosphere. It is 
worth while to ascertain whether the Monks, in their frocks, suffer 
less from bad air than the other inhabitants within and without Rome. 
Their great numbers would certainly incline one to believe in the 
propriety of such an inference. é 

The adoption of lighter clothing, on the one hand, and the neg- 
lect of good culture on the other, caused by the devastations which 
Rome and its suburbs have undergone, have given to the Malaria 


Ttalian Malaria. 339 


an energy which, by rendering the Campagna very sickly, has un- 
peopled the city to the extent which we now behold. 

Before we terminate these considerations, we should say some- 
thing of the diseases which at different epochs, visited the ancient 
Romans, and which they denominated plagues. Plutarch, Livy, 
Dionysius and others speak of those pestilential diseases which over- 
took the city of Rome under its kings and during the republic, and 
which must have occasioned a frightful mortality. But though we 
may not admit the term plague in its most rigorous sense ; some of 
those diseases, which manifested themselves at distant intervals, came 
from Egypt by passing through Greece, as that in the year 573, and 
ravaged not only Latium, but the whole of Italy ; other plagues men- 
tioned by Livy were evidently camp diseases, as those of 287 and 
that of 365 when the Gauls beseiged the Capitol. In short, they 
might be other epidemic diseases which manifest themselves every 

_where under certain conditions. But they were certainly not those 
intermittent fevers which now afflict Rome every year with greater 
or less severity. 

From the preceding observations, we obtain. the following result. 
The first inhabitants of Latium, who established themselves on the 
hills of that desert and marshy country, and who had to struggle 
against many obstacles in order to reduce the soil, were shielded 
against the unwholesome atmosphere by their woolen clothing which 
maintained a continual perspiration, whilst their assiduous and im- 
proved culiuré of the land, contributed to purify the atmosphere it- 
self. But as this culture was again neglected on account of the nu- 
merous devastations which desolated Rome and the Campagna, the 
unhealthy exhalations of the soil were again multiplied, and the intro- 
duction of a lighter dress gave to this unhealthy air an influence 
which it had never before possessed. Brocchi relates that in 1818 
there were admitted into the Hospital du St. Esprit, in the course of 
the months of July, August, and September, above 6000 patients 
attacked with fever by reason of the Malaria. The soldiers who oc- 
cupied the forts on the borders of the sea, had to be relieved every 
three or four days, and nobody was willing to reap the harvest which 
covered the fields. 

Opinions are very various with respect to the cause of this foul 
air. Some attribute it to exhalations of sulphuretted hydrogen,— 
others to those of carbonic acid gas; but as Brocchi observes those 
reasoners seem to have forgotten that all these gases are exhaled in 


340 dtalian Malaria. 


abundance in different parts of Italy and Sicily which are neverthe- 
less considered as very healthy. 

The effect has also been imputed to exhalations of azotic gas ; but 
this gas being lighter than atmospheric air would necessarily rise and 
thus render the heights more unhealthy than the vallies, while experi- 
ence proves that the contrary is the fact.* 

The Campagna of Rome is an extended country, cut up by little 
hills and mostly in an uncultivated state. During the rainy season, 
the water collects in the vallies and forms pools where it stagnates, 
and having brought with it all sorts of vegetable substances as well 
as animal refuse, it becomes corrupted. At the return of the warm 
season which augments the putrefaction, these ponds and marshes 
send forth their vapor, but as the process of evaporation goes on 
slowly, the heat being still moderate, the atmosphere is not much 
changed until the month of July brings with it a greatly increased 
temperature, which accelerates the evaporation, and which is accom- 
panied by fevers whose duration equals its own; that is to say, it is 
prolonged to September. 

If the Campagna were every where properly cultivated, as it was 
formerly, the air would not be subject to this alteration ; for the rains 
of winter would not then collect as they do in the low grounds, but 
would be absorbed by a mellowed soil, and evaporated by the influ- 
ence of the heat. 

Tt must not be urged against this opinion, that in Lombardy, espe- 
cially in the plains which extend from Bologna to Férrara, the vast 
fields of Rice are, during the whole winter, covered with water, and 
that the country is nevertheless not unhealthy, or at least not so much 
so as that of Rome. These artificial lakes or mundations, as I have 
myself observed, are first, on account of their extent, always agitated 
by the wind, like a lake of water, and also by the action of the sluices 

by which they are supplied and drained, the current of water is con- 
tinually entering and passing from them. ‘These two causes com- 
bined prevent putrefaction. 


* While we admit, with the author that azotic gas is not the probable cause of 
epidemic fever, we must object to the soundness of his conclusion, with respect to 
its elevation. Although somewhat lighter than atmospheric air, it is, we believe 
most conformable to established facts in chemistry, to conclude that the particles of 
any gas, if set free in the atmosphere, will [ultimately] arrange themselves in the 
same manner as if the atmosphere itself did not exist, provided they have no affinity 
for, or do not combine with constituents of the air. Such is the Daltonian theory, 
which we believe has never been disproved.— Trans. 


Italian Malaria. 341 


The learned Moscati thinks he has discovered that the basis of the 
foul air which causes these pestilential fevers, is an aqueous humor 
which contains an animal mucus in which the venom resides. Broc- 
chi has made some experiments upon the nature of Malaria. He 
selected for this purpose the country which surrounds the basilica of 
St. Laurent, without the walls, one of the most unhealthy of Rome, 
and continued his labors during several successive nights. A robust 
young man, whom he took for his assistant, slept severalehours du- 
ring the first night, and.was seized the following morning with an in- 
termittent fever, which he retained for several weeks. Brocchi con- 
densed, in various ways, the air which he had collected; and obtained 
im every case, a notable quantity of putrid water. 

It remains for us to say a few words on the manner in which this 
foul air acts upon the animal organization. With respect to the mode 
by which it penetrates our bodies, Brocchi has several reasons for 
thinking that it penetrates rather by the pores of the skin than’ by 
respiration. When once the noxious particles are introduced into 
our organs they combine with the humors; the general organization, 
or more properly the force which tends to preserve it in its integrity, 
opposes this combination, and from this results the fever. 

It is worthy of remark, that this foul air exerts no evil influence 
over the flocks which ramble night and day over the Campagna di 
Roma. This would seem to justify the idea that it penetrates by 
the pores of the skin, since these animals are defended by their hair 
or their wool, and hence we perceive a new proof that the best means 
which the ancient inhabitants of Latium, employed as a, defense 
_ against this pernicious atmosphere, before an excellent state of culti- 
vation had weakened its effects, was precisely the same kind of wool- 
en clothing; so that the dress of the present age is very ill adapted 
to acountry where an insalubrious atmosphere constantly prevails, 


Worn eX 11.—No- 2: 44 


342 Central Forces. 


Art. XIV.—On Central Forces; by Prof. Turoporr Srrone. 
(Continued from p. 135.) 


Ler the particle be acted upon by T as before, and by a force f, 
which is directed to the origin of 7; also by a force f’ which aets at 
right angles to 7, in a plane passing through 7 at right angles to the 
fixed plane, this force tending to diminish 6. ‘Then by resolving f, f’ 
in the directions of 7’ and z, I have fcos.d, —/f’sin.é for the forces in 
the direction of r’, and fsin.é, f’cos.4 for the forces in the direction 
of z. Hence the whole force in the direction of 77 =P=fcos.d— 
j’sin.6; also the whole force in the direction of z=S=fsin.d+/’cos.6 5 


but since s=tan.é .”. cos.d= ? Af al hence P= 
/1+s? /1+s? 

Nae en See =(sf+f). If Q is such a function that 
dQ dQ dQ al dQ dQ 
ah ~ pio dys ther Pas ha a): se 

1 dQ. dQ ; eye 
vite alata Ys but since rcos.d=r aie Tos 
1 dQ d 1 
u V1i+s?\Vi+s? dr V1+s? 
d d d 
eee oe 7)s also te Now since Q is a func- 


tion of 7, v, 6, and as these are functions of w, v, s, .*. Q is a function 


: d d d d' 
of u,v, s; hence pert geeet ie ee ae or 


dQ. Pera de mee, 


q-ar+ a De dqutE ds; but u=¥—7* , s=tan.d give du= 


Hd toner tes u? dr 


dj 
ae eo 
rr/ 1s? r2 J1+s cos.76 


= d}(1+s?); by 
dQ. dQ 


substituting these values of du, ds, there results ee 3 O=F, 
u?dr 

Vits? 

tion; .°. by comparing the coefficients of dr, dd, I have wr 


uz? dQ dQ dQ iQ z 
~Vits? au’ de ic tals lad e = ; hence P=usz twa 


dQ 
(usd — +20 -+s*)d3, which must be an identical equa- 


Central Forces. / 4843 
dQ ¢ e oe ‘ 
S=—u-7~> by substituting these values of P and S, and for T its val- 


al hci curs 
eV MeN) 3 


sieee()ti-()-H(2)_ tt 


dQ . 
ue u7> in (A), (B), (C) they become dt= 


4: (22) (29) sen. () 


w. (eons Zl <2) 


tions “ given at p. 151, Vol. I. of the Mécanique Celeste. 
._ ,{dQ\ d dv? 
(A’) is easily changed to h? of(2) = aa =0, whose dif- 
‘ : s dQ\ dv_ d?tdv?_ 2dv?du 
ferential, regarding dv as constant, gives (Fe) get aegis + dé 


_. d?t  Qdudt (22). dts 


=0, (C’); which are the equa- 


Sear dae ® \ da} Gee ee hence, and by reducing 


(B’), (C’) to a common denominator, rejecting the denominator and 
d*t  2dudt 

dividing by A? also dividing (C’) by u®, there results 5-5-+}—g-+ 

dQ ~ i dQ dv i- 

(2) a= 0, (a”),(S2 pu (45° S (Fe) ; =) hz 


((i) rae (ae) wae) =0, 9, (0) C4 
Jes) aa) tear (Ge (ae)—™ (Ge) 04) =o 


”), which agree oe ee equations (L) given at the place cited 
above. > 
Again, supposing the disturbing force to be situated in the plane of 
the curve described by the particle around the first centre; let s de- 
note the length of the curve described in any time, p= the perpen- 
dicular from the first centre to the tangent at the extremity of s, }= 


a d. 
the angle at which the radius vector (7) cuts s, F —=V = a= the ve- 


; d 
locity, ‘b= R= half the chord of the equicurve circle with s, at 


344 Central Forces. 

the place of the particle, estimating the chord on r. Then, since 
dr 2 : / 

cdc =Tr2dz, =F, = cole (7) is easily changed to the forms 


c/2 a( dr2 cdeédr c’? 
all 9 4 2 # 


Laaia 
r3 


; 6) ies 
seid |e 5 s — Tcot.p= 


ae Page ne ; 
2dr 2dr 
ORK 1 2 1 cf? 
— 54 (aga ay) Teotb=— zd 55) - Toot =aeg —T cot. 
dr dr 
V2 V2dp V2 c2 ef? 
cn —Tcot.)= R ~ Peet. $= peR Tot. v= Renee Sak 
Tees gee idee ge ea ea 
“gr aaa gaa r?sin.?-Ldr his Pa) 
2dr 2dr 
T oe d.V? pal 
sae Eco - a(e +Ttan.l=- Qar Psin.beose) 
Qdr 


d.V? , 
T cot.p= — 97, + Ttan.p=F, (D).. 


If the disturbing force acts constantly in the direction of the ele- 
ments of s and is denoted by I’, and if IF” denotes the attraction 
towards the first centre, then F=F”—F’cos.), T=F’sin.lb3 by 


substituting these values of F and T in (D), since —F’ cos. is 
42 


found on both sides of the resulting equations, they become | — 


Ce Gig? Nu 100) 2b $004 ental ce 1 Ce 
34(saes) p73 (Se) =~ 54a) =— 2p) 


dr dr dr 
Aaa NCE PINE cr cr cc | 
7, podr es, par oR pe R = "Rant =—? (=p) 
Qdr 
ede! yor? uM d.V2 1 dN? as 
Senter ete cos. mb Qdr heosb >. Bar dee 
2dr 


=F”, (E). It is evident that the formule (E) will apply whether 
the force F’ is accelerating or retarding; for instance, they are ap-' 
plicable when the particle moves in a resisting medium, in which 
case the particle is retarded in the direction of the elements of s, and 
as EF” is a retarding force its sign must be changed; also, the sign 


Central Forces. 345 


of T=F’sin.) must be changed, when c’? is calculated by (2). If 
the particle is supposed to describe a given curve around a given 
centre of force, and the expression for F'” is given, then the express- 


, ti a.Va, iE ids 
ion for EF” is easily found by (E), for — g7--—Go=F”, or VS. 


OFdr+d.V2) ie 
feed — ), also by (EF) (noe .d.V? =d(RE”), hence 


(2F”dr+d(RFE”)) 
Qds 


»(F). Prin. B. 1, prop. 17; Vince’s Flux- 


2F’dr+d(RE” 
ions, prop.43. If F¥=V?2h=F’”RA, then = ote : 


Wess 1 


(G), in which h=the density of the medium; Prin. B. II, prop. 18. 
If the centre of force is supposed to be removed to an infinite dis- 
tance, so that r may be supposed to move parallel to itself, and if 
F”= const. let x, z be the abscissa and ordinate of the curve, z be- 
ing parallel to 7 and w perpendicular to it; let 2 and 2 have their ori- 
: ; ; dx? +dz? 
gin at the highest point of the curve, then dr= — dz, LS ee ae 
Qdz(d?z)?—ds*d°z Savi 
make dx constant, then dR=—— (ez)? ; by substituting 
. : By oil ads 
these values of dr, dR in (F), (G), they become FY 9(de2)”” (H), 
3 
esac, (I). Prin. B. II, prop. 10; Méc. Cél. Vol. I, p. 26; 
also Vince’s Fluxions, at the place cited above. It may be observed 
that (D) are applicable when the disturbing force is not in the plane 
of the curve described by the particle around the first centre, sup- 
posing r to be changed to 7’, F to P; that is, by supposing the par- 
ticle and the forces which act upon it to be reduced orthographically 
to the fixed plane 


346 On Rail Roads. 


Arr. XV.—On the elevation required for rails on Rail Roads of a 
given curvature; by J. THomson, Engineer, and late Professor 
of Mathematics in the University of Nashville, Tenn. 


TO THE EDITOR. 


Sir—I ebserve, in a valuable little work on rail roads, by Col. 
Long, formerly Engineer in the service of the Baltimore and Ohio 
Rail Road Company, an article on the comparative elevation of rails, 
on the same track, when the rails are curved. ‘The exterior rail re- 
quiring some elevation above the interior, when the road is curved, 
the question is to find what that difference of elevation ought to be, 
when the road has a given curvature and the carriage moves with a 
given velocity. é 
This question is investigated by Lieut. Dillahunty, who introduces 
into the investigation the centres of gravity and percussion ; for what 
reason I cannot clearly perceive. When a loaded car moves along 
a rail road in aright line, the direction of the pressure of the load is 
perpendicular to the horizon; but when the car moves in a curved 
line, the direction of pressure is no longer vertical, but inclined to- 
wards the centre of motion. The object, therefore, of the investi- 
gation is to determine what elevation should be given to the exterior 
rail, so that the plane of the rails will be perpendicular to the direc- 
tion of the pressure of the load. If this be (and it certainly ought 
to be) the object of the investigation, the results, as given by Lieut. 
Dillahunty, appear to be erroneous. ‘These results are expressed 
by the two following formulas, 

(Ran)? Ron) V* 

2h(R+7r) AW(R-+7) 

In these formulas, E represents the elevation of the exterior rail 
above the interior; R andr, the radii of the curves made by the 
rails; & the height of the centre of gravity of the load and carriage 
above the track; W the weight of the load and carriage, and V the 
velocity of the carriage. From the first formula it is evident (as 
observed by Lieut. D. himself,) that the elevation of the exterior 
rail will vary inversely as the height of the centre of gravity above 
the track, supposing R, r and V to be constant; and from the sec- 
ond formula, the elevation will vary inversely as the weight of the 
load and the height of the centre of gravity. 


On Rail Roads. 347 


That these conclusions are erroneous, and that the elevation of the 
exterior rail does not depend on the weight of the load, nor on its 
height above the track, may be shown from the following consider- 
ations. 


EK 


Let CAB represent a horizontal surface, on which a rail way is situ- 
ated; A and B, the rails placed in a circular curve around C as a 
centre. A car in moving over the rails Avand B, around the centre 
C, will be acted upon by two forces; one horizontal and centrifugal, 
arising from the motion of the car in a curved line, and acting in a 
direction from the centre C; the other, the force of gravity, acting 
in a vertical direction. I omit here, as not necessary in the present 
investigation, the moving force, derived from animal or other power, 
acting in the direction of a tangent to the curve. Let the horizontal 
line AK represent the centrifugal force above mentioned, and the 
line EA the force of gravity. It is evident that the resultant of these 
two forces will be EK, which will represent both the intensity and 
the direction of the pressure of the loaded car upon the rails. The 
line EK, therefore, representing the direction of pressure, the rails 
should be so placed that this line may be perpendicular to the plane 
passing through them. Draw the vertical lme BD, and through A 
draw AD perpendicular to EK. BD will be the elevation of the 
exterior rail above the interior, and the angle DAB will be the incli- 
nation of the plane of the rails to the horizon. The centrifugal force 
AK, compared with the force of gravity AE, is easily found, when 
the radius of curvature of the track and the velocity of the car are 
given. ‘The distance between the centre C and the middle of the 
track may be considered as the radius of curvature. 

Now, by a reference to the above figure, it will be seen that a 
change of weight on the car cannot alter the elevation BD of the 
exterior rail, or the angle DAB. For, if we suppose the absolute 
weight of the load to increase or decrease, it is evident that the cen- 
trifugal force will increase or decrease in the same ratio—in other 
words, the lines AE and AK will vary in the same ratio, and hence 


348 On Rail Roads. 


the line EK will always remain parallel to itself, and perpendicular 
to AD, whatever be the weight of the load, other quantities remain- 
ing the same. Again the height of the center of gravity above the 
track cannot alter BD, or the angle DAB. ‘For, if EK represent 
the direction of pressure of all parts of the load, itis evident that 
the center of gravity will tend in the same direction, in whatever 
part of the line EIS it be situated, or whatever be its height above 
the track. It may be observed that the lines EA and AK, repre- 
senting any given ratio, may be so drawn that the line EK may always 
be perpendicular on the middle of AD, in which case, the center of 
gravity of the load and car will always be situated in the line EK. 
We may obtain a very simple algebraical expression for the eleva- 
tion of the exterior rail. Let g = force of gravity, ¢ = centrifugal 
force, d = distance between the rails, and KE = required elevation, 
R and V representing radius and velocity. ‘Then by the similar tri- 
2 
angles EAK and ABD we have E = ow: pees central forces, ps 
2 


hence E = Re - Jn this at g is always a constant quantity 


and equal to 32.2 feet. : 

To take an example, suppose a car to move with a velocity of 
twenty miles per hour, on a rail way, curving with a radius of four 
_ hundred feet, the distance between the rails being four feet nine inch- 
es. The velocity in this case will be twenty nine feet four inches. 


2 


2 


We then have E — = 
S 
Long makes the elevation in this case 5.5 inches, too much by near- 
ly two inches. If we assume a radius of seven hundred and six- 
teen feet, the other quantities remaining the same, we find E = 2.1 


inches. ‘The above mentioned table makes the elevation three 


3.8 inches. The table given by Col. 


inches. 

If the velocity of a car on a rail way were always the same, we 
should have no difficulty in assigning the proper elevation of the 
exterior rail. But as there must be necessarily a great variety in 
rates of traveling, an elevation which would be required by a rate of 
twenty miles per hour, would be much too great for a rate of eight, 
twelve or fifteen miles per hour. Perhaps the elevation required by 
the mean velocity would be the most eligible. There is one view of 
the subject however, which ought to be taken into consideration in 
the location of the exterior rail. When a car moves with great ve- 


Miscellanies. 349 


locity on a curved road and the plain of the rails is horizontal, the 
flange of the fore wheel on the exterior rail is exposed to very great fric- 
tion, which operates as a retarding force, and injures both the car and 
the rail way. This friction is diminished, though not altogether re- 
moved, by giving to the exterior rail, the elevation which the velocity 
and radiusrequire. In order to reduce the friction still further, or re- 
move it altogether, it would perhaps be advisable to increase by a 
small quantity the elevation obtained as above. It is evident that a 
car moving on the inclined plane AD, will tend by its own weight to 
approach A and recede from D. This will oppose the centrifugal force 
by which the flange is pressed against the rail D, and thus the fric- 
tion will be in whole or in part removed. I know it has been main- 
tained that the flange of the hind wheel on the interior rail produces 
as much friction as the flange of the exterior fore wheel. It may 
however be shown from various considerations, that if either of the 
hind wheels produces friction, it is rather the exterior one. Indeed 
we may suppose that motion is communicated to the hind wheels by 
a force which acts precisely in the same direction as if they were 
moved by animal power, the direction being nearly a tangent to the 
curve. ‘This being admitted, the flanges of the two exterior wheels 
sustain all the friction occasioned by curvature. It may be observ- 
ed however, that when the distance between the fore and hind wheels 
is comparatively very great, the direction of the force moving the 
hind wheels will vary considerably from the direction of a tangent, 
and consequently the friction will be diminished. 


MISCELLANTES. 
FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC. 


Extracted and Translated by Prof. Griscom. 


. 


CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL SCIENCE, 
With practical applications. 


1. In1cine—a remedy in intermittent fevers —Doct. Emile Rous- 
seau has just published his own observations, together with those 
of eminent practitioners, in civil and marine hospitals, as well as 
those of various private physicians no less estimable, all uniting in 
ascribing to the leaves of the common Holly, (Ilex aquifolium) great 
efficacy in the treatment of intermittents. ‘They consider this indi- 

Vou. XXII.—No 2. 45 


350 Miscellanies. 


genous plant as the powerful succedaneum of quinquina and the sul- 
phate of quinine. Several of them agree in considering the holly 
as superior to quinquina. Dr. Rousseau deserves great credit in 
bringing the virtues of this plant so fully into notice. He has suc- 
ceeded in obtaining its active principle in an isolated form, and has 
given it the name of Jlicine.—Rev. Encyc. Sept. 1831. 


2. Fertilizing property of Sulphate of Lime.—In order to de- 
termine the manner by which Plaster of Paris contributes to vegetable 
growth, M. Peschier, a pharmaceutist of Geneva, performed several 
comparative experiments.. Two theories have been suggested by 
chemists—one, that the plaster acts simply as a stimulus to the organs 
of the plant—the other, that it gives up to the plants its water of crys- 
tallization. M. Peschier filled two vessels with siliceous sand slightly 
moistened, and sowed in each of them a few seeds of water cresses 
and watered one of them with pure water and the other with a solu-. 
tion of sulphate of lime. The piants, when a few inches high were 
burned, and equal quantities of their ashes were analyzed. In those 
watered with the solution of sulphate of lime, there was found a much 
more considerable quantity of sulphate of potash than in the other. 

In a second experiment he found that the proportion of sulphate 
of potash was increased when the plants watered with the solution 
of sulphate of lime, were subjected to the action of a galvanic 
current. 

M. Peschier thence infers that the plaster undergoes a decompo- 
sition by the act of vegetation, and he thinks he has observed that 
crude plaster is more efficacious than that which has been calcined. 


Rev. Encyc. Nov. 1831. 


3. Composition of Gum.—M. Guerin read to the French Academy 
a memoir on Gum, in which he maintains, that no substance is a gum 
but that which, when treated with nitric acid, produces mucic acid. 
He shows that this property depends on two immediate principles, one 
of which is always present in gum and more frequently both togeth- _ 
er, though in very unequal proportions. One of these principles is 
arabine, the soluble portion; the other bassorine, insoluble. He di- 
vides all gums into two great families dependent on the predominance 
of one or the other of these principles. The memoir contains an 
analysis of the different gums, showing the preportion of these ele- 
ments in each.—Idem. 


JMiscellanies. 351 


4. Hydruret of Sulphur.—M. Thenard read to the French acad- 
emy, onthe 28th of November last, a memoir on hydrogenated 
sulphur or hydruret of sulphur. This substance was first observed 
by Scheele, who obtained it by pouring hydro-sulphuret of potash, 
into an excess of diluted hydrochloric acid. It is in the form of a 
yellowish liquid of an oily consistence, and an unpleasant odor. 
Scheele and Berthollet determined that it is heavier than water, and 
insoluble in that liquid, that it undergoes spontaneous decomposition 
at common temperatures, and that acids of moderate strength, far from 
destroying it, give it consistence. 

M. Thenard, in subjecting it to a new examination, has discovered 
in it the following properties; applied to the tongue, it produces the 
same effect as the binoxide of hydrogen, viz. to whitensit and produce 
a painful blister. It spread over the.skin, it discolors and injures it. 
It readily destroys the color of tournsol. It is of variable consistence, 
sometimes like that of common oil, and at others like an essential oil, 
depending apparently upon the relative quantities of sulphur and hy- 
droger which it contains. Its density probably changes from a sim- 
ilar cause. In one case in which its fluidity was imperfect, it was 
found to be equal to 1.769. 

The hydruret of sulphur does not congeal at a cold of 20° (Cent.) 
The heat of boiling water promptly decomposes it, the liquid being 
transformed into sulphuretted hydrogen gas, which flies off, and 
leaves a residuum of sulphur. When left to itself, it undergoes a grad- 
ual change. If pure, the residuum is nothing but sulphur, which is 
at“first soft, but at length becomes solid. 

The air has no action upon it in ordinary circumstances, but on 
the approach of a lighted taper, it inflames, the hydrogen forms water, 
and the sulphur, sulphurous acid. 

Charcoal, in fine powder, occasions a rapid TSceERagOON: of sul- 
phuretted hydrogen. 

Platinum, gold, iridium, and several other metals in powder, pro- 
duce a similar effect. Various oxides, in powder, have the same 
property, being attended with a strong effervescence. Such are the 
effects of peroxide of manganese, baryta, magnesia, strontia, lime, 
potash andsoda. ‘The two latter have the remarkable property of 
producing the same phenomenon when in a state of solution. 

Oxides which part readily with their oxygen, are instantly redu- 
ced by the hydruret of sulphur, with the production of water and 
with incandescence. ' 


, 


352 Miscellanies. 


The sulphurets tend also to decompose it. In powder or in solu- 
tion the alkaline sulphurets produce a disengagement of gas and 
a precipitation of sulphur. 

Sugar, starch, fibrine, and muscular flesh, act upon it slowly, but 
animal matters more sensibly than vegetable. 

Ether dissolves the liquid, immediately, but soon deposits needle- 
form crystals which appear to be pure sulphur. . 

In all the cases above recited, there will be perceived, in the ac- 
tion of other bodies, a remarkable analogy with the binoxide of hy- 
drogen of M. Thenard. 

Other compounds will probably in time be discovered, having 
analogous properties, and thus establish a new branch of chemistry. 


Rev. Encyc. Mov. 1831. 


5. Chemical Agency of Light.—A series of experiments on the 
relations of oxalic acid to metallic oxides, conducted by J. W. Dobe- 
reiner, induces him to draw the inference that the chemical influence 
of light is very. rarely analogous to that of heat, and that it is sue ge- 
neris ;—that the one determines a contraction, the other an expan- 
sion, of the matter, and that the reductive action of light is a con- 
sequence of the contractive force of that agent, while the effect by 
which heat promotes combustion and almost every kind of chemical 
penetration, is the result of the dilatation of the matter occasioned 
by it. The cause of this opposition of effect is unknown, and we 
can scarcely hope to discover it, when we reflect with what facility 
light is transformed into heat, and vice versa.— Bib. Univ. Nov. 1831. 


6. Splendid combustion of hydrogen gas under strong compress- 
zon; by Prof. Dobereiner. (Jahrbuch fiir Chemie und Physik.)— 
Hydrogen gas, under common pressure, burns, both in atmospher- 
ic air and oxygen gas, with a feeble and scarcely visible lame. The 
flame becomes more brilliant only when brought into contact with 
amore solid substance, susceptible of becoming red hot, such as 
platinum foil, oxide of zinc, lime, magnesia, &c. 

Davy infers from phenomena of this sort, that the brilliancy of all 
flame is owing to the presence of a solid incandescent substance, 
which is formed or disengaged during combustion, and that a gase- 
ous substance never can be heated so as to emit a vivid light. 

_+ The cause of these opposite phenomena, may be found in the dif- 
ferent modes by which heat acts on various substances ; elastic flu- 


JMiscellanies. 353 


ids and volatile substances expand by caloric and disperse it, while 
solid bodies resist the repulsive action, and absorb and condense the 
heat so as to become luminous. : . 

But if this view be correct, gaseous substances, disengaged by 
combustion, ought, when forcibly restrained from expansion, to ex- 
hibit incandescence and splendor. - 

An experiment, at once simple and brilliant, confirms the justness 
of this conclusion. 

If a mixture of two volumes of hydrogen and one of oxygen be 
confined in a strong globe of one or two cubic inches in capacity, 
perfectly dry internally, and well closed, and then kindled, it burns 
with as brilliant a light as that of phosphorus in oxygen gas. If the 
detonating gas be compressed into the globe by two atmospheres, it 
emits, when kindled, the splendor of lightning. Even in open day, 
its effect is like that of the most vivid lightning; and by night, it is 
so much like a burst of sun shine, that oyster shells, heated with sul- 
phur, become phosphorescent when exposed to it. If there be moist- 
ure in the globe, or if the cock be left open, the light is very feeble, 
_ because in the first case the light is absorbed by the moisture, and in 
the second, dispersed by the sudden expansion. 

The kindling of the explosive mixture is best effected by the elec- 
tric spark, and the author recommends the apparatus described in 
Singer’s Elements of Electricity, p. 126, fig. 30. The wires of such 
an apparatus should approach the nearer as the gas is more com- 
pressed, for the spark in condensed gases will not pass through so 
great a space. 

These facts induce the author to seek for the cause and condition 
of the brilliancy of fame, not in the presence of solid, incandescent 
matter, but in the forcible accumulation or condensation of caloric, 
and he thinks it not hazarding too much to propose this point of view 
as a photological axiom. He has not examined the luminous effect 
of burning, in this manner, gases, which by combustion with oxygen, 
give permanently elastic products. It is rare to find globes of glass 
strong enough, and of uniform resistance. ‘Tubes are not suitable, 
as they present too large a surface, and consequently absorb too 
much heat.—Idem. 


7. Protoxde of Copper. (Wohler and Liebig.)—The most sim- 
ple and easy method of obtaining protoxide of copper is the follow- 
ing. Dissolve the copper in hydrochloric acid, to which small por- 


Sae ' Miscellanies. 


tions of nitric acid are by degrees to be added,—then evaporate to 
dryness, and heat the resulting chloride to the melting point. It is 
thus transformed into a brown crystalline chloruret. Ten parts of 
this are to be mixed with six parts of anhydrous carbonate of soda, 
and heated in a covered crucible to dull redness. ‘Treat the mass 
with water in order to dissolve the marine salt that will be formed,— 
the protoxide of copper separates in a beautiful red powder, not 
crystalline, which is to be washed and dried. 

If sal ammoniac is added to the above mixture, the whole of she 
chloruret is reduced, as might easily be foreseen, and the metallic 
copper separates in a minutely divided, spongiform mass, on the ad- 
dition of water.—Ann. de Chimie, Juillet, 1831. 


8. Estumation of the bleaching power of chloride.of lime—M. 
Marozeau proposes to employ the protochloride of mercury for this 
purpose. Being insoluble in water, and even in hydrochloric acid, 
it becomes by the addition of chlorine changed to the deutochloride, 
and is then immediately soluble. 

His method is this,—take a solution of protonitrate of mercury, 
add a more than sufficient quantity of hydrochloric acid to precipi- 
tate all the mercury in the state of protochloride, pour into the liquid 
a solution of the chloride of lime—the chlorine, set free, acts on the 
precipitate, which gradually diminishes, and the process is to be stop- 
ped at the moment when a drop of the chloride of lime completes 
the entire solution. ‘The quantity of the chloride of lime, used for 
a fixed quantity of the test liquid, indicates the strength of the chlo- 
rides. The author has formed a table which agrees with that of Gay 
Lussac.—IJdem, Avril, 1831. 


9. Inflammation of gunpowder under water.—In the port of Pene- 
mund, (says Prof. Hiinefeld of Greifswalde,) there was situated an 
enormous rock, covered with water about three feet, which was a se- 
rious impediment to the navigation. Efforts had been made, but in 
vain, to remove it, by mechanical force, and it was not known by 
what means it could be blasted. .The difficulty was at length over- 
come by Engineer Libke. 

A leaden tube, several feet long and closed at the lower end, was 
inserted into a hole, bored several years before, inthe rock. A ear- 
tridge was pushed to the bottom, and in contact with the powder over 
it, a little piece of potassium. The upper part of the tube was fun- 


Miscellanies. A 355 


nel shaped, and contained a thimble shaped vessel filled with water, 
and supported in an upright position by a piece of amadou, which, 
by a simple arrangement, would, when burnt, allow the thimble to 
overturn. ‘The amadou being set on fire, the workman rowed off 
to a safe distance and waited the event. ‘The thimble being over- 
turned, the water inflamed the potassium and the latter the powder, 
and the explosion succeeded well. A second trial was equally favor- 
able. ‘The powder must be very dry, otherwise potassium will not 
inflame it; common gunpowder is generally too damp.—Bib. Univ. 
Aout, 1831. 


10. Cause of Gowtre—M. de Humboldt communicated to the 
French Academy, in October, 1831, some results obtained by Bous- 
singault, in his researches into the causes of Goitre, in Colombia. 
The latter ascertained that in every place in which Goitre is very 
common, the water holds in solution only a very small quantity of 
air. It is well known that the production of Goitre is very often at- 
tributed to snow water. ‘This agrees very well with the discovery of 
Boussingault, since water, in freezing, abandons a great part of the air 

which it held in solution, so that when melted it is almost wholly free 
from air.—Rev. Encyc. Oct. 1831. 


11. Memoir on the transference of ponderable substances by electri- 
city. (Dr. A. Fusinieri.)—This paper contains the result of numerous 
experiments and observations made for the purpose of ascertaining 
whether the electric spark carries with it any portion of the materi- 
al from which it issues. 

Dr. F. finds that when the spark issues from metallic conductors 
whatever may be the nature of the metal, one portion of it is carri- 
ed away in astate of fusion and another in incandescent molecules, 
and that when the conductor is a compound metal, as of brass, a por- 
tion of zinc is separated from the copper. The metal thus dispersed, 
is spread in extremely thin lamine, over the surface on which the 
electric current falls, where its presence may be detected by changes 
of color, and other tests. ‘The substance thus conveyed will even 
penetrate in its passage through thin plates of metal; small portions 
being left behind upon the plate while the rest passes along, with the 
spark, to the surface on which it strikes. 

These metallic spots derived from the electric spark are so thin, 
that after a certain time they are volatilized and disappear. 


356 Miscellanies. 


But another interesting fact is, that when the spark issues from one 
metallic surface and falls upon another, there is a reciprocal transfer 
in opposite currents of each metal to the other. ‘Thus if the spark 
issues from silver and falls upon copper, there is not only a transfer 
of the silver to the copper but also of the copper to the silver. If 
the spark passes from gold to silver, there is a transfer of the silver 
to the gold as of the gold to the silver. 

There are thus produced by the electric current two forcible 
and contrary percussions, occasioned by the metal which has been 
transferred; the one, at the point from which it is detached, the oth- 
er at that where it enters into-the other metal; the existence of these 
two percussions, is shown by the presence of two opposite cavities 
which contain the same metal in a state which proves it to have un- 
dergone.a fusion; hence the metal which passes exerts two pressures 
in contrary directions. 

The electric current in passing from one metal to another, leaves 
the first in the second, and takes a small quantity of the latter. 

The electric spark, which issues from a metal and passes into the 
air, contains a group of molecules, the central portions of which are 
in a state of simple fusion and the exterior portions undergo a com- 
bustion more or less vivid, by their contact with the oxygen, accord- 
~ ing to the greater or less oxydizable nature of the metal. 

The electric sparks between the two poles of a voltaic pile, ter- 
minated either by metals or charcoal, contain also particles of these 
substances, in a state of extreme division and of combustion; the 
ignition of metallic leaves is only an extended scintillation repeated 
from place to place in these leaves, which on account of their ex- 
treme tenuity, may be regarded as discontinuous. 

From the foregoing facts, the author infers ; 

That the electric spark of our machines is not a distinct imponder- 
able fluid as is generally supposed ;—and that the heat and light 
proceed from the ignition and combustion of the particles of ponder- 
able matter.* " 

The author has examined the tracks of the electric current in 
trees, buildings, &c., which have been struck by lightning, and finds 
what he deems to be certain evidences of the transfer of pondera- 


* This reasoning appears to be unphilosophical, inasmuch as ignition always 
presupposes an increase of heat, and therefore to ascribe the heat to ignition, is to 
confound the effect with the cause.— Tr. 


Miscellanies. ; 357 


ble matter, beside the odor which often accompanies these phenom- 
ena.— Bib. Univ. Decem. 1831. 


12. Stature of the Human Race. Istpore Georrroy Saint Hr- 
LATRE.—Contrary to what occurs among domestic animals, variations 
of stature in the human race are included in much narrower limits 
than individual variations. 

The size of women is less variable than that of men. They are 
much smaller than men among people of large stature, while the 
difference in size between the sexes is very small among people of 
_ Jow stature. 

- The people who are the most remarkable for their great height, gen- 
erally inhabit the southern hemisphere ; and, as has long been known, 
those who are distinguished for lowness of stature almost all reside in 
the northern hemisphere. 

Among the people of the greatest height some live on the south- 
ern part at the American continents, others, in various archipelagos 
of the Southern Ocean, and it may even be remarked that they thus 
form in the southern hemisphere two series, one continental, the oth- 
er insular, both irregular and often interrupted, but commencing in 
each, at eight or ten degrees of south latitude and terminating at 
about fifty degrees. 

There exist however, in the southern hemisphere, people whose 
height is below the mean, and reciprocally, in the northern, those 
whose height surpasses the mean. Now, in comparing the geo- 
graphical position of these people with those who are extremely tall 
or extremely short, we arrive at the result apparently paradoxical, 
and yet in part of easy explanation, that the short race live almost 
every where near the tallest nations, and reciprocally, the tallest peo- 
ple near those nations who are the most remarkable for their low 
stature. | 

The diversity of stature in the human race may be explained, 
(but in part only) by the influence of climate, of dietetic regimen 
and mode of life. 

It is at least extremely probable that the size of the race, notwith- 
standing some loval variations, has not sensibly diminished ; and this, 
not only, from the concurrence of so many kinds of proof as are 
derivable from historical evidence from the earliest known periods ; 
but from considerations of science, -in the absence of all monuments, 


Vol. XXIL—No. 2. 46 


358 Miscellanies. 


it may be inferred that there has been no material change since the 
origin of mankind.—Rev. Ency. Jan. 


13. New Machine.—At the meeting of the French Academy held 
Jan. 9th, 1832, M. Cagniard Latour gave a description of a new 
machine of his invention which he calls a hydraulic volcano. The 
principal piece consists of a bundle of tubes, of a calibre so small 
that the liquids and gas which are simultaneously introduced may re- 
main mixed during their circulation, and form an intermittent cqjumn 
analogous to that of several machines already known, such as the 
pump of Seville, the fountain of circulation, and the mercurial pneu- 
matic screw of Cagniard which is described in a report made in 1809 
to the Academy by Carnot. ; 

The water of a reservoir may be raised in a very simple manner 
by this machine, provided there is at hand a very small current of 
air nearly insoluble in water, for example a current of compressed 
atmospheric air. The lower part of the capillary stock is to be de- 
pressed to a certain depth in the water, and under this the gaseous 
current is to be introduced, by means of a tube conveniently adjust- 
ed. A mixed column of air and water immediately rises in each 
tube, which, if the proportion of gas is large enough, is lighter than 
the column of the reservoir which presses it upwards. Hence there 
is a constant ascensional movement, and from the top of each tube 
there will be a flow of air mixed with water.—Idem. 


At a subsequent meeting of the Academy, MM. Sarrut, professor 
of science at Strasburgh, announced that in the course of physique 
which he had given at Perpignan from 1827 to 1830 he had deseri- 
bed an apparatus similar to that of Cagniard. It had been applied 
to mesh tubs in such a manner as to raise again to the top the ley 
which flows from an inferior opening, and spread it over the linen. In- 
stead of a current of air, a stream of vapor was used from a small 
vessel of boiling water, which communicated with the ascending canal 
by a bent tube. 

14. Large Achromatic Telescopes of M. Cauchotx.—M. Cau- 
choix, a distinguished optician of Paris, having sold a year or two 
since to Sir James South, an instrument with an object glass of elev- 
en inches (french) aperture, and for which a gold prize medal was 
adjudged at the exhibition of the Louvre of 1823, has just delivered 


JMiscellanies. 359 


to Edw. Cooper, M. P. an instrument of twelve and a half inches 
aperture. -These are the two largest achromatics which exist. 
The first already proved by a great number of Astronomers, appears 
to be an excellent instrument, and M. Cauchoix hopes that the other 
will not be less satisfactory. He has just finished a new telescope, 
similar to Mr. South’s, whose aperture is eleven.inches fr. and fo- 
cal distance eighteen feet. The effect of this instrument appears 
still better, the images’ more neat, the materials exempt from all 
threads and strie. He has also ready for delivery an excellent instru- 
ment of eight anda quarter inches diameter, and twelve feet focus, 
and he also has object glasses of seven and a half, seven, six and a 
half, six, &c. The flint glass of all these object glasses is we be- 
lieve of the manufacture of M. Guinand. . 

M. Cauchoix has constructed object glasses in which the crown 
glass is replaced by rock crystal, and which have the advantage of 
greater amplifying power, joined to a less focal distance. He possess- 
es three of “fifty nine lines diameter, and fifty inches focal distance, 
and he thinks, from the difficulty he has found for the last four years 

in procuring disks of this diameter, of sufficient purity, that others 
of these dimensions can scarcely be obtained. 

On account of ill health, M. Cauchoix, is about to relinquish his 
establishment, to his nephew, who unites much solid information to 
the experience derived from his uncle..—Bub. Univ. Sep. 1831. 

* 15. Preservation of plants during winter by spring water—A 
horticulturist.in Scotland has availed himself of the heat of spring 
water, in the preservation of-delicate plants. He places boxes of 
pine wood over the water, covering them with some coarse stuff, and 
in these boxes he places pots of cauliflowers, lettuce, various sorts of 
pelargoniums, Indian chrysanthemums, Chinese primroses, &c. and 
by this simple and economical method, preserves them all winter, 
He is of opinion that by means of the temperature of running water, 
winter gardens may be constructed for a farm or village. Care must 
be taken to renew the air in the boxes.—Jdem. 


16. French premiums.—The following prizes are offered by the 
-French Society for the Encouragement of National Industry, one 


half-of the funds being furnished by the minister of trade and pub- 
lic works, ia) 


360 Miscellantes. 


For 1832. 

: Frances. 
Hackling of flax by machinery, - - - 12,000 
Application in shops and manufactories of the curved pallet 

wheel of Bélidor, - ~ - - - 6,000 
Fabrication of water pipes, of iron, wood or stone, five pre- 

miums—together - - - - - 138,500 
Application of the rail road system to the irregular levels of 

common roads, - - - - - 3,000 
Making of bricks and tiles by machinery, - - 2,000 
Means of safety in steam engines and boilers for vaporiza- 

tion, each - - - - - - 12,000 
Construction of a hand mill for hulling dry beans, peas, &c. 1,000 
Fabrication of bottles for holding fermenting wine, - 3,000 
Best substitute for the rotting of hemp and flax, - 6,000 
Preparation of metallic gauze or armor, and of amianthine 

cloth, as a defense against flame and for a process for 

rendering organic tissues incombustible, three premiums— 

together, - — - os - - -  -4,200 
Perfection of iron founderies, - ~ - - - 6,000 
Perfecting the construction of furnaces, three premiums— 

together, - - - ~ - - 9,000 
Fabrication, on a large scale, of refractory crucibles, - 3,000 
Perfection of lithography, four questions, - - 3,500 
Lithographic impressions in color, - - - 2,000 
Manufacture of fish glue, = - - - 2,000 
Silvering looking glasses by a process different from that in 

common use, - - - - - 2,400 
Discovery of a metal or aay less oxi@able than iron and 

steel, suitable for instruments for dividing soft alimentary 

substances, - - - - - 3,000 
Cleaning of barks, fit for the fabrication of paper, ~ y L208 
Making of vessels suitable for the preservation, during sev- 

eral years, of alimentary substances, - - 3,000 — 
Preservation of ice, - - - - - 2,000 
Plantation of paper mulberry, - - sit! Ge 
Cultivation of Northern and Scotch pine, i - 2,000, 


manufacturing industry, ‘suitable for the inhabit- ad * 1,500 


Detailed description of the best kinds of domestic Ist pr. 3;000 
ants of the country, © 


Miscellanies. 361 


Construction of an instrument for cleaning buckwheat, - 600 
Introduction into France, and the culture of plants ) Ist pr. 2,000 
useful to agriculture, manufactures and arts, 2d “ 1,000 


For the year 1833. 


Discovery and working of quarries of lithographic stones, 3,000 


Artificial stones for lithography, - - - 2,000 

Transfer of old engravings to lithographic stones, - 1,000 
Method of giving to starch the property of rising like wheat 

flour, - - - - - - 6,000 

_ Method of detecting the mixture of starch with wheat flour, 2,400 

For the drying of meat, - - - - 5,000 

Plantation of slopes, (terrains en pente,) - i a Be 5b) 


For the year 1834. 


Fabrication 2 sewing needles, ean" gira . 3,000 
Description of the process of bleaching cloth destined for 
printing, preparation of colors, their application, and of 


machines used in these different processes, © - - 5,000 
Manufacture of Chinese paper, “ - - 2,000 
Beet sugar establishments, a rural occupation aes eg 

5 7 Ramee 2d * 1,500 

For the year 1835. 
Se eniidtion of the effect of lime in ee land, 1,500 
Total, 164,300 


Bull. d’Encour. 


17. Influence of heat on magnetism, by Cu. Matreuci.—lIt re- 
sults from the experiments of the author on this subject : 

1. That cold increases magnetic LENG and that heat dimin- 
ishes it. 

2. Within the limits of temperature to which the apparatus was 
exposed, the changes are equal, for an equal number of degrees. 

3. The magnetic intensity, and the physical constitution of the 
body, are the principal elements of the phenomenon. 

4. Within the same limits, the changes in question are only tem- 


porary.. 


362 Miscellanies. 


5. The cooling of non-magnetic iron develops magnetism, or rather 
makes it more easy to be magnetised. 

Among the experiments from which these inferences were drawn, 
were the following. A needle, properly suspended, made sixty six 
oscillations in 60’, by the force of terrestrial magnetism. A mag- 
netised bar, of the temperature of 77° F., being placed at a certain — 
distance from the needle, with one end directed towards it, occa- 
sioned the needle to make one hundred and two oscillations in 60”. 
When the bar was cooled down to the freezing point, or 32° F., the 
needle made, in the same time, one hundred and four oscillations, 
and when the bar was cooled to 9.5° F., the oscillations were one 
hundred and five. On the other hand, when the bar was heated to 
112° F-., the oscillations were reduced to one hundred in 60”; when 
heated to 167° I’. they were ninety eight, and at the boiling temper- 
ature, 212° F., they were ninety six. 

The fifth result was thus obtained. *A piece of wire of soft iron 
being placed, at length, before a needle, the latter continued to make 
the same number of oscillations. The wire was then put into a large 
glass tube, and the temperature of it, by means of snow and ice, was 
reduced to 9.5° F. ‘The needle, which before had made sixty eight 
oscillations in 60”, being placed opposite a certain point of the cold 

wire, made seventy four oscillations in 60”, and placed opposite an- 
— other point, equally distant from the other end, it made likewise sev- 
enty four oscillations. But, when placed opposite the middle of the 
wire, no change was observed in the number. The temperature, in 
the course of eight hours, having been restored to its former degree, 
the needle made the same number of oscillations before every poimt 
of the wire. It is, therefore, (says the author,) natural to conclude 
that a’soft iron wire, cooled to 9.5° F., acquires the property of a 
rod feebly magnetised, and loses it on tsunHine its original tempera-~ 
ture.— Bib. Univ. Aout, 1831. 


18. New experiment in Mechanics.—F. Elice, professor at Genoa, 
has made known the following experiment. Suspend by a thread F, 
strong enough to support three kilogrammes, a weight B of 2.9 kilo- 
grammes, furnished with two hooks, diametrically opposite. Fasten 
to the lower hook another thread F’, capable of supporting one kilo- 
gramme. If the latter thread be gradually pulled perpendicularly 
downward, the upper string will always break, and never the lower 
string ; but the reverse will take place if the lower thread F” be pull- 


JWiscellanies. 363 


ed with ajerk, and equally so if it be strong enough to bear five kilo- 
grammes, although in that case, it is stronger than the other. This re- 
sult is explicable on the principle of the inertia of the weight B.— Idem. 


- 
i 


19. Respiration of Plants—The opinion of some physiologists, 
that leaves are the luags of plants, has been revived by Brongniart, 
whose fesearches into the anatomical structure of leaves have dem- 
onstrated, in these organs, the existence of a great number of aerial 
cavities, situated especially on the inferior surface of the leaf, and 
communicating with the external air by the openings of the stomas. 
He did not however prove that this enclosed air exerted a physiolo- 
gical effect, analogous to the air employed in the respiration of ani- 
mals. M. Durrocuer, ina lecture before the Academy, on the 
11th of July, states, that having observed that certain leaves, and 
principally those of the leguminose, speedily lost the white tint of their 
lower surface, when plunged into water, suspected that it was occa- 
sioned by imbibition of the fluid into the little aerial cavities. This 
opinion was confirmed by an experiment, the particulars of which 
were detailed in his lecture. He has proved that the aerial cavities 
of leaves are. not isolated, but form part of a pneumatic system, 
which extend continuously throughout the plants. ‘These aerial or- 
gans are filled with a gas composed of oxygen and azote, in variable 
proportions, but of which the oxygen is always in less proportion than 
in atmospheric air; proving that it has been absorbed by the plant. 
He further shews by experiment that this internal air is indispensably 
necessary to the vitality of the plant. Plants breathe, therefore, ex- 
actly like insects; that is to say, by a transfer of respirable elastic 
air, through all their parts. But the origin of this respirable air is 
not exactly the same: insects draw all their respirable air from the 
atmosphere which surrounds them ; vegetables derive from it only 
a portion of theirs; they elaborate a greater portion in tissues by the 
influengg of light, so that they can be suffocated both by the air 
pump and by darkness.—Rev. Encyc. July, 1831. 


20. Cultivation of the material used in the fabrication of Leghorn 
hats—The Royal Chamber of Agriculture and Commerce, at Nice, - 
published in 1830-31 two small works containing elementary in- 
structions relative to some points in the agriculture of that vicinity. 
Among them is the following notice of the grain which produces the 
material of Leghorn hats. 


364 MMiscellanies. 


“This grain is called Grano Marzuolo, or Corn of Mars—(Blé 
de Mars.) ‘Three varieties of it are known, and are equally culti- 
vated and employed, in the neighborhood of Florence. The poor- 
est and most stony soil is the most suitable for its culture, when the 
straw is the object of research. High and hilly ground is the most 
favorable. When the soil is thin, two thirds or three fourths more 
grain is sown than when the grain itself is the material in view; if 
the soil is rich and firm, six times as much may be sown. ‘The sow- 
ing may be at broad-cast, and furrows should be run at suitable dis- 
tances through the field to collect the rain water, for the straw is not 
well adapted to the manufacture of hats, if the ground be moist. 
The most favorable time for sowing, at Florence or Nice, is at the 
latter end of December, but it may be postponed to the month of 
March. ; 

In sterile ground the grain should be but thinly covered. The 
straw is commonly gathered in the latter end of May or early in 
June. A dry time should be chosen for it, and if it grow in a rich 
soil it should be gathered earlier to prevent the injury of too coarse 
a growth. In gathering it, the plant should be pulled up by the 
roots, for in cutting it, there is a risk of losing the part above the 
joints, the only portion which is used in plaiting. 

It is essentially necessary, in order to procure a well formed and 
fine straw, that it be gathered when the head is not more than half 
formed, or when the grain has scarcely begun to show itself. It is 
then full of juice, which when dissipated leaves the stalk empty and 
easy to be split. Shortly after it is to be pulled, precisely like flax, 
gathered into small sheaves, and left in the field to dry, until it is 
sufficiently cured for storage in the barn. 

To prepare the straw for the manufacture, it is to be spread on dry 
ground, and exposed to the sun and dew, keeping the sheaves dis- 
tinct from each other, until it becomes pretty well bleached. Four 
or five days will be sufficient for this purpose, or even less when the 
dews are abundant. It can be effected, however, only in good 
weather ; all moisture except dew is very injurious, on which ac- 
count the months of June and July are to be preferred for the pur- 
pose. 

In Tuscany the bleaching is omitted until the straw is about to be 
used for plaiting; as soon as it is sufficiently whitened, they sepa- 
rate from each stalk the portion between the ear and the first joint, 
and this alone is used, the rest being rejected. ‘The portion thus 


JMiscellanies. 365 


selected is done up into bundles, steeped in water, and when well 
drained, they are disposed around the walls of a room, (the bundles 
being as large as possible) i in the center of which sulphur is then set 
on fire and the room is closely shut. ‘The design of this exposure 
to burning sulphur is to increase the whiteness of the straw, to give 
it greater consistence, to destroy insects, and to preserve it from pu-— 
trefaction. 

When this operation is completed, the straw is assorted into thirty 
or forty qualities according to the size, which determines the fineness 
of the hats and consequently their price. The plaits are generally 
made with three straws each, the size depending of course on the 
relative fineness of the straws which compose them. The beauty 
and fineness of the hat result from the greater or less number of 
turns which the plait must take to compose the flat. 

The culture of this plant has been successfully attempted upon 
the driest hills of Nice. ‘The hats made of this straw, in the hospital 
of that city, under the direction of the Abbe de Cessoles, obtained 
at the last exhibition of the products of industry of Piedmont, a pre- 
mium medal.— bib. Univ. July, 1831. 


21. Non-vaporization of a liquid falling in small quantity on an 
incandescentmetal.—M. N. W. Fischer by an experiment with con- 
centrated sulphuric acid, has been confirmed in the opinion which 
he before advanced that the fluid which falls in very small quan- 
tity on an incandescent metal is decomposed. This acid when vola- 
tilized in the way alluded to, flies off in a thick bluish vapor, which 
is perfectly respirable, and occasions not the least cough, an effect 
which, as is well known, is immediately produced by the evapora- 
tion of undecomposed sulphuric acid. 'The sulphuric acid he suppo- 
ses is decomposed into oxygen and an oxide of sulphur, which con- 
stitute the innoxious vapor. He was unable for want of a tubula- 
ted platina retort, to ascertain whether the latter compound is a new 
acid, or one of those already known, e. g. the hyposulphuric. It can- 
not as he states be simply sulphurous acid ; because it is unattended 
with any peculiar odor. 

He has proved that the same phenomena occur with heated glass 
and porcelain as well as with metals, especially when liquids are em- 
ployed more volatile than water —Brb. Univ. Oct. 1831. 


Vou. XXIL—No. 2. 47 


366 Miscellanies. 


22. New method of producing perspiration in Cholera Morbus.— 
Dr. Tribolet, of Berne, has found that the best mode of effecting 
this object, is to put the patient into an empty bathing tub in which a 
spirit-of-wine lamp is made to burn. The tub is covered with a 
carpet so as to concentrate the vapor which arises from the eombus- 
tion. In a few minutes all the air beneath the carpet acquires a high 
temperature, and produces an abundant sweating of the patient. 
This method has been repeated at Geneva with results exactly similar 
to those of the Bernese Physican.—Idem. 


23. New Compost.—M. Simonin de Sire, a land holder near Din- 
ant, asserts that the vines of early potatoes, may, without any injury to 
the produce of the root, be mowed down immediately after the flow- 
ering, and converted into a rich compost by laying down Ist, a bed of 
earth, 2d, a thin stratum of quick lime, 3d, a thick bed of the vines, 4th, 
a stratum of lime, 5th, a layer of earth, &c. The mass ferments, but 
it ought not to be disturbed till the following spring. Nettles and all 
other weeds may be treated in the same manner.—Idem. 


24. New size for the Chain of Woven Cloth.—To prevent the 
great unhealthiness arising from the low and damp situations in which 
weavers find it necessary to perform their work, in order to secure 
the requisite moist condition of their tissue, various methods have been 
resorted to, depending chiefly upon the deliquesence of certain salts; 
which by attracting moisture from the air, have enabled weavers to 
conduct their business in more elevated and healthy situations. For- 
merly, sea water which contains chloride of magnesium was used, 
also urine ; more recently a solution of chloride of calcium. But 
the objection to these saline ingredients is that they eventually injure 
the stuff, especially in moist weather, on which account many weay- 
ers have renounced the use of them. 

M. Morin, a chemist of distinction, having observed that all de- 
liquescent salts have this injurious tendency, has sought for a hygro- 
metric substance which is free from this objection, and he conceives 
that he has found it in a solution of the extract of lichen. This has 
been tried by a number of intelligent weavers, whose testimony to its 
efficacy is given in his paper. It produces no unpleasant effect 
upon the stuff, and it enables them to erect their looms in dry and 
healthy situations. 


Miseellantes. 367 


Preparation of the size for Cotton or Linen.—Boil, during half an 
hour, four kilogrames of Lichen Islandicus in twenty four litres of 
water. Strain it while hot through a fine cloth. On cooling it ac- 
quires a gelatinous appearance. Dilute in three litres of water a 
pound of wheat or rice flour, and heat it to the consistence of thick 
pap, stirring it continually. Mix it, while hot thoroughly with the de- 
coction of lichen. .'This quantity of mixture furnishes about forty 
five pounds of dressing of a suitable consistence, and which costs, 
including the fuel, two franes, fifty five cent. or about six centimes 
(2; fr.) per pound. A watery fluid separates from it after being 
kept a few days which does not injure its use. 

The grey tint of this dressing may deter some workmen from the 
employment of it; this defect, if it be one, may be in a great meas- 
ure prevented, by previously macerating the mass for thirty six hours 
in water, working or kneading it from time to time, and then washing 
* it in three or four waters, and boiling it half an hour, straining and pro- 

ceeding as before described. By this means it furnishes a size much 
less colored. 
This decoction is not sufficient of itself for linen thread, which is 
much more difficult to dress than that of cotton. The author on this 
account adds to it one third of its volume of common size of wheat 
flour, which succeeds completely. With this addition the weaving of 
_linen may be conducted in any situation, the cloth having the same 
softness as that of cotton. By the use of the lichen decoction anoth- 
er important advantage is gained, viz. there is no risk of oversizing. 
There are few weavers who can manage their dressing with entire 
success, and it is well known that when badly done, the threads are 

extremely liable to break. With this new dressing, the workman 
_ may easily. if he choose suspend his work till the next day. 

During frosty weather, the weaving is very difficult in consequence 
of the rapid drying of the size. The lichen paste dries also, but it 
preserves the elasticity and suppleness of the thread in a suitable 
state for the loom. ‘The conclusions of the author are: 

1. That by the use of the lichen dressing, weavers may place 
their looms in an airy and elevated situation, even in a current of as 
and work at all temperatures. 

2. That it is adapted to all kinds of stuffs,—producing none of the 
spots which arise from the use of the hygrometric salts. 

3. That it is applicable not only to cotton cloth, but also to that 
called cretonnes, by its cheapness and the velvety aspect which it 
communicates. 


368 MMiscellanies. 


4, That it has the peculiar advantage of allowing the workman to 
weave on the next day, without breaking a great many threads, the 
chain which he had prepared in the evening.—Bull. d’Encour. 
Avril. 1831. 


25. French Uliramarine.—The price of the Artificial Ultramarine, 
the process for manufacturing which has been’ discovered by JM. 
Guimet of Paris, (V. Am. Jour. XV. 392,) has been so reduced as 
to make it an object with painters and colormen, in point of econo- 
my, to substitute this article in the room of cobalt in the bluing of 
paper, thread, and stuff in which this material is employed. ‘The 
discoverer has purchased a situation three leagues from Lyons, in 
which he is about to establish a manufactory on a scale, sufficiently 
large to satisfy the demands of commerce. 

M. Guimet has proved by trial, that a pound of his ultramarine of 
the second quality, and which can be afforded at twenty francs, will © 
blue as much paper as ten pounds of cobalt, which at wholesale, costs 
twenty six francs, and an important advantage of the former is that 
on account of its lightness, it spreads more uniformly over the paper. 

Since his success in this application of the new color he has tried it 
in dyeing, and has obtained upon linen, cotton and silk, a degree of 
‘success which encourages the hope of an ultimate and decided supe- 
riority over indigo. : 

In his printed circular, M. Guimet offers his ultramarine for blu- 
ing paper at sixteen francs. Report of M. Merimée to the Societé 
d’Encouragement.—Bull d’Encour. Avril, 1831. es 


26. Singular Case of Odoriferous Emanations.—In the 34th Vol- 
ume of the Memoirs of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Turin, 
(1830) Dr. Speranza of Parma relates the case of an individual whose 
left fore arm emitted an odor of Amber, or of Benzoin, or Balsam of 
Peru. The odoriferous emanations were sometimes so strong that 
they filled the whole of the large room in which the Doctor conduct- 
ed his experiments upon this personage, whom he suspected at first 
of some charlatanry, but of whose sincerity he was soon convinced. 
He was a man of thirty four years of age, of a robust constitution,’ 
(having, until that time enjoyed constant health) agreeable eyes, ex- 
pressive features, dark thick hair, a ruddy countenance, muscles 
prominent,—a man of ardent feelings and quick penetration; to 
whom nature had been liberal in her endowments. It did not ap- 


Miscellanis. 369 


>. 


pear that electricity had any part in the production of this singular — 
phenomenon. An attack of bilious fever, in the course of two 
months, destroyed the cause, and the effect did not return after his 
recovery.— Rev. Encyc. Juin, 1831. 


27. Gelatine of Bones.—A memoir presented to the French Acad- 
emy, by M. Donné having thrown some doubts upon the wholesome- 
ness of Gelatine, M. Darcet made the following summary. Butch- 
ers’ meat contains per one hundred pounds at a medium. 


Dry meat, - - - - - 24 
Water, - - - - - - 64 
Bones, - - - ~ - : 15 

Total, 100 

Bones contain per hundred : 

Earthy matter, - - - - =e OO 
Gelatine, - ~ - - - - 30 
[Tier phere sie apiece anne i Sag 


- 100 


Thus, the 15 parts of bones in butchers’ meat may furnish 6 parts 
of pure animal substance, and therefore 100 lbs. of meat, which 
commonly yield but 24 of alimentary substance, may furnish 30 lbs. 
if care be taken to extract the whole. It is obvious, therefore, that 
four head of cattle may supply as much nutriment as is now obtained 
from five. This is an enormous waste; and to prove the wholesome- 
ness of gelatine, M. Darcet states, that a committee of the faculty of 
medicine, composed of Leroux, Dubois, Pelletan, Dumeril and Vau- 
quelin, distributed gelatine to forty patients, and reported, Ist, that 
it was not only a great improvement as an article of diet, but econom- 
ical, and that to an extent which ought not to be overlooked; 2d, that 
soup made with gelatine is at least as agreeable as the ordinary soup 
of hospitals; 3d, that gelatine is not only nourishing and easy of di- 
gestion, but very salutary, and is attended with no unpleasant effects 
on the animal economy. In the hospital St. Louis, there is an appa- 
ratus which furnishes 900 rations of broth per day. It has been in 
operation twenty months, and has supplied 550800 rations of gela- 
tinous: solution, and various reports made to the administration testify 
to its value. At the Hotel Dieu 443650 rations have been supplied, 


370 Miscellanies. 


with the same result. These facts M. Darcet thinks ought, at least, 
to induce the Academy to suspend its judgment, before it harbors a 
sentiment unfavorable to the wholesomeness and economy of gelatine. 
Rev. Encyc. Juin, 1831. 


28. New instruments for measuring heat.—On the 5th of Septem- 
ber, MM. Nobili and Belloni presented an instrument of their inven- 
tion, which they called a thermo-multiplicateur, by means of which 
they are able to appreciate changes of temperature, so small as to be 
undiscoverable by any other instrument. |The principal piece of the 
instrument is composed of thirty eight elements, (antimony and bis- 
muth,) united in very acute angles. The second piece isa galvano- 
meter of two needles, particularly adapted to a thermo-electric cur- 
rent. ~ The instrument, therefore, depends upon electro-magnetic 
changes, which are themselves consequent upon the changes of tem- 
perature, which the instrument is thus intended to indicate. 

One of their first trials with the instrument enabled them to dis- 
cover a serious imperfection in all the thermoscopes in common use. 

When a plate or blade of glass is exposed to the sun or any other 
source of radiant heat, a portion of the heat passes immediately 
through the transparent body, but another portion is arrested by, the 
first strata, and being there accumulated it advances by degrees to 
the posterior surface. The first portion is so much less in relation 
to the second as the temperature of the source whence it issues is the 
less elevated ; the result evidently is, that if the rays proceed from 
a very feeble source, this first portion is reduced to almost nothing. 
Those thermoscopes, therefore, which are covered (as they nearly 
all are) with a cage of glass, are placed under very unfavorable cir- 
cumstances. The new instrument is not subject to this difficulty, 
and in consequence it indicates the instantaneous passage of a body 
slightly warmed, while the thermoscope of Reaumur remains com- 
pletely insensible. 

In general, the instantaneous passage of calorific rays” through 
transparent bodies, depends on their degrees of transparency, and 
this relation appeared constant in all the substances which they first 
tried, viz. sulphate of lime, mica, oil, alcohol and nitric acid; but 
the law was found to’be completely at fault with respect to water. 
This liquid, in fact, as the authors found, intercepts the instanta- 
neous passage of the calorific rays and stops it completely ; so that, 
however thin the stratum may be, when such a diaphragm is inter- 


Miscellanies. 371 


posed, a red hot ball may pass at a little distance before it, without 
causing the least movement in the needle. It was difficult, after 
having observed the immediate permeability of alcohol, oil and nitric 
acid, to believe that the non-permeability of water depended on its 
liquidity. Experiments, however, made with water in the solid 
state, have not varied the result. This property of water seems, 
therefore, to depend on its chemical composition and not on its phys- 
ical condition. 

The third series of experiments was made to determine the spe- 
cific heat of insects, of phosphorus, and of the lunar rays. 

With respect to insects, it has long been thought that their tem- 
perature was that of the circumambient air. It is certain, however, 
that these animals respire, that carbonic acid is formed by them, and 
consequently that a slow combustion must be going on which ought 
to produce some elevation of temperature. Davy was of opinion 
that their temperature was superior to that of the atmosphere. In 
fact, by introducing a very small thermometer into the bodies of in- 
sects, a slight elevation of the mercury generally occurred. In two 
cases, however, there was a depression. But the method employed 
by Davy was very imperfect, Ist, because it is applicable only to 
very large insects; 2d, because the mass of the thermometer being 
very large in proportion .to that of the animal, the instrument would 
produce, by contact, a great subtraction of caloric; 3d, because the 
evaporation of the humors, leaking through the incision, would cause 
a reduction of temperature; and 4th, because the experiments must 
always be made upon an animal in a suffering state. 

With the thermo-multiplicateur these inconveniences may be avoid- 
ed. ‘The experimenters were able, by the arrangement which they | 
adopted, to test the temperature of the ee in a state of perfect 
ease and freedom from constraint, that in every 
case, the instrument indicated a sil increase. 

On comparing the results obtained with lepidopterous insects in 
their different states, MM. Nobili and Belloni arrived at a constant 
law, viz. that caterpillars always have a higher temperature than the 
butterflies and chrysalids which proceed from them. Now, as the 
respiratory apparatus of the caterpillar is more fully developed, and 
respiration more active, than in the perfect insect, it results that the 
theory which attributes animal heat to a slow combustion, is support- 
ed by the phenomena of insect life, as well as by those of the ver- 
tebral animals. 


372 Miscellanies. 


There are various bodies which, like insects, give reason to be- 
lieve that they possess a temperature somewhat different from that of 
the atmosphere: the same test establishes this fact. It is thus that 
a deviation of 50° is obtained by placing in the apparatus a very 
small piece of phosphorus, which, in contact with the most delicate 
thermometer, gives no indication of heat.’ 

The authors then endeavored, by this delicate ieee to esti- 
mate the calorific influence of his lunar rays,—but so many unex- 
pected difficulties occurred in their attempts to remove the various 
causes of fallacy in the performance of this experiment, that they 
have. not hitherto succeeded to their satisfaction. 

A slight modification of the apparatus enabled the authors to esti- 
mate the radiating, (émissif,) absorbing and reflecting powers of dif- 
ferent bodies. Mercury proved to have the highest reflective power 
among the metals; and the others followed in the order pointed out 
by Prof. Leslie. But one new fact which they ascertained is, that 
polish has very little effect in increasing the reflective power. ‘Thus, 
in comparing the amount of reflected heat from a plate of brass, rough 
from the easting, with a similar plate which had received the highest 
polish, a difference was apparent of only two degrees in thirty six. 

Their researches into the power of emanation only served to con- 
firm the laws already known; but the absorbent power furnished 
some remarkable results. ‘The method of experimenting was this— 
the substance whose faculty of absorption was to be examined, was 
pasted to a disk of tinned iron, to the other side of which was fast- 
ened a stem perpendicular to the surface. After an exposure to the 
solar rays, these pieces were presented in-pairs to corresponding sides 
of the instrument, and the magnetic index turned to the side of that 
which was most heated. As a counter proof, it was only necessary 
to change sides, and to ascertain the fact of a contrary movement. 

In this way the relative absorbing power was well ascertained, and 
the constant result was, that the absorbing power is precisely in the 
inverse ratio of the conducting power of the same substance. ‘Thus, 
with respect to stuffs, the color being the same, the absorbing power 
was in the order of stlk, wool, cotton, linen and hemp. ‘The con- 
ducting power is just the reverse. So among the metals, the scale 
of conductibility, as is well known, is copper, silver, gold, steel, aron, 
tin and lead. The absorbing power, agreeably to the instrument, Is 
exactly the reverse. 


Miscellanies. 373 


From these and other trials, the fact appears to be established, 
that, circumstances being equal with respect to color and condition 
of surface, the absorbing power af a body is greater as its conducting 
power is less.—Rev. Encyc. Sep. 1831. Hi 

29. Advantages of Bored Wells in communicating heat.—The 
temperature of the water which rises from considerable depths in the 
earth, being almost constantly, winter and summer, at about 54° Far. 
the application of this temperature to economical purposes was sug- 
gested by M. de Bruckmann, of Wirtemberg, and it has met with com- 
plete success. Bored wells, from which the water rises to the sur- 
face by some internal force, and flows in a constant stream, are now 
common or at least numerous, in the north of Europe. This able 
engineer had bored a number of these wells for the supply of vari- 
ous establishments for spinning, paper-making, bleaching, &c. in which 
the water flowing from them, is used as a motive power. 

In the winter of 1830, he was consulted in relation to the best 
means of keeping the wheels clear of ice, in one of the manufactories 
of Heilbsonn, when the congelation was so great as to oblige them to 
use the axe in clearing the wheel. Recourse had been had to cur- 
rents of hot air, and to cylinders filled with ignited charcoal, but with 
only imperfect success. Dr. Bruckmann introduced the current 
from a bored well into a cylinder, pierced full of holes from which the 
water fell in a shower upon the wheel, and in less than an hour, the 
wheel which was so encased in ice as to be immovable was as 
clear of it as it is in the month of July, and from that time no fur- 
ther obstruction was experienced. ‘This beneficial application of the 
warm water of bored wells, was soon extended to all the manufac- 
tories where such wells existed. 

But the engineer did not rest there. He conceived and executed 
the plan of warming the manufactories themselves by this water, prior 
to its falling on the wheel. This was done by the simple process of 
causing the water to circulate in open tubes (troughs?) throughout the 
several rooms of a papermill and thence to fall on the wheel. A dif- 
ference of nearly thirty five degrees, in very cold weather, was thus 
produced between the interior and exterior of the building, although 
the doors were frequently opened by the ingress and egress of the 
workmen, and it enabled the proprietor to dispense with the stoves and 
furnaces, withoul any inconvenience to the laborers either on account 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 48. 


374 Miscellanies. 


of heat or of dampness from the water, which was at first an object 
of apprehension. 

In oil mills this procedure is particularly advantageous, not only 
in keeping the wheels clear of ice, but in securing the requisite damp- 
ness of the ‘grain, without the danger of freezing, which in extreme- 
ly cold weather, demands much troublesome precaution. 

The process now described has the further advantage. Ist, that 
the same water which in winter warms the apartment, in summer 
communicates a most agreeable and refreshing coolness, the heat 
never exceeding fifty five degrees, though it may outside be as high 
as seventy six degrees.* 2nd. That the circulation of water in manu- 
factories purifies the air and promotes the health of the workmen, so 
that in rooms full of people, the atmosphere is found to be perfectly 
free although the windows may be kept shut. 3d. That in case of 
fire, ascurrent of water within a building must be of the greatest con- 
sequence. 

So successful have been these inventions of M. de Bruckmann, 
that the King of Wirtemberg has appointed him to the station of 
Royal Architect, and Knight of the order of shy and decreed to 
him a large gold medal. 

The water of bored wells has been applied in France to the warm- 
ing of conservatories of plants, and a large fish pond at Montmoren- 
cy has been supplied in the same manner with cool water, which in 
the summer season, prevents the loss formerly sustained by the per- 
ishing of the fish from excessof heat. In consequence of these val- 
uable applications, the committee of the ‘‘Societé d’encouragement,” 
propose the decree of their gold medal to M. de Bruckmann.— Bull. 
de la soc. d’encour. Aout, 1831. 


30. Limits of the Audibility of Sound.—M. Savart read a me- 
moir on the inferior limit of the number of vibrations per second 
which compose a sound just perceptible to the human ear. He 
had before proved by experiments communicated to the Academy, 
that the superior limit was much, farther extended than had gener- 
ally been imagined: for example, that sounds are very distinctly 
heard, which result from more than forty thousand simple oscillations 
ina second. By means of a new apparatus, which he describes, 
he now shews that sounds are distinctly perceptible, and even strong, 
when composed of no more than eight vibrations in a second.— 


Rev. Encyc. Juillet, 1831. 


JMiscellanies. 375 


31. On the Sleep of Plants —M. Virey, in a memoir entitled, 
Flore Nocturne, (Flora nocturna) announces the following results or 
Jaws which he has deduced from his researches on this subject. Cold 
and humidity diminish the transpiration of vegetables; the sap, then 
insteadyof ascending to the summits of the leaves and flowers, as du- 
ring the day, descends towards the roots. Hence, the sap vessels of 
those parts, frail and fine-as they are in many plants, become almost 
empty and contract by their own elastic force. This is the reason 
why so many compound flowers, the Malvacez, the Convolvuli, &c. 
close during the night or even when the sky is covered with clouds. 
For a similar reason a numerous class of plants with pinnated leaves, 
fold them and sleep during the night. Thereturning warmthof the sun, 
again sets the sap in motion, and again invigorates the leaves and pet- 
als. ‘The heat and light dilate the vessels with a sort of turgescence, 
and expand the foliage until the return of night again drives the sap 
from their delicate vessels. But why is it otherwise with nocturnal 
plants which appear to languish and to be overcome during the day, 
and unfold their beauties only when the sun is withdrawn. It is be- 
cause his ardor acts too powerfully upon the frail texture of certain 
petals—evaporates too rapidly their nutricious juices, and causes 
them to close. But during the freshness of the night, these juices re- 
main in the tissue of the plant, fill their tubes and unfold their sur- ° 
faces to the atmosphere.—fev. Encyc. Aout, 1831. 


32. Shower of Flies. Singular appearance of the Moon.—At the 
session of the Academy of St. Petersburgh, held 21st of February, 
1831, a singular phenomenon was described which occurred at Orem- 
burg, on the 14th of December, 1830. During the whole of that 
day it rained heavily, although the thermometer remained at the 
freezing point. About midnight loud thunder was heard in the north- 
west ; and on the 14th of December snow fell, accompanied by a 
multitude of small black gnats, whose motions were similar to those 
of the flea. ‘The next day the atmosphere was clear, and the tem- 
perature fell to ten degrees below. At the same session a letter was 
read from the Governor of Oremburg, stating the following facts. 
On the 19th of January, 1831, between 6 and 8 P. M, the evening 
being fine, the new moon Leeited surrounded with a circle of fire, 
perfectly regular, and cut by two diameters of fire equally regular. 
The moon occupied the center of the circle. Two white semicir- 
cles were very distinctly delineated at the extremities of the diam- 
eter which went from E. to W. and their light was extended almost 


376 /Miscellanies. 


tothe extremities.of the other diameter. On the north of the Cir- 
cle a small are of fire was visible. During the continuance of this 
phenomenon the atmosphere was pure and tranquil, and the cold did 
not rise beyond seventeen degrees of Reaumur; a short time after, the 
thermometer descended _to twenty nine degrees below freeging.— 
Rev. Encyc. Mai, 1831. 


33. Improved Blowpipe.—This instrument, as simplified by M. 
Dancer, (V. Am. Jour. Vol. 17, p. 163) has been found by expe- 
rience to answer a very valuable purpose in the blowing and work- 
ing of glass. It is far less expensive, and is stated to be more pow- 
erful and manageable than the enamellers’ lamp. M. Danger has 
acquired so much skill in the use of his blowpipe, as to manufacture 
a great variety of philosophical apparatus in glass, such as sucking and 
forcing pumps, steam engines, air pumps, &c. and he so adapts the 
different parts of these instruments to their respective purposes as 
to enable the operator when a particular piece is broken, to replaceit 
by another, without the necessity of procuring a new instrument. 
M. Danger has reduced the art of glass blowing to a few simple prin- 
ciples which are applicable to the construction of all sorts of appara- 
tus; and the best proof that can be given of the readiness with which 
he communicates them, is the number of pupils which he has taught 
within two years;—four hundred at least, have learned from him 
every thing necessary to the construction of the most complicated 
apparatus. ‘Twelve lessons are quite sufficient for acquiring the 
whole detail of the operations, and even six may be sufficient to enable 
the pupil to dispense with further instruction.—Report of de Claubry. 
Bull. @ Encour. Jan. 1831. 


STATISTICS. 


1. On the law of increase in the human stature, by M. QuetELeET, 
Brussels.— After a few general considerations, the author mentions 
the facts which he has ascertained relative to the mean stature and 
the growth of man in Southern Brabant. 

The size of children, taken at the moment of birth, as derived from 
a hundred eases of actual and careful measurement, in the foundling 
hospital at Brussels is as follows, viz. 


Minimum. Mean. Maximum. 
Boys, 16 in. 2 lines. 18 in. 52 lines. 19 in. 8 lines. 
Girls, 16 2 18° 114 20 6 


- Miscellanies. 377 


The mean height of boys is, therefore, in metrical measurement 
0.4999, and that of girls 0.4896 ; these are inferior to the measure- 
ments observed in Paris as stated in the Dictionnaire des Sciences 
Medicales. 

Under the former government of the Low Countries the militia 
recruits took place at the age of nineteen. The following table, for 
Southern Brabant, during the years 1823 to 1827 inclusive, compre- 
hends the mean of 45,500 measurements of young men. 


Districts. Mean Height. 
Metres. 
1 arse - - - - 1.6633 
* The vicinity, - - - 1.6325 
2 nid - - - - 1.6393 
* d The vicinity, - =) eigen a 1.6177 
3 rhe ae - - - - 1.6428 
*? The vicinity, - - - 1.6323 
‘Towns, ~ - - - 1.6485 


Count, os 3 - - 1.6275 


Mean, 1.6380 


The inhabitants of the towns are, therefore, taller than those of the 
country, at least at the age of nineteen. ; 

Under the French empire, in the departments of Old France, the 
mean height of young men of twenty was 1.615 metres, while in 
Brabant, M. Quetelet found it, for young men of nineteen, to be 
1.638. Belgium, it may be observed, is a richer country than the 
medium of France. 

It thus appears that, by a general law, the mean of the human 
stature at nineteen and twenty is greater in proportion to the ease, 
comfort and freedom from excessive fatigue which the population 
generally enjoy. me 

But another question remains to be examined, viz. whether th 
growth is not simply more precocious in cities and rich countries. 
M. Quetelet has not decided that point, but he has made a curious 
observation with respect to the period at which the human growth 
ceases. He examined the results obtained during an extraordinary 
muster about fifteen years ago at Brussels, and made a comparison 
among nine hundred individuals, viz. three hundred at nineteen, three 
hundred at twenty five and three hundred at thirty years of age. 


378 - Miscellanies. 


Metres, 
He found the mean height at nineteen, - - - 1.6648 
Bini EG Yul ES “6 twenty five, - - 1.6750 
66 66 66 66 66 3 thirty, ss = - 1.6841 


The result according to his table is uniform, that is, it is the same 
on a comparison of one hundred of each age, as of three hundred. 

It thus appears that the growth of men does not always stop at the 
age of twenty five. It is not even proved that it stops at thirty, but 
it may be inferred from the author’s observations, that in a majority 
of cases it ceases at nineteen, twenty five or thirty, but that a small 
number, still more tardy, continue to increase the mean height. 

The author obtained from the schools and public establishments of 
Brussels, documents of the height of children of different ages and 
sexes. He has represented the mean growth of men by a curve 
which is very nearly a hyperbola, and is represented by the equation of 

tae: y : 

, nh ieee in which, y and & 
are co-ordinates, expressing the height and age, ¢ and 'T, two con- 
stants, the height of the individual at his birth, and at his entire devel- 
opment. It is quite a singular circumstance that this formula, cal- 
culated upon the height observed at birth and nineteen years.of age, 
answers also for the increase observed by physiologists in the five 
months which precede birth. 

M. Quetelet terminates his work by the following summary : 

Ist. The limits of growth in the two sexes are unequal, because 
women are born smaller than men, and sooner attain their full devel- 
opment, and their annual growth is less than that of men. 

Qd. The height of the inhabitants of cities surpasses, by two to 
three centimetres, that of the inhabitants of the country, at the age 
of nineteen. 

3d. It does not appear that the growth of men is entirely finished 
at the age of twenty five. 

4th. Youth who belong to families in easy circumstances, and 
who devote themselves to study, generally surpass the mean height. 

5th. The growth of the child, even from several months before 

‘birth, until its completion, follows a law of continuity such that the 
increments diminish successively with the age. 

6th. Between five and sixteen the growth is nearly regular; and 
is the twelfth of the increase of the foetus in the months which pre- 
cede birth— Bib. Univ. Sept. 1831. 


the third degree, y+ aon cea 


Miscellanies. 379 


2. Longevity of trees. (Morgenblatt, May, 1831.)—In the district 
of Rossienie, in Samogitia, Poland, the principal town of which is of 
the same name, thirty le from Kowno, there was formerly seen at 
the country house of a citizen of the name of Degonisius Przkinwicz, 
an enormous oak, which the country people called Baublis. This 
tree, which had been an object of worship in pagan times, having 
suffered by a fire, which had injured its rocts, the proprietor had it 
cut down in March, 1812, and transported to his park. When 
sawed through, its age was clearly discoverable, and found to be al- 
most six hundred years. The trunk of this Nestor of the vegetable 
kingdom was 384 French feet in circumference and 14 Fr. feet in 
diameter. The owner.had it hollowed out into the form of a hall, 
264 Fr. feet in circumference, and ornamented with portraits of illus- 
“trious Poles and other great men. At the passage of the 10th corps 
of the French army, in 1812, under Gen. Macdonald, this trunk ex- 
cited the admiration of the French.—ib. Univ. Aout, 1831. 


3. Connection between civilization and mental aberration.—A 
work entitled ‘The political arithmetic of madness, or general con- . 
siderations on madness in its relations to ignorance, crime and popu- 
lation, in various parts of the globe,” by M. Pirrguin, contains nu- 
merous comparative tables, by which it appears evident that the pro- 
gress of knowledge and the arts is very favorable to the extinction of 
mental diseases, and to the extirpation of crime; while it is clearly 
shown by the criminal statistics, both of France and England, that 
immorality increases in proportion to the ignorance and misery of the 
people. F 

His tables show, 

1. The relation between the number of maniacs, and of those 
who are accused of crime, comprehending both sexes, the profess- 
ions of each, and in what proportion mental aberration is caused by 
each of them. 

2. The influence of education and the nature of the crimes com- 
mitted by individuals under arrest. 

3. Accidental deaths, suicides, duels arising from gaming, and lot- 
teries. 

4. Of the civil condition of Hanes wether single, married, 
widows, or persons divorced. 

From the facts thus exhibited, M. Pierquin draws the inference, 
that the number of insane, and of criminals, depends on the amount 


380 Miscellanies. 


of intelligence among the people, and that wherever ignorance pre- 
vails, idiotism and its intellectual varieties will be frequent, so that 
the chance of insanity and crime increases in proporuon to the gen- 
eral ignorance; and that intellectual aberrations tend inevitably to in- 
crease the amount of crime.—Bull. de la Soc. de Statist. Univ. 
septieme livraison. 


NECROLOGY. 


1, Freperick Pxitie Wiimsen, the first preacher of the parish 
church of Berlin, died in that city on the 4th of May, 1831, at the 
age of sixty one. He was born in Magdeburg, the 23d of February, 
1770. By his ministerial functions of thirty.four years and his nu- 
merous writings, Wilmser has rendered great services to the cause 
of education. ‘Throughout his career, he displayed a remarkable 
degree of mildness and perseverance. He has been styled the Ber- 
quin of Germany. His Friend of Youth has passed through more 
than a hundred editions of fifty thousand copies, and certainly next 
to the sacred scriptures, has been the most numerously printed work 
of our age. His other works comprehend most of the branches of 
education. His literary ardor accompanied him to his bed of suffer- 
ing, and on the very day of his death appeared the last sheet of his 
“ Natural History.”—Rev. Encyc. Nov. 1831. 


2. Epwarp Tuomas, of Cayuga county, New York.—We regret 
to learn that this interesting young man, who gave proofs of much 
promise in the practical sciences, and from whose pen there are two 
articles in our Journal, on the construction of optical instruments, has 
paid the last debt of nature. He died on the 20th of May, of pul- 
monary disease, after an illness of five months. 

‘The sublime views of astronomy (observes one of his intimate 
acquaintances) first gave him a partiality for that science; and a 
strong desire to explore the depths of ether, made him a scientific 
and practical optician, and perhaps without a superior in the Uni- 
ted States.. The grand features of geology were very attractive to 
him, and in consequence he became a mineralogist. Several years of 
debility induced him to read the latest and best medical authors with 
great attention, and when his last illness supervened, he was preparing 
for the American Journal, a paper on some diseases of the eye which 
had been but little noticed by former writers, and which his great opti- 
cal skill enabled him most particularly to examine.” 


JMiscellanies. 381 


Miscellaneous contributions ; by Cuartes U. Sueparp. 


1. To destroy weeds in the alleys of gardens.—A rainy summer 
is favorable to the multiplication of weeds. They are often cut and 
pulled up; but, besides this method being expensive, it operates to 
injure the alleys. The rain water which often stands in the gul- 
lies, softens the earth, and the alleys soon become deranged, and ren- 
der it necessary to have recourse to expensive repairs. ‘This remedy 
is also insufficient: the delicate extremities of the roots are broken 5 
the plants shoot up again, and the same labor is to be repeated. 
Equal damage is done to the alleys when they are treated with a scraper. 

A more sure, more expeditious and less expensive process to ac- 
_ complish the same end, is to water them with the following solution 
which destroys the plants even to the roots. 

Boil about a hundred litres of water in a cauldron of iron with 
twenty pounds (livres) of quicklime and two pounds of sulphur: 
_ let this liquid settle: add water as may be necessary for the pavement 
of the alleys; the plants will disappear for cen years.— Recueil 
Industriel, Sept. 1830. 


2. Preservative against flies, employed by the butchers at Geneva. 
—A French gentleman, who lived in Geneva a long time, relates that 
the butchers of that city have possessed, from time immemorial, a meth- 
od of protecting meats from flies. It is by the odor of the oil of lau- 
rel. This oil, which though a little disagreeable is not insupportable, 
will drive away the flies; and they will not approach the wall or the 
bench which has been rubbed with it. I have, says the person, made 
the experiment, and by this means protected the gilding of furniture 
from the approach of flies.—Idem. 


3. Coloring materials suitable for confectioners and distillers.— 
Blue colors.—Indigo, which is often dissolved by sulphuric acid. 

Prussian or Berlin blue—These colors mingle easily with all oth- 
ers, and afford all the compound tints of which blue is an element. 

Red colors. —Carmine, Carmine lake. 

Yellow colors.—Saftron, La graine d’ Avignon, Lygraine de Perse, 
Le quercitron. 

The aluminous lakes of these substances. —The yellows which 


are obtained with many of the substances already described, are 
Vou. XXIL—No. 2. 49 


382 Miscellanies. 


more brilliant than that which the chrome yellow produces, and 
whose employment is so dangerous. . 

Compounp Cotors.—Green.—This color may be produced from 
a mixture of blue and of various yellows; but the shade which is the 
most beautiful is obtained from the Prussian or Berlin blue and the 
graine de Perse. | i 

Violet.—Indian woods, Berlin blue. By various mixtures, all 
desirable tints are obtained. 

Liquors.—I\n coloring liquors, the preceding colors may be em- 
ployed; but some others may be necessary which are derived from 
the following substances. 

Blue liquors.—Indigo dissolved in alcohol. ‘The solution is made 
by treating indigo with sulphuric acid, and pouring alcohol into the 
liquor, which takes up the coloring matter. 

Substances whose use in confectionary is dangerous.—All mineral — 
substances, Prussian blue excepted, particularly chrome yellow, which 
is formed of two poisonous ingredients. 

Schweinfurt green, a violent poison which contains copper and | 
arsenic. . 

Some distillers employ sugar of lead for the clarification of their 
liquors; a process which is liable to occasion the most serious acci- 
dents, as this substance is a violent poison. 

Much care is requisite also as respects the colored papers employ- 
ed by confectioners; as children frequently chew them and are ex- 
posed to be poisoned if they are stained by mineral substances.— 
Recueil In. Dec. 1830. 


4. To protect cron and steel from rust.—Heat the object until it 
burns the hand; after which, rub it with very white wax. Heat it a 
second time in order to melt off the wax, and then rub it briskly with 
a piece of cloth or leather to impart to it brilliancy. This operation 


renders the metal proof against rust from exposure to the atmosphere. 
—Idem. » 


5. A new plant which furnishes a wholesome and limpid water.— 
The English have discovered in the countries which they have re- 
cently added to their empire in India,.a shrub, the stem of which 
when cut, furnishes a great quantity of pure and limpid water. The 
natives are very familiar with this precious property ; in consequence 
of which, it is very rare to find a whole and well preserved plant 


MMiscellanies. 383 


of this kind. It climbs up trees to a very great height; it has not yet 
been described.—Recueil Industriel, Avr. 1830. 


6. New species of plants discovered in Siberia. —Doct. Zedebuhr 
on returning from a scientific journey, undertaken by the order of 
the government of Russia, in the year 1826, announced to the 
senate of the university of Dorpat that he had gathered in the moun- 
tains of Altai, in Siberia, sixteen hundred plants, among which are 
about five hundred new species. 

The animal kingdom has afforded him a collection equally great : 


the species which he has collected amount to more than seven 
hundred.—Idem. 


7. New method of transplanting trees.—It often happens in repla- 
cing a dead tree in an avenue or grove that, in order to enjoy the ben- 
efit of its shade the sooner, the tree which is transplanted has already 

- acquired considerable size. 

After having dug around the tree, a distance sufficiently considera- 
ble so as not to detach the earth about the roots, the mass was sur- 
rounded with a coarse cloth in order to retain the earth, and it was 

‘then disposed.in a hole prepared beforehand. 

Notwithstanding all these precautions, it was not rare for the trees 
to die, on account of the’disturbance of the roots. 

The method we propose is more simple, and does not present the 
same inconveniences, although it is applicable only in northern climates 
and during rigorous winters. It is accomplished simply by raising the 
tree with the earth which surrounds the roots, when the frost unites 
the whole into a solid mass, and to transplant it into a hole dug the au- 
tamn before. 

This method, by which the tree does not undergo any violence, is 
equally well adapted to young trees as to shrubs.—Jdem. 


8. Imitation of platina.—Melt together a pound of brass and ten 
ounces of zinc; but as the brass is composed of copper and of zinc, 
in the proportion of three pounds and a little more of the first, and of, 
a pound of the second of these metals, equal proportions of copper 
and zine produce the same imitation of platina.—Jdem. 


9. A new method of dyeing hats.—It is known that nutgalls are 
a very expensive ingredient in dyeing hats. M. Ludke formed the 
idea of substituting for it, a simple decoction of oak bark. 


384 Miscellanies. 


This decoction enables us to dispense with the use of lees of wine 
which are no longer necessary ; and the felt is found sufficiently pre- 
pared to receive the dye. 

To make this decoction, he took half a cwt. of oak bark which was 
boiled a number of times and with different quantities of water, even 
to two ovhafts. He took afterwards eighteen pounds of this decoc- 
tion for a bath of dye, capable of employing six workmen. . 

He then added to it a little cream of tartar, with a small quantity of 
vinegar and a small portion of the lees of wine, and proceeded as usual. 

In the second bath of dye, he added only half the quantity of wine 
employed in the first. In order to obtain the best results, as in the 
case of choice felts, he found it necessary to increase the quantity of 
cream of tartar, as well as of vinegar and of lees of wine. 

It is proper to remark that, although the process of dyeing may 
be completed by a pure decoction, the mass, nevertheless, does not 
acquire the suppleness which is desired.—Recueil Industriel, Nov. 
1831. 


10. Blue coloring matter extracted from the stem of the buck-wheat. 
—(Polygonum Fagopyrum.)—A blue coloring matter, very well 
adapted to dyeing, is obtained from this plant by treating it in the fol- 
lowing manner. The stems are cut before the full maturity of the 
grain and spread upon the ground exposed"to the sun, and suffered 
to remain in this situation until the seeds drop off with ease.. When 
the grain is separated from the stems, they are thrown into heaps, 
moistened with water, and left to ferment to such a degree that. de- 
composition takes place and a blue color is developed. It is then 
formed into balls, or flat cakes, which are dried in the sun or ina 
stove. After which the balls, being boiled in water, communicate to 
it an intense blue which is not affected by vinegar or by sulphuric 
acid. This color is converted into red by alkalis, to black by pow- 
dered nut-galls, and toa very fine green by evaporation. Stuffs 
dyed blue with this preparation, in the same manner as they are dyed 
with other vegetables colors, appear very handsome and retain their 
color very well.—Recueil In. Sept. 1881. 


11. Heating of water—M. Dulong has communicated a note by 
M. Lechevalier, upon the heating of water in vessels made red- 
hot. Jt has been known for a long time, that when drops of water 
are projected upon metal raised to a white heat, that instead of un- 


MMiscellanies. 385 


dergoing a sudden evaporation, they experience a slow one, and that 
instead of spreading themselves, as is the case at a common tempera- 
ture, they suddenly assume a spherical form like drops of mercury 
on glass. It is also known, that when the metal, in cooling, has 
reached a temperature below that of a dull red heat, the drops of 
water become flattened on their surface, and undergo a sudden evap- 
oration, accompanied by a brisk ebullition. ‘The same phenomena 
have been observed to attend the heating of a considerable quantity 
of water. It has been remarked that, by pouring water, drop by 
drop, into a platina crucible raised to a white heat, the crucible might 
be filled almost completely, and preserved for a long time in this 
condition, without undergoing any very perceptible evaporation ; but 
that when the crucible was removed from the fire, and permitted to 
cool down to a dull red heat, the water suddenly enters into a violent 
ebullition and is rapidly converted into vapor. 

These facts were explained on the supposition, that at a red heat 
the water is not in contact with the sides of the vessel, and that the 
radiant heat, which alone penetrates it, passes through it almost en- 
tirely without heating it, so that the feeble elevation of temperature, 
which results from the slight proportion of heat left in its passage, is 
more than compensated by the evaporation which takes place at the 
surface of the liquid. Not satisfied with this explanation, M. Le- 
chevalier undertook a series of experiments to ascertain the true 
theory of these phenomena. _ He constructed a cylindrical boiler of 
copper, six inches in length, and one inch in diameter, whose sides were 

_two lines in thickness, and pierced at one of its extremities by a round 
orifice, two lines in diameter. After having filled it with water, he 
closed it with a plug-of wood, which was encased by a strap of iron 
in order to secure it in its place. After having left it forty eight hours 
with the orifice downwards, in order that the plug might swell so 
as completely to occupy the opening, he subjected the boiler toa 
red heat by means of a forge. He then withdrew the plug; but no 
vapor escaped, although the boiler contained a certain quantity of 
water. It is necessary to unplug the boiler while it is still red hot, 
‘and to do it without loss of time; for when it has fallen to a tempe- 
rature below redness, the liquid it contains is rapidly converted into 
steam accompanied with detonation, and giving at the same time a 
recoiling motion to the boiler. In an experiment where the cooling 
was suffered to take place upon the floor of the forge, the explosion 


386 Miscellanies. 


was equal to the report of a pistol, and the boiler was projected with 
violence against the wall of the building. It follows from hence, 
that if it be admitted that the temperature of water placed in a vessel, 
heated to redness, is less than 100° R., it is necessary to adrnit also 
that in the preceding experiment, the water, which, before the boiler 
had arrived to redness, had attained a high temperature, was cooled 
afterwards to below 100°, when the boiler had reached the tempera- 
ture of redness, although in this case there had not been any notable 
loss of steam. After a great number of other experiments, M. Le- 
chevalier concluded, that the temperature of water, heated in an in- 
candescent vessel is always less than 100°; that, accordingly, the 
principle of the equilibrium of temperature in a confined space, which 
has heretofore been considered as fundamental in the theory of heat, 
cannot any longer be admitted ; and that this principle is liable to ex- 
ceptions in particular cases.— Revue Médicale, Sept.-1830. 


12. The conversion of magnetism into electricity—This long 
wished for result has at length been obtained by Mr. Faraday. If 
two wires, A and B, be placed side by side, but not in contact, and 
a voltaic current be passed through A, there is instantly a current 
produced, by induction, in B, in the opposite direction. Although 
the principal current in A be continued, still the secondary current 
in B is not found to accompany it; for it ceases after the first moment} 
but when the principal current is stopped, then there is a second 
current produced in B, in the opposite direction to that of the first, 
produced by the inductive action, or in the same direction as that of 
the principal current. These induced currents -are so momentary 
that their effect on the galvanometer is scarcely sensible; but when 
they are passed through helices containing unmagnetized steel nee- 
dies, they convert them into magnets. 

If a wire, connected at both extremities with a galvanometer, be 
coiled, in the form of a helix, round a magnet, no current of elec- 
tricity takes place init. ‘This is an experiment which has been made 
hundreds of times by various persons, in the hope of evolving elec- 
tricity from magnetism. But if the magnet be withdrawn, or intro-. 
duced into such a helix, a current of electricity is produced whalst 
the magnet is in motion, and is rendered evident by the deflection of 
the galvanometer. If a single wire be passed by a magnetic pole, 
a current of electricity is induced through it, which can be rendered 


MWhiscellanies. 387 


sensible. Whenever, also a piece of metal moves near a magnet, so 
as to intersect the magnetic curves, electricity is evolved, according 


to very simple laws.—Phil. Mag. April, 1832. 


13. New lamp.—In the course of the first meeting, at York, of 
‘the British association for the advancement of science, the Rev. 
Wm. V. Harcourt showed a lamp constructed on a new principle, 
and. explained the principle and construction of it. He gave it the 
nafne of an ol gas lamp; not because it was lighted by gas formed 
at a temperature below that of flame (for this is common to all lamps) 
but because, as in the gas lights of the streets, the gas issues from 
a reservoir, and owes the perfection of its combustion not. to an as- 
cending current of hot air, but to the force with which it is propelled 
from the reservoir and carries the air along with it. It differed, how- 
eyer, from the common gas lights in these circumstances :—that the 
reservoir formed part of the burner; that the gas was formed as it 
was consumed; and that it was propelled not by a vis a tergo, and 
in a state of condensation, but by the expansive force of its own 
heat.. In consequence of this circumstance, the current of the gas- 
-eous jet was more rapid in proportion to the quantity of water con- 
tained in it than in the common gas light, whilst it was also at a much 
higher temperature, so that it could issue with a greater velocity 
without being liable to blow itself out. The practical difficulty con- 
sisted in the obtaining a steady supply of light, especially with the 
cheap oils. This difficulty had been in a great measure surmount- 
ed; but the instrument was still imperfect.—Jdem. 


14. Pelokonite, a new mineral—lts name comes from séAdg, 
brown, and xéws, dust, in allusion to the color of its streak. Form 
unknown ; cleavage none; fracture conchoidal; color bluish-black ; 
streak liver-brown; opake; lustre vitreous, feeble; tenacity not 
great; hardness 3-0; sp. gr. 2°50—2-56. It is very soluble in mu- 
riatic acid,—the solution having a pistachio green color. It is found 
in the Terra Amarilla and the Remolinos, in Chili, along with cop- 
per green malachite, and another unknown blackish-brown mineral 
with a yellow streak. The above description is by Richter, of Frey- 
berg.—Jameson’s Journal. 


15. Sopa Atum or Mito, a suLPHATE oF ALUMINE.—TIn the 
Arsberittelse om framstegen I Physik och Chemie afgifven den 31 


388 JMiscellanies. 


mars 1830, by Berzelius, allusion is made to my examination of the 
Native Alum of Milo, (a notice of which appeared in Vol: XVI of 
this Journal) in which, in consequence of having detected in it the 
existence of soda, and from the consideration of its natural historical 
properties, I suggested that it was identical with the Native Soda 
Alum described by Dr. Thomson, of Glasgow, in the Annals of the 
Lyceum of Natural History of New York, Vol. III, p. 19,—not 
presuming to decide whether that mineral constituted a distinct spe- 
cies; and still less, was I ‘“‘ misled” in adopting the opinion, as Ber- 
zelius supposes, that it was identical with the artificial soda alum,— 
an opinion attributed to Dr. Thomson also, but which I think is erro- 
neously inferred from his language. Dr. Thomson has, however, 
obviously committed an oversight in stating the only difference be- 
tween the native and the artificial soda alum to consist in this, that 
the former contains only twenty atoms of water, while the latter con- 
tains twenty five atoms, since besides the disagreement in crystalline 
form, of which he afterwards speaks, the difference alluded to by 
Berzelius of the rapid efflorescence of the artificial soda alum, and 
the absence of this property in the native mineral, undoubtedly exists. 
It appears, however, from the account of Berzelius, that the so 
called Milo Alum has since been subjected to a quantitative analysis. 
“On the return of Mr. Berggren from his travels in Turkey and 
Greece, he submitted to the Royal Academy, a specimen of this salt 
from Pyromeni (in Milo) ; which, before it was deposited in the col- 
lection, was analyzed by Hartwall, and was found to contain - 


Sulphuric acid, - - - - * = 40.31 — 
Alumine, - - - - - 14.98 
Potash, - - - - - 0.26 
Soda, - - - - ~ 1.13 
Magnesia, - - - - ce OS 
Muriatic acid, = - - - “omg 
Silica, a - ~ - - - 1.13 
Water, - - - - - 40.94 


Traces of oxide of iron, oxide of copper and ammonia. 
100.00 
From whence it clearly appears, that the mineral is a native crys- 
tallized sulphate of alumine, containing an accidental portion of potash 
and soda alum, of sulphate of magnesia, sulphate of iron .and sul- 
phate of copper.” 


Miscellanies. 389 


From the foregoing, it is obvious, that the Milo mineral is not a 
true alum, as was formerly supposed, but a sulphate of alumine; and 
whether it, be identical with the South American alum, described by 
Dr. Thomson, there remains nothing but an apparent coincidence of 
external properties to prove. 


16. Datholite and Iolite in Connecticut.—My attention was called 
a few weeks ago, by Mr. J. D. Dana, of the Junior Class in Yale Col- 
lege, to a small geode of beautifully transparent: crystals imbedded 
in trap, collected by him ata spot, near the village of Middlefield, 
called Middletown falls. He was conducted thither by some of his 
acquaintance in Middletown, to whom the locality was known, and by 
whom the mineral was regarded as Quartz, or Chabasie. Mr. Dana 
however, was satisfied as well from its form as its hardness, that it 
could not belong to the former of these species, and was. doubtful 
of its identity with the latter. 

By an experiment, I immediately satisfied myself that its hardness 
was between 5. and 5.5; and therefore too high for Chabasie. Its 
crystals also, though small and highly complicated, were seen ob- 
viously to belong to a prismatic system of crystallization. A few 
of the angles were ascertained by means of the reflective goniome- 
ter, and a perfect coincidence with the angles of Humboldtite of Le- 
vy, (now known to be Datholite) was detected. The mineral appear- 
ed to me so interesting, no less on account of the modifications of 
its crystals than for the reason that we have long since.ceased to obtain 
specimens of Datholite from Patterson, New Jersey, that I was im- 
mediately induced to visit the spot. 

The falls themselves would have compensated for the visit, con- 
stituting as they do, a beautiful object of picturesque scenery. The 
stream where it precipitates itself over the trap, is apparently two 
rods wide; and when not unusually swollen, two or three feet in © 
depth. I was informed that the height of the fall is thirty feet. 
When viewed from below, it presents a flat surface of unbroken 
foam from top to bottom;—the face of the rock over which the 
stream passes being rough and not perpendicular, but rather making 
an angle of twenty or twenty five degrees witha line vertical to the 
plane of the horizon. ‘The trap upon either side of the river, mounts 
somewhat higher, especially upon the eastern side, where it offers to 
the spectator who is at the foot of the falls upon the opposite bank, an 
overhanging aspect. A profusion of trees and shrubs, moreover, 


Vol. XXII.—No. 2. 50 


390 Miscellanies. 


clothe the tops of the rocks, and the borders of the stream below the 
falls,—imparting tothe place in a high degree, the effect of seclusion. 
When the river is swollen by the spring freshets, the noise of the 
waterfall is heard to the distance of several miles. 

The trap wherever it comes into view, presents numerous empty 
cavities, some of which are an inch or two in diameter. By break- 
ing into the rock, a little way from its surface, these cavities are 
found, still occupied with the Datholite and other imbedded minerals. 
But specimens are procured more conveniently from among the larg- 
est fragments of the trap which surround the base of the hills direct- 
ly below the falls. ‘The Datholite forms seams and amygdaloidal mas- 
ses, varying from one inch to two inches inlength. ‘These seams and 
masses are either wholly composed of the mineral, or have within, cav- 
ities of larger or smaller dimensions. In the former case, the mass 
is fibrous or granular,—the two varieties never occurring together, 
but the whole mass is either made up of delicate, radiating fibres or 
composed of fine granular individuals. Where a cavity is found 
within the mass, its walls are lined with the most brilliant crystals 
which surmount, or are situated upon, the internal extremities of the 
fibres. These crystals are completely transparent and colorless, or 
are translucent with a faint tinge of yellow or green. 

This locality is rendered the more interesting, inasmuch as it pre- 
sents us with the connexion among what was formerly considered as 
forming three distinct species: viz. Humboldite, Datholite and Bo- 
tryolite. For its crystals give the principal measurements of the 
two first mentioned cnboeees ; and the fibrous, semi-botryoidal 
properties which it manifests in other specimens, show its relation to 
Botryolite. : 

It deserves to be rian remarked in description of the fibrous vari- 
ety afforded by this locality, that the fibres where they commence ra- 
diating from the exterior of the mass and where they are in juxta- 
position with the trap, are sometimes of a pale, flesh-red color: at oth- 
ers, they are milk white; and so close is the aggregation of the individ- 
uals, that the naked eye can with difficulty detect the fibrous texture. 

The hollow masses of Datholite contain occasionally, a transparent 
bluish Selenite ; and also a bluish Calcareous Spar, which is some- 
times in regular crystals of the cuboid form and constitutes appar- 
ently, the Prunnerite of Esmark. Small geodes of Chlorite and 
of a delicately green Prehnite exist also in the same rock, but the 
Datholite is never immediately associated with any other substamee 
than the one above mentioned. 


JMiscellanies. 391 


The Jolite is found at Haddam. I was accidentally made ac- 
quainted with the fact during a visit to the Chrysoberyl locality, which 
I made early the present season. The quarryman whom I employ- 
ed brought to me, just as I was leaving the place, a piece of a rock, 
which he informed me had been blasted the year before, on account 
of a dark fibrous mineral it contained. The substance to which he 
referred was obviously Anthopbyllite; but along with it, I recognized 
handsome, violet-blue Iolite. Having ascertained the spot where it 
was obtained, I determined to visit it on the first convenient occasion, 
which proved to be during my excursion to Middlefield ; from which 
place, it is twelve miles distant. 

The Iolite locality exists upon the high ground directly west of the 
Court House, in Haddam, distant from it only about seventy rods, 
and situated in a somewhat open space, near the meeting of four 
roads. The mineral occurs in gneiss, which here puts on the aspect 
of mica-slate. It forms in some places one third of the rock. It 
rarely, however, presents masses above one inch in diameter ; and is 
intermingled with Quartz, Feldspar, Mica, Garnet, Anthophyllite, 
Talc and Octahedral Iron. Its color is a rich violet blue, sometimes 
approaching sapphire-blue. It is transparent or translucent, imper- 
fectly foliated in one direction, and exhibits the property of dichroism. 

Before concluding this notice, I ought to mention that Lieut. Math- 
er has recently informed me that having collected several specimens of 
the Anthophyllite last year at this place, he afterwards recognised the 
mineral above described in connexion with them. . 


: C. U. SHEparp. 
New Haven, July 1, 1832. 


OTHER NOTICES. 


1. Notice of Eaton’s Geological Text Book, second edition, 
Svo., pp. 140. Published by Messrs. Carvill, New York, Websters 
& Skinners, Albany, and Wm. S. Parker, Troy, 1832.—The subject 
matter of this treatise has been published six times before the present 
edition. 1st in 1818 and 2d in 1820, under the title Index to the 
Geology of the Northern States; 3d in. 1824, as the Report of a 
Geological survey of Erie Canal, taken at the expense of the Hon. 
S. Van Rensselaer; 4th as a Geological Nomenclature; 5th as a 
Prodromus, presenting a new view of classification of rocks by series — 
and formations; 6th as a Geological Text Book in 1830. Now 
(1832) it appears as a second edition of the last. 


» 392 JMiscellanies. 


We shall notice nothing more than the most important alterations 
from the edition of 1830. 

1. Ten pages are devoted to the progress of Geology in Eciodeiget 
In this the author professes to confine himself, chiefly, “to that field 
where he has been a continual laborer.” , 

2. Twenty two pages are occupied with descriptions of organ- 
ized remains, and sixty eight lithographic figures are inserted, to 
represent the most common species, which he has personally exam- 
ined in situ. } 

3. The author confesses, that Dr. Morton has demondeasl that 
the Marl beds of New Jersey are the genuine chloritic chalk of 
Brongniart ; but treats them as alternations with Tertiary clays. 

4. The red sandstone group of De La Beche, he says, appears 
to be equivalent to his saliferous, ferriferous, liasoid, and geodife- 
rous rocks; which he treats as subordinates. 

5. Near the end of the book, he gives an alphabetical list of local-. 
ities; and he solicits materials for extending it, in another edition. 

His references to localities are much extended. Whether we 
agree or disagree with Mr. Eaton in his speculative views, his col- 
lection of facts, and very particular local references, are important 
contributions to the general stock of geological knowledge. 


2. Rational expressions for sines, tangents and secants; by Davin 
Govutp.—The following expressions have some peculiar properties, 
which, it is presumed, will entitle them to a place in the Journal of 
Science, if they have not been before published. ° 

Let r be the radius of a circle, p, an arc of the same, n and p, 
other quantities either known or unknown, and let 


sine (of ¢)= 2 7 n p+(n2+p?); 
then, (rad.? —sin. “= 


(7? — (2rnp)?+(n? +p*)? i= cos. =r(n® —p? (0 +p*)s 
rad. ?—~sin. = 
r?_=(Qnrp—(n? +-p?))=cosec.=7(n? +p? \ iy 
ule ?_- COS. = 
r2—_(r(n? —p?)— (in? +p?) )) ==secant=r(n2 +p? + (n?—p? ) 
rad. X sin. cos. = 
(r X 2rnp—(n? +-p?))— 
(r(n? —p?)=-(n? +p?))= tan. = 2 r n p =(n?—p?), 
rad.?—-tan. == 
1*-+(2rnp-+ (n? —p?)) =cotan. =r(n? —p?)-+2np. 


Miscellanies. 393 


And by the well known series, 
tan. — tan. °+3- tan. °=5 —tan.7+-7-+ &c. = the corresponding 
arc, we have 2rnp—(n* — p?)— (2rnp) ®~38(n*® — p*)? + (2rnp)s5—- 
(n? —p*)5—&e.=9. 

Observations.—1st. If n=p, then g=one quadrant. If n or 
p=0, then o=0. 2d. If n>p, then the functions of 9, indicated 
by the expressions are all positive quantities. If p>vn, then the co- 
sine, secant, tangent and cotangent will be negative quantities. In 
this case r(n? — p?) =q is an absurd and impossible expression, but 
we may put 7(n?—p?)—(n?+p?)=-q. So also of the other 
functions enumerated. 3d. When a‘sine, tangent or secant of 9, or 
its complement=a, the values of two of the quantities which enter 
into the expressions, viz. of 7, or p, may be assigned arbitrarily, 
withia certain limits, =, c or d, and, the other being =x, may be “ 
found by an equation not exceeding a quadratic, and if the conditions 
the last observation be preserved, there will be no imaginary expres- 
sion. 4th. The expressions for the sine, tangent and secant of @, 
and its complement are each comprised in a finite and small number 
of terms, which have no radical or surd quantities. If the value of 
any one of these functions be assumed equal to a given quantity, then 
indeed, the value of one of the quantities may be inexpressible in 
numbers except by an infinite series, or a radical quantity, but the 
general analytical expression will always be entirely free from radi- 
cals. 5th. The expressiogs cannot possibly transcend the limits 
of the values of the functions they represent. Thus it is impossi- 
ble to make 2rnp—(n?-+p?)>r, or r(n? —p?)+(n?+p?)>r, or 
r(n? +-p?)+2np<r, or r(n? +p?)—(n?—p?)<r. 6th. Putting 
7? =q?, the expressions give a formula for finding two numbers, the 
sum or difference of whose squares is equal to the square of a 
given number. For sec.? —tan.*=rad.?, and sin.*+cos.? =rad.?. 
7th. The arbitrary quantities, mentioned in observation 3d, may be 
used for the purpose of making the expressions conformable to any 
two possible conditions in addition to those there mentioned. 

Queries.—1st. May not the expressions given in this article be 
used in some analytical investigations respecting the circle and its 
functions in preference to those generally adopted? 2d. Is it possi- 
ble by any modifications of these expressions to represent the rela- 
tion of » to its common functions in a limited number of terms? 


Miscellanies. 


394 


Sunvorunwurod yng Sepeys oy) ur ‘oansodxe ayy v ur pooesd sojamowsey) ay} pue ‘epeur Aj[njeies a19M suONVAdesgo OUT, , 


‘are yeus9}xe Oy) WIM Ajaauy 


SESS CEP LE Og war Boy 


PEE RTO Ig}OL OS LE SEI LS S fou INeEeI He ‘uounnndnog ——_—dS EG Gelh hel Tog" way “osy 
cpi— % ie ie ie ie 6 IL © | Lit PP IPL LT | Isler] » Sigejez| » & |PL] “69/9 LG1e'P9) “Se 
%\— |e Ip ip (9 [lz 19 IS I-11 19 lel IST | SHES] » SIZ TIS) » & SAE ISO LS\L°9C\8'oP 
TL | |L j6 je OLS l€ —% I-Ir IP 1% IS 1S@ 1 S61) » QISTIILZ) » € IVI PHO LPC OSS OT 
0% Is’s |—I9 Ie |G IL Ie IE 16 | LIS OLO IAL ISL | OFZ) » 9/Felb9) » G [6IIS'SEC'6E/S OF “9E 
%s los |—\6 16 Ib @ IL IS | Tle | |S OL |1% | O91 | » LISclzou'a E 61S SEP PES GES ce 
& |L7OL—Ltis |f ip | THoril IL It ISL | sel) » § LIOTPP MY Lipa Le Ler 0e} “Se 
Vele 2 tie lg % ie Ke itie l€ IL IS «(2S | SERS » LIOE99!,» € LT] “SIS th) 6 L 17 
OF |— 19 Ip |9 IG 12 [1S |-1G IP IL «OPS | SESIPP oo» «69622; » & IP ‘6SIG' SSIE'T9/9 TS 
@z%|1— le |e {8 ie [oe It 12 [S| IE ILL IGE | SEES] » SIOESS| » % JOLCL9) “LOT OL/9'T9 
Lti— icie¢ iz lore ik ie if |LI6 [3 16 12 | Lele9| » S668) » P \LIGSLIL PLO 6L/G°EL 
rs |— 19 16 |L JO IP IL ay @ i9 |Go | GEISG] » SIL 188) » § IEG OLIS 696 PLE LO 
Lt |— |8 |e 019 fF Ib =] |b lk _ (SS ok FSH MY FPeIC6) Me E Io | “99SPD) “OL/9"E9 
ele isl | | | | | CUEIBIEIS EL EUS] FOIE] oF Fis dle Sie Sle & 
ee |g g(QiE\2 |" lale| = IS/B| & (Je Sisein blab 
oe (Hal lal@ie Zlelele| | ele 3 p/w S| 8/5 & 
: 4 “HOVLILA YUE 2 -ginjesaduta) | “oinjesodura) = = Bs = 

-| |-sogtpjosXepjo‘on} 7 | jo ununuryy | Jo Wnaxe al 26k os 
S-TTHOSIW "SONIM "HHHLVAM “MALANOWYAAL 


cs reece A 


jo [edioung ‘sNINap * | NHOr 
OP PT PON “OD Yynowmuopr ‘umojzayppipyr 30 apous 


Aq £oeQt “ST 


oune oO} 


‘Test ISTE Key 


‘Aulopeoy UMOJPpIf, 9U} 


MA 


woud 


16S ofL 
x SUOUDALISQC 7191.60]0.L09) 9 fo JIDLISO HY "Ss 


BUOT 


Ce 


N 


196 


Remarks.—The mean temperature of the year was 53.3°; heat 
greatest in August and least in December. The warmest week, 
however, was the first in June, and the coldest day in January. 


Miscellanies. 395 


The temperature of May and October was the same. ‘The great- 
est range of the thermometer in any one month was 60° in January, 
and the least 27° in August. Whole range during the year 90°. 
The minimum of temperature here was considerably higher than in 
some places at the south and west. At Nashville, Tenn. the mini- - 
mum was 18° below zero, while with us it was 2° above, and only 
4° lower than in the preceding winter. 

This spring has been unusually cold. Vegetation is generally 
backward, and garden plants have been several times injured by 
frost in May, and even as late as the 27th. While I am writing, 
(June 1st,) the thermometer stands at 54°; last year, on this day, 
it was at 90°. 

No occurrence of the Aurora Borealis was observed during the 
year. 

Under showers, I have noticed those days on which rain fell but 
a small part of the time; some of which are, of course, marked 
under cloudy, and others under fazr. 


4, Treatise on Mineratocy; by Cuartes UpHam SHEPARD, 
Lecturer on Botany in Yale College; Member of the American Geo- 
logical Society ; Corresponding Member of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia, §c. New Haven: H. Howe, 1832.— 
‘The above named work, partly on the plan of Prof. Mohs, and partly 
original, treats of Mineralogy as an independent science, separating 
from it a variety of information formerly regarded as belonging to it 5 
and presents the scientific departments of which it consists distinctly, 
in strict conformity with the method according to which the other 
branches of Natural History are treated. The way in which the 
science has heretofore beén treated among us, has obviously lacked 
the convenience and the precision of its sister sciences Botany and 

‘Zoology. A great variety of unconnected information relating to 
minerals has been presented together, much of which belongs to other 
sciences; the effect of which was to prevent a clear conception,of — 
Mineralogy, and to render inapparent its relation to other branches 
of knowledge. Its departments were either not distinguished at all, 
or were more or less involved. The idea of the species, especially, 
was not fixed; and if the characteristic and description were not en- 
tirely blended together, yet the essential characters did not extend to 
the exclusion of above three or four species. For these reasons, it is 
well known that the cultivators of other branches of Natural History 


396 Miscellanies. 


have often been disposed to question the propriety of denominating 
the study of minerals, a science; and we are acquainted with Bota- 
nists who have actually abandoned it on the ground that its species 
were indefinite, and that no scientific characters existed for their 
recognition. 

We give the following as an outline of Mr. Shepard’s work. 

He treats the science in five parts, under the following general 
heads; viz. Terminology, Classification, Nomenclature, Character- 
istic and Physiography. 

Part I. or Terminology, embraces an explanation of the natural 
properties of minerals, or those which they exhibit while in their 
natural state. ‘These are considered under three divisions; viz. 
1, such as refer to simple minerals; 2, such as refer to compound 
minerals; 3, such as are common to both. ‘The first of these divis- 
ions, to which a section of seventy one pages is devoted, embraces 
the geometrical properties of minerals, or such as refer to space,— 
the relations of structure, of surface, and the phenomena of double 
refraction. In treating of the geometrical properties, or what is 
more usually understood as constituting the science of crystallo- 
graphy, the following order is pursued. 'To adapt the work to per- 
sons ignorant of solid geometry, a few pages are devoted to element-_ 
ary definitions in that branch. ‘The following propositions are then 
laid down and illustrated; viz. ‘1. Certain mineral species affect: 
peculiar forms,”—2. “ Several different forms are frequently found 
in different individuals of the same species,”—3. “ The different crys- 
talline forms belonging to each species may be conceived to be derwed 
by certain laws from one type or fundamental form.” The number 
of such primary forms in the mineral kingdom is then announced ; 
and each of them is described and illustfated in its principal geo- 
metrical properties. ‘To this succeeds the consideration of those 
symmetrical modifications which these forms undergo from the re- 

placements of their edges and angles, and the new figures which 
"are produced when the replacements extend so far as to extinguish 
the faces of the primary form. 

The imperfections of crystals in respect to their forms is next 
treated of, and the methods employed for ascertaining the angles of 
crystals. Then follows an account of the internal structure of erys- 
tals, or the laws of cleavage. Here the author has deviated from 
the practice of most writers on elementary mineralogy, in having 
passed over in silence the subject of the origin of crystals through 


Miscellanies. 397 


the aggregation of molecules of a particular shape ; -a subject, which 
however curious it may be in general Physics, is nevertheless purely 
hypothetical, and destitute of any bearing whatsoever, upon deter- 
minative or descriptive Mineralogy. 

The relations between the forms of cleavage and crystals, and the 
identity of the former with the primary forms of the species, are 
then pointed out, and practical rules are given for ascertaining the 
primary forms of crystals in all cases. ‘The section concludes with 
a description of the kinds of fracture and surface observable among 
erystals. 

The second section, which relates to compound minerals, com- 
mences with an account of regular composition, or the subject of 
twin-crystals ; after which, irregular composition in all its varieties is 
considered under the following heads:—Group and Geode of crys- 
tals—Iinitative shapes originating in the groups of crystals—Imita- 
tive shapes arising out of the geodes of crystals—Amorphous com- 
position—Accidental imitative shapes—Pseudomorphoses—Irregular 
accidental imitative shapes,—concluding with a description of the va- 
rieties exhibited among the particles of composition, a description of 
single and multiple composition, and the kinds of fracture in com- 
pound minerals. ; 

Section 3rd. relates to the Natural Properties belonging both to 
simple and to compound minerals, and which are divided into Op- 
tical and Physical; the former referring more particularly to the 
mass of minerals, and the latter to their substance. The first con- 
sist of lustre, color and transparency; the second, of the state of 
aggregation, hardness, specific gravity, magnetism, electricity, taste 
and odor. Each of these heads is treated with the requisite degree 
of particularity, but not so as to require any notice here, excepting 
the property of Hardness. This is illustrated according to. the plan 
of Mohs, and with considerable minuteness, it being a property that 
ranks next to crystalline form in the determination of minerals. A 
scale is established for ascertaining the degrees of hardness, by se- 
lecting a certain number of suitable minerals, of which every pre- 
ceding one is scratched by that which follows it, while the former 
does not scratch the latter; and the degrees of hardness are ex- 
pressed by numbers, prefixed to the different individuals of the scale. 

Part II. which consists.of the classification, contains the theoret- 
ical part of the science. It fixes the idea of the species, and treats 
of the princples of classification. After a brief explanation of the 

Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 51 


398 Misectenies: 


two methods of ‘classification, the natural and the artificial—or the 
synthetical and the analytical, the author introduces his artificial 
method by the following remarks. 


** The first object with the student in Mineralogy being the names of minerals, it . 
becomes necessary to point out with as much clearness as possible the course he must 
adopt. The most obvious method, and indeed the one which has hitherto been most 
in practice among learners, is to derive them from a living Instructor; but this be- 
ing out of the reach of many persons, who would otherwise be glad to form some ac- 
quaintance with the mineral kingdom, and where enjoyed, being without any cer- 
tain mode of verification, is exceedingly unsatisfactory. The second thought is to 
have recourse to books containing descriptions of every species; but the number has. 
now become so great, that the labor of reading them over in succession, in order to 
assure ourselves of a single mineral, is too great to be encountered without consid- 
erable fatigue and loss of time, and consequently, danger of disgust. An analytical 
method, therefore, whose sole object is, to lead us, by an easy and sure manner, to the 
names of minerals, becomes desirable. _ Its utility in the vegetable kingdom has been 
abundantly tested; and the only question to be decided is, what shall become of the 
grounds of our snreaae 3 in the mineral kingdom, in order to apply to it the same ben- 
efit. 

“Tf we except the synthetical method of Prof. Mohs, no system is to be found in 
which the requisite assistance, above alluded to, is afforded. If, for example, we be- 
stow a few moments attention upon the arrangement of the Abbe Haity, the most cel- 
ebrated hitherto constructed, and which has been made the basis of several popular 
treatises upon the science, we shall find it incapable of accomplishing this end. It 
is true, it contains classes, orders and genera; but surely, neither their author nor 
any other person, ever supposed it possible, that the Jearner could derive advantage 
from them in the way in which a botanist does from similar ideas in the determina- 
tion of an unknown plant; viz. by first ascertaining its class, then the order, then 
the genus, and lastly, by reading over the essential differences among the unities 
within this last general idea, to arrive at the appropriate species. Now, who avails 
himself of this method as respects the classification of Hatiy? . Who analyzes a min- 
_ eral to determine its class, order and genus, with a view of arriving at its name ? 
No one certainly. It might be asked, who can do it? for how few are able! Most 
clearly. then, it subserves no utility in the determination of unknown minerals. Its 
sole merit consists, in providing for the proficient in Mineralogy, one way of arranging 
the different objects of his knowledge in his cabinet, and the ideas which relate to 
them, inhis mind. This certainly is an object of much importance, but secondary in 
point of time to the one now under consideration. Our information must first be ac- 
quired, before it can be philosophically arranged. 

“It is otherwise, however, with respect to the system first mentioned : this pro- 
vides for the determination of the species in a scientific manner, the learner being 
enabled to proceed to the names of minerals through the intermediate degrees of the 
class, order, and genus, without being obliged to read over the entire catalogue of 
species in each instance, when an unknown mineral is to be determined. But, like 
the system of Natural Orders in Botany, it experiences frequent embarrassments 
from those combinations which the principles of the synthetical method impose, and 
which render it necessary, in order to distinguish the genera within an order, and 
the species within a genus, to descend to the observation of characters, too nice and 
minute in their application, for the use of the beginner. To the advanced student, 
however, this system becomes more ayailable, since it will often be in his power to 


/Miscellanies. 399 


determine the place of a mineral by analogy, without the minute study of its char- 
acters,—an advantage which no purely artificial system can possess. Like the same 
system in Botany, it is superior to all other methods after a certain amount of knowl- 
edge is acquired, but at first, is liable to confuse and discourage.” 


His classes and orders are formed as follows: ‘“* The mineral king- 
dom is divisible into three classes; 1. Minerals possessed of regular 
forms; 2. Minerals yielding regular forms only by cleavage; 3. 
Minerals destitute of regular forms, and not affording them by cleav- 
age. The first may be termed the Crystallized class, the second the 
Semi-crystallized class, and the third the Uncrystallized class.” ‘The 
two first classes are divided into orders by their different systems of 
crystallization, or primary forms. ‘The third is divided into three 
orders, according as its contents are solid, liquid or gaseous. ‘The 
following remarks respecting these divisions are from the author. 


‘© Tt may require an explanation, why a mineralogical method should, unlike the 
systems in Zoology and Botany, make provision for any but perfect or crystallized 
minerals. Inthe vegetable kingdom it is well known, that no object is considered 
as classifiable, unless possessed of the parts of fructification; or, in other words, of 
the highest degree of perfection, in its characters, under which it is capable of ap- 
. pearing. And although the majority of plants, ordinarily-under our observation, is 
_ imperfect in these respects, no serious inconvenience arises from the fact, since they 
are all possessed of an active principle, whose operation will at length advance them 
to maturity ; in addition to which, we have no difficulty in finding other individuals 
of the same species, already in possession of the requisite perfection to enable us to 
accomplish their determination. But it is otherwise in the mineral kingdom. Semi-- 
crystallized and uncrystallized minerals constitute by far the largest part of those 
requiring determination, and they are wholly destitute of any tendency towards a 
higher degree of perfection. As we find them, so they remain, (unless, indeed, they 
become, as sometimes is the case, more imperfect still, from external agencies;) and, 
unlike the determination of imperfect plants, by the aid of those which are more 
perfect, it is seldom possible to determine them from their association with crystal- 
lized individuals of the same species. From this we see, that a method which should 
omit to provide for such minerals as are not fully perfect in their characters, would 
be extremely imperfect in general practice. 

«¢ As a consequence of this necessity of providing means for the determination of 
imperfect minerals, has arisen the frequent division of the species. Thus, portions 
of the species Fluor are-found in all of the classes, according as the individuals are 
crystallized, cleavable or massive. It is to be remarked, however, that this division 
within the species, (unknown in the other departments of Natural History,) never 
takes place in the crystallized individuals of the mineral kingdom ; among which 
only should we expect to find the rule of preserving the species unbroken observed, 
since they alone correspond to the classifiable objects in Zoology and Botany.” 


The author farther explains and vindicates his system in the fol- 
lowing remarks. 


‘The. present arrangement is not liable to any objection, on the ground that the 
natural relations among the species have been disregarded, much less that chemical 


400 — JMiseellantes. 


affinities are overlooked. It is to be tested only, as it does, or does not, afford the 
most direct means in leading to the names of unknown minerals. The properties 
upon which it is founded are of easy observation and possessed of sufficient con- 
stancy: their examination does not involve a knowledge of other sciences, or require 
an inconvenient minuteness of detail. What is more easy, for example, than to set- 
tle whether a mineral be crystallized, and if not, whether it yield a regular solid by 
cleavage? These are the only questions to be solved in the determination of the 
class. And if due attention has been paid by the pupil to the section on Crystallog- 
raphy, the orders in the two first classes may be ascertained with nearly the same 
degree of ease. The system of crystallization, in most cases, is a problem to which 
the lowest attainments in Mineralogy are adequate ; or rather, it is one, which, until 
the pupil is able to master, he is unprepared to take a single step to advantage in 
the study of the mineral kingdom. The orders in the remaining class need only te 
be mentioned, to be recognized.” , 


The arrangement of the species in each order is in a series, de- 
pending upon the property of hardness, except in the two last orders 
of the third class, where it depends upon the property of specific 
gravity. 

“‘ Where the series depends upon the property of hardness, the orders commence 
with the softest species, and terminate with the hardest: in the other case, it begins 
with the lightest and terminates with the heaviest. 

«¢ Had it promised an additional convenience, in arriving at the names of minerals, 
through the use of this system, it would have been easy to have divided the orders 
into genera, depending upon fixed degrees of hardness and specific gravity. The 
idea of a series within the genus, however, founded upon these properties, seemed 
preferable, inasmuch as it possesses every possible facility which would attend the 
division in question, besides the advantage of rendering the arrangement considera- 
bly less complicated, both as respects the nomenclature and practice.” — 


Part III. explains the object of nomenclature in general, and of 
systematic and trivial nomenclature in particular ; and it is stated for 
the following reasons that the nomenclature in an analytical system 


must be a trivial one. 


«In an analytical system, we must not look for similarity among the species of 
any one class or order ; to name the species in such a manner as to suggest the class 
and order to whieh they individually belong, instead of serving to illustrate or sim- 
plify the general survey of the mineral kingdom, would only produce confusion. 
A designation, therefore, wholly irrespective of any such relations should be em- 
ployed. All that we demand of nomenclature, so far as the analytical method is 
concerned, is the simplest designation of the object possible, from which we may 
be pointed forward to the descriptions for the remaining information of which we 
are in search; we have no interest in being carried back to the artificial ideas by 
whose means we have accomplished this preliminary step. 

“It is true, provided the names employed in the analytical method do not lead us. 
back to the orders and classes of that method, it would not be very objectionable 
what denominations were employed, whether those of the systematic nomenclature, 
or the chemical names, so far as minerals are possessed of them; yet, as the object 
of this method is only a preliminary step, those which are the shortest and most 
convenient seem preferable, and these are the trivial. names. 


MMiscellanies. 401 


¢ At the same time, care has been taken to give, in a smaller type, the systematic 
names of Mohs, and some of the important synonyms of other authors, in order to 
enable the student to refer with convenience, to the general descriptions in differ- 
ent worke upon the science.” 


Part IV. consists of the characteristic, whose province in Natural 
History it is, to furnish the peculiar marks by which we can distin- 
guish objects from each other, so far as they are comprehended in 
the ideas established by the theory of the system. ‘This is to be 
employed only with the mineral in our hand, and instructs us what 
properties are to be noticed in it, in order that we may be conducted 
toitsname. Is the mineral crystallized? such a property is the char- 
acter of the class. Is its system of crystallization the cube? such an 
observation will fix the order. ‘The determination of. its degree of 
hardness will bring it into a group of two or three species; and the 
experiment for specific gravity will identify it with the species to 
which it belongs. Or is the unknown mineral destitute of a crystal- 
line structure? such a fact establishes its class, in like manner; and 
the hardness being settled, the inquirer is led to a group consisting 
of all known minerals possessed of a similar degree of hardness, and 
which are arranged in the order of their specific gravities. The spe- 
cific gravity of the mineral whose name is sought being taken, the 
observation of one or two other easily observed properties will be 
sufficient to complete the research. 

The characteristic occupies one hundred pages of the treatise. 
The characters of the species are presented in tables; in which, for 
the purpose of diminishing the labor of determining American min- 
erals, all such as have hitherto been found in the United States are 
designated by a particular mark. These tables present us the fol- 
lowing interesting result, with respect to the productiveness of our 
country in this department of Natural History: out of three hundred 
and fourteen species—the whole number of well settled species con- 
tained in the mimeral kingdom—we have one hundred and thirty four 
species; and out of two hundred and twenty two crystallized species, 
the United States contains ninety five, which sometimes present them- 
selves under regular forms. 

These tables will be found worthy of particular attention, as afford- 
ing the most recent views of the species in Mineralogy. A great num- 
ber of minerals, which figure under distinct names im mineralogical 
works are here made to coalesce with other species; while on the 
other hand several new species of which accounts. have appeared 


402 Miscellanies. 


only in the recent scientific journals of Europe are here presented 
for the first time to the English reader. 

The natural historical names of Mohs are given as synonyms to 
the trivial ones, in the characteristic, as well as the chemical designa- 
tions and those names which were necessary for the purpose of elu- 
cidating the new views of mineralogical species, above alluded to. 

The nature of physiography—the fifth part in this treatise—is sim- 
ply explained ;—the general descriptions of which it consists being 
reserved for a future volume, in the preparation of which the pre- 
face states the author to be now engaged. : 


5. West Chester County Cabinet of Natural Science.—By the 
5th report it appears that the Institution is in a flourishing condition ; 
that its collections in several branches of Natural History parieele 
ly Botany, Mineralogy and Conchology are already very considerable 
and increasing ; its herbarium contains about 4000 specimens, 3000 -. 
of which are presents from abroad ; it has a collection of coins, and a 
telescope which formerly belonged to General Anthony Wayne, pre- 
sented by his son, Isaac Wayne, Esq. 

The collections of the Society are, from time to time, increased by 
the public spirit of our naval officers and others who travel abroad. 
A considerable number of original papers on subjects of Science 
has been contributed by members of the society. 


6. Destruction of Birds by starvation. 


Extract of a letter to the Editor from S. Woodruff, Esq. dated Windsor, oh 
June 12,-18382. 


Among other effects produced here by the late unusually cold 
weather, it may be thought worthy of notice that swallows and some 
other small birds which feed principally on flying insects have, in 
vast numbers, perished by hunger. Between the 6th and 28th days 
of May, 14 barn swallows were picked up in and about one barn in my 
neighborhood ; and I am credibly informed that at many other barns 
in the vicinity, from ten to fifteen, in each barn, were found in a like 
condition. Several hundreds have perished in the single town of Gran- 
"by. By reason of cold the insects continued in a torpid state, and 
afforded no opportunity for the birds to come in contact with them. 

About the 12th of May (eight days later than their usual period) 
the martins appeared ; but finding little or no food, soon disappeared, 
and for the twelve or fifteen days following none were seen, and up 
to the present time but few have returned. 

About the 10th of May several flocks of wild geese passed over 
on their return to the south. 


403 
APPENDIX. 


On the Production of Currents and Sparks of Electricity from 
Magnetism; by Prof. J. Henry. 


AttnoueHs the discoveries of Oersted, Arago, Faraday, and oth- 
ers, have placed the intimate connection of electricity and magnetism 
in a most striking point of view, and although the theory of Ampere 
has referred all the phenomena of both these departments of science 
to the same general laws, yet until lately one thing remained to be 
proved by experiment, in order more fully to establish their identity ; 
namely, the possibility of producing electrical effects from magnetism. 
It is well known that surprising magnetic results can readily be ob- 
tained from electricity, and at first sight it might be supposed that 
electrical effects could with equal facility be produced from magnet- 
ism; but such has not been found to be the case, for although the 
experiment has often been attempted, it has nearly as often failed. 

It early occurred to me, that if galvanic magnets, on my plan, were 
substituted for ordinary magnets, in researches of this kind, more suc- 
cess might be expected. Besides’ their great power, these magnets 
possess other properties, which render them important instruments in 
the hands of the experimenter ; their polarity can be instantaneously 
reversed, and their magnetism suddenly destroyed or called ito full 
action, according as the occasion may require. With this view, I 
commenced, last August, the construction of a much larger galvanic 
magnet than, to my knowledge, had before been attempted, and also 
made preparations for a series of experiments with it on a large scale, 
in reference to the production of electricity from magnetism. I was, 
however, at that time, accidentally interrupted in the prosecution of 
these experiments, and have not been able since to resume them, 
until within the last few weeks, and then on a much smaller scale 
than was at first intended. In the mean tine, it has been announced 
in the 117th number of the Library of Useful Knowledge, that the 
result so much sought after has at length been found by Mr. Fara- 
day of the Royal Institution. It states that he has established the 
general fact, that when a piece of metal is moved in any direction, 
in front of a magnetic pole, electrical currents are developed in the 
metal, which pass in a direction at right angles to its own motion, 
and also that the application of this principle affords a complete and 


les 


404 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


satisfaciory explanation ef the phenomena of magnetic rotation. No 
detail is given of the experiments, and it is somewhat surprising that 
results so interesting, and which certainly form a new era in the his- 
tory of electricity and magnetism, should not have been more fully 
described before this time in some of the English publications; the 
only mention I have found of them is the following short account 
from the Annals of Philosophy for April, under the head of Pro- 
ceedings of the Royal Institution. 

“ Feb. 17.—Mr. Faraday gave an account of the first two parts 
of his researches in electricity; namely, Volta-electric induction and 
magneto-electric induction. If two wires, A and B, be placed side 
by side, but not in contact, and a Voltaic current be passed through 
A, there is instantly a current produced by induction in B, in the 
opposite direction. Although the principal current in A be con- 
tinued, still the secondary current in B is not found to accompany it, 
for it ceases after the first moment, but when the principal current is 
stopped then there is a second current produced in B, in the oppo- 
site direction to that of the first produced by the inductive action, 
or in the same direction as that of the principal current. ; 

‘“‘1f a wire, connected at both extremities with a galvanometer, be 
coiled in the form of a helix around a magnet, no current of electri- 
city takes place in it. ‘This is an experiment which has been made 
by various persons hundreds of times, in the hope of evolving elec- 
tricity from magnetism, and as in other cases in which the wishes of 
the experimenter and the facts are opposed to each other, has given 
rise to very conflicting conclusions. But if the magnet be withdrawn 
from or introduced into such a helix, a current of electricity is pro- 
duced whilst the magnet 1s in motion, and is rendered evident by the 
deflection of the galvanometer. Ifa single wire be passed by a mag- 
netic pole, a current of electricity is induced through it which can be 
rendered sensible.”’* 

Before having any knowledge of the method given in the above 
account, I had succeeded. in producing electrical effects in the fol- 
lowing manner, which differs from that employed by Mr. Faraday, 
and which appears to me to develope some new and interesting facts. 
A piece of copper wire, about thirty feet long and covered with 
elastic varnish, was closely coiled around the middle of the soft iron 
armature of the galvanic magnet, described in Vol. XIX of the 
American Journal of Science, and which, when excited, will readily 


* This extract will also be found on page 386 of this Journal—Zd. 


Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 405 


sustain between six hundred and seven hundred pounds. 'The wire 
was wound upon itself so as to occupy only about one inch of the 
length of the armature which is seven inches in all. The armature, 
thus furnished with the wire, was placed in its proper position across 
the ends of the galvanic magnet, and there fastened so that no motion 
could take place. ‘The two projecting ends of the helix were dip- 
ped into two cups of mercury, and there connected with a distant 
galvanometer by means of two copper wires, each about forty feet 
long. This arrangement beimg completed, I stationed myself near 
the galvanometer and directed an assistant at a given word to immerse 
suddenly, in a vessel of dilute acid, the galvanic battery attached to 
the magnet. At the instant of immersion, the north end of the nee- 
dle was deflected 30° to the west, indicating a current of electricity 
from the helix surrounding the armature. The effect, however, ap- 
peared only as a single impulse, for the needle, after a few oscillations, 
resumed its former undisturbed position in the magnetic meridian, 
although the galvanic action of the battery, and consequently the 
magnetic power was still continued. I was, however, much surprised 
to see the needle suddenly deflected from a state of rest to about 
20° to the east, or in a contrary direction when the battery was with- 
drawn from the acid, and again deflected to the west when it was re- 
immersed. ‘This operation was repeated many times in succession, 
and uniformly with the same result, the armature, the whole time, 
remaining immoveably attached to the poles of the magnet, no motion 
being required to produce the effect, as it appeared to take place only 
in consequence of the instantaneous development of the magnetic 
action in one, and the sudden cessation of it in the other. 

This experiment illustrates most strikingly the reciprocal action of 
the two principles of electricity and magnetism, if indeed it does not 
establish their absolute identity. In the first place, magnetism is de- 
veloped in the soft iron of the galvanic magnet by the action of the 
currents of electricity from the battery, and secondly the armature, 
rendered magnetic by contact with the poles of the magnet, induces 
in its turn, currents of electricity in the helix which surrounds it; we 
have thus as it were electricity converted into magnetism and this 
magnetism again into electricity. 

Another fact was observed which is somewhat interesting in as much 
as it serves, in some respects, to generalize the phenomena. After the 
battery had been withdrawn from the acid, and the needle of the gal- 
vanometer suffered to come.to a state of rest after the resulting de- 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 52 


406 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


flection, it was again deflected in the same direction by partially de- 
taching the armature from the poles of the magnet to which it con- 
tinued to adhere from the action of the residual. magnetism, and in 
this way, a series of deflections, all in the same direction, was pro- 
duced by merely slipping off the armature, by degrees, until the con- 
tact was entirely broken. ‘The following extract from the register of 
the experiments exhibits the relative deflections observed in one ex- 
periment of this kind. 
At the instant of immersion of the battery, deflec. 40° west. 


66 66 66 66 ce 26 18 east. 
Armature partially detached, fs 7 east. 
Armature entirely detached, “6, I2edemer 


The effect was reversed in another experiment, in which the nee- 
dle was turned to the west in a series of deflections by dipping the 
battery but a small distance into the acid at first and afterwards im- 
mersing it by degrees. 

From the foregoing facts, it appears that a current of electricity is 
produced, for an instant, in a helix of copper wire surrounding a piece 
of soft iron whenever magnetism is induced in the iron; and a cur- 
rent in an opposite direction when the magnetic action ceases; also 
that an instantaneous current in one or the other direction accompa- 
nies every change in the magnetic intensity of the iron. 

Since reading the account before given of Mr. Faraday’s method 
of producing electrical currents I have attempted to combine the ef- 
fects of motion and induction; for this purpose a rod of soft iron ten 
inches long and one inch and a quarter in diameter, was attached to 
a common turning lathe, and surrounded with four helices of copper 
wire in such a manner that it could be suddenly and powerfully mag- 
netized, while in rapid motion, by transmitting galvanic currents 
through three of the helices; the fourth being connected with the 
distant galvanometer was intended to transmit the current of induced 
electricity : all the helices were stationary while the iron rod revoly- 
ed on its axis within them. From a number of trials in succession, 
first with the rod in one direction then in the opposite, and next in a 
state of rest, it was concluded that no perceptible effect was produ- 
ced on the intensity of the magneto-electric current by a rotatory 
motion of the iron combined with its sudden magnetization. 

The same apparatus however furnished the means of measuring 
separately the relative power of motion and induction in producing 
electrical currents. The iron rod was first magnetized by currents 


Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 407 


through the helices attached to the battery and while in this state 
one of its ends was quickly introduced into the helix connected with 
the galvanometer ; the deflection of ihe needle, in this case, was sev- 
en degrees. ‘Lhe end of the rod wasnext introduced into the same 
helix while in its natural state and then suddenly magnetized ; the de- 
flection, in this instance amounted to thirty degrees, shewing a great 
superiority in the method of induction. 

The next attempt was to increase the magneto-electric effect while 
the magnetic power remained the same, and in this | was more suc- 
cessful. Two iron rods six inches long and one inch in diameter, 
were each surrounded by two helices and then placed perpendicu- 
larly on the face of the armature, and between it and the poles of the 
magnet so that each rod formed as it were a prolongation of the poles, 
and to these the armature adhered when the maguet was excited. 
With this arrangement, a current from one helix produced a deflection 
of thirty seven degrees; from two helices both on the same rod fifty 
two degrees, and from three fifty nine degrees: but when four 
helices were used, the deflection was only fifty five degrees, and 
when to these were added the helix of smaller wire around the 
armature, the deflection .was no more than thirty degrees. This 
result may perhaps have been somewhat affected by the want of 
proper insulation in the several spires of the helices, it however 
establishes the fact that an increase in the electric current is 
produced by using at least two or three helices instead of one. 
The same principle was applied to another arrangement which 
seems to afford the maximum of electric development from a 
given magnetic power ; in place of the two pieces of iron and the 
armature used in the last experiments, the poles of the magnet were 
connected by a single rod of iron, bent into the form of a horse-shoe, 
and its extremities filed perfectly flat so as to come in perfect con- 
tact with the faces of the poles: around the middle of the arch of 
this horse-shoe, two strands of copper wire were tightly coiled one 
over the other. A current from oue of these helices deflected the 
needle one hundred degrees, and when both were used the needle 
was deflected with such force as to make a complete circuit. But 
the most surprising effect was produced when instead of passing the 
current through the long wires to the galvanometer, the opposite ends 
of the helices were held nearly in contact with each other, and the 
magnet suddenly excited; in this case a small but vivid spark was 
seen to pass between the ends ofthe wires and this effect was re- 
peated as often as the state of intensity of the magnet was changed. 


408 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


In these experiments the connection of the battery with the wires 
from the magnet was not formed by soldering, but by two cups of 
mercury which permitted the galvanic action on the magnet to be in- 
stantaneously suspended and the polarity to be changed and rechanged 
without rernoving the battery from the acid ; a succession of vivid sparks 
was obtained by rapidly interrupting and forming the communication 
by means of one of these cups; but the greatest effect was produced 
when the magnetism was entirely destroyed and instantaneously re- 
produced by a change of polarity. 

It appears from the May No. of the Annals of Philosophy, that I 
have been anticipated in this experiment of drawing sparks from the 
magnet by Mr. James D. Forbes of Edinburgh, who obtained a spark* 
on the 30th of March; my experiments being made during the last two 
weeks of June. A simple notification of his result is given, without any 
account of the experiment, which is reserved for a communication to © 
the Royal Society of Edinburgh; my result is therefore entirely inde- 
pendent of his and was undoubtedly obtained by a different process. 

I have made several other experiments in relation to the same sub- 
ject, but which more important duties will not permit me to verify 
in time for this paper. [may however mention one fact which I have 
not seen noticed in any work and which appears to me to belong to 
the same class of phenomena as those before described: it is this ; 
when a small battery is moderately excited by diluted acid and its poles, 
which must be terminated by cups of mercury, are connected by a 
' copper wire not more than a foot in length, no spark is perceived when 
the connection is either formed or broken: but ifa wire thirty or for- 
ty feet long be used, instead of the short wire, though no spark will 
be perceptible when the connection is made, yet when it 1s broken 
by drawing one end of the wire from its cup of mercury a vivid spark 
is produced. If the action ef the battery be very intense, a spark will 
be given by the short wire; in this case it is only necessary to wait a 
few minutes until the action partially subsides and until no more 
sparks are given from the short wire; if the long wire be now substi- 
tuted a spark will again be obtained. ‘The effect appears somewhat 
increased by coiling the wire into a helix ; it seems also to depend in 
some measure on the length and thickness of the wire ; I can account 
for these phenomena only by supposing the long wire to become 
charged with electricity which by its reaction on itself projects a 
spark when the connection is broken. 

ETN NS TSE NEN TT 1s PME IT 
* From a natural magnet. 


Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 409 


_ Notice of Electro-Magnetic Experiments.* 


[Communicated by Prof. A. D. Bacue, of the University of Pennsylvania.] 


TO THE COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATIONS. 


Gentlemen,—I send you a description of the apparatus for produ- 
cing the spark from a magnet according to the method of Nobili, 
and for other recent and curious experiments on electro-magnetism, 
together with an account of their: repetition. This is done that any 
one who may be desirous 'to repeat or to extend the experiments may, 
without delay, be put in possession of the means of so doing. 


Extract of a letter from J. Saxton,of Philadelphia, to Isaiah Lukens, dated 
London, April 14th, 1832. 

* You may have heard of Faraday’s curious discovery in electro- 
magnetism. He has succeeded in obtaining from a magnet a -spark 
resembling the electric spark. The apparatus consisted of a copper 
plate mounted onan axis, like an electrical machine, and made to re- 
volve between the poles of a large magnet. The plate used was 
about one foot in diameter, and one-eighth of an inch in thickness. 
The rim of the wheel was amalgamated, as well as a ring around the 
axis. ‘Two pieces of copper, shaped to fit, for two or three inches, 
the amalgamated ring and the circle, were attached to either wire of a 
galvanometer. These pieces of copper being applied to the wheel, 
and the latter turned, the needle of the galvanometer vibrates: the 
amount of vibration may be inereased by alternately touching and 
removing one of the plates. The copper plate which touches the 
rim should be between the poles of the magnet. 

‘¢] have made this experiment in a different way and succeeded 
satisfactorily. The method was as follows. A coil of wire wrapped 
with silk, similar to that used in the galvanometer, was attached by 
the ends to the wires of the galvanometer. On passing this roll back- 
ward and forward upon one of the poles of a horse-shoe magnet, or 
placing it upon and removing 1: from either pole, I have made the 
needle of the galvanometer spin round rapidly.” 


* Communicated in a proof for this Journal, with permission of the committee ot 
publication, of the Journal of the Franklin Institute, by Prof. A. D. Bache of Phi- 
ladelphia. 


410 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


Extract of a second letter from J. Saxton, of Philadelphia, to Isaiah Lukens, 

dated London, May 11, 1832. ; 

‘Since my last I have beard of a method of producing a spark 
from a magnet, discovered, I believe, by an Italian. This experi- 
ment [I made at once upon a large horse-shoe magnet which I am 
making for Perkins and his partners. One of your large magnets 
will answer the same purpose. Make a cylinder of soft iron of an 
inch or three fourths of an inch in diameter, and of the usual length 
of the keeper ; place two disks of brass or wood upon this cylinder, 
and at such a distance apart that they will conveniently pass be- 
tween the poles of the magnet; between these, wind, say fifty feet of 
bobbin wire, which may be of iron covered with cotton ; let the ends of 
this coil be bent over the ends of the cylinder and brought down ua- 
til they touch the poles of the magnet, the ends should be of such a 
a length that on bringing the cylinder to the magnet, one of the ends 
will touch when the cylinder is about half an inch from the magnet, 
and the other atone fourth of an inch. ‘The cylinder being thus ar- 
ranged, and in contact with the magnet, on drawing it suddenly away 
a spark will pass between the end of the wire and the pole of the 
magnet.” 


The apparatus alluded to in these letters was, soon after their re- 
ceipt, put together by Messrs. Isaiah Lukens and Benjamin Say ; it 
is figured in the cuts which follow. —__ 

Fig. 1 represents the apparatus of No- 
bili for procuring the spark from a mag- 
net. A,B, is acylinder of soft iron; up- 
on this are two brass rims, between which 
bobbin wire (wrapped wire of iron and 
copper were both successfully used,) is 
wound ; the ends of the wire coil are car- 
ried out at the opposite ends of the cyl- 
inder, and being bent downwards, pass 
through holes in two brass (or wooden) 
pins. . The spring of the wire causes both 
the ends to touch the magnet when the 
keeper is attached; when it is withdrawn 
one end projects beyond the other.* 

This apparatus has been improved by 


C 


* This condition appears by subsequent experiment to be by no means essential. 


Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 411 


Mr. Lukens, by coiling the ends of the wire into a spiral, thus forming 
a spring to press the points of the wire against the poles of the mag- 
net; and by carefully insulating the ends in their peSSHee through 
the brass stems. 

From this improved apparatus a spark can be obtained on remov- 
eng the keeper with seldom a case of failure; frequently two sparks 
appear, one at each end of the wire, and in some experiments of 
Messrs. Lukens and Say a third spark was seen to pass from one of 
the brass rings. I have very frequently obtained sparks also by ra- 
pidly replacing the keeper. 

To ascertain the nature of this spark, I endeavored to determine 
whether the removal of the keeper which produces the spark was at- 
_tended with any electrical effect which would warrant the supposition 

that this was an electric spark. 

The cylindrical keeper, arranged as at first described, was used 
for this purpose. 'The ends of the wire spoken of as touching the 
poles of the magnet were bent outwards, to remove them froin the 
poles, and connected with the wires of a galvanometer. On ap- 
proaching the keeper to, or drawing it from the magnet, an agitation 
of the needle of the galvanometer was produced, demonstrating the 
existence of a current of galvanic electricity, to which, therefore, the 
spark is probably due. 

A few turns, say four or five of iron Bonnet wire about the keeper 
of a magnet, which supported, by a contact with its whole surface, 
fifty pounds, produced a very sensible vibration in the needle; the 
contact and removal being made at times tending to increase the arc. 

In the experiments of MM. Nobili and Antinori, the account of 
which has been received since those which I have described were 
made, it seems that this development of a galvanic current which 
they observed led them first to suspect that the spark might be ob- 
tained. 

The following observations were made at the same time with those 
above described, on the direction of the galvanic current. The needle 
of the galvanometer used, was suspended by a fibre of silk; uponthe 
stand of the instrument were two brass cups in the same plane with 
the coils of the wire surrounding the needle; in the cup corres- 
ponding to the south pole of the needle, the wire passing from south 
to north above the needle, and from north to south below, was placed ; 
into the north cup was inserted the opposite wire. ‘Thus arranged a 
current of galvanism passing from south to north will deflect the north 


412 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


pole of the needle to the west; by a current passing from north to 
south, the north pole of the needle will be deflected to the east. The 
galvanometer was covered by a glass receiver to prevent agitation 
from currents of air. The magnet used was the one alluded to above 
as supporting fifty pounds, this is a horse-shoe magnet, made of ten 
magnetic bars, the keeper being filed off in front applied itself to two 
of these. 

The magnet being placed with its poles to the south, (the north pole 
being westward) the keeper was brought to the magnet in such a po- 
sition that the coil was directed above the cylinder from north to 
south; below from south to north, the wire from the upper side was 
dipped into the mercury of the south cup of the galvanometer, the 
wire from the under side into the north cup. , 

On drawing the keeper from the magnet, the north pole of the 
needle of the galvanometer passed to the west; the needle being al- 
lowed to return to the meridian, a return of the keeper to the mag- 
net deflected the north pole to the east. By assisting the needle in 
its vibrations by the alternate withdrawal and return of the keeper, a 
very considerable vibration was produced. | 

By changing the keeper from right to left so that the wire passing 
over the cylinder was directed from south to north, the communica- 
tions with the galvanometer remaining as before, the reverse of the 
deflections just described took place. 

The effects described may be represented bya galvanic current 
circulating around the keeper, and at right angles to its axis, direct- 
ed from north to south above the cylinder when the keeper was with- 
drawn, in the contrary direction when it was returned. Such a cur- 
rent would evidently have passed out of the upper wire on the with- 
drawal of the keeper, and out of the un- 
der wire on its return; that is, would 
have passed from south to north, above 
the needle of the galvanometer, in the 
first case, and from north to south in the 
second. 

Fig. 2 shows the apparatus for pro- 
ducing vibration in the needle of the 
galvanometer by the wire coil and mag- 
net. A, B,is a roll of wrapped wire 
wound about a wooden spool, which 
has the central part removed ; the ends 
of the wire are connected with the wires 


Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 413 


of a galvanometer ; this roll is represented in the lower part of the 
figure as placed upon the uorth pole of a horse-shoe magnet, by 
passing it to and fro upon the leg of the magnet, or by alternately 
removing and replacing it upon the pole, a vibration is produced in 
the needle of the galvanometer. ‘The wires are continued to such a 
length as to prevent the direct action of the magnet upon the needle 
of the galvanoineter. 

Some experiments which by the kindness of Mr. Lukens I was en- 
abled to make with this apparatus resulted in a satisfactory mode of 
representing the effect which is produced upon the galvanometer in 
any given position of the coil. I offer it simply as a mode of recollect- 
ing the results of observation. 

The coil of wire (fig. 2,) was first applied to the north pole of the 
magnet, the direction of the coil being from right to left above the mag- 
net, the inside wire of the coil was on the left hand, the outside wire on 
the right, the experimenter facing the north; the outside wire was car- 
ried to the south cup of the galvanic multiplier, the inside to the north 
cup. ‘The poles of the magnet were turned to the south. On with- 
drawing the coil from the pole, the north pole of the needle was de- 
flected to the west, returning the coil carried the same pole to the east. 
Changing the wires of the coil in the cups of the galvanometer revers- 
ed the direction of the vibration of its needle. 

The effect of withdrawing the coil would have been produced by a 
galvanic current passing through the coil from left to right below the 
magnet, from right to left above it. 

The coil was next changed from right to left, that is, the direction 
of the coil changed so that it passed from right to left below the mag- 
net, and from left to right above it, the wires which dipped into the 
cups of the multiplier remained in their places; the inner wire was 
now to the right hand, the outer wire to the left. On removing the 
coil from the north pole of the magnet, the north pole of the needle 
of the multiplier passed to the east, on returning the coil the same pole 
moved to the west. 

This effect would (as before,) have been produced by a galvanic 
current passing from left to right below the magnet, from right to left 
above it. The other positions of the coil being examined showed that 
they might be represented by the same supposition of a circular cur- 
rent about the pole of the magnet, and passing through the wire. The 
reverse of such a hypothesis is of common application to represent the 


Vou. XXII.—No. 2. 53 


414 Electro-Magnetic Experiments. 


action of the conjunctive wire of a galvanic battery upon a magnetic 
needle. 

The south pole of the magnet presented opposite results, the effects 
produced by removing the coil were such as would have occurred in 
replacing it upon the north pole. 

As the removal of the coil produces a contrary effect from that ob- 
tained when it is placed upon the pole, the representation is complete 
from the opposite magnetic currents produced in these cases. When 
the coil is drawn along the magnet towards the north pole, it is easy 
to conceive that passing successively to more magnetic parts, or ex- 
posed to magnetism of different intensities, the current of magnetism 
with regard to the wire is from south to north; this, by the reversion 
of the hypothesis in relation to the galvanic current, produces (since 
the north pole is towards the operator,) an electrical current from west 
to east, or from left to right, below the magnet. ‘The same is true for 
the south pole. 

We conclude that the effects of a magnet upon a coil of wire may 
be represented by an electrical current at right angles to the direction 
in which the wire moves upon the magnet, and directed below the mag- 
net from west to east when the coil is moved from the south pole to the 
north pole of the magnet, and vice:versa, the poles of the magnet 
being turned to the south. 

The denominations will change of course if it be considered more 
convenient to turn both poles to the north. 

It would seem easy to bring the facts relating to the removal of 
the keeper upon which wire is coiled, under the same expression. 
In that case the magnetism is in motion with respect to the coil, leay- 
ing the soft iron which forms the keeper. 

With fifteen turns of copper wire upon the prismatic keeper of the 
magnet before used, a vibration through twenty degrees, at the maxi- 
mum, was produced: beyond this the power of the current could 
not carry the needle. ‘The wire was wrapped with silk. 

With five turns upon the same keeper a vibration through an are of 
ten to twelve degrees was obtained. 

The coil being at rest upon the magnet no permanent deflection is 
produced. ‘This agrees with an observation of Nobili and Antinori. 

The amount of vibration may be easily increased by providing two 
coils, one for each pole, the direction of the coils being opposite to 
each other, the outer wires of each coil being united as well as the 
inner ones, the effect of two coils would be produced. ‘They may 


Report of the Regents of the Univ. of the State of N. York. 415 


be separated by a piece of wood, to which being attached, and the 
wood provided with a handle, the coils may be removed or replaced 
very coveniently. 

Fig. 3. represents Faraday’s 
wheel; G,H,I, being a piece of 
copper twelve inches in diameter, 
the circular ring between G, H, 
I, and a, a, a, is amalgamated, al- 
so the ring K, L, near the centre 
of the plate on the same side with 
the first ring; the wheel is mount- 
ed upon an axis C, D, and turned 
by a winch. KL, and G, are 
plates of copper, to apply the one 
at the amalgamated ring around 
the axis, the other at the ring at 
the circumference and between 
the poles, N and S, of a horse- 
shoe magnet. G, P, and C, R, are the wires soldered to these 
plates, their extremities connected with the galvanometer as described 
above, their length adjusted upon the same principles. 

In experimenting with F'araday’s wheel, the disk K, L, at the cen- 
tre was pressed constantly against the wheel by fastening a cork be- 
tween the disk and the support. The piece of copper G was touch- 
ed to the wheel at intervals so as to assist the vibrations or to destroy 
them at pleasure. When the wheel was first amalgamated, a deflec- 
tion in the needle was produced without the aid of the magnet; af- 
terwards no such deflection was observed. Opposite rotations of the 
wheel produce opposite effects in deflecting the needle of the galva- 
nometer, other parts remaining the same. 


Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New York, 
to the Legislature, March 1, 1832. 


The State of N. York, with more than 2,000,000 of people, is 
happily, very attentive to the great interests of education. It has 
four Colleges; Columbia College iu the city of N. York, from which 
there are no returns since 1829; Hamilton College at Clinton, with 


416 Report of the Regents of the Univ. of the State of N. York. 


93 students, and a fund nearly completed (by donation) of 440,000 
as a foundation for professorships; Geneva College with 45. stu- 
dents and a clear fund of about $70,000; Union College at Schenee- 
tady with 223 students; the last class gave 76 graduates; and the 
new university in the city of N. York, with a fund of $100,000. 

The college of physicians and surgeons in the former place, had 
182 students, during the last year, and the college of physicians and 
surgeons of the Western District at Fairfield, had at the last session 
20% students. ‘There are now in the State 59 academies under the 
Regents, with 4188 pupils, and receiving from the literature fund 
$10,000, shared among 2,399 students; whereas in 1819 there were 
but 30 academies that reported themselves; they contained 2,218 stu- 
dents and received but $2,500 of the literature fund distributed 
among 638 students. ‘The mathematical and physical sciences are 
more fully cultivated in the academies than literature and the moral 
sciences; this is -attributed to the actual condition and wants of the 
country, but the state government is impartial on this subject, for the 
public money is distributed equally to pupils in all the branches of 
learning whether classical, moral or physical. It is a most interest- 
ing fact that there are at school 500,000 children, one fourth of the 
population of the state, including all between 5 and 16 years of age, 
except only 7,428. ' 

This state has, wisely, made it an indispensable condition of afford- 
ing its aid to common schools, that those interested shall aid them- 
selves. In Connecticut, where the interest of a million and a quar- 
ter of dollars is distributed among the children of a population of 
about 300,000 persons, no such condition is annexed to the recep- 
tion of the public money, which is consequently much less beneficial 
than it ought to be. 

The academies of Potsdam in St. Lawrence County, and of Can- 
andaigua prepare instructors for the common schools; the former 
furnished, last year, 80 teachers, and itis thought that the academies 
of the state might furnish 1000 teachers annually. The academies 
have “convenient edifices, in some cases large permanent funds, 
valuable libraries and philosophical apparatus, worth, in the whole 
$500,000.” The buildings are worth from $1000 to $90,000 for 
each establishment. ‘The meteorological results obtained at these 
academies scattered over a territory which touches at once the At- 
lantic, the great lakes, and the St. Lawrence, are valuable, and must, 
in time, present the most important results, of which we may hereaf- 
ter give some specimens. 


INDEX TO VOLUME XXif. 


—eoo— 


A. 


Academy of St. Petersburgh, 203. 

Acetic fermentation, 195. 

Achromatic telescopes, 358. 

Acid, chloro-chromic, 190. 

Alden, Rev. T., on descents ina diving 
bell, 325. 

Alger and Jackson, Messrs., on mineralo- 
gy and geology of Nova Scotia, 167. 

Alum clay, 37. 

Alumine, sulphate of, or soda alum of Milo, 
387. 

Analogy between the marl of New Jer- 
sey and the chalk formations of Europe, 
Dr. Morton on do., 90. 

Argillaceous slate, 33. 

Astronomical memoranda, 204. 


Chemical nomenclature of Berzelius, Prof. 


Bache on, 248. 
Chlioric ether, Samuel Guthrie on, 105. 
A. A. Hayes on, 163. 
Chteride of lime, bleaching powers of, 
304. 
Chlorine, hydrogen, carbon, conipound of, 
141. sf 
Chloro-chromic acid, 190. 
Cholera morbus, perspiration in, 366. 
Civilization, connection with mental ab- 
erration, 379. 
Coal, 41. 
Coloring materials for confectioners and 
distillers, 381. 
poisonous, 382. 
Combustion of hydrogen gas under press- 
ure, 352. 
Compost, 366. 


Audibility of sound, limits of, 374. 
Aurora borealis and disturbance of Earth’s 
Magnetism, by J. Henry, 143. 


B. 


Bache, Prof., on electro-magnetic exper- 
iments, 409. 

Bartlett, Mr., on the expansion and con- 
traction of building stones, 136. 

Bees, E. Burgess on, 164. 

Beets, red, 201. 

Berzelius, chemical nomenclature of, 248. 

Birds, destruction of, by starvation, 402. 

Bleaching power of chloride of lime, 354. 

Blowpipe, improved, 376. 

Blue coloring matter from buck-wheat, 
384. 

Bones, gelatine of, 369. 

Boron, Dr. Hare’s proceess for, 189. 

Boulders of Ohio, 300. 

Brewster, Dr., on polarization of light by 
reflexion, 277. 

Buck-wheat, blue coloring matter from, 
384. 

Buhrstone in Massachusetts, 40. 

Building stones, expansion and contrac- 
tion of, Mr. Bartlett on, 136. 


C. 


Cabinet of minerals for sale, 180. 

Campagna di Roma, malaria of, 336. 

Carbon, chlorine and hydrogen, compound 
of, 141. : 

Carpenter, G. W., on new medical prepa- 
rations, 293. 

Central Forces, Prof. Strong on, 132, 342. 


Conchology.—Mr. Lea on the Najiades, 
169. 

Conn. river, sources and course of, A. 
Smith on, 205. 

valley of, 205, 206. 


————— earthy format’s of, 209. 
—-——— alluvial sc 214. 
———. secondary dite lef 

— greenstone ‘* 224. 


section of, 227. 


Copper, 60. 
protoxide of, 353. 
Cygnus Americanus, Dr. Sharpless on, 83. 


PD: 


Datholite, locality of, 389. 

DeWitt, S., on conical rain gage, 325. 

Diluvial scratches on rocks, 166. 

Disinfecting powers of increased tempe- 
ratures, Dr. Henry on, 111 

Diving hell, descents in, Rev. T. Alden 
on, 325. 


observations by 


Dr. Mease, 327. 
Doolittle, Amos, obituary notice of, 184. 
Dye, metallic, 197. 
Dyke of greenstone in Vermont, 189. 


E. 


Earth’s magnetism, disturbance of, and 
aurora borealis, by J. Henry, 143. 

East India ferns, 191. 

Eaton’s, Prof., geological text book, new 
edition, 391. 

on trilobites, 165. 


418 


Economical geology of Massachusetts, 
by Prof. Hitchcock, 1. 

Editor on injury of Dr. Hare by fulmina- 
ting silver, 185. 

Elasticity, 190. 

Electricity, currents and sparks of, from 
magnetism, by Prof. Henry 403. 

transference of ponderable 
bodies by, 355. 

Electro-magnetic experiments, by Prof. 
Bache, 409. 

Emanations, odoriferous, 368. 

Encyclopedia Americana, Vol. IX, 189. 

Ether, chloric, S. Guthrie on, 105. 

—_— A. A. Hayes on, 163. 

Sulphuric, manufacture of, 199. 

Evergreens as screens, H. G. Spafford on, 
158. 

Expansion and contraction of building 
stones, Mr. Bartlett on, 136. 


F. 


Feeding of cattle, 202. 

Fermentation, acetic, 195. 

Ferns, East India, 191. 

Fertilization of sulphate of lime, 350. 

Feuchtwanger, Dr., cabinet of minerals 
for sale, 180. 


on plant Guaco, 182. 

Field, M., meteorological observations, 
Fayetteville, Vt., 1881—2, 298. 

Flies, preservative against, 381. 

shower of, 375. 

Forces, central, Prof. Strong on, 132, 342. 

French premiums, 359. : 

Fulminating silver, injury of Dr. Hare by, 
185. 


G. 


Gelatine, nutritious, 197. 

of bones, 369. 

Geologicai text book by Prof. Eaton, 391. 

Geology of Massachusetts, report on, by 

Prof. Hitchcock, 1. 

alluvium, 5; diluvium, 6; tertia- 
ry formations, 7,36; new red sand- 
stone, 8, 35; graywacke, argilla- 
ceous slate, 33; argillaceous and 
flinty slate and graywacke, 9; iron 
ore, 10; varieties of iron, 50; ste- 
atite or soapstone, 31; serpentine, 


29; steatite, serpentine, scapolite 
rock, limestone, 10; limestone, 24; 
marble of Berkshire, 28; quartz 
rock, 11, 22; granular quartz and 
sand for glass, 40; talcose and mi- 
ca slate, 23; chlorite, talcose and 
mica slate, 11; hornblende slate, 
20; gneiss, 18; hornblende slate 
and gneiss, 12; greenstone, 12, 20; 
porphyry, varieties of, 13, 20, 21; 
compact feldspar, 13; sienite and 


INDEX. 


granite, varieties of, 13 to 17; 
porcelain and potter’s clay, 36; 
alum clay, 37; marl and peat, 383; 
buhrstone, 40; Worcester coal, 41; 
plumbago, 46; mineral waters, 47, 
48; non-metallic minerals, 48; 
lead mines, 56; copper, 60; zine 
and manganese, 61; tin, 62; sil- 
ver and gold, 63. q 
Geology of Nova Scotia by Messrs. 
son and Alger, 167. 
Gneiss, 12, 18. 
Goitre, cause of, 355. 
Gold, 63. 
— idle search for, 66. 
——- purple precipitate of, 198. 
Gould, D. rational expressions for sines, 
tan. and secants, 392. ; 
Granite, varieties of, 13 to 17. 
Grapbite, 46. 
Gray wacke, 33. 
Grease of wines, 192. 
Greenstone, 12, 20. 
dyke of, 189. 
Guaco plant, Dr. Feutchwanger on, [82. 
Gum, composition of, 350. 
Gun powder, inflammation of, under wa- 
ter, 354. : 
Guthrie, S., on chloric ether, 105. 


H. 


Hamilton on magnetism, 182. 
Hare, Dr., injury of, by fulminating sil- 
ver, 185. 


Jack- 


process for silicon and boron, 
189. 

Hassler’s logarithmic tables, correction of, 
181. 

Hats, leghorn, materials for, 363. 

mode of dyeing, 383. 

Hayes, A. A., new acid eompound of 
chlorine, carbon and hydrogen, 141. 

on chloric ether, 163. 

Heat from water of bored wells, 373. 

influence of, on magnetism, 361. 

Heating of water, 384. 

Henry, Dr. W., on disinfecting powers 
of increased temperatures, 111. 

Prof. J., on currents and sparks of 

electricity from magnetism, 408. 

disturbance of the earth’s 
magnetism and aurora borealis, 143. 

Hessian fly, Dr. Muse on, 71. 

Hildreth’s, Dr., meteorological observa- 
tions at Marietta, 109. 

Historical and philosophical society of 
Ohio, 181. 

Hitchcock, Prof. E., report on the geolo- 
ogy of Massachusetts, 1. 

Human race, stature of, 357. 

stature, law of increase in, 376. 

Hydraulic voleano, 358. 

pee es combustion of, under pressure, 
352. 


INDEX. 


Hydruret of sulphur, 351. | 


1. 


Icebergs in South Seas, 200. 

Ilieine, use of, in intermittent fevers, 
Tolite, locality of, 391 

Iron ores in Massachusetts, 50. 
Iron, protection of, from rust, 382. 
statistics of, 179. 


J. 


349. 


Jackson, Mr., on the mineralogy and 
geology of Nova Scotia, 167. 

Jenkins, J. J., meteorological observations 
at Monmouth, N. J., 394. 

Johuson, Prof. W. R., on the steam pyro- 
meter, 96. 

Jones, Dr., protection of steam boats fiom 

. lightning, 106. 


L. 


Lamp—a new one, 387. 

Lapham, Messrs., on the boulders of Ohio, 
300. 

Lea, Mr., on Naiades, 169. 

Lead, chemical composition of the brown 
ore of, by C. U. Shepard 307. 

Lead mines in Massachusetts, 56. 

Leghorn hats, materials for, 363. 

Lichen Islandicus, a size for cotton and 
linen weaving, 366. 

Light, polarization of, Dr. Brewster on, 
277. 


chemical agency of, 352. 
Limestone, 24. 
Lime, sulphate of, fertilizing properties 
of, 350. 
Logarithmic tables, Hassler’s, correction 
of, 181. 
M. 


Magnetism, conversion of into electricity, 
386. 

earth’s, disturbance of, and| 

aurora borealis, 143. 

influence of heat on, 361. 

J. Hamilton on, 183. 

Malaria of Campagna di Roma, 336. 

Manganese, 61. 

Marble, 28. 

Marl of New Jersey, Dr. Morton on, 90. 

Massachusetts, report on the geology of, 


by Prof. Hitchcock, 1. 

Mathematical papers by E. Wright, Esq. 
7A, 

Meade, Dr., on artificial preparations o 
cold medicinal waters, 126, 330. 

Mease, Dr., on descents in diving bells, 
327. 

Mechanics, experiment in, 362. 


419 


Medicinal waters, artificial preparation 
of, by Dr. Meade, 126, 330. 

Memoir of Dr. Thomas Young, 232. 

Mental aberration connected with civili- 
zation, 379. 

Meteorological journal, 1831, New Bed- 
ford, Mass. 188. 

observations, Fayetteville, 

Vt., 1831—2, 298. 

——————- Marietta, 


Ohio, 109. 
N= J.; 394. 
Miller, Mr. E., on tracing oval arches 
from several ceritres, 303. 
Mineralogy of Nova Scotia, 167. 
treatise on, by C, U. Shepard, 


Monmouth, 


395. 
Moon, singular appearance of, 375. 
Morton, Dr., on marl of New Jersey, 90. 
Muse, Dr. J. E., om Hessian fly, 71. 
————— vindication of previous 


paper, 155. 
N. 


Naiades, Mr. Lea on, 169. 
Necrology.—Frederick Philip Wilmseg, 
380. 


Edward Thomas, 380. 

New Bedford, meteorological journal at, 
1831, 188. 

New York state University, report of the 
regents of, 415. 

Nomenclature, chemical, of Berzelius, 
248. 

Non-vaporization of liquids falling on in- 
candescent substances, 365. 

Nova Scotia, mineralogy and geology of, 
by Messrs. Jackson and Alger, 167. 

Nutriment of gelatine, 197. 

Nuttall, Thomas, ornithology of the Uni- 
ted States and Canada, 178. 


O. 


Obesity, 194. 

Odoriferous emanations, 368. 

Officers of the Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia, 183. 

Ohio, boulders of, 300. 

—-Historical and Philosophical Society 
of, 181. 

Ornithology of the United States and Can- 
ada, by Thos. Nuttall, 178. 

Oval arches, tracing of, by E. Miller, 303. 


E: 


Peat, 38. 

Pelokonite, a new mineral, 387. 
Perspiration in cholera morbus, 366. 
Plant furnishing good water, 382. 


420 


Plants, new species of, in Siberia, 383. 

preservation of, in winter, 359. 

respiration of, 362. 

sleep of, 375. 

Platina, imitation of, 383. 

Polarizatien of light, 277. 

Premiums fer chemical and medical dis- 
coveries, 194. 

Premiums, French, 359. 

Preparations, medical, by G. W. Carpen- 
ter, 293. 

Protoxide of copper, 353. 

Pyrometer, steam, W. R. Johnson on, 96. 


RK. 


Rail roads, elevation of the rails of, Prof. 
Thomson on, 346. 

Rain-gage, conical, by S. DeWitt, 321. 

Red beets, 201 

Report on the geology of Massachusetts, 
by Prof. Hitchcock, ite 

Report of the regents of the University of 
the state of New York, 415. 

Resources, natural, of the western coun- 
try, 122. 

Respiration of plants, 362. 

peek onanew metallic dye, 197. 


2h 


Sandstone, new red, 8, 35. 

Serpentine, 29. 

Sharpless, Dr. J.T., on the American wild 
swan, 83. 

Shepard, C. U., on brown lead ores, 307. 

soda alum of Milo, 387 

datholite and iolite, 387. 

Treatise on Mineralogy, 


396. 

Silicon, Dr. Hare’s 

Silver, 63. 

purple precipitate of, 198. 

Sines, tangents and secants, rational ex- 
pressions for, 391. 

Size for cotton and linen, of Lichen Island- 
icus, 366. 

Smith, Alfred, on the Connecticut River 
valley, 205. 

Soda alum of Milo, 387. 

Solar eclipse of Feb. 12, 1831, 189. 

Sound, limits of the audibility of, 374. 

South seas, icebergs in, 200. 


s process for, 189. 


Spafford, H. G., on evergreens, 158. 
spontaneous combustion, 


161. 
Species, new, of plants, in Siberia, 383. 
Spontaneous combustion, 161. 
Statistics of iron in the United States, 179. 
Stature of the human race, 357, 376. 
Steam pyrometer, W. R. Johnson cn, 96. 
boats, protection of, from lightning, 


106. 


INDEX. | 


Steatite, 31. 

Steel, protection of, from rust, 382. 

St. Petersburgh Academy, 203. 

Strong, Prof., on central forces, 132, 342. 

Sulphur, hydruret of, 351. 

Swan, American wild, Dr. Sharpless on, 
83. 


Es 


Telescopes, achromatic, 358. 

Temperatures, increased, 
powers of, 111. 

Tertiary formation of Massachusetts, 36. 

Thermoscope, new, 370. 

Thomas, Edward, necrology of, 380. 

Thomson, Prof., on the elevation of rails 
on roads of a given curvature, 346. 


disinfecting 


-lTin, 62. 


Transplanting of trees, 383. 
Trees, longevity of, 379. 
transplanting of, 383. 
Trilobites, Prof. Eaton on, 165. 


UW, 
Ultramarine, French, 368. 


University of the state of New York, re- 
port of the regents of, 415. 


ve 


Valley of the Connecticut, A. Smith on, 
205. 


Wie 


Water, good, from a new plant, 382. 

medicinal, Dr. Meade on the pre- 
paration of, 126. 

Weeds in garden alleys, destruction of, 
381. 

Wells, bored, use of the heat from the 
water of, 373. 

Westchester County cabinet of natural 
science, 402. 

Western country, natural resources of, 
122. 

Whiriwind storms, Capt. Riley on, 189. 

Wilmsen, Frederic Philip, necrology of, 
380. 

Wines, grease of, 192. 

Wright, E., mathematical papers by, 74. 


pis 
Young, Dr. Thomas, memoir of, 232. 


Z. 


Zinc, 61. 


' 


| AMERICAN JOURNAL 


re fae 


OF 


«SCIENCE AND ARTS. 


CONDUCTED BY 


BENJAMIN SILLIMAN, M.D. LL.D... 


Prof. Chem., Min., &c. in Yale Coll.; Cor. Mem. Soc. Arts, Man. and Com.; and 
i} For. Mem. Geol. Soc,, London; Mem. Roy. Min. Soc., Dresden; Nat. Hist. 
Soc., Halle; Imp. Agric. Sde., Moscow; Hon. Mem. Lin. Soc., Paris; 
‘Nat. Hist. Soc. Belfast, Ire.; Phil. and Lit. Soc. Bristol, Eng. ; 
Mem. of various Lit. and Scien. Soc. in America. 


‘VOL. XXIL—No. 1.—APRIL, 1832. 
FOR JANUARY, FEBRUARY, AND MARCH, 1832. 


“ 


‘ r te rd 3 


2. 


NEW HAVEN: 


Published ahd Sold by HEZEKIAH HOWE and A. H. MALTBY. 
Baltimore, E. J. COALE & J. S. LITTELL.—Philadelphia, E. LITTELL and 
CAREY & HART.—New York, G. & C. & H. CARVILL.—Boston, HIL- ~ 
LIARD, GRAY, LITTELL & WILKINS. 


te 


PRINTED BY HEZEKIAH HOWE. 


on 


amex 


» 


AMERICAN JOURNAL 


OF 


* 


SCIENCE AND ARTS. 


CONDUCTED BY 


BENJAMIN SILLIMAN, M. D. LL. D. 


| Psof. Chem,, Min., &c. in Yale Coll.; Cor. Mem. Soc. Arts, Man. and Com.; and 
_ - For. Mem. Geol. Soc., London; Mem. Roy. Min. Soc., Dresden; Nat. Hist. 
Soc., Halle; Imp. Agric. Soc., Moscow; Hon. Mem. Lin. Soc., Paris; 
Nat. Hist. Soc. Belfast, Ire.; Phil. and Lit. Soc. Bristol, Eng.; 
» Mem. of various Lit. and Scien. Soc. in America. 


VOL. XXIIL—No. N—JULY, 1832. — 


FOR APRIL, MAY, AND JUNE, 1832. 


“NEW HAVEN: 


Published and Suld by HEZEKIAH HOWE & Co. and A. H. MALTBY. 
Baltimore, E. J. COALE & J. S. LITTELL.—Philadelphia, E. LITTELL and 
CAREY & HART.—WNew York, G: & C. & H. CARVILL.—Boston, HIL- 
LIARD, GRAY, LITTLE & WILKINS. 


PRINTED BY HEZEKIAH HOWE & CO. 


“aie: SL anaes > 


a eee See eon eee Se ae ees Oe eee SL ) Se ES a ee .s ree ah Lo.“ oy rs ay 


See 


"THE AMERICAN JOURNAL, &c.—AGENTS. 


MAINE. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
HAuLoweiy, Glazier, Masters & Co. ||WasHineron, Thompson & Homans. 
|| PoRTLAND, Samuel Colman. ; NORTH CAROLINA. _ 
VERMONT.  |\Cuapen-Hixx, Prof. E. Mie ; 


BratTrLeBoro’, G. H. Peck. 


CastLeton,  B. Burt 2d. C  UbeD. Base ae 
MASSACHUSETTS. gee eee Eh a Thee 
Newsuryrort, Charles Whipple. CHARLESTON, ig* aie k hayes 
Rte Winpnle & apy ae ee CAMDEN, Alexander Young. ¥ 
AMHERST, J.S. & C. Adams. — ‘ VIRGINIA. ©. 
“ RHODE ISLAND. FREDERICKSBURGH, W. F. Gray. 6° 
Proyvipence, Hutchins & Shepard. Se tes ool Ae y, 
CONNECTICUT. HEELING, . es isher on 
HARTFORD, H.& FLY. Huntington. KENTUCKY. 
Norwicu, | Thomas Robinson. Mount STERLING, Silas W. Robbins. 
_ Mippterown, Luke C. Lyman. _ . OHIO. 
NEW YORK. Cincinnati, ©, D. Bradford & Co, 
New Yor«, A. T. Goodrich. Caucus J. N. Whitin 
Ee > deN. g. 
West Point, John table GEORGIA. _ 
Newsureu, H. P. Benham. ce ari 
ALBANY, Little & Cummings. SAVANNAH, Wm. T. Williams. 
Troy, Wm. S. Parker. TEN ay coe 
Cawanpateua, Bemis & Ward. : yres, 
Urica, "William Williams. HN ASE ies 53 Eichbaum & N orvell. 
Rocurster, HE. Peck & Co.- ALABAMA. 
Burrauo, He Sa ae eee 
a ANA. 
PATTERSON, — David Burnett. New Orurans, Mary Carroll. 
PRINCETON, W. D’Hart. ‘CANADA. — 
TRENTON, D. ‘Fenton. QUEBEC, Neilson & Cowan. 
New Brunswicx, Terhune & Letson. GREAT BRITAIN. 
PENNSYLVANIA. Lonpon O. Rich. 
PiTTsBURGH, Luke Loomis. i FRANCE. 
MARYLAND. ee fy . C. Barnet, 
BALTIMORE, ° E. J. Coale. z M. Le Vasseur, : 
—={ie—-—_ 
TERMS. 


numbers, making two volumes a year. 


discount. 
The price of the Fonts on account of a more limited pat ronage and the expense 
of numerous plates, is twenty five cents in a number yoore than that of che quate 


terly Literary aye x 
=O 


_TO CORRESPON DENTS. 


drawings, two months, before the publication day. 
+ re Authors are requested to give their own titles and those of their pieces, evactly. 
>. 4+o— 
The coloring of the Geological Map, to illustrate Prof. Hitchcock’s survey of Mae: 


. of the Map that were needed for the Journal, were prepared in season but several 


of Massachusetts, the Journal hégs been detained until they could be replaced. 


Six dollars per annum; three dollars in advance; published in four quarterly 


_ Terms of credit to general agents, six months from the publication of No. sy 1 ah 
each volume. ceCompliie sets furnished to individuals, and to the trade, ata suitable. 


Communications to pelihand six weeks, or when long, and esneriall when with 


sachusetts, has caused the delay in the appearance of the present No. All the copies — 


hundreds of them having been required for an immediate supply of the Legislature _ 


Tee 


pment is 


: beer miict 


3 9088 01298 4225